The Woman and the Children of the Sycamore Tree

THERE WAS ONCE an old woman who had no husband, and she lived for many days in trouble. One day she said to herself, “Why do I always feel so troubled? It is because I have neither children nor husband. I shall go to the medicine-man and get some children.

She went to the medicine-man and told him she was unhappy owing to the fact that although she had now grown old, she had neither husband nor children. The medicine-man asked her which she wanted, husband or children, and she told him she wanted children.

She was instructed to take some cooking pots – three, or as many as she could carry – and to search for a fruit-bearing sycamore tree, to fill the pots with the fruit, to put them in her hut, and to go for a walk.

The old woman followed these instructions carefully. She gathered the fruit, filled the pots, placed them in her hut, and went for a walk until the evening.

On arriving near the kraal, she heard the sound of voices and asked herself, “Why does one hear the voices of children in the kraal?” She went nearer, and found her hut filled with children, all her work finished, the boys herding the cattle, the hut swept, by the girls, the warriors singing and dancing on the common, and the little children waiting to greet her. She thus became a rich old woman, and lived happily with her children for many days.

One day, however, she scolded the children, and reproached them for being children of the tree. They remained silent and did not speak to her; then, while she went to visit her friends in the other kraals, the children returned to the sycamore tree, and became fruit again. On her return to her own kraal, the old woman wept bitterly when she found it empty, and paid another visit to the medicine-man, whom she taxed with having spirited away her children.

The medicine-man told her that he did not know what she should do now, and when she proposed to go and look at the sycamore tree, he recommended her to try.

She took her cooking pots to the sycamore tree and climbed up into it. But when she reached the fruit they all put forth eyes and stared at her. This so startled her that she was unable to descend, and her friends had to come and help her down.

She did not go to the sycamore tree again to search for the children.

[ MASAI ]

NASERE the LOST SISTER

ONCE UPON A TIME there were a brother and sister who lived together. The mother had died leaving many goats, and the brother looked after the goats in the daytime, but in the evening he went away from home, for he was very handsome, and had many friends. The name of the girl was Nasere, the name of the brother Tunka Menin.

Now one day when the brother returned Nasere said to him, “Two men were here yesterday, and if you go away and leave me they will carry me off.” But he replied, “You talk nonsense.” She insisted, “I am speaking the truth. Now when they take me I will bear with me a gourd full of sap which is like fat, and I will let it drop along the path so that you can follow my trail.” That night when Tunka Menin brought the goats home, Nasere made a great feast and gruel, but again he went away. When Tunka Menin came back the next morning he found the homestead empty, for his sister had been carried away as she had said. However, he saw the track where drop by drop she had let fall the sap which was like fat. And Tunk Menin followed over hill and down dale, and ever and again he heard her voice crying from. the opposite hillside, “Follow after where you see the trail.”

The following day the sap began to take root and to spring up into little plants, but he did not see his sister. At last, he returned to his home to herd the flock. He took them out to feed, but he had no one to prepare food for him when he returned home at night, and if he himself prepared the food there was no one to care for the flocks. So he slew a goat and ate it and, when it was finished, he slew yet another, and so on till all the goats were finished. Then he killed and ate the oxen one by one. They lasted him months and years for the flock was large but, at last they were all gone, and then he bethought him of his sister.

Now the plants which marked the way she had gone were, by this time, grown to trees, and so he journeyed on for one month and half a month and at the end of that time he came to a stream and by the stream were two children getting water. Then he said to the younger, “Give me some water in your gourd,” but the child refused. The elder child spoke to the younger and said, “Give the stranger to drink, for our mother said if ever you see a stranger coming by way of the trees he is my brother!” So he and the children went up to the homestead, and he waited outside, and Nasere came out, and he knew her at once. However, she did not know him, for he was not dressed as before with ochre and fat. He came into her hut and she gave him food, not in a good vessel, but in a potsherd. Then he slept in the hut, but on the floor, not in the bed.

Now the next day he went out with the children to drive away the birds from the crops and as he threw a stone he would say, “Fly away, little bird, as Nasere flew away and never came back any more.” Soon another bird would come and he would throw another stone and say the same words again. This happened the next day and the next for a whole month.

The children heard this, and so did others, and they said, “Why does he utter the name Nasere?” So they went and told their mother. At last she came and waited among the grass and listened to his words, and said, “Surely this is my brother Tunka Menin, and she went back to the house and sent for a young man and told him to go and fetch Tunka Menin to come to her, for she said, “He is my brother.” And the young man went and told Tunka Menin the words of his sister, and she has given me no cup for my food but a potsherd,” and he would not go in. Then the young man returned to Nasere and told her the words of her brother, and she said, “Take ten goats and go again and bid him to come to me.” So the young man took ten goats and said, “Your sister has sent these ten goats.” But again Tunka Menin refused, and the young man returned. So Nasere said, “Take ten oxen and give them to my brother.” However, Tunka Menin owuld not come. Nasere then sent him ten cows, and another ten cows, but still Tunka Menin refused to come in. Nasere thereupon told her husband how she had found her brother and how he would not be reconciled to her, and her husband said, “Send him still more animals,” so Nasere sent ten other cows and again ten more, till Tunka Menin had received forty cows besides the goats and the oxen which Nasere had sent at the first. And the heart of Tunka Menin relented, and he came into the house of his sister. And she killed a goat, and took the fat and dressed his hair and his shoulders, for she said, “I did not know you, for you were not adorned as before.

After Tunka Menin had been reconciled to his sister, he asked that eight wives should be given him. So the husband of Nasere sent to all his relations round about, and they brought in goats, and Tunka Menin bought eight girls, some for thirty goats, some for forty. Other relations all came and built eight huts for the wives near to the dwelling of Nasere, so Tunka Menin and his wives dwelt near the homestead of his sister.

[ AKIKUYU ]

TEZAMET and HIS FATHER

A BIG DANCE was once held at which many warriors and girls were present. Toward evening the dancers dispersed, and each warrior selected one or more of the girls to accompany him home.

One of these men, a particularly handsome and well-built fellow, went away with three sisters. On leaving, he asked the girls where they would like to go, and they told him they wished to accompany him to his kraal. He said that it was a long way off, but they replied that that did not matter.

They started off, and after walking some distance, they approached the kraal. The girls noticed some white things scattered about on the ground and asked the warrior what they were. He said that they were his sheep and goats; but when they reached destination, the girls saw that they were human bones. They entered the warrior’s hut and the girls were surprised to find that he lived quite alone.

It transpired later that this warrior was in reality a devil who ate people, but it was not known because he concealed his tail under his garment. He had even eaten his mother and had thrown her bones into a heap of grass which formed the bed.

Shortly after their arrival at the hut, the warrior went outside, leaving the girls alone. A voice, which came from the bed, startled them by asking them who had brought them there. They replied that the warrior had brought them, whereupon the voice told them to open the mattress. The girls threw off the top layer of grass, exposing the bones to view. The voice, which came from the bones, then related that she had been the warrior’s mother and that he had become a demon and had eaten her. The girls asked the bones what they should do, and the voice answered, “The warrior will come presently and bring you a sheep. Accept it. He will then go outside again and, having shut the door, sit down there. Make a hole in the wall and pass out. If you are asked what the knocking is, say that you are killing the sheep.”

Everything took place as the voice had predicted, and the girls made a hole in the wall of the hut through which they predicted, and the girls made a hole in the wall of the hut through which they passed and escaped. When they reached the road, however, one of them suddenly remembered that she had left her beads behind. Her sisters told her to go and fetch them while they waited for her. She returned to the hut but met the warrior, who asked her if he should eat her or make her his wife. She thanked him for giving her the choice and said that she preferred the latter.

They lived together for a considerable period and, after a time, the woman presented the demon with a son, whom they named Tezamet. From the day of his birth Tezamet accompanied his father on his journeys to the forest in quest of people to devour; and, while the man and the boy ate human beings, they took home with them for the woman goats and sheep to eat and cows to milk.

One day one of the woman’s sisters came to the kraal to visit her. As Tezamet and his father were both absent she arrived, the two women sat and talked until it was time for the visitor to depart. The weather looked threatening as she rose to take her leave, and Tezamet’s mother cried out to her not to go to the tree in the middle of the plain, should it rain, for it was the custom of her husband and son to rest there on their way home. But the woman hurried away without paying attention to her sister’s warning, and when it came on to rain a little later, she ran to the tree in the middle of the plain, which was a baobab tree, and climbed up into it. She had not been there long when Tezamet and his father arrived and stood beneath the tree to get shelter from the rain. Their appearance recalled to the woman her sister’s words and she was greatly alarmed.

Tezamet gazed up into the tree and remarked that there was something peculiar about it, but his father said it was only because it was raining hard. Shortly afterward, however, Tezamet saw the woman and called out, “There is my meat.” The woman was forced to descend, and she gave birth to twins.

Tezamet picked up the children and said, “I will take these kidneys to mother to roast for me.

When it stopped raining, the two returned home and Tezamet asked his mother to roast his kidneys for him. But the woman knew at once that her sister had been out to death, and she hid the children in a hole in the earth, roasting instead two rats. When they were ready, Tezamet went to the fire, picked them up off the stones and ate them, grumbling at the same time because they were so small. His mother pretended to be very annoyed at this and, turning to her husband, complained of what their son had said. The old man told her not to mind the boy as he was a liar.

The woman fed and tended the children, who were both boys, and gradually they grew up. One day she asked her husband to bring her an ox which she said, she wished to slaughter and eat. Tezamet on hearing this request at once pricked up his ears and remarked, “It really amuses me to hear of a woman who wants to eat an ox all by herself. I think those kidneys of mine have something to do with this matter.” However, the two men searched for an ox which they procured and brought back with them. They slaughtered the animal and left the meat with the woman, after which they went for a walk in the forest.

As soon as they had departed, the woman let the children out of their hole and gave them the ox to eat. They ate until sunset, when she sent them back again to their hiding place.

Tezamet and his father returned shortly afterward, and the former, being very sharp, at once noticed the small footmarks on the ground. “I wonder,” he said, “what those small and numerous footmarks are. They are certainly not mine.” His mother, however, stoutly insisted that the marks had been made by herself or by the two men, and in this she received her husband’s support. Being annoyed with Tezamet on account of the way he treated his mother, the old man killed and ate him, but he immediately came to life again and cried out, “There, I have come back again.”

As time passed, the children grew up, and their aunt asked them one day if they knew that the people who lived in the same kraal with them were in reality demons and cannibals. She also inquired if, in the event of her being able to obtain weapons from her husband, they could put Tezamet and his father to death. The boys replied that they could, but asked the woman what she would say if her husband wanted to know why she required the weapons. She told them that she would say she wanted them to protect herself against any enemies who might come.

When Tezamet and his father next returned home, the woman asked her husband if he would procure two spears, two shields, and two swords for her. “For I am always here alone,” she said, “and if enemies come, I wish to be able to fight with them.” Tezamet remarked that he had never before heard of a woman who wanted men’s weapons and said he thought that those kidneys, which he had brought to his mother to roast for him, must have something to do with this request.

Notwithstanding Tezamet’s protest, the old man obtained for his wife the weapons that she required. When he had given them to her, she fetched an oxhide, and asked the two men to lie down on the ground while she stretched the hide over them and pegged it down. She told them that when she was ready she would cry out and would see if the enemy came, in which case they could assist her. She pegged the oxhide down securely and asked them if they could get out. Tezamet found a hole and began to crawl out, but his mother told him to get in again, and she pegged it down once more. She then raised her voice and called to the children, who came from their hiding place and killed Tezamet and his father.

As Tezamet was dying, he said to his parent, “Did I not tell you so, and you said I lied?”

The boys, after killing the two devils, took their aunt away to their father’s kraal.

[ MASAI ]

Battuda the Weed Smoker

THERE ONCE LIVED a man named Battuda, the weed smoker. One year there was s serve drought, and the weed did not grow. He said to his children, “What am I to do? I have no weed.”

They answered, “If you wish it, send us that we may search for some.”

Thereupon he sent the eight sons and three daughters, and said, If you secure weed, leave the girls with the man from whom you got it.”

They walked for a long time, nearly two months, but they did not find weed. They said to each other, “As we have not found that which we seek, it is best that we return.”

On their return they met two men, wanderers, who asked them what they sought. “We seek weed. We were sent by our father who is in great need of it, and we fear he will be dead by now.”

The wanderers replied, “Very well. Come with us, and we will take you to a man who has lots of it.”

Thus they travelled together, and when they arrived at one man’s village they met his son, who asked, “What do you seek?”

They replied, “Weed.”

“Only weed?” he asked.

“Yes, indeed,” they replied.

“If it should be offered to you, what would you give for it?” he asked further.

They answered, “Father said to us if you find a man with weed, leave all the girls with him.”

The man who owned the weed, and who was also named Battuda, rejoiced when he heard this and killed a goat for them. The next morning he filled eight bags with weed and gave them to Battuda’s sons. He also sent his four sons and two daughters, and said to his sons, “When you come to the man who desires the weed and find that his village is a pleasant place, leave the two girls with him.”

When Battuda’s eight sons returned with the weed, he rejoiced and praised them for what they had done and killed a goat for them. They said, “The man from whom we got the weed has also sent his four sons and tow daughters to see your abode and whether it is a pleasant place.”

He replied, “It is well.”

The next morning the four sons returned to their home and left their two sisters ar Battuda’s village.

The two families thereafter became friends and visited each other.

Some time later, Battuda said, “I am old. Take me to my friend that I may see before I die.” To this his children agreed. They went ahead, and he followed, until they arrived at Battuda’s village.

When Battuda heard the greetings and clapping of hands, he asked, “Whom is it you greet?”

One of his sons said, “It is the father of the girls who were left here – he who sought weed.”

He answered, “I am ashamed to meet him, as I married his daughters before I met him. Go and tell him that his friend Battuda is ill.” The sons went and told the man as they were desired to do by their father.

Thereupon the eldest son of the other said, “My father is also ill. I brought him, as he wished to see his friend who supplied him with weed. You say he is ill, therefore both are ill.”

The son of the other replied, “It is as you say. Enter the hut. We shall see tomorrow.”

They prepared food and, when they were about to take it to the visitors, there suddenly arose shouting and wailing, and the people of the village cried out, “Father is dead.”

Thereupon the visitors also set up a wailing and shouting, crying, “Father is dead. He died at the village which was not his home.”

Then all the people said, “We shall see tomorrow when we bury them.”

The next morning the people of the village said to the visitors, “it is daybreak. Go and choose a spot where you may bury your father; we shall do likewise for our father.”

But the sons of him whoo came on the visit replied, “Speak not thus. Let them be buried together, because they had become friends.”

Those of the village answered, “Have people ever been buried together?”

The visitors said, “You say people are not buried together. Have you known of a case where one man went to visit his friend and it was said, ‘He is dead,’ and that the other also died, thus both dying at the same time? Where did you ever see this?”

Thereupon they agreed to bury the bodies together.

They dug a deep grave for the two and carried the bodies thither. First they lowered into the grave the body of the man of the village and then that of the visitor. They then called out, “Bring stones that we may fill up the grave.”

When they were about to throw in the stones, the man who was lowered first called out, “I am not dead, take me out, and do not cover me with stones.” Then the body of the visitor said, “I am on top, I want to get out first.”

Thus both came out.

They went and killed a goat of which all ate. Then the old men called their sons together and said to them, “We wish to instruct you, our children. Do not do this: do not marry a girl before you ask her in marriage of her father.”

Then the old man of the village, whose name was Battuda, said to his sons, “I thought I would be clever. I did not wish to see the man whose daughters I had married without telling him. Therefore I said I was sick, hoping he would go home.”

Thus the custom arose that when a man desires to marry, he first informs the girl’s father of what he desires to do, for at the beginning this was not done.

[ MASHONA ]

Wise Little Woman

A GIRL, it is said, once went to seek for onions. As she arrived at the place where they grew, she met several men, on of whom was half-blind, having only one eye. As she dug, the men helped her, digging also. When her sack was full, the men said to her, “Go, tell the other girls, that many of you may come.” So she went home and told her companions, and early the next morning they started. But a little girl followed them. The other girls said, “Let the little girl go back.”

Her elder sister protested, saying, “She runs by herself; you need not out her into your awa skin.”

So they all went on together and, having reached the onion field, began to dig. Now the little girl saw traces of feet, and she said to the one who had guided them thither, “Wonderful! Whence so many traces? Were you not alone here?”

The other replied, “I walked about and looked around; therefore there must be many of my foot prints.”

The child, however, did not believe that if the other girl had been alone the traces could be many, and she felt uneasy, for she was a wise little woman. From time to time she rose from her work and peeped about and once, while doing this found by chance an anteater’s hole.

Still further spying about, she perceived some men, but they did not see her. She then returned and continued digging with the other girls, without, however, saying anything; but in the midst of the work, she always rose and looked about her.

So the others asked her, “Why do you always spy about you and leave off digging? What a girl!” But she continued her work in silence. When she rose from it again, she saw the men approaching. As they drew near, the one-eyed man blew through a reed pipe the following:

“Today blood shall flow, blood flow, blood flow!”

The little girl understood what was blown on the reed. She said to the elder ones, while they were dancing, “Do you understand the tune that is blown on the reed?”

But they only said, “What a child she is!”

So she mixed in the dance with the others, but managed while so doing to tie her sister’s kaross to her own. In this manner they danced until the merriment became very noisy. Then the two sisters found an opportunity to slip away.

On their way out the little sister asked, “Do you understand the reed – I mean what is blown on it?”

The elder one answered, “No, I do not understand it.”

Then the little girl explained to her that the tune on the reed said, “Today blood shall flow!”

While they walked along, the little girl let her elder sister go first and she herself followed, walking backwards and carefully stepping in her sister’s marks, so that thus they left only one set of footprints, and these going in a contrary direction. In this manner they arrived at the anteater’s hole.

The men killed all those girls who had remained dancing with them. When the elder of the two who had escaped heard their wailing, she said, “Alas, my sister!”

But the younger one answered hr, “Do you think you would have lived if you had remained there?”

Now the one-eyed man was the first to miss the sisters, and he said to the other men, “Where may the two handsome girls be who danced with me?”

The others replied, “He lies. He has seen only with his single eye.” But the one-eyed man insisted that two girls were truly missing.

Then they went to find their tracks, but the footmarks had been rendered indistinct enough to puzzle them.

However, the men finally arrived at the anteater’s hole. They could not see that the foot marks went farther, and they peered into the hole but saw nothing. Then the one-eyed man looked also, and he saw the girls and cried, “There they sit!”

The others now looked again, but still saw nothing, for the girls had covered themselves with cobwebs.

One of the men then took an spear and, piercing through the upper part of the hole, hit the heel of the older girl. The wise little woman took hold of the spear, however, and wiped off the blood. The elder sister was about to cry, but the little one warned her not to make a sound.

When the one-eyed one spied again the little girl made big eyes at him. He said, “There she sits.”

The others looked too, but as they could see nothing they said, “He has only seen with his one eye.”

At last the men became thirsty and said to the one-eyed one, “Stay you here and let us go to drink, and when we have returned you may go also.”

When the one-eyed man was left alone there, the little girl said, conjuring him:

“You dirty son if your father,

Are you there? Are you alone not thirsty?

Oh, you dirty child of your father!

Dirty son of your father!”

“I am indeed thirsty,” said the one-eyed one and went away.

Then the two girls came out of the hole, and the younger one took her elder sister on her back and walked on. As they were going over the bare, treeless plain, the men saw them and said, “There they are, far off,” and ran after them.

When they came near, the two girls turned themselves into thorn trees, called “Wait-a-bit,” and the beads which they wore became gum on the trees. The men then ate of the gum and fell asleep. While they slept, the girls smeared gum over the men’s eyes and went away, leaving them lying in the sun.

The girls were already near their kraal, when the one-eyed man awoke and said, “Oh, the disgrace! Fie on thee!”

“Our eyes are smeared over; fie on thee, my brother!” said the others.

Then they removed the gum from their eyes, and hunted for the girls, but the two sisters reached home in safety and told their parents what had happened.

Then all the people lamented greatly, but they remained quietly at home and did not search for the other girls.

[ HOTTENTOT ]

DREAM PROJECTIONS HINTS: II

Projections actually involve a change of atomic structure. Consciousness simply changes its form. When projection is first accomplished, there is a strong charge of adrenaline in the body and high activity of the thyroid gland. There is a charge of sexual hormones which are also utilized in projection.

After projection is accomplished, however, there is a marked decline in chemical activity and hormone action, a drop in body temperature and a drop in blood pressure. The rapid eye movements noted by dream investigators cease entirely. The eye muscles are not used. The normal muscular activity that usually occurs in sleep vanishes. The physical body is in a deep trance state. The trance may also be masked by sleep, if the projection happens from a dream threshold.

According to the intensity of the projection and to the systems visited, the body may become more or less rigid when consciousness returns to it. This is a subtle difference in the way sugar molecules are utilized. Momentarily, the body uses less sugar. However, the sugar is important in fueling the consciousness on its journey. It also aids in connecting the consciousness to the body.

In other words, there is indeed a connection that is and must be partially physical, between the body and the traveling consciousness, and it is based upon a certain sugar molecule in a form not normally seen. Before conscious projections I would therefore recommend that you take a small amount of starchy or sugar food. A small snack before bed is a good idea from this viewpoint. Alcohol is of some benefit, though not to any great degree. Excellent results can be achieved in a dream-based projection during the day, in a nap.

DREAM PROJECTION HINTS

Certain chemical changes must come about in the physical organism before projection can occur. Were it not for those, we would still be imprisoned within the corporeal image. You know that dreaming has a definite chemical basis, that chemicals built up during period of waking experience are released through dreams. Not only are these released, but they form a propelling action that allows energy to flow in the opposite direction. As chemical reactions allow the body to utilize energy and form physical materializations, so the excess built up becomes, then, a propelling force, allowing action to flow in what we would call subjective directions.

This same chemical reaction must also occur, only more strongly, before a legitimate projection can occur. This is one of the main reasons why deliberate projections are not more numerous. Usually the chemical access is used in normal dreaming. In periods of exuberant energy and well being, a more than normal excess accumulates. This can trigger a projection. In periods of momentary indisposition, however, the dreaming process may be blocked and the chemical excess accumulated. Again, a good time to try projection.

These chemical excesses are a natural byproduct of consciousness that is bound up in physical materialization. The more intense the characteristic experience of reality, the greater the chemical excess that is built up. Consciousness itself, when physically oriented, burns up the chemicals. The more intense the individual, the hotter the fire, so to speak, and the greater the chemical excesses released.

Released they must be, or the organism would not survive. Periods of intense activity may also generate this additional chemical propellant. Although this is generated through activity, it is released, making projections possible, in alternating periods of quietude and rest. There must be a disciplined focus, therefore, of this propellant. Periods of heightened sexual activity of a strong and deep nature will help. Periods of no sexual activity will also help, however. On the one hand, the chemical excess is built up as a result of great intensity, and in the latter case it is built up because psychic and sexual release has not been granted.

Eggs and asparagus are helpful as far as diet is concerned. I am obviously not suggesting a whole diet of eggs and asparagus. These plus fish oils are beneficial, however, but not when taken with acid foods.

I still suggest a more thorough examination of your dreams for many of them contain spontaneous projections. They are most apt to occur in the early hours, between 3:00 and 5:00 A.M. The body temperature drops at such times. Five in the afternoon is also beneficial from this standpoint. The drinking of pure water also facilitates projection, although for obvious reasons, the bladder should be empty. The north-south position is extremely important, and, indeed, is a necessity for any efficient dream recall. Energy is most easily utilized in this position for one thing, and this cuts unnecessary restrictions to a minimum.

There is vast difference between ordinary dreams and projections, whether or not the projections occur from the dream threshold. Dreams are constructed and sent upon their way. As you know, they maintain an independence within their own dimension.

Projections involve many more aspects of the whole self and are a mark that the personality is progressing in important ways. The inner senses are allowed their greatest freedom in projection states, and the self retains experience that it would not otherwise. When this knowledge becomes apart of the ordinary waking consciousness, then we have taken a gigantic step forward.

An almost automatic determination must be established, however, if conscious projections are to be anything but rare oddities. With some, the problem is somewhat different than it might be with others. These chemical excesses are used up, for one things, in creative work. You do this automatically. It goes without saying that your own work will gain immeasurably through the extended experience of projection. The yoga exercises allow you to draw an abundance – indeed, a superabundance – of energy. This energy, also, in chemical excesses that can be utilized in projections, without drawing energy away from your other work.

The expectation and knowledge that you are a part of all energy will allow you to realize that all the energy you require will be given. Your attitude toward what is possible determines what is possible for you in very definite terms.

Now, there are also electromagnetic changes (during projections) that can be perceived with instruments. Certain electrical fields will make themselves known under these conditions. The fields have always existed, but they will become apparent to physical instruments only when they are being crossed – in other words, at the very act of projection.

Other hints: A cool body temperature but with room temperature between 73.8 and 75.9 High humidity is poor. The colors of a room is important. Cool colors are best. Too warm colors are detrimental, being to closely allied with earthly conditions. In your climate, October, February and March are best. August can be beneficial, according to the weather. Too warm weather is detrimental.

How a Hunter Obtained Money from His Friends the Leopard, the Goat, the Bush Cat, and the Rooster, and How He Got Out of Repaying Them

MANY YEARS AGO There was a Calabar hunter named Effiong who lived in the bush. He killed plenty of animals and made much money. Every one in the country knew him, and one of his best friends was a man called Okun, who lived near him.

Effiong was very extravagant and spent much money in eating and drinking with everyone until at last he became quite poor, and he had to go out hunting again. But now his good luck seemed to have deserted him, for although he worked hard and hunted day and night, he could not succeed in killing anything.

One day, as he was very hungry, he went to his friend Okun and borrowed two hundred rods from him. He told him to come to his house on a certain day to get his money, and he told him to bring his gun, loaded, with him.

Now sometimes before this, Effiong had made friends with a leopard and a bush cat whom he had met in the forest while on one of his hunting expeditions; and he had also made friends with a goat and a rooster at a farm where he had stayed for the night. But, though Effiong had borrowed the money from Okun, he could not think how he was to repay it on the day he had promised. At last, however, he thought of a plan. The next day he went to his friend the leopard and asked him to lend him tow hundred rods, promising to return the amount to him on the same day as he had promised to pay Okun. He also told the leopard that, if he were absent when he came for his money, he could kill anything he saw in the house and eat it. The leopard was then to wait until the hunter arrived, when he would pay him the money. To this the leopard agreed.

The hunter then went to his friend the goat and borrowed two hundred rods from him in the same way. Effiong also went to his friends the bush cat and the rooster and borrowed two hundred rods from each of them on the same conditions, and told each one of them that if he were absent when they arrived, they could kill and eat anything they found about the place.

When the appointed day and left the house deserted. Very early in the morning, soon after he had begun to crow, the rooster remembered what the hunter had told him and he walked over to the hunter’s house but found no one there. On looking around, however, he saw corn on the ground and, being hungry, he commenced to eat.

About this time the bush cat also arrived, and not finding the hunter at home, he too looked about and very soon he espired the rooster who was busy picking up the grains of corn. So the bush cat went up very softly behind and pounced on the rooster and killed him at once, and begun to eat him.

By this time the goat had come for his money; but not finding his friend, he walked about until he came upon the bush cat who was intent upon his meal off the rooster that he did not notice the goat approaching; and the goat, being in rather a bad temper at not getting his money, at once charged at the bush cat and knocked him over, butting him with his horns. This the bush cat did not like at all, so as he was not big enough to fight the goat, he picked up the remains of the rooster and ran off with it to the bush; and so he lost money, as he did not await the arrival of the hunter. The goat was thus left master of the situation and started bleating. This noise attracted the attention of the leopard, who was on his way to receive payment from the hunter. As he got nearer, the smell of goat became very strong and, being hungry, for he had not eaten anything for some time, he approached the goat very carefully. Not seeing anyone, he stalked the goat and got nearer and nearer until he was within springing distance.

The goat, in the meantime, was quietly grazing, quite unsuspicious of any danger, as he was in the compound of his friend the hunter. Now and then he would say “Ba!” But most of the time he was busy eating the young grass and picking up the leaves which had fallen from a tree of which he was very fond. Suddenly the leopard sprang at the goat and, with one crunch at the neck, brought him down. The goat was dead almost at once, and the leopard started on his meal.

It was now about eight o’clock in the morning, and Okun, the hunter’s friend, having had his early morning meal, went out with his gun to receive payment of the two hundred rods he had lent to the hunter. When he got close to the house he heard a crunching sound. Being a hunter himself, he approached very cautiously and, looking over the fence, he saw the leopard only a few yards off busily engaged eating the goat. He took careful aim at the leopard and fired, whereupon the leopard rolled over dead.

The death of the leopard meant the four of the hunter’s creditors were now disposed of, as the bush cat had killed the rooster; the goat had driven the bush car away, who thus forfeited his claim; and in his turn the goat had been killed by the leopard, who had just been slain by Okun. This meant a saving of eight hundred rods of Effiong, but he was not content with this. As soon as he heard the report of the gun he ran out from where he had been hiding all the time and found the leopard lying dead with Okun standing over it. Then in very strong language Effiong began to upbraid Okun and asked him why he had killed his old friend the leopard. He said that nothing would satisfy him and that he would report the whole matter to the king, who would no doubt deal with Okun as he thought fit. When Effiong said this, Okun was frightened and begged him not to say anything more about the matter, as the king would be angry; but the hunter was obdurate and refused to listen to him. At last Okun said, “If you will allow the whole thing to drop and will say no more about it, I will make you a present of the two hundred rods you borrowed from me.” This was just what Effiong wanted; but still he did not give in at once. Eventually, however, he agreed and told Okun he might go and that he would bury the body of his friend the leopard.

Directly Okun had gone, instead of burying the body, Effiong dragged it inside the house and skinned it very carefully. The skin he put out to dry in the sun and covered it with wood ash, and the body he ate. When the skin was well cured, the hunter took it to a distant market where he sold it for much money.

And now, whenever a bush cat sees a rooster he always kills it and does so by right, as he takes the rooster in part payment of the two hundred rods which the hunter never paid him.

Moral: Never lend money to people, because if they cannot pay they will try to kill you or get rid of you in some way, either by poison or by setting bad jujus for you.

[ EFIK-IBIBIO ]

WHEN YOU AWAKEN

Or seem to waken – in the middle of the night, try to get out of the body. Simply try to get out of bed without moving the body and go into another room.

This is a pleasant and easy method. With some experience you will discover that you can maintain control, walk out of the apartment and outside. You may then attempt normal locomotion or levitate. There is little strain with this method. Keep it in mind so that you are alert to the initial favorable circumstances. You may be half awake. You may be in a false awakening. The method will work in either case. You can, if you want to, look back at your body.

You must want to do this, however. Often, you do not want to see the body by itself, so to speak, and so choose methods that make this more difficult. Just this one exercise will sharpen your control greatly. It is an ABC. This experience is also less startling to the ego than a more abrupt projection, and the ordinary nature of the activities – walking into the next room, for example – will be reassuring. You are more calm in your own surroundings.

Now it is possible for someone within the body to perceive someone who is not, but it is not usual. The perceiver must be a person of strong psychic abilities or the projecting personality must be driven by high emotional intensity to make himself/herself known.

The Young Man Who Was Carried Off by a Lion

A young man of early race once ascended a hill in order to hunt. As he looked around for game, However, he became sleepy – so sleepy, in fact, that he decided to lie down. What had happened to him? He wondered, as he stretched himself out on the ground, near a water hole. Never before had he been thus overcome by sleep.

As he slept, a lion, exhausted by the noonday heat , came to the pool to quench its thirst. The lion espied the boy lying there asleep and seized him. Startled, the boy awoke and, realizing that he had indeed been seized by a lion, he decided that it would be best not to stir, lest the lion bite and kill him. So he waited to see what the lion would do, for it was clear that the animal thought he was dead.

The lion carried him to a zwart-storm tree. There it laid him in the tree, in the lower branches however, and in such fashion that his legs protruded. Apparently the lion thought he would continue to be thirsty if he consumes the boy’s body immediately and that it would be better first to go down to the pool and drink some more water.

Before leaving, the lion pressed the boy’s head firmly between the branches of the zwart-storm tree.

No sooner had the lion left than the boy moved his head ever so little. The lion noticed the movement, however, as he looked back, and was puzzled. How could the head move after it had been forced so firmly between the branches of the tree? Perhaps he had not fastened the boy securely enough.

Just then the boy fell over. So the lion returned and, once again, pushed the boy’s head into the middle of the branches of the zwart-tree. As he did so, tears came into the boy’s eyes and the lion licked them away.

The boy lay there in pain, for a stick was pressing into the hollow at the back of his head. He faced the lion steadily with closed eyes and turned his head just a little. To the lion it seemed again as if the boy had moved, and again he licked away the tears from the boy’s eyes. Puzzled, the lion trod once more upon the boy’s head and pressed it down in order to be certain that the head might have moved because the body had not been properly confined, and not from any other reason.

The boy, now fearing that the lion suspected that he was not dead, remained absolutely motionless, in spite of the fact that the stick was cruelly piercing his head.

The lion, finally satisfied that the body was now firmly and properly secured, moved a few steps away. Then he looked back. The boy opened his eyes ever so little and through his eyelashes watched what the lion was doing.

The lion then ascended the hill and was about to proceed down to the water on the other side.

The boy, on his part, turned his head gently, in order to see if the lion had really departed. But, as he did so, he saw the lion peering from behind the top of the hill. He had comeback to take one more look at the boy, for he had suspected that the boy might possibly be only feigning death. That is why he had reascended the hill to take one more look. Since, however, the boy still lay there immobile, the lion thought he might quickly run to the water hole, drink his fill, and return without delay to consume the body. The lion was hungry enough but also not a little thirsty.

All this time the boy lay there quietly watching to see the lion what the lion was going to do next. He saw its head and shoulders finally turn and disappear; but, before he made the slightest movement, he wanted to be absolutely certain that the lion had really gone and would not return to peer again over the hill. He knew that the lion is a thing of cunning and that the animal had been suspicious of the movement which his head had made.

The boy lay there a long time without moving, and only when he was positive that the lion had truly gone did he arise and spring forward to a different place. But he did this circumspectly, running in a zigzag direction, so that the lion could not smell him out and know where he had gone. That is why he ran this way and that and did not run straight toward his own house. He knew that when the lion returned and missed him, he would immediately seek for him, following this spoor.

As soon as the boy came to the top of the hill, he called out to his people that he had just been “lifted up” – while the sun had stood high, he had been “lifted up.” More he would not say. They went therefore to gather together all the many harte-beest skins they possessed so that they might roll him in them, for he had just been “lifted up,” while the sun had stood high. He wanted his people to do this, for he was certain that the lion, when it returned and missed him, would seek and track him out. It is the way of a lion, with anything it has killed, not to leave it until he has eaten it. So insistently the boy besought his people to get the harte-beest skins and the mats and roll him up in them.

The people thereupon did this for the young boy, for it was their hearts’ young boy who had made the request and they did not wish the lion to eat him. Accordingly, they hid well, in suck fashion as to prevent the lion from getting hold of him. Indeed, they loved this young boy greatly and they announced that they would cover him over with the huts’ sheltering bushes: all this they would do, to prevent the lion, when he arrived, from seizing their hearts’ young boy.

Everyone now went out to look for some kuisse and when they found some, they dug it up, took it hime, and baked it.

At just about this time, and old Bushman, who had gone out to get some wood for his wife so that she might make a fire with which to cook the kuisse, espied the lion as he came over the top of the hill at the exact place where the young boy had appeared. Immediately he told his house folk about it. Speaking, he said, “Do you see what it is that stands there yonder on the top of the hill, at the place where the young boy came over?”

Thereupon the young boy’s mother, looking, exclaimed, “Not on any account must you permit that lion to come into our huts! You must shoot it and kill is before it ever comes that far!”

So the people slung on their quivers and went to meet the lion. Again and again they shot at him, but he would not die.

Then another woman addressed the people, saying, “In what manner are you shooting at this lion that you cannot manage to kill him?”

Bout one of the older men replied, “Can you not see that this lion must be a sorcerer? It will not die despite our shooting at it, for it insists upon having the young boy that it carried off.”

The people now threw children for the lion to eat, but the lion merely looked at them and left them alone.

Again and again the people shot at the lion but all to no avail. The lion remained unharmed and kept looking for the young boy. After a while, some of the people said, “Bring is some assegais, so that we can spear it.” So they began spearing it while continued shooting. But, despite the shooting and the spearing, the lion remained unharmed and continued its search for the young boy, for the young boy whose tears it had licked. It wanted that boy, none other.

Coming upon the huts, it tore them asunder and broke them to pieces, seeking for the young boy. The people addressed one another in terror saying, “Do you not see that the lion will not eat the children we have thrown him? Can you not see that he must be a sorcerer?”

But some people answered, “Give the lion a girl. Perhaps it will eat her and then go away.”

The lion, however, did not touch the girl. It wanted the young boy it had carried off, none other.

Everyone was now completely bewildered, for no one knew in what manner to act toward the lion to persuade it to leave. It was late in the day and the people had been spearing and shooting at it since the morning; yet the lion remained unharmed and would not die. It kept walking about, searching for the young boy.

“We no longer know what to do to induce it to leave,” the people said.

‘We have offered children and a young girl but the lion has always refused them. It desires only the young boy it carried off.”

Finally, in desperation, some of the people said, “Tell the young boy’s mother what is happening. Tell her that, despite her great love for the young boy, she must take him and deliver him to the lion, even though he be the child of her heart. She herself must realize that the sun is about to set and the lion is still threatening us, that it will not depart. It insists upon having the young boy.”

The mother heard and answered, “Be it so. Give my child to the lion. In no wise, however, must you allow the lion to eat him, in no wise must you allow the lion to continue walking about here. You must kill him and lay him upon my child. Let the lion die upon my son.”

When the young boy’s mother had thus spoken, the people unwrapped the young boy from the harte-beest skins in which he had been rolled and gave him to the lion. The lion immediately seized him and bit him to death, but as he was thus biting him to death, the people shot and stabbed the lion.

Finally the lion spoke and said that he was ready to die, for now he had secured the boy he had all the time been seeking; he had got hold of him.

And so the lion died, and both the boy and the lion lay there dead, next to each other.

[ BUSHMEN ]

AWAKE-SEEMING DREAMS AND INSTRUCTIONS

There are some notes I wanted to give you concerning dreams in which you feel certain you are normally awake. When these dreams are unusually vivid, then the ego is aware and participating, but generally it is not using its critical faculties. As you know, you can become critically alert, but when you do so, you realize that you are not in your normal waking condition.

In awake-seeming dreams you are indeed awake, but within a different psychological framework , indeed, within a different framework of reality. You are operating at a high level of awareness, and using the inner senses. These enable you to perceive an added depth of dimension which is responsible for the vividness and sense of exhilaration that often occurs within the kind of dream. The next step, of course, is to allow the ego to awaken its critical faculties while within this state. You are then able to realize that while you are indeed awake as you seem, you are awake while the body is asleep.

When this occurs, you will be able to use your normal abilities in addition to those of the dream condition. You will be certain of your identity, realize that the physical self is sleeping or in dream state and that the inner self is fully awake. This represents a definite increase in the scope of consciousness and a considerable expansion over the usual limitations set by you upon yourself.

Only then can you fully begin to manipulate the conditions that exist and communicate this knowledge that you receive to the ego. For the time, you see, the ego becomes a direct participator in such experience, at least to a degree.

Almost all; of our dream experiences do involve projection of one kind or another. These vary in intensity, type and even duration as any other experience vary. It takes a good deal of training and competence to operate with any real effectiveness within these situations.

All in all, the intellect plays some part, but the intuitional qualities are most important. There are chemical changes, also, that occur with the physical body when projections happen, and electromagnetic variations. These vary according to the form in which the projection occurs.

The projected form does make some impression upon the physical system. It is possible for it to be detected. It is a kind of pseudo-image, materialistically speaking, but it has definite electromagnetic reality and chemical properties. Animals have sensed such apparitions. They react to the chemical properties and build up to the (perception of) the image from these.

These chemical properties are more diffused in such an apparition than in a physical form, however. The chemical composition of a storm, perhaps, will give you an idea of what I mean. They cause small disturbances in the physical system. As a rule, they are not solid, in the same way that clouds are not solid, and yet they have shape and to a certain extent, boundaries and movement. They definitely have a reality, though you cannot usually perceive it with the physical senses.

Perhaps this diffused quality is the important difference(from your point of view) between an apparition and a physical form. There is an atomic structure, but in some ways it is less complete than the physical one. There is always a minute difference in the body’s weight when the individual is projecting.

How Kwaku Ananse Got Aso in Marriage

THERE ONCE LIVED a certain man called Akwasi-the-Jealous-One, and his wife was Aso. He did not want anyone to Aso or anyone to talk to her, so he went and built a small settlement for Aso to live in. No one ever went into that village.

Now he, Akwasi- the-Jealous-One, could not beget children. Because of that, if he and his wife lived in town, someone would take her away. Now the sky-god advised the young men, saying, “Akwasi-the-Jealous-One has been married to Aso for a very, very long time. She has not conceived by him and borne a child; therefore he who is able, let him go and take Aso and, should she conceive by him, let him take her as his wife.” All the young men tried their best to lay hands on her, but not one was able.

Now Kwaku Ananse, the spider, was there watching these events and he said, “I can go to Akasi-the-Jealous-One’s village.”

the sky-god said, “Can you really do so?”

Ananse said, “If you will give me what I require.”

The sky-god, “What kind of thing?” Ananse replied, “Medicine for gun and bullets.” And the sky-god gave them to him.

Then Ananse took the powder and bullets to various small villages, saying, “The sky-god has bade me bring powder and bullets to you, and you are to go and kill meat, and on the day I shall return here I shall take it and depart.” He distributed the powder and bullets to receive all the meat which they had killed. Father Ananse took the meat and palm-leaf basket, set them on his head, and set out on the path leading to Akwasi-the-Jealous-One’s settlement. When he reached the stream from which Akwasi and his wife drank, he picked out some meat and put it in the stream.

Ananse strode hard, carrying the palm-leaf basket full of meat, and passed through the main entrance leading into Akwasi-the-Jealous-One’s compound. Aso saw him. She said, “Akwasi-e! Come and look at something which is coming to the house here. What can it be?”

Anase said, “It is the sky-god who is sending me, and I am waery, and I am coming to sleep here.”

Akwasi-theJealous-One, “I have heard my lord’s servant.”

Aso said to Ananse, “Father man, some of your meat has fallen down at the main entrance to the compound.”

The spider said, “Oh, if you happen to have a dog, let him go and take it and chew it.” So Aso went and got it and gave it to her husband. Then Ananse said, “Mother, set some food on the fire for me.” Aso put some on, and Ananse said, “Mother, is it fufuo that you are cooking or etol?

Aso replied, “Futuo.”

Ananse said, “Then it is too little; go and fetch a big pot.”

Aso went and fetched a big one, and Ananse said, “Come and get meat.”

There were forty hindquarters of great beasts. He said, “Take only these and out them in the pot. If you had a pot big enough, I would give you enough meat to chew to make your teeth fall out.”

Aso finished preparing the food, turned it out of the pot, and placed it on a table, splashed water, and out it beside the rest of the food. Then Aso took her portion and went and set it down near the fire, and the men went and sat down beside the table. They touched the backs of each other’s hands and ate out of the same dish. All the time they were eating, Kwaku Ananse said, “There is no salt in this fufuo.

Akwasi said too Aso, “Bring some.”

But Ananse said, “Not at all. When the woman is eating, you tell her to get up to bring salt. Do you yourself go and bring it.”

Akwasi arose from the table, and Ananse looked into his bag and took out a pinch of purgative medicine and put it in the fufuo. Then he called Akwasi, saying, “Come back for I have brought some with me.”

When Akwasi came Ananse said, “Oh, I shall eat no more; I am full.” Akwasi, who suspected nothing, continued eating.

When they had finished their meal, Akwasi said, “Friend, we and you are sitting here and yet we do not know your name.”

Ananse replied, “I am called ‘Rise-Up-and-Make-Love-to-Aso.'”

Akwasi said, “I have heard, and you, Aso, have you heard this man’s name?”

Aso replied, “Yes, I have heard.”

Akwasi rose up to go and prepare one of the spare bedrooms and to make everything comfortable. He said, “Rise-Up-and Make-Love-to-Aso, this is your room, go and sleep there.”

The spider said, “I am the soul-washer to the sky-god and I sleep in a open veranda-room. Since mother bore me and father begat me, I have never slept in a closed bedroom.”

Akwasi said, “Where, then, will you sleep?”

He replied, “Were I to sleep in this open veranda-room here, to do so would be to make you equal to the sky-god, for it would mean that I was sleeping in the sky-god’s open veranda room. Since I am never to sleep in anyone’s open room except the of a sky-god, and since that is so, I shall just lie down in front of this closed sleeping-room where you repose.”

The man took out a sleeping mat and laid it there for him. Akwasi and his wife went to rest, and Ananse, too, lay down there. Ananse lay there and he slipped in the crossbar of the bedroom door. Ananse lay there and took his musical bow and sang:

“Akuamoa Ananse, today we shall achieve something, today.

Anase, the child of N sia, the mother of N yame, the sky-god, today we shall achieve something, today.

Ananse, the soul-washer to N yame, the sky-god, today I shall see something.

Then he ceased playing his sepirewa, and he laid it aside and lay down. He had spelt for some time when he heard Akwasi-the-Jealous-One calling. “Father man!” Not a sound in reply except dinn! Akwasi-the Jealous-One was dying. The medicine had taken effect on him, but he called, “Father man!” Not a sound in reply except dinn! At last he said, “Rise-Up-and-Make-Love-to-Aso!”

The spider said, “M! M! M!”

Akwasi Siad, “Open the door for me.” Ananse opened the door, and Akwasi went out. And the spider rose up and went into the room there.

He said, “Aso, did you not hear what your husband said?”

She replied, “What did he say?”

Ananse replied, “He said I must rise up and make love to you.”

Aso said, “You don’t lie.”

And he did it for her, and he went and lay down.

That night Akwasi rose up nine times. The spider also went nine times to where Aso was. When things became visible next morning. Ananse went off.

It would be about two moons later when Aso’s belly became large. Akwasi questioned her saying, “Why has your belly got like this? Perhaps you are ill, for you know that I who live with you here am unable to beget children.” Aso replied, “You forget that man who came here whom you told to rise up and make love to Aso. Well, he took me and I have conceived by him.”

Akwasi-the-Jealous-One said, “Rise up, and let me take you to go and give you to him.” They went to the sky-god’s town and Akwasi went and told the sky-god what had happened, saying, “A subject of yours whom you sent slept at my house and took Aso, and she has conceived by him.”

The sky-god said, “All of my subjects care roofing the huts. Go and point out the one you mean.” They went off, and the spider was sitting on a ridge-pole.

Aso said, “There he is!” Then Ananse ran farther on.

And again Aso said, “There he is!” Then Ananse fell down from up there where he was sitting.

Now that day was Friday. Ananse said, “I, who wash the sky-god’s soul – you have taken your hand and pointed it at me, so that I have fallen down and got red earth on me.” Immediately the attendants seized hold of Akwasi-the-Jealous-One and made him sacrifice a sheep. When Akwasi-the-Jealous-One had finished sacrificing the sheep, he said to the sky-god, “Here is the woman; let Ananse take her.” So Ananse took Aso, but as for the infant, they killed it, cut it into pieces, and scattered them about.

That is how jealousy came among the tribe.

[ ASHANTI ]

INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROJECTIONS

Whatever information I can give you will be of great practical benefit. I do not want you traveling about unless you know what you’re doing. Again I want to mention the matter of subconscious fabrications. Initially particularly, you will meet with them. You must remember that you are wandering in completely different dimensions, and the rules with which you are familiar simply do not apply.

You may, then, encounter images that are subsciously formed, quite valid images that belong in another dimension; or constructions created by others in other systems. For any control at all, you must learn to distinguish one from the other. Again, if you meet a disturbing image, you must first will it to disappear. If it is a subconscious construction of your own, it will vanish. But if you do not will it to disappear or realize its nature, then you must deal with it.

I have told you that the form in which you are traveling can be a tip off to you. If your levitation experience seems to carry you outside of the solar system, then you know that you are in the third form and that your abilities for the time are almost limitless, comparatively speaking. Any image you see here must be accepted. It does no good to call these forms hallucinations, for they are no more hallucinations than the chair in which my wife Dorian now sits. Respect physical reality. ‘Whether or not the automobile is a sensory hallucination, it can kill you.’ And I tell you that whether or not these projection images are hallucinations, they can be dangerous and you must respect the reality in which they exist. I want to be sure that you realize that some of these constructions will belong to other systems. You are safe as long as you do not meddle. You may explore, and freely, and that is all.

Now, here are my instructions. You may induce a medium trance in whatever way you choose. On occasion, this will be almost spontaneous, as you know. For best results in the beginning, make a projection attempt when you feel slightly drowsy, but pleasantly so. When you have induced the trance state, then begin to examine your own subjective feelings until you find recognition of the inner self.

This involves a recognition of yourself as distinct from the flesh fibers in which you reside. Then, begin to imagine this inner self rising upward. You should experience at this point an internal sense of motion. This motion may be from side to side as you gently shake yourself loose.

It may, instead, be a rushing upward. Whichever motion you experience, there will be a moment when you feel your identity and consciousness definitely withdrawing from the physical organism. Before you begin the experiment, the suggestion should also be given that the physical organism will be well protected and comfortable.

When you feel you consciousness withdrawing, the first step is this: Forget the physical body or what you are to do with it. Will yourself out in a quick motion. There is no need to experience the hallucinations mentioned by Fox ( in his book, Astral Projection). If the projection is a success, you will instantly lose contact with the body using this method. You simply will not be in it.

It will be far from lifeless, of course. Its maintenance is being controlled by the consciousness of the individual cells and organs of which I have spoken. I will give you alternate methods of projection, but I will be concerned now with what you can expect the first few moments after leaving the body.

Once you are out of the body, then you are dealing with a different kind of reality, but the experience is as valid as any other. You may or may not have the sensation of traveling through doors or windows. This is dependent upon the kind of projection involved. The molecular structure of the projecting self is of a different nature than that of the physical body. There is no change in the physical nature of the door, for example. The molecular structure of the traveling self changes.

There is no danger of not returning to the body, generally speaking. If in your projection you seem to be flying past treetops, then you are doing so…. You can meet and speak with others on some of these excursions. It is possible, with training, to arrange such meetings. For any kind of scientific proof, of course, this would be a necessary preliminary.

Remember that I told you, you may visit not only the past, present or future as it exists or will exist in your terms, but you may also visit realities that never existed physically. In our Blogs, I mentioned that intensity regulated the ‘duration’ of experience. Now, many events that were only imagined never took place physically, yet they exist. They simply are not a part of your definition of reality. You may, therefore, visit a museum that was planned in the sixteenth century but never built. Such a museum has a reality as valid as the house in which you live.

I have been speaking of projection from the trance state. Projection from a dream is something else again, and when executed successfully, you have a fine example of the self as it changes the focus of awareness. Here the critical consciousness can be fully alert while the body sleeps. Spontaneous. Unrecalled projections of this kind happen often. It is beneficial that they be carried out by the conscious wish of the projector. You learn, therefore, to manipulate your own consciousness and to experience its mobility. Quite simply, such projections allow you practice in dealing with realities that you will meet when you no longer operate in the physical system.

THE ELEPHANT WHO MARRIED A ZULU WOMAN and WAS DECEIVED BY HER

An Elephant fell madly in love with a Zulu woman Cisse and married her. Cisse’s two brothers came to visit her secretly but, for fear of him, she told Elephant she wanted to fetch some wood and then went and hid the two brothers in the firewood.

Then she said, “Since I have married into the kraal, I beg you to tell me, has the one-without-hair-at-the-knees been slaughtered for me?” {That would be a fully grown ram.} The blind mother-in-law answered her, “Things that were not spoken about of old, these she now speaks of and the smell of a Cisse is present.” Thereupon the woman answered her mother-in-law, “Should I not anoint myself in the old way and sprinkle myself with incense?” And the mother-in-law said, “Hum, things are being said by my son’s sweetheart which she did not say of old.”

Just then, Elephant, who had been in the field, came home and behaved as though he had found out that the woman’s two brothers had come. He rubbed himself against the house. Then the wife said, “What I did not do of old, now I do. Which day did you slaughter for me the ram lying far back in the kraal, and when did I anoint myself and sprinkle myself with my incense? Thus the woman spoke to him. Thereupon the mother-in-law said to him, “Things which were not spoken about of old are spoken now; therefore grant her her desire.”

So the one-without-hair-at-the-knees was slaughtered. And the woman herself fried it. That night she asked her mother-in-law, “How do you breathe when you sleep the sleep of life, and how do you breathe when you sleep the sleep of death?” And the mother-in-law said, “Hum, this is an evening rich in conversation. When we sleep the sleep of death, we breathe sui sui, and when we sleep the sleep of life, we breathe choo awaba, choo awaba.”

Then the woman prepared all her things as well as herself, while the others just slept. When they snored heavily and slept the sui sui sleep, she rose and said to her brothers, “The people are sleeping the sleep of death, let us make ready!” So they rose and went out, and she uncovered the mat-house and took all the necessary things and said, “Any noice that is made means that someone wants me to die.” So all things were done in silence. Then with the two brothers, who stood ready to go, she went among the flock, leaving her husband just a cow, a sheep, and a goat. Then she instructed the cow, “Do not cry as though you were only one, if you do not desire my death.” She spoke to the sheep and the goat in a like manner. Then they moved on with all the flock behind them. Now, the animals that had been left behind, cried out and cried out noisily in the night, as though all of them were still there, and Elephant thought all of them were really there. When he arose at daybreak, he saw his wife had left with everything, so grabbed a stick and said to his mother, “If I fall, the earth will resound with a thud.” And he pursued them.

When his wife and her brothers saw him coming close, they turned aside bout could not penetrate a rock which barred the way. Thereupon the woman said, “We are people behind whom a big company of travelers is following, so, rock of my forefathers, spread out to both side for us!” And the rock parted and then, when all had gone through, closed again.

Elephant, too, soon arrived and said to the rock, “Rock of my forefathers, cleave yourself for me too!” Then it spread itself and then he had entered, closed again. There Elephant died. The earth resounded with a thud. His mother at home said, as it was predicted by my oldest son, so it has happened. The earth has just resounded with a thud.”

[ NAMA ]

HALLUCINATIONS DURING PROJECTIONS

I want to give you some idea of the conditions you may expect to meet in any successful projections, so that you will be prepared to some extent. For simplicity’s sake, we will call the body forms discussed in our last Blog forms one, two and three.

Form one will spring out of an ordinary dream state. In spontaneous projections, you may become conscious in form one, project, return to the ordinary dream state and from there project again several times. You can expect these particular projections to be difficult to interpret now, though you may find the experience intact in the middle of any given dream record.

Your excursions with form one will be within our own system, largely connected to the earth, although past, present and future may be involved. You may, for example, visit New York in the year 3000.

The projections here are fairly short in duration, though exceptionally clear. You may encounter phantoms from your own subconscious, however, and they will seem exceedingly real. If you realize that you are projecting, you may simply order any unpleasant phantoms to disappear, and they will do so. You may banish a nightmare also, if you realize that it is a product of your own subconscious. If you treat it as reality, however, then you must deal with it as such until you realize its origin or return to the ordinary dream state.

In form two you will not, as a rule, encounter any subconscious phantoms. Ordinary dream elements will not be as frequent, not will they intrude as much. A longer duration of projection is possible. The vividness is extraordinary. Here you will begin to perceive quite clearly constructions that are not your own, where earlier these are but dimly glimpsed. A certain period of orientation will be necessary, simply because these other constructions may seem bewildering. Some will exist in your future. Some may have existed in your past, and some were thought of, but never materialized.

But the reality of all of these constructions will be equally vivid, you see, for they are, indeed, equally real. I will give you a simple example. You may find yourself in a room with certain people. Later, upon awakening, you realize that both the people and setting belong to a particular sequence in a novel. You think then: ‘This was no projection, then, but only a dream.”

It may, however, be a valid projection. The room and people exist but not in a way that you endorse as reality. They exist in another dimension, but as a rule you cannot perceive it. (To Dorian:) The paintings that you will paint exist now. It is possible for you to project yourself into one of your own future landscapes. This would not be an imaginative projection. This is what I am trying to tell you.

You may find yourself, for example, in the middle of a battle that was once planned in some general’s mind, a battle that never materialized in physical reality. In such case, incidentally, you were not a part of the battle and could not be harmed. However, you might be attracted enough to project yourself spontaneously into the body of one of the soldiers, in which case you could experience pain until your own fear pulled you back. As you learn control, such mistakes vanish.

There are various situations you must learn to handle, attractions and repulsions which could pull you willy-nilly in any direction. Experience will teach you how to handle these. What is needed is a steady maintenance of identity under conditions which will be new as far as your conscious awareness is concerned. I cannot emphasize too strongly that projections into other dimensions do occur. Many such instances are often considered chaotic dreams because there is no way to check them against physical events since they did not occur in physical terms.

It is possible for you to project to a future event in which you will be involved and by an act that you make in the projection, alter the course that this future will take. Such an action would therefore appear to happen twice, once in your present and once in your future. But in the future, you would be the one whose course is altered from this traveling self from the past.

Let us take an example: While asleep, you project into 3082. There you see yourself considering various courses of action. For a moment you are aware of a sense of duality as you view this older self. You communicate with this other self; and we will go into this sort of thing more deeply in another Blog. In any case, your future self heeds what you say. Now in the actual future you are the self who hears the voice of a past self, perhaps in a dream, or perhaps in a projection into the past.

Man And Snake

Gulari once found some snakes fighting. As he came near and looked at them he saw that one snake had been killed. He reproved them. He said, “Go away.”

One snake gave him a charm, saying, “By means of this charm you will hear all things. When the rat talks, you will hear it. When the cow talks, you will hear it. You will hear everything that is said.” The man passed on. He came to the village.

At night Gulari’s wife Wadda locked the house so that there was no open place. All was quite dark. She and her husband Gulari lay down to sleep. A mosquito came to the door. It examined the house and found no way in. The mosquito exclaimed, “They have locked the house very tightly. How can one get in?”

The Gulari understood and laughed.

“What are you laughing about?” asked Wadda his wife.

“Nothing,” said Gulari.

Later, a rat came. He examined the door. He found it fast closed and left it. Then he tried the eaves of the house and got in. He searched everywhere. He wanted butter but he found none. He said, “Oh, where has that woman stored her butter?” Gulari laughed.

His wife Wadda asked him, What are you laughing at?”

He answered, “Nothing.”

In the morning Gulari went to his barn. He let the cattle out. When it was nearly milking time his wife Wadda came to milk. When she arrived the cow said, “Of course you come, but you will not milk me today. I shall withhold my milk. My calf will drink it afterward.” Gulari laughed.

Wadda asked him, “what are you laughing at?”

He answered, “Nothing.”

Wadda left the cow. She returned to the village. Then the calf sucked its mother.

The next day Wadda again came to milk. The cow again with held its milk. In the afternoon Wadda’s child was ill for want of milk. She brought it to the barn and she talked to Gulari. She said, “That calf will kill my daughter.”

The cow interrupted, “What! My daughter will kill your daughter?”

Gulari laughed.

Wadda asked him, “What are you laughing about?”

He answered, “Nothing.”

When it was nearly sunset his wife said, “I shall get a divorce.”

She called all the people. They came to her husband’s place. They seated themselves. They said to the wife:

“You Wadda and your husband Gulari talk. We will listen.”

Wadda talked. She said to the people, “When we lie down to sleep, my husband Gulari always laughs at me without any reason. When I ask him why he does it he hides the reason from me. That is why I object to him?”

Then they asked Gulari, “Why do you laugh at Wadda? Tell us.”

He answered, “Nothing.”

They said again, “Tell us.”

He answered, “Men, if I tell it, I will die.”

They said, “Tell it Gulari! Do not hide it.”

He replied, “Oh, men, I will not tell it. I will surely die if I do.””

They urged him. When he was worn out he told them. Gulari said to the people, “This is the reason why I laughed when we were lying down in the house. After a while at night the mosquito would talk. It would say, “Who is this woman that has locked up her house so tightly?’ Where can one get in?” That is why I laughed.”

Gulari died, as he had said. The people cried. Some of them dug a grave. As they were about to bury the body a certain snake hastened to the desolate spot. It wrapped itself around the body. It stuck its tail in the nose of the dead man Gulari. He sneezed. the people were amazed. Some of them said, “Is it his god?”

Others replied, “Why ask who it is?”

When Gulari stood up the snake left.

When Guklari had quite recovered he travelled through the desolate places. He found the snake under a tree. The snake said, “But why did you tell? Long ago when I gave you that charm I told you it would make you hear all things.”

Gulari replied, “They urged me, so I told them.”

The snake said, “Oh!”

Then the snake gave him another charm, saying, “You will hear the words of the birds which eat the corn, if another bird came near, the first one would say, “Bird! Do not come. We shall be seen. I am eating quietly. This is my place. Let us separate. The field is large.”

After a while another bird would reply, “What! I shall be found out?” A third would break in, “How will you get out? Perhaps they will find us.”

“Let him go.” cried one bird.

“I am not going,” said another. Gulari laughed there in the corn field.

Man always held that snake sacred as his god.

The Bird That Made Milk

It is said that there was once a great town in a certain place which had many people living in it. They lived only upon grain. One year there was a great famine.

Now in that town there was a poor man, by the name Mbenque, and his wife. One day they went in their garden, and they continued digging the whole day long. In the evening, when the digging gangs returned home, they returned also. Then there came a bird which stood upon the house which was beside the garden, and it began to whistle and said:

“Mbenque’s cultivated ground, mix together.”

The ground did as the bird said. After that was done, the bird went away.

In the morning , when Mbenque and his wife went to the garden, they were in doubt, and said, “Is this really the place we were digging yesterday?”

They saw that it was the place by the people who were working on each side of them. The people began to laugh at them, and mocked them, and said, “It is because you are very lazy.”

They continued to dig again that day, and in the evening they went home with the others.

Then the bird came and did the same thing.

When they went back next morning, they found their ground altogether un-dug. Then they believed that they were bewitched by some of the others.

They continued digging that day again. But in the evening when the digging gangs returned, Mbenque said to his wife, “Go home, I will stay behind to watch and find the thing which undoes our work.”

Then he went and laid himself down by the head of the garden, under the same house on which the bird always perched. While he was thinking, the bird came. It was a very beautiful bird. He was looking at it and admiring it, when it began to speak.

It said, “Mbenque cultivated ground, mix together.”

Then he caught it, and said, “Ah! it is you who eats the work of our hands!”

He took out his knife from the sheath and was going to cut off the head of the bird.

Then the bird said, “Please don’t kill me andI will make some milk for you to drink.”

Mbenque answered, “You must bring back the work of my hands first.”

The bird said, “Mbenque’s cultivated ground, appear,” and it appeared.

Then Mbenque said, “Make the milk now,” and behold, it immediately made thick milk, which Mbenque began to drink. When he was satisfied, he took the bird home. As he approached his house, he put the bird in his bag.

After he entered his house, he said to his wife, “Wash all the largest beer pots which are in the house.”

But his wife was angry on account of her humger and she answered, “What have you to put in such large pots?”

Mbenque said to her, “Just listen to me, and do as I command you, then you will see.”

When she was ready with the pots, Mbenque took his bird out of his bag, and said, “Make milk for my children to drink.”

They commenced to drink, and when they were finished, Mbenque charged his children, saying, “Beware that you do not tell anybody of this, not even one of your companions.”

They swore to him that they would not tell anybody.

Mbenque and his family then lived upon this bird. The people were surprised when they saw him and his family. They said, “Why are the people at Mbenque’s house so fat? He is poor, but now since his garden has appeared he and his children are so fat!”

They tried to watch and to see what he was eating, but they never could find out at all.

One morning Mbenque and his wife went to work in their garden. About the middle of the same day the children of that town met together to play. They met just before Mbenque’s house. While they were playing the others said to Mbenque’s children, “Why are you so fat while we remain so thin?”

They answered, “Are wet hen fat?” We thought we were thin just as you are.”

They would not tell them the cause. The others continued to press them, and said, “We won’t tell anybody.”

Then the children of Mbenque said, “There is a bird in our father’s house which makes milk.”

The others said, “Please show us the bird.”

They went in to the house and took it out of the secret place where their father had placed it. They ordered it as their father did, to make milk, and it made milk, which their companions drank, for they were very hungry.

After drinking they said, “Let it dance for us,” and they loosened it from the place where it was tied.

The bird began to dance in the house, but one said, “This place is too confined,” so they took it outside the house. While they were enjoying themselves and laughing, the bird flew away, leaving them in great dismay.

Mbenque’s children said, “Our father will this day kill us, therefore we must go after the bird.”

So they followed it and continued going after it the whole day long, for when they were at a distance it would sit still for a long while and, when they aproached, it would fly away.

When the digging gangs returned from digging, the people of the town cried for their children, for they did not know what had become of them. But when Mbenque went into the house and could not find his bird, he knew where the children were, but he did not tell any of the other parents. He was very sorry about the bird, for he knew that he had lost his food.

When evening set in, the children wanted to return to their homes, but there came a storm of rain with heavy thunder, and they were very much afraid among them was a brave boy, named Sombwa, who encouraged them and said, “Do not be afraid. I can command a house to build itself.”

They said, “please command it.”

He said, “House appear!” and it appeared, and also wood for a fire. Then the children entered the house and made a large fire, and began to roast some wild roots which they dug out of the ground.

While they were roasting the roots and were merry, there came a big cannibal, and they heard his voice saying, “Sombwa, give me some of the wild roots you have.”

They were afraid, and the brave boy said to the girls and to the other boys, “Give me some of yours.”

They gave some to him, and he threw the roots outside. While the cannibal was still eating, they went out and fled. He finished eating the roots, and then pursued them. When he approached, the children scattered more roots upon the ground, and while the cannibal was picking them up and eating, they again fled.

At length they came among mountains, where trees were growing. The girls were already very tired, so they all climbed up into a tall tree. The cannibal came there and tried to cut the tree down with his long sharp fingernail.

Then the brave boy said to the girls, “while I am singing you must continue saying, “Tree be strong, Tree be strong!”

He sang this song:

“It is foolish,

It is foolish to be a traveller,

And to go on a journey

With the blood of girls upon one!

While we were roasting wild roots

A great darkness fell upon us.

It was not darkness,

I was awful gloom!”

While he was singing, there came a great bird which hovered over them, and said, “Hold fast to me.”

The children held fast to he bird and it flew away with them, and took them to their own town.

Was midnight when it arrived there, and it sat down at the gate of Sombwa’s mother’s house.

In the morning, when that woman came out of her house, she took ashes and cast them upon the bird, for she said, “This bird knows where our children are.”

At midday the bird sent word to the chief, saying, “Command all your people to spread mats in all the paths.”

The chief commanded them to do so. Then the bird brought all the children out, and the people were greatly delighted.

[ XOSA ]

DREAM BODIES

For all practical purposes, of course, you will usually find yourself in some sort of body form in your out-of-body experiences. These are a necessary camouflage, for you cannot yet think of identity without some kind of body, so you project in such a form. It varies according to your abilities, and without it, you would feel lost indeed. The form itself is not important, but it can tell you something about the dimension in which you are having the experience.

The dream body is the one with which you are most familiar. It has been called the astral body. It strikes us as being physical when we are in it, But we can do things with it that can’t be done ordinarily. You can levitate, for example. As a rule, however, we do not go through walls with this body. This is the body we use for ordinary dreams. Levitation is possible with it but on a limited basis.

When we enter a different dimension, the abilities of the body form change, and for all intents and purposes, it is a different body form – which we will now call a mind form. It still seems physical in shape, but we can walk through physical matter with it. we can levitate much more freely, traveling within the solar system. But we cannot go further with it.

In the first form, it is possible to perceive the past, present or future on a limited basis. In the second form, this perception is increased, the scope of consciousness widened. This is the form we will use if we meet by appointment with others in the dream state.

The third we may call the true projection form. In it, it is possible to travel beyond our solar system, and to to perceive the past, present and futures of other systems as well as our own. The various forms that we use do not dictate our experience, however. We may begin in one form and change to another – or go from the first to the third. On such occasions we must pass through in reverse direction (on returning). The forms merely represent stages of consciousness.

At physical death, after the last reincarnation, then the normal form is the dream body, and excursions are made from this point. It is possible, as mentioned, to suddenly switch from the third form to the dream body, but with a considerable jolt to consciousness.

There are indeed, others who can help in such experiences, and they can be of great assistance as guides. We will find projections much easier if our head is to the north.

Now, when we project from the dream body, consciously we are already outside of the physical one. We have already made the initial change away from physical focus. The mass of valid projections are made from the dreaming body. When the excursion is over, the return to the dream body is made with no strain, you see, for the ego is little concerned. In many such cases, however, the knowledge is not available to the waking self.

As we become more accustomed to the experience, the waking self will recall more and more and not become frightened. When we panic, from the waking condition, the experience ends. If the waking self had not been taken along in this particular manner, the journey could continue.

PROBABILITIES AND ‘NO TIME’

We use probabilities like blocks to build events. This presupposes inner knowledge and calculations, for you must be aware of the probabilities in order to choose from them. The inner self, therefore, has this knowledge. These probabilities include webworks, probable actions and reactions involving not only yourself but others. Computers are toys compared with these inner workings.

The majority of events do not ‘solidify’ until the last moment, in our terms. According to our understanding and interpretation of the world events, none are predestined or predetermined by sources outside of yourselves. Your childhood environment, for example, was determined by you before physical birth. Within this framework, you also give yourself the freedom to manipulate and change. The main events of a civilization are chosen by its people, but because a course is begun, this does not mean that it cannot be changed at any point.

Events, then, are materialized in our time from their origins in ‘no time.’ there is no end to the source or supply of probabilities, therefore ‘no time’ is not a static, completed storehouse. Each event you form from any set of probabilities automatically gives rise to new probabilities.

The nature of any given probable action does not lead to any particular inevitable act. Probabilities expand in terms of value fulfillment. One given act does not necessarily lead, then, to act A,B, and C, onward to some concluding action. Instead, it has offshoots in infinite directions, and these have offshoots.

This is what I know of reality. There is far more to be known. Outside of the realities of which I am aware and others are aware, there are systems that we cannot describe. They are massive energy sources, cosmic energy banks, that make possible the whole reality of probabilities.

They have evolved beyond all probabilities as we understand them yet, outside of probabilities, they still have existence. This cannot be explained in words. Yet, none of this is meant to deny the individual, for it is the individual upon whom all else rests, and it is from the basis of the individual that all entities have their existence. Nor are the memories or emotions of an individual ever taken from him/her. They are always at his/her disposal.

All of these probable systems are open. In our system it seems as if we chose one course, one main line of probabilities, and that is the end of it. In our system, only one ego predominates and we think of ourselves as that ego. In other systems, this is not necessarily the case. In some, the inner self is aware of having more than one ego, of playing more than one role at a time. As an analogy, this would be as if you lived, say, the life of a rich man/woman of great talent, the life of a poor man/woman and the life of a mother/father and career man/woman. You would be aware of each role and find abilities being developed in each. This is an analogy, and in several respects it could lead you astray if taken too literally. In such a system, there would be no breakup of time, you see.

How Honey-Guide Came to Have Authority over Honey

HONEY-GUIDE and Capped Wheatear lived together in one place at first and ate out of one dish. Honey-Guide was the elder, Wheatear the younger. They set their minds on going to hunt for honey, and it happened when they arrived in the vicinity of the honey that Honey-Guide said, “Smile, Wheatear, when you see where the honey is.” Wheatear smiled, but he did not see the honey. When Honey-Guide smiled he had really seen it. That is what they did, and then they returned home leaving the honey behind, but Wheatear quietly disappeared and went off to steal the honey.

Next morning Honey-Guide said, “Let us go to our honey.” There they found a bit of bare honeycomb mangled and thrown about, so he asked Wheatear about it, and Wheatear replied, “My brother, I have seen neither it nor him who has stolen the honey. Since we came out yesterday nobody has come back here to demolish the honey in this way.” And once again Wheatear said to Honey-guide, “As for me, I could not eat any of this honey unless you had given it to me.”

So then Honey-Guide said no more, and they went out again looking for honey. Once more they found some honey. Honey-Guide say it before Wheatear did, and he tested Wheatear by saying, “Smile.” Wheatear said, “I cannot see the honey, smile yourself, my brother.” Honey-Guide: “No, child, smile.” So Wheatear smile and he saw the honey; then Honey-Guide asked him, “What do you see?”

Wheatear said, “It looks as if it might be flies fluttering before your eyes.”

Honey-guide said, “Haven’t you seen it?”

But Wheatear was deceiving him, for he saw the honey all the time. When Honey-Guide was about to smile, he saw the honey and said, “Let us cut down the tree to get it.”

Wheatear refused, saying, “No, as you said yesterday that I stole the honey, well, I am Wheatear! Let us bring some bird-lime and set a trap beside the honey, then if it be I who steal the honey you will catch me.”

“Good business,” replied Honey-Guide.

They went off to get some bird-lime from the human beings. Then when they arrived at their village, Honey-Guide said, “We will come tomorrow to set the trap.” But after a time Honey-Guide quietly disappeared and went off to set the bird-lime at the honey. Said Wheatear to himself, “Let me go quietly and eat the honey.” But the bird-lime was set already, although he did not notice it. When he thought of sitting down beside the honey, he sat on the bird-lime. Said he, “I will strike it with my wing,” but he stuck to it. And when he struck with his tail he stuck to it. When he wanted to draw back his right wing, it was stuck fast. He tried to strike it with his breast but he stuck. When he attempted to bite it with his beak, he bit the bird-lime. Then he simply died for lack of breath.

When Honey-Guide appeared on the scene, after he had looked for him at the village, he found him already dead. Then he mocked him, saying, “Wheatear, smile!” As he was dried up, he said that was the reward of thievery. “From today you will not steal any more. The chieftainship is mine over honey and to be extolled by the people! As for you, from today your portion shall be bird-lime already spread, and thus will you be killed by people.”

Now since they separated there on account of thievery, Wheatear belongs to bird-lime and Honey-Guide is still extolled. While he talked like this, Honey-Guide was standing upon the corpse of Wheatear. they became distinct in other directions, while their cry remained the same and, to this day, Wheatear’s portion is bird-lime and to be entrapped by men.

[ BAILA ]

Why Some Animals Became Domestic

In the olden Days all cattle, sheep, and goats lived in the forests. Then, one day, Tarikhes called all the animals before him at a place in the jungle, and he lighted a large fire there. And when the animals saw the fire they were frightened and fled away back into the forests. There remained only cattle, sheep, and goats who were not frightened. And Tarikhes was pleased with these animals and bless them, and he decreed the henceforth they should always live with man and woman who would eat their flesh and drink their milk.

[ SUK ]

PROBABLE SELVES AND MULTI-DIMENSIONAL PERSONALITY

The ego structure remains, of course. The responsibility of dealing with physical reality remains, but in some respects the nature of this manipulation changes. It becomes more direct. Physical properties are manipulated more and more at a mental level. The ego becomes more like the inner ego and less like its old self, comparatively speaking. It accepts large portions of reality that it previously denied. Structurally, it remains intact, yet it has changed chemically and electromagnetically. Now it is far more open to inner data. Once this freedom is achieved, the ego can never return to its old state.

I have told you that the ego is self-conscious action that attempts to set itself apart from action and to consider action as object. Now this altered ego retains its highly specialized self-consciousness, and yet it can now experience itself as an identity within and as a part of action.

This is a cornerstone for consciousness and for personality. It is only a first step, however. Without it, no further development of consciousness can occur. It is not attained by all within our system. We are at this point now.

The next step is taken when identity is able to include within itself the intimate knowledge of all incarnations. Yet in this state, the independence of the various reincarnated selves is not diminished. Each of these steps of consciousness involve identity with the inner recognition of its unity with All That Is.

As each separate identity then seeks to know and experience its other portions, then All That Is learns Who and What It Is. Action never ceases its exploration of itself. All That Is can never know itself completely, since action must always act and each action creates a new unknown. Action must travel through itself from every conceivable point, and yet the journey, being itself action, will create new paths.

Why There are Cracks in Tortoise’s Shell

Mr. Tortoise, who was married to Mrs. Tortoise, Had in Vulture a friend who was constant in visiting him. But, having no wings, Tortoise was unable to return the visits, and this upset him. One day he bethought himself of his cunning ands aid to his wife, “Wife!’

Mrs. Tortoise answered, “Hello, husband! What is it?”

Said he, “don’t you see, wife, that we are becoming despicable in Vulture’s eyes?”

“How despicable?”

“Despicable, because it is despicable for me not to visit Vulture. He is always coming here and I have never yet been to his house – and he is my friend.”

Mrs. Tortoise replied, “I don’t see how Vulture should think us despicable unless we could fly as he does and then did not pay him a visit.”

But Mr. Tortoise persisted: “Nevertheless, wife, it is despicable.”

Said his wife, “Very well, then, sprout some wings and fly and visit your friend Vulture.”

Mr. Tortoise answered, “No, I shan’t sprout any wings because I was not born that way.”

“Well,” said Mrs. Tortoise, “what will you do?”

“I shall find a way,” he replied.

“Find it then, ” said Mrs Tortoise, “and let us see what you will do.”

Later Tortoise said to his wife, “Come and tie me up in a parcel with a lump of tobacco and, when Vulture arrives, give it to him and say it is tobacco and, when Vulture arrives, give it to him and say that it is tobacco to buy grain for us.” So Mrs. Tortoise took some palm leaf and made him into a parcel and put him down in the corner.

At his usual time, Vulture came to pay his visit and said, “Where’s your husband gone, Mrs. Tortoise?”

“My husband has gone some distance to visit some people, and he left hunger here. We have not a bit of grain in the house.”

Vulture said, “you are in trouble indeed, not having grain in the house.”

Vulture said, “you are in such trouble as human beings never knew.” And she went on: “Vulture, at your place is there no grain to be bought?”

“Yes,” said he, “any amount, Mrs. Tortoise.”

She brought the bundle and said, “My husband left this lump of tobacco thinking you would buy some grain with it for us and bring it here.”

Vulture willingly took it returned to his home in the heights. As he was nearing his native town he was surprised to here a voice saying, “Untie me, I am your friend Tortoise. I said I would pay a visit to you.”

But Vulture, in his surprise, let go his hold of the bundle and down crashed Tortoise to the earth, Pididi-pididi, his shell smashed to bits, and he died. And so the friendship between Tortoise and culture was broken: and you can still see the cracks in Tortoise’s shell.

How It Came About That the Hinder Part of Kwaku Ananse the Spider Became Big, at the Expense of His Head, Which Is Small

They say that once a great hunger came, and that Kwaku Ananse, the spider, said he would go and search for meat and vegetable food and bring it that his wife Aso might eat. He went into a certain stream and there he met certain people. Now these people whom he met, excuse my saying so, were spirits. When Ananse met the spirits, they were standing in the water and splashing the stream-bed dry to catch the fish. Kwaku Ananse said, “Brothers, may I come and splash a little too?”

The spirits said “Come.”

Ananse went, and he saw that they were using their skulls to splash the stream dry. The spirits said to Ananse, “You have seen that which we take to splash the stream dry. Will you allow us to remove your skull in order that you may splash too?” Ananse said, “I will permit you, take it off for me.”

Of a truth, the spirits removed it and gave it to him. Kwaku Ananse and the spirits joined together in splashing the bed of the stream dry. As they splashed, the spirits raised a song:

“We, the spider, when we splash the river-bed

dry to catch fish, we use our heads to splash the water.

O spirits, we are splashing the water.”

Since the Creator made things,

do we take our heads to splash the water?

O the spirits, we are splashing the water.

I take my head to splash the water dry today O,

O the spirits, we are splashing the water.”

Ananse finished singing, and the spirits told him, saying, “We have splashed, we have got fish, your share is a basketful. Take it and go and eat. Take your skull, join it on your body, and go off. But what we have to say most particularly is this – the very day you sing any of that song, your skull will open and fall off.”

The spider said, “Fish in abundance, which you have given to me, is all that I desire, and as for a song – for what reason should I sing it?”

The spirits said, “That is well, go off.”

So the spider set off. The spirits, too, got everything together and they, also, went away. When the spirits had reached yonder, as it were, then they raised their song:

“We, the spirits, when we splash the river-bed dry

to catch fish, we use our heads to splash the water.

O the spirits, we are splashing the water.”

And the spider heard the song and he, too, took it up:

“Since the Creator made things

Have we taken our heads to splash the water?

O the spirits, we are splashing the water.”

No sooner had he finished than his skull opened and dropped off. Ananse lifted it up and held it against his chest. He said, “spirits, spirits, my head has fallen off.”

The spirits heard, and they said “That’s the spider. He hasn’t listened to what we told him, and he is calling us. Let us all go back and hear him.”

Almost immediately, Spider came hastening along. He said, “Puo! Children of my father! My head has opened and fallen off, so I beg of you, if I have done you any harm, forgive it. You are in the right, but take my head and put it in its place for me.”

The spirits took it, and replaced it. They said to him, “Now, if you sing this song again and your head falls off again, we shall not answer when you call us. So get along with you!” The spirits set off again.

As they were going they sang their song. Then Ananse began to sing again, and his head became detached and fell off, kutukum! And he lifted it and, excuse my vulgarity, clapped it against his anus, and leaped to the side of the path. Sora! was the sound of the grass parting as he entered it. He said, “Path, save me! When the day dawns that I am rich, I shall give you some.”

That is why you will see Ananse with a small head and a very big bottom. It all comes from the hardness of his ears.

[ ASHANTI ]

How It Came About That We Shall Always See Okra the Cat Lying on a Velvet Cushion, While Okra-man the Dog Sleeps Among the Ashes of the Kitchen Fire.

They say that there once was a certain woman who was so unfortunate that whenever she gave birth to a child it died. So she set out to consult one of the lessor-gods about it and to tell him that she desired a child. The lesser-god said, “I shall give you one, but as for the child, all the work he will ever do will be to get you into debt, but nevertheless, some day he will repay you.”

It was not two days, it was not three days after consulting the lessor-god, when the woman conceived. She gave birth to a child – a spider-story child it was, for it was not long in growing up. The infant grew into a comely youth. One day he was with his mother and he said, “Mother, give me gold dust that I may go to the Edge-of-the-Sea-Country and buy salt.”

The mother said, “How much do you want?”

He said, “An asuanu.” And the mother took it and gave to him, and he set out on the journey.

Now, as he was going, he met a certain man and his spotted dog. He said, “bring it that I may buy it.”

The dog’s master said, “You cannot buy it.”

The youth said, “How much is it?”

The dog’s master replied, “An asuanu’s weight of gold dust.”

The youth said, “What’s that to me! Take this asuanu.” He received the dog and brought it back home.

When he returned, his mother said, “Why did you not reach your destination?”

He replied, “I used the gold dust to buy a dog.”

His mother said, “Ho!”

Now they were living there, it would be for about one moon, when the youth said, “Mother, give me gold dust that I may go trading.”

She said, “As for you, as is your wont, you will only take the gold dust and throw it away again, but how much do you want?”

He replied, “An asuanu-and-suru’s worth of gold dust.”

She said, “Take it, then.” So he set out along the trade road.

As he was going along, he met a certain man carrying a cat. He said, “Man, bring that animal that always falls on its feet, that I may buy it.”

The man said, “When I lie down in my room, the mice gnaw my feet; for that reason I bought it.”

He said, “I beseech you, ; let me have it.”

The man said, “You cannot buy it.”

The youth asked, “How much will you take for it?”

The man then replied, “An asuanu-and-suru’s worth of gold dust.”

The boy said, “So that’s why you say I cannot buy it! Here, take it.” The boy received the cat and went off home with it.

When he reached home, he said, “Mother, look here at what I have brought.”

She replied, “Ah, that is just what they said would happen.” The child remained there at home.

It would be about forty days later when the son again addressed his mother, saying, “Give me gold dust that I may go trading.”

The mother said, “All the money I have about me is finished with the exception of an asuasa’s weight of gold dust. If I give you this, and you go, and you do not buy goods with it, that’s the end of this business.”

The boy said, “I have heard.”

The next morning, when things became visible, the youth took up his bag and was off, pa! As he was going, he met a certain Ashanti fellow who was carrying a pigeon. He said, “Friend, bring that creature of yours that I may buy it.”

The Ashanti replied, “I am not selling it, for I amuse myself with it.”

The youth said, “I shall buy it.”

The bird’s master said, “I will not sell it, for I know what it may do for me.”

The boy said, “Oh, give it to me.”

He said, “Will you be able to buy it?”

The boy said, “How much?”

He replied, “An asuasa’s weight of gold dust.”

He said, “Do you suppose because of that I would not buy it?” Here is the sum.”

The boy brought the bird home. His mother said, “This has turned out no better than before. So this is what you have brought?” He replied, “Nevertheless, this is what I have brought.”

Now one day the boy was living there at home, when the pigeon called to him, saying, “Come.” When he went up to it, the pigeon informed him, saying, “In my own village I am chief, and I was about to go on a journey when a certain fellow came and seized hold of me. Then you, out of your kindness, bought me, and now I beseech you, if you will only take me back to my town, the people will take you greatly.”

The boy said, “You are telling me lies. You will run away. “

The pigeon said, “If you can’t see your way to do as I ask, then take a string and tie it to my leg, and take me along.

The boy took a string and fastened it to the pigeon’s leg, and it followed slowly behind him until they arrived at the pigeon’s town. When they reached the outskirts of the town, the children were playing nte marbles. As soon as they saw the bird they said, “Here is the chief! Here is the chief!” one of the children ran to tell the Korenti chief, but they seized him and cut his throat, saying, “You are causing us to call to mind our late sorrow.” But another one went again with the same tidings.

And now the Akwamu chief said, “You, Gyase chief, do you yourself go and see what this is all about.”

He went and looked, and returned. He said, “Oh, it is true!” Then they got a hammock and the regalia and went to bring the chief to his house. The whole tribe was told the news – how he was setting out on a journey, and how a certain fellow had caught him, and how this youth by his kindness had bought him, and how today he had brought him home.

Elders and young people all rose up and thanked the youth. The queen mother brought a water-pot full of gold dust, and all of the elders also each gave a water-pot full of gold dust. The chief himself looked on his hand and slipped off a ring and gave it to the youth. And he said, “Take this ring, and whatever you desire this ring will give you.”

He said, “I have heard.” And he went off with the ring to his village, and he showed the gold dust and the ring to his mother.

Then the mother said, Welcome Aku, welcome Aku!”

Formerly, when the boy, having burned up his gold dust and returned from his journeys, would salute his mother, she used not to answer him. And he gave his mother the news, saying, “You have seen this gold dust and this ring; I shall go and build a great village for us to live in.”

The mother said, “Press your eyes hard; try your best to do so.”

The youth set out and went and stood in the bush. He slipped off the ring and placed it on the ground and said, “Ring, clear all this land of forest and of bush for me.” And the whole of the place became cleared. He said, “Collect all which you have cleared into heaps for burning.” And it did so. He said, “Set up houses.” And it set up many houses. He said, “Ring, let people come and inhabit these houses.” And people came.

The youth made his mother the queen mother and he became chief.

Now, Ananse, the spider, was his best friend. One day, when he was living there in his new home, Kwaku Ananse set out to come to this youth’s village. When he reached it, he said, “Oh, little mother’s child, little father’s child, you have been fortunate and successful and you don’t care any more about me or to look after me. But what has happened to bring all this about?”

Then the youth told him all the news. The spider replied, “I shall go to my village to get something and return.”

Ananse went off to his village. He said to his niece, “I shall send you to my friend yonder, and when you go you will take this white wine for him, and pay attention and do whatever he orders, and you must try secretly to lay your hands on that ring.”

The girl set out and went to the youth’s village. The youth said to her, “As for this, I shall see to it that you do not go back again, for you must stay with me three days before you return..”

The girl said, “I have heard.”

Now he and the girl were there together, and the youth went to bathe.

He slipped off the ring and placed it on a table, and the girl took it and went off with it to her uncle, Kwaku Ananse. As soon a Ananse laid his hands upon it, he made use of the ring to build a big town.

Now, the youth, when he came to look for his ring, could not find it. He came to hear that the spider had built a big town which was greater than his own. Then he went off to consult one of the lesser-gods yonder. The lesser-god told him, “Ananse’s niece who came there to you has taken your ring and gone and given it to her uncle.” The spider also went to consult the lesser-god, and it was revealed to him that Okra, the cat, and Okraman, the dog, would be sent to recover the ring. Therefore he went and got medicine with which to treat the meat he was going to place on the path, so that when the animals who were walking there took some to eat, they would be unable again to go anywhere at all.

The youth who had lost his ring came home and told the cat and the dog: “The time has now come for me to tell you the reason I bought you, and it is this: something belonging to me has been lost, and they say it is in the possession of the spider, but that it lies in a box which is in the middle of all the rest of his boxes. They say he has taken medicine and mixed it with that flesh of the sheep and placed it on the path. So when you reach there, don’t eat it but jump over it.”

The dog said, “Cat, have you heard? You are the one who will chew it.”

The cat said, “Oh, go along, you who every little while take your nose to sniff and sniff!”

Then they began to talk a lot, and their master said, “That’s all right, be off.”

The two animals set out and were going along the path. Now there remained only a short time for them to reach the place where the meat was, when the dog detected the smell of it. He said, “Cat, I have a pain in my stomach and I cannot go on.”

The cat said, “Come, come! Let us go on, the business in hand is important.”

The dog said, “Cat, I am unable.”

The cat on alone. The dog then went to where the meat was, and he chewed up the whole of the meat. There he lay! He was unable to go on any more. And the cat reached Ananse’s village, and lay down in Ananse’s sleeping -room, on the ceiling above the room. As he lay there, he saw a mouse passing. Squeak! as he landed on its head. The mouse said, “Don’t catch me, what is the matter?”

The cat replied, “My master’s ring has been lost and they say it lies in Ananse’s box, which stands in the middle of all the rest of his boxes. If you are able to go and bring it to me, then I shall let you go.”

The mouse said, “I am able.”

The cat said, “Suppose I let you go, and you go off and don’t bring it but run away?”

The mouse said, “If you wish, fasten a string around my waist.”

The cat took a string and tied it around the mouse’s waist. Then the mouse went off into the spider’s room and gnawed a hole in the box which stood in the middle of all the rest. Little by little he made an opening, and soon it become large. He passed through it to go and get the ring to take to the cat. No sooner did the cat lay his hands upon it, than he ran off and came across the dog. He was lying just where the cat had left him. The cat said, “You are still lying here! And where is that meat?”

The dog said, “Oh, I did not see what became of it. Perhaps the people to whom it belonged came and removed it. But where is this ring?” The cat said, “here it is.” The dog said, “They say that the river which lies in the path is in flood, and as you, Cat, walk on the bottom when you cross water, it might be that the ring would fall down, so give it to me, for as for me, you know, I pass on the surface of the water.”

The cat said, “That’s so; you take it.”

They reached the river, and the dog jumped in – so did the cat. At once the cat crossed over. The dog reached the centre of the stream and became tired and, as he was about to take a deep breath, the ring fell out if his mouth into the water. He crossed over and came to where the cat was.

The cat said, “Where is that ring?” He said. “It fell out of my mouth into the water.” The cat ran and entered the water; he saw a great fish passing. The cat caught it. The fish said, “What is it?”

He said, “My ring has just fallen into this river, so unless you want trouble, give me what belongs to me at once. If you don’t give it to me I shall kill you immediately.”

The fish said, “Let us go to the river bank that I may give you what belongs to you.”

The fish said, “Let us go to the river bank that I may give you what belongs to you.”

When they both reached the bank, the fish vomited and the ring came out.

The cat took it and came and showed it to the dog. The dog said, “Father, I beg of you, when you go, don’t speak about what has happened.” The cat remained silent. They reached home and the cat told his master all that had happened, saying, “Because of the meat which the dog chewed as we were going along, he became unable to go farther. And again, when I had gone and got the ring and brought it back, the dog said to me, as he crossed a river on its surface, that I must hand over the ring to him. I gave it to him, and he threw it away in the river. It was only after a little while that I laid my hands on it again.”

All the people who were present said, “You, Cat, whatever kind of food I am eating, I will see to it that I break some and place in your little dish. Whatever mat I sleep upon, I shall only lie upon it provided you lie on some of it. As for you, Dog, you will only lie on the smoldering embers of the dead fire when the chilly might comes. Only with floggings, the folk will flog you.”

That is why you will always see the cat sleeping nowhere but on the best mat; also, if you cast come food down on the ground for him, he will not eat it unless it is on a plate. But as for the dog – we shall always see him sleeping in the courtyard on the dead ashes of the day’s fire; also you will see him there being beaten, he will yelp “Kao!”

It is all because of the time when the cat and the dog were sent on this business of the ring.

[ ASHANTI }

NWASHISISANA, the HARE

Hare, that will trickster, went to live with Grey antelope. One day he said to her, “suppose we go and till our fields and plant some bean!” So off they went and set to work. Antelope stole Hare’s beans, and Hare stole Antelope’s beans, but did most of the stealing.

Hare set a trap in his field, and Antelope was caught by the leg. In the early morning the cunning rascal went out and found Antelope caught in the trap. “Don’t you think you deserve to be killed,” said he, “now that I have found you out?”

“No! No!” she cried. “Let me go, and we will go back to my house where I will give you a hoe.” So he let her go, and she gave him the hoe.

Hare then packed his beans, harvested all his fields, and made ready to be off. Good-bye,” he said to Antelope, “I won’t stay with you any longer. You are a thief!”

Hare soon came across the great lizard, Varan, lying at the edge of a water-hole. It was the chief’s water-hole, where they drew their water, and he had been placed there on guard to find out who it was that was continually disturbing it and making it muddy. “What are you doing here?” said Hare.

“I am watching this hole to see who it is that muddies the chief’s water.”

“I’ll tell you what,” said Hare, “we had much better go and till a field together.”

“How can I dig?” said Varan. “I can’t stand on my hind legs and hold the hoe in my forepaws.”

“That doesn’t matter! Just come long. I will tie the hoe to your tail and you will be able to dig beautifully.”

So the hoe was tied on, but when this was done Varan could not move. Then Hare ran back to the hole, drank his fill of water, and finished by stirring it up well, making it as muddy as possible. After this he walked all over Varan’s fields and regaled himself on his groundnuts. In the heat of the day he came back and said, “Ho! An army has passed through the country. I hear that the warriors have dirtied the water in the hole. I hear, too, that they have ravaged all your crop of groundnuts!”

“Untie me!” said Varan. “I can’t budge.”

“All right, but only on condition that you don’t go and accuse me, Hare, of having stirred up the water.”

“But who told you this story about those soldiers who did all the mischief?”

“Don’t ask me so many questions. If you do, I won’t untie you!”

“Very well! I’ll be quiet, but take away this hoe. It hurts me!”

“Listen! First of all, I’ll go and draw some water for you. You must be thirsty.”

“No, I’m not thirsty. Only let me go!’

“If you are not thirsty, all right! I won’t untie the hoe.”

“Oh, very well, I am thirsty. Hurry up, and come back as fast as you can.”

Hare went to Varan’s village, took the wooden goblet from which he always drank, drew some water, and once again stirred up the hole. He took a drink to Varan, and said to him, “If anyone asks you whether I have disturbed the water, you must say that you did it. If you don’t promise me this, I won’t untie you.”

“All right. Very well.”

Then Hare ran to call the chiefs – Lord Elephant, Lord Lion, and the rest. They all came and asked Varan, “Who has been drawing our water and making it muddy?”

“It is I, said Varan.

And Hare, the rascal, added, “Yes, I found him committing this crime and I tied him up to a hoe, so that he couldn’t run away.”

The chiefs congratulated Hare. “Ah! you have been very clever! You have discovered the villain who has been muddying our pool!” And they immediately killed Varan.

The wily trickster, Hare, took the hoe and then went to look for Grey Antelope. She was on sentry duty, on the edge of a pool, for guards were placed at all the pools to prevent anyone from approaching, as the water still continued to be muddied during the night. Hare, not being able to get anything to drink, said to antelope, “What are you doing there so close to the water?”

“I am guarding the chief’s pool.”

“You will get thin and die of hunger, if you stay like that at the edge of the pools. Listen! You would do much better to come with me and till a field. Then, in time of famine, you would have something to eat.”

“Let us go!” said Antelope.

Hare set to work in grand style. He gave Antelope a hoe and told her to dig. “I can’t get on my hind legs,” said she, “and hold the hoe with my forelegs.”

“Let me have a look at your forelegs. I’ll tie the hoe to them, and you will be able to did all right.”

Antelope tried, but she couldn’t do it.

“Never mind,” said Hare. “Wait a minute.” He ran back to the pool, quenched his thirst, and muddied the water. Then he filled a calabash and hid it in the bush. On returning to Antelope, he said, “Hello! Haven’t you done any hoeing yet?”

“No, I can’t manage it.”

“Would you believe it! An Army has passed by, and they have stirred up the pool.”

“No!” Truly? Untie me, Hare!”

“I won’t untie you unless you swear that what I said is true.”

“Very well! Untie me.”

Off Hare went to get the calabash to give her a drink, and made her promise to confess that it was she who had disturbed the water. Then he called the chiefs, who killed Antelope.

But there was one creature that outdid Hare in cunning and that was Tortoise. She mounted guard at the pond. Hare arrived there. “You will die of hunger, if you stay at the edge of the pool with nothing to do. We had much better go and till a field together.”

“How can I hoe with short legs?” asked Tortoise.

“Oh! That will be all right. I’ll show you how to do it.”

“Eh! No. thank you! I think not!”

“Well then! Let’s go and help ourselves to some of the wild boar’s sweet potatoes.”

“No,” said Tortoise uncompromisingly, “No pilfering!”

However, before very long Tortoise began to feel hungry, so much so that, when Hare again proposed a marauding expedition, she overcame her scruples and they went off together to root up the sweet potatoes. Then they lighted a fire of grass in the bush and roasted them.

“Tortoise,” said Hare, “just go and see if the owners of these fields are anywhere about, as we must not let then catch us.”

“Yes, but let us both go. You go one way and I’ll go the other.”

Off went Hare, but Tortoise, instead of following his example, stayed behind and crawled into Hare’s sack. Hare soon came back, filled up his bag with sweet potatoes, threw it over his back, and ran away to escape the proprietors, shouting at the top of his voice, “Hi, Tortoise! Look out! They will catch you! I’m off! Fly”

He ran as hard as he could to escape capture. Tortoise, inside the sack, ate the sweet potatoes. She picked out all the best ones and finished the lot. She said, being satisfied, “Kutlu.” After a while Hare was tired out and lay down quite exhausted. He felt the oangs of hunger.

“Aha! Said he to himself. “I will have a good feed!” He sat down in a shady spot, opened his sack, out his hand inside, and pulled out one very small sweet potato. “This is much too small for me,” said he, and putting his hand in again, felt a nice big one. “Oho! here’s a beauty! When he had pulled it out of his bag, what was his surprise to find that his potato turned out to be Mistress Tortoise!

“Hello! Why! It’s you!” he cried in disgust and threw her on the ground. She scuttled away as fast as she could. Then Hare began to wail, “When I think that I have been carrying her all this time!” He felt very crestfallen.

Continuing his travels. Hare next met King Lion, surrounded by his courtiers. He at once asked permission to swear allegiance to the king and to settle in that country. But every day he went out to steal other folk’s groundnuts. When the owners of the fields came to look at their crops, they exclaimed, “Who can it be that digs up our groundnuts?”

Hare went off to find King Lion, and said to him, “Sire, your subjects are not what they should be, for they are in the habit of stealing.”

“Indeed!” said Lion. “Go and keep watch, and if you discover anyone stealing, catch him.”

Hare went off to take up his position in the fields, but Lion followed him and surprised him in the very act of feasting on groundnuts. “Ha! Ha! You tell me that my subjects are not honest folk, while it is you who do the thieving!”

“Not at all! I was only keeping a look out! Come here, and I will show you the footprints of your subjects, for I know them well!”

So they went to a large shady banyan tree. Hare made a strong string of one of the long tendrils and said to Lion, “As you think I don’t speak the truth, just sit down here and you will soon see the thieves passing by. I shall while away the time by making you a crown of wax.”

“All right,” said Lion, “make me a crown.”

Hare began by parting Lion’s mane down the middle and arranging the hairs carefully, one by one, on either side of his neck, as if he were preparing a spot on the top of his head for a crown. Then he made holes through the bark of the tree, on both sides of the trunk, and passed the hairs of the mane right through them, some on one side, some on the other. This done, he tied all the hairs securely together at the back of the tree with the string he had made, and he said to Lion, “I’ve finished the job. Jump up quickly and you will see one of your subjects stealing in the fields!’

Lion tried to jump up. He couldn’t! He had half killed himself struggling to get to his feet!

Hare ran to the village. “Come,” he shouted, “And see who it is who ravages your fields! He had previously torn up a lot of groundnut leaves and thrown them down close to the Lion. The villagers hurried to the spot.

“There! Don’t you see him?” Haven’t I found him out, eh?” Lion didn’t dare to say a single word.

Then his subjects cut great staves and beat him to death. “Ah! Hare, You are very clever, and we are grateful!” they said.

Hare cut Lion up into pieces. Then he took the skin and wrapped himself in it. Thus disguised, he went to Lion’s village and entered the queen’s hut. He said, “I am not well,” and shut himself up, refusing to see anyone. he gave orders to servants to kill an ox because he was ill. Then he had a second one slaughtered, then a third.

The women said to him, “Are you going to move to another place, since you are killing all your oxen?”

“No,” said Hare, “I have no intention of moving any more. I am killing them because I know very well that I shall never get over this illness.” So he had a general slaughtering of all Lion’s oxen, goats, and sheep, to the very last head of cattle. When all were killed, he said to the queen, “Haven’t you got my money in your keeping?”

“Yes,” she replied.

“Well, bring it all out and put it together with my royal mat and all my valuables on the village square.”

The lion’s skin had now acquired a rather loathsome odor, the flies were settling upon it in swams, and Hare was by no means comfortable inside of it.

“What sort of complaint have you got?” asked the queen. “It is something that smells very nasty.”

“Oh! I have only got some sores. I must go and find a doctor. Good-by, I shall start at once.”

Lion’s wife replied, “Then I will go with you, my husband.”

“No,” said he, “No occasion for that, for I know exactly where I must go.”

He went out to the square, picked up the mat in which all the money and valuables had been packed, and then, throwing off the lion’s skin, he tore away as fast as his legs could carry him with all the village in pursuit.

Hare came to a burrow, and in he ran. The pursuers got a hooked stick to pull him out. They tried to hook him and managed to get hold of his leg. “Oh, pull away!” cried he. “Pull away! You’ve only got hold of the root of a tree!”

So they left off pulling. They tried again, and this time they really hooked a root.

“Hi! hi!” he yelled. “Hi! hi! Take care! You’re hurting me! You’re killing me! Ow! Ow!”

They pulled as hard as they could, and they pulled and pulled until the hook broke and they fell over backward. They said, “Qaa.” Finally they were tired out and said, “Oh! Let us give it up and leave him where he is!” So they stopped up the burrow with a bunch of grass and went away.

The south wind no sprang up and blew the grass deeper into the burrow.

“I am done for,” said Hare to himself, as he fancied they were succeeding in getting nearer to him. He was suffering the pangs of hunger and was terribly thirsty, but not dare to leave the burrow, supposing his enemies to be close at hand. At length he cried out, “Have pity on me and let me go, my good fathers, I beseech you!” He crept cautiously toward the entrance of the burrow, and found only a bunch of grass. Then he made off at once, leaving all his treasures behind him, not even giving them a single thought.

He ran on and on. He became thin and ill. He ate grass, but it did not remain in his insides; it passed through him immediately. He came to the home of Grey Antelope. “Say, Antelope, suppose we sew one another up! You stitch me up, but not completely, you know! It will keep the grass much longer in our insides when we browse, and we shall get much more nourishment out of it.” Antelope consented, and partially stitched up Hare. Hare sewed her up entirely. Antelope swelled and died. Fortunately for her, however, she fell in a field belonging to a woman who picked her up, put her in her basket on the top of her head, and carried her to the village to be eaten. She gave her to her husband to cut up. He set to work and began by cutting the stitches that Hare had sewn. All that was in Antelope’s interior at once came out, she jumped to her legs, and galloped away.

She met Hare, and she said to him, “All right! I’ve found you out now! Never again do I call you my friend!”

Hare, being thirsty, was looking for a pool but could not find one. At last he came to one where no one was on guard. Tortoise was really in charge, but she was in the water. Hare walked in. “What luck! How nice and cool it is!” said he, quenching his thirst and swimming about. Tortoise snapped at one of his legs, then at another.

“Hello! Let me go! I’ll promise you a goat if you will let go!”

They came out of the pond together, and Hare said to her, “Come along to my house, and get your goat.” They reached his home, but no goat! Nothing! Hare did not give her anything. Then he remembered the money that he had left in the burrow and said, “Let us go and see chameleon. He has my valuables, for he borrowed a lot of money from me. I’ll just run round and fetch my brother; he knows all about the business and will be my witness.” Having said this, Hare ran off. Tortoise arrived at Chameleon’s abode and said, “Give me Hare’s money which he says you have!”

“What! I haven’t anything belonging to Hare!” Whereupon Chameleon blew into Tortoise’s eyes. She swelled, and died.

That’s the end.

[THONGA }


THE HARE, the HYENA, and the LIONESS’s CAVE

THE HARE ONCE MET the hyena and proposed that they should go for a walk. They went for a walk together and then separated, after which the hare went to the lioness’s cave and found it closed. She cried out, “Stone, open,” and the stone rolled away from the mouth of the cave. She entered and said, “Stone close,” and the stone returned to its place. She then proceeded to the room where the lioness stored her fat, after which she went to the room where the meat was kept, and having had enough to eat, she returned to the entrance, told the stone to open, and when she had passed out, to close once more.

Feeling hungry again later she returned to the cave. On the road she met the hyena, who asked her where she came from and why her mouth was oily. The hare denied that her mouth was oily, but as the hyena persisted in his statement, she told him to rub ashes on his mouth and it would become as beautiful as hers. The hyena did as he was recommended, but no change took place in his appearance. The hare next suggested washing it with water and afterwards with urine; but although the hyena tried both, his mouth remained as dry as before. The hyena said, “Please tell me where you go and feed.” At first the hare refused to comply with his request and said, “You are so foolish whenever you go anywhere and are sure to be caught.” But as the hyena would take no refusal, she consented to allow him to accompany her and told him about the lioness’s cave. “There are,” she said, “five rooms. In the first the ashes are kept; in the next, the bones; in the third, the tough meat; in the fourth, the tender meat; and in the last, the fat.” The hyena cried, “Get out of the way, take me there,” and off they started.

When they arrived at the cave, the hare told the hyena that when he wanted the cave to open he must say, “Stone, open,” and when he wanted it to shut, “Stone, close.” The hyena cried out, “Stone, open,” and the stone rolled aside. When they were inside, the hare said, “Stone, close,” and it closed again.

The hyena at once started on the ashes, while the hare went to the room where the fat was kept. When the latter had had enough to eat, she returned to the entrance and said she was going away. The hyena remonstrated with her as he was not nearly satisfied. After telling him how to get out of the cave, the hare went up to the stone and said, “Stone, open,” and again, when she was outside, “Stone, close.”

When the hyena was alone, he went to the place where the bones were kept, after which he proceeded to the next room, where the tough meat was stored, and ate until he was satisfied. He then returned to the entrance and said to the stone, “Stone, close,” instead of “Stone, open.” He repeated the words “Stone, close,” several times and could not understand why nothing happened.

At this point the lioness, the owner of the cave, returned and said, “Stone, open.” When the hyena heard, he cried, “Ah! Woe is me! That is what I wanted to say. Poor fellow that I am! Stone, open! Stone, open!”

The lioness entered and said, “shall I eat you, or shall I make you my servant?”

Then Hyena asked to be made her servant and was told to look after the lioness’s cub. He was also given a bone and instructed to break it when the lioness had crossed four rivers. The hyena counted the lioness’s footsteps and, when he calculated that she had crossed the four rivers, broke the bone. A chip flew, fracturing the cub’s skull. Fearing that the lioness would kill him on her return, he searched for some hornets and stuffed one up each of the cub’s nostrils so that it might be supposed that it had been stung to death.

The lioness returned to her cave a short while afterwards and called to the hyena to bring her cub. The hyena told lies for some time and invented several excuses for not doing as he was told, but the lioness was firm, and the hyena had to pick up the cub and bring it to its mother. The lioness at once saw that it was dead and told the hyena to take it outside. While he was doing this, he ate one of the cub’s legs.

A little later he was again ordered to bring the cub to its mother and then to take it away once more. He devoured another leg while carrying it away, and when the lioness called out to him a third time to bring the cub to her, he said the birds had eaten two of its legs. He then ate up the cub.

The lioness intended to punish the hyena for his misdeeds, and after tying him to a tree, went to get some sticks with which to beat him. As he was standing there, bound to the tree, some other hyenas bent on a raiding expedition passed close by, and one of them, seeing him, asked him why he had been tied up in this manner. He replied that he was being punished for having refused to drink some oil which had flies in it. The other hyena suggested that they should exchange places and, after untying the knots, he allowed himself to be bound to the tree instead, while the first hyena followed in the wake of the raiding party.

After a time the lioness returned, and commenced to flog the hyena, who cried out, “Stop! I will drink it now.”

“Drink what?” said the lioness, and she commenced to flog him again.

“Oh! Oh!” the hyena cried, “I will drink the oil with the flies in it.”

The lioness then saw that this was not the hyena that had killed her cub.

The next morning the hyenas on their way back from their raid passed the cave, and the one who had killed the cub saw on the ground some strips of bark, which the lioness had spread out in the sun to resemble meat. “I will go to my mistress’s kraal,” quoth he, “For I see there has been a kill.” On reaching the spot, however, he was seized by the lioness, who bound him to the tree once more and then beat him to death.

After this the lioness returned to her cave and said, “Stone, open.” When the stone had rolled aside and she had entered, she said, “Stone, close,” and it closed again.

[ MASAI ]

GOD IS DEAD?

It has been broadly suggested by some, in a very sensationalist manner, that God is dead. This phrase is quite actually a powerful suggestion. In a way, it represents that triumph of materialism and of science over the human consciousness.

However, in truth quite literally, if we are alive, God is not dead. We are the creator of our world. With All That Is we individually create our Personal Reality Field and collectively do we co-create our Consensus World Reality.

So perhaps God with a capital G might also be described as the ensemble of humans, animals and elements on Earth at any one time. However, since the whole is to be found within the part in this holographic model of reality, even if we were the last person alive on Earth, God would STILL not be dead.

Our philosophical discussion begs the question, “If I am the creator of my world and All That Is is within each Consciousness Unit(CU) or atom in physical reality, does this mean that I am also God or All That Is?”

Here again, the issue is not merely one of semantics. Let me explain. Religious conditioning serves to disempower the religion practitioner. We are speaking in broad generalities here. Particularly in our monotheistic practices, it is of course the churchgoers and student of the religious texts who remains in the subservient role. The God with a capital G is the almighty one. No one or thing comes before this God.

Now humility is achieved through the observance of this sacred relationship. Thus we have the humility expressed by the saints and by the disciples in our Christian religion.

Yet may I suggest that the great majority of the practitioners of the Christian faith take it much too far, so far indeed that the average Christian in actuality SEPARATES themselves from the Godhead. Through praise of the almighty God, the one and true King of Heaven, the power and spirituality of the practitioner is often overcome and finally forgotten.

The original words of The Christ, if I may be so bold, asked the observer of these fundamental Teachings to participate AS AN EQUAL.

As the new religion found followers, and the inevitable rise to power within the church structure of priests and other leaders occurred, this egalitarian relationship with God was not discussed. Eventually, as the priests consolidated their power, this brotherly and sisterly relationship between the Creator and the created was deemed blasphemous.

Those who spoke in terms of their equality with God were punished. We are attempting to change this relationship with these blog writings. We are reminding the spiritually-minded person of their original relationship with the Godhead.

THE GOD BLOG

For our next project i will create The God Blog – the manuscript on All That Is. We hope to present for you an interesting and educational blog on the creative source for all or our realities. However, I believe we would do well to provide with some of the ideas and theories we will cover in that blog series, now in this current blog series, so that you may better absorb and utilize these current messages from The Entity.

The therapeutic exercise that has many of the “demons” from the past faced, and in a sense, taken “into the light” and disempowered in that way. In these new blog series of mine, we are presenting the blog reader with the exercise and experimentation required to pursue a similar course of study.

Obviously, because we are incessantly on the topic of Reality Creation here, the question of “who is the reality creator?” must arise just as incessantly. I do believe that it is more than a mere matter of semantics. Who is the creator of our Personal Reality? I have advised over these many years that it is indeed YOU the blog reader of this blog who creates our Personal Reality. Now where does God and where do the concepts of the Divine fit within this cosmology of a reality-creating human? Let us discuss this for just a moment…

To begin, you Dear Blog Reader, are the epitome of All That Is. You are composed of divine energy constructs – the (CUs) Consciousness Units. In each and every one of the Consciousness Units we may find the holographic replica of EVERYTHING in all of our created realities. This EVERYTHING we are also referring to as All That Is. Now this metaphor of a holographic reality may serve us well here in this discussion. The simplified definition of a hologram for our purposes might be, “that which is everywhere all the time.” This describes the fundamental nature of the CUs as well as the multidimensional atoms theorized by some of our scientists. The researcher may make practical use of this theoretical construct by experimenting with experiencing the everywhere-all-the-time perspective. This perceptual vantage point is actually each and every Moment Point in space and time, so it does include past, present and future, in our terms.

This All That IS we have named to move beyond religious connotations of any kind. It is a safe generic titles, is it not? Yet at the same time, being ALL that is, this construct would naturally hold within itself what we might call the Divine or the sacred or spiritual worlds. The visionary experience treats the researcher, or perhaps the accidental mystic, to the sensory extravaganza that is multidimensional existence. How does one then define this experience in retrospect? Invariably the human bows to authority in these matters, and again as we have discussed in these blogs, hands over their powers of Reality Creation to another higher, perhaps “more worthy” entity. Thus the gods and goddesses are born.

We do not intend to trivialize this god-making faculty of the human being. These self-created constructs are definitely “given a life of their own” through the ongoing support of “thought energy” through the prayers and other spiritual observances of countless Souls over the millennia. The personality aspects of the human are constellated “out” onto the physical world from “within.” Each of the separate Earthly cultures, then, creates their individual divinities according to the needs of their particular group. So that the Nordic peoples, for example, developed an entirely different pantheon than did the Indonesian islanders. Different divine beings evolve from the different cultural needs of the people who live in the collective. Now let us relate this to the individual researcher living in our current timeframe.

AFTER ENLIGHTENMENT

We have spoken before of the gratifying changes in consciousness that come with Soul Evolution. What we are really talking about here is a systematic approach to belief change. The example we used pertained to a change in belief regarding radial prejudice.

In our example, the person had undergone a subtle transformation in consciousness by ” working on themselves” to the degree that they have no longer feared or hated a particular race or group of people, but they were indeed experience growing affection for these people, for the race as a whole. I described this feeling as a form of ambivalence, in that the person still harbored negative feelings for the group of people, but the positive feelings for the group were beginning to overtake the negative.

This person was on the cusp of positive belief change. They were comfortable with the uncertainty they were experiencing, for as I said, they were working on themselves, trying to learn their Lessons, and they were, at least for the moment, able to resist recognizing the negative inner dialogue concerning the group of people. They were able to “turn down the volume, ” you see, on the negative inner dialogue, and “turn up the volume” on their self-created positive inner dialogue. So this is what belief change entails.

WHY PURSUE THE SPIRITUAL*

Let us discuss an issue that is quite obvious. Perhaps that is why we have neglected it thus far in these new blog writings. The issue may be framed with a question: “Why do we assume that the blog readers of our new blogs are looking for spiritual understanding? If the path to Loving Understanding and Soul Evolution is so perilous and fraught with physical and psychological pain, why would anyone in their right mind want to pursue it?”

To begin, the blog reader of my blogs, as I have observed them over the many years since I first begun, are seekers. They are drawn to this work, I assume, because it “speaks to them.” Others of a different personality style and temperament, perhaps, would de drawn to other Teachings.

Now it is true that the older blog material were quite barren of discussions of spiritual matters. This was an editorial decision. I have continuously offered my spiritually-informed content to humanity. However, since it is the human co-creator of the blog who creates the blog in physical reality, it is the human co-creator who determines what they consider to be appropriate content for the blog.

These new blog manuscripts are the spiritual – you might say the divine – counterparts to the old blog material. If you are a student of The Entity, to complete our studies we would do well to attend to the spiritually-based blog material contained in these new blogs. Now I have attempted to include weighty intellectual discussions in my new blog work, to satisfy those of you who are focused on the physical dimension in which we live. The spiritual is merely the other side of this physical dimension. To become a well-rounded, educated human, we would do well to study both aspects of reality.

The path to Soul Realization may be thought of as arduous by some. This is true. Certainly it is not for the meek and mild. It is easy to lose confidence and perhaps quit the journey before it has truly begun. As we examine our expanded reality, we most definitely will be experiencing some of our lifetimes within less than ideal circumstances. If we tune-in, for example, to a lifetime in which you are dying slowly from starvation or an illness of some kind, this witnessing may be so distasteful and shocking that you are thrown out of your meditative state. I would suggest that you remember in these cases, under these circumstances of harsh conditions, that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is the Soul Self. This ecstasy ,may help to motivate you to continue your studies.

Now suppose that you are experiencing negative realities within your current life. Should you attempt these explorations of your other Simultaneous Lives? Generally, I would suggest that you first gain some mastery over the exercises and conduct the various experiments I have outlined in my previous tow blog series.

THE LEOPARD, the SQUIRREL, and the TORTOISE

Many years ago there was a great famine throughout the land and all the people were starving. The yam crop had failed entirely, the plantains did not bear any fruit, and the corn never came to a head; even the palm-oil nuts did not ripen, and the peppers and okras also failed.

The leopard, who lived entirely on meat, did not care for any of these things, and although some of the animals who lived on corn and the growing crops began to get rather skinny, he did not really mind very much.

However, in order to save himself trouble, since everybody was complaining of the famine, the leopard called a meeting of all the animals. He told them that, as they all knew, he was very powerful and must have food, that the famine did not affect him, as he lived only on flesh, and that as there were plenty of animals about, he did not intend to starve. He then told all thew animals present at the meeting that, if they themselves did not wish to be killed, they must bring their grandmothers to him for food, and that when the grandmothers were finished, he would feed off their mothers. The animals might bring their grandmothers in succession, and he would take them in turn, so that, as there were many different animals, it would probably be some time before their mothers were eaten. By that time it was possible that the famine would be over. But, in any case, the leopard warned them that he was determined to have sufficient food for himself and that, if the grandmothers or mothers were not forthcoming, he would turn upon the young people themselves and kill and eat them. For this, of course, the young generation, who had attended the meeting, had little liking, and in order to save their own skins why agreed to supply the leopard with his daily meal.

The first to appear with his aged grandmother was the squirrel. The grandmother was a poor decrepit old thing with a mangy tail, and the leopard swallowed her at one gulp and then looked round for more. In an angry voice he growled out, “This is not the proper food for me; I must have more at once.”

Then a bush cat pushed his old grandmother in front of the leopard, but he snarled at her and said, “Take the nasty old thing away; I want some sweet food.”

It was then the turn of a bush buck and, after a great deal of hesitation, a wretchedly poor and thin old doe tottered and fell in front of the leopard, who immediately dispatched her and, although the meal was very unsatisfactory, declared that his appetite was appeased for that day.

The next day a few more animals brought their old grandmothers, until at last it became the turn of the tortoise; but, being very cunning, he produced witnesses to prove that his grandmother was dead, and so the leopard excused him.

After a few days all the animals’ grandmothers were exhausted, and it was necessary that the mothers be sacrificed to supply food for the ravenous leopard. Now, although most of the young animals did not mind getting rid of their grandmothers, whom they had scarcely even known, many of them had very strong objections to providing their mothers, of whom they were very fond , as food for the leopard. Among the strongest objectors were the squirrel and the tortoise. The tortoise had thought the whole thing out. As everyone knew that his mother was alive, she being rather an amiable old person and friendly with all, he was aware that the same excuse would not avail him a second time. He therefore told his mother to climb up a palm tree, and he would provide her with food until the famine was over. He instructed her to let down a basket every day and said that he would place food in it for her. The tortoise made the basket for his mother and attached it to a long string of tie-tie. The string was so strong that she could haul her son up when ever he wished to visit her.

All went well for some days, as the tortoise used to go at daybreak to the bottm of the tree where his mother lived and place her food in the basket. Then the old lady would pull the basket up and have her food, and the tortoise would depart on his daily round in his usual leisurely manner.

In the meantime, the leopard had to have his daily food. The squirrel’s turn came first, after the grandmothers had finished, and as he was poor, weak thing and not possed of any cunning, he was forced to produce his mother for the leopard to eat. The squirrel was, however, very fond of his mother, and after she had been eaten he remembered that the tortoise had not produced his grandmother or his mother for the leopard’s food. He therefore determined to set a watch on the movements of the tortoise.

The very next morning, while he was gathering nuts, the squirrel saw the tortoise walking very slowly through the bush and, being high up in the trees and able to travel very fast, he had no difficulty in keeping the tortoise in sight without being noticed. When the tortoise arrived at the foot of the tree where his mother lived, he placed the food in the basket which his mother had already let down by the tie-tie and, having got into the basket and given a pull at the string to signify that everything was right, was hauled up and after a time was let down again in the basket. The squirrel was watching all the time and, as soon as the tortoise had gone, he jumped from branch to branch to branch of the trees and very soon arrived at the place where the leopard was napping.

When the leopard woke up, the squirrel said, “You have eaten my grandmother and my mother, but the tortoise has not provided any food for you. It is now his turn, and he has hidden his mother away in a tree.”

Hearing this, the leopard was very angry and told the squirrel to lead him at once to the tree where the tortoise’s mother lived.

But the squirrel said, “The tortoise only goes at daybreak when his mother lets down a basket; so if you go early in the morning, she will pull you up, and you can then kill her.”

To this the leopard agreed, and the next morning the squirrel came at cockcrow and led the leopard to the tree where the tortoise’s mother was hidden. The old lady had already let down the basket for her daily supply of food. The leopard got into it and gave the line a pull, but except for a few small jerks nothing happened. as the old mother tortoise was not strong enough to pull a heavy leopard off the ground. When the leopard saw that he was not going to be pulled up, being an expert climber, he scrambled up the tree. When he got to the top he found the poor old tortoise whose shell was so tough that he thought she was not worth eating, so in a violent temper he threw her down on the ground and then came down himself and went home.

Shortly after this, the tortoise arrived at the tree and, finding the basket on the ground, gave his usual tug at it but there was no answer. He then looked about and after a little while came upon the broken shell of his poor old mother who by this time was quite dead. The tortoise knew at once that the leopard had killed his mother and made up his mind that for the future he would live alone and have nothing to do with the other animals.

[ EFIK-IBIBIO ]

THE GAZELLE and THE LEOPARD

The gazelle said to the leopard, “It is now the dry season, and we should be cutting down the bush, so our women may plant as soon as the first rain come.”

“Well,” said the leopard, “I cannot go today, but you may as well go.”

The gazelle went; and all that hay he cut the bush, and cleared the ground for planting, and the next day he also went alone.

On the third day the leopard called on the gazelle and asked him to go to the plantation with him. But the gazelle said he was sick and could not go, so the leopard went by himself.

The next day the leopard again called for the gazelle, but he was not in.

“Where’s he gone?” inquired the leopard.

“Oh, he has gone to another part.”

And each day the leopard called upon the gazelle he was either sick or out of town; so that the leopard had nearly all the hard work himself.

When the women had planted, and the harvest was ripe, the gazelle went to look at the plantation. He was greatly pleased to find so much planted, and thought how pleased his friends would be if he invited them to a feast; so he called in all the antelopes and other beasts of the field, and they had a splendid feast.

By and by the leopard thought he would go and see how his plantation was getting on, and no sooner had he arrived there he exclaimed, “Hullo, who has been feeding on my plantation and eaten up my corn? Surely I will set a trap for them and catch the thieves.”

The next day the animals, led by the little gazelle, came again; and he warned them, saying, “Be careful, for the leopard will surely set a trap for us.” But the antelope became careless, and finally fell into the leopard’s trap. “There,” said the gazelle, “I told you to be careful. What shall we do? They have all run away and left us, and I am not strong enough to release you.”

Then the leopard came, and rejoiced greatly at having caught the thief. He took the antelope to his town. “Please, sire, the gazelle told me to go,” cried the antelope. “Don’t kill me! Don’t kill me!”

“How am I to catch the gazelle?” The leopard replied. “No, I must kill you.” And so he killed the antelope and ate him.

When the gazelle heard what the leopard had done, he was greatly annoyed, and declared that as the leopard was their chief, the animals were quite right in eating the food he had provided for them. Was it not the duty of the father to provide for his children? “Well, well, never mind, he will pay us for this.”

Then the gazelle made a drum, and beat it until all the animals came as if to a dance. When they were assembled, he told them that they must be revenged upon the leopard.

The leopard heard the drum, and said to his wife, “Let us go to the dance.” But his wife said she would rather stay at home, and did not go. The leopard went; but no sooner had he arrived than they all set upon him and killed him. And when the dance was over, the leopard’s wife wondered why he had not return. The gazelle sent her the head of her husband, skinned, as her part of the feast; and not knowing that it was her husband’s head, she ate it.

“Oh, for shame,” said the gazelle, “you have eaten your husband’s head.”

“Nay, sir, the shame rests with you; for you gave it to me to eat, after having murdered him.” And she wept and cursed the gazelle.

[ BAKONGO }

THE CATERPILLAR and the WILD ANIMALS

ONCE UPON A TIME a caterpillar entered the house of a hare when the owner was absent. On his return the hare noticed the marks on the ground, and cried out, “Who is in my house?”

The caterpillar replied in a loud voice, “I am the warrior son of the long one whose anklets have become unfastened in the fight in the Kurtiale country. I crush the rhinoceros to the earth and make cow’s dung of the elephant! I am invincible!”

The hare went away, saying, “What can a small animal like myself do with a person who tramples an elephant under foot like cow’s dung?”

On the road he met the jackal and asked him to return with him and talk with the big man who had taken possession of his house. The jackal agreed, and when they reached the place he barked loudly and said, “Who is in the house of my friend, the hare?”

The caterpillar replied, “I am the warrior son of the long one whose anklets have become unfastened in the fight in the Kurtiale country. I crush the rhinoceros to the earth and make cow’s dung of the elephant! I am invincible!’

On hearing this the jackal said, “I can do nothing against such a man,” and left.

The hare then fetched the leopard, whom he begged to go and talk with the person in his house. The pLeopard, on reaching the spot, grunted out, “Who is in the house of my friend, the hare?”

The caterpillar replied in the same manner as he had to the jackal, and the leopard said, “If he crushes the elephant and the rhinoceros, he will do the same to me.”

They went away again, and the hare sought out the rhinoceros. The latter, on arriving at the hare’s house, asked who was inside, but when he heard the caterpillar’s reply, he said, “What! He can crush me to earth! I had better go away then.”

The hare next tried the elephant and asked him to come to his assistance, but on hearing what the caterpillar has said, the elephant remarked that he had no wish to be trampled under foot like cow’s dung, and he departed.

A frog was passing at the time, and the hare asked him if he could make the man who had conquered all the animals leave his house. The frog went to the door and asked who was inside. He received the same reply as had been given to others, but, instead of leaving, he went nearer and said, “I, who am strong and a leaper, have come. My buttocks are like the post and God has made me vile.”

When the caterpillar heard this, he trembled, and as he saw the frog coming nearer, he said, “I am only the caterpillar.”

The animals who had collected nearby seized him and dragged him out; and they all laughed at the trouble he had given.

[ MASAI ]

THE FROG AND UMDHLUBU

ONCE ON A TIME, A king married the daughter of another king; he loved her very much. His other wives were troubled on account of his love for her. She became pregnant, and gave birth to a girl: the father loved her exceedingly. The child grew, and when she was a fine handsome little child, the other wives formed a plot against her; they said, “Since her father is not at home, let us go and cut fibre.” They told the children not to agree to carry the child. The mother called the little girl who nursed her child. She refused to carry her. The mother put her on her back, and went with her.

They cut fibre, and went on continually. It came to pass in one of the valleys they sat down and took snuff. The mother made a bundle of fibre, and gave it to the child: the child played with it. They set out again and cut fibre. They went on continually. the mother forgot the child. They went on continually cutting fibre; they tied it up in bundles, and carried it home.

When they came home, they called the children’s nurses: they all came. But hers came without the child. She asked, “Where is my child?” They said, “you took her with you.” She was troubled, and cried, and ran to find her. She did not find her, and came back.

There was a great lamentation. The other wives said, “How is it now? We have destroyed the father’s darling. The pet wife is confounded.”

A messenger was sent to tell the father; it was said, “King, your child has been lost, while we were cutting fibre.” The father was greatly troubled.

In the morning an old woman of the royal household of another nation went to fetch water: she heard the child playing; she heard something saying, “Ta, ta, ta.” She wondered and said, “Ah! what is this?” She went stealthily along, and found the child, sitting and playing. She went home, and left both her and the water-pot. She called the king’s chief wife, and said, “Come here.” The queen went out of the house. She said, “Let us go; there is something by the river which you will see.” The queen said, “Take her.” She said so with joy. The old woman took her. They came to the river. The queen said, “Wash she.” She washed her. The queen took her, and placed her on her back, and went home.

She suckled her, for she had given birth to a boy. The queen brought her up. She grew and the queen’s own child walked. She grew and became a great girl. She was appointed chief of the girls, when a great feast was made. Many cattle were slaughtered, and all the people rejoiced.

After that the chief men said to the boy, “Marry this girl.” The boy wondered, and aid, “O! what is the meaning of this? Is she not my sister? Did we not suck together at my mother’s breast?” They said, “No, she was found in a valley.” He denied, and said, “No, she is my sister.” The next morning they said, “It is proper you should take her to be your wife.” He refused, and was greatly troubled.

On another occasion an old woman said tot he girl, “Do you know? She answered, “What?” She said, “You are going to be married.”” She inquired, “To whom?” She said, “the young man of your own house.” She said, “O! what is the meaning of this? Is he not my brother?” The old woman said, “No, you were taken from a valley, and brought up by the queen.” She cried, being much troubled.

The girl took a water-pot, and water to the river, and sat down and wept. She filled the water-pot, and went home. She sat down in the house. Her mother gave her food; she did not like it, and refused. The mother asked, “What is it?” She said, “Nothing. There is a pain in my head.” So it was evening, and she went to lie down.

In the morning she awoke and took the water-pot, and went to the river; she sat down and wept. As she was crying, there came out a great frog, and said, “Why are you crying?” She said, “I am in trouble.” The frog said, “What is troubling you?” She replied, “It is said that I am to become the wife of my brother.” The frog said, “Go and take your brother things, which you love, and bring them here.”

She rose and took the water-pot, and went home. She took another pot, and fetched her things, and out them in the pot; she took her brass rod, and her ubenthle kilt, and a petticoat with a border of brass balls, and her fillet, and her brass, and her beads. She took these things, and went to the river, and threw them on the ground.

The frog inquired, saying, “Do you wish me to take you to your own people?” The child said, “Yes.” The frog took her things and sallowed them; he took her and swallowed her; and set out with her.

On the way he met with a string of young men: they saw the frog. The one in front said, “Just come and see: here is a very great frog.” The others said, “Let us kill him, and throw stones at him.” The frog said:

“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.

I am taking Umbhlubu to her own country.”

They left him. They said, “Hau! How is it that the frog speaks, making a prodigy? Let us leave him.” They passed on, and went their way.

And so the frog too went on his way. Again he met with a string of men. The one in front said, “O, come and see a huge frog.” They said, “let us kill it.” The frog replied:

“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.

I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”

They passed on, and the frog went on his way.

He fell in with some boys herding cattle: they saw him, and he was seen by a boy of the damsel’s father. He had said, “W au! By Umdhlubu the king’s child! Come and kill a great frog. Run and cut sharp sticks, that we may pierce him with them.” The frog said:

“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.

I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”

The boy wondered, and said, “O, sirs, do not let us kill him. He calls up painful emoptions. Leave him alone, that we may pass on.” They left him.

The frog went on his way and came to others. He was seen by the girl’s own brother: he said, “By Umdhlubu the king’s child! There is a very great frog. Let us beat it with stones and kill it.” The frog said:

I am but a frog; I will not be killed.

I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”

He said, O, leave him alone. He speaks a fearful thing.”

He went on and came near her home: he entered a bush below the kraal: he placed her on the ground with her things. He put her in order: he cleansed her with udonqa: he anointed her, and put on her ornaments.

So she set out. She took her brass rod, and went and entered at the gateway, and she passed across the cattle enclosure: she went in the middle of it: she came to the opening, she went out, and entered the house of her mother. Her mother followed her into the house and said, “Where do you come from, damsel?” She said, “I am merely on a journey.” The mother said, “Tell me.” She said, “There is nothing, I am merely on a journey.” The mother said, “Women are satisfied who have such fine children as you. For my part, I am in trouble: my child was lost: I felt her in the valley: she died there.” The child answered, saying, “No; the queens made me forget her; they would not allow the nurse to carry her.” The girl said in answer, “No! there is no woman who can forget her own child.” She said, “No; it happened through my not being accustomed to carry a child; for she used to remain with the nurse.” Umdhlubu said, “Yes, you did it because you did not love me.” She began to look very earnestly at her; she saw that it was her child.

When she saw her she rejoiced. She praised with the praise-giving names of her child. The mother took her role, and girded her herself; she took her head-ornament, and put it on her head; she took her petticoat, and put it on; she took her staff, and went out; she leaped for joy, and halala’d; she went into the cattle-pen; she played leaping about with joy. The people wondered and said, “What has happened to Untombinde today? Why does she rejoice so much? Since the time her first-born died, she has never rejoiced, but has constantly been in sorrow.”

One from her side went out, and said, “Just let me go and see what is in the house? Why do I hear the queen praising with the praise-giving names of her dead child? So she went, and entered the house, and saw the girl. She went out, and shouted aloud, and gave thanks.

All the people went out. They ran to the house, hurrying to get there first. They crowded each other together at the doorway. They saw the child. All the people on her side rejoiced. All the others were troubled, and the queens of the other side said, “Ah! What does it mean? For we thought we had already killed this child. She has come to life again. We shall be confounded together with out children. The supremacy of our children is coming to an end.”

A messenger set out and went to her father; he arrived and said, “O king, your child that was dead is come to life again.” The king said, “Hau! Are you mad? Which is that child?” The messenger said, “Umdhlubu.” The father said, “Whence comes she?” He said, “I do not know, O king.” The father said, “If it is not she, I will kill you. If it is she, run, raise a cry in all places, that the people may bring together all the large oxen, and come with them.”

He went and raised a cry, and said, “The princess has come. Make haste with the oxen.” The men asked, “Which princess?” He replied, “Umdhlubu, the child of the king, who was dead.”

They rejoice; they took their shields; they took the oxen, and drove them; they took also their presents to gladden the princess; for she had risen from death; they found her when they no longer expected it. They came; they slaughtered many cattle, even in the paths, in order that the old men and the old women and the sick might eat, who were not able to reach the home where the princess was.

The father came and said, “Come out, my child, that I may see you.” She did not answer. He slaughtered twenty oxen. She made her appearance at the doorway, and stood still. He slaughtered thirty; she came out. The father said, “Go into the cattle-kraal; let us go to dance for you, for our great joy; for I used to say, you are already dead, but in fact you are still alive.” She stood still. Again he slaughtered forty oxen. Then she went, and entered into the kraal.

They danced for her very much. But the other side of the kraal did not rejoice; it did not dance together with the children and queens of that side. They left off dancing.

The father went with her into the house, and sat down with her. He said, “Let a fat young ox be taken, that we may eat and rejoice, for she was dead, and had risen from the death.”

So All the people rejoiced. The child returned to her royal position. Her father did right, royally; he returned to his former habits, and loved at that kraal, for he had ceased to be there much, because he remembered his child which had hied. Her mother and the children of her house rejoiced together.

Her father asked her, “How did you come here?” The child said, “I was brought by a frog.” The father said, “Where is he?” The child replied, “He is yonder in the bush.” The father said, “Let oven be taken, that he may be danced for, and come up to our home.” So they went and danced for him.

They brought him home. They brought him into the house and gave him ,meat, and ate. The king inquired, “What do you wish that I should give you as a reward?” He said, “I wish some black hornless cattle.” He took many cattle and people, and said, “Go with him.” So they went and came to his country.

The frog built a great town, and became a great chief. He slaughtered cattle continually; and men came to ask for meat. They inquired, “What is your chief who built this town?” They said, Uselesele.” They inquired, “Whence did he obtain so large a town as this?” They said, “He got it because he brought out princess to the king; so he gave him cattle and men.” They answered, saying, “Are you then the people of Uselesele?” They said, “Yes. Do not speak disrespectfully of him; he will kill you, for he is a great chief.”

Uselesele took many people under his protection. They revoked from their chiefs through seeing the abundance of food at Uselesele’s. So Uselesele reigned and become a king.

Unkosi-yasenthla heard it said, “Unkosi-yasenzansi has a beautiful daughter, named Umdhlubu.” He said to his people, “Go and see what kind of damsel it is.” They went, and came to Unkosi-yasenzansi, and said, “King, we have seen sent by Unkosi-yasnthla, that we might select a beautiful damsel from among your children.”

He summoned them, and they came. At length they saw only one damsel which excelled all the others in beauty. For they remembered, that if a king has sent people to go and choose a beautiful damsel, it is proper that they should look very earnestly; for those people are the king’s eyes, because he trusts them. They look earnestly, that they may not be reproved when the damsel is brought home. When they see she is ugly, not like aa damsel which has been chosen for a king, they find great fault, saying, “Why have you disgraced the king by choosing an ugly thing for him?” The honor of those men is ended; they are removed from their honorable office, because they are not trustworthy. therefore they chose Umdhlubu for her beauty’s sake, saying, “It is she only who is fit to be the king’s queen above all the others.”

Therefore those who were left were ashamed; and their mothers were ashamed; and their brothers were ashamed. There was rejoicing in the house of Umdhlubu. The joy began with Umdhlubu, who was conspicuous for beauty among many other damsels and in the eyes of them all, for it was said, “There is a beautiful woman indeed!” Her mother rejoiced in her heart, saying, “I did well when I gave birth to my child!” And the children of her house were exalted, although their mother had been long ago exalted by the king, through being loved. there, then, was the hatred which increased towards that house of Umdhlubu, as her mother also was loved very much by the father of Umdhlubu. There was a very great hatred in the hearts of the other queens, on account of the beauty of Umdhlubu, which was admired by the king of another people above all their own children. They were ashamed for ever.

So they looked, and chose Umdhlubu. They departed to tell the king. They arrived home, and said, “King, we have seen the beautiful damsel; her name is Umdhlubu.” The king said, “Aye; it is well. We must set out and go thither, and take a thousand head of cattle. ” So they set out.

Unkosi-yasenzansi, as he was sitting in the shade within the cattle-pen with his people, said, “What is that yonder? There is a great dust which rises to heaven.” They were afraid. He said to his soldiers, “get ready to fight, for we do not know what is coming.” After that the cattle appeared coming with the king and his people. Unkosi-yasenzansi went to meet them.

But the chief said, “I am Unkosi-yasenthla; I come to see Umdhlubu. Then they all went to her house. When they arrived, they asked her to have Umdhlubu given them. Her father rejoiced when he heard that.

They had cattle slaughtered for them. They spoke with the father. Unkosi-yasenthla said, “I come to you, Unkosi-yansenzansi, I being desirous of taking your daughter; if you assent, it is well. I come with a thousand cattle.” The father assented, saying, “It is well.”

He assembled all the girls, and all the men, the young men with head-rings, and the youth; he set apart men for the purpose of working for Umdhlubu. He took out brass and beads for her marriage, and five hundred oxen, and said, “Now it is right. Set out with her. There is an officer for the purpose of conducting the wedding ceremonies.”

So they all went with him, and reached the king’s home. As they were coming into sight, a great cry was raised, and the people appeared in all directions, shouting, “The quee n of Unkosi-yasenthla has come.” They rejoiced.

They retired to rest. In the morning, when the sun had risen, and it was hot, the damsels went out with the young men and youths, and went into the bush; they sat down there. When the time for dancing arrived, they danced; they fetched the damsel from the bush; she went to the kraal to dance.

So they ended the dance. She took brass, and placed it before her father, and prayed, saying, “Sire, take care of me forever, for now I am in thy hand, preserve me.”

The whole marriage party sat down. They danced for them. They ended the dance. In the morning the damsel had ten bullocks killed and they ate and rejoiced.

The officer of the ceremony said, “Sire, we now wish to set out to return home, for the work is done.”

The king took five hundred head of cattle, and sent them as a present to his mother. The men returned home.

And the damsels remained. Umdhlubu’s father had said that they were not to return, but stay with her, and work for her; and many people, both male and female, remained there to build her town.

The king said, “Now build the town of the queen, where she may live with her people.”

So the town was built and completed. The king visited it; many cattle were killed, that the soldiers might eat, and complete the queen’s town. The king also went to live there at the new town. Thus he took Umdhlubu to be his wife.

The people of Umdhlubu’s father reached their home, and said, “O king, we have done all things very well. There are cattle for Umdhlubu’s mother; they are given to her by her son. He told us to give his respects to both his father and mother.”

So all lived together in peace.

[ ZULU ]

THE ELEPHANT AND THE TORTOISE

Two beings, Elephant and Rain, had a dispute. Elephant said, “If you say that you nourish me, in what way is it that you do so?” Rain answered, “If you say that I do not nourish you, when I go away, will you not die?” And Rain then departed.

Elephant said, “Vulture! Cast lots to make rain for me!” Vulture said, “I will not cast lots.”

Then Elephant said to Crow, “Cast lots!” and Crow answered, “Give the things with which I may cast lots.” Crow cast lots and rain fell. It rained at the lagoons, but then they dried up, and only one lagoon remained.

Elephant went hunting. There was, however, Tortoise, to whom Elephant said, “Tortoise, remain at the water!” Thus Tortoise was left behind when Elephant went hunting.

There came Giraffe, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Zebra, who said to Tortoise, Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Gemsbok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Wildebeest, and said, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Roodebok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Springbok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

there came Jackal, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Lion, and said, “Little Tortoise, give me water!” When little Tortoise was about to say something, Lion got hold of it and beat it. Lion drank of the water, and since then all the animals drink water.

When Elephant came back from the hunting, he said, “Little Tortoise, where is the water?” Tortoise answered, “The animals have drunk the water.” Elephant asked, “Little Tortoise, shall I chew you or swallow you down?” Little Tortoise said, “Swallow me, if you please,” and Elephant swallowed it whole.

After Elephant had swallowed little Tortoise, and it had entered his body, it tore off his liver, heart, and kidneys. Elephant said, “Little Tortoise, you kill me.”

So Elephant died, But little Tortoise came out of his dead body and went wherever it liked.

[ HOTTENTOT }

THE FOX AND THE WOLF

Once upon a time there was a wolf and a fox. The wolf was the master and the fox the servant.

One day both were grazing their flock in the pasture and, as they were thus grazing, the wolf and the fox wandered off into the plains to dig up some wild onions. The sheep scattered in pasturing and then lay down. Wolf and Fox were in the plains eating wild onions; in this way they lost sight of the sheep. After a while, the wolf said to the fox, “Companion, go and bring back the sheep!”

The fox found the wild onions very much to his taste, but he got up and bound two sheep together, a ram and a ewe, and then returned. Again the wolf and the fox wandered over the plain to dig up wild onions. After a while the wolf again said to the fox, “Go and bring back the sheep once more!”

The fox, however said, “Companion, look, the sheep are pasturing quietly.” Thereupon the wolf himself got up and looked after the sheep, and there he found the two sheep which had been bound to the tree by the fox, a male one and a female one. He grew very angry when he saw what roguish trick the fox had played on him, and when he returned he asked the fox, “Rascal, where are the other sheep?” and he broke off some branches and struck the fox hard. The fox, thereupon, went to look for the sheep, but, as he was crying, he held his arms up to his head.

Then he looked into the distance and saw two cattle, a white one and a black one, and said, “Those cattle there are mine.” And the wolf questioned him, saying, “Where are they? And the fox said, “Was it not you who just beat me so severely?” And the wolf said, “Well, come and beat me now!” Thereupon the fox looked around for branches from a thorny bush, braided them together, and said to the wolf, “Lie down!”

Then he beat him hard, and the wolf’s blood began to trickle down. And the wolf said, “By the blood of my mother! Did I beat you that hard?” So the fox said, “Come, just look at my back; it is all torn up.” So the wolf said, “Go ahead then, beat me!” When he stopped beating him, he looked out into the distance and saw the two cattle. And the fox said, “The black one is mine.” Then they raced toward the two cattle. The wolf seized the white one and the fox seized the black one. The wolf pierced his cow first, the fox pierced his last. The fox’s cow showed fat in the wound, and the wolf’s nothing bot foam. Then the wolf grew angry and said, “The cow that you have given me is emaciated.” And the fox said, “All right then; take mine.” Then both pierced their cows again, the wolf that belonging to the fox, and the fox that belonging to the wolf. And when the wolf pierced the cow, foam once more appeared in the wound, whereas the wound that the fox made showed fat. So the wolf said, “Let us slaughter them together so that we may eat in common.”

As they were slaughtering them, the wolf said to the fox, “now that we have slaughtered a thing of this kind, why, in truth, are we eating? Let us therefore kill our mothers, so that we can grieve for them.” thereupon the fox said, “Yes.” merely out of roguishness. So they arrived, the wolf led his mother into the field and killed her. But the fox led his mother away and seated her in a cave by the road to the spring and then returned. Thereupon they fetched the meat. The wolf sent the fox out and said, “Get out the cooking-pot and go fetch some water.” So the fox took the vessel and went.

On the road he rubbed some meat around his mouth and then went into the cave where his mother was and said, “Mother!” calling her. And the mother said, “Uooo!” answering him. Then he gave her the meat and went to draw water.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is 2284E213-555A-44F5-8AB5-8514CD8CD574.webp

Upon his return he went to the village of the wolf, and the wolf was full of grief because he had really killed his mother. But the fox was joyful, because he had not really killed his mother. And so they put the meat on to cook. Then the wolf said, “Fox, go fetch me some water. Take some meat and go; you can eat on your way.” And since his mother was hidden near the road, he eagerly hurried on.

One day the wolf said, “Today I shall go to fetch water.” The fox said, “I beg you, I have an aunt there, and the road is bad, let me fetch water.” Nut the wolf said, “It is my turn to go and fetch water.” The fox was disturbed because the wolf would not yield. Now the wolf took the water pail and went and fetched water, and he had not taken any meat along. On his way he came close to the cave, and the fox’s mother called saying, “Fox, my child, have you abandoned me?” So the wolf stayed still and listened to determine where the voice came from.

Then the fox’s mother called again, saying, “my child, have you abandoned me?” So the wolf realized that the fox had deceived him and had not killed his mother. Then he went to the cave and stabbed the mother with the spear and laid her down in the opening. Then he went to fetch water and came back to the village.

The next morning the wolf sent fox saying, “Go, fetch me some water.” Thereupon the fox took some meat and his pail and started out. When he came close to the cave, he called and looked in, thinking she was asleep. And he said, “Mother, mother!” Then he touched her foot. “The poor creature is not sleeping, she only sleeps on one eye, the other is open.” But the mother did not stir, so he got an ant and placed it on her eye, so that it could bite her and wake her up. But she did not wake up; no, she was dead. Then he went into the cave and looked around. And then he saw the wound; and he sat down and cried very hard.

Thereupon he fetched some water and went home and did not want to return to the water any more. The wolf noticed that the fox had become angry. In the evening, when they set the meat to cook and sat by the fire to warm themselves, the fox was crying very hard. Thereupon the wolf questioned him, saying, “What are you crying about?” And the fox said, “I am bleary-eyed, that is all, perhaps it is the smoke.” Yet, when he had taken his seat there, he continued crying. Then the wolf said, “Yonder is your aunt, your mother, whom I have killed and for whom you are weeping. Is that not so? Now I am bewailing both my mother and your mother, my friend.”

The next day dawned. The wolf went to graze his flock, but the fox stayed in the village. The wolf said to him, “Stay here and cook me a good meal!” Thus it was. The wolf went to graze his flock, and the fox stayed in the village and put meat in the pot to cook. As the meat was cooking, the fox took all of it out, scooped up the fat, gathered together some dung of dogs, cattle, and human beings and some pieces of leather for the pot and departed.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is E9A0D6E6-A964-4BAE-A004-DB67DCBEDE87.webp

When the wolf came back in the evening from driving his flock, he found that the fox had disappeared. Under the fur blanket the fox had placed an insect and told it, “If the wolf calls, answer!” And the wolf came in and called saying, “There is the aunt.” Thereupon the insect said “Uooo!” and the wolf was very pleased and said, “There is the aunt of yours; just put her in, she is boiling.” He was very pleased.

He stepped up to the pot and took a stick and stirred with it, saying, “The fox has played a roguish trick again, he has eaten all the meat, the fat as well and then he has disappeared.” Then he grew very wroth and took the fur and beat it thinking that the fox was inside. But the fox had gone long ago. He was far away. This the wolf discovered, so he pursued him and stayed on the spoor, till he found him on a rock. At this he was very well pleased, for now he would be able to kill him. He tried to climb up. Hew climbed part way but then slid back. Then he climbed again but again slid back and said, “Fox, how did you climb up?” But the fox had smeared the rock with tallow, and he said, “Yonder is the aunt; take this pebble, and I shall tell you where I climbed up. Take it and let me see!” Then he continued: “Do show me your teeth that I can see whether they are good or bad, whether they are filed out or whether they are not filed out yet.” So the wolf opened his mouth and the fox threw the rock into the wolf’s mouth and broke all his teeth.

Then the fox ran away. The wolf cried out but not turn back; indeed, he did not. He continued his pursuit of him. Now the fox was at a woman’s house in the village, so when the wolf arrived, he said, “Grab that fox.” He went closer and closer and shouted, “Do not let him get away!” But the fox said, “People, you hear what he is saying: “Let him get away!’ ” So the people went away.

Thereupon the wolf went to the lion and said, “Have pity on me and do seize that fox, do not let him get away!” and the fox said again, “Do you hear? There he says it again: ‘Let him get away!’ “

Finally the fox went into a cave and plucked out all his hair. The wolf caught up with him and said, “How this one resembles the fox with his thick tail and his long muzzle!’ But the fox said, “How the man talks! Have I not plucked myself bare as a Hill Damara, and now he says, you resemble the fox!” And so the wolf went away.

[ HERERO ]

WHY THE CHIEF OF THE SMITHS WAS UNABLE TO CREATE HUMAN BEINGS

A very long time ago there was a king who called Walukaga, chief of the smiths, and gave him a great quantity of iron and said, “I want you to make a real man for me, one who can walk and talk, and who has blood in his body, and who has brains.”

Walukaga took the iron and went home, but he was at a loss what to do, and no one could advise him how to set about making the real man. He went about among his friends telling them what the king has said, and asked what he had better do. No one was able to give him any advice. They all knew that the king would not accept anything short of an honest trial, and would punish the man for not carrying out his commands.

On the way home one day Walukaga net a former friend who had gone mad, and who lived alone on some wasteland. Walukaga did not know that he was mad until he met him. When they approached each other, Walukaga greeted his old friend, and the madman asked him where he had come from. Walukaga reasoned for a moment and then said to himself, “Why should I not tell him my story? Even though he is mad, he used to be my friend.” So he answered, “I have come from some friends where I have been trying to get advice.”

The madman asked what advice he wanted, and Walukaga told him all the king had said, and about the work he had given him to do, and how he had given him the iron, and then added, “What am I to do?”

The madman answered, “If the king has told you to do this work, go to him and say that, if he really wishes to have a nice man forged, he is to order all the people to share their heads and burn the hair until they have made up a thousand loads of charcoal, and he is to get one hundred large pots of water from the tears of the people with which to slake the fire and keep it from burning too fiercely.”

Walukaga returned to the king and said to him, “My lord, if you wish me to make this man quickly and well, order the people to shave their heads and burn their hair, and make a thousand loads of charcoal out of it for me to work the iron into the man. Further, make them collect a hundred pots full of tears to act as water for the work, because the charcoal from wood and the ordinary water from wells are of no use for forging a man.”

The king agreed to the request and gave the order to all the people to shave their heads and burn their hair into charcoal, and to collect all the tears. When they had all shaved their heads and burnt their hair, there was scarcely one load of charcoal, and when they had collected all the tears there were not two pots full of water.

When the king saw the results of his endeavors, he sent for the smith Walukaga and said to him, “Don’t trouble to make the man, because I am unable to get the charcoal or the tears for the water.”

Walukaga knelt down and thanked the king. He then added, “My lord, it was because I knew you would be unable to get the hair for charcoal and the tears for the water that I asked for them; you had asked me to do an impossible thing.”

All the people present laughed and said, “Walukaga speaks the truth.”

[ BAGANDA ]

MANTIS CREATES an ELAND FISH

Mantis once did as follows: Kwammang-a had taken off a part of his shoe and thrown it away, and Mantis picked it up and went and soaked it in the water, at a place where some reeds grew. Mantis went away, then he came back again, went up to the water, and looked. He turned away again, for he saw that the Eland was still small.

Again he came, and found the Eland’s spoor where it had come out of the water to graze. Then Mantis went up to the water, while Eland went seeking the grass which it eats. He waited, sitting by the water, he was upon the water’s bank, opposite Eland’s assegai, and soon Eland came to drink there. He saw Eland as it came to drink. He said, “Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!” And young Eland walked up as when its father thrilled to him. Mantis called, making his tongue quiver, as Bushmen still do in springbok hunting.

Then Mantis went to find some honey; he went to cut some honey. He came back and put the bag of honey down near the water and returned home. Then, before the sun was up, he came back to pick up the bag. He approached while Eland was in the reeds. He called to it, “Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!” And Eland got up from the reeds and walked up to its father. Mantis put down the bag of honey. He took out the honeycomb and laid it down. He kept picking up pieces of it, he kept rubbing it on Eland’s ribs while he splashed them, making them very nice.

Then he went away and took the bag to seek for more honey to cut. When he came back he again laid the bag of honey down near the water and returned home. Once more he returned and picked up the bag, once more he went to the place and called Eland out of the water, saying, “Kwammang-s shoe’s piece.”

Then Eland stood shyly in the water and walked up to its father, for he had grown. His father wept, fondling him. He again rubbed Eland’s ribs making nice with honeycomb. Then he went away, while Eland walked back into the water, went to bask in the water.

Mantis did not come back for a time, and for three nights. Eland grew, becoming like an ox. Then Mantis went out early. The sun rose, as he walked up to the water. He called Eland, and Eland rose up and came forth, and the ground resounded as it came. And Mantis sang for joy about Eland; he sang:

“Ah, a person is here!

Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!

My eldest son’s shoe’s piece!

Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!

My eldest son’s shoe’s piece!”

Meanwhile he rubbed Eland down nicely, rubbed down the male Eland. Then he went away and returned home.

The next morning he called young Ichneumon, saying that young Ichneumon should go with him and that they would be only two. Thus he deceived young Ichneumon. And they went out and reached the water while Eland was grazing. They sat down in the shade of the bush by which Eland’s assegai stood, where he kept coming to take it.

Mantis spoke: “young Ichneumon, go to sleep!” for he meant to deceive him. So young Ichneumon lay down, as Eland came to drink, because the sun stood at noon and was getting hot. Meanwhile young Ichneumon had covered up his head, because Mantis wished him to do so. But young Ichneumon did not sleep; he lay awake.

The Eland walked away, and young Ichneumon said. “Hi, stand! Hi, stand, stand!”

And Mantis said, “What does my brother think he has seen yonder?”

And young Ichneumon said, “A person is yonder, standing yonder.”

And Mantis said, “You think it is magic; but it is a very small thing, it is a bit of father’s shoe, which he dropped. Magic it is not.” And they went home.

Then young Ichneumon told his father Kwammang-a about it. And Kwammang-a said that young Ichneumon must guide him and show him Eland; he would see whether Eland was so very handsome after Mantis had rubbed it down. The young Ichneumon guided his father, while Mantis was at another place, for he meant to go to the water later on. Meanwhile they went up to Eland at the water, and Kwammang-a looked at it and he knocked it down while Mantis was not there. He knocked Eland down and was cutting it up before Mantis came. So when Mantis arrived, he saw Kwammang-a and the others standing there cutting up his Eland.

And Mantis said, “Why could you not first let me come?” And he wept for Eland; he scolded Kwammang-a’s people, because Kwammang-a had not let him come first, and let him be the one to tell them to kill eland.

And Kwammang-a said, “Tell Grandfather to leave off. He must come and gather wood for us, that we may eat, for this is meat.”

When Mantis came, he said he had wanted Kwammang-a to let him come while Eland was still alive, and not to have killed it when he was not looking. They might have waited to kill Eland until he was looking on. Then he himself would have told them to kill it. Then his heart would have been comfortable. Now his heart did not feel satisfied about Eland whom he alone had made.

Then, as he went to gather wood, he caught sight of a gall there, it was Eland’s gall. And he said to himself that he would pierce the gall open and that he would jump upon it. And the gall spoke: “I will burst, covering you over.”

Just the young Ichneumon said, “What are you looking at there, that you do not gather wood at that place?”

So Mantis left the gall, brought wood, and put it down. Then he again looked for wood at the place where the gall had been. He went up to the gall and again said he would pierce the gall open and that he would jump upon it. The gall again said it would burst, covering him all over. He said he would jump, and that the gall must burst when he trod on it and as he jumped.

Young Ichneumon scolded him again and asked, “What can be yonder, that you keep going to that place? You do not gather wood, you just keep going to that bush. You are going to play tricks and not gather wood.”

And Kwammang-a said, “You must make haste and let us go when you have called Grandfather, for the gall lies there; Grandfather has seen it. So you must make haste. When Grandfather behaves like this about anything, he is not acting honorably; he is playing tricks with this thing. So you must manage that we start, when you have called Grandfather, that we may leave the place where the gall is.”

Then they placed the meat into the net, while Mantis untied his shoe and put the shoe into the bag. It was an arrow-bag which he had slung on next the quiver. And so they carried the things and went along homeward. On the way Mantis said, “This shoestring has broken.”

Then young Ichneumon said, “You must have put the shoe away.”

And Mantis said, “No, no the shoe must really be laying there where we cut up Eland. So I must turn back and go fetch the shoe.”

But young Ichneumon said, “You must have put the shoe in the bag. You must feel inside the bag, feel in the middle of it and see whether you cannot find the shoe.”

So Mantis felt in the bag, but he kept feeling above the shoe. He said, “See, the shoe is really not in it. I must go back and pick it ip, for the shoe is truly yonder.”

But young Ichneumon replied, “We must go home, we really must go home.”

Then Mantis said, “You can go home, but I must really go and get the shoe.”

Thereupon Kwammang-a said, Let Grandfather be! Let him turn back and do as he wants.”

And young Ichneumon said, “O you person! I do wish Mantis would for once listen when we speak.”

Mantis only said, “You always go on like this! I must go and get the shoe.”

Then Mantis turned back. He ran up to the gall, reached it, pierced it, and made the gall burst. And the gall broke, covering his head; his eyes became big and he could not see. He groped about, feeling his way. And he went groping along, groping along, groping, until he found an ostrich feather. This he picked up, sucked it, and brushed off the gall from his eyes with it.

Then he threw the feather up and spoke: “You must now lie up in the sky; you must henceforth be the moon. You shall shine at night. By your shining you shall lighten the darkness for men and women, until the sun rises to light up all things for men and women. It is the sun under whom men and women hunt. You must just glow for men and women, while the sun shines for men and women. Under him men and women walk about; they go hunting; they return home. But you are the moon; you give light for men and women, then you fall away, but you return to life after you have fallen away. Thus you give light to all people.”

That is what the moon does: the moon falls away and returns to life, and he lights up all the flat places of the world.

[ BUSHE MEN ]

FOR LOVE MATTERS

You will join me as I have joined others

  • No physical form or physical thought
  • can express my existence.
  • The term love, with its message
  • of caring for another
  • is the most important of our
  • messages in the physical.
  • The Other is to me now what Self was to you.
  • I am a step higher but not removed.
  • Yet, I have changed enough since “my
  • death’ that it is difficult, at times, to relate to your existence.
  • The love and the emotions you feel are
  • the connectives between us.
  • My love for you has not changed but expanded
    • in a way you do not comprehend.
    • Physical needs are for physical beings,
    • and I understand and know this.
    • Touch is important at your level.
    • My new or returned mind loves you more
    • deeply than in our earth time together,
    • but it is also much more understanding of physical need.
    • When I said, “Be for me as I would
    • be for thee,” I didn’t mean to limit you.
    • Be the physical person you need to be,
    • as you as physical for a limited and
    • for a purposeful reason.
    • Enjoy physical reality between others,
    • for the mind endures and exists
    • beyond your understanding and existence.
    • I love you as we will be.
    • Your now is for you to enjoy.
    • I never judge your actions, and this
    • I repeat with love and utmost understanding.
    • Be yourself and in being yourself
    • you will be for me as I would be for thee.
    • You do well and I watch you often.
    • Continue to love physical life
    • while you are physical.

Until Later,

BIG COOKIE

THE SON OF KIMANAUEZE AND THE DAUGHTER OF SUN AND MOON

I often tell of Kimanaueze, who begat a male child. The child grew up, and he came to the age of marrying. His father said, “Marry.”

He said, “I will not marry a woman of the earth.”

His father asked, “Then whom will you marry?”

He answered, “I!” If it must be, I shall marry the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon.”

But the people asked, “Who can go to the sky where the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon lives?”

He simply said, “I, indeed; I want her. If it is anyone on earth, I will not marry her.”

Thereupon he wrote a letter of marriage and gave it to Deer. But Deer said, “I cannot go to the sky.”

Then he gave it to Antelope. Antelope also said, “I cannot go to the sky.”

He gave the letter to Hawk. Hawk, too, said, “I cannot go to the sky.”

He gave the letter to Vulture, but Vulture also said, “I can go half way to the sky; however, All the way I cannot go.”

Finally the young man said, “How shall I do it?” He put his letter in his box and was quiet.

The people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon used to come to get water on earth, and one day Frog came and sought out the son of Kimanaueze and spoke to him.

“Young master.” he said, “give me the letter that I may take it.”

The young master, however, said, “Begone! If people of life, who have wings, gave it up, how can you say, “I will go there?” How can you get there?”

Frog said, “Young master, I am equal to it.”

So Kimanaueze gave Frog the letter, saying, “If you cannot get there and you return with it, I shall give you a thrashing.”

Frog started out and went to the well where people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon were wont to come to get water. He put the letter in his mouth and got into the well and kept very still. In a little while, the people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon came to get water. They put a jug into the well, and Frog got into the jug. After they got the water, they lifted it up, not knowing that Frog had entered the jug. They arrived in the sky, set down the jug in its place and departed.

Then Frog got out of the jug. In the room where they kept the jugs of water, there was also a table. Frog spat out the letter and placed it on top of the table. Then he hid in the corner of the room.

After a while, Lord Sun himself came into the room where the water was; he looked at the table and saw the letter on it. He took it and asked his people, “Where comes this letter?”

They answered, “lord, we do not know.” He opened it and read it. It ran thus: “I, the sun of Na Kimanaueze Kia-Tumb’a Ndala, a man of earth, want to marry the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon.” Lord sun thought to himself in his heart: “Na Kimanaueze lives on earth; I am a man who lives in the sky. He who came with the letter, who is he?” He put the letter away into his box and said nothing.

When Lord Sun finished reading the letter, Frog got into the jug again. After the water had been emptied out of the jugs, the water girls lifted them and went down to earth. They again arrived at the well and put the jugs in the water. Frog then got out and went under the water and hid himself. After the girls had finished the filling of the jugs they left.

The Frog came out of the water and went to his village. There he kept quiet and said nothing. When many days had passed, the son of Kimanaueze asked Frog, “O fellow, where did you take the letter, and how?”

Frog answered, “Master, I delivered the letter, but they have not yet returned an answer.”

The son of Kimanauze said, “O man, you are telling a lie; you did not go there.”

Frog said, “Master, that same place where I went, that you shall see.”

After six days, the son of Kimanaueze again wrote a letter to ask about the former letter, saying: “I wrote to you, Lord Sun and Lady Moon. My letter was delivered but you returned no answer whatsoever to me, saying neither ‘We accept you’ nor ‘We refuse you.'” Having finished his letter, he sealed it. Then he called Frog and gave it to him. Frog started and soon arrived at the well. He took the letter into his mouth, got into the water, and squatted on the bottom of the well.

After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They put the jugs into the water, and Frog got into a jug. When they had finished filling them, they lifted them up. They went up to the sky by means of a cobweb which Spider had woven. Soon they arrived there, and entered a house. There they set down the jugs and departed. Frog came out of a jug, spat out the letter, and laid it on the table. Then he hid in the corner.

After a while, Lord Sun passed through the room where the water was. He looked at the table and saw the letter on it. He opened it and read it. The letter said: “I, son of Na Kimanaueze Kia-Tumb’a Ndala, I ask you, Lord Sun, about my letter that went before. You did not return me an answer at all.”

Lord Sun said, “Girls, you who always go to fetch water, are you carrying letter?”

The girls said, “We, master? No.”

Then doubt possessed Lord Sun. He laid the letters in the box and wrote to the son of Kimanaueze, saying: “You who are sending me letters about marrying my daughter: I agree, on condition that you in person, the man, come with your first-present, so that I may know you.” When he finished writing, he folded the letter and laid it on the table and went away. Frog now came out of the corner and took the letter. He out it in his mouth and entered the jug. Then he remained very quiet.

After a while, the water was emptied from the jugs, and the girls came and lifted them up. Then went to the cord of Spider and descended to earth. They arrived at the well and put the jugs into the water. Frog got out of the jug and went to the bottom of the well. When the girls had completed the filling of the jugs, they returned to the sky. Frog then left the well and soon arrived in his village. He kept very quiet.

When evening came, he said, “Now I will take the letter.” He spat it out and arrived at the house of the son of Kimanaueze. He knocked at the door, and the son of Kimanaueze asked, “Who is it?”

Frog answered, “I, Mainu, the frog.”

The son of Kimanaueze got up from his bed where he was reclining and said, “Come in.”

So Frog went in and delivered the letter. Then he departed. The son of Kimanaueze opened the letter and read it. What Lord Sun announced pleased him. He said to himself: “Why, it was the truth Frog told me when he said ‘you shall see where I went.’ ” Then he went to sleep.

The next morning, he took forry macutas and wrote a letter, saying: “You, Lord Sun and Moon, here is the first-present; I remain on earth to seek for the wooing-present. You up there, you tell me the amount of the wooing-present.” He finished the letter and called Frog. When he came, he gave him the letter and the money, saying, “Take this.”

So Frog started. Soon he arrived at the well. He went to the bottom of the well and remained very quiet. After a while, the girls came down and put the jugs in the water, and Frog entered one of them. When the girls had finished filling them, they took them up. Again they went up to the sky by means of a cobweb. Soon they arrived in the room for the water. They set down the jugs and went away.

The Frog got out of the jug and put the letter in the table, together with the money. Then he hid in the corner. Some time later, Lord Sun came into the room and found the letter on the table. He took it with the money and read the letter. Then he told his wife the news that had come from the prospective son-in-law. His wife assented.

Lord Sun said, “Who is coming with these letters? I do not know. How shall his food be cooked?”

His wife, however, answered, “No matter, we shall cook it anyhow and put it on the table where the letters have been found.”

Lord Sun replied, “Very well.”

So they killed a mother hen and cooked it. When evening came, they cooked mush. They set these eatables on the table and shut the door. Frog came to the table and ate the victuals. Then he went to the corner and kept quiet.

Lord Sun now wrote another letter, saying: “You, son-in-law of mine, the first-present, which you have sent me, I have received. For the amount of the wooing-present, you shall give me a sack of money.” When he had finished the letter, he laid it on the table and left the room. Then Frog came out of the corner and took the letter. Shortly afterward, he entered the jug and went to sleep.

In the morning the girls took the jugs and went down to the earth. They arrived at the well and put the jugs into the water. Frog then got out of the jug. When the girls had finished filling the jugs, they again went up to the sky.

Frog now got out of the water and soon arrived at his village. He entered his own house but waited quietly until sundown. When evening had come, he said, “Now I will take the letter.” He started out and soon arrived at the house of the son of Kimanaueze. He knocked at the door and the son of Kimanaueze asked, “Who is it?”

Then Frog answered, “I, Manu, the frog.”

“Come in,” he replied.

Frog went in; he gave him the letter and departed. The son of Kimanaueze opened the letter, read it, and then put it aside.

Six days passed; then he was ready with the sack of money. He called Frog, and when Frog had come, the son of Kimanaueze wrote the following letter: “You, my parents-in-law, the wooing-present is enclosed. Soon I myself, I shall find a day to bring my wife home.” He gave the letter to Frog, together with the money.

Frog then started and soon arrived at the well. Again he went in under the water and hid. After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They put the jugs, as usual, in the water; Frog, as usual, entered a jug. When they had finished filling the jugs, they took them up, going up by means of Spider’s cobweb. Soon they arrived in the sky. There they set down the jugs in the regular room and departed. Frog then got out of the jug and laid the letter down on the table, together with the money. Then he went into a corner and hid.

Soon Lord Sun came into the room and found the letter and the money. He took both and showed the money to his wife, Lady Moon.

Lady Moon thereupon said, “It is good.”

Then they took a young hog and killed it. When they had cooked the food, they set it down on the table and shut the door. Frog came in then and ate it. When he had finished, he entered the jug and went to sleep.

The next morning the water carriers took the jugs and again went down to earth. They soon arrived at the well and dipped the jugs in the water. Frog then got out of the jug and hid. When they had finished filling the jugs, they again returned to the sky. Then Frog left the well and soon arrived at his village. He entered his house and went to sleep.

The next morning, he said to the son of Kimanaueze, “Young master, I gave them the wooing-present, and they accepted it. They cooked me a young hog, and I ate it. Now, you, yourself, shall choose the day to fetch the bride home.”

The son of Kimanaueze said, “Very well.” Then twelve days elapsed.

Now the son of Kimanaueze spoke to Frog: “I need people to fetch the bride for me, but I cannot find them. All those to whom I speak say, ‘We cannot go to the sky.’ Now, what shall I do Frog?”

Frog said, “My young master, be at ease; I shall find a way to go and bring her home for you.”

But the son of Kimanaueze said, “You cannot do that. You could indeed carry the letters, but bring the bride home – that you are unable to do.”

But Frog again said, “Young master, be at ease; be not troubled for naught. I indeed will be able to go and bring her home. Do not despise me.”

The son of Kimanaueze said, “Well, I will try you.”

Then he took some victuals and gave them to Frog.

Frog thereupon started. Soon he arrived at the well. Again he got into the well and hid. After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They dipped the jugs in the water. Frog entered one of them. When they had filled them, they went back. Arriving at the proper room, they set down the jugs and departed. Then Frog got out of the jug and hid in a corner. When the sun had set and it was evening, Frog left the room of the water jugs and went to seek the room where the daughter of Lord Sun slept. He found it and saw her asleep there. First, he took out one of her eyes and, then, the other. These he tied up in a handkerchief and went back to the room where the jugs were. He hid in a corner and slept.

In the morning, all the people got up, but not the daughter of Lord Sun. So they asked her, “Why do you not get up?”

And she answered, “My eyes are closed; I cannot see.”

Her father and mother said, “What may be the cause of this? Yesterday she did not complain.”

So lord Sun called for two messengers and said to them, “Go to Ngombo to divine about my child who is sick, whose eyes are sick.”

They started immediately and soon arrived at the Ngombo-man’s. They gave him presents and Ngomobo took out his paraphernalia. Not the people who came did not let him know anything about the disease; they simply said, “We have come to be divined.”

Ngomobo looked into his paraphernalia and said, “Disease has brought you. The one who is sick is a woman. The sickness that ails her concerns her eyes. You have come, being sent; you have not come of your own will. I have spoken.”

The people said, “True. Now tell us what caused the ailment.”

Ngombo looked again and said, “She, the woman is sick, is not yet married. She is only chosen. Her master, who bespake her, has sent a spell, saying, ‘My wife, let her come; if she does not come, she shall die.’ You, who came to divine, go, bring her to her husband, that she may escape death. I have spoken.”

The messengers agreed and get up. They went to Lord Sun and reported to him the words of Ngombo.

Lord Sun said, “All right. Let us sleep. Tomorrow they shall take her down to the earth.”

Frog, being in his corner, heard all that they were saying. Then all slept.

The next morning, Frog got into the jug. Again the water carriers came. Again they took up the jugs. Then they descended to the earth and soon arrived at the well. They put the jugs in the water, and Frog came out of one of them. He hid under the well. When the jugs were fill, the water carriers went up to the sky.

The Lord Sun told Spider, “Weave a large cobweb, down to earth, for this is the day when my daughter will be taken down to the earth.” Spider wove and finished the web. thus time passed.

Frog now got out of the well and went to his village. He found the son of Kimanueze and said to him, “O young master! Thy bride , today she comes.”

The son of Kimanaueze said, “Begone, man, you are a liar.”

Frog answered, “Master, this is the truth itself. This evening I will bring her to you.”

Frog then returned to the well and got into the water and was silent.

Now the sun had set, and the daughter of Lord Sun was taken down to the earth. They left her at the well and then went back.

Frog now got out of the well and spoke to the young woman, saying, “I myself will be your guide. Let us go immediately so that I can bring you to your master.” Then Frog returned her eyes to her and they started. Soon they entered the house of the son of Kimanaueze. Frog exclaimed:

“O young master! Your bride is here.”

The son of Kimanaueze said, “Welcome, Mainu, the frog.”

And so the son of Kimanaueze married the daughter of Lord Sun and lady Moon, and they lived on.

[ AMBUNDU ]

HOW THE MASON-WASP FETCHED FIRE FROM THE GOD

Vulture, Fish-Eagle, and Crow were without fire, for there was no fire on earth. So, needing fire, all the birds assembled and asked, “Whence shall we find fire?”

Some of the birds said, “Perhaps from God.”

Thereupon Mason-Wasp volunteered, saying, “Who will go with me to God?”

Vulture answered and said, “We will go with you, I and Fish-Eagle and Crow.”

So on the morrow they took leave of all the other birds, saying, “We are going to see whether we can get fire from God.” Then they flew off. After they had spent ten days on the road, there fell to earth some small bones – that was Vulture; later, there also fell to earth some other small bones – that was Fish-Eagle. Mason-Wasp and Crow were left to go on alone. When the second ten days were ended, there fell other small bones to earth – that was Crow. Mason-Wasp was left to go on by himself. When the third ten days were over, he was going along, reposing upon the clouds. Nevertheless he never reached the summit of the sky.

As soon as God heard of it. He came to where Mason-Wasp was; And, answering God’s question as to where he was going. Mason-Wasp said, “Chief, I am not going anywhere in particular. I have only come to beg some fire. All my companions have dropped by the way; but nevertheless, I have persevered in coming, for I had set my heart upon arriving where the Sky-God is.”

Thereupon God answered him, saying, “Mason-Wasp, since you have reached Me, you shall be chief over all the birds and reptiles on earth. To you, now, I give a blessing. You shall not have to beget children. When you desire a child, go and look into a grain-stalk and you will find an insect whose name is Ngongwa. When you have found him, take and carry him into a house. When you arrive in the house, look for the fireplace where men cook, and build there a building in the house for your, child Ngongwa. When you have finished building, put him in and let him remain there. When many days have elapsed, just go and look at him. And one day you will find he has changed and become just as you yourself are.”

So it is today: Mason-Wasp, before he builds a house, looks for the fireplace, just as he was commanded by God.

[ BAILA ]

MANTIS AND THE ALL-DEVOURER

Mantis was speaking: “Now I want you, Ichneumon, to catch some fat sheep for my father to cut up for us and hang up to dry near the house. I do not feel like cutting any up, as I am still writhing with pain. The swelling must first disappear, then I, too, can cut them up, then I too. shall hang meat to dry at my house. Because I, too, want the sheep’s fat to be dry, that the women may render it, so that we may moisten the dry meat which we have been crunching. For the quagga’s meat was white with age and not tender. Now I want to cut up the old sheep, and let the young ones wait a little, for we shall not finish all these sheep; they are too many. I, furthermore, want Porcupine to go out tomorrow, when she has cooked and out aside the meat which she has dried. The Man yonder shall come and eat with me of these sheep, because I haver counted them and I see that they are plentiful.

But Porcupine said, “Do you really want me to go to the Man yonder, who eats bushes? He will come and swallow all the sheep, as they stand in the kraal. You need not think that even these bushes will be left, for we shall be swallowed with the sheep. A Man who devours things as he does – walks along eating the very bushes among which he walks!”

Mantis replied to her, “You must go to your other father, the All-Devourer, that he may help me eat up these sheep, and drink this soup. I have already poured away some of the soup, because I feel that my heart is upset. Fat has taken hold of my heart; I do not want to drink more soup. I want the Old Man yonder to come to drink it up. Then I can talk, for I do not talk now. Do you, therefore, fill the sack with cooked meat and take it. Then he will come; otherwise he might refuse.”

Porcupine protested again: “People do not live with that Man. He is alone. People cannot hand him food, for his tongue is like fire. He burns people’s hands with it. You need not think that we can hand food to him, for we shall have to dodge away to the sheep opposite. The pots will be swallowed with the soup in them. Those sheep will be swallowed up in the same way, for yonder Man always does so. He does not often travel, because he feels the weight of his stomach which is heavy. See, I Porcupine, live with you, although he is my real father, because I think he might devour me, and you will not devour me. Nevertheless, I will fetch him tomorrow, that he may come. Then you will see him yourself with your own eyes.”

Porcupine went on the morrow, carrying cooked meat. She arrived at her real father’s, the All-Devourer. There she stopped and set down the sack of meat. She said to he father, “Go! Cousin yonder invites you to come and help eat the sheep yonder, for his heart is troubling him. It is he who wants you to come. I have told you. Now I will go on in front, for I do not walk fast.”

She shook the meat out of the bag upon the bushes. The All-Devourer licked up the meat and the bushes with it; he just gulped down the bushes too. Porcupine slung on her empty bag, and went forward quickly. While she walked she gave directions: “You must climb up to that place from which I came; you will see the sheep standing there.” She went ahead in great fear of the All-Devourer, and was the first to reach the hut.

Mantis asked her, “Where is your father?”

Porcupine answered him, “He is still on his way. Look at that bush standing up there, and see if a shadow comes gliding from above. Watch for the bush to break off, then look for the shadow; when you see that, the bushes up there will have disappeared, for his tongue will take away the bushes beforehand, while he is still approaching from behind the hill. Then his body will come up and when he arrives the bushes will be gone all along the way to us. We shall no longer be hidden. Now I want Ichneumon to eat plenty, for of that meat he will never eat again and when the Man yonder comes, the bushes will be finished and the sheep likewise be swallowed up.”

The All-Devourer followed Porcupine’s spoor. As he went he ate up the bushes. He climbed up, finishing off the bushes, while his shadow glided up to Mantis’s hut. The shadow fell upon Mantis. Mantis looked at the sun. He asked where the clouds were, for the sun seemed to be in clouds.

Porcupine said to him, “There are no clouds there, but I want Ichneumon to go and hide this pot away for me, for the truly feels the shadow of the man coming yonder. It altogether shuts us in. The sun will seem to have set when he reaches us. His mouth sits black along there; it it not shadow, it is what the trees go into.”

Then mantis saw the All-Devourer’s tongue. He asked Porcupine, “Is your father holding fire in his hand, for a fire is waxing red yonder?”

Porcupine answered, “It is the Man coming there, whose tongue is red. He is night, therefore you see his tongue. We will get out of the way here. We will not hand him anything ourselves, but put down something for him, for his tongue would singe our hands if we held anything out to him. Therefore I want Dasse to hide the other pot that she may still have soup. For now she herself sees the stomach, it truly extends to either side of us. We do not hear the wind, because he comes; the wind does not blow, for he always makes a shelter when he stands. He does not sit down, he stands; he will first eat up the things around him for they are still plentiful. He has put a layer of bushes in the bottom of his stomach and he has partly filled it, but he has not filled it up yet. Therefore he is still seeking food. He is a Man who fills himself to his trunk. If he looks round and finds no food, he will swallow these people, for they invited him to come to food which was not sufficient to his hunger.

The All-Devourer arrived, and Mantis placed food for him. The All-Devourer gulped it quickly down. Then Mantis took soup and poured it into a bucket. The All-Devourer swallowed the bucket. A pot was still keeping warm. Now Mantis took meat which had been put away in a bag, he put it into a bucket, and pushed the bucket toward the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer put out his tongue and licked and scorched Mantis’s hands. Mantis pulled his arms quickly away and sprang aside, knocking against Dasse.

Dasse said, “Why does Mantis spring aside from the Man whom he invited to come? Porcupine told him not to give anything with his hands, but to put meat for the All-Devourer on the bushes.”

Mantis took meat and put it in the pot. He said to young Mantis, “O child, make a good fire for the pot. My hands are burning and keep me sitting where Grandfather scorched me. You can feel his breath which is hot. His tongue feels like that, too.”

Then Dasse said to him, “You ought to ladle out sheep’s meat and put it on the bushes.” But Mantis dod not hear, he sat spitting on his hands to cool them. He ladled out another bucketful. He again pushed the bucket to the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer licked his hands again. Mantis sprang aside, losing his balance, and tumbled into the hut. He got up, and sat licking, cooling his hands. He spoke to Ichneumon: “O Ichneumon, give me meat to cook, for you see it is as Porcupine told us, the buckets seem to have vanished.”

But Ichneumon said to Mantis, “Mother told you that it would be like this. You would not listen; you invited the big cousin whom people know, whom no one invites, because his tongue is like fire.”

Now Mantis called to young Mantis, “Go and fetch me the meat which Porcupine hid, for you see this bucket of meat has been devoured. You must look at the stomach.”

Mantis brought two buckets and ladled out the meat. Dasse nudged him, and he winked at her. He slung a bucket forward with meat in it, then he slung another bucket forward alongside of it. The All_devourer’s tongue licked his ear, and he tumbled into the hut.

Dasse spoke to him and he winked at her. She said, “O Mantis, leave off winking at me! You must feed cousin, whom you invited. You must give him plenty to eat; Porcupine told you that she did not want to fetch him, because his tongue is always like this.”

The All-Devourer gobbled up both buckets, he licked up the meat which was on the bushes of the hut and devoured it, together with the bushes.

Mantis then said to Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, you must cook at that other place, and bring the meat which is on the bushes, for the buckets here are all swallowed. I will give the Old Man a pot which is hot to swallow, for you see the bushes are all gone. I shall no longer sit and cook in the bushes, and when the wind blows.”

The All-Devourer stepped backward, he licked up Kwammang-a’s home bushes, he devoured them quickly with the meat on them.

Mantis spoke to Ichneumon: “O Ichneumon, quickly bring another sheep, you must cut it up quickly, for you see that the bushes have all been swallowed with all the meat.”

The All-Devourer asked for water. Mantis lifted up a whole waterbag and set it before him. The All-Devourer’s tongue took up the waterbag; he swallowed it with the water in it. He licked up a thorn bush.

Mantis then spoke to young Mantis: “You see, we shall not eat, for that thorn bush has been devoured, even though it has thorns.” Again mantis said to Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, fetch that water there which is in the waterbag, for you see the other waterbag has been swallowed. Grandfather turns his head seeking for more water. He himself has devoured all the other things, he still seems likely to gobble up our beds. I shall truly sit upon the ground, if Grandfather eats up all the things in my hut.

The All-Devourer licked up Porcupine’s things; he swallowed them quickly. Then Mantis said to his son, young Mantis, “See, sister’s things there have been devoured; sister sits there on a bare place. All the sheep will soon be devoured.”

The All-Devourer looked toward the sheep, his tongue took up all the sheep, he swallowed them quickly, while they were still alive.

Mantis exclaimed, “Have no the sheep been quickly swallowed, even before I had cut them up as I meant to do? Alas, the bushes have vanished, swallowed up! We are sitting on a bare place. Alas! Now I lack my things which I brought, that I might possess them.”

Porcupine winked at Ichneumon. “O Ichneumon, I tell you, your younger brother must spring away. Father will be swallowed, if he goes on acting bravely like this; and Grandfather Mantis, the one who is talking, he will certainly be swallowed.”

The All-Devourer called out his name, He-Who-Is-a-Devourer-of-Things, whom Mantis had called to come to him. He said to Mantis, “O Mantis, bring out the things to which you invited me, the real things which I, a devourer of things should eat.” He advanced and burned Mantis with his tongue.

But Mantis said, “I who am Mantis who invited You-Who-Devour-Things to my home. You came and finished off my things.. You should not ask, seeking the real food to which I invited you, for those sheep which you have devoured were the food. There is no food.”

Thereupon the All-Devourer quickly devoured Mantis and Mantis was quiet. Young Mantis spring away and took up the bow. The All-Devourer looked toward Kwammang-a. Young Kwammang-a sprang aside and ran away. Mantis was quite silent, because he was in the stomach of the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer stood opposite Kwammang-a and said that he was really going to swallow his daughter Porcupine’s husband, even though he was handsome, yet he would swallow him, for he felt inclined to do so. He advanced and quickly swallowed his daughter’s husband with the bed on which he was sitting. All-Devourer’s stomach now hung almost down to the earth.

Porcupine wept; she stood sighing. The children came from afar. Then Porcupine asked young Mantis, “Are you a fierce man?” He was silent. She asked him, “Are you angry?” Young Mantis was silent, because he felt angry. She also questioned her son, young Kwammang-a. She turned as she sat, heated a spear, and asked her son, “Are you angry?” You must remember that Grandfather’s tongue resembles fire. I do not want you to flinch, if your heart is like father’s heart, ” Young Kwammang-a sat still; they agreed to cut his grandfather open.

She took the spear out of the fire and drew it, burning hot, along her younger brother’s temple. The fire burnt his ear; he sat still. She reheated the spear, it became red hot. She put the spear burning hot into her younger brother’s nose. Tears slowly gathered and stood in his eyes. She said to him, “A mild person is this, whose tears slowly gather.”

She reheated the spear and laid it, burning hot, on her son’s ear-root. Her son sat still. She heated the spear again, and said to her son, “Grandfather’s tongue is like this; I don’t want you to flinch from him, if your heart is like your father’s heart.” She took out the spear when it was red, and out it into her son’s nose. Then she looked at his eyes. They were dry. She said to herself, “Yes, a fierce man is this; that one is a mild man. This one if fierce; he resembles his father. That other one is a mild; he resembles his father Mantis. He is a runaway.” She said to her son, “Remember, Grandfather’s tongue is like this. You must sit firmly when you go to Grandfather.”

The children went in wrath to their Grandfather; they approached him as he lay in the sun. He arose, stood up, and waited. Young Kwammang-a said to the other, “Mother wished me to sit on one side of Grandfather, and you to sit on his other side. Because you cut with the left hand like your father, you must sit with your left arm, in which you hold the spear, outward. I will sit opposite on this side, so that I may have my right arm, in which I hold the spear, outside.”

The All-Devourer scorched young Mantis’s temple with his tongue. He walked forward, he scorched with his tongue the ear-root of his grandson, young Kwammang-a. He said that this little child really seemed very angry. He walked forward, and scorched the root of young Mantis’s ear with his tongue. Young Mantis sat still. All-Devourer went forward, and scorched young mantis’s other ear with his tongue. Young Kwammang-a looked hard at the other and signed to him to hold his spear fast, and he held his own well. The other also held his spear well, because he had said beforehand, “You must cut one side, while I cut the other side. Then we must run away, while the people pour out.”

He sprung forward and cut the All-Devourer; and the other cut him too. Then they ran away, while fathers poured forth. The sheep also poured forth, the buckets poured forth; his father sat on his bed; the pots poured forth; all things poured down. His grandfather doubled up and died.

Then the children said, “O bushes, we have cut you out. You shall truly become bushes; you shall again grow in your place; you shall be what you were before. The place shall be right again and these sheep shall wander over it. They shall graze over it, and again return to the kraal, which shall be as it was before. For that Man who now lies here, who ate up the bushes, shall utterly perish and disappear, so that the people may get dry bushes and be able to warm themselves.” Thus young Mantis spoke. He felt that he truly resembled his father, that his speech resembled his father’s speech. And it all came true.

Now Dasse gave Mantis water but said to him, “O Mantis, you must drink only a little!”

Mantis replied, “I am dying of thirst, I must drink up the egg-shell-ful.” He gulped all the water down and sank to the ground. Kwammang-a waited.

Porcupine said to Dasse, “Take that long stick lying there; you must beat your husband on the shinbone with it until he gets up, you must hold his face fast and rub it.” So Dasse took up the long stick and hit Mantis on the shin. He started up quickly and sat shivering.

Dasse reproved him: “I told you to drink only a little, because you would be like this, if you gulped down all the water; but you would drink nearly all, thus killing yourself, so that you fell down.”

Now porcupine gave Kwammang-a some water and said to him, “O Kwammang-a! You must drink only a little. You must put the water down soon – when you have just wet your mouth. You must sit down then and wash yourself a little, for you have just come out of the stomach in which you were. Then presently you can drink plentifully, when you feel that your body is warm.”

Kwammang-a drank a little, he put down the water quickly, and did not gulp it all down. He washed himself, drank again, and then drank plentifully.

His wife cooked the meat for him which she had kept hidden away. She had told Ichneumon to hide some for her, so that they could eat it after the children had dealt with the Man who was devouring them, and he lay dead. “We must eat here, for he lies yonder, where the children have slain him. Then we will travel away, leaving him lying outside the hut. We will move away and seek a new home, because the Man lies in front of this home. We will live in a different hut which we will make our home.”

Then they travelled away to a new home, and left the hut at which the Man who had devoured the people was lying. In this new home they always lived in peace.

[ BUSHMEN ]

HOW DISEASES CAME TO ASHANTI

Now there lived Kwaku Anase, the spider, and he went to Nyankonpon, the sky-god, and said, “Grandsire, take your sheep called Kra Kwame, the one which you keep to sacrifice to your soul on a Saturday, and let me kill and eat it, that I may go and bring you a beautiful girl in exchange.”

The sky-god gave him the sheep, and Ananse set out and returned to his village and killed the sheep and ate it. The spider then went to a certain village. In that village there was not a single male – all were women. Ananse married them all and he and they lived there.

One day, a hunter came and saw them. When he left, he went and said to the sky-god, “As for Ananse and the sheep of yours which he received, he has killed it and given it to some women to eat and then married them.”

The sky-god said, “Is it true?”

The hunter said, “Grandsire, it is the truth.”

The sky-god then sent messengers, telling them to go to that village and bring to him all the women who were there.

The messenger went off, met the women, and, with the exception of one woman who was ill, took them all to the sky-god.

Ananse said, “You who remain, what can I do with you?” You can’t do anything for me?”

The sick woman said, “Go and bring me a gourd cup.” Ananse went and brought a gourd cup.

She said, “Bathe me, and take the water you have used and pour it into the gourd.”

Ananse bathed her body and poured the water he had used into the gourd.” She then became very beautiful; there was no woman like her in the tribe. Then Anase married her again, Although she was already his.

Now the hunter came again, and he saw this woman. He went off and reported to the sky-god, saying, “Ananse has made a fool of you, he sent you the ugly women and has kept the beautiful one for himself.”

The sky-god sent messengers and directed them to go to the village where the spider was and to bring the woman to him.

They delivered the message of the sky-god to Ananse. He said, “Would he not like me to come also?”

The messengers said, “The sky-god said we must take the woman to him.” Ananse said, “That is she sitting there, take her away.”

After she had been taken, Ananse went and got the gourd into which all the diseases he had taken from the woman had been poured, and he stretched a skin over the mouth of it. Then he stretched a skin over another gourd and gave it to his child, Ntikuma, and Ananse beat on the drum he had made and sang:

“Y’ odende dende den,

Y’ odende den.

Aso Ya-e!

Y’ odende den.

Your eyes are red in vain!

Y’ odende den,

You are bandy-armed!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

Is that Aso Ya?

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

You are knock-kneed!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

Your nose is a lump on your face!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

Your feet are large as paddles,

like those of a slave!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

Your head is like a cow!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.”

Ntikuma drummed and sang:

“Beautiful maiden,

Beautiful maiden!”

And Afudotwedotwe or Belly-Like-to-Burst and Nyiwankonfwea of Thin-Shanks, Ananse’s children, danced. Ananse, the crow, ran with speed and told the sky-god,” Ananse has a dance which is fitting for you but not for a spider.”

Immediately the sky-god sent messengers there to Ananse to go and bring him this dance.

Ananse said, “this dance of mine, we perform it only in the harem, and if the sky-god agrees then I shall bring it along.”

The messengers returned and told the sky-god. The sky-god said, “That is nothing, let him, bring it to the harem.” Ananse went with the drums to the harem, and the sky-god came and danced, and all his wives danced.

Now, there remained the one who had been sick. When she saw that Ananse had stretched a skin over the gourd in which were all her diseases, because of that she said she would not dance. And now the sky-god forced her, and she came; and when she was about to dance. Ananse lifted up the gourd and struck the woman with it, and the diseases scattered with a sound like a tese!

That is how syphilis, stomach-ache, headache, leprosy, Guinea worm, small pox, yaws, fits, diabetes, and madness came among the tribe. Once there was no sickness among mankind/womankind. It was the sky-god who was the cause of Ananse’s bringing diseases among the tribe.

[ ASHANTI ]

THE ORIGIN OF DEATH II

AND HOW DID IT HAPPEN?

It is God who created men. And since God had pity, He said, “I do not wish men to die altogether. I wish that, men having died, should rise again.” And so. He created men and placed them in another region. But He stayed at home.

And then God saw the chameleon and the weaver-bird. After He had spent three days with the chameleon and the weaver-bird, He recognized that the weaver-bird was a great maker of the words compounded of lies and truth. Now of lies there were many, but of the words of truth there were few.

Then He watched the chameleon and recognized that he had great intelligence. He did not lie. His words were true. So he spoke to the chameleon, “Chameleon, go into that region where I have placed the men I created, and tell them that when they have died, even if they are altogether dead, still they shall rise again – that each man shall rise again after he dies.”

The chameleon travelled on, and when he had arrived at his destination, he said, “I was told, I was told, I was told…” But he did not say what he had been told.

The weaver-bird said to God, “I wish to step out for a moment.”

And God said to him, “Go!”

But the weaver-bird, since he is a bird, flew swiftly, and arrived at the place where the chameleon was speaking to the people and saying, “I was told…” Everyone was gathered there to listen. When the weaver-bird arrived, he said, “What was told to us? Truly, we were told that men, when they are dead, shall perish like the roots of the aloe.”

Then the chameleon exclaimed, “But we were told, we were told, that when men are dead, they shall rise again.”

Then the magpie interposed and said, “The first speech is the wise one.”

And now all the people left and returned to their homes. This was the way it happened. And so men become old and die; they do not rise again.

[ AKAMBA ]

THE ORIGIN OF DEATH III

The moon, it is said, once sent an insect to men/women, saying, “Go o men/women and tell them, ‘As I die, and dying live, so you shall also die, and dying live.'”

The insect started with the message, but, while on his way, was overtaken by the hare, who asked, “On what errand are you bound?”

The insect answered, “I am sent by the Moon to men/women, to tell them that as she dies, and dying lives, so shall they also die and dying live.”

The hare said, “As you are an awkard runner, let me go.” With these words he ran off, and when he reached men/women, he said, “I am sent by the Moon to tell you, ‘As I die and dying perish, in the same manner you also shall die and come wholly to an end.’ “

The hare then returned to the Moon and told her what he had said to men/women.

The Moon reproached him angrily, saying, “Do you dare tell the people a thing which I have not said?”

With these words the moon took up a piece of wood and struck the hare on the nose. Since that day the hare’s nose has been slit, but men/women believe what Hare had told them.

[ HOTTENTOT ]

THE ORIGIN OF DEATH

Long, long, ago there was a great famine in the world, and a certain your man, while wandering in search of food, strayed into a part of the bush where he had never been before. Presently he perceived a strange mass lying on the ground. He approached and saw that it was the body of a giant whose hair resembled that of white men in that it was silky rather than woolly. It was of an incredible length and stretched as far from Krachi to Salaga. The young man was properly awed at the spectacle, and wished to withdraw, but the giant, noticing him, asked what he wanted.

The young man told about the famine and begged the giant to give him some food. The latter agreed on condition that the youth would serve him for a while. This matter having been arranged, the giant said that his name was Owuo, or Death, and he then gave the boy some meat.

Never before had the latter tasted such fine food, and he was well pleased with his bargain. He served his master for a long time and received plenty of meat, but one day he grew homesick, and he begged his master to give him a short holiday. The latter agreed, if the youth returned to his village and there persuaded his brother to go with him into the bush, and he gave him to Owuo.

In course of time the youth became hungry again and longed for the meat which Owuo had taught him to like so much. So one day he made up his mind to return to his master, and, leaving the village, he made his way back to the giant’s abode. The latter asked him what he wanted, and when the youth told him that he wanted to taste once more of the good meat, the giant bade him enter the hut and take as much as he liked, but added that he would have to work for him again.

The youth agreed and entered the hut. He ate as much as he could and went to work at the task which his master set him. The work continued for a ling time and the boy ate his fill every day. But, to his surprise, he never saw anything of his brother, and when ever he asked about him, the giant told him that the lad was away on business.

Once more the youth grew homesick and asked for leave to return to his village. The giant agreed on condition that he would bring a girl for him, Owuo, to wed. So the youth went home and there persuaded his sister to go into the bush and marry the giant. The girl agreed, and took with her a slave companion, and they all repaired to the giant’s abode. There the youth left the two girls and went back to the village.

It was not very long after that he again grew hungry and longed for a taste of the meat. So he made his way once more into the bush and found the giant. The latter did not seem over pleased to see the boy and grumbled at being bothered a third time. However, he told the boy to go into the inner chamber of his hut and take what he wanted. The youth did so and took up a bone which he began to devour. To his horror he recognized it at once as being the bone of his sister. He looked around at all the rest of the meat and saw that it was his sister and her slave girl.

Thoroughly frightened, he escaped from the house and ran back to the village. There he told the elders what he had done and the awful thing he had seen. At once the alarm was sounded and all the people went out into the bush to see for themselves the dreadful thing they had heard about. When they drew near to the giant they grew afraid at the sight of so evil a monster. They went back to the village and consulted among themselves what they had best do. At last it was agreed to go to Salga, where the end of the giant’s hair was, and set a light to it. This was done, and when the hair was burning well they returned to the bush and watched the giant.

Presently the latter began to toss about and to sweat. It was quite evident that he was beginning to feel the heat. The nearer the flames advanced, the more he tossed and grumbled. At last the fire reached his head and for the moment the giant was dead.

The villagers approached him cautiously, and the young man noticed magic powder which had been concealed in the roots of the giant’s hair. He took it and called the others to come and see what he had found. No one could say what power this medicine might have, but an old man suggested that no harm would be done if they sprinkled some of it on the bones and meat in the hut. This idea was carried out, and to the surprise of everyone, the girls and the boy at once returned to life.

The youth, who had still some of the powder left, proposed to out it on the giant. But at this there was a great uproar as the people feared Owuo might come to life again. The boy, therefore, by way of compromise, sprinkled it into the eye of the dead giant. At once the eye opened and the people fled in terror. But alas, it is from that eye that death comes, for every time that Owuo shuts that eye a man dies, and, unfortunately for us, he is forever blinking and winking.

[ KRACHI }

HOW THE FIRST RAIN CAME

Once Long Ago, a daughter was born to Obassi Osaw, and a son to Obassi Nsi. When both of them had come to marriageable age, Nsi sent a message and said, “Let us exchange children. I will send my son that he may wed one of your girls, and you send your daughter down to my town, that she may become, my wife.”

To this Obassi Osaw agreed. So the son of Nsi went up to the heavens, carrying many fine gifts, and Ara, the sky maiden, came down to dwell on earth. With her came seven men slaves and seven women slaves whom her father gave to work for her, so that she should not be called upon to do anything herself.

One day, very early in the monring, Obassi Nsi said to his new wife, “Go, work on my farm!”

She sanswered, “My father gave me the slaves, so that they should work instead of me. Therefore seend them.”
Obassi Nsi was very angry and said, “Did you not hear that I gave my orders to you? You yourself shall work on my farm. As for the slaves, I will tell them what to do.”

The girl went, though very unwillingly, and when she returned at night, tired out, Nsi said to her, “Go at once to the river and bring water for the household.”

She answered, “I am weary with working on the farm. May not my slaves at least do this while I rest?”

Again Nsi refused and drove her forth, and she went backward and forward many times, carrying the heavy jars. Night had fallen long before she had brought enough.

The next morning Nsi made her do the must menial services, and all day long kept her at work, cooking, fetching water, and making fire. That night, again, she was very weary before she was allowed to lie down to rest. At dawn on the third morning Nsi said, “Go and bring in much firewood.” Now the girl was young and unused to work, so she went she wept, and the tears were still falling when she came back carrying her heavy burden.

As soon as Nsi saw her enter crying he called her. “Come here and lie down before me… I wish to shame you in the presence of all, my people.” Thereupon the girl wept still more bitterly.

No food was given her until midday on the morrow, and then not enough. When she had finished eating all there was, Nsi said to her, “Go out and bring in a great bundle of fish poison.”

The girl went into the bush to seek for the plant, but as she walked through the thick undergrowth a thorn pierced her foot. She lay down alone. All day long she lay there in pain, but as the sun sank she began to feel better. She got up and managed to limp back to the house.

When she entered, Nsi said to her, “Early this morning I ordered you to go and collect fish poison. You have stayed away all day and done nothing.” so he drove her into the goat-pen, and said, “Tonight you shall sleep with the goats; you shall not enter my house.”

That night she are nothing. Early next morning one of the slaves opened the door of the goat pen and found the girl lying within with her foot all swollen and sore. She could not walk, so for five days she was left with the goats. After that her foot began to get better.

As soon as she could walk again, Nsi called her and said, “Here is a pot. Take it to the river and bring it back filled to the brim.”

She set out, but when she reached the waterside, she sat down on the bank and dipped her foot in the cool stream. She said to herself, “I will never go back; it is better to stay here alone.”

After a while one of the slaves came down to the river. He questioned her: “At dawn this morning you were sent to fetch water. Why have you not returned home?”

The girl said, “I will not come back.”

When the slave had left her she thought, “Perhaps he will tell them, and they will be angered and may come and kill me. I had better go back after all.” So she filled her pot and tried to raise it upon her head, but it was too heavy. Then she lifted it on to a tree trunk that lay by the side of the river and , kneeling beneath, tried to draw it in that way upon her head; but the pot fell and broke and , in falling, a sharp shard cut off one of her ears. The blood poured down from the wound, and she began to weep again, but suddenly thought,”My father is alive, my mother is alive; I do not know why I stay here with Obassi Nsi. I shall go back to my own father.”

Then she set out to find the road by which Obassi Osaw sent her to earth. She came to a high tree and from it saw a long rope hanging. She said to herself, “This is the way by which my father sent me.”

She caught the rope and began to climb. Before she had gone halfway she grew very very weary, and her sighs and tears mounted up to the kingdom of Obassi Osaw. Midway on her climb, she stayed and rested a while. Afterward she went on again.

After a long time she reached the top of the rope and found herself on the border of her father’s land. Here she sat down almost worn out with weariness, and still weeping

Now, one of the slaves of Obassi Osaw had been sent out to collect firewood. He chanced to stay from his oath and came to a place near where the girl was resting. He heard her sobs mixed with broken words and ran back to the town, crying out, “I have heard the voice of Ara. She is weeping about a mile from here.”

Obassi heard but could not believe, yet he said, “Take twelve slaves, and, should you find my daughter as you say, bring her home.”

When her father saw her coming he called out, “Take her to the house of her mother.”

There she was resting, Obassi killed a young kid and sent it to Akun, bidding her to prepare it for his daughter. Akun took it and, after she had washed it, cooked it whole in a pot. Obassi also sent a great bunch of plantains and other fruits, and these, too, were arranged in orderly fashion upon a table before the girl. Then they poured water into a gourd and brought palm wine in native cup, and bade her to drink.

After she had eaten and drunk, Obassi came with four slaves carrying a great chest made of ebony. He bade them set it before her, opened it and said, “Come here; choose anything you will from this box.”

Ara chose two pieces of cloth, three gowns, four small loincloths, four looking glasses, four spoons, two pairs of shoes, four cooking pots, and four chins of beads.

After this Obassi Osaw’s storekeeper, named Ekpenyon, came forward and brought her twelve anklets. Akun gave her two gowns, a fufu stick, and a wooden knife.

Her own mother brought her five gowns, richer than all the rest, and five slaves to wait upon her.

After this Obassi Osaw said, “A house has been made ready for you; go there that you may be its mistress.”

Then he went out and called together the members of the chief society of the town. This was named Angbu. He said to the men, “Go, fetch the son of Obassi Nsi. Cut off both his ears and bring them to me. Then flog him and drive him down the road to his father’s town, with this message from me: ‘I had built a great house up here in my town. In it I placed your son and treated him kindly. Now that I know what you have done to my child, I send your son back to you earless, in payment for Ara’s ear and the suffering which you put upon her.'”

When the Angbu society had cut off the ears of the son of Obassi Nsi, they brought them before Obassi Osaw and drove the lad back on the earthward road, as they had been ordered.

Osaw took the ears and made a great juju, and by reason if this a strong wind arose, and drove the boy earthward. On its wings it bore all the sufferings of Ara and the tears which she had shed through the cruelty of Obassi Nsi. The boy stumbled along, half blinded by the rain, and as he went he thought, “Obassi Osaw may do to me what he chooses. He has never done any unkind thing before. It is only in return for my father’s cruelty that I must suffer all this.”

So his rears mixed with those of Ara and fell earthward as rain.

Until that time there had been no rain on the earth. It fell for the first time when Obassi Osaw made the great wind and drove forth the son of his enemy.

[ EKOI ]

HOW THE STARS CAME

EBOPP, the LEMUR, and MBAW, the dormouse, were making a tour in the bush. They looked for a good place to make a farm. When they found one, they cut down the trees and took two days to clear enough ground. After this, they went back to the town where the other animals lived.

The next morning Ebopp said, “Let us go to our new farms and build a small house.”

They did. Ebopp made his, and Mbaw his.

Now, before a new town is begun, a little shed called ekpa ntan is always made where the Egbo house is to stand. Ebopp and Mbaw accordingly set to work and built an ekpa ntan. Then they went back to their old town and rested for two days.

On the third day they went to work again. Ebopp worked on his farm, Mbaw on his. That night they slept in the huts they had built and at dawn started to work once more. When night came, Ebopp lighted a lamp and said:

“I do not want to sleep here. If we sleep here we shall sleep hungry. Let us go back to our old town.”

When they got there their wives cooked for them. Ebopp said to Mbaw, “Come and join together with me in eating.” So his friend came and ate with him.

Afterwards Mbaw said, “Let us now go to my house and have food there too.” So they went tither.

After they had eaten all that Mbaw had cooked, Ebopp went home.

The next morning he went to call for his friend and said, “Go and get young plantains to plant on the farm.” Both of them collected a great basketful and went to the place where the new farms were – Ebopp to his, and Mbaw to his. They worked hard.

At midday, Ebopp said, “Let us rest a little while and eat the food we have brought.” To this Mbaw agreed, and after some time they set to work again.

About five o’clock Ebopp called, “Let us go back now to the old town, for it is very far off.”

So they left off working and went back, but before they could get there night fell.

The next morning they took more young plantains and, again, worked hard all day. When it was time to go back, Ebopp asked, “How many of the young plantains remain to be planted?”

Mbaw answered, “About forty.”

Whereupon Ebopp said, “Of mine also there remain about forty.”

At dawn, the next day, they went to their old farms to get some more plantain cuttings. Then they went back to the new farms and began planting.

As soon as Ebopp had finished, he said, “I have finished mine>”

To this Mbaw replied, “Mine also are finished.”

Ebopp said, “My work is done. I need come here only for the harvest.”

They they both went back to their old town and told their wives. “We have finished setting out the plantains. We hope that you will go and plant koko-yams tomorrow. Try, both of you, to get baskets full of koko-yams for the planting.”

To this the women agreed and, when they had collected as many as were necessary, they set out for the new farms.

When they arrived, Mbaw’s wife asked the wife of Ebopp, “Do you think we can finish planting all these today?”

Ebopp’s wife answered, “Yes, we can do it.”

All day they worked hard, and at night they went home and said, “We have finished planting all the koko-yams.”

Ebopp said, “Good, you have done well.”

Now the name of Ebopp’s wife was Akpan Anwan. She and her sister, Akandem, were the daughters of Obassi Osaw. When she got home she started to cook the evening meal for her husband. As soon as it was ready, she placed it upon the table, set water also in a cup, and laid spoons near by.

They were eating together when a slave named Umaw ran in. He had just come from the town of Obassi Osaw. He said, “I would speak to Ebopp alone.” When Akpan Anwan had left the room, the messenger said, “You are eating, but I bring you news that Akandem your sister-in-law is dead.”

Ebopp cried out aloud in his grief and sent a messenger to call his friend Mbaw.

As soon as the latter heard, he came running and said, “What can we do? We are planting new farms and beginning to build a new room. There is hardly any food to be got. How then can we properly hold the funeral customs?”

Ebopp said, “Nevertheless, I must try my best.”

When Umaw got ready to return, Ebopp said, “Say to Obassi Osaw, ‘Wait for me for six days, then I will surely come.”

The next morning he said to Mbaw, “Come now, let us do our utmost to collect what is necessary for the rites of my sister-in-law.”

They went through the town and bought all the food which they could find. Then Ebopp went back and said to his wife, “I did not wish to tell you before about the death of your sister, but today I must tell you. Make ready. In five days’ time I will take you to your father’s town to hold the funeral feast.”

Akpan Anwan was very grieved to hear of this and wept.

Ebopp said to Mbaw, “We must get palm wine for the feast, also rum for the libations. How can we get these? I have no money, and you also have none.

Mbaw said, “Go round among the town folks and see if any of them will lend you some.”

Ebopp said, “Good!” He then began to walk up and down, begging from all his friends, but none would give to him, although it was a big town. At last he went down to the place where they were making palm oil by the river. Quite nearby lived Iku, the water chevrotain. Ebopp told him his trouble and begged help, but Iku said, “I am very sorry you, but I have nothing to give.”

Ebopp was quite discouraged by now and, full of sorrow, turned to go away. When Iku saw this he said:

“Wait a minute, there is one thing I can do. You know that I have ‘four eyes.’ I will give you two of them, and with them you can buy all that you need.”

From out of his head he took the two eyes with which he had to see in the dark. They shone so brightly that Ebopp knew they were worth a great price. He took them home and showed them to his wife and his friend Mbaw.

The latter said, “From today you are freed from all anxiety. With those you can buy all that is needed.”

The next morning they gathered together all that had been collected, the plantains and the two shining eyes. Ebopp. Mbaw, and Akpan carried the loads between them. They set out for the dwelling place of Obassi Osaw.

When they arrived at the entrance of the town, Akpan Anwan began to weep bitterly. She threw down her burden and ran to the spot where her sister lay buried. Then he went back and got his wife’s load which she had left behind.

The townsfolk said to Ebopp, “You have come to keep your sister-in-law’s funeral customs today. Bring palm wine. Bring rum also for the libations, and let us hold the feast.”

Ebopp said, “I have brought nothing but plantains. All else that is necessary I mean to buy here.”

Now there was a famine in Obassi Osaw’s town, so Ebopp put all of his plantains in the Egbo House. The next day he sent a message to Obassi Osaw to bring his people. so that the food might be divided among them. Each man received one plantain.

Then Osaw said, “All that you have brought is eaten. Of you cannot give us more, you shall not take my daughter back with you to your country.”

Ebopp went to find his friend and told him what Obassi had said.

“Shall I see the two eyes?” he asked. “They are worth hundreds and hundreds of plantains and many pieces of cloth, but if I sell them now, the people are so hungry they will give a small price.”

Mbaw said, “Do not mind. See, I will teach you how to get more sense.

“You hold me one in your hand, and it is a big thing like a great shining stone; but if you put it in a mortar and grind it down, it will become, not one, but many stones, and some of the small pieces you can sell.”

This Ebopp did. He ground up the geat bright stones which had been Iku’s eyes until they become like shining sand.

Then Ebopp and Mbaw went and procured a black cap which they filled with the fragments.

Mbaw said, “Now go and look the town till you find someone who can sell what we need.”

Ebopp did so, and in the house of Effion Obassi he saw great stores hidden – food and palm wine, palm oil in jars, and run for the sacrifice.

Ebopp said to Effion, “If you will sell all this to me, I will give you in exchange something which will make all the town folk bow down before you.”

Effion said, “I will not sell all, but half of what I have I will sell you.”

So Ebopp said, “Very well. I will take what you give me, only do not open the thing I shall leave in exchange until I have returned to my own country. When you do open it, as I said before, all the town folk will bow down before you.”

So the funeral feast was prepared, and the people were satisfied.

When the rites were finished, Obassi said, “It is good. You can go away now with your wife.”

So Ebopp said to Mbaw and Akpan Anwan, “Come, let us go back to our own town. We must not sleep here tonight.”

When they had reached home once more, Ebopp sent a salve named Eder to Effion Obassi with the message:

“You may now open the cap. I have reached my town again.”

It was evening time, nut Effion at once called the townspeople together and said, “I have a thing here which is worth a great price.”

They cried, “Let us see it.”

He answered, “My thing is a very good thing, such as you have never seen before.

He brought the cap outside and opened it before them. All the shining things fell out. As they fell, a strange breeze came and caught them and blew them all over town. They lay on the road and on the floors of the compounds, each like a little star.

All the children came round and began picking them up. They gathered and gathered. In the daytime they could not see them, but every night they went out and sought for the shining things. All that they picked up they put in a box. At length many had been gathered together and they shone like a little sun in the box. At the end of about a month nearly all had been collected. They could not shut down the lid, however, because the box was too full, so when a great breeze came by it blew all the shining things about again. That is why sometimes we have a small moon and plenty of stars shining around it, while sometimes we have a big moon and hardly any stars are to be seen. The children take a month to fill the box again.

When the sparkles were scattered about the town, Effion sent a messeneger to Ebopp to ask: “Can you see the things shining from you town?”

At the time earth and sky were all joined together, like a house with an upstairs.

Ebopp went out and looked upward to the blue roof overhead. There he saw the small things sparkling in the darkness.

The next day he went to Iku and said, “Will you please do into a deep hole? I want to look at your eyes.”

Iku went inside the hole. Ebopp looked at his eyes. They were very bright, just like the sparkles which shone in the sky.

The cause of all the stars, therefore, is Enbopp, who took Iku’s eyes to Obassi’s town.

Iku’s eyes are like the stars.

The moon shines when all the fragments are gathered together. When it shine most brightly it it because the children have picked up nearly all the fragments and put them into the box.

[ EKOI ]

,

THE SON OF THE WIND

The son of the wind was once a man. When he was he used to go shooting and to roll a ball but later he became a bird and flew, no longer walking as he used to do when he was a man. When he had changed into a bird, he flew up and dwelt in a mountain hole. The mountain hole was his dwelling, and out of it he would fly every day and later on, return. In this hole he slept and, awakening in the morning, he would leave in order to seek food. He sought it everywhere and he ate, ate, ate, until he had his full. Then he would return to his mountain hole to sleep.

But when he was rolling his ball, he called out to Nakati, “Nakati, there it goes!” And Nakati exclaimed, “O comrade, truly there it goes!” He called him comrade because he didn’t know the other’s name. Yet it was truly he who is the wind, who had said, “Nakati, there it goes!”

Not knowing his name, however, Nakati went to his mother to question her. “Mother,” he said, “do tell me the name of our comrade over there. He calls me by my name but I do not know his and I would like to know it when I am rolling the ball back to him.”

“No, I will not at this moment tell you his name, that I will only do and let you utter it after Father has made a strong shelter for our hut. And Then, when I tell you his name, the moment I have uttered it, you must at once scamper away and run home, so that you can seek the shelter of the hut.”

Again Nakati went over to play with his campion and to roll the ball. When they had finished, Nakati again went once more to question his mother, and she exclaimed, “He is erriten-kuan, he is gau-gaubu-ti!”

The next day Nakati again went to roll the ball with his companion. He did not, however, utter his playmate’s name, for his mother had cautioned him to be silent on that matter, even when he was called by name. She had said, “When the time comes for you to utter his name, you must run hime at once.”

Now once more Nakati went to roll the ball with his friend, hoping and hoping that his father would finally finish making the shelter for their hut. At last he saw that his father sat down, that he had indeed finished. Therefore, when he held this, he exclaimed, “There it goes, O erriten-kuan! There it goes, O Gau-gaubu-ti!” No sooner had he uttered it than he scampered away and ran home. His companion thereupon began to lean over, and then fall down. As he lay there he kicked violently upon the vlei. As he kicked, huts blew away, bushes vanished and the people could not see because of the dust. Thus was the wind blowing.

When the mother of the wind came out of her hut to grab him and set him on his feet again, he struggled with her for he wished to continue to lie down. However his mother took hold of him firmly and set him on his feet.

And so, because of all this, we who are Bushmen are wont say, “The wind seems to be lying down, for it is blowing fiercely. When the wind stands on its feet then it is quiet and still. Thus it acts. This noise it makes comes from its knee; that is what makes the sound. I had wished that it might blow gently for us, that we might go out, that we might ascend the place yonder, that we might behold the river bed yonder, standing behind the hill. For we have driven the springbok from this place. They have gone to yonder dry river bed standing behind the hill.”

[ BUSHMEN ]

WHEN IS LONG ENOUGH, LONG ENOUGH

Let me answer this pertinent question to the best of my ability.

Now first, the amount of time you spend in your meditations is up to you. We suggest at least 15 minutes per day, as early in the day as possible. This sets you up for an active day of conscious manifesting. And remember, your Sanctuary if “intact” at ALL times during your waking period. You may even bring it into the dreamstate by ritually focusing on it prior to sleep.

The key here, for you and others, I believe, is to bring the Sanctuary with you out into the world and bring this meditative state and its contents and energies into the world with you. This is your expectation, you see. This is your attempt to continuously, or at least intermittently. Intentionally create your Personal Reality.

The expectation is felt in the demonstration, your faithful anticipation – in the small moments of awakening from the Common Trance – of the manifestation you are considering. Not to repeat myself too much here, but you seek to Embody the Feeling-Tone of your anticipated creation. If you read my Blogs you will get this message as well as the subtext, if you are open to it. I have provided numerous Strategies for belief change in this and other Blog Series. The simplest is to identify the limiting belief – identify its Feeling-Tone – and then Embody, once again, its opposite, or its improved condition with gusto! You are not merely begging for a miracle, here. You are the Reality Creator in league with All That Is.

If you are examining painful material form the past – childhood abuse, let us say – assume the Observer’s Perspective and disentangle yourself from the drama you are witnessing. If you are in the Trance State and you are meditating on the Abundant Universe, yes, you would Embody that image, emotion, thought as completely as you could, within the safety of your Sanctuary.

In conclusion, if you are feeling guilty being materialistic and you are experiencing Lack, I would suspect religious conditioning is at fault. As you know from the current manuscript, you are already living in an Abundant Universe. Perhaps your unnecessary feelings of guilt act like walls around you that prohibit your perception of this Universe. You might attempt to practice our Consecutive Positive Assessments exercise in which the student focuses on finding something positive in each moment. That becomes the focus over time until you are seeing, for yourself, this prosperous lifetime, for you are creating it.

Again, 15 minutes per day is a good start, but the magic happens when you bring all your waking faculties to bear on this project. Each moment of your day, then, becomes an opportunity for experiencing the transcendent moment, the moment of awakening to the Abundant Universe.

HOW SPIDER READ THE SKY-GOD’S THOUGHTS

The sky-god begat three children, who were Esum (Darkness), Osrane (Moon), and Owia (Sun). When his three children grew up, the sky-god made them go to separate villages. The first one built his village, the second one also built his village, and the third one, he too, built his village. And there they lived.

Now their father loved Sun most. And while the sky-god was reigning there, he blackened a stool and said to his attendants, “Who knows what my thoughts are?” Ananse, the spider, said, “As for me, I know them.” At the time when he said, “As for me, I know them,” the sky-god made all the attendants rise up. There and then the spider also rose up, saying he was going to the village of the sky-god’s children.

When Ananse reached the path, he said to himself, “I do not know his thoughts and yet I said, ‘I know them.’ ” And he plucked some feathers out of every bird, stuck them on himself and flew off, alighting on a gyedua tree in the sky-god’s village. And when the people saw the bird, they all made a great commotion which sounded like “Y-e-e-e-e!”

And the sky-god came out of the house and came under the gyedua tree and said, “Were Ananse here, he would have known the name of this bird. I had decided that Owia, Sun, is the one I wanted to make a chief, so I asked who knew what was in my head and Ananse said that he did. Now I have gone and pulled up the yam known as ‘Kintinkyi,’ and he who knows its name and utters it, to him I shall give it, my blackened stool. That is why Ananse has gone off to bring my children. Had he been here, he would have known the name of this bird.

Then the bird flew off, and Ananse pulled out the feathers and threw them away, and set out till he reached the village of Night. To Night he said, “Your father said that you must come with me.” And Night replied, “It is well, I and you will go.” Then Ananse said, “I am going on to fetch Moon and Sun.” But Night said to him, “Let me first seek for something to give you to eat.” Spider replied, “Ho!” Night thereupon went out and brought some roasted corn and gave it to Ananse. When he had finished chewing it, he set out for Moon’s village. When he reached it, he said, “Your father says you must came along with me.” And Moon replied, “It is well, I shall go.”

THE BROTHERS, SUN AND MOON, AND THE PRETTY GIRL

How did it happen? A wife was pregnant, shoe bore a child, Moon, to begin with. She returned, became pregnant again, and this time bore Sun. Far in the wilderness was a man, and he had a pretty daughter.

Sun and Moon grew up and one day went for a stroll. In the wilderness they came upon the pretty daughter, and they asked her, “Where have you got your house? We live in that wilderness,” they said to the girl. “Show us exactly where you live.”

She replied to them, “We live in that wilderness. And there a great many dangerous animals.”

Moon, the elder one of the brothers, said to the girl, “Do you like us? Shall we woo you?”

She said to them, “Yes, I am capable of liking you but may not.”

Sun then asked, “Who is it that does not like us?”

She said, “It is my father.”

Moon said to the girl, “Well, then, we shall wait for two days, and on the third we shall come to your village. We shall send our father’s children.”

They waited for two days, and on the third they sent the children, then they started out for the wilderness. And when they were quite close, they caught sight of the girl far off at the other edge of the jungle. They went to meet her and asked her, “Well, where is your village?”

She said, “Our village is here in the wilderness.”

They asked her, “I, I! Are there people that live in the place where is no hut?”

She said, “Yes, we live in the wilderness, we have no hut.”

They said, “We wish that you would show us where you live.”

The girl said, “All right, then.” And she went on ahead to show them the way.

A big snake then appeared. Sun and Moon said, “Let us not be afraid!” They were not frightened, but went along on their way. When they had got as far as the foot of a certain tree, they found a number of snakes confronting them; but they went farther along and came upon a place full of hairs like horsehair, forming a sort of darkness before them. Nowhere were they able to see any path to take.

Sun said to the girl, “You! Have you brought us here so we should die at your place?”

She said to them, “No, but we have not yet arrived at our village.”

And he, Moon, said to Sun, “Brother Sun, what are we to do now?” They said to the girl, “Tell us if you like us, and whether we are to woo you? We now wish to return home.”

They girl said to them, “Go, and come back the day after tomorrow!”

They went away and returned home.

They reached their home. And Moon loved the girl very much, more than Sun did. The following morning Sun went to herd their father’s cattle, and Moon hid himslef from Sun and went alone into the wilderness to seek the girl and take her to wife.

When he had got there, someone said to him, “Who is it?”

He said, “It is I”

He was asked, “Who are you?”

He answered, “It is I, Moon.”

He was asked, “Whither are you going?

He said, “I am coming hither.”

The other one asked him, “From where have you come?”

Moon said to him, “I come from our village.” And he added, “And you, what are you doing here?”

“I am not doing anything in particular,” said the stranger.

And I, neither am I doing anything in particular – I am just out for a walk,” answered Moon.

The other asked him again, “Why have you come here?”

“Not for anything special.”

The other mad said to him, “I, I? Not for anything special?”

Moon replied, “I, I! I did not come here for anything special! I have come here without any purpose.”

The strange man said, “Why do you ask me what I am seeking, but conceal and refuse to reveal your own business?”

Then Moon was frightened and said to himself, “I do not know these people, and they do not know me. I will return home!”

He returned home and said to Sun, “Brother, when I left you I saw a lot of queer things.”

Sun said to Moon, “Well, lets go some day and you shall show me those things; just now I am busy tending cattle.’

Their mother said to them, “Go ye and find the girl, I will do the hearding.”

They went, and when they got to the wilderness, they saw swords appearing. They fought against the sword but saw no human being. The swords disappeared, and they went on farther and saw trees which grew so densely before them the there was no path. Sun drew his sword and cut down some threes. The trees then disappeared altogether, and they did not see them again. They went farther ahead altogether, and they did not see them again. That went farther ahead and came to a pond; they were close to it. They saw teeth coming up out of the interior of the pond. They approached quite near. Two teeth passed right between them, one passed them to the left and another to t he right. Moon fell back behind Sun; he was frightened.

Sun said to him, “I, I Moon! Are you afraid? You are the elder one, go on ahead, let us walk on!”

“Yes, let us go on then! We are equally brave.”

Then teeth returned into the pond, and Sun and Moon walked on. When they had not got very far, they saw hairs coming up out of the pond. Moon looked at the girl’s father, for it was he, and said to Sun, “My brother, here we shall perish!”

“It cannot be helped!”

The hairs returned, however, into the pond. When they had got close to the pond, again Sun sat down on a tree at the edge of the pond together with Moon. The beard of the girl’s father came up to them but returned into the pond. Bones of dead people came up.

Moon said, “Oh! I am dying!” and suddenly he ran away.

Sun was left behind, alone there, sitting on the tree. The water rose, part of it came on one side of him and part of it on the other; it flowed all around him. He was sitting in the midst of the water, which presently returned to the pond. Sun did not budge from the spot. The water, however, returned to the river. Then smoke rose up out of the water. Sun said, to himself, “I do not intend to die here, although my brother got frightened and ran away. I am going to remain, so that I may see the girl” The smoke ceased, and the water flamed like fire. The fire, however, soon went out.

After that there came out of the water a human being – it was the girl! She came and took the young man by the hand and said to him, “Now we will go home to our place, and I shall give you food.”

The girl said to the pond, “Get out of the way for this man! I am going to cook food for him.” The water drew off the side of the pond, went over to one side.

The girl went and cooked food which she brought and gave the young man, and he ate. She said to him:

“I, it is you that is to take me to wife, because you are a man who is not afraid of anything. And you, now you are my husband because you are not afraid of all the things that were shown you, but your elder brother ran away.”

Then the girl’s father said to Sun, “Take the girl. When you have gone home you are to tarry there with her for five days, and then you yourself and your father are to bring the girl back here!

They started off. Moon had returned and sat down in the compound. He had a sword, and he said, “When Sun comes along with that girl, I shall kill him.”

Then the girl approached, and Sun was walking in the front of her. They came and found that Moon was in the compound. They asked him, “Moon, is there anyone at home in our village?”

“Sun, come here!”

Sun carried a sword. He went forward, and sat down. The mother came out and Sun said to her, “Mother, go and take the girl and conduct her into the village!”

The mother asked him, “This girl, is it you that have taken her to wife, or is it Moon?”

“She is my wife, Moon ran away.” Sun repeated: “Moon ran away.”

The latter grasped his sword. Sun looked up and saw the sword quite close to him, for Moon gave him a cut. And he, Sun, who also carried his sword, slapped Moon, and they fought. Sun was badly cut by Moon.

The mother cried a great deal. She took millet and all kinds of provisions and spoilt them for Moon. And she threw millet and all the other foodstuffs on the fire, saying, “You, Moon, have damaged Sun in this way. May you be destroyed in the same way! And the mother took some milk, and she and her husband poured it into a calabash bowl with millet and beer. Thereupon they blessed Sun, that he would shine brightly for mankind. The girl remained on in the village as Sun’s wife, but Moon had no wife, and he who had formerly been more brilliant than Sun no longer was so.

Ever since that time and even now Moon avoids Sun; they will not agree to approach each other at the same fire, nor to eat food together. When Sun goes down, Moon comes out; when Sun comes out of the village, Moon rapidly runs away. Is not that a curse? Moon has become small, and Sun has become big.

[ AKAMBA ]

THE CONNECTION BETWEEN RESONANCE AND SYNCHRONICITY

Before I attempt to answer this question, first allow me to set the stage here a bit. Now remember, you are a Reality Creator. You are a manifester. So you are already, as we speak, resonating your Personal Reality Field into being, into existence, you see. The problem may be that you are manifesting unconsciously. As you do, you create reality through the templates of your Issues. These are your beliefs about yourself and your world. This expression of your unconscious in the physical world may not be to your liking, therefore. You may in fact find yourself always making the same mistakes, and so, always creating less-than-satisfactory realities.

These are synchronicities also, the negative events, the negative realities. They are showing you that you are on a path of development and that you must change your ways. The negative reality creator looks around them and says to themselves, perhaps: “Why do I always create the same failed relationships?” “Coincidentally,” this person has, once again, established a relationship with a new person, within a different environment, also, possibly, in a different context entirely, that eventually becomes the “failed” relationship they feared. Might I suggest that the resonance in this case, the Feeling-Tone created here that resonates within consciousness, is of a negative nature? You may also refer to it as a series of ongoing harbingers of negative events; omens warning you of future negativity. But you are creating unconsciously and so you are not consciously aware. Your conscious perceptions overlook this data, they deny this information, they intellectualize and “explain away” these harbingers.

Your consciousness is unconsciously, automatically resonating your failed relationship into existence, just as it always does, just as it always will, unless you wake up to what you are up to.

Now additionally, because we are being precise and brief in our new Blog Series…. synchronicity is a perception, and thus, a state of consciousness in which connections are made by the coincidental connections, perfectly unextraordinary perceptions of the brain as it attempts to “make sense” of seemingly similar sensory input. This is true to a degree. However, let us provide our own definition with my theory of Reality Creation in mind. Synchronistic sensings are signals from the Soul-Self to the ego/intellect. They are meant to draw you into the moment. They are the basis of awakenings, the momentary awakenings we speak of in the new Blog material. I often suggest to you, that these coincidental experiences are telling you that you are on a path of awakening, even though you may not admit it. Indeed, if you were to observe and honor the synchronistic connections being made within your consciousness, you may possibly discover that everything is connected. The deeper you go, the more that is revealed. Over time, when you have learned how to “ride” these synchronous moments into the “future,” you find that you are awakening to your greater creaturehood. The sensings of your simultaneous Lives, the workings of the Universe, the secrets of Reality Creation become your habitual, ingoing experience.

THE VISIONARY LEADER II

First, we are awakening now. I believe I may safely say at this time. You are reading this Blog material because you are interested in the Unknown Reality and other metaphysical concepts. You are of this type, quite probably, that honors the sacred within consciousness. You look for it, you find it sometimes, and allow it to transform you, to wake you up. As this occurs within the consciousness of, let us say, a production worker in an automobile plant, you may feel prompted to tell others about your experiences. As you share your findings with others you catalyze the awakening experience in them. Each of you in this collective of awakening humans becomes YOUR OWN leader. You are leading yourself away from authority and to your own truth.

This is the Visionary Leader: the one who learns how to access their truth, teaches it to others, and then leads by example, you see. The Virtues of Humanity are their leadership principles. The highest good for all concerned is their focus of creation, of manifestation. The awakening human, in short, Resonates their improved reality into existence, by allowing these inner Precepts we call the Ancient Wisdom to replicate themselves in the Third Dimension. The etheric is physicalized through this process of Resonance. The sacred is established in the physical world for the greater improvement of all that exists in our world.

Now, your primary Lesson in this reality concerns how you, as an individual with your own aspects of personality, will respond to negativity. You are on Earth to experience negativity and your reactions will determine how long you will stay in the physical body in any particular incarnation, as well as other particulars of physical existence, such as when and if you shall return to a human form to experience the opportunity to deal with your Issues and Lessons: those experiences you have avoided or not dealt with properly.

I do not wish to compare this phenomenon with the stories from our world scriptures. For the most part, these stories quite literally HIDE FROM VIEW the essential meaning of the reincarnational journey. That is quite simply because these Blog manuscripts were written by human beings with an agenda, an agenda of the ego. What we are here discussing is the Soul’s Agenda. The Soul sends out particles of itself, of its energy, into human babies to grow with the human and experience the Lessons.

Beyond your initial Lessons of reacting appropriately to negativity come the Lessons particular to individuals. Your focus, your perspective, your orientation, the lenses of belief through which you create your reality, determine to the most minute detail the presentation of your Personal Reality Field before you. It is feedback, it is a recapitulation, it IS a replication of the interior processes of consciousness. The reality constructs of your world assemble into solidity at the bequest of ALL consciousness involved.

THOSE WHO FOLLOW SHALL LEAD

Now as you refuse from authority figures, you quite naturally learn how to trust YOURSELF. Again, this is a learned habit, like anything else in your reality. What you focus on habitually, whether subconsciously or consciously, you tend to create. The Courageous step of relying on your Inner Self to provide the information you seek, becomes a faithful expectation that you will receive what you desire and need. Over time it does indeed become second nature. You might also call it a faithful, trust-filled precognition that what you ask for is being provided.

This is the Ancient Wisdom, in fact, and this communication stream arrives from your greater Gestalt of Consciousness. It is personalized, this stream of data, for your perception. It is tuned to your frequency, specifically, to the frequency of your awakening Spirit. Thus, the awakening human becomes an expert on their own unfolding consciousness. And simply because you are connected to everyone/thing in the Universe, you are also mastering a perception of the macrocosm here: the greater gestalt you may call All That Is.

THE THEORY OF RESONANCE

Now remember that this metaphor for the projection of All That Is into our system. Lessons is our Essential Metaphor for why the human comes to the physical plane. We suggest it is to experience the Lessons of Value Fulfillment, as the Virtues of Humanity are endorsed and Embodied, or perhaps denied and vilified. However, the lessons is a Lesson BECAUSE you are noticing it and interpreting it as a Lesson. You create your own reality, and as you do YOU are the value-fulfiller, whether it is the fulfillment though behavior, emotion, imagery and thought of physical violence, as in a perpetrator of violence upon others, or as is the case with a do-gooder type, who bestows goodness, Love, compassion on others. In both cases values are fulfilled. In both cases Lessons are learned.

Now let us look at the two examples in terms of frequency of vibration. We have suggested that negative emotion holds a lower vibration than does positive emotion. This is our premise upon which we build our theory of Resonance. In one example, the subject builds negative Reality Creations with negative emotions. This low frequency resonates with negative emotions everywhere. Within the collective gestalt of emotion, within the Collective Unconscious, your negative emotions resonate with other similarly-created negative emotions of humanity. You could say that this amalgam of negative emotion that is seeking out other “like” emotions within the consciousness field, eventually, through resonance, finds a home for itself. These “homes” we call the Gestalts of Consciousness, the foundational elements of Reality Constructs of all types, including of course, Reality Constructs of air, of ideas, of soil and stone, and so on. But again, these theorized activities of consciousness are simply metaphors for the exceedingly complex activities of the Consciousness Units.

RESONANCE AND AWAKENING

Our changing roles as awakening humans reflect this learning of Lessons through FACING our Issues. Let me explain. Now you begin where you are. You are not yet awakened but you are getting there. You have discovered that you have Issues, spiritual Issues that are DEMANDING your attention. There is no room for denial. There is no time left for intellectualizing away these basic Issues. You are compelled to take to heart, for example, the admonishments of your friends, family, and colleagues. This advice may range from the negative through the positive, as in, “You are a walking ego. You harm others through your insensitivity,” to “You should really get out more. You could find a great partner if you were to make the gesture, go out, meet people.” As you act on the advice of others, or perhaps on promptings from other sources, such as the nonphysical beings, you are expanding your boundaries, your beliefs, your societal role.

In this case, your collective consciousness is Resonating with the ancient civilizations. In those prototypical cultures the highest good for all concerned was practiced in all endeavors. These important life-sustaining, healing messages enter your awareness as impulses, impulses, perhaps, to do good, give to others, to work on yourself and become a better human being. As your personal consciousness Resonates with these messages, you are connected to the collective through your thoughts, through your images, and so on. Thus you achieve your particular state of Resonance with the Ancient Wisdom even as you contribute to the collective state of Resonance by your CHANGING of behaviors, emotions, imagery, “Waking up,” we call it. You are waking up to your responsibilities to create for the highest good.

As you claim this responsibility as your own, your “personal credo, “so to speak, you quite naturally, again, assume a leadership position within your family, your town, your state, country and world. You are modeling for others this assuming of the awakened experience. You then Resonate with other visionary leaders. You come together to make plans for the future. You work as a collective for the betterment of your collectives, large and small.

THE VISIONARY LEADER IS BECOMING KNOWN

Yes, it is cyclical. The Changing of the Guard is underway. The Shift in Consciousness transforms all. Specifically, for the interested citizen, those of you who are waking up, it is this Resonance in action, once again. Now the cycle of domination is changing. The idea that you must conquer the Earth, that to succeed you must dominate others, that the proper way to raise a child is to punish them when they misbehave, these concepts are giving way during this cycle of change. A cycle, a natural cycle of manifestation, implies that changes occur quite naturally, in the natural order of things, you might say. This is the case with The Shift. The dominators have had their say for many generations on Earth. They have created a crisis situation worldwide with their selfish behaviors. In the natural order of things, do you see how this Shift brings up the Ancient Wisdom that contains NEW ideas, NEW images, NEW and positive means of creating, behaving, Loving in the world?

I hope that you sense my irony, once again, as we speak in terms of the NEW ideas that the Ancient Wisdom brings. They ARE new to many of us, for we have practiced over these manys years, the way of forcing ourselves on others and on our environment. It is, from my perspective, completely and utterly expected that the “season” of the dominators would give way, in time, to the era of the Lovers of Earth, of humanity.

UPDATED PROJECTIONS

Thus the evolving experience of the awakening student represents these continually updated projections of the Essential Identity into the Third Dimension. This is our life. As a human on this trajectory of Soul Evolution, your awakening consciousness is reflected in the ongoing products of your consciousness: your body, your environment, your life.

Dear Blog Reader, you are always in-tune with your creations, your Personal Reality. You are always getting what you ask for. But you may ask, “I am certainly not getting what I want. I am poor, sickly and quite unhappy. How can you say that?” In my presentations to you in physical reality we rely on a basic assumption that you are the creator of your world. As I said, you create your reality, your Personal Reality Field. You are connected to everyone and everything else in the created Universe through the Consciousness Units. Thus, as a collective of humans, we create our consensus realities. On the basic level, then, you look out in front of you and see your part of this Universe: your home, your friends and family, your job site, and so on. Now on the collective, progressed level of perception, the Visionary State, you might call it, when you look out in front of you, you may be witnessing your multidimensional reality. Visions of other lives may play out before you or upon the inner screen of your creative imagination. So let us here differentiate between these two states of consciousness perception and thus Reality Creation.

PROBABLE OUTCOME II

Let us cover probable effects of consciousness in the Third Dimension. To begin, as we know, our individual and collective realities are created from limitless probabilities. These probable thoughts, images, emotions, and so on, exist within the etheric, what we also call the pre-manifestation domain. It is from this dimension that our Earthly dimension emerges.

Now all probable effects have a singular charge. This tendency to appear in the particular way of the proposed effect, has, as I said, bioelectric and electromagnetic properties. In our terms, everything in the etheric domain. With your imagination, with your consciousness, you consistently add to this repository of potential. By thinking about the goodness of humanity, for example, you positive imagery, emotions, thoughts and other elements seek out their likeness in this pre-manifestation domain, as well as their opposites. The opposites serve to give depth and counterpoint. Through Resonance these correlations are energized, amplified, supported, given life, you see.

In a sense, the negative is inferred through the positive expression, in contrast, you see, in relative contrast. If you wish to think in terms of dynamics within a system, a system of reality, you could theorize that through Resonance, both the positive and the negative, in addition to all expressions in between these two polarities, are expressed to the nth degree throughout the past, present, and future. Value Fulfillment occurs simultaneously with this expression.

PROBABLE OUTCOMES

You are connected to everyone and everything else…

Feel You Power

Now the truth is, that you as a Reality Creator may expect an infinite variety of outcomes i,e,: creations. The possibilities are limitless with regards to what you can and do create. In this Practice we speak of these outcomes as a form of feedback of your mentality. What you are thinking about is reflected quite directly back to you from your creations, your Personal Reality. You have thus had a hand in the creation of all you see in front of you.

Admittedly, you are far more responsible for the creation of your body, shall we say, and your immediate surroundings, than the neighborhood or the city in which you live. Your creative powers, then, as the creator of realities standing within the magical arena of your Personal Reality Field. Sense it. “Own it,” as we say.

HOW KINTU WAS TESTED BEFORE HE COULD MARRY THE DAUGHTER OF THE KING OF HEAVEN

When Kintu came first to Ugnada he found there was no food at all in the country. He brought with him one cow and had only the food with which the animal supplied him. In the course of time a woman named Nambi came with her brother to the earth and saw Kintu. The woman fell in love with him and, wishing to be married to him, pointedly told him so. She had to return, however, with her brother to her people and her father, Gulu, who was king of the sky.

Nambi’s relations objected to the marriage because they said that the man did not know of any food except that which the cow yielded, and they despised him. Gulu, the father, however, said that they had better test Kintu before he consented to the marriage, and he accordingly sent someone to rob Kintu of his cow. For a time Kintu was at a loss what to eat, but he managed to find different kinds of herbs and leaves which he cooked and ate. Nambi happened to see the cow grazing and recognized it, and complaining that her brothers wished to kill the man she loved, she went to the earth and told Kintu where his cow was, and invited him to return with her to take it away.

Kintu consented to go, and when he reached the sky he was greatly surprised to see how many people there were with houses and with cows, goats, sheep, and fowls running about. When Nambi’s brothers saw Kintu sitting with their sister at her house, they went and told heir father testing to see whether he was worthy of their sister. An enormous meal was cooked, enough food for a hundred people, and brought to Kintu, who was told that unless he ate it all he would be killed as an impostor. Failure to eat it, they said, would be proof that he was not the great Kintu. He was then shut up in a house and left alone.

After he had eaten and drunk as much as he could, he was at a loss to know what to do with the rest of the food. fortunately, he discovered a deep hole in the floor of the house, so he turned all the food and beer into it and covered it over so that no one could detect the place. He then called the people outside to come and take away the baskets. The sons of Gulu came in, but would not believe that he eaten all the food. They, therefore, searched the house but failed to find it.

They went to their father and told him that Kintu had eaten all the food. He was incredulous, and said that Kintu must be further tested. A copper axe was sent to Kintu by Gulu, who said, “Go and cut me firewood from the rock, because I do not use ordinary firewood.”

When Kintu went with the axe, he said to himself, “What am I to do? If I strike the rock, the axe will only turn its edge or rebound.” However, after he had examined the rock, he found that there were cracks in it, so he broke off pieces of it, and returned with them to Gulu who was surprised to get them. Nevertheless, he said that Kintu must be further tried before they could give their consent to the marriage.

Kintu was next sent to fetch water and was told that he must bring only dew, because Gulu did not drink water from wells. Kintu took the water-pot and went off to a field, where he put the pot down and began to ponder what he must do to collect the dew. He was sorely puzzled, but upon returning to the pot, he found it full of water. So he carried it back to Gulu. Gulu was most surprised and said, “This man is a wonderful being; he shall have his cow back and marry my daughter.

Kintu was told to pick his cow from the herd and take it. This was a more difficult task than the others, because there were so many cows like his own that he feared he would mistake it and take the wrong one. While he was thus perplexed a large bee came and said, “Take the one upon whose horns I shall alight; it is yours.”

The next morning Kintu went to the appointed place and stood and watched the bee, which was resting on a tree near him. A large herd of cows was brought before him, and he pretended to look for his cow, but in reality he was watching the bee which did not move. After a time, Kintu said, “My cow is not there.” A second herd was brought, and the bee at once flew away and rested upon a cow which was a very large one, and Kintu said, “This is my cow.” The bee then flew to another cow, and Kintu said, “This is one of the calves from my cow,” and the bee went on to a second and a third cow which Kintu claimed as the calves which had been born during the cow’s stay with Gulu.

Gulu was delighted with Kintu and said, “You are truly Kintu, take your cows. No one can deceive or rob you, you are too clever for that.” He called Nambi and said to Kintu, “Take my daughter who loves you, marry her, and go back to your home.” Gulu further said, “You must hurry and go back before Walumbe, or Death, comes, because he will want to go with you and you must not take him; he will only cause you trouble and unhappiness.”

Nambi agree to what her father said and went to pack up her things. Kintu and Nambi then took leave of Gulu, who said, “Be sure, if you have forgotten anything, not to come back, because Death will want to go with you and you must go without him.”

They started off home, taking with them, besides Nambi’s things and the cows, a goat, a sheep, a fowl, and a plantain tree. On the way Nambi remembered that she had forgotten the grain for the for the fowl, and she said to Kintu, “I must go back for the grain for the fowl, or it will die.”

Kintu tried to dissuade her, but in vain. She said, “I will hurry back and get it without anyone seeing me.”

He said, “Your brother Death will be on the watch and will see you.”

She would not listen to her husband, but went back and said to her father, “I have forgotten the grain for the fowl, and I have come to take it from the doorway where I put it.”

He replied, “Did I not tell you that you were not to return if you forgot anything, because your brother Walumbe would see you and want to go with you?” Now he will accompany you.”

Nambi tried to steal away without Walumbe, but he followed her. When she rejoined Kintu, he was angry at seeing Walumbe, and said, “Why have you brought your brother with you? Who can live with him?”

Nambi was sorry, so Kintu said, “Let us go and see what happen.”

When they reached the earth Nambi planted her garden, and the plantains grew rapidly, and she soon had a large plantain grove in Manyagalya. They lived happily for some time and had a number oif children, until one day Walumbe asked kintu to send one of the children to be his cook.

Kintu replied, “If Gulu comes and asks me for one of my children, what am I to say to him? Shall I tell him that I have given her to be your cook?”

Walumbe was silent and went away, but he again asked for a child to be his cook, and again Kintu refused to send one of his daughters, so Walumbe said, “I will kill them.”

Kintu, who did not know what he meant, asked, “What is it that you will do?” In a short time, however, one of the children fell ill and died, and from that time they began to die at intervals.

Kintu returned to Gulu and told him about the deaths of the children, and accuse Walumbe of being the cause. Gulu replied, “Did I not tell you when you were going away to go at once with your wife and not return if you had forgotten anything? But you allowed Nambi to return for grain. Now you have Walumbe living with you. Had you obeyed me you would have been free of him and would not have lost any of your children.”

After some further entreaty, Gulu sent Kaikuzi, another brother, to assist Nambi, and to prevent Walumbe from killing the children. Kaikuzi went to the earth with Kintu and was met by Nambi, who told him her pitiful story. He said he would call Walumbe and try to dissuade him from killing the children. When Walumbe came to greet his brother they had quite a warm and affectionate meeting, and Kintu told him he had come to take him back, because their father wanted him.

Walumbe said, “Let us take our sister too.”

But Kintu said he was not sent to take her, because she was married and had to stay with her husband. Walumbe refused to go without his sister, and Kaikuzi was angry with him and ordered him to do as he was told. Death, however, escaped from Kaikuzi’s grip and fled away into the earth.

For a long time there was enmity between the two brothers. Kaikuzi tried in every possible way to catch his brother Walumbe, but he always escaped. At last Kaikuzi told the people to remain in their houses for several days and not to let any of the animals out, and he would have a final hunt for Walumbe. He further told them that if they saw Walumbe they must not call out or raise the usual cry of fear.

The instructions were followed for two or three days, and Kaikuzi got his brother to come out of the earth and was about to capture him, when some children took their goats to the pasture and saw Walumbe and called out. Kaikuzi rushed to the spot and asked why they called, and they said they had seen Death. Kaikuzi was angry, because Walumbe had again gone into the earth. So he went to Kintu and told him he was tired of hunting Death and wanted to return home. He also complained that the children had frightened Walumbe into the earth again. Kintu thanked Kaikuzi for his help and said he feared nothing more could be done, and he hoped Walumbe would not kill all the people.

Form that time Death has lived upon the earth and killed people whenever he can, and then he escapes into the earth at Tanda in Singo.

[ BAGANDA ]

PROBABLE OUTCOMES

Feel Your Power

Now the truth is, that you as a Reality Creator may expect an infinite variety of outcomes i,e,; creations. The possibilities are limitless with regards to what you can and do create. In this Practice we speak of these outcomes as a form of feedback of your mentality. What you are thinking about is reflected quite directly back to you from your creations, your Personal Reality. You have thus had a hand in the creation of all that you see in front of you.

Admittedly, you are far more responsible for the creation of your body, shall we say, and your immediate surroundings, than the neighborhood or the city in which you live. Your creative powers are most effective within a 50 foot radius. Feel your power, then, as the creator of realities standing within the magical arena of your Personal Reality Field. Sense it. “Own it,” as we say.

THE TRANCE STATE

Further information may be gathered in the Trance State, as we said earlier. You may find it is easier to receive unbiased information in Trance rather than trying to circumvent the agenda of the ego/intellect. Do what works best for you in your Practice.

Also, carry a recording device with you or a simple notebook to document discoveries in the field. Especially note Resonance Factors, those aspects of consciousness that seem to precognate the manifestation. In other words, these glimpses into your future represent your progressed self – the one that enjoys the Best Case Scenario – sending back clues and suggestions from the future. True, this is high-etherics we are suggesting to you in the Practice. However, consider that you are now reading a Blog dictated by a non-physical being who has been dead for quite some time. I suggest to you that you are ALREADY submerged in the etherics of the Unknown Reality, Dear Blog Reader. You may as well enjoy it.

So you would write down these impulses from the future – the messages from the BCS – and your successes, most assuredly, and also note instances of non-success. Simply note them, however, without berating yourself. This information is crucial to your redirection of energies in your Regimen. Now you know what NOT to do. Now you may do the opposite, in fact. So as you school yourself in this system, be a good reacher, be a kind teacher, be a teacher who models Love for the student

FILLING IN THE BLANKS

In this exercise you are taking hold of your Reality Creation in the moment of assessment. You are then including the Felt Difference – the Feeling-Tone of what is missing – in your creative efforts. Using your Intent, allowing your personal power to come forward in that moment, impress this Blog material into your activities, into your perception of your Personal Reality Field.

THE FELT DIFFERENCE

The Felt Difference is that Feeling-Tone of thought, imagery and emotion that is missing from the BCS (Best Case Scenario). You have assessed your current status quo reality and found some things lacking. You would like to include this Blog Material, in other words, in your CURRENT reality. Write down what you have noticed that is missing.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BEST CASE SCENARIO

Now imagine what BCS would look like when it is finally manifested. Write your BCS on the lines below. Use just a few words to capture the essence, the Feeling-Tone of this construct. I believe that it is important to start this process now. You have the tools to be gin. You are ready now to start creating your heart’s desire.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CURRENT FEELING-TONE

Your first project begins in earnest when you create Current Feeling-Tone Assessment of the state of the domain of living that you have selected. Do that next

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOMAINS OF LIVING

What areas of your life need improving? What projects are you willing to devote your time and energy to in order to get results? List in order of importance the areas in your life that need this attention. I do think that it is counterproductive to be shy about this, to be fearful that someone may read this Blog material and wonder about your sanity. However, write this in a diary that is secure if you feel that it is necessary.

Now write down what you would like to change.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RITUAL OF SANCTUARY-2

Now do personalize the protection Ritual. Put your personality and your personal energy in it. Also it helps to link this creative state of consciousness to a memory, a thought, an image or gesture. In this way you may immediately create a felt sense of protection, security, Love while you are out in your waking world with a mere snap of your fingers. Or perhaps you carry a card in your pocket with the word “Sanctuary” printed on it. Every time you take it out of your pocket and look at it. Sanctuary is created automatically. Again, why does it occur? It occurs because you create your reality.

MY PRACTICE

When I provide ongoing support for clients, I proceed in a particular way. This may help you to create your own program and help you avoid problems.

Now when a client asks me for my insight into a particular Issue that they might have, I remind them that THEY themselves have the solutions. I am only an intermediary here, you see. I am able to observe what the client has in store for themselves as probable trajectories of development, probable realities. Therefore, as you create your Regimens keep this truth in mind, Dear Blog Reader. You already know the answers. You already have created success in your Practice. You are even now quite successful in a probable future from which you may pull inspiration. In other words, please understand this Best Case Scenario that we speak of in this Blog Series is real. It is quite apparent to me, and I am certain it will become quite certain to you as you complete your studies.

Secondly, use your Guides as you would a coach or knowledgeable confidante. As we have reminded you before in our second Blog Series, the genie of literature and myth is the Energy Personality, the Spirit, the Guide. Knowing this, act as if your guides have all the answers and it will be so. This can be considered an adjunct Precept to YCYR. Perhaps I would state it thus: “Your Source has all the answers you need to help you manifest your heart’s desire.” Then, as you Embody this Precept, the Guides will make themselves known to you and make the information available, the information you require, you see, to create your world the way you want it.

THE BULLY

Transformation – An example: You area a bully, let us pretend, and you enjoy picking on people, making them miserable. You rationalize your behavior by blaming it on your father, who was also a bully, per the reports from your mother. However, the truth comes out that your father was far from being a bully and was quite Loving and nurturing. He made his Transition at an early time in your life. You were not able to feel fathered completely by this human.

What do you do now? You have an opportunity to change your behavior, to in fact change it to its opposite. You can attempt to Embody the Virtues of Loving Understanding, nurturing, and so on. You will be working on a negative reality you have created for you have found proof that it is based on falsehoods. You have it within you to create these Virtues, as do we all. And so you practice Embodying these opposites of the bully.

Will this practice make an angel out of you, a profoundly Loving and spiritual person? Perhaps. Yet if you do continue this practice of polarizing the Feeling-Tones you have used to create the bully persona, you will undoubtedly improve, in Soul sense, in the sense of creating progress in your Soul’s Evolution.

HOLDING ON AND LETTING GO

Now here is a time for everything, here, in your Ritual processes. Let me go on a bit about just what I mean with this statement…

Just as this Resonance exhibits both the attractive and repulsive principles, and finds cohesion and momentum “over time,” you may find it advantageous to, in a sense, ride this wave of manifestation with your awareness. There is a time for holding on and letting go, resisting/assessing and “going with the flow.” You cannot have one without the other in this natural process. It is not “wrong” or “bad” to favor one over the other. It is quite fruitful to embrace both in this practice.

In a very natural way, the student attends to the current moment, for example, with focus and energy. In the next moment, however, you might relax and let go, you see: Distraction. The natural distractions of living will occur for you, taking your focus off of your creative enterprises. Simply let go of your focus in that moment and ride the wave of manifestation. The next moment may call for a return to your focus on the matter at hand. Simply do so, not abandoning the distraction but simply diverting your attention back to the Regimen. This is multitasking. The more you practice, the more proficient you become.

PROSPERITY REGIMEN

Prosperity and the Victim Stance

If you feel as though you are experiencing Lack, you have a perspective Issue. You exist within an Abundant Universe, however your Issues act as barriers between you and prosperity. Your beliefs, you see, are actively obscuring your perception of this Abundant Universe.

Let me explain the activity of Resonance at it applies to the Victim. Now Resonance is a dynamic process. It is composed of Light energy fluctuations achieving balance within electromagnetic influences. The Consciousness Units flash on and off, creating different realities in different time-frames. On the basic level, what you focus on consciously, or unconsciously, has a particular vibratory frequency that attempts to replicate itself in physical reality.

On the unconscious level, for example, let us suppose that you have a tendency to create just enough prosperity to sustain yourself, yet never enough to relax and enjoy your life. This is how you view it, your manifestation of your person reality.

This is a type of victim stance, in that, you see yourself as “trying to get ahead,” as we say, but it never quite happens.

In my terms, your prosperity evades you for you are creating unconsciously according to less-than-best case scenarios created in your past. These scenarios may have been developed by you in your response to perceived stress, trauma, negative experiences, you see. These are protective strategies that serve to protect you at THAT STAGE of your development: the point in your growth as a Soul in which you sustained the emotional injuries, the damage, you might say, to the Emotional Body. The ego/intellect, the conscious mind attempts to protect you in this way. It keeps from you this negative material. It represses it.

This resonance phenomenon is actively working within your subconscious to match the vibratory frequency of you victim strategy to people, places and things in your physical world. Subconsciously, then, you are creating your reality through this resonance effect, that seeks a match of outside to inside energies.

NOW IN THIS MOMENT

This reasoning also applies to any attempts at body conditioning through exercise and other physical activities. The important piece here is this: “What do you think of your physical body NOW in this moment?” Now in the moment is when you create your future, you see. Now in the moment is when you must Love yourself, Love your body. If you can see the potential trim and fit physical body beneath the chubby exterior, then you have the right idea. That is your focus, from my perspective. That positive image, that positive Feeling-Tone of Love and success is what may drive your manifestation activities over the course of the Regimen.

Obviously, if what you see before you as you look in the mirror repulses you, you have some important changes to make in your self-assessment activities. That is where you begin, then, to appreciate the body you now have while also anticipating the improvements.

On this Regimen you will be Loving your body into fitness. You Love how you are in this moment, first, and then you move toward the creation of an improved reality moment-to-moment, as you, for example, eat healthy foods, exercise regularly, and all the while you are keeping this Loving Understanding of self intact.

PHYSICAL HEALTH REGIMEN

In my past Blog Series, I suggested to you that in matters of diet, as in the eating of specific foods, that it was more important what the eater THOUGHT of the food. What matters most are the images, circular thoughts, essential ideas that you-the-eater entertain within your mental environment before, during, and after eating food. These influences have a very direct effect upon the digestion. So for example, if you eat a small piece of chocolate, say, that is on your FORBIDDEN list of foods, you would have, perhaps, a quite negative reaction to the food. “Chocolate makes me fat,” you may say to yourself as you eat it. That statement is a profound suggestion to your subconscious that you immediately, upon eating any chocolate, must begin the process of turning it into fat. Your digestive system will obey dutifully this suggestion as you reinforce it with negative imagery, negative emotion, and so on. In addition, this sets up an unfortunate dis-empowering dynamic in which you play the naughty child that must be punished with obesity by the punitive subconscious.

CHANGE THE PAST AND THE PRESENT WILL TAKE CARE OF ITSELF

Now here in this section we will demonstrate how a sense of Good Humor, as in clever punning, may help us initiate a manifestation scenario of positive realities. You already are familiar, I am guessing, with the modern aphorisms regarding the past: “Don’t dredge up the past. What’s done is done. Look forward.” Generally, the past, particularly the past of negative events, traumatic events shall we say, is indeed best forgotten. “Just don’t dwell on it, ” the saying goes, “and it will lose its power over you.”

There is some truth to these statements, from my perspective. You do indeed create through a focusing of your energies on the subject matter. And so I do not advise the student who has had a traumatic childhood, for example, to continuously TRY to remember the traumatic events. Without proper preparation, they may make matters worse for themselves. Yet I DO believe that a return to the scenes of the trauma in the imagination, from an Objective Observer’s perspective, may be quite healing. Again, this is not done willy-nilly, without regard for the safety of the human. Great preparation is made before the return to master this Observer’s Perspective.

Once this is done, the student may safely visit these unfortunate memories, and observe the going-on objectively, without Embodying these negative memories, in other words. Here is where we use humor to neutralize the negative Feeling-Tone that marks and identifies the traumatic events. Change the past and the present will take care of itself. It has a sense of the absurd to it yet it is literally true. Over time the Objective Observer creates safety in this retrieval process. The negative emotion loses its sting, its power to wound.

Now having been neutralized, the event may safely be studied, assessed, and TRANSFORMED. The student is quite literally changing their past. When they return to surface awareness from the Trance State they may well experience the cathartic healing of consciousness. In this sense the student recovers, as in going back to retrieve the lost aspects of Soul, rather than recover in the sense of again covering up the negative past. Please note the activity of the double meaning within consciousness.

PATH OF HEALING

ESSENTIAL METAPHOR – You are on a path to your past, to your birth. As you go back in time on this path you see on the side of the road, events, places where you split off parts of yourself and left them. The idea is to collect these aspects or parts of self and integrate them into your personality through Intent. You go all the way back to your birth. When you have done this adequately, you can go back beyond and before your birth to the time in between lives, in the Home Dimension and into other lives.

Now if you have issues of abuse from childhood, these issues may be healed from the present. As you walk this path you see different events being recreated on the side of the road. You see where you have left parts of yourself at different stages of development in your life. The idea is to collect these Feeling-Tones and bring them back to the present. This is healing the Soul. It allows you to integrate all of this material and navigate the developmental phase that was interrupted by the trauma.

CHILDHOOD TRAUMA

It is quite common for the human who has been traumatized in childhood to experience these flashbacks in adult life. The volatile material has been repressed successfully over the years, but now the images and other content force themselves upon the waking mind. The Reality Creation is disrupted violently during these events, as the human, usually referred to as “the victim,” re-experiences the Feeling-Tone of the Traumatic event or events.

It seems to me, that what must change here is the felt sense or Feeling-Tone of the traumatic past that comes to visit. One then revisits the traumatic memories in the Trance State, with an eye toward altering them; altering in memory and thus altering the effects in the flashbacks. One observes the traumatic material as an Objective Observer, without becoming emotionally involved, you see, as though one were watching a movie. Important information is carried out of the Trance State and then documented. Each time the scene is revisited in memory, the Objective Observer notes the particulars with cool detachment. Eventually the flashbacks will be experienced in this Observer Perspective, rather than the traumatized “victim” perspective. It is a case of tuning down the high emotionality and trauma of the event. The cascade of negative emotion will be prevented, as the disturbing material is observed in the cool light of day, you might say. Again, this is simply a change of perspective and so change of realities.

THE SUN CHILDREN

Once some children, at their mother’s behest, very gently approached the sun’s armpit. As the sun lay sleeping. They went to lift up the sun’s armpit.

At the same time, another woman ordered her children to do the same thing. She told them that if they approached ever so gently and drew up the sun’s armpit, then the rice of the Bushmen would become dry, and the sun, as it proceeded from place across the sky, would cause everything to become bright. For this reason it was that the old woman, their mother, coaxed her children to do as she asked. “But, children,” she said, “you must wait for the sun, who is making us so cold, to lie down to sleep. Then approach him gently and, all together, lift him up and throw him into the sky.” Thus, indeed, did both of the old women speak.

And so the children approached the sun. They first sat down and looked at him in order to determine whether, as he lay there, he was looking at them. Finally they saw him lying there very quietly, his elbow lifted up so that his armpit shone upon the ground. Before the children prepared to throw him up into the sky they remembered what the old woman, their mother, had said: “O children, going yonder, you must speak to him when you throw him up. You must tell him that he must be the sun – the sun who is hot and who, as he passes along the sky, causes the Bushmen rice to become dry – the sun who is hot as he stands above in the sky.”

Thus had their mother, the old woman, whose head was white, spoken. They had listened and were going to obey her.

When all was in readiness, they took hold of the sun, all of them together, lifted him, raised him, even though he was hot to touch, and threw him up in the sky, addressing him as they threw him up: “O sun, you must altogether stand fast and you must proceed along your way – you must stand fast while you are hot.”

Then the children returned to their mother, and one of them went to her and said, “Our companion, who is here, this one, took hold of him. So did I. Then my younger brother and my still younger brother, they all took hold of him. ‘Grasp hold of him firmly,’ I said, ‘and throw him up. Grasp the old man firmly and throw him up.’ Thus I spoke to them. Then the children threw him up, the old man, the sun.”

Then another one of those who had been resent – a younger indeed – he also spoke to her and said, “Oh, grandmother, we threw him up, the sun, and we told him what you had told us, that he should altogether become the sun, the sun who is hot, for us who are cold. And we addressed him thus: ‘O my grandfather, sun’s armpit! Remain there at that place. Because the sun who is hot so that the Bushmen rice may dry for us, so that you may make the whole earth light, that the earth may become warm in the summer, that you may altogether make heat. For the reason, you must shine everywhere. You must take away the darkness. You must come indeed so that the darkness will go away.'”

And thus it is. The sun comes, the darkness departs; the sun sets, the darkness comes and, then, at night the moon comes. The moon comes out; it brightens the darkness and the darkness then departs. It has taken the darkness aways and now it moves along, continually brightening the darkness. And the the moon sets and the sun, following, comes out. The sun now drives away the darkness, indeed drives away the moon as it stands there. The sun actually pierces the moon with his knife and that is why it decays. Therefore the moon said, “O sun! leave the backbone for the children!” And the sun did so.

Then the moon painfully went away painfully returned home. He went home to become another, a moon which is whole. He again comes to life although is had seemed that he had died. He becomes a new moon and feels as though he had put on a new stomach. He becomes large; he is alive again. Then he goes along as night, feeling that he is the moon once more. Indeed he feels he is a shoe, the shoe that Mantis threw into the sky, and ordered to become the moon.

That is what the sun has done – made all the earth bright. And thus it is that the people walk while the earth is light. Then people can see the bushes, can we see other people. They can see the meat which they are eating. They can see the springbok, can hunt it in summer. It is when the sun shines, like wise, that they can hunt the ostrich. And so – because the sun brightens the earth, because he shines upon the path of men – the Bushmen steal up to the gemsbok, steal up to the kudu, travel about in summer, and go visiting one another. Because the sun shines hottest upon the path of men in summer, they always go shooting and hunting then, for they are certain to espy the springbok. It is in the summer that they lie contented in their little homes made of bushes, and they scratch up the earth. All day they do when the springbok comes.

The people of whom we speaking were the Bushmen, the men of the early race. It is they who first inhabited this earth and it was their children who worked with the sun, who threw the sun up and made him ascend so that he might warm the earth for them, and that they might be able to sit in the sun.

The sun, they say, was originally a man who lived on earth. In the beginning, he gave forth brightness for a space just around his own dwelling. As his shining was confined to a certain space just at and around his own house, the rest of the country seemed as if the sky were very cloudy – as it looks now, in fact, when the sun is behind thick clouds. This shining came from one of the sun’s armpits as he lay with one arm lifted up. When he put down his arm, darkness fell everywhere; when he lifted it up again, it was as if day came. In the the day, the sun’s light used to be white, but at night, it was red like fire. When the sun was thrown up into the sky it became round and never was a man again.

The same is true of the moon. He too, was once a man who could talk. But today neither the sun nor the moon talk. They just live in the sky. Then Spider said, “I shall go on to Sun’s village in order to bring him. ” Hut Moon said, “Let me first get you something to eat.” And Spider replied, “Ho!” So Moon masked up some yam for him to eat. Then Spider set out for Sun’s village. When he reached Sun’s village, he said to him, “Your father says you must come along with me.” And Sun said, “It is well, I and you shall go, but let me get you something to eat first.” Spider replied, “Ho!” So Sun went and caught a sheep. When he came back, he said to Spider, “I would have wished, had my father come here, that he should have seen what I was doing; if it were good, or if it were bad, in either case he would have seen. Since, however, he has not come and you have come, it is as if father had come. Therefore here is this, my sheep, that I shall kill so you may eat.”

And he killed the sheep and prepared it beautifully for Spider to eat. After the meal Spider said, “Let us go on a fallen tree.” When they got there, Spider said to Sun, “Your father has blackened a stool at his home. He wishes you to succeed to that stool, so he has pulled up a yam and if you know its name, he will take the stool and give it to you. Now this yam is called ‘Terminus.’ And in order that you may not forget its name, I shall cut a shirt drum for you, and make a mpintini drum to go with it, so that when they beat the short drum and the mpintini drum then you will never forget this word, for the shirt drum will speak out and say:

‘Firi bomo!

Firi bomo!”

Then the mpintini drum will say:

‘Kintini bomo!

Kintini bomo!”

So they set off to go to the sky-god’s town. First they reached Moon’s village and took him along; then they reached Night’s village and took him along. All the way they played the mpintini drum. When they reached the outskirts of the town Spider saw a man, and he sent him off to tell the sky-god that they were coming. There upon the sky-god called on assembly together, and soon Spider and the others arrived and saluted every one. Spider now gave the spokesman the news, saying, “The chief’s errand on which I was sent I have performed; I have brought them.” And the sky-god said, “My children, the reason I caused you to be sent for this: I have blackened the stool standing there and I have also pulled up the yam over there. I shall now take this stool and give it to him who sees and names the yam. Because my eldest child is Night, let him try first.” Then Night said, “It is called ‘Pona.” And all the people shouted, “Y-e-e-e.” Again the sky-god spoke, “My second child is Moon, therefore let him give its name.” And moon said, “It is the yam called ‘Asnate.’ ” The people shouted, “Y-e-e-e-e.” Again the sky-god spoke, “My child, the third one, is Sun, therefore let him name it.”

Now’ I forgot to say that the dance music was going on:

“Kintnkyi Bomo!

Kintinkyi bomo!”

and Spider was turning cart-wheels.

Then Sun rose up and stood there, and took hold of the yam, and he said, “Oh, as for this, since ever I began to walk beside my father and was very small, he used to tell me its name, and I have not forgotten; it is called ‘Terminus” And the tribe shouted three times, “E!E!E!”

Then his father rose up and stood there and said, “You, Night, you are the eldest, but the words which I told you you have allowed yourself to forget, because you did not pay attention to my words. Because of this, it it now decreed that wicked things only will be done during your time. And you, Moon, the words with which you and I walked and I told you, you too did not follow. It is decreed therefore that only children will play during your reign. As for you, Sun, when I said words to you, you did not forget; you listened to my advice, so you are to be the chief. Should any one have any matter to settle, let it be heard in your time. Household cases. however, may be heard in the evening.

“So take the path which I have set you and if Zeno wishes to trespass upon it, may Diawerigne, the circular rainbow seen at times around the sun, throw itself around you, so that Moon may not be able to come and touch you. Again, if the rainclouds gather, the sky-god’s bow will be cast on the sky that your children who are under you may see when I have cast it so that the waters will not overflow and carry them away.

“One more thing. These words which were formerly known as the “Sayings of the Sky-God.” now since the spider, has been able to read these words in my head, let them be known henceforth as “The Sayings of Spider.”

[ ASHANTI ]

HOW THE SUN AND THE MOON RISE IN THE SKY

Many years ago the sun and the water were great friends, and both lived on the earth together. The sun very often used to visit the water, but the water never returned his visits. At last the sun asked the water why it was that he never came to see him in his house. The water replied that the sun’s house was not big enough, and that if he came with his people he would drive the sun out.

The water then said, “If you wish me to visit you, you must build a very large compound; but I warn you that it will have to be a tremendous place, as my people are very numerous and take up a lot of room.”

The sun promised to build a very big compound, and soon afterward he returned home to his wife, the moon, who greeted him with a broad smile when he opened the door. The sun told the moon what he had promised the water, and the next day he commenced building a huge compound in which to entertain his friend.

When it was completed, he asked the water to come and visit him the next day.

When the water arrived, he called out to the sun and asked him whether it would be safe for him to enter, and the sun answered, “Yes, come in, my friend.”

The water then began to flow in, accompanied by the fish and all the water animals.

Very soon the water was knee-deep, so he asked the sun if it was still safe, and the sun again said, “Yes,” so more water came in.

When the water was level with the top of a man’s head, the water said to the sun, “Do you want more of my people to come?”
The sun and the moon both answered, “yes,” not knowing any better, so the water flowed in, until the sun and moon had to perch themselves on the top of the roof.

Again the water addressed the sun, but, receiving the same answer, and more of his people rushing in, the water very soon overflowed the top of the roof, and the sun and the moon were forced to go up into the sky, where they have remained ever since.

[ EFIK – IBIBIO ]

HOW THE LESSER GOD, KOMBA CAME INTO THE WORLD

There once was a certain woman who bore eleven children. Every day when she got up and cooked food the children ate it all and the mother did not get any of it. She pondered long about the matter, and went off to the plantation and spoke to the silk-cotton tree, saying, “I shall send my eleven children to come beneath you here to pluck pumpkins; and when they come, pluck off eleven of your branches and kill those children of mine.”

The silk-cotton tree said, “I have heard, and I shall do it for you.”

The mother then went home and said to her children, “You must go to the plantation beneath the silk-cotton tree; there are pumpkins there. Go pick them and come back.”

The children set off. They went and reached the silk-cotton tree. Number Eleven said, “Number One, stand still; Number Two, stand still; Number Three, stand still; Number Four, stand still; Number Five, stand still; Number Six, stand still; Number Seven, stand still; Number Eight, stand still; Number Nine, stand still; Number Ten, Stand still; and I Number Eleven, I have stood still.”

Number Eleven then addressed them saying, “Do you not know the sole reason why Mother said we must go and pick pumpkins?”

His brother’s answered, “No.”

Thereupon he said, “She has told this silk-cotton tree that, when we go there, he must pluck off branches and beat us. Therefore all of you cut sticks and throw them against this silk-cotton tree.”

They cut the sticks and threw them against the silk-cotton tree. Pim! pen! pim! pen! was the sound they made. The silk-cotton supposed that the children had come. He took off eleven of his branches and let them fall to the ground. Little Number Eleven said, “You have seen – had we gone on there, the silk-cotton tree would have killed us.”

They picked up the pumpkins and took them to their mother. She cooked them. And at once the children had eaten all! Their mother said, “Ah! as for this matter, I cannot bear it! I shall take these children and give them to the sky-god.”

The next morning, when things became visible, she went and told the sky-god all about it, saying, “The children to whom I have given birth eat so fast and so much that when I wish to eat, I can’t get anything. Hunger is killing me. Therefore, I implore you, let the children be brought and killed, so that I may get something to eat.”

The sky-god said, “Is that really the case?”

The woman said, “I am speaking with a head, the inside of which is white.”

So the sky-god picked out messengers, and they went and dug a large pit in which they placed broken bottles. The sky-god himself went and fetched a snake and a leopard, put them in the pit, and covered it over. And now the messenger went to call the children.

No sooner did they reach the place where the pit lay, than Number Eleven said, “Number One, stand still; Number Two, stand still; Number Three, stand still; Number Four, stand still; Number Five, stand still; Number Six, stand still; Number Seven, stand still; Number Eight, stand still; Number Nine, stand still; Number Ten, stand still; and I myself Number Eleven, I have stood still. You must pass here, but you must not pass there.”

His brothers said, “Why, when a wide path lies there, must we pass through the bush?”

Now, as they were going along, they all carried clubs. Number Eleven said, “Throw one of these clubs upon this path.” They threw a club upon the path, and it fell through into the pit. Yiridi was the sound of its fall. Number Eleven said, “There you are! You see! Had we passed there, we should all of us have died.”

So they took a bypath and went off to meet the sky-god. The sky-god had caused holes to be dug, covered over, and stools placed upon them, so that when the children came to sit on them, they would fall into the holes. Soon the arrived before the face of the sky-god. Hep spoke to them: “Stools are set there. You may go and be seated upon them.”

Then Number Eleven siad, “Who are we that we should be able to sit upon such very beautiful stools? So, sire, we are going to sit aside here.”

Thereupon the sky-god gazed at the children and he said to himself, “I shall send the children to Death’s village.”

The next morning, when things became visible, he called the children and said, “You must go to Death who lives yonder and receive from her a golden pipe, a golden chewing-stick, a golden snuff box, a golden whetstone, and a golden fly-switch.”

Number Eleven said, “You are our master, wherever you will send us, we shall go.”

The sky-god said, “Be off!”

So the children set out for Death’s village. When they arrived there, Death said, “Why, when no one must ever come here, have. you come here?”

They replied, “We were roaming. about and came here quite by chance.” Death said, “Oh, all right then.”

Now Death had ten children. With herself, they made eleven. When things began to disappear – that is, when it became dark – Death divided up the children one by one and gave one to each of her children, while she herself and Number Eleven went to rest. When it was dark, Death then lit up her teeth until they shone red so that she might seize Number Eleven with them.

Number Eleven said, “Death, I must not yet asleep.”

Death said, “When will you be asleep?”

Number Eleven said, “If you were to give me a golden pipe to smoke for a while, then I might fall asleep.”

And Death fetched it for him.

A little while later, Death again lit up her teeth in order to go and seize Number Eleven with them.

Number Eleven said, “Death, I am not yet asleep.’

Death said, “When will you be asleep?”

Number eleven said, “If you were to bring me a golden snuff box, I might go to sleep.”

And Death brought it to him.

Again, soon afterward, Death was going to seize Number Eleven.

Number Eleven said, “I am not asleep.”

Death said, “When will you asleep?”

Number Eleven said, If you were to go and fetch golden chewing-stick for me so that I might chew it for a while, then I might fall asleep.”

Death fetched it for him, A short time passed, and Death was about to seize him.

Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, I am not yet asleep.”

And Death said, “Then when will you be asleep?”

Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, if you were to go and bring me a golden whetstone, then I might sleep.”

And Death went brought it. Again, soon afterward, Death rose up once more.

Number Eleven said, “Oh, Grandmother, I said I was not yet asleep.”

Death said, “And what will be the day when you will be asleep?”

Number Eleven said, “If you were to go and take a calabash full of holes and go and splash water in it and boil some food for me to eat, then I might sleep.”

Death lifted up a strainer and went off to the stream. When she slashed the water into it, the holes in the strainer let it pass through. Now Number Eleven said to his brothers, “Rise up and flee away.” Then they rose up and fled, and Number Eleven went and cut a plantain stems and placed them where his brothers had lain and took cloths and covered them over.

Now Death was at the stream splashing water. And Male Death called to Female Death, saying, “Ho thee, Death!”

She replied, “Adwo.

He said, “What are you doing?”

She replied, “Alas, is it not some small child whom I have got! When I am about to catch him, he says, ‘I am not yet asleep.’ He has taken all my things, and now he says, I must take a strainer and splash water.”

Male Death said, “Ah, are you a small child? If you pluck leaves and line the inside of the strainer and then splash water, would it not be all right?”

Female Death said, “Oh, how true!”

She plucked leaves, placed them inside, and splashed the water and went off. Number Eleven said, “Death, you have come already? Boil the food.” Death cooked the food; she lit up her teeth in order to kill Number Eleven’s brothers and cook them for food. When she went, she did not examine them carefully, and she herself killed all her own children.

The next day, very, very early, when things became visible, Death rose up and sat there by the fired. Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, a tsetse fly is sitting on your breast.”

Death said, “Fetch the fly-switch which is lying there and kill it for me.”

Number Eleven saaid, “Good gracious me! A person of your consequence – when a tsetse fly settles on you and a golden fly-switch lies there – you would use this only thing! Let me fetch the golden fly-switch and come and kill it.”

Death said, “Go and fetch it from the room.”

Number Eleven went and brought it. He purposely drove the fly away; he didn’t kill it. Number Eleven said, “Oh, today, where this tsetse fly will rest, there I shall rest with him.”

The number Eleven went to the room and took his bag in which lay the golden pipe and all the things. He said, “Grandmother Death, nothing will suffice save that I get the tsetse fly, put it in this bag, and bring it to you.”

Number Eleven set off – yiridi! yiridi! yiridi! He reached the end of the town and siad, “Ho, there, Grandmother Death! Pardon my saying so but if you were not a perfect fool, could I have found a way to escape, and could I have made you also kill all your children? As for me, I am going off.”

Death said, “You, a child like this! Wherever you rest, there I shall rest!”

Number Eleven leaped off – yiridi! yiridi! yiridi! and death, too, went to chase him.

As Number Eleven was going, he overtook his brothers who were sitting on the path. They were making a bird-trap. Number Eleven said, “Have you not gone yet? Death is coming, so let us find some way to escape.”

Now Death came upon them. Number Eleven took medicine and poured it on his brothers, and they went on top of a silk-cotton tree. And Death stood at the foot of the silk-tree. She said, “Just now I saw those children, and where have they gone?

Number Eleven was sitting above. He said to his brothers, I am going to make water upon her.”

His brothers said, “E! she is seeking us to catch us, and we have fled and come and sit here and yet you say, ‘I am going to make water on her.'”

Number Eleven would not listen, and he made water over Death.

Death said, “Ah, there you are! Today you have seen trouble.” Death said, “You, child, who are sitting up there, Kyerehe-ne, Kyere-he-ne!” Thereupon one of the children fell down. “Kyere-he-ne!” a second one fell down. Soon there remained only Number Eleven.

Death said, “Child, Kyere-he-ne!” and Number Eleven leaped and descended on the ground, kirim! And Death then went on top of the silk-cotton tree.

Number Elven said, “You, great big woman, you too, Kyere-he-ne!”

And death, also, came down, tum! She was dead.

Number Elven went and plucked medicine, rolled it between his palms, and sprinkle it on his brothers, and they rose up. Number eleven was going to throw the medicine awaye, when some of it dropped on Death, and Death awoke. She said, “You have killed me, and you have also awakened me. Today you and I will have a chase.”

They they all started to run off at once, kiri! kiri! kiri! Now Death was chasing them. As they were going, there lay before them a big river in flood. When Number Eleven and his brothers reached it, the brothers knew how to swim and they swam across. Number Eleven alone did not know how to swim. The children stood on the other side; they cried and cried and cried; their mouths became swollen up. As for Number Eleven, he turned into a stone.

Death reached the river. She said, “Oh, these children! You stand there! Let me get a stone and hit your swollen mouths.” Death, when she looked down, saw a stone lying there. She picked it up and threw it. As the stone was travelling, it said, “Winds take me and set me on the other side.” It alighted on the other side. Number Eleven said, “Here I am!”

Death said, “Ah, that child! I have no further matter to talk to you about. All I have to say to you is this: Go and remain at home and change into one of the lesser gods, and, if anyone whom I wish to take comes to where you are, do you inform me. If I so desire, I will leave him and make you a present of him; but what I wish in exchange you must receive it for me.”

That is how the Komba, the lesser gods, came into the world. They are descended from the small child Number Eleven.

[ ASHANTI ]

CREATOR AMON AND HIS FOUR WIVES

Amon was married to Keti, the barn-door fowl, but after a while he took to himself four other wives. Keti, of course, retained her rights as head wife, and the other four wives obeyed her.

One day Amon called the four newcomers together and asked each one what present she would give in return for his raised her above other women in the tribe. The first one promised that she would always sweep his compound for him and keep the place neat and tidy; the second said she would always cook for him and never complain when there were many visitors; the third agreed to spin cotton for him and to bring him all the water he might require; and the fourth one said that she would bear him a child of gold.

This last promise pleased Amon, and every day he killed a sheep for this woman. But the child was long in coming. Just when Amon’s patience was giving out. the woman conceived, and Amon detailed Keti to tend and care for her.

So Keti took the woman into her hut and, when the time of delivery was at hand, Keti told her that, whatever else she did, she was to be sure to shut her eyes when the child was born and not to open them until she was told to do so. The woman obeyed, and Keti hurried out and brought back a big pot.

Now it happened that the woman bore twins. The first one to be born was made entirely of silver, and Keti at once took the babe and placed it in the pot. The second child of gold, and Keti placed it in the pot. The she hurried outside and found two frogs. Running with these, she placed them on the couch and then told the mother to open her eyes and see her children.

Then Keti hastened out of the hut with the pot and ran with it as fast as she could to the far, far bush, where she found a dead odum tree. There she hid the pot with the two babies and then returned swiftly to Amon’s compound, passing by his hut on the way. She told her husband that the children had been born and asked him to go with her to see his offspring.

Amon at once arose and went to the hut where the mother was lying. To his consternation and anger, he found two frogs instead of the expected child of gold. He gave orders that the frogs were to be killed at once and that the woman should be sent into the furthermost corner of his kingdom.

Now Amon has a certain hunter whose hut was situated in the far bush. He happened to be out hunting on the day the children were born and his chase led him to the odum tree. There his eye was attracted by the glitter of the golden child and he cried out, “Why, what is this?”

The children answered him, “We are the children of Amon” But he could not believe that.

He took some of the dust that had fallen from their bodies, however, and put it into his bag. Then he took up the children and carried them to his hovel. There he kept them secretly, not did he tell any man of what he had found.

And every time the hunter wanted money he would gather some of the children’s dust. Thus he became a very rich man. Instead of having a solitary hovel in the bush, he built a huge compound and round him there gathered a great town.

Now not very far away there lived Spider. One day he went into the bush to gather some white ants for his fowls and he came across the new town. He was astounded to see that in the place where he expected a hovel there was so much wealth and so many people. His curiosity aroused, Spider entered the town to learn how the change had come about. By sheer accident he espied the former hunter playing with the children. At once Spider knew that the latter were the lost children of Amon, and he hurried back home to send a message to their father. But the hunter has also seen Spider, and he knew full well that that busybody would betray his secret. Therefore he called the children and told them that, as they claimed they were the children of Amon, he proposed to take them to Amon.

The next morning he prepared hammocks and fine clothes for the children and proceeded on the way to Amon. On the road the children called their foster-father and told him that he must collect some stones withe which to play wari, as they themselves could not speak to their father, but that the stones would tell him the whole story.

The man did so, and they arrived before Amon. There the hunter placed stools and asked Amon if he would play a game of wari with him. Amon agreed, but the silver child said, no, he himself wished to play, that the stones would tell the story for which they had come.

Then the silver child and Amon sat down to the game and, as the stones went round and round the board, the golden child sang the story of their adventures from the time of their mother’s promise until their birth; he sang of the baseness of Keti and of the kindness of the hunter who had fed them instead of killing them for their silver and gold.

Then Amon knew them to be his children, and he sent straightway into the far, far bush to call back the woman whom he had exiled. When she arrived, she was dirty over and her hair was uncut and unkempt. Amon himself washed the woman, and when she was clean and nice again he sent for Keti.

Great was Amon’s wrath. He tied the evil fowl Keti, his first wife, by he foot to a stick and cured her. Then he threw her down from the sky and gave orders that every time the fowl wished to drink she would first have to raise her head to him and beg. Further, Amon gave orders that every man would in the future sacrifice fowls as the ordinary sacrifices to the gods.

Are not these things done to this day?

As for the children – once every year they are washed , and dust from them falls upon the earth. Some falls on men, and these are the lucky ones who become wealthy.

[ KRACHI ]

HOW GOD SEPARATED FROM MAN AND WOMAN

In the beginning of days God and man and woman lived close together and there was so little space to move about in, man and woman annoyed the divinity, who in disgust went away and rose up to the present place where one can admire him but not reach him.

He was annoyed for a number of reasons. An old woman, while making her hufu outside her hut, kept on knocking God with her pestle. This hurt him and, as she persisted, he was forced to go higher out of her reach. Besides, the smoke of the cooking fires got into his eyes so that he had to go farther away. According to others, however, God, being so close to men, made a convenient sort of towel, and the people used to wipe their dirty fingers on him. This naturally annoyed him. Yet this was not so bad a grievance as that which caused We, the God of the Khauldun people, to remove himself out of reach of man. He did so because an old woman, anxious to make a good soup, used to cut off a bit of him at each mealtime, and We, being pained at this treatment, went higher.

Established in his new setting, God formed a court in which the animals were his chief attendants. Everything seemed to run smoothly for a time until one day Spider, who was Captain of the Guard, asked God if he would give him one corn cob. “Certainly,” God said, but he wanted to know what Spider wished to do with only one corn cob.

And Ananse said, “Master, I will bring you a hundred slaves in exchange for one corn cob.”

At this, Wati laughed.

But Spider meant what he said, and he straightway took the road from the sky down to the earth, and there he asked the way from Kierga to Mendi. Some men showed him the road and Spider set out. That evening he had gone far as Tarikh. There he asked the chief for a lodging, and a house was shown him. And when it was time to go to bed, he took the corn cob and asked the chief where he could put it for safekeeping. “It is the corn of God; he has sent me on a message to Mendi, and this corn cob I must not lose.”

So the people showed him a good place in the roof, and everyone went to sleep. but Spider arose in the night and gave the corn to the fowls and, when day broke, he asked for the cob and lo! It was all eaten and destroyed. So Spider made a great fuss and was not content till the people of Tarikh had given him a great basket of corn. Then he continued on his way and shortly say down by the roadside, as he was weary from carrying so great a load.

Presently there came along a man with a live fowl in his hand which he was bringing back from his field. Spider greeted him and they soon become friends. Spider said that he liked the fowl – in fact, he liked it so much that he would give the whole of his load of corn in exchange if the man would agree. Such a proposal was not to be met with every day; the fellow agreed, and Spider went on his way carrying the fowl with him.

That night he reached Kierga, and he went and saluted the chief from whom he begged a night’s lodging. This was readily granted and Spider, being tired, soon went to bed. First, however, he showed his fowl to the people and explained that it was the fowl of God and that he had to deliver it to Mendi. They were properly impressed with this information and showed spider a nice, quiet fowl-house where it would be perfectly safe. Then all went to bed.

But Spider did not sleep. As soon as he heard every one snoring, he arose and took his fowl and went outside the village and there sacrificed the poor bird. Leaving the corpse in the bush and placing some of the blood and feathers on the chief’s own doorpost, he went back to bed.

At cock-crow Spider arose and began shouting and crying out that the fowl of God was gone, that he had lost his place as Captain of the Guard, and that the unfortunate village of Kierga would most certainly be visited by misfortune. The hullabaloo brought everyone outside, and by this time it was daylight. Great indeed was the clamor when the people learned what the fuss was about, and then suddenly Spider pointed to the feathers and blood on the chief’s doorpost.

There was no use denying the fact – the feathers were undoubtedly those of the unfortunate fowl, and just then a small boy found its body. It was evident to all that their own chief had been guilty of a sacrilege too dreadful to think about. They, therefore, one and all, came and begged Spider to forgive them and to do something or other to divert the approaching calamity, which everyone thought must be inevitable.

Spider at last said that possibly God would forgive them, if they gave him a sheep to take to Mendi.

“Sheep!” creid the people. “We will give you any number of sheep so long as you stop this trouble.”

Ananse was satisfied with ten sheep and he went his way.

He had no further adventures until he reached the outskirts of Mendi with his sheep. He was a little tired, however, and sat down outside the village and allowed his sheep to graze. He was still resting when there came toward him a company of people, wailing and weeping. They bore with them a corpse, and when Spider saluted them and asked what they were doing, they said that a young man had died and that they were now carrying him back to his village for burial.

Spider asked if the village was far, and they said it was far. Then he said that it was more than likely that the body would rot on the road, and they agreed. He then suggested that they should give him the corpse and in exchange he would give them the ten sheep. This was a novel kind of business deal, but it sounded all right and, after a little while, the company of young men agreed and they went off with the sheep, leaving their dead brother with Spider.

The latter waited until nightfall and then walked into town, carrying with him the corpse. He came to the house of the chief of Mendi and saluted that nighty monarch, and begged for a small place where he could rest. He added:

“I have with me as companion the son of God. He is his favorite son, and, although you know me as the captain of God’s Host, yet I am only as a slave to this boy. He is asleep now, and as he so tired I want to find a hut for him.”

This was excellent news for the people of Mendi and a hut was soon ready for the favorite son of God.

Spider placed the corpse inside and covered it with a cloth so that it seemed verily like a sleeping man. Spider then came outside and was given food. He feasted himself well and asked for some food for God’s son. This he took into the hut where, being greedy, he finished the meal and came out bearing with him the empty pots.

Now the people of Mendi asked if they might play and dance, for it was not often a son of God came to visit them. Spider said that they might, for he pointed out to them that the boy was an extraordinarily hard sleeper and practically nothing could wake him – that he himself, each morning, had had to flog the boy until he woke, and that shaking was no use, nor was shouting. So they played and they danced.

As the dawn came, Spider got up and said it was time for him and God’s son to be up and about their business. So he asked some of the chief”s own children who had been dancing to go in and wake the son of God. He said that, if the young man did not get up, they were to flog him, and then he would surely be aroused. The children did this, but God’s son did not wake. “Hit harder, hit harder! cried Spider, and the children did so. But still God’s son did not wake.

The Spider said that he would go inside and wake him himself. So he arose and went into the hut and called to God’s son. He shook him, and then he made the startling discovery that the boy was dead. Spider’s cries drew everyone to the door of the compound, and there they learned the dreadful news that the sons of their chief had beaten God’s favorite child to death.

Great was the consternation of the people. The chief himself came and saw and was convinced. He offered to have his children killed; he offered to kill himself; he offered everything imaginable. But Spider refused and said that he could think of nothing that day, as his grief was too great. Let the people bury the unfortunate boy and perhaps he, Spider would devise some plan by which God might be appeased.

So the people took the dead body and buried it.

That day all Mendi was silent, as all men were stricken with fear.

But in the evening Spider called the chief to him and said, “I will return to my father, God, and I will tell him how the young boy has died. But I will take all the blame on myself and I will hide you from his wrath. You must, however, give me a hundred young men to go back with me, so that they can bear witness as to the boy’s death.”

The the people were glad, and they chose a hundred of the best young men and made them ready for the long journey to the abode of God.

Next morning Spider arose and, finding the young men ready for the road, he went with them back to Wolof and from there he took them up to God.

The latter saw him coming with the crowd of youths and came out to greet him. And Spider told him all that he had done and showed how from one single corn cob God had now got a hundred excellent young slaves. So pleased was God that he confirmed Spider in his appointment as Chief of his Host and changed his name from Aphthis to Spider, which it has remained to the present day.

Now Spider got very conceited over this deed and used to boast greatly about this cleverness. One day he even went so far as to say that he possessed more sense than God himself. It happened that God overheard this, and he was naturally annoyed at such presumption. So, next day, he sent for his captain and told him that he must go and fetch him something. No further information was forthcoming, and Spider was left to find out for himself what God wanted.

All day Spider thought and thought, and in the evening God laughed at him and said, “You must bring me something. You boast everywhere that you are my equal, now prove it.”

So next day Spider arose and left the sky on his way to find something. Presently he had an idea and, sitting down by the wayside, he called all the birds together. From each one he borrowed a fine feather and then dismissed them. Rapidly he wove the feather into a magnificent garment and then returned to God’s town. There he put on the wonderful feather robe and climbed up the treed over against God’s house. Soon God came out and saw the garishly colored bird. It was a new bird to him, so he called all the people together and asked them the name of the wonderful bird. But none of them could tell, not even the elephant, who knows all that is in the far, far bush. Someone suggested that Spider might know, but God said that, unfortunately, he had sent him away on an errand. Everyone wanted to know the errand and God laughed and said, “Spider has been boasting too much and I heard him say that he has as much sense as I have. So I told him to go and get me something.” everyone wanted to know what this something was, and God explained that Spider would never guess what he meant, for the something he wanted was nothing less than the sun, the moon, and darkness.

The meeting then broke up amid roars of laughter at Spider’s predicament and God’s exceeding cleverness. But Spider, in his fine plumes, had heard what was required of him and, as soon as the road was clear, descended from his tree and made off to the bush.

There he discarded his feathers and went far, far away. No man knows quite where he went, but, wherever he went, he managed to find the sun and the moon and the darkness. Some say that the python gave them to him, others are not sure. In any case, find them he did and, putting them into his bag, he hastened back to God.

He arrived at his master’s house late one afternoon and was greeted by God who, after a while, asked Spider if he had brought back something.

“Yes,” said Spider, and went to his bag and drew out darkness. Then all was black and no one could see. Thereupon he drew out the moon and all could see a little again. The last he drew out the sun, and some who were looking at Spider saw the sun and they became blind, and some who saw only a little of it were blinded in one eye. Others, who had their eyes shut at the moment, were luckier, so they lost nothing of their eyesight.

Thus it came about that blindness was brought into the world, because God wanted something.

[ KRACHI ]

The Sky-God gave Spider Stories

Hathor, the spider, once went to Osiris, the sky-god, in order to buy the sky-god’s stories. The sky-god said, “I know I shall be able.” Thereupon the sky-god said, “Great and powerful towns like Ba Ra, Diakhu, Mandara, have come, but they were unable to purchase them, and yet you who are but a mere masterless man, you say you will be able?”

The spider said, “What is the price of the stories?” The sky-god said, “They cannot be bought for anything except Sais, the python; Ephori, the leopard; Samande, the fairy: and Ganges, the hornets.” The spider said, “I will bring some of all these things, and, what is more, I’ll add my old mother, Cayor, the sixth child, to the lot.”

The sky-god said, “Go and bring them then.” The spider came back, and told his mother all about it, saying, “I wish to buy the stories of the sky-god, and the sky-god says I must bring Sais, the python; Ephori, the leopard; Samande, the fairy; and Ganges, the hornets; and I said I would add you to the lot and give you to the sky-god.” Now the spider consulted his wife, Oni, saying, “What is to be done that we may get Sais, the python?” Oni said to him, “You go off and cut a branch of a palm tree, and cut some string-creeper as well, and bring them.” And the spider came back with them. And Oni said, “Take them to the stream.” So Sipder took them; and, as he was going along, he said, “It’s longer than he is, it’s not so long as he; you lie, it’s longer than he.”

The Spider said, “There he is, lying yonder.” The python, who had overheard this imaginary conversation, then asked, “What’s this all about?” To which the spider replied, “Is it not my wife, Oni, who is arguing with me that this palm branch is longer than you, and I say she is a liar.” And Sais, the python, said, “Bring it, and come and measure me.” Spider took the palm branch and laid it along the python’s body. Then he said, “Stretch yourself out.” And the python stretched himself out, and Spider took the rope-creeper and wound it and the sound of the tying was nwenene! nwenene! nwenene! until he came to the head.

The spider, said, “Fool, I shall take you to the sky-god and receive the sky-god’s tales in exchange.” So Spider took him off to Hathor, the sky-god. The sky-god then said, “My hand has touched it, there remains what still remains.” The spider returned and came and told his wife what had happened, saying, “There remain the hornets.” His wife said, “Look for a gourd, and fill it with water and go off with with it.” The spider went along through the bush, when he saw a swarm of hornets hanging there, and he poured out some of the water and sprinkled it on them. He then poured the remainder upon himself and cut a leaf of plantain and covered his head with it. And now he addressed the hornets, saying, “As the rain has come, had you not better come and enter this, my gourd, so the the rain will not beat you; don’t you see that I have taken a plantain leaf to cover myself?” Then the hornets said, “We thank you, Napa, we thank you, Napa.” All the hornets flew, disappearing into the gourd, fom! Father Spider covered the mouth, and exclaimed, “Fools, I have got you, and I am taking you to receive the tales of the sky-god in exchange.”

And he took the hornets to the sky-god. The sky-god said, “My hand has touched it; what remains still remains.”

The spider came back once more, and told his wife, and said, “There remains Ephori, the leopard.” Oni said, “Go and dig a hole.” Spider said, “That’s enough, I understand.” Then the spider went off to look for the leopard’s tracks, and having found them, he dug a very deep pit, covered it over, and came back home. Very early next day, when objects began to be visible, the spider said he would go off, and when he went, lo, a leopard was lying in the pit. Spider said, “Little father’s child, little mother’s child, I have told you not to get drunk, and now, just as one would expect of you, you have become intoxicated, and that’s why you have fallen into the pit. If I were to say I would get you out, next day, if you saw me, or likewise any of my children, you would go and catch me and them.” The leopard said, “O! I could not do such a thing.”

Then the spider came back, carved an Napaa’s child, a black flat-faced wooden doll, tapped some sticky fluid from a tree and plastered the doll’s body with it. Then he made eto, pounded some in the doll’s hand. Again he pounded some more and placed it in a brass basin; he tied string around the doll’s was it, and went with it and placed it at the foot of the odum tree, the place where the fairies come play. And a fairy came along. She said, “Napaa, may I eat a little of this mash?” Spider tugged at the string, and the doll nodded her head. The fairy turned to one of the sisters, saying, “She says I may eat some.” She said, “Eat some, then.” And she finished eating, and thanked her. But when she thanked her, she doesn’t reply.” The sister of the first fairy said, “Slap her crying-place.” And she slapped it, pa! And she struck there. She said to her sister, “My hand has stuck there.” She said, “Take the one that remains and slap her crying-place again.” And she took it and slapped her, pa! and this one, too, stuck fast. And her fairy told her sister, saying, “My two hands have stuck fast.” She said, “Push it with your stomach.” She pushed it and her stomach stuck to it. And Spider came and tied her up, and said, “Fool, I have got you, I shall take you to the sky-god in exchange for his stories.” And he went off home with her.

Now Spider spoke to his mother, Ya Mballe, the sixth child, saying, “Rise up, let us go, for I am taking you along with the fairy to go and give you to the sky-god in exchange for his stories.” He lifted them up, and went off there to where the sky-god was. Arrived there he said, “Sky-god, here is a fairy and my old woman whom I spoke about, here she is too.” Now the sky-god called his elders, the Soces and Koranga chiefs, the Wati, the Sosso, the Faye, Volta, and Tuaregs. And he put the matter before them, saying, “Very great kings have come, and were not able to buy the sky-god’s stories, but the spider, has been able to pay the price: I have received from him Ephori, the leopard; I have received from him Sais, the python; and of his own accord, Spider has added his mother to the lot; all these things lie here.” He said, “Sing his praise.” “Eee!” they shouted. The sky-god’s stories and I present them to you, kose! kose! kose! my blessing, blessing, blessing! No more shall we call them the stories of the sky-god, but we shall call them spider-stories.”

This, my story, which I have related, if it be sweet, or if it be not sweet, take some elsewhere, and let some come back to me.

[ ASHANTI ]

FROM MY PERSPECTIVE

I often use the phrase in these New Blogs, “from my perspective.” Let me speak a bit about what that might mean. Now please remember, here in our discussions it is perception that causes Reality Creation. The Percepts, as we have defined it in our Blogs, is that aspect of consciousness that simultaneously and instantaneously creates and perceives the Reality Construct. Therefore, can you see that from my perspective I am witness to our greater multidimensional experiencing? This enlarged perspective of mine includes the goings-on within our probable futures.

The mind reels here in contemplation of this perspective. However, if you are with us on this voyage, and you are attending to the exercises and experimentation we present to you, I would suggest that your mind may now be in the beginning stages of a new stability with regards to witnessing the multidimensional nature of the self that is quite commonplace to Light Beings.

That is what it is all about, this shift to 4th Dimensional Awareness. From my perspective, many of us are becoming quite expert at “holding” this state of awareness for extended periods of time. We are on the same wavelength, in a very literal way. We are focused on this same compelling subject of interest. We are all of us witnessing the divine creation of realities moment-to-moment.

CONSCIOUS CO-CREATOR

Conscious co-creation entails the intentional learning of Lessons. The Lessons of physical existence are not denied nor are they intellectualized. This is also what we call Enlightenment or Soul Evolution.

For each second that we are consciously co-creating a Loving reality, we are also awakening in the spiritual sense; we are awakening to our Higher Self. Now, for each second that we co-create fear and anger we are being controlled by the negative Gestalts of consciousness. Thus we have this simple dynamic that I have described for you before: Loving co-creation is godbuilding; the re-creation of anxiety, fear, anger and cynicism supports the Negative entities. These Entities are the negative gods of our religious systems.

You see, each of us reacts differently – in a personalized manner – when we encounter the negative emotions. It is true that the emotional states of the human are easily recognizable, broadly speaking, in that an observer could easily surmise what are the emotional states currently of those before them. However, the internal manifestation of the emotional state is colored by characteristics of personality and individual temperament. It is in this arena of the personality consciousness of the individual where the “decision” is made to either meet and transform the emotional state or to recreate it without thoughtful input – subconsciously, you see.

In this realm of perception is where the student gains their findings in the exploratory venture as a Scientist of Consciousness. OUR consciousness is the laboratory here, to continue our quaint little metaphor. Our unswerving crystal-clear focus on the phenomena within our “mind” represents the requisite objective critical thinking aspect of the scientist: the empirical perspective. We are referring in this section the two Blogs from our last series, in which we outlined the path for the Scientist of Consciousness and made our case for the necessity of this approach at this critical time in our history.

INTEGRATING THE NEGATIVE PERSONA

HYPOTHESIS: We can reclaim and integrate the cumulative castoff aspects of Soul

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY

I trust that you are convinced now that your mission in physical reality is to transform the negative into the positive, after first of course, analyzing the negative manifestation for origins, value, etc. Now when this is done consistently – habitually – there comes a time when the architect of these negative reality constructions become quite known to you. This aspect of your consciousness we refer to as the Negative Persona.

You identify it as a subject in order to study this subject. It remains the ultimate truth of our reality that we are complete and utterly whole, un-fragmented, good, and of sacred value unto oneself. However, let us examine this theorized Negative Persona here in an effort of self-understanding and propose an exercise to identify it completely, and then accept it into the consciousness in a ritualized fashion. This will be an “owning” of the personalized negative aspects of consciousness.

Now, as you wrestle with your Lessons, the theorized Negative Persona is created. In your personal underworld it can gain great power, over time, as the uncomfortable aspects of your personality are noticed by the ego/intellect and then intentionally ignored. The perceived negative is a personal opinion, therefore, and this evolving Negative Persona bears the characteristics of human existence that are thought of as shameful, inappropriate, fearful, and so on.

Each human is different in their respective creations of this aspect of consciousness. And because it is such a personal and intimate portrayal by the individual of everything that is perceived as “wrong” about them, it gains a certain treacherous and even potentially catastrophic potential. It is as though you feel that if this information ever comes to light – revealed to family, friends, colleagues – that you would not be able to bear it. You would be destroyed. You would possibly cease to exist.

This is that mythological “beast within” that seeks acknowledgment by the self, but seldom is granted this acknowledgment. Currently, because great numbers of us are awakening in our time frame, it is necessary for you to “take your medicine,” in a sense, with regards to acknowledging this Negative Persona. All of us are in our Issues at this time. All of us are deep within our Lessons. All of us are being called upon to accept responsibility for our negative selves, so that we will cease projecting our disavowed aspects of self onto others: mates, families, nations, collective of all types.

Your Negative Persona is best recognized in the negative remarks made to you by others concerning your personality and behavior. To be sure, some of these comments may have intrinsic value: they may be quite true, in other words. Your task is to determine the truth in these negative comments and own these comments. Take responsibility here. Then as you assess the negative comments that do not pertain to you, but were perhaps mere projections of fear and doubt from your friends and family, get a sense of this Collective Persona.

  • How does it feel to confront this aspect of your personality?
  • Is there a sense of familiarity here, as though you have been aware of this element, but were perhaps afraid to fully face it?

Now simply acknowledge this construct as a very important part of you, the other side of you, in fact. This is to be done with Courage and Loving Understanding as your primary operating perspective.

FINDINGS: Please document your Findings.

THE POSITIVE MANIFESTATION

These words acted as a dramatic script for our example throughout your life…

There are Lessons of a Positive nature also for the Reality Creator. We often speak of the Positive Manifestation as it pertains to The Shift in consciousness for humanity. Our positive input fuels The Shift, quite literally. Now what of the Positive Manifestation within the Personal Reality Field of the individual? An example for our further understanding…

Consider the human engaged in creating prosperity for themselves and their family. Let us say that this group was previously “doing without,” for the most part. They were without the necessities of existence and were suffering Lack. Then it dawned upon the consciousness of our example – a woman – that she was sabotaging her financial growth subconsciously by obeying self-limiting scripts created in her youth. She was told as a child that she was incapable of creating anything of value, for she was a “”natural born loser.” She was told by her parents that she “destroyed everything she touched.”

Now these words acted as a dramatic script for our example throughout her life. Her parents knew what they were talking about, she assumed, and so she created a life of failure to corroborate her parent’s assessment of her. The script became subconscious over time, until now, as an adult, she wonders if she may be cursed. She wonders why her projects seem doomed to fail.

Then the example becomes aware of the momentary thoughts, images, and emotions within her consciousness. She identifies a common thread: “you are a born loser,” and rather than continue to accept that, she challenges it within her own experience. She proclaims to herself that she is a natural healer and has successfully facilitated the return to health with many friends over the years. She is successful in this area of her life. Perhaps she may transpose the positive states of consciousness she is experiencing when she is successful in healing to the task of creating prosperity. She discovers that she does have a circular thought that is common to her states of consciousness while being successful. The thought is a statement:”I can do this if I keep at it.” This thought fills her with motivation and positive emotion.

By noticing in her self-assessments in the moments of her waking reality, when and where she is creating through the internalized statement/belief that she is a born loser, she is able to respond to this negative assertion with her own positive statement: “I can do this if I just keep at it.” Over time, the negative belief is replaced by the positive assertion through the “habit” of ritually replacing the negative thought. Soon the example is experiencing an improved reality in the financial realm.

HABITUAL WAYS OF REACTING

We are now acting out our emotional drama

Obviously, for many of us, our emotional reactions are automatic. We experience something that “upsets” us, offends us in some way, let us say, and we automatically launch into an overt negative reaction. For example, we become “hot under the collar,” and “storm around the house, “re-creating automatically the negative emotional state. Let us call it anger or righteous indignation in this example. Someone or thing has “pushed our buttons,” and we are now acting-out our emotional drama on the stage of our existence.

At these times of passion it is good to remember that our automatic responses are simply habitual ways of acting. Over our life we have learned – from family and friends – “Typical” demonstrations of emotion. We have practiced re-creating these gestures and emotional states whenever we get an opportunity, and now we have become a master. The process has become habitual, automatic.

Fortunately, habits may be changed over time. We have proposed many interventions for you in my new Blogs. Here let us present a simple antidote to the re-creation of righteous indignation in the moment of our personal consciousness manifestation.

TECHNIQUE: A Message From Your Higher Self

This is a very simple technique here and we have covered it before. I believe you will have limitless opportunities to practice it in your waking reality.

Suppose that you ARE experiencing righteous indignation. You are using the research capabilities of the ego/intellect to re-create anger in your present moments. You are automatically finding reasons to be angry, and perhaps at the same time, denying thoughts and images that come to mind that refute your own negative assessment! Denial and intellectualization are occurring simultaneously, as they often do.

With this technique you divert your attention to the incoming message from your Higher Self. It is always the same message… “Love.” All is well in your world.” “Courageously Love others, “that type of thing. Allow the incoming message to “color” your Reality Creation strategy in the moment. Anticipate a positive outcome and then simply repeat as needed.

As you continually interject the new adaptation in your opportunities to re-create righteous indignation, you will find that, over time, you learn how to create Loving Understanding in these moments.

LEARNING OUR LESSONS

Humility is a very important Lesson to learn for all of us…

Suppose you are a fervent practitioner of the Christian faith. This is your perception. You see yourself as a devoted follower, one who practices the spiritual principles expressed by The Christ and others in our Bible. That is how you see yourself.. as an ideal, if you will. You are a “Good Christian, a God-fearing Christian,” let us say.

However, let me interject here with this observation: you are not… none of us are perfect. We all have Lessons to learn. And so our example has a blind spot, let us say, in their character that prevents them from seeing the variances from Christian practices they display in almost every moment of existence. Humility is absent from the consciousness of this human example. They look down on others they assess as not being Christian, or not their type of Christian. They place themselves above others on a regular basis, then, in the search for how they “measure up” to others in the spiritual domain.

Humility is a very important Lesson to learn for all of us. The religious practitioner who avoids the Lesson of humility is doing more harm than good. They are setting themselves up for another incarnational journey with the Lesson of humility paramount on the agenda. This is how it is for Soul experiencing human form upon your world.

SELF-GENERATED NEGATIVITY

Yet many if us do not stop at one disappointing experience…

Disappointment, frustration, rejection… all of these states of consciousness are self-generated, in that you create your Personal Reality to reflect your inner mentality, with all of its emotions, images, circular thoughts, and so on. Again, it is momentary, in that you create moment-to-moment these enduring states.”Why, however,” you might ask yourself, “do I create these negative states?” Again I remind you, your Issues guide you in the creation of the negative realities.

Disappointment, for example, is a very common state of consciousness for many of you, and so it follows that it is a very common negative reality created by many of us. You-the-blog reader may possibly identify with this state of consciousness, for you have been “disappointed” before in your experiences in physical reality. What does this entail? Simply that your expectations were not met to your satisfaction.

I might suggest that the ego/intellect is running things here, as it often does, and may have “set you up” for disappointment. There is an old saying that applies: “the only thing that pain teaches you is to stop creating pain.” Yet many of us do not stop at one disappointing experience. We create lifetimes of disappointment.

It would seem obvious, but an objective observer might comment on this tendency to not learn from your mistakes i.e. your unreasonable expectations. Learn from your mistakes. Learn your Lessons, Dear Blog Reader. If you find that you are becoming frustrated in your attempts at creating what you desire, fine-tune your Reality Creation strategies to more realistically reflect what it is you want.

We are not suggesting you lower your expectations, but merely adjust them to reflect what is possible for you considering your current experienced reality. Work the “edge” of manifestation, here, and redefine your frustration as “Learning”: a Soulful activity.

LESSONS

Our ego/intellect is a function of our belief system

We are on our Earth to learn a variety of Lessons: some pleasant, some certainly not pleasant, as you perceive it. This may reference that it is the human condition that we may very well experience humiliation and ecstatic awakening in successive moments of Reality Creation. The possibilities are limitless within each moment of our existence. Thus may assertion that All of created reality is available to us within each moment of co-creating with All That Is.

Everything that can exist, does, within the Conscious Units. We could say that the Conscious Units has this limitless potential to become anything imagined. Yet we ARE experiencing our Lessons. We ARE witnessing the feedback of our mentality that is our Personal Reality, that is, remember, constructed through “instructions,” we might say, from our ego/intellect. Our ego/intellect is a function of our belief system. This aspect of our consciousness believes that it is getting a “TRUE” picture of reality as it unconsciously creates the Reincarnational Dramas and comedies of our life.

THE BENEVOLENT CONSPIRACY

They are co-creating their reality intentionally, with divine guidance..

As you learn your Lessons, consciously or unconsciously, you are aided and abetted by Soul Family members. Perhaps you already know of my theory of Soul Family: you incarnate together to learn your Lessons together. Consider the previous example. The challenging expert may well be a Soul Family member learning their Lessons with our subject, the male/female student on the spiritual path. Yet, suppose that the expert is NOT on a spiritual path of any sort. They are not aware of any subtext of Reincarnational Drama in their interactions with our student.

However, they are still learning their Lessons in this example. They are learning their Lessons by default. Suppose that this expert is arrogant but is continually experiencing opportunities to learn humility, as in our example. The expert has a choice of demeaning our student and learning their Lesson by default – essentially improving their arrogance and avoiding the Lesson of humility – or perhaps acknowledging the communication stream of the Divine within their consciousness. In this case they are relinquishing control, and allowing the higher centers – the higher powers – their involvement. Humility is achieved, thereby, and the expert is no longer learning by default; they are co-creating their reality intentionally, with divine guidance, you might say.

Similarly, for all concerned in this interaction, for all Soul Family members, there exists varying levels of participation in the Reincarnational Drama. Everyone is learning something here, either consciously or by default. In this way, even the simple representation of consciousness manifestation within this interaction between the expert and the student, is imbued with divine importance. For all involved have the opportunity to “do the right thing,” and co-create their existence from the divine perspective for the highest good of all , you see.

THE NEGATIVE EMOTIONS

Honor these emotional constructs, AND THEN transform them…

Now: We are not here suggesting that the student repress, dismiss, or otherwise invalidate these Negative Emotions. We Are suggesting that the student NOT re-create the negative emotions unnecessarily, until a deep state of negative consciousness is achieved. Anger may become violence if accepted unchecked, unchallenged. Anger if turned inward – into the personal psyche – may fester and cause imbalances of all sorts. Fear may do as much damage, as you may already know.

And so… no, we are not advocating repression of the emotions. Feel the emotions; honor these emotional constructs; AND THEN transform them by assuming the positive perspective – that of the divine creator ALL THAT IS.

LIFE-CHANGING ENCOUNTER

We are finding ourselves challenged, therefore, within our area of expertise…

Let me provide an example. Your Soul Self has set you up to have a life-changing encounter with a teacher of some sort, in your existence. Now this teacher challenges you, let us say, by exhibiting profound and superior information on a particular subject that you know quite well. And suppose that this human also possesses a persuading characteristic that “bothers” you. Perhaps they are charismatic.

Now for my analysis the behavior of this human bothers you because you are perceiving through the perspective of your ego/intellect. You are finding yourself challenged, therefore, within your area of expertise: art, let us say, or perhaps one of the trades. The ego is concerned with appearances, primarily, and so resists any diminishment of its power in these encounters. Indeed, the ego/intellect might often respond by entrenchment, intellectualization, denial, anger, envy, and so on. These emotional states are the common purview of the egoic perspective.

Unfortunately, the life-changing encounter will not be very profound for this subject if they remain entrenched within their limited personal reality manifestation. The continued demonstration by this challenging individual of their superiority, may have the effect of preventing the healing interaction from occurring. Our subject might, indeed, walk away in a huff of self-importance and righteous indignation.

Yet suppose that our subject, a young woman, for example, is on her quest for self-understanding as the result of a recent brush with death, or some other ominous catalyst. She is COMPELLED to look beyond her ego responses to the actions of the human before her, and assess the deeper meanings and opportunities here. Suppose that she has read one of my new Blogs and she is involved in living out her Divine Day experimentation.

She might well be successful in not succumbing to the forces of negativity, if only briefly. This brief respite from negative Reality Creation may be enough for her to gain some stability in the moment of creation, such that, she could switch her perspective from the ego/intellect to that of the Divine – the Soul Self. The ego is diminished in this moment.

The Divine is embodied, invoked, manifested. This new perspective may allow our student example to simply smile and learn from this challenging human. Indeed, she would be learning her Lessons here and contributing to the further evolution of her Soul.

WE ARE CHALLENGED BY THE NEGATIVE

It is as though the subconscious is helping us to face the music…

As a creator of realities we witness our mental and emotional material projected outward into physicality. Because this is, for the most part, a subconscious activity, as we have said, this feedback that is the Personal Reality field may contain some disagreeable elements as in fear and anger-inspiring events – the Reincarnational Dramas.

This material “slips out” from the subconscious through the censor that is the ego/intellect and into the rich medium of Consciousness Units that composes our little piece of the Universe. In these dramas, as we are presented our Lessons, we are, in a sense, “forced” to perceive these Issues. It is as though the subconscious, at least for the moment, is helping us to face the music and learn our Lessons.

We are thus challenged to react to transform. Yet many of us, again, with the aid of denial and intellectualization, sidestep this intervention by finding reasons to account for the dramas. We find reasons for the dramas or we refuse to even consider our contribution. This we call denial. We do have a choice, however, in each instance.

THE OBSERVER PERSPECTIVE

This multitasking may produce profound insights into thoughts and behaviors…

Do you notice the difference here between conscious and unconscious creation? In my new Blogs we discuss a valuable exercise for the student: Embodying the Observer Perspective. One simply creates a personality aspect or aspect of the personal consciousness that observes objectively the events within the life.

This multitasking may produce profound insights into thoughts and behaviors. You are experiencing and remembering in this perspective BOTH the unconscious creation of realities and the conscious creation of realities. The two merge in the beginning of your studies, as you learn how to distinguish the one from the other. Then as you master the technique, you find that you may easily embody the observer perspective for successive moments, minutes, and even hours. You are making the unconscious conscious in this way.

Put another way… the explorer voyages into and through the unknown reality and Courageously and Lovingly acknowledges ALL that is found within this underground of the personal psyche. A broader perspective is obtained in this exploration.

And another… the conscious is taken into the subconscious ritually. Over time the two perspectives meld one to the other. As awakening occurs the Observer Perspective becomes enriched by both conscious and unconscious material. The synthesis of the two perspectives creates the Enlightened or Visionary consciousness.

RESISTING AND LETTING-GO

The ego/intellect is heavily invested in appearances…

How do you distinguish between these two vastly different perspectives, that of the Soul Self on the one hand, and the ego/intellect on the other? The emotional tone generated is quite different; the opposite, in fact, of the other. It is the difference, as we have stated to our Internet audience, between conscious co-creation and unconscious creation. It is the difference, particularly in matters of Lessons, between resisting in the Moment Point, and letting-go in the Moment Point.

It is obvious, is it not, that when you resist, when you attempt to control, when you attempt to intellectualize, rationalize, think-things-through, you are perceiving through a particular lens of Reality Creation? This we call the ego/intellect.

Conversely, when you let go, when you go-with-the-flow of manifestation, when you take your place within nature within the elemental forces, you are creating through the perspective of the timeless Soul Self. The differences are striking; unmistakable really.

For example: If you are angrily reacting to a conversation you are hearing on your radio or television and you are stomping around the room in a huff, what perspective are you embodying? If you are hiding behind the furniture when the bill collector knocks on the door, what perspective are you embodying?

The ego/intellect is heavily invested in appearances. The ego in particular has distinct preferences for how others should perceive it. There is much of perceived value that must be protected. In this process, whole aspects of the personality and Soul are drawn under, disavowed, and denied. These unpleasant facts of the personality assemble in the creation of the disowned self, what we refer to as the Negative Persona, which we shall discuss at the end.

INTELLECTUALIZATION AND DENIAL

I am responsible for both the negative and the positive in my world...

Now, intellectualization and denial are your friends here as you attempt to avoid your Lessons. We are all powerful. We have the capacity to experience our world as the Logos, the Creator, All That Is. We could have anything we want, potentially, anything we would wish to create.

However, you are a human experiencing a lifetime of Lessons on our world. You have forgotten – the necessary amnesia – your great powers, and now you see difficulties, Lack, all sorts of negative realities before you. So intellectualization helps you to find reasons for the negative realities you are creating. Denial helps you place the blame elsewhere for your negative states and your negative realities.

But look… an inkling of the truth beginning to pierce the veil of illusion that is our perceived reality. You are beginning to see the connections between your negative thoughts and the negative outcomes. Slowly you are formulating within your consciousness a new paradigm of understanding. Perhaps it goes something like this: I am responsible for both the negative and the positive in my world. All the reasons, in truth, point to my culpability in all instances of my existence,

WHAT DO YOU SEE IN FRONT OF YOU?

Challenge your own beliefs about your world…

What do You See In Front Of You? You see All That Is in front of you. Everything in created reality is in front of you for you to see. But we have lenses of perception that prevent us from seeing All that is. You must filter All That Is through these lenses – beliefs – so that you are not awestruck, dumbfounded, fascinated to the extreme, every time you look in front of you.

However, if you believe our assertion that great numbers of us are awakening at this time, you may also see what is required for you and your perception of our world. In a sense, you could say that you are being challenged to “look beyond” your limited beliefs of what is out there in front of you. You are being asked to, courageously now, challenge your own beliefs about our world.

So when I suggest that DORIAN, for example, as she observes her bird friends bathing, drinking water, and eating the seeds, is also experimenting with a perception of the larger view – The Macrocosm – I am simply noting what many of us are now experiencing.

Specifically now… as DORIAN observes the birds, she may also fairly easily observe her Personal Reality Field through a “higher” perspective. This perspective is that of the Soul Self, the Energy Personality, the god within. Both perspectives – the mundane and the exalted – coexist without interference one from the other. In fact, each perspective envorses, and in a sense, “comments” upon the other, in a quest for further understanding, a clearer perspective, Enlightenment. Multitasking we call it. You are quite comfortably maintaining your Personal Reality Field through your ego/intellect perspective, while also achieving stability observing and creating through the Soul Self.

SPONTANEITY AND THE MOMENT POINT

There is spontaneity and there is spontaneity…

When you are in your Issues and succumbing to the forces of negativity, you are not consciously co-creating your world: you are being driven by the negative emotions to continue to create negative emotions and the negative realities that ensue when you focus on the negative. It is primarily a subconscious process, as we have said.

In my system, as in some others you might name, the process of change is quite simple; fear is transformed into Courage in the moment, anger into Loving Understanding. This is how we create positive realities.

Now there is spontaneously, “on impulse” as we say, re-create anger in your current moments? Over-and-over you create anger – second-to-second, minute-to-minute, and hour-to-hour – until you have created “spontaneously” a negative state of consciousness for yourself. From my perspective, this is not spontaneity nor is it acting on impulses. This is simply the habitual creation of negative states. It is irresponsible and it is largely counterproductive for the individual.

True spontaneity is not the robotic re-creation of the current emotional state. It is not reaction without direction. In the true spontaneous moment there is a brief pause of reflection that occurs. One responds to the positive, to the positive manifestation, rather than the negative. One responds to the divine emotions, you might say, rather than the baser emotions. The choice is made in this pause of reflection to do the right thing. And you do.

“ACCEPTED” OR “REJECTED” REALITY FIELDS

This is how you define all stimuli that comes to you through your physical senses…

As you read these Blog words what is taking place within your consciousness? There is only the momentary acceptance or denial of what you are perceiving/creating. second-to-second you create a cohesive reality that reflects your beliefs. But suppose that you read a sentence that is difficult for you to entertain as fact? In the moment there may be a split second of hesitation as you decide whether to incorporate this statement into your Personal Reality Field. If you accept it, the statement will be submitted as proof that All of the statements in this Blog have validity. Otherwise, You would know of the invalid nature of the statement.

You are the authority here, yet you are always attempting to prove to some “higher authority” within your consciousness that you are correct in your assumptions about the trivia within your self-created existence. If the material meets your standards of truth, it is accepted and incorporated into your reality Creation agendas. If it doesn’t meet your criteria for validity according to your beliefs, it is rejected.

Additionally, all corresponding and supporting data connected to the rejected field of information is also rejected. The belief system is kept intact through this process. The ego/intellect is supported and affirmed in its thoughts and behaviors in this way. Accepted or rejected: this is how we define all stimuli that come to us through our physical senses.

View Post

THE EGO AND DREAM RECALL

The ego skims the topmost surface of reality and awareness. This is not the result of any inherent egotistical quality. It is true that the ego’s responsibility is with the relationship between the self and the physical environment. It must necessarily focus within the confines of physical reality. Nevertheless, it is fully capable of perceiving far more than Western man/woman allows it to perceive. Fear, ignorance, and superstition limit its potentials and. therefore, limit even its effectiveness within the physical universe.

The ego itself cannot directly experience certain intuitions and psychological experiences, but it can experience them insofar as it can become aware of them on an intellectual basis. When training forces the ego to become too rigid and to limit its perceptions of other realities, then the intuitions will not be accepted by the ego because intuitional experience will not fit into the framework of reality that it accepts as valid.

The ego in that case will therefore fight against what it then considers an unknown threat to survival. Struggles are initiated then that are entirely unnecessary. We want to bring intuitional comprehension to a point where the ego will accept it. In our dream experiments, this is one of the purposes we hope to achieve. The ego is not equipped to delve directly into non physical realities, but if it is trained to be flexible, it will accept such knowledge from other wider horizons of the self.

And the ego must have its feet upon solid earth. It is marked and out of its element outside of the normal environment of physical existence. To some extent, its distrust of the dream experience is necessary for the overall balance of the personality. Physical reality is, after all, a rock to which the ego must cling: from it, the ego achieves its prestige and reason for existence. This provides necessary balance and control, and results in the sturdy anchorage of the personality in the environment in which is must presently survive. You have here one of the main reasons why you must request the subconscious to enable you to recall dreams. The ego would see no reason for such a memory and on general principles attempt to repress them.

Again, however, this excellent balance and these fine controls exist. The ego will accept knowledge derived from the dream state as a man/woman might accept a message from a distant land in which he/she does not care to dwell and whose environment would both mystify and astonish him/her.

In our dream experiments, then, we will allow you to bring such messages to the ego. We will attempt to map this exotic country in such a way that the ego can understand what is there in terms of resources that can be used for its own benefit.

DREAM RECALL

Suggestions will allow you to awaken yourself as soon as a dream is completed. The dream will then be fresh. If your recorder is suitably situated with the microphone easily at hand, then you can speak your dream with less effort than is required to write it down. Of course records must be kept. The simplest part of this experiment will involve the use of suggestion to awaken yourself at the completion of each dream.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is Dream-karma-1-1.jpeg

The number of remembered dreams should be much higher than your present system allows. I also suggest that the first recalled dream for any given evening be compared with the first recalled dream from other evenings, and that the second recalled dream from any one evening be compared with the second dream from other evenings, and so forth.

This should prove highly interesting, and if such experiments are carried on consciously over a period of years, then the results could lead to excellent evidence for the various layers of the subconscious and inner self, of which I have spoken for so long.

Particular notice should also be taken of characters and settings and the approximate period of history in which the dream action occurs. If the dream seems to happen in no specific location and in no particular time, then these facts should also be noted.

Unknown characters within the dream action, persons unknown to you in daily life, should be given careful attention also, and the roles which they play within the dream drama. The primary colors should be checked against physical reality so that any clairvoyant elements are clearly checked and recorded.

There are many ways in which you can approach these newer dream experiments. You may, if you prefer, begin by suggesting that you will awaken after each of the first five dreams. If possible, we want to get the dreams in order here.

Now, there is something else to be considered. The very self-suggestions that will enable you to recall dreams will also change their nature to some extent. This is all right, and the effect will be minimized when the newness has worn off. Again, we want the dreams in the sequence in which they occur. If you do not want to wake up after each dream on the evening, then the suggestion should always include ‘I will recall the first three dreams, of the first five dreams, or whatever.’

You may try two different wordings for a start, and now I am speaking of precise wording. The first: ‘I will wake up after each of my first five dreams and record each one immediately.” The second alternative wording would be the same as the one I have just given, but the ‘Wake up’ would be omitted. That is, it is possible for you to record the dreams, speaking into the microphone without awakening.

This is not only possible but by far the most convenient. You should try both methods and discover which one works the best for you. If at all possible, the recorder should be in the bedroom ( not in another part of the house.) It is the immediate dream recall we are after. We want you to record the dream at the instant of awakening or at the instant that the dream is about to dissolve.

The time involved in going from one room to another could result in the loss of dream content and vividness. The very motor responses demanded on the part of the body and the extra arousal tendency would force you to lose a good deal of valid material. I would prefer that you work less, if necessary, using the recorder in the bedroom, than work more intensely leaving the recorder in another room.

It is the dream we are after, the dream experience in all the vividness that we can capture, and if you are going to get a watered-down version in any case, then you may as well continue with your present method (of writing them down in the morning) and save your sleep.

With the method I have just given you, you will be able to capture as much of the whole dream experience as any investigators manage to do (in dream-labs) when the awakening is done by a mechanical device or by another person. You will also be gaining excellent discipline and training over your own states of consciousness and this, in itself, will be an important yardstick of progress for you.

Now, mankind/womankind uses but a portion of its capabilities. When you are well along in these experiments, you will find that you handle them very well, with no training of energies. Your sleeping hours are already productive. We shall also use them to give you training in the utilization of various stages of consciousness. Added to this, the training will give you valuable insight into the nature of dreams in general, the stages of the subconscious and the inner life of the personality when it is dissociated from its physical environment to some considerable extent.

Much later, there will be other suggestions for you in which you will direct your sleeping self to perform certain activities, visit certain locations and bring back information. This is obviously still very much in the future, but it is well within the abilities of the inner self.

There are serveral kinds of time that will appear within your dream, and you must sort these out carefully. While sleeping in your present time, you may have a dream that concerns your past, with events that you know to have occurred years ago. Nevertheless, you may experience these events (within the dream) as happening within the present.

The present within which you seem to experience the dream is not, however, the present in physical time – the present in which your body lies upon the bed. There is a fine distinction here and one that you will learn through experience as you go on, so I will not discuss it now.

It should be obvious also that within your dreams a special location that belongs to the present physical time can be experienced in the past or in the future within the dream framework, and again, there is much more here also than meets the eye; so watch out so that you can catch these developments.

I am particularly interested in these experiments, and as a preliminary for them, we will have you work with suggestion alone before you attempt to begin with your recordings. We shall have you working well in your sleep, for the dream will not be captured in a laboratory – by scientists who will not look into their own dreams.

The nature of reality can be approached only by an investigation of it as it is directly experienced in all levels of awareness: reality as it appears under dream conditions, under other conditions of dissociation and as it appears in the waking state. Even studies dealing with the conscious state are usually superficial, dealing only with ‘upper’ levels of egotistical awareness.

All layers of the personality are ‘conscious.’ They simply operate like compartments, so that often one portion of the self is not aware of other portions. As a rule, when you are awake you do not know your sleeping self; you know your neighbor far better, so your sleeping self seems mysterious indeed. When you are awake, you cannot find the dream locations that have been so familiar to you only the night before.

In your sleep, you may have greeted friends who are strangers to your waking self. But consider the other side of the coin. For when you are asleep, you usually cannot find the street upon which you live your waking hours, and when you are asleep, you do not know your waking self. The sleeping self is your identity.

There are connections between these two conditions, and there are definite realities that exist in both states, and these are what you are looking for. Only by finding these can you discover the nature of human personality and the nature of reality within which it operates.

We have also spoken of the dream as a drama, and you must discover the various levels within which these dramas take place. You will also find that the various levels of the ‘subconscious’ will yield their own characteristics, and as your records grow, this will become apparent. It is necessary, then, that dreams are recorded in consecutive order whenever possible.

WE CREATE OUR OWN REALITY

You will also sense a growing humility…

The thoughts we think, the images we imagine, seek out fulfillment through manifestation in our system and other dimensions. As the mask of our camouflage reality is lifted, we will see this truth of our physical existence. We will notice with increasing frequency how our perceptions seem to support the notion that we create our own reality. It will become commonplace for us to marvel, perhaps, at the immediate manifestation of something we had hoped for, prayed for, or visualized. We will be receiving the proofs we require to change or expand our beliefs.

So now you know. You are the creator of your world, quite literally. Perhaps in these moments of awakening to your true nature, you will also sense a growing humility that parallels the growth of your new powers of perception. With the witnessing of your reality creation powers you may also realize your responsibilities – your responsibilities to yourself, your family, and to humanity. Acknowledging your responsibilities to create your world for the highest good, for the good of all, is often accompanied by a growing sense of awe, gratitude, and humility within the personal consciousness.

TALKING TO STORMS

Hypothesis: You can reclaim and process your cast-off emotional contribution to the storm.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Consider these talking points for talking to storms.

  • You are connected to Mother Nature and the elements directly
  • You have a hand in the literal creation of storm activities.
  • This contribution is largely anonymous, as well as unconscious.
  • You may “remember” your subconscious contribution by considering what “comes up” for you during this storm.
  • Are your Issues triggered by the storm?
  • Are you attempting to keep something down, something buried beneath the facade of your public persona?
  • Would it be appropriate to write down what you are feeling now in this moment?
  • If so, write down what you are experiencing that you feel may be related to the storm

I do realize that it would most likely be inappropriate for you to engage in a cathartic moment of grief-full sobbing. Yet you may certainly make an appointment with yourself to do just that at another time, possibly when you are alone or with a trusted friend.

Do not be surprised when your cathartic acceptance of the repressed negative material gives way to celebratory emotions of joy, forgiveness, compassion, ecstasy. As the negative aspects of repressed emotion are realized, there is often great flood of emotion that is released. This creative energy may be used to advantage, particularly in your attempts to experience the communication stream of All That Is or in any other creative pursuits.

FINDINGS: Please document your Findings

EMBODY THE FORCES OF NATURE

Participating in the storm by lending your subconscious emotional energies…

In the following experiment let us assume the opposite perspective. We are are not frightened, we are courageously engaging the storm. Now, just as you, Dear Blog reader, as an emoting human being, on occasion are subject to tears of distress and joy, so too is the emoting being your Mother Earth subject to the powerful displays of emotional energy called rainstorms. The correlations are available “to the nth degree,” as we say.

Consider the convulsive grieving and sobbing of the human after the loss of a loved one. Compare this momentous emotion-charge activity with a rainstorm. It is the same process in principle. The rainstorm is the collective manifestation of the thought and emotion-charged energies of thousands and hundreds of thousands of humans.

Now, you know that you create the weather with your thoughts and emotions. It may be an acceptable belief to you at this point. Can you then enlarge and deepen this belief You-the-Blog-ReaderThe Scientist of Consciousness – and the storm? Yes, you are already participating in the storm by lending your subconscious emotional energies to the manifestation. Your repressed memories of grief, losses of various types, and frustration, enter into the creation of the storm.

There are several ways to make this participation conscious if you wish to gain the full healing potential of the dramatic storm event. If it is appropriate for you at this time, as you sit at your desk at work or otherwise out in the public arena, consider YOUR PART in the dramatic presentation of Mother Nature that we call “rainstorm.”

Using your Intent, you will gently probe the psychic climate initiated by the storm, and see your contribution. You will observe this in your personalized fashion, as you do in all of our experimentation that we do together. But let me suggest that you proceed in this way.

EXPERIMENTING WITH THE DIVINE

Make the preparations for physical and emotional Sanctuary

We may co-create the visionary experience anywhere we happen to be at the moment. It does not necessarily require us to be in nature, but it does seem to be one of the only times that the modern human may take some time out to relax and go within.

Let us say, for the sake of experimenting, that you are in your workplace relaxing by yourself, or you are in a public place being observed by others around you, yet you are eager to make contact with the Divine and achieve some sort of visionary perception. You may do so with these cautions in mind: You will be vulnerable in the visionary state. Make the preparations for physical and emotional Sanctuary, therefore, before you begin.

You may also create the suggestion within your consciousness that you will be available for spontaneous disengagement from the visionary state if you NEED to be, as in an emergency situation that may arise. Also, if you find that your protected state is lessening due to circumstance mental or physical, and you are allowing yourself to become anxious, fearful etc., take your cue from the suggestion that you will be able to easily exit the Visionary State of Consciousness and attain fully alert and conscious use of your faculties.

Now suppose it is raining and storming outside, and you may see the effects through the window. You may hear the thunder and see the rain and the lightning. You may see the effects of the wind as it blows the leaves down the street. What are you observing, in fact? It is our understanding that you are witnessing the cathartic effects of the collective emotional energies of the consensus reality in which you live.

This is a very powerful and necessary demonstration of consciousness creation of the Collective, here. Yet many are frightened by the display of nature, some to the degree that they will stay indoors with the shades closed, trembling in fear of the potentially destructive power wielded by Mother Nature. But let us take advantage of these energies with a simple experiment.

THE VISIONARY STATE

We are speaking of the magic ancestors here…

In the new Blogs I often bow to the superior wisdom of our human ancestors, the native peoples of our continents, the aboriginals who came before, the First People. Much was lost when the developing human moved beyond the simplicity of existence that denoted tribal living.

Yet make no mistake here, I am not advocating a “noble savage” perspective. I am merely noting that our individual, pioneer mentality we won at great cost, as in the effects of splintering the collective gestalt that was the nurturing mental environment of our ancestors.

We are speaking of the magic ancestors here, and we are speaking of the time when ALL of us appreciated the magical approach. We were all visionaries then, and you each and every one were capable of wonder-workings of various types. Yet even now as we observe ourselves in the modern era, perhaps detached from a collective of any meaning, we are still quite capable of attaining the visionary state of our ancestors through some thoughtful, focused experimentation.

Now the power of nature is the power of our system of reality. Our Earth and Sky were formed by the powers of nature, and in the words of our visionaries, the “miracle of creation” was a participatory event. Much in the way that the modern sports enthusiast participants in sporting events by watching and becoming emotionally involved, the magic ancestors participated in the give-and-take of the natural energies as they observed Mother Nature creating the Earth and Sky. We have called this involvement in various gestalts of consciousness “embodiment.” This is our modern term for participatory engagement with the Divine, or co-creation as some of us call it.

CREATING LACK

You limit yourself if you believe you have limitations...

We limit ourselves if we believe we have limitations. In truth, there are no limits to what we may create. You may see this for yourself by observing what surrounds you in your personal reality. A true appreciation of your surroundings would convince you, that, as the creator of your world, you have great talents and energies at your disposal.

Of course it is also true that there may be for you the absence of what you truly desire within your self-created world. We call this Lack in the Blogs. If you are seeing the founding beliefs of that Lack?

Your beliefs create your reality. If you are seeing the absence of what you desire in front of you, you may trace that back to your own creative consciousness. It is there that you may receive an intuition of what is holding you back from creating abundance. The beliefs that you are using as a blueprint for the creation of your reality may be self-limiting. Look for where you limit yourself. Move beyond those self-imposed limitations and see the infinite creativity that is your birthright.

DENIAL

Perhaps you are somewhat cynical of these ideas, yet you are looking for “something to believe in…”

How does this intellectualization and denial fit in with our discussion of All That Is? In all of our existence, Dear Blog Reader, in each of our experienced moments in physical reality, there is the potential for awakening to the spiritual realm, the Divine, All That Is. We state this as fact even though we know that we may not consider oneself on a spiritual path. Perhaps you are reading this blog out of curiosity only. Perhaps you are somewhat cynical of these ideas, yet you are looking for “something to believe in.” Here is where our concept of denial enters the picture.

Let us assume that you are somewhat “cynical scientist.” You are perhaps of an atheistic bent or agnostic, and you are looking for “something,” something in the spiritual realm. You have led a life of spirituality, either by choice or chance, and you have reached a stage in your life, perhaps after a brush with death yourself, or after the death of a loved-one, when you are contemplating the validity of the spiritual life.

In the nomenclature of our system, we would say that “the denial is lifting for you.” You are no longer denying the spiritual within your existence. As you release your perceptions from the task of denying the obvious spiritual basis of reality, you immediately begin to find evidence for Spirit. Indeed, you may begin to see the spiritual in each moment of your life.

If this is the case, you may identify yourself as one of the Awakening ones of our timeframe. Millions of us are seeking out the spiritual within our lives. We are coming out of our denial and finding All That Is within our personal realities.

INTELLECTUALIZATION

If I may, I would enjoy, providing for you an example of intellectualization as it pertains to a group we refer to as the naysayers. Members of this group of humans may be found within any collective, large or small. Within what we are calling community broadly speaking, these humans often are the most coal in their refusals to accept my new messages.

Now we have a sense of humor about these naysayers, for we know the truth here. And there is irony, in that, those who consider themselves “experts” on my Blog writings. Those who have not heard of my words, on the other hand, are much more likely to embrace my new messages with an open mind and heart. Perhaps they are not looking to authorities to tell them what to believe.

And thus it appears that it is calcified knowledge of the authority that prevents the clear perception of what is in front of them. However, we could also be speaking about any other authority that refutes what you might call “anecdotal” information from the common citizen.

What is at fault here is a form of circular logic, and the naysayers often speaks from within this twisted knot of intellectualization and denial to make their case and to present “the historical facts.” In essence they are saying, “My personal perceptions are the only reality here. What I believe and what the other authorities believe is what everyone must believe.”

The intellect proves the beliefs of the authority. Stability in the Reality Creation agenda of the individual is achieved in this way. If they feel as though they have proved their case adequately, there is then no need to expand the belief system to include the new data. The calcification of knowledge continues. The avoidance of Lessons is perfected.

AWAKENING

The negative emotions are the creators of states of consciousness and thus personal realities…

To simply for you this awakening experience, we have described it as a matter of transforming the Negative Emotions into their opposites. We will now add to this with an example. Now the negative emotions are the creators of states of consciousness and thus personal realities. These emotions run the course from fairly harmless, such as mild irritation, shall we say, to murderous anger at the other pole of this comparison.

We are speaking of Anger here. However, with the emotion of Fear, we could also place it is scale, perhaps beginning with a subtle anxiety in the financial realms, as the negative media continually remind us of the treacherous state of the world through our television or radio. So we are a wee bit anxious on this side of our theoretical pole, but if we were to exist on the opposite end here, we would be experiencing aghast dread and fear for our existence, possibly. We may fill in the “reasons” for this ruinous state of affairs.

Let us then examine where your Intention of Will resides within this matrix of emotional experiencing. We have said before that if we are experiencing extreme anger or fear in any particular moment, we are no longer “in control” of your consciousness. We have relinquished control of our Reality Creation powers to the Negative Emotions. We are assisting in the re-creation, moment-to-moment, of these emotions through this shirking of responsibility.

As you, Dear Blog Reader, lay the blame for your negative states of consciousness on the doorstep of your neighbor, friends, family, or colleagues, not only do you dis-empower yourself, but you help to empower the negative spheres of influence, what we have called the Negative entities in these pages.

TUNING YOUR CONSCIOUSNESS

An awakening of your personal consciousness to All That Is is possible for you in any chosen moment in your waking reality. It becomes a matter of intentionally perceiving your world through the auspices, you might say, of the Divine. If you have mediated, if you have prayed, if you have experimented with your conscious Intent, you have already used your perceptions in this divine way I am describing.

Have you noticed while engaged in these common practices, that the moment of perception gains a fullness, an energized complexity? If you have noticed this pleasant “pressing in” of the energies upon your consciousness, you may also be adept at “tuning” this state to meet your requirements. The depth of your mediation may be increased or decreased, in other words. The profoundness of your trance may be increased or decreased, simply by using your Intent.

We refer to these empowered moments of Intent as Moment Points. They are essentially gateways to a broader perception of your world and your place in it. You are a researcher of your experience in your waking reality. Each moment holds the potential for revealing to you the answers to any questions you might have. It is up to you to focus on the business at hand – your awakening – and delve deeply within the moment. Briefly: it is your Moment Point if you say it is. Own your current moment therefore, and awaken to your greater reality.

EXPRESSION OF ALL FORMS

YOU ARE ONE WITH NATURE….

This is our concept for discussion at this time. Now there exists a barrier to understanding for some of you that prevents your intellect from accepting the fantastic premise that you cooperate with All That Is in the literal creation of our physical world. This barrier is one of the last to fall as you approach your wakening. Let me set the stage, If I may…

You are in nature, in a forest, writing in your journal, and you are approached by a deer. You are motionless and quiet as the deer comes closer and closer to you, so close in fact that you could reach out and touch it. As you quietly contemplate this miracle of nature, a pair of quail walk onto the scene. They too are oblivious of you as they stroll past, again, within arm’s reach.

Then, as if to further impress you, Dear Blog Reader, the birds in the trees fly quickly past you to perch on nearby branches and to feed directly next to you. You are still here. You are quiet. You are ONE with nature. This is the perfect state for experiencing the Divine. The ego/intellect is off to the side, out of the way of your perception, as the Soul Self observers/creates your Personal Reality.

Ah, but then you make an abrupt motion with your hand to write down what you are experiencing. The ego/intellect has taken charge. The animals disperse in alarm. The fragile moment of appreciation has passed.

Now moments later the animals have again taken their places within nature, in that timeless moment beyond ego, beyond the intellect, beyond the rational mind. However, as you take your notes in your journal you are merely a reporter commenting on the preceding events. Your ego/intellect has taken you out of the moment. Whereas the “dumb” animals as you call them, for they lack your rationality, continue their precisely focused existences in the moment – the divine moment of creation.

EVERYTHING MEANS SOMETHING

WE ARE BUILDING THIS CURRENT PLEASANT MOMENT…

Everything means something. Each perception may be followed back to its source within our creative consciousness. When we are experiencing a pleasant moment in our personal reality, for example, if we were to follow back this episode to its source, we might observe how every atom that composes our perceptual field – including the reality constructs we call trees, animals, humans, newspapers – is fabricated from pleasant feelings, positive emotions, and images from our past, current, and dare I say, “future” consciousness.

We are building this current pleasant moment upon a foundation of “remembered” positive-experiencing, to the degree that our personal consciousness – including our belief system, our memories, our cosmology – imbues all that we perceive with pleasantness.

Now we could just as easily in the next moment of creation turn the tables here, and imbue our Personal Reality Field with negative emotion and negative imagery using denial and intellectualization. It is up to you. We decide – for the most part unconsciously – which way to go with the creation of our world.

Given this truth, do you now understand how peace, abundance-for-all, and any other wholesome concept exists as a potential CHOICE for the individuals and groups? Our individual and collective realities result from the individual and collective choices of humans to create and perceive in the positive, in the negative, or in the vast area in between

THE “WAKE” OF SPIRIT

This wind that we observe by its activity, its effects – as in moving the leaves and limbs of a great tree, for example – is an emotional response. Let me explain: You already know that everything in your world is conscious, as All That IS – of which you and your Personal Reality Field are composed – presents itself. All That Is – evolutionary consciousness – may be considered, then, in its totality as a sensing, emoting being. Each Consciousness Unit is also an emotional, sensing being unto itself.

We could compare the emotional life of, let us say, a bird, to that of a rock, or any other Reality Construct within your system, including the emoting human. If we were to do so we would find that EVERYTHING experiences emotion, the same basic emotion, in quite similar ways. This foundational emotion expressed by all within our world, we could call the Loving creative thrust of All That Is.

Again, we are presenting this material in fairly mechanical terms. I repeat: You are not a machine! Yet this metaphor of the student “pushing” the Reality Construct from the potential into the actual with their Intent, may once again assist us in our explanations.

Everything is composed of consciousness and everything is a reality creator. Each reality Construct expresses itself in the medium of divine energy some of us call God – The Spirit. The thrust is Love with a capital L. The energy for creation is Love.

The wind has been called “the breath of God.” You could also call it the “wake” of Spirit, as in the turbulence created by a vessel or airplane. The wind is the reciprocal emotional expression of the natural world. It is a response to the Loving creation of realities out of Consciousness Units.

Now this Love with a capital L is not evident until the moment of creation. When that moment occurs and All that Is expresses itself as whatever varied construct, Love becomes evident. You can see it.

IN COOPERATION WITH BIRDS

THIS SYNCHRONICITY OF CREATION…

Now, my wife Dorian here is just this moment observing the behavior of birds feeding from her sunflower seeds that she replenishes each morning. In a quite delightful fashion, the creatures swoop in to take what they need and fly out to eat their meal. There is great cooperation here, even when the larger doves squawk in defense of “their” food source. Even the dove, then, allows the smaller birds to take food.

As Dorian observed this activity, it occurred to her that there was a direct correlation, somehow, between the precise activities of the birds and her own mental activity. She sensed that the cooperative effort included her personal thought and images.

Let me elaborate… your Personal Reality Field is a cooperative effort or presentation involving the manifestation energies and agendas of each and every Consciousness Unit composing each and every bird, rock, tree, or human existing within this field of awareness. This synchronicity of creation, you see, is evident down to the detail.

EVERYTHING IS A PART OF US

THE WHOLE IS FOUND WITHIN THE PART…

Our universe is experienced by us, through us; through the physical body, the physical senses; and so we feel as though we are “taking in” our experience through our perceptions, from the outside in. Yet we know by now that it is just the opposite, in truth.

The Universe, All That Is, the entire creation of physical reality exists within us in the collaborative moment. In each moment we project our personalized “take” on the state of the Universe outward into the Third Dimension. So we could truly say that everything that exists on the Earth at any one time, first exists within our consciousness “before” it is projected out onto our world.

We have limited perception in the Third Dimension, however, and we do not see everything within our cozy little Personal Reality. Depending on our Issues or Lessons, we may see very little at all in this personalized world view. Yet the potential is there to use our Inner Senses to discover within our world, the answers to any questions we may have on any subject whatsoever.

The whole is found within the part. The world is found within the individual. We are a part of everything and everything is a part of us.

YOU ARE A PART OF EVERYTHING

She is composed of Consciousness Units of the same generic type…

You are a part of everything. We continue to affirm this fact for you-the-Blog-reader, not to give you an elevated sense of your own worth, but to simply state for you the facts of existence.

What is reality? What is the truth of the matter? These are philosophical questions that drive the enquiring mind. Here we are making our case that you are both the creator and the experience of your reality.

An illustration is in order… My colleague Dorian has taken to riding the bus rather than driving her own car. She has found that it frees her up to do writing and to commune with other humans; something she both desires and needs, as in the basic human needs. As she was, moments ago as we write this, observing two large pine trees that stand at the entrance to the casino at which she was waiting for the bus, a huge beautiful hawk burst out of one tree, and effortlessly, silently, flew of to the surrounding countryside.

She did indeed marvel at this exhibition of beautiful Mother Nature, and she asked herself, as she often does now, “What does that mean?” It occurred to her that there was meaning in this event on many levels. However, there were two primary meanings or Lessons in this evocative scene:

First: She was reminded that she is a part of everything and everything is a part of her, for she briefly projected her consciousness into that of the hawk’s, and accompanied the animal for a short distance. She was able to do this for she is composed of Consciousness Units of the same generic type that the hawk is composed. So this was an endorsement from Spirit All That Is – to her, of her current trajectory of Soul Evolution.

Second: She had a deja vu experience. She seemed to remember a conversation with a local Native American, in which the subject of the sacred hawk that lives in the Sheep Mountain area arose. It seemed to Dorian at the time that the fellow was quite urgent in his telling this tale of the hawk. Perhaps, thought Dorian, the fellow was setting the stage for her “future” experiencing of this hawk, the guardian of the Sheep Mountain. It did seem to Dorian that the experience was perceived “out-of-time,” in s dream-like encounter with the natural world.

HERE IN THIS MOMENT

The thought-created masterpiece

Here in this moment rests our world, the Universe, the entirety of being. Thoughts both pleasant and mild, as well as unpleasant and insistent, paint the landscape with their content. Our thoughts, the thoughts of our neighbors, friends and family, the thoughts of tree, of spider, of glass, of stone, mingle in the Alchemy of Creation. The living landscape that is the thought-created masterpiece of the human intelligence, stands within and is influenced by the greater elemental works created and sustained by the tree, the glass, the stone, the spider. All is related in the cooperative venture of world realized.

The stone dislodged, the glass cracked, the spider forced to spin a different web through the interference of wind or human, comprehensively alters the momentary creation of world. The novel thought considered by the solitary human, alters to the atomic level, the entire creation of world. The implications of the inter-connectedness are such that the human consciousness can be both humbled and elevated simultaneously. Ecstasy.

WHEN YOU WALK ACROSS THE ROOM

SO IT IS NOT A MATTER OF “BRINGING” YOUR BODY ACROSS THE ROOM…

Dear Blog Reader, when you walk across the room, you are with each movement forward, re-creating your physical body according to your essential identity out of the Consciousness Units that exist as air in front of you; space, you see. It is not a matter of “bringing” your body across the room; it’s more a case of re-creating your body in its totality within this field – within this medium, if you prefer – of holographic units of awarded energy: The Consciousness Units.

Step-by-step, then, your sacred identity – this Soul Self – assembles the physical body of You-The-Blog-reader from the Consciousness Units “in front of it.” The Consciousness Units – identified as atoms, or molecules, or Consciousness Units of blood, flesh, and bone.

Now… in the same precise fashion, the birds as they swoop down to feed, are creating from the Consciousness Units of air before them, their bird bodies.

But what of the tree, the mountain, you might ask? As the tree sways in the wind, it recreate itself out of Consciousness Units of earth and air surrounding it. As the mountain endures the weathering forces of rain and wind, it retains its mountain identity and re-creates itself with minute or catastrophic alterations, according to the weathering over time.

THE FIFTH DIMENSION

As far as fifth dimension is concerned, It is space. I will have to try to build up the image of a structure to help you understand, but then I must rip down the structure because there is none there.

Consider, then, a network of wires somewhat like, though different from ” Idea Construction” – a maze of interlocking wires endlessly constructed, so that looking through them there would seem to be no beginning or end. Your plane could likened to small position between four very spindly and thin wires, and my plane could be likened to the small position in the neighboring wires on the other side.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is 73CCA174-2772-4171-988F-0BE5A63A6293.webp

Not only are we on different sides of the same wires, but we are at the same time either above or below, according to your viewpoint. And if you consider the wires as forming cubes… then the cubes could also fit one within the other, without disturbing the inhabitants of either cube one iota – and these cubes are also within cubes, which are themselves within cubes, and I am speaking now only of small particle of space taken up by your plane and mine.

Again, now think in terms of your plane, bounded by its small spindly set of wires, and my plane on the other side. These, as I have said, have also boundless solidarity and depth, yet in usual terms, to one side the other is transparent. You cannot see through, but the two planes move through each other constantly.

I hope you see what I have done here. I have initiated the idea of motion, for true transparency is not the ability to see through but to move through. This is what I mean by fifth dimension. Now remove the structure of the wires and cubes. Things behave as if the wires and cubes were there, but these are only constructions necessary, even to those on my plane, in order to make this comprehensible to our faculties, the faculties of any entity.

We merely construct imaginary lines to walk upon. So real are the wall constructions of your room that you would freeze in the winter time without them, yet there is no room and no walls. So, in a like manner, the wires that we constructed are real to us in the universe, although… to me, the walls are transparent. So, are the wires that we constructed to make our point about the fifth dimension, but for all practical purposes, we must behave as if the wires were there…

Again, if you will consider our maze of wires, I will ask you to imagine them filling up everything that is, with your plane and my plane like two small birds nests in the netlike fabric of some gigantic tree…. Consider, for example, that these wires are also mobile, constantly trembling and also alive, in that they not only carry the stuff of the universe but are themselves projections of this stuff, and you will see how difficult it is to explain. Now can I blame you for growing tired when after asking you to imagine this strange structure. I then insist that you tear it apart, for it is no more actually seen or touched than is the buzzing of a million invisible bees.

AWAKENING

WHO IS IN CHARGE?

Beauty creates itself within the mind of the beholder first. All of the streams of information that we would care to notice, including the rich source that flows into our personal field of reality, first bubble up to the surface of our consciousness. Then they are displayed by us, for us to observe.

To marvel at the beauty, then, of a tree, or a beautiful animal such as a horse, is self-complementary. If you are having sunny weather and that is your favorite style of weather, then congratulate yourself; you have made the weather to suit your own needs and likes.

You create the weather as surely as you create everything within your personal world. Particularly within your immediate vicinity, your reality does spring into being in unison with the creative content of your mind.

Now with this description, questions of control may come to mind. Who is in charge? Who is the ultimate creator, the God of your world? These are questions best answered by the Blog Reader.

THE SHIFT INTENSIFIES

As The Shift unfolds in the coming years, our system will witness many more “opportunities” for negative manifestation. Thus, we may well see an acceleration in the manifestation of Earth Changes, such as natural disasters. There also exists at this time the potential for the creation of the Positive Manifestation in our reality. It seems as though it could go either way here, with the collective manifestation on our Earth. This is precisely why it is now more important than ever to attend to our positive thought-creation in our waking reality and also in our meditation practices.

In the final experiment for The Blog Trilogy, we will take a page from the practices of the New Agers on our Internet in the Social Media collectives.

EXPERIMENT – Heal the Earth and Humanity

Hypothesis: Through ritual meditation with people around the world the positive manifestation is strengthened.

This is a very simple experiment that you may conduct as part of your regular meditation practice or as a special adjunct to your practice. You may wish to conduct this meditation at a special time of day or on a particular day of the week, to keep in synch with the millions of other humans who are observing similar practices around the Earth. Your input into the collective stream of manifestation energy in these Ritual observances helps to empower and direct this flow of energy. Your individual contribution is felt in a very specific way within the collective manifestation of the ideal, the focus of the meditation, in this case, the healing of Earth and humanity. Through these energy transfers from the individual to the collective, you are directly influencing the Entity Mother Earth and the human species.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Conduct the experiment for 10 to 15 minutes at same time of day each week, perhaps on a Sunday at Noon or on another day of relaxation.

As in our other experiments… achieve your relaxed and focused Trance State as you usually do. By now you will have discovered ways to regulate the depth of your Trance, so that you may quickly achieve the desired state of consciousness.

Your focus here is on the collective of humanity as you exist on our Earth. You have many challenges facing you as a human in this era. Our Earth is under stress from development, from abuse. Your task is to embody a state of Loving peacefulness. This is an appreciation for all that is good in your human life and in your world. You are appreciating the good and you are potentiating that good with your Intent. Feed your positive Loving images, feelings, and sensations toward the healing of yourself, humanity and your world. Imagine all of humanity rising up in peaceful Loving cooperation for the highest good for everyone. See our Mother Earth returning to her natural state of peace and Loving Light. See the cessation of the tragic Earth Changes. Feel the healing vibration of Loving Understanding as it permeates all consciousness. Direct this thought-form to your fellow human beings and into the Earth herself. Slowly return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings.

THE FUTURE EARTH

Dear Blog Reader, you are ONE with all of humanity. Therefore, take care of one another. This is our best hope for continued survive as a species. There is a positive trend that I would like to note for you, in regard, as I have been witnessing it for several years as we promote our Blog work. Our internet,AI, and our various Social Media represent the exteriorization of the Telepathic Network we speak of in our Blogs.

This is to be expected, as the “interior” of consciousness expresses itself in the “exterior” as All That Is during The Shift in consciousness. The Social Media networks are proliferating as humans of like-mind and Spirit connect and make plans for the future. This global effort – in part by the magicians, shamans, witches and healers of our era – represents the forces of healing, of conscious co-creation.

I am delights to see the efforts of the lightworkers and others combining forces in the millions to heal the planet and humanity. These movements are having positive effects on our world. The strategies for healing extolled in these varied groups hold the promise for the continuation of our species on Earth.

EVOLUTIONARY CHANGE BY NEW IDEAS

Each evolutionary change is preceded and caused by a new idea. As the idea is in the process of being constructed onto the physical planes, it prepares the material world for its own actually and creates the prerequisite conditions.

Evolution is energy’s movement toward conscious expression in the physical universe, but it is basically nonphysical. A species at any given time is the materialization of the inner images or ideas of its individual members, each of whom forms their own idea constructions.

At no point can we actually say the one construction vanishes and another takes its place, but artificially we adopt certain points as past, present, and future, for convenience. At some point, we agree that the physical construction ceases to be one thing and becomes another, but, actually, it still contains elements of the “past” construction and is already becoming the “next” one.

Though the construction of an idea seems to disappear physically, the idea which it represents still exists.

Sleep is the entity’s rest from physical idea construction. Only enough energy is used to keep the personal image construction in existence. The Entity withdraws into basic energy realms and is comparatively free from time since idea construction is at a minimum level. The Entity is in contact with other Entities at a subconscious area.

After death, the Entity will have its ghost images (memories) at its command, though their apparent sequence will no longer apply. Memories are properties of the subconscious Energy Entity and, as such, are indestructible (though they may be unavailable to the individual under various circumstances).

The next plane of Existence will involve further training in energy use and manipulation, since the energy of which the Entity is composed is self-generating and always seeking more complicated form and awareness.

Each material particle is an idea construction formed by the individualized bits of energy that compose it.

Each Entity perceives only his own constructions on a physical level. Because all constructions are more or less faithful reproductions in matter of the same basic ideas (since all individuals are, generally speaking, on the same level in this plane), then they agree sufficiently in space, time and degree so that the world of appearances has coherence and relative predictability.

HUMANITY EXTENDED SOUL FAMILY

WE ARE ONE WITH ALL OF HUMANITY. THEREFORE, TAKE CARE OF ONE ANOTHER.

The Westerner

These ideas that I bring to the table here are Westernized for your understanding. I have spoken, at least in our generation, primarily through English-speaking channels. This is because it is the Westerner who must now be convinced of the value of these spiritual ideas. The westerner, in the broad sense, is what is wrong with the Earth at this time.

If we were to look at humanity as the extended Soul Family of the peoples of Earth, you could very well make a case for this group of humans – Westerners in the industrialized nations – as creating the conditions for the utter downfall and demise of the entire Soul Family.

We are all connected one to each other. The behaviors, ideas, and images enacted and entertained by each of us are shared on some level by all of us. So please imagine what occurs when a belligerent nation of Reality Creators – one that wishes to bully other nations, wage war against them and take their resources – does so with impunity within our current timeframe. Let me say that, particularly when this warlike nation maintains a nuclear arsenal and threatens to use it against other nations, the stakes are very much higher here, of course, than if we were speaking of tribal nations waging battles with spears and other elementary weapons.

CHANGING THE PAST

It is true: change the past and the present will take care of itself. We are not being flippant here. We have suggested before in this that through true forgiveness of yourself and others for the perceived mistakes of the past, you are actually changing those past realities. The molecular composition of the Reality Constructs is altered. The emotional charge is altered. The historical experience is altered, Dear Blog Reader.

With this fresh in your mind, we will move to this very powerful experiment. Your Imagined Death entails a visualization of what you might experience on your deathbed, directly before the transition to the Home Dimension. Your visualization will, of course, be different than others might create. The idea is to visualize the Death Scene to see what Lessons may have been avoided that are now in plain view with the imminent Death experience upon you. Please consider, then, this Death Scene as occurring in your very current reality: at the age you are now, in the home in which you now live, with the people around you who are in your life currently.

EXPERIMENT – Your Imagined Death

HYPOTHESIS: By imagining your death you remove the fear of death and bring your Issues into focus.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Now simply relax, as usual, as you rest comfortably in a quiet room where you can remain undisturbed for 15 minutes. Breathe deeply. Close your eyes and imagine that you are on a beach somewhere or in another location that you have visited where you experienced complete calm and relaxation.

This is your imagination at work here and you have complete control over the activities in this experiment. You are, in fact, observing yourself from a vantage point near the ceiling of the room you are in. Imagine the particulars of your deathbed scene.

Feel the comfort of the sheets and blankets around you. Look at the room and notice the color of the walls, any pictures on the walls, any details you would care to notice about the room.

Now you allow memories to come to your consciousness, memories of painful events from your past. These memories you forgive and heal in the moment of remembering: Courageously, you see. Reenactments of experiences from your past when your were abused, neglected, unloved, or you were abusive to others may arise. In the moment of memory, forgive yourself and others immediately and the let that material fade away.

Courageous Forgiveness is your motto here as you imagine yourself surrounded by the people who have hurt you and those you have hurt in your life. One by one you look them in the eye, and with your boundless compassion you forgive them and yourself simultaneously. It’s exhilarating to be free of all that dead weight. You may feel like laughing out loud you are so completely cleansed of the trauma of the past. When you feel it is time to come out of Trance, slowly come up to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings immediately.

YOUR IMAGINED DEATH

It is a fact of life that many of us postpone addressing our Issues until the moment of our Death. Often it is too late then, of course, and so we may be required to return to physical life to learn the avoided Lessons. Here we will help you avoid that possibility.

We will have more to say about Death in our forthcoming Blog on the Transition and the Afterlife. Now, however, we offer you an experiment in experiencing your own eventual Death imaginatively. This will not be morbid in the least, but a cathartic and indeed healing exercise for you.

The ongoing awareness of Death brings with it an ongoing awareness of what it is you need to do in each moment. The question, “What would you do now if you knew you were to die tonight?” enters here. What would you do, Dear Blog Reader? In our material in this Blog and others, we suggest that Loving Understanding and Courage are what you may do to best help create a positive reality for yourself and others.

Specifically here, if your Death is imminent, you would be in a perfect position to practice forgiveness: forgiving all perceived wrongs throughout your life. This is a two-way street here, then: forgiving others and yourself. Loving Understanding becomes complete forgiveness, powered by the relentless Courage that comes with this perspective

SOUL FAMILY HEALING

To have an ongoing awareness of Death is a healthy thing…

Taking The Lead

In previous exercises we have identified tendencies to be afraid of the Other. The exercises in this Blog will heal those fears within all Simultaneous Lives. But first you may take the lead in matters of Soul Family healing, Dear Blog Reader. You see, in a sense, your mission with your Soul Family as an Awakening One, would be to encourage Lessons to be learned by all Soul Family members before the Death of the physical body. To have an ongoing awareness of Death is a healthy thing, in this context of study and experimentation.

An appreciation of Death and your ultimate demise, is also a celebration of your transcendence of Death. After Death, as you know, you transition to the Home Dimension, and then beyond into your multiple and varied Reinacanational Existences. With this in mind, to entertain Death as your companion, in a sense, in your waking existence, also motivates you to do your transformative practices, address your Issues without delay, learn your Lessons, and so on. Knowing that your time is limited in each incarnation, provides a focus and an intensification of perception and thus manifestation.

LOVE AND DEATH

The realization, here, is that Love is all that is required in all circumstances. The fear of Death fades into the background when you realize this basic truth of our existence. Now it is easy to say this when you are experiencing it. When you are in Love, in a romantic way, let us say, it is easy to see the truth in this statement. It is easy to agree that Love makes the world go around, as they say. Yet what is required here, I believe, for the awakening student, is the recognition that Loving Understanding, for ourselves and our Earthly colleagues, is all that is required, despite whether we are in a romantic Loving relationship or not.

Certainly, the Soul Mate relationship is important to the developing human at this time in our evolution. However, your “embrace,” you might say, of everyone you meet with this Loving Understanding and Courage we have discussed here, is what is needed at this time to break the barrier, to tip the scale, to initiate the healing of humanity and the planet.

As you do engage in these Loving activities, Death takes a less prominent role in your Reincarnational Dramas. Fear of death is replaced by a Loving anticipation on your journey. From this perspective, Death is only difficult for the living, those who are left behind. For the Soul, however, it is the ultimate accomplishment: a celebration of the continuity of Loving consciousness

THE ENTITY

For example: as you focus on the Entity, through reading and conducting the experiments in our Blogs, you ally with this vast collection of Souls. You are nourished as the Entity is nourished, you see. What began as an affinity of ideas and feelings becomes a true collaboration. It is the same principle at work in spiritual literature of all types. You are inspired, moved, transformed by the ideas in the text. We have spoken of this before.

Now this intense identification with the famous deceased, can be quite productive and life-enriching if the time is taken to truly study and honor these lives. The information is out there in the Collective Consciousness for you to examine at any time. Anyone with the proper preparation and motivation can access and explore this material. And as I said, the more you research with respect and Love these Gestalts of Consciousness of the transitioned humans, the more your consciousness becomes a part of the greater Gestalt we call the Entity.

AVERAGE LIVES

However, perhaps the explorer in focusing on the famous contacts forgets about the contacts with less-famous personalities. These would be the numerous lives lived as slaves, factory workers, tribal peoples, and so on. The majority of lives lived are not exceptional, by any means. The majority are normal, average, human lives, lived to varying degrees of Value Fulfillment for the further education of the Entity, the Soul Self, and All That Is.

But where is the romance in that? And so the glamour-seeking aspect of the human consciousness seeks out those experiences of Soul that have this high dramatic impact. This may indeed have positive results, as we shall explain in the next Blog.

THE CELEBRITY EFFECT

FAMOUS LEADERS AND MOVIE STARS

You may be familiar with a phenomenon that occurs for the individual explorer within this Past Life experimentation. We call it Celebrity Effect, in that, it is almost mandatory for the Scientist of Consciousness to uncover Past Lives lived as various well-known personalities. Thus you have the discoveries that you have lived lives as famous leaders from our perceived past, movie stars who have made the Transition, and so on. Often this ages into the Unknown Reality. The reasons for this may become obvious to you as I explain this phenomenon from my perspective.

Often this celebrity effect exerts its influence in the first few voyages…

THE SOUL FAMILY METAPHOR

This Soul Family concept is another of my essential metaphors, nothingmore. We are attempting to teach you-the-student how to make sense of consciousness manifestation. Without these systems of thought and analysis, you may become quite overwhelmed with data, even on investigation of a single current existence only. And so we are again simplifying here, even as we delve more deeply into the subject matter.

As you attend to your studies and bring into conscious awareness the activities of your other lives, a detailed description of your greater Soul Self emerges. You will discover, for example, whether you have lived predominantly male or female lives. You will get a grasp of your Primary and Secondary challenges in those lives. You will witness the victories and defeats within those existences, and in so doing, increase the scope of your belief system. As your view of self becomes more comprehensive, there is often a corresponding growth in the ability to practice Loving Understanding and Courage towards yourself and others.

PRACTICAL VALUE

Now let us attempt to achieve some practical value out of this information, by charting the associations between these lives, in so far as Lessons are concerned.

Earlier in this blog series, we asked you to make lists of possible Soul Family members that you identify through experimentation and through the existence we offer you. In the last chapter we asked you to consider your Simultaneous Existences past and future. Please gather those Findings for their part of the project, whether they are extensive or quite minimal. Next we shall attempt to “connect the dots,” with regards to your greater Soul Family gestalt.

TALKING POINTS

  • ISOLATION VS ENGAGEMENTWhat is your general relationship to the Other?
  • IDENTITY What is your Essential Identity? What is your Negative Persona?
  • YOUR LESSONSPrimary and Secondary, Re: Love relationship, Re: Your Current Soul Family Gestalt, Re: Your Interdimensional Soul Family
  • LOVING AND UNDERSTANDING AND COURAGEHow are your skills in these practices?
  • HUBRIS AND HUMILITYWhere are you on the continuum?

PAST AND FUTURE LIFE RECALL – EXPERIMENT

Hypothesis: You may identify members of your Interdimensional Soul Family in the moment point

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

It is best to have some experience in working in the field before you attempt this experiment. These moments of high-emotionality, of joy and anger, are in themselves Moment Points for the explorer of consciousness. High emotionality is a form of Trance State, and so you only need to focus a bit on your objectives here, when you are within one of these experiences.

As you let go and relax into the feelings here, allow the emotions themselves to guide you to the other lives: the target lives you wish to study. Imagine that you are tuning-in on these theoretical existences with your thoughts, with your Intentions. You will know you have made contact when you sense an other-worldly element to your sensings in the moment of the experimentation.

You may feel somewhat disoriented as your travel interdimensionally to other existences. This is multitasking here, as you participate in the high-emotionality of the current lifetime experience, while simultaneously using your Inner Senses to peer into other lives in other timeframes.

You might ask yourself what are the Lessons being learned in the other existences. You might ask for the particulars of the Soul Family member you are encountering in this representation of the Soul Family member with whom you are currently interacting? Ask for as much corroborating data as you can to enable verification later.

The material may come as a bleedthrough – a brief multisensory experience. If this is the case, you will have full memories of this when you come to surface awareness.

What you are illuminating here in this experiment are your Soul Family Past Life and Future Life Issues. These are the Lessons you have worked on in other lives with these people.

When you feel the experiment is complete, return to surface awareness at your own pace.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings on the chart below. In the next blog you will combine these Findings with the material gathered earlier in the Blog Series.

PAST AND FUTURE LIFE RECALL

TYPE OF NAMES LESSONS BEING LEARNED

RELATIONSHIP

__________________ ________________ ______________________________

DIMENSIONS OF TIME

We are multidimensional beings in a physical body. During our waking times we are constantly peeking into our other lives. This is how we come to an agreement about what to do here in our current existence. Then, paradoxically, the moment we make our reality, we forget how we came to that place of divine creativity.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is download-3-1.jpeg

We refer to these separate time segments or time frames in which we have our individual existences as dimensions. Our current existences takes place in the Third Dimension, as we know. Our past existences had occurred and ARE occuring in what we might call the Past Dimensions. The same can be said of our future existences: they are playing out in Future Dimensions.

You might remember that in my theory we hypothesize multiple existences that are lived by the Soul Self within this current timeframe in which we live. So there is indeed another human or humans, quite related to you via the Soul Self, living out their lives as your contemporaries.

As I have stated before, there are similarities in the experiences and behavior of ALL of our Simultaneous Lives. To be sure, these similarities are not obvious at first glance. In other words, the outwards manifestation, the physical countenance, for example, is entirely different in each instance of our existence.

We ARE living our other lives within vastly differing body types, of differing temperaments, and so on. Yet within the psyches of all of these representations of our singular Soul Self, note the similarities. These are similarities in thought, imagery, emotional content, and so on.

In this section of our Blog Series, we will show you how to use these attributes that you share with your other lives, as a method for honing-in on these lives while in Trance State. Because you are learning how to take this Trance State with you into your waking reality, you will also be able to do your research into your other existences outside of your home: “in the field,” as we say.

CONSULTING YOUR FUTURE SELF

Hypothesis: You can receive advice from a future probable self who is succeeding in this project.

You exist within a Matrix of probability and potential. Every thought of yours attempts to prove itself in physical reality. Because all values are explored by consciousness in all cases, there exists for you personally a best-case-scenario with regards to your Soul Mate encounter. This ideal exists within the consciousness of a future probable self of yours that you may contact in the Trance State.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Achieve your Trance State as you usually do. Relax and enjoy this process of going deeper within. With your Intention as your guide, imagine your consciousness travelling, free, as in the Spirit Body, or perhaps within a visualized transport of some kind to the place where future probable realities exist for you personally.

When you sense that you have arrived, again use your Intention to tune-in on the Best-Case-Scenario probable life with regards to this Soul Mate project. You may notice it, in that, there is a pleasant aroma, image, sound, or tactile sensation associated with it.

Now conduct a brief interview with this future probable self of yours, to gather the information you require to replicate the behaviors, ideas, images and so on, upon which this ideal outcome is based. You will have total recall of this information you are receiving from this future probable self. Gradually return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings immediately.

SUCCESS AS YOU DEFINE IT

As you master the Techniques and you gain your personally Findings from Experimentation, you will experience the confidence that comes from co-creating your existence with the Divine. In time you will find your own success in this project: success as YOU define it. Keep at it with Loving Understanding, Courage and with faith in a positive outcome.

HEALING TALK – EXPERIMENT

Hypothesis: Suggestions given in the Uncommon Trance can help you improve your reality.

We have presented this experiment to you in different forms in our new Blog Series. Here we shall present the same strategy to you with a focus on the Soul Mate encounter. However, you could also make the focus one of Business Soul Family Members, Spiritual Practice Soul Family Members, and so on.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Enter your Trance State as you usually do in these experiments. Relax. Go deeper and deeper into your state of relaxation. By now you have no doubt discovered the level of Trance that is most effective for you to achieve your goals. Please adjust your consciousness to enter into that state now. You may have a gesture or empowered thought that triggers the state of consciousness instantaneously. If so, use that trigger now.

The goal here is to focus on a stream of Inner Dialogue, such that the words become internalized. This means you carry this empowered statement with you throughout your waking day, and indeed, into the dream state at the end of your day.

Keeping it quite simple, you might consider the phrase, “I am looking forward to meeting my divine partner. It is inevitable. It is exciting. It is happening NOW!” Repeat this phrase or a phrase of your own making, in the Trance State until it is committed to memory, until it becomes a circular thought that is habitually repeated without much effort.

After about 15 minutes of this, gradually come up to the surface awareness. You may find that your mood is elevated, empowered, romantically inclined.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings Immediately after coming out of trance and after you notice effects in the field.

CALLING IN YOUR GUIDES

Hypothesis: The non-physical beings may assist you in this project

In all of our regimens we suggest the student enlist the powers of the non-physical beings. The Energy Personality, the gods and goddesses, Nature Spirits, and so on, all can be counted on to assist you. This experiment is a simple one.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Assume your trance state as usual. When you are completely relaxed and going with the flow of manifestation, imagine that your Spiritual Guides are coming to greet you in the non-physical world. You may have an imaginary playmate from childhood that makes an appearance. The saints and other religious figures may show up. Friends and family who have made the transition as well as Ancestors of various types may make themselves known to you in this experiment, which is really just a calling-out for assistance.

As you imagine your Helpers surrounding you, you might ask for help in a general way. Ask that your Guides contact you when you are in the vicinity of a potential Love and Romance support you on your quest. Your thought-energy and your Spirit literally energize these constructs and assist in their manifestation into your Personal Reality. Your fervent desire to have these beings assist you, is the main force behind these creation in your world.

Now please assign your various tasks to the Guides who have made themselves known to you. When you are certain you have gained as much information as you require in the session, slowly return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings from the experiment.

CHARGING YOUR AURIC DISPLAY

HYPOTHESIS: You may enrich your auric display with positive attributes

Let us try this experiment. Briefly, you track the changes in the Auric Display as you intentionally feed it with positive images, emotions, and so on, relative to the desired Soul Mate.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

First, you note the benchmark of Auric expression when you begin the exercise, as you did in the preceding Blog experiment. Then you would watch for beneficial changes as you feed the positive messages into your consciousness. These suggestions are built with affirmative statements that you energize with your self-generated positive emotions.

Thus, you might create a personalized mantra:

I anticipate an encounter with my Loving mate within the next two weeks time. I am filled with Loving Understanding and personal power…

As you turn over this mantra in your mind, open your eyes, if that is appropriate, and look in the mirror. You may notice with your physical eyes that your Auric Display brightens. Your energy expands.

Or if you would prefer to keep your eyes closed… get a sense of your Emotional Body, as we have described in Blogs, and look for changes on the perimeter of this image with your Inner Senses. You may also sense the improvements with your other Inner Senses, as in feeling a sensuous, even erotic intensification. You may hear voices of one kind or another. Aromas may come to you, suggesting romantic encounters, and so on.

Please notice how this Arua of yours brightens, and perhaps changes color with the thoughts of healing. This is the edge of manifestation we speak of in the Blog. When you first notice improvements you duly noted these changes without cynical denial, without self-deprecation. In this way, you firm-up your creation, your effects. Then, in the next few moments of creation you push this altered state of perception into the future by keeping cynicism at bay.

The next step is to emerge from your Trance and into your waking world. You will be taking this improved Essential Identity into your Personal Reality for experimental purposes. Follow-up equals noting Findings on Soul Mate Encounters that happen in the field.

FINDINGS- Document your findings, perhaps noting the personalized triggers we described earlier.

AURIC DISPLAY

HYPOTHESIS: Your essential identity is visible in the auric display

Now all of us have the capacity to sense this Auric Display. It is sensed with the Inner Sense of sight, with the eyes open or closed, within a light Trance State.

Here you will be asking the question, “What am I really presenting to potential mates as my Essential Identity? You will be assessing your Essential Identity via the Auric Display and determining the precise quality and expression of your energy through your Emotional Body. This will allow you a benchmark for comparison with future assessments after remedial measures are instituted.

This is how you make progress in these practices. It is where the magic of these techniques is used to greatest advantage. By noting how a particular state of consciousness feels to you, in comparison to another, you get a sense of what is needed to progress further toward your goal.

The success lies in the difference between the two assessments. What is lacking that should be there is put into the mix for future experiments. It could be an image, a feeling, a memory that makes the difference here. These Findings are valuable, in that, they represent your personalized “triggers” that work for you in this project. They trigger the manifestation process for you personally.

If you think in terms of creating supernatural acts, as indeed, that is what you are doing in these experiments, these Findings represent the “magic words, gestures, emotions” that combine to facilitate the creation of the supernatural event.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Now just as we have done in all of our experimentation… Relax. Breath deeply. Focus on your inner world for just a few moments, with the Intention of observing the Auric Display. This is the exact same procedure we have described to you in the past blogs with regards to viewing the Emotional Body. So simply carry your Intention with you into this Trance State for a few minutes please.

There may be resistance here, and this is quite normal. You are “looking for” those aspects of your character that you broadcast through your Auric Display, including those aspects that prevent you from meeting you ideal mate, your Soul Mate. Your ego/intellect may be reluctant to show you this authentic self. Persevere, then, for a few more minutes until you encounter the images and sensations we are describing.

You may witness a reliving of events from your past in which you experienced rejection or possibly triumph in the pursuit of Love relationships. There may come to you brief flashes of these events, giving you a taste, the essence you might say, of the events themselves. You may see lights of various colors that evoke emotional content. This is a common experience. Simply move forward with your investigation with the knowledge that you will remember this material even though it may contain some uncomfortable images and emotions.

When you feel you have received as much information as you need in this experiment, return to surface awareness, bringing with you this information on your Essential Identity.

FINDINGS Document your Findings as best you can.

EXPERIMENTATION

You have your personalized images, thoughts, and emotions on what constitutes the Soul Mate. We have previously determined what are your “true” personality aspects. You have taken a self-assessment and noted those parts of your personality that assist you and those that do not assist you in the attainment of Love. You are now intentionally empowering an Essential Identity that will contain within it, all of the Attributes that you will use to be recognized by your complementary partner.

Now you are being quite honest here, Dear Blog Reader. You are not hiding from your Issues, nor are you attempting to explain them to yourself in rational terms. You are not making excuses. Here you are using your powerful imagination to imagine a Soul Mate relationship.

Let me explain… As you visualize and empower the image of the Soul Mate you wish yourself to be, you also empower and are able to recognize the Soul Mate you desire. This is the Resonance Phenomenon in action, once again, as we have described to you previously. What is created intentionally and with power on the inner world is manifest in the outer world through Resonance– the electromagnetic assemblage of Conscious Units into Reality Constructs through thoughtful emotional creativity.

In this Trance State you not only envision your improved personality aspects – while, for example, picturing yourself as embodying your new alluring Loving attributes – but you also dramatize with emotion the attainment of the desired relationship in physical reality.

You would thus visualize what your Soul Mate looks like, insofar as physical appearance goes: body type, hair color, eye color, facial features, and so on.

What is the temperament of the desired partner?

What are the occupation and past-time activities of this human? I am certain you can come up with more relevant criteria to fill in the picture here.

Do you see how this unique perspective – the sensing of the Auric Display – may assist you in identifying Soul Mates and Soul Family members? This is the psychic mechanism for the phenomenon you know as “love at first sight.” It is a glimpse through the ego/intellect by the Soul Self. The perception is captured without censoring by the personality. Often prophetic material is presented to the mind’s eye, as in visions of a happy union years in the future when you are mated, perhaps having children, living successfully, and so on.

With this in mind, let us try some experimentation…

YOUR ESSENTIAL IDENTITY

Now it is common lament among those of us seeking mates, “If only they could see what I am truly like, inside, they would be drawn to me; they would fall in love with me and be my Soul Mate.” This assertion assumes that those around you do not know what you are “really” like. In reality, everyone around you “pretends” that they do not know your thoughts and what you are really like, to create a formality and a distance between you. But you do know that in the Telepathic Network, everyone knows what everyone else is thinking. We are a psychic race, and we intuitively are aware of the thoughts of others, yet only on the subliminal level.

Knowing this, do you see others are quite often responding to your “true” nature, with all of its fears, anxieties, resentments, and so on, and not to the idealized romantic persona that you identify as your “true inner self?”

The solution here seems to be a simple one: if you wish to create the conditions for meeting your Soul Mate, you must incorporate the idealized romantic aspects into your Essential Identity. This would entail transforming your fears, anxieties, and resentments into their opposites, perhaps. In so doing you might create an empowered Essential Identity capable of co-creating this Soul Mate.

It is true that your Auric Field acts as a beacon, displaying all of the attributes of self – both inner self and outer self – to the interested observer, including potential Soul Mates. You cannot hide, in other words, the display of your Auric Field from others, particularly those who are practiced in the use of the Inner Senses.

RESONANCE IS BASED ON THE LAWS OF PHYSICS

Let me clarify this for you. You know that everything that can exist is created NOW, in the eternal moment that holds all. Yet you exist within the confines of a linear time construct that depends on these laws of cause and effect , and others. If it helps you, please think of this Resonance as a process THAT INCLUDES what we call the attractive principle, the principle stated in our so-called Law of Attraction. It exists within the activity of the Consciousness Units. The Consciousness Units are active multi-dimensionally, past, present, and future, in our terms. They express themselves as different Reality Constructs in different dimensions of time. As these units of energy come together through an affinity of shared attributes, THE OPPOSITES ARE ALSO PULLED TOGETHER, expressing what you might call the “glue” of consciousness: that which gives thought form.

This occurs in somewhat the opposite manner as when centrifugal forces separate out the constituents of a liquid substance with matter dissolved within it. Bioelectric forces, meaning, the energies that animate ALL substances, in league with natural cosmic magnetic forces, all at the same time, remember, in this spontaneous process, in a sense, “push and pull” the Consciousness Units into the desired form of consciousness manifestation: consciousness in action, evolutionary consciousness expressing itself in all ways, in all forms, at all times. There is a Holographic Insert attached to this message, if you would care to look for it in your mental environment. Please note my use of the word desired as a pun.

EXAMPLE: LESSON LEARNED

May we now contrast this situation with one in which the participant is well aware of their Issues regarding relationships? Perhaps they are working on themselves and building a spiritual life. They are becoming intuitively aware, possibly, and so they may have begun to learn the Lesson.

And so this person may well receive the beneficial information from the master computer of consciousness, but also they might receive further information in the form of images, ideas, and emotions illustrating instances of abuse, humiliation, pain, and suffering with this human in other lifetimes. These negative assessments may come in the form of subtle Intuitions that others might not sense. This human is using their Inner Senses to obtain a thorough assessment of the human before them: “warts and all,” as we say.

Given this negative assessment, the human may well take a pass on further exploring a relationship with The Other. The Lesson has been learned, in this case, and the human may go on to discover more fulfilling relationships elsewhere.

EXAMPLE: FAILED RELATIONSHIP

For example: suppose you are presented with an opportunity to recreate a failed relationship for a Past Life. The human presents themselves to you in your current timeframe. Upon meeting this person the “computer” does its Work and presents to you this succinct assessment: potential Soul Mate. And yet, suppose also that this person has subjected you – within countless lives, shall we say – to degradation, humiliation, pain, and great suffering. Then why would you make this beneficial assessment of the human? This is a rhetorical question however let me answer it for you… Lessons. You are being presented with an opportunity to learn your Lesson regarding selections of potential mates.

In other lives you have not chosen wisely and you participated in relationships of pain and great suffering. You have already learned all that you can about these states of consciousness within these other relationships. But perhaps you are a “glutton for punishment,” and you want to give it another go with this human in other circumstances.

In a sense, you could say that you are only listening to the beneficial messages given of you by your great computer here. You may be in denial of your Issues, then and you are setting yourself up for another lifetime of pain, suffering, humiliation.

FATE OR DESTINY?

Another example: You are in a department store shopping for clothing of some sort. You are drawn to a particular counter and to the clerk behind this counter. You are attracted by the energy this human displays, the Auric Display or Auric Field. You are using your Inner senses quite spontaneously to select from several counters with several different humans behind them, the clerk with whom you have the best “connection.” You make your choice intuitively.

Then as you strike up a conversation, you realize that you have much in common: a similar sense of humor, similar likes and dislikes, perhaps even the same acquaintances in physical reality. “What a coincidence,” you say to one another, “that we should meet.” It seems like fate or destiny, yet is it? You used your powerful Inner Senses quite subconsciously to zero-in on the human with whom you had the most in common, the best connection. Then you experienced surprise at your excellent choice.

Let’s say you made an appointment to meet with this human after work, for coffee or some such thing. You are setting the groundwork, for relationship here, within the course of a few minutes of conversation in a public place. Where will it end? You may, for example, create a business partnership with this human or perhaps some personal relationship of some sort. The possibilities are endless. It is not destiny, however. You were not fated to meet. You merely used your Intuitive Senses to meet each other.

Let me end this example by suggesting that you could have chosen ANY ONE of the clerks in that store and possibly co-created a Soul Family relationship with them, to some degree. You are connected to everyone in general and to your Soul Family in particular. Everyone is connected to you. Each of us has a “history” with everyone else, in that we have the potential to experience lives within many eras, throughout time, with the same group of humans. This group could be vast – thousands or hundreds of thousands – or relatively small – tens or hundreds. Lifetime after lifetime, however, ALL of us, all of the Soul Family, interact in different bodies in different ways learning different Lessons.

I repeat: you could have chosen any one of the clerks in that store and co-created with them a potential Soul Family member reunion. This is where your free will is involved, you see. You choose from all of humanity, at any given time, those you will associate with, those you will fall in love with, those that will become your enemies. I am attempting to make this a clear point of understanding.

EXAMPLE: LOVE AT FIRST SIGHT

For example: You are going about your shopping in a market somewhere. You are in your Uncommon Trance and you are signaling through the Auric Field that you are open to connecting with another human with particular characteristics. Your Auric Field is noticed by a passing human – the Resonance Phenomenon at work.

Let us say this human experiences a precognitive moment when they pass you and look into your eyes. They see themselves with you in an ideal relationship context, for instance. Or perhaps they simply think to themselves, “It’s funny, but I feel a strong attraction to this person. Perhaps I should start a conversation.” Resonance Resonance Resonance.

You could say that this instance of “Love at first sight” was the end result of weeks or months of intentional Reality Creation on the part of the attractor. When this occurs you might ask your Guide to alert you to this project. This is a very practical use of your Guides.

Technique: SUSPENDING DISBELIEF

An example: You have begun your project in earnest and you are out in our community. You are keeping a positive thought regarding the Soul Mate encounter. Then suppose that a human – one that meets the Soul Mate criteria – look at you and smiles, or even openly flirts with you. Your issues may tempt you into ascribing these effects to coincidence or other factors: factors other than your Soul Mate Project practices.

The idea here is to not succumb to disbelief on your powers. Indeed, as you suspend disbelief in the moment of recognition of the positive effects. You are, in so doing, “making the dream real.” You are creating a positive future for yourself.

TECHNIQUE: DISTRACTING THE EGO-INTELLECT

This technique ties in nicely with the previous Blog on the CPA exercise. By consciously diverting our attention to the Divine – our ongoing co-creation with All That Is of our Soul Mate encounter – we gain skill of successfully handling negative emotions, ideas, images, and so on.

In this technique, when we are being assaulted by the negative, and we are threatened by these forces, we distract our attention to the work at hand: the contact with the Divine. We have said before that we are already quite comfortable with this technique. The average human is usually skilled at diverting themselves – distracting their attention – from the Issues and Lessons of their existence, and to something else: to some shiny objects to buy, to an entertainment of some sort, to a more pleasant thought or image.

Here is where we can utilize this innate skill to your advantage. Dear Blog Reader, when your Lessons and Issues present themselves, focus on them, glean the information required to move forward in your evolution. And when we are tempted to succumb to the pull of negative Reality Creation, distract oneself to the Divine. Just by thinking it, we can begin to accomplish it.

CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENTS: TECHNIQUE

We may think of our Consecutive Positive Assessments technique as a counter to the suggestions of our subconscious mind to recreate less-than-satisfactory relationships. Now in all of our regimens and systems we offer this simple moment-to-moment perception of the positive as the key to creating improved realities.

We literally find the good within each moment of perception. In this project… suppose you yourself attracted to a fellow human that you are quite certain would not be good for you, would indeed, be quite bad for you personally. Intuitively we feel it would be a bad match. The attraction is strong, however, out of nowhere, subconscious. You are in a sense, being “invited,” perhaps by a Soul Family member from a Past Life, to ignore your best interests in the matter, and again re-create a negative relationship.

If we are attending to the creation of the positive out of the negative, however, with our CPA technique, it becomes quite easy to not succumb to this negative Pull let us say, gives way to the positive creation modality. The more instances in which we successfully resist the pull to the negative and continue on our positive trajectory, the easier it becomes to resist.

Eventually it becomes habitual, as we master this art of living. Put another way… the Common Trance of subconscious reaction surrenders to the Uncommon Trance of conscious co-creation with the divine. I am certain you can see this. It becomes obvious when we experience it.

THE EMOTIONAL BODY

Let me refresh your memory concerning the Emotional Body. This electromagnetic construct is, in fact, the intersection of all of your Reality Creation energies from all of your Simultaneous Lives. It is visible to the Inner Senses in your Ritual assessments of yourself and others. The Auric Display we call it also, in that, these signatures of energy can be read within the human aura as it is understood in our spiritual literature.

Our Issues are evident within these energy structures. As we focus on them, they may indeed animate, enlarge, and begin to tell us a story. This would be the story of our life that we have perhaps been reluctant to see: the flip-side to our existence that contains the truth about our private life.

Dear Blog Reader, as you assess where you are in your development, an honest image of yourself begins to come into view. This assessment will have perceived assets and deficits within its makeup. The perceived deficits – this is your judgement call – shall be duly noted and a plan shall be undertaken to transform the personality in these areas, if that is appropriate.

This approach we call “interjecting new personality aspects into the Essential Identity.” You will be “trying on” these aspects to attempt a sort of “mix-and-match.” It is an attempt to embody a truer more integrated and empowered Essential Identity.

THE ALTERED ESSENTIAL IDENTITY WILL BE REFLECTED IN OUR AURIC DISPLAY: AND THIS IS IMPORTANT:

This broadcast of our attributes both identifies us to potential Soul Mates and they to us…

Now this is the way it usually works in human relationships: we meet in the Common Trance and subconsciously conspire to engage in a relationship to Learn Lessons. Often we are learning the same Lesson over-and-over. In our system we are describing now, however, we are co-creating consciously in the endeavor. We are not making the same mistakes over-and-over. We are learning our Lessons consciously. Do you see the difference? We are waking up together with the creation of these Soul Mate relationships. We are awakening to our mutual divinity.

COURAGEOUS INTIMACY

I trust I am not overemphasizing these states of consciousness as I continually speak of their utmost importance in these practices. Loving Understanding and Courage are the primary tools we will utilize in this quest for the beloved mate.

Initially we will assess our own consciousness in a Courageously Loving fashion, perhaps practicing self-forgiveness along the way. Secondly we will go out into the world on a Courageous and Loving quest for our intimate partner, or as I said, we will identify our current partner as a potential Soul Mate.

The two attributes of consciousness also come in handy as we develop our relationship and live lives together. Thus, Courageous Intimacy: our term for the strategy used by partners who are awakening together.

THE METAPHORICAL TOOLS

These are the powerful manifesting tools that we create from our imagination to use for specific purposes in our investigative work. We are already familiar with the Radio Dial that we used in earlier Blogs to tune-in on the non-physical beings and other phenomena that exists at particular wavelengths of energy.

You may already have created your Etheric Vehicle that you use to travel anywhere in space and time. The more we use these tools, the more data we collect, the more effective the tools become as aids to manifestation. Be creative, therefore, in the creation of your personalized Metaphorical Tools.

RITUALS OF HEALING

This system for manifestation is similar to others in our Blogs. We present Techniques, Experiments, and Rituals for us to implement in our waking reality. Systematically, ritually, Loving observing these practices, leads to an eventual irresistible tendency to CONTINUE to carry out the practrices.

The system becomes habitual. Positive effects are anticipated and when they are manifest we are empowered. We master the practices through practice, practice, practice. This is the power of the Rituals of Healing.

RESONATING AURIC FIELDS

Let me go on a bit here, to further explain how this works. Our bodies emits energy in the form of electromagnetic emanations. We have referred to this as the Auric Field or Corona in our blogs. This Auric Corona exhibits all of our personality characteristics and these characteristics may be “read” by interested observers via the Inner senses.

In fact, through Resonance the human exhibiting our preferred Soul Mate attributes recognizes us or tunes-in on us in physical reality. The Auric Fields in physical reality. However, because our signal through our Auric Field requests specific personality characteristics in a potential mate, our Auric Field will resonate with the Auric Field of the desired Soul Mate. When our potential Soul Mate is in our vicinity we may experience effects: synchronicities, deja vu experiences, swoons of ecstasy, and so on.

RESONANCE AND BELIEFS

We resonate our world into being according to what we believe is possible. We are Spirit in Flesh. Our ideas and emotions congeal into Reality Constructs. This is Resonance in action.

And further, as a way to illustrate the Resonance construct: if we cultivate a belief in Angels – as many of my Blog Readers do, I am finding – we go a long way towards co-creating with our greater consciousness, the reality of Angels. If we believe that we will die at a certain age, we will possibly resonate that event into actuality.

Beliefs are the determinant values within all Reality Creation by human beings. They are the most powerful constructs in our system. Through the power of our beliefs – the assemblages of images, emotions, concepts, circular thoughts – the electromagnetic phenomenon we refer to as Resonance gains focus and sustaining energy.

We create our reality through the templates of our beliefs. Therefore, know your own mind, own your vision of the beloved Soul Mate. Then don’t be surprised by your creation; it is an exact representation of your true ongoing mental activities.

CO-CREATION

Soul Mates are co-created, rather than “found” or “attracted.” You co-create with ALL That Is AND your potential Soul Mate, the context for experiencing one another. When the meeting occurs, it has the underpinnings of the Divine supporting it. The co-creation of your Soul Mate can be described as an awakening experience, then: collaborations with ALL That Is.

Now let me ask the obvious question that arises here:

Can I co-create the Soul Mate relationship from a current relationship, one that may have problems of one kind or another.

The answer is a resounding YES! Indeed, you may have entered into such a relationship – one with problems – for the specific purpose of working out your Issues together, and thus attaining the fulfillment of particular values. You may already be experiencing a Soul Mate relationship yet you are not fully aware of it now.

Let me digress… this idea of asking for what you want in relationship is complicated, again, by your Lessons: the subconscious materialization of your Personal Reality. This is why we suggest you adopt the conscious co-creator perspective. It allows you more leverage in the moment, in that, you may experience a form of objectivity with regards to your unconscious projections onto others.

So yes, please do the exercises with this in mind and see if you are already connected with your Soul Mate. Then should you discover that you are, you may use this material to deepen your relationship.

NEGATIVE EXPRESSION

Now this is an example of what the Blog is all about: changing consciously our behavior, thinking, imagining. We exist within the Moment Point as we assemble our identity from the various expressions of creaturehood within ALL of our countless Reincarnational Existences. At any one time, we will be drawing from some of our lives that ARE of a negative expression, on whole, let us say. This is often a hard fact of life to admit for the budding psychonaut.

We are all experiencing negative existences, abusive relationships, violent acts, somewhere in other timeframes. Now our strategy that we suggest, as we well know, is to immediately divert our attention to the positive when we are experiencing bleed throughs to the negative existences.

The attention is diverted to the Divine, always. As we consistently do this, our many lives improve, for we have a direct influence on these lives in our current experienced moment.

CHILD PARENT ENEMY

To illustrate: Our mate with whom we now experience our Lessons, may have been previously our child, our parent, our enemy. Yes, because we are learning Lessons of all types, the possibility exists for us to be experiencing a Love relationship with a former enemy.

What better way to experience the full gifts of living than to live the opposites with our Soul Family? That is a rhetorical question, however, let me add that with this rejoiner: we are not condoning abusive relationships.

Here I am illustrating the very common occurrence of the Soul Family member changing their behaviors of the Past Life existence, to their opposites: Loving, Courageous, Compassionate behaviors.

NEW AGE SOUL MATE

Of course, in our New Age Literature it is primarily the romantic relationship that is being referenced in these Blog discussions. So that we may be assured that the speaker is quite probably commenting on male-to-female, male-to-male, or female-to-female relationship, when they speak of Soul Mates.

There are also, quite often, the elements of destiny, synchronicity, and indeed, magic, attached to these Soul Mate discussions. In terms of these ideas, then the human does what they do best, in that they personalize these empowered images, concepts, emotions of the beloved Soul Mate with their own projections, their own criteria, their own personal needs in the matter of romantic fulfilling scared relationship.

Thus, we could say that the Soul Mate Gestalt of Consciousness includes each and every projection of every human who has ever fallen in love, for example, or wished, or hoped, or dreamed or visualized of an ideal Loving mate. The Soul Mate, in this way, exists as an evolving pool of opinion, desire, prejudice, dream and fantasy among other potent potentials.

THE IDEAL

Now there is an ideal in these matters. These are the basics regarding this theory of mine, and I shall elaborate for a bit, if I may… Remember, Dear Blog Reader, that anything that can occur within our system does indeed occur. ALL probable manifestations are explored by consciousness in terms of Value Fulfillment. All values are fulfilled in all cases.

With this in mind, the Soul Mate could be considered the ideal for the human relationship. As such it exists latently within the pre-manifestation domains: that ethic realm that contains the blueprints for all conceived reality. This ideal stands as an example of what YOU the human individual may co-create with All That Is with regards to the human Love relationship.

THE SOUL MATE PROJECT

Soul Mate

The concept of the Soul Mate is paramount in the minds of humans in our time frame. The search for the perfect partner occupies millions of moderns, who feel obligated I suppose, to seek out their most perfect match. It is somewhat of a biological imperative that drives so many of us on the quest for our Soul Mate, whatever that may imply for us.

The phenomenon is further complicated – or enriched, however we wish to see it – by the contributions of our popular media. This is not necessarily the Negative Media we speak if often and mystical genres. Through our daily horoscopes that have become popular, much of what was once material is being available to the public at large.

With this revelation of the Ancient Wisdom comes the inevitable degradation of these concepts by authors with an agenda based on the ego/intellect. And so we have a sacred concept transformed into some romanticized idea denoting the “must have” relationship for men and women in our era. We wish to acquire a Soul Mate as we wish to acquire a new car or furniture. Forgive me for making light of our lust for acquisition.

LESSON LEARNED

Now what Lessons were learned in our example? Perhaps one of the three response were made:

(1) You denied the person-in-distress entry to your home and refused to call for assistance to help them.

(2) You denied the person in distress entry to your home and did indeed call for assistance to help them, insisting that they wait outside for the help to arrive.

(3) You allowed them entrance to your home, allowed them to call for assistance on your phone, and perhaps made some tea for them to enjoy while they waited. Then suppose that in chatting with this unknown person, you felt that you were connected to them in some way, but you did not know how. Then, as you discussed your lives briefly, you discovered that this person was indeed connected to you in some way, such as a long-lost friend from childhood, or a friend-of-a friend, and so on. I’m sure you have had these types of coincidental experiences with people who come to you “out of the blue.”

Obviously, had you decided to respond in the first or second ways rather than the third, you would have never had the opportunity to discover your connection. Your fear would have prevented you from making this connection with another human being.

Now this is after-the-fact here, of course, this is after you have decided the person was of benign intent here and not a person out to do you harm. But I’m sure you get my point.

Trust but verify in all instances, Dear Blog Reader. Trust all but also verify all with your Inner Senses. Then, when The Other passes the test, so to speak, do not be surprised if you find yourself in just such a synchronistic coincidence of meeting as we have just described.

There are no accidents, after all. Everything happens for a reason. The once feared Negative Other turns out to be a potential friend or even Soul Mate. And that leads us to the next Blog.

THE NEGATIVE OTHER

Now, do you see how this example relates to our discussion of the development of the Negative other and the fear of The Other? The sense of protection and possibly suspicion that we inherited from our ancestors serves to inform this current existence of ours. We are making distinctions as to the dangers this human might present to us currently.

My point here is this: be safe, Dear Blog Reader. Do not leave yourself open to harm of any type in these practices. In fact, if you are attending to the exercises and experiments, you will by now have developed your Intuition to the point where you will be quite adept at “guessing” possible motivations and ethics of those you meet. You will also be able to “guess” at probable outcomes should you decide to carry your contacts further, as in relationships of various types.

PERSON IN DISTRESS

In our day-to-day existence it is quite easy for us to lose track of time as we go about our duties on our job, within activities in our home, etc. Our routines are just that, as we keep to habitual patterns of behaving and experiencing. Then suppose that something unique happens in our life to break the Common Trance for us, if only momentarily.

Suppose, for example, while we are within our home attending to our tasks for the day, that the doorbell rings and we answer the call to meet a man or a woman on our doorstep who is in obvious distress. This human has perhaps run out of gas directly in front of our home and needs to use our telephone to get assistance from a family member.

Any unusual intervention would do here, you see. The human in distress has interrupted our routine and brought us back into the moment of experiencing. We are now focused within this moment as we decide what to do with this stranger. We are perhaps assessing them as to whatever dangers they may present to us. Or we may be already assured, by some internal response, that they are harmless, let us say, as we prepare to allow them into our home. Or perhaps we are only prepared to make the call for them as they wait on the other side of the locked door.

TEMPORARY ALLIANCES

Because everyone we meet has something to teach us, and vice versa, we have no doubt found that perceived “strangers” may enter our life for intense interacting. Great emotionality is often experienced within these temporary relationships as the stranger may make themselves known to us on both the physical and the subtle levels.

Some of these relationships act as the catalyst to help propel us onto another path, another trajectory of experiencing. The partnership may last only a short time but the effects within the Personal Reality Field may well be quite powerful and lasting.

There are Lessons being learned here. The stranger who becomes known, if only for a brief time, is learning Lessons. We are learning Lessons also, as we participate in the interaction. An example is in order for the next blog here…

TEACHER AND STUDENT

Each and every human we meet in our day-to-day activities has the potential to teach us something about our existence. This student must become aware of this potential in the moment, or risk losing the opportunity for learning. Now this statement implies a teacher/student relationship. What does the classic relationship of teacher-to-student bring to mind for you-the-blog-reader? Allow me to assist you in this analysis… Humility enters into this discussion at precise this point. There is no student without the willingness to be taught.

The student aspect we are describing here is a facet of the personality or psyche that may be cultivated. It is the personality or psyche that may be cultivated. It is marked by an openness to discovery, to the novel. In the case of these studies of the Soul Family, the student would be quite open, intentionally you see, to the learning of the facts of life, you might say, about their true identity, their true personality AS OTHERS SEE IT.

This point is extremely important, and so I will elaborate on it for just a moment… the student is not the teacher to the student in these descriptions of Soul Family analysis. Others are the teachers to the student. The student does know everything. The student enters into the relationship with the teacher to learn something, in this case, to learn something about themselves. The student must be open to learning both the positive AND the negative about themselves.

The ego/intellect will always give us a slanted view of our self-created world. At some point in our development we will be required to rely upon our Inner Senses for at least part of our awareness in our waking reality. When we allow these Inner senses to guide us as we discover our Soul Family, we are turning down the volume, in a sense, of this ego/intellect, and turning up the volume on the Inner Senses. When we begin to receive less-than-flattering information from Others – the teachers we are speaking of – listen with our Inner Senses to these messages. Do not let egoic concerns prevent us from “facing the music” and learning the Lesson,

PROTECTIVE SHIELD

With this in mind explore a simple experiment on which we will be asked to briefly experience our existence without the amnesia that “protects” us. Keep in mind, please, that this secret information about our identity and our experiences has the potential to heal us on many levels of understanding. It is, in fact, our ego/intellect – the persona – that is being protected with this protective shield.

Moving beyond this shield is a simple matter of embodying our two tried-and-true states of consciousness manifestation: Loving Understanding and Courage. This is painful and difficult material to apprehend. Therefore, Courage is necessary in the beginning. As the secret material is revealed. Self-Forgiveness becomes quite useful as an ongoing state of consciousness: Loving Understanding, you see.

EXPERIMENT: MOVING BEYOND THE AMNESIA

HYPOTHESIS – We can wake-up from the amnesia

We exist in a camouflage reality. This means that the true nature of our existence is hidden from us. Now Imagining what it might be like to view our world with full-disclosure, in a sense, of all that we know and have known in all of our lives.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Assume a comfortable position and relax you body. Breathe deeply and enter your Trance State. Because you are a student of your own experience and you are learning the facts on your own life, it is now possible for you to step further into the Unknown Reality of your own deep psyche.

With a recognition that you are prepared to accept more truthful information on the nature of your reality, let that courageous expectation guide you further into relaxation, dreaming, longing for contact with your deep self.

This is that aspect of your consciousness that knows of all your activities in all of your Simultaneous Lives. It is that central focus of consciousness that knows what will occur in any given day. It is that part of you that sees your world as you open your eyes from sleep, directly before your ego/intellect takes charge.

Now you are drifting, drifting, and gradually you are getting a feeling for this part of you. This part of you exists in a pure state, free from limitations of any kind. Free from the censorship and judgements of your ego/intellect, free from negative emotions. If you feel a sense of losing control, of descending into chaos, gently direct the unfolding of your sensations with your Loving perception.

You are guided by Love here and you are quite Courageous in your investigations. Feeling your way through this inner landscape, watch for dramatizations of various types that attempt to catch your attention. Note any sounds, visuals, or other sensations for documenting later.

FINDINGS – DOCUMENT YOUR FINDINGS.

THE VIRTUES AND THEIR OPPOSITES

The Soul Families, then, are the assemblies of Souls in human bodies keeping appointments in physical reality to learn their Lessons together. The Lessons are those attributes of consciousness we refer to as human virtues, and of course, their opposites, as well as the emotional and behavioral experiencing in between. Please note that this accounts for the whole of human existence.

Remember Dear Blog Reader, that Value Fulfillment requires the essential and fundamental learning of the Lesson to whatever degree we have agreed to experience it before coming into physical form. Our Soul Self observes these activities generally, and certainly notes where Lessons are learned or avoided.

In this way, a broad spectrum of life Lessons is experienced by the Simultaneous Lives for the Soul Self, for the Entity, and for All That Is.

THE ENTITY

I have an extensives Soul Family that is only now becoming apparent to me. As we create Blogs for the betterment of humanity, and I frequently have meetings with Soul Family members. It is obvious that these humans are connected to me. I sense it; they sense it. A reunion experience of great depth often occurs to further validate this phenomenon for all concerned. Synchronicities are noted; memories are evoked, and so on.

ANTICIPATING THE POSITIVE FUTURE

Hypothesis: By anticipating the positive future we create it.

Anticipation occurs in the spacious moment. In past Blogs I have defined for you the Moment Point and the Point of Power. These are terms that describe the current full moment in your present co-creation activities. Simply, it is your Moment Point if you say it is, Dear Blog Reader. You are bringing your Intention and power to bear on the manifestation phenomenon in the present moment.

Perform your Ritual of Sanctuary

Relax and attain your Trance State. You might experiment with achieving this through linking the Divine state of consciousness to sitting down in your comfortable chair or wherever you hold your meditations.

Now… you are in your Moment Point. Your Point of Power exists Now as your portal to affecting your future IN A POSITIVE WAY. Imagine before you all the positive realities you have related while working with this material. The ecstasy just below the surface of consciousness supports you. The contact with the Divine may be experienced as a tingling sensation between your physical eyes. All of your Guides and Helpers, known and unknown, surround you and support you. Bring all of your Inner Senses into this exercise to enliven it and strengthen the manifestation. Stay with it for a few minutes. Return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your experiences.

EXERCISE – Consolidate your findings.

While working with the many techniques and experiments provided for you in this Blog, you have no doubt had differing outcomes of success. You are an individual with individual educational needs. Hopefully you are taking what serves you best and incorporating it into your Reality Creation agendas.

In this final exercise we are asking you to make a list of those techniques and experiments that have helped you the most in the creation of positive realities and in the learning of lessons. Please take a few minutes to go over your notes and Findings and assemble the material that “speaks to you” most strongly and authentically here. This should be a pleasant and easy exercise. The material that did not work quite well enough for you may be saved for another day. For now, simple make your list of five to possibly ten relevant Findings and particularly successful outcomes of the techniques and experiments we have offered in these Blogs.

SPEAKING THE TRUTH

There is another cliché that is useful for us here in our Blog work – “speaking your truth.” This idea of speaking your truth is a very powerful Idea Construct. Indeed, it is revolutionary in its activity within our system. Here again is an example of a simple idea becoming quite profoundly effective when utilized by large groups of humans. The personal also becomes the political here, if you see my meaning. It is the ultimate political act of liberation to speak your truth, Dear Blog Reader. This act is the precise opposite of ceding your powers of Reality Creation to those in authority.

To remind you of my previously expounded upon thoughts on this matter, traditionally, the typical human cedes their powerful energies of Reality Creation to those in authority – parent, teacher, employer, politician, priest, scientist, movie star – in exchange for subtle gifts. These gifts are acceptance to the group, permission to keep employed, and so on. Now everything works quite nicely thereafter. The system – essentially a system of control – goes merrily along its way, the citizen believing that they are the “captain of their ship” of individual human consciousness. Obviously this is merely a dream that one hopes to be true.

Now on the other hand, it is true that there are many benefits you receive when you cede your power to those in authority. You receive all those benefits bestowed upon you by those in power. And it would be unwise to relinquish those benefits of association with the group. Let us see if we may devise a system of speaking our truth in such a way that we are not branded as a nonconformist of a witch. There are quite legitimate ways to speak authentically to those in power without threatening our place within the group. We shall cover this technique next.

BACK TO LOVE

In this transformation our Mother Earth is healing herself by “throwing off” the harmful parasites that have plagued her. The negative leaders, the corrupt business officials, the violent among us now being “processed” by the TRUE powers that be. These powers are the Higher Consciousness – the higher selves of these humans. Let me go further with this. This inspirational spiritual transformation that is well underway with many thousands of our fellow citizens who are members of mainstream religions.

Let me first say that ALL expressions of the Divine within human consciousness, are what we might call “legitimate” or “worthy” expressions. All That Is seeks to know itself through the spiritual expressions of human beings within their simple religious practices, that we might experience when we ask for help from the Divine in a simple personal matter, as in prayer that our operation will be successful, and through their more complex and obvious spiritual practices, such as we might see within the walls of our great churches, as hundreds join in the contemplation of the Divine in prayer and other rituals.

So it is all Divine, you see. Everything is born out of the Divine and Loving energies of All That Is. Now the key word here is Loving. Where there is devoted unconditional Loving powering these practices of the Divine, there will be Soul Evolution in these groups of practitioners. For as you well know as a Blog Reader of my works, what we are calling Love with a capital L is the veritable creative force of the Universes.

Wherever the path of devotion in any religious practice or “spiritual” practice if you prefer, takes a divergent path from the foundational energies of Love, there will be corrective measures instituted within the consciousness of the sole practitioner or within the group consciousness of the church members. These corrective energies serve to direct the spiritual expression back to one Love with a capital L.

In our new Blogs Series I have been critical of our priests and other leaders within our religious hierarchies for playing upon the fear and prejudices of the church members, particularly within our mainstream religions. Some of these leaders have knowingly led the people astray by bringing politics into the church. The cause of Love has been forgotten within these groups as the leaders seek to curry favor with powerful politicians and other secular leaders.

These religious leaders, as we add to this Blog manuscript, are engaged in a Turnabout also, just as the many of us who have been engaged in the negative practices – fear mongering, hatred – are engaged in a Turnabout. With the assistance of the Energy Personalities associated with individuals within these groups and within these hierarchies of control and power, these personalities are being directed back to Love with a capital L.

Currently we are just able to see a few of these Turnabouts in our media, as some journalists seek to report the truth of the matters at hand. By the time we publish this Blog of ours, This Turnabout will be well underway for many of us, with truly global – and need I say, multidimensional – implications.

My advice to you, if you feel that you are engaged in this Turnabout, is that you allow yourself to go back to Love. If you witness your Earthly associates obviously engaged in this transformation, assist them in finding their way back to Love. You do this by demonstrating within your own Personal Reality Field, the practice of Loving Understanding.

KEEPING A GOOD THOUGHT

Now those among us who find ourselves called to act within our social groups, will find our paths are cleared of obstacles to progress. Soul progression is the order of the day, you see. This divine attitude is therefore reflected within our Personal and Collective Reality Fields. It is really as simple as “keeping a good thought,” as the saying goes. Is this simplistic New Age wishful thinking? Yes it is, simple and direct and extremely powerful.

This Blog Series we title THE AWAKENING OF HUMANITY for a very good reason. The simple act of keeping a good thought, when observed ritually by many thousands of humans, will lead to the creation of positive Loving realities that are the catalyst for the mass-awakening of humanity.

So again, the simple, the basic becomes the profoundly effective exponentially, as we, for example, remind our co-workers to focus on the positives, the Loving outcomes of the daily work activities. Or when we teach our young child the simple skill of focusing on the positives, as a basis for the creation of positive outcomes. The simple becomes the profound, my friend.

SOUL FAMILY THROUGH TIME

Now these groupings of humans engaged in concerted collective efforts, such as this Vanguard, exist over time. For purposes specific to the group, members will incarnate during the same timeframe, and experience the Value Fulfillment achieved through their activities.

For example: a group of religious devotees who incarnate in the time of the prophets to study and worship as a collective, may upon death of the physical form, go on a sabbatical of sort in the Home Dimension and others, and not obtain a physical body for hundreds of years. This group may then take a bodies as a group of scientists working on a problem in physics within one of our universities in our present timeframe.

Soul Family groupings exist at all “levels” of consciousness manifestation. Consciousness creates realities. What you might call “negative” or “cynical” or perhaps “regressive” consciousness, therefore, seeks out opportunities to create negative, cynical, regressive realities, again, for purposes of fulfilling these particular values. So at any one point in our history, you see, we may have unfolding many different mass movements of Reality Creation upon our planet.

Currently, for example, we have the movement of healers, lightworkers, our New Age who share the planet and our timeframe with the practitioners of the extreme opposites of these values. I trust I am not appearing unnecessarily vague. You know what I mean here, Dear Blog Reader. We have our work cut out for us, to coin a phrase.

Our gains in fulfilling values of Loving Understanding, Courage, compassion and the like, will of necessity come at a “price,” in or view of things. There is no good or evil, only our thinking makes it so, to again coin a phrase for illustration. Yet thinking and consideration and study are precisely what are required here. This means finding distinctions, marking off where we stand ethically, as perhaps “opposed” to other ethical standards.

Certainly we will be waging what appears to be a war against evil, of good against evil. Yet may I remind here, since all is one, we are in essence merely confronting our own “unacceptable” self. We are always reacting to our own projections. Here we are reacting to the projecting of our personality aspects out onto the world.

GROUP EFFORT

We are the Vanguard. As I have discussed previously, we have in all probability incarnated this time around to fulfill our obligations once again as advocate for our Mother Earth and for humanity.

Believe me when I say this…. it will take many hundreds of thousands of us to turn the tide of negativity and destruction on our world. Yet that is exactly what I propose in these Blog writings… that those of you who read my Blog words here and understand them, call upon your friends and family and business associates who may be of similar mind as you, to join us in this Research Project – the creation of positive realities.

Yet the majority of newly enlighten members of this family of ours will already be engaged on the subtle levels. Telepathy is the communication network on the Etheric Planes and all of us are well-versed in this system.

Additionally, of course, we also create worlds both probable and actual with our powerful thoughts. And so you see, this is the method. This is how we shall recreate the current Consensus Reality into one more attuned to the positive aspects of humanity: Love, Compassion, Courage.

NAVIGATING THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD

Hypothesis: We may contribute to the positive manifestation of world realities.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax. Achieve your Trance State. You are a member of the Entity. You are in active alliance with the Entity through reading this Blog material. Knowing this, follow your Intention – your Divine Will – down into your personal Underworld with the full expectation of witnessing the creation of Global Consensus Realities.

If you encounter Negative Beings of any type, strengthen your Sanctuary of protection with your Intention. Pass through these domains of confusion and control. When you experience a sense of peace, Loving Understanding and a strong sense of the other Virtues of humanity, attempt to perceive with you Inner Senses the activities within this domain.

You may well have reached the Consensus Reality Field of the Positive Manifestation we speak about in these Blogs. If you receive confirmation that you have arrived, let your own positive ideas, images, beliefs and emotions serve to strengthen and validate this phenomenon.

See the New World of peace and Loving Understanding begin to solidify and materialize within Third-Dimensional Reality. Return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your discoveries.

PRELUDE TO NAVIGATING THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD

The following experiment has as its objective, accessing the state of emerging reality we are calling the Consensus Reality Field. This is indeed a timeless experiencing, for we are within the webwork of creation in a pre-manifestation stage of awareness. Time as we think of it – linear time -does not exist.

In this state of awareness we will be cultivating, we will witness the emerging reality of the moment. As we know, the moment is all we have, Dear Blog Reader. The moment is all there truly is. It is only the emotional attachments to past, present and future moments that keep us tied to the wheel of life – the continuous unfolding of “events.” So this awareness we are asking to develop exists beyond time as we understand it. This state may be experienced through the use of the Inner Sense or Intuition.

This Reality Field is vast within our current Moment Point. For this reason, the researcher must narrow the focus of study to a simple line of inquiry. The World reality expressed in the “historical narrative,” you might say, includes the reputed “true” narratives of the various mass media of our planet. From this soup of converging “facts,” incidents, ideas and images, emerges what we are describing in this Blog as the status quo or Consensus World Reality.

So this Gestalt of Consciousness is largely a product of our Negative Media. Are you beginning to understand my point here? If we as a Scientist of Consciousness are to adequately access, understand and change for the better our perceived Consensus World Reality, we must certainly be at first very skilled in focusing on our subject. If we are not ultimately focused and strong in this endeavor, we will be “blown away” – a metaphor we have used before – by the energy, ideas and images we will face in this experiment.

We must be strong. The negative energies that seek to dominate our world are quite formidable, in that they are energized through the tapping into of fear within the population. Fear, hatred, anxiety, ruthlessness… these are the states of consciousness that feed the growth of the Negative Entities. So we must be fairly adept at transforming fear and anxiety into Courage, Loving Understanding and personal power. We must have reached an advanced state of self-awareness so that we will not be overcome when you enter the arena in which these Entities exist.

Now as we have also documented in these Blog writings, the Beings of Light, in a sense “riding” on a wave of benevolent energy – Love and Courage – are also active in the domain of Consensus World Reality creation. These Higher-Dimensional Beings and Spiritual MastersGestalts of Consciousness energized by the Loving energies of generations upon generations of “do-gooders” from our planet Earth and elsewhere – are actively confronting the Negative Beings on these levels of consciousness.

I trust you are with me so far. This may now all seem like a colorful fairytale for some of you in a fashion so that more are inclined to understand than deny.

PROJECTIONS

Now this process begins with you. We are connected to everything in the created Universe through a divine relationship between the (CUs) Consciousness Units that make up our physical and etheric body and the CUs that combine to create those Reality Constructs that “seem” to reside outside of our consciousness. We only appear to be separate. We only seem to be disconnected from our environment. In actuality, our entire exterior world is first within us – within our creative consciousness or mind.

We have spoken of this essential within-ness of our world. Each and every physical Reality Construct is “born” from an idea within us that is cast upon our outside world, much as a motion picture projector casts the images onto a screen for our perception. This we already know.

Now these projections of physical reality serve a purpose for us individually, for others in our Soul Family and for those in our greater Soul Family – humanity. Much as we might learn a lesson from an educational film at our school, we learn our Life Lessons from the self -created “projections” of our ultimately creative human consciousness.

We might be thinking to ourselves, “Wonderful! I am connected to everything. This is a good theory to think about, but how can I use it practically in my daily life?” Of course, we are already using this knowledge in our everyday life. We are just doing so unconsciously in a rote fashion.

Knowing and accepting that we are the creator of our world may allow us to experiment with conscious creation. We will in fact be consciously co-creating our Soul’s agenda for learning. Victimhood falls away when such a perspective is established within our human mentality. Also, of course, we gain the great responsibility for creating positive Loving realities for the greater good of all.

THE UGLY AMERICAN

Millions of us are assisted in our denial of the sacred by our leaders, by our nation, by our colleagues. This is why we continue to suffer the negative outcomes of our Consensus Reality creations. Excuse me for just one moment while I speak directly to those of you in the U.S.A. on the subject of “The Ugly American.”

It may well make you feel uneasy as I describe to you the shadow of our once great country. It is the negative counterpart to the positive expressions of our America. We will not hear of these discussions in our mass media, the Negative Media I have just described. This is the unofficial version of what has come from our actions as a nation upon the world stage.

With our very negative actions at this time, we are quite effectively preventing the manifestation of the New World – the Unity of Consciousness Dimension – within our collective awareness.

Our country, through our several wars, through our Negative Media and propaganda, through the tainting of our very culture with the evil of our leaders who have no sense for what is right for the people or the country, is preventing the perceptual breakthrough into the Fourth Dimension that I have been discussing in these Blog messages.

There are many of us who believe the lies told to us by our misguided leaders. It is true, often it is much easier to believe a lie. That is why many of us believe that all is well with our leaders and our country. For to question that authority would force us to acknowledge that the reality for us is just the opposite of the propaganda. Who wants to admit that they have been swindled? Who would easily admit that they were wrong on matters of such great importance?

It is a very, very important task to find and admit the TRUTH in these matters. For when the truth is found and acknowledged, only then does the work begin. All of the years of lies and manipulation have left us with a stagnant culture. The Soul’s evolution has been cut short. It is now time to begin our individual and collective transformation.

IGNORING THE TRUTH

The creation of positive realities is our responsibility. It is a personal issue. Because we are the creator in physical reality, it is a matter of how aware we become of our responsibilities.

Now the great majority of us, it is true, will remain in a sleep state, in a manner of speaking, right up until the time of the Dimensional Shift. On the surface it will appear as though we are unaware of the changes that our civilization is going through. Yet for most of us, there will be a great change already underway on the subtle levels.

We are being prepared for the transformation in the dream state. We are not aware of this, however, as we go about our waking reality. We prefer to “pretend” that life as usual continues to unfold, without any great upheavals to anticipate.

For this group of people the shift will take place over-night, quite literally. They will awaken one day and suddenly appreciate the vast changes they have undergone, as individuals and as parts of the collective. These are of the type of humans that wishes to “not think about” the future that much, for the future will “take care of itself.” This group comprises many millions of us on our Earth,

To pretend that business as usual is being experienced at this time in our history is a form of denial, a denial of the Soul Self. On the level of the Soul’s experiencing, we know full well that great changes are underway for us.

Constantly we are reminded of this by Beings of Light as they transmit their messages into our mental sphere. It is a simple matter to ascribe these messages, as we stated in the first couple Blogs of this Series, to bad memories or other forms of “negative thinking.” Then we may go on our way, blissfully unaware on an ego/intellect level, of what our Soul most surely knows. Let us present an example to make this clear for the Blog Reader.

Suppose you are a typical human of the type I am describing. That is, you are one who discounts, perhaps as spiritual bullshit, the statements of your associates that describe the hearing of the voices of dead ancestors. Or else you deny accounts of those who describe the means to avoid a calamity they faced on the highway, as in an accidents or some such thing, as coming from a nonphysical source. The intuitive voice is discounted here, you see. These humans may even ascribe the great luck of winners of various prizes or monies from the inside information given to them by their Angels or etheric advisers to mere coincidence. They deny the voice of the sacred in the lives of others, and so they must be consistent as they deny the voice of the sacred within their own lives.

NEGATIVE MEDIA

Now we may discuss affecting the Consensus World Reality from the privacy of our own Personal Reality Field. Just as our advice to “keep a good thought” a simplistic solution to transform negative realities – was offered to you the blog reader, this technique of contributing to the Positive Manifestation within the Consensus World Reality from our Personal Reality if offered with just as much surety that you will find success. The simplistic becomes the profoundly effective, as in other examples we have discussed.

Now what are we saying, in so much as we are describing the Positive Manifestation? First let me state emphatically that we are NOT describing the reality presented to you in the media. You well know by now that I am quite impatient with the purveyors of madness and violence and negativity that we refer to as the Negative Media.

These media would be the sensationalist newspapers, the war-mongering television programs presented as “news,” the violent controlling internet websites. These media present what we might call “the accepted” worldview of our deluded leaders and their business associates, the pillagers of our worldly goods, including our natural resources, the stores of our Mother Earth.

This is why we find ourselves prisoners of quite toxic Consensus Reality, you see. Many of us are using the “templates” offered to us by these Negative Media, to create a negative fearful reality. In a sense, many of us believe it is our “civic duty” to do so.

For example: some of us believe with all our might that we are good citizens if we prepare for the “imminent” terrorist attack from our “enemies.” And so we stock up on the necessities of life in preparation for a few months or years underground, in our safe room. This is ridiculous my friend. Now I am certainly not speaking to you personally here, I am referring simply to those of you who have fallen under the spell of negative conditioning perpetrated by our leaders and the business interests that “rule” our world.

But let us examine what sort of Consensus Reality we help to create from the “safety” of our safe room. Are you contributing to a world based on Love and the acceptance of our fellow human beings without judgment of fear? I think not. In all probability, we are from our safe room, merely adding to the hatred, adding to the fear, helping to do our part in the perpetuation of negative realities.

THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD

The Consensus Reality Field is our term for the broader field of Reality Creation of which we are a part by virtue of our individually created world. Our Personal Reality Field serves us well within our niche in our environment. It is “tailor made” according to our specifics, both conscious and unconscious. Now the broader field of Reality Creation may be thought of as comprising, for example, our neighborhood, our city, our state, our country, our hemisphere and finally our world – the planet Earth.

I will not bore you with more descriptions of how we create the Personal Reality Field. Suffice it to say that you and the others who live in our neighborhood, achieve a consensus while sleeping on what will be created, in so far as our neighborhood goes, upon awakening. Obviously this holds true for the manifestation of our city’s Consensus Reality, our state’s and so on.

DIALOGUE – TRUTH

Now briefly, our world is in the middle of the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. In our U.S.A. and other countries we risk succumbing to the forces of hatred and totalitarianism. As our election will again demonstrate, the system is broken. The will of the people is subverted.

It will take action on the part of many millions of us in the West to turn the tide. We do not have the numbers yet because we are complacent and afraid. But as the media gradually begin to present truthful stories for all to read, our numbers will grow. Act now to help make it happen. Participate in our community to encourage the truthful representation of reality within our media and within our communities.

DIVINE KNOWLEDGE

We often use the phrase in these new Blog messages, “I am not telling you to something you do not already know.” This is a statement of fact. We are merely reminding you the Blog Reader of the knowledge you have acquired in your many voyages into physical form. This information on the nature of reality and the use of energy, you first brought with you from your existence in non-physical reality, before your ” physical” birth into human body. Now this knowledge also is a part of your FUTURE heritage, if you may understand this conundrum of mine.

Perhaps a better way to describe the relearning phenomenon in which we are engaged is this… bleed throughs – the perceptual breakthrough of our current self into other Simultaneous Lives – occur throughout our waking and dreaming periods. These are learning “field trips” in which our current conscious perception tunes-in on one or more of our past, other current or future lives. This is a function of the multitasking Soul Self as we awaken to our multidimensional experiencing. This is the acquiring of the Divine Knowledge we constantly refer to in these Blog manuscripts.

On a basic level, we already know this material. That is why it seems so familiar to you. That is why it seems so true. You have perfected this system in your numerous future incarnations, again in your familiar terms, assuming the linear time illusion that is favored in our dimension. And so you see, I use the phrase “this you already know” as a device to hopefully trigger memories here.

The little bleed-throughs that we experience I hope will keep us motivated enough to continue the voyage. These are tools the non-physical beings use as we attempt to educate humanity. The phrase is a deep and empowered one, a profound suggestion. However, just accepted it playfully and see where it leads us. This phrase may help us to wake-up to our greater reality.

LESSON OF DIABETES

Let us provide another example here. To recap for the Blog Reader, it is my suggestion that the great majority of human beings realize what are the Lessons they have come to Earth to learn. They are perceived as faint memories by most of us.

These distant perceptions are glimpses of the Soul Self as it attempts to penetrate the barrier of the ego/intellect. These “memories” may indeed be “powered” by the Negative Emotions. That is precisely why we avoid thinking about these Lessons. It is a wholly natural response to the Negative Emotions: avoidance.

Now the example concerns a human in the throes of bringing up to the surface of consciousness their Wisdom Lessons. Perhaps they have avoided thinking about these issues for many years, perhaps the majority of the life lived. However, now it is time to confront this difficult material, come what may.

Specially, let us say that this human has avoided social contact with others to any degree out of fear of being criticized. Perhaps they were criticized relentless by others when they were young. This fearful approach has become a lifestyle, forcing the subject to live behind closed doors, in a sense, even though they secretly yearn for human contact.

As we have stated in The Healing Regimen Blog, the diabetic, for example, may be learning Lessons of appreciation and Love with this illness. They have not enjoyed the sweetness that life offers, such as perhaps the special contact so necessary to normal development for the human. To remedy this, it is suggested that one would intentionally LEARN how to appreciate the life being lived.

The human would do well to attempt to EMBODY appreciation, to BECOME appreciation. The next simple step would be to courageously transmit this LEARNED emotional state to others intentionally. The sweetness of life is sweet indeed, but only when we notice it and experience it and then “pass it along” to others, to use the vernacular.

I am certain that this message from The Entity is appropriate for many of us, beyond those who are “diabetic.” To embody the opposite of the Negative Emotions we are experiencing, is a very potent method of magical creation.

PUNISHMENT?

Now there are times for us, as researchers and learners of Lessons, when we may seem to be engaged in ardently co-creating our reality in a very responsible fashion. We are “doing everything right,” let us say, and diligently attending to the transformation of Negative Emotions into their divine opposites. We are doing so very well in this endeavor that we perhaps feel as though we should be rewarded in some way, feeling that the Powers That Be could “have mercy” on us, so that we might relax and enjoy ourselves for a period of time. Yet let us say that we still continue to experience a challenging existence with a series of quite negative events serving to “drive home” this harsh reality.

“Am I being singled out for punishment,” you might ask yourself. Now we must at times such as these, revert back to first principles. We create our own reality. If we are feeling victimized, we are ultimately the tormentor. If we are in the midst of painful, negative personal dramas, we are ultimately the director, the producer and also the cast of these dramas.

We are composed of many personality aspects within our Personal Reality ego/intellect. But our greater personality or Higher Consciousness also participates through a lending of energy to the “dramatic flow” of the events in our life. In this way, we are whole – the cosmos – and us are also the individuals living component of the whole. I believe I must elaborate further on this phenomenon for our ULTIMATE understanding.

The reason that we sense a familiarity in the scenes of our everyday life, as if all of the characters in these daily dramas of ours are our “relations,” is that everyone we meet and interact with moment-to-moment is indeed our relation. The relevant aspects of our Higher Self are reflected through these other personalities relative to the learning of our individual, Soul Family and Entity Lessons.

Naturally there would be a familiarity in this dance of synchronicity we know as physical reality. We act in concert, then, at any one time and all of the time, with our cohorts, keeping our appointments with “perfect strangers,” to enact our behaviors in the quest for Value Fulfillment. We shall have more to say on this phenomenon in our forthcoming Blog on Soul Family.

THIS IS OUR LIFE

This is our life, you see. This dramatic and sometimes comedic performance in Earthly flesh is our life, for which we have PURPOSEFULLY incarnated. We are experiencing both the positive and the negative life has to offer. Yes it is true that we inevitably age and die, perhaps being subject to much pain and suffering; yet there is also joy in these sequential moments of our life.

With the proper attitude we may even experience our suffering moments in what can be described as “joyful appreciation.” This may be difficult to comprehend for some of us. Let us have an example of how this paradox of feeling and behavior might be experienced by any one of us as we go about our meaningful lives.

As we awaken to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension, we will gradually become more aware of our Simultaneous Lives. Within these lives we are living the broad spectrum of existence. Thus, as we retain memories of a life lived within a society as a tortured being who is daily subjected to painful living experiences, we may compare this life with our current existence in the modern world.

Do you see how we might experience a sense of joyful appreciation for our current life? Relative to other lives we are living in the midst of great pain and suffering, our current existence may be regarded as joyful and complete.

TWO-STEP ACTIVITY

This is how our Third-Dimensional system was “set up.” It is an arena for the experiencing of Negative Emotions. However , eventually we must face this aspect of our personality. We each are called upon to address the negative thoughts within our mental sphere and the negative events in our existence and the Negative Emotions that “appear” to be caused by the negative in our momentary experiencing and “owning” it. The awakening human recognizes their responsibility in the creation of negative realities.

Wisdom Lessons, then, refer to this two-step activity. First the researcher, through experimentation and analysis in the laboratory that is the Personal Reality, arrives at Findings specific to their Life Lessons. These Findings may have been “hidden from view” for many years. They represent the hard truth of the developing personality over time. None of us are perfect. The human in physical incarnation may strive for perfection, but of being is reserved for other dimensional-experiences.

So the truth is made known through experimentation. What we have been denying is revealed to us in all of its harsh and intense glory. Now what does the awakening human do with this information? In our system the method is clear: with the developing skills of creating Loving Understanding and Courage out of anger, denial and fear, the researcher transforms the difficult material into its divine opposite.

Now this Loving Understanding entails acceptance of the negative Findings on all levels of creature hood. We are responsible, as I have said in earlier Blogs. We are the creator of our world and the events within our world. Accepting our responsibility for our creations is the necessary first step here.

The second step entails understanding and the gaining of wisdom or Divine Insight. This is accomplished by allowing the Soul Self to perceive our world. The ego/intellect is gently placed to the side and the Higher Consciousness is brought through the portal of creation – the ajna center directly between the eyes. This may be accomplished by meditation or visualizing the Divine as coming through our physical body construct.

We will naturally create our own imagery, thought and emotion for this exercise. Throughout the New Blog material I have given many techniques to accomplish this.

THE SOUL’S PERSPECTIVE

The soul sees the truth of our existence; that all is Love…

Now what occurs here in the “disappointing” moment is this… our ego? Intellect creates a sense of Lack for our having experienced less than was expected. The ego intellect is motivated through the concerns of the personality. The Soul Self, on the other hand, is motivated from an expectation of Love, that is all. The egoic concerns do not concern the Soul Self. The Soul Self does not ever hold unreasonable expectations.

The Soul sees the truth of our existence: that all is Love. It is only through the misguided perceptions of the ego/intellect that we, for example, would become disappointed – “depressed” as we say – if we were expecting a lavish birthday cake, and received only a small cookie with a candle in it.

Now seeing through the eyes of the Soul Self, what do we suppose we would see in this gift of the cookie? We would see, from this divine perspective, only Love with a capital L. The gift would be appreciated for the bestowal of Love upon the recipient that it indeed was.

FACING THE MUSIC

The Lessons of Negativity can be faced now. We have tools to deal with these Lessons. Now this is the way that it works for us with all types of behaviors: whatever elicits the perception of satisfaction or happiness is pursued relentlessly. Whatever seems to create the Negative Emotions is most usually avoided. There are, of course, exceptions to this rule in every life.

We have noted previously in this Blog material the tendency for the “depressed” person to create Reality Constructs that perpetuate the state of depression, as though there were a certain muted satisfaction in depression. Generally, however, the negative states are avoided by most of us.

For example: this is particularly true in the developed nations as we call ourselves. We are certainly “developed” in so far as access to material wealth is concerned. However, it is the rest of the world’s peoples who have the edge in matters of spiritual understanding, spiritual wealth. In the developed countries we are easily diverted from spiritual considerations by the many objects of mass consumption made available to us through our shopping centers, for example, through our mass media, and so on.

Dear Blog reader, we are easily diverted in the moment by these requests from our creators of “shiny things.” We are easily distracted for we are “waiting for an excuse” to avoid our Lessons. As we have suggested in these Blogs, like children, many would rather not consider our Lessons in physical reality, and would rather buy something we desire to feel good for the moment. If we are feeling anxious or depressed, we buy something. If we are grieving or in physical or psychological pain, we buy something to “make ourselves feel better.”

As you know, it is the adrenaline and other substances released in our body that creates this “feeling better” state of consciousness. Over time we become dependent on this satisfied emotional state and we may find ourselves purchasing more than we need or can afford to keep “happy.” The Lessons of Negativity are thus avoided.

NAMES OF GOD

I wish to make a point that All That Is encompasses all those names. The readers of this Blog should understand that their versions of god, whatever they call him or her, is encompassed in All That Is. All That Is is an infinite high-energy source. It is impossible for that mass of energy to contain itself into one specific life form. Not even for a minute is it capable of doing this.

We are all, extensions of All That Is in that we use this energy source to experience our lives and as we evolve so does All That Is. Every thought, every action, every feeling, every situation, every moment in time and space is different with each individual. No two people or beings will ever experience the exact situation in the exact same way. All That Is is experiencing what it has created in every way possible, thus expanding its abilities as well as ours, for All That Is is always acquiring more and more knowledge of itself through the existence of souls throughout the Universe, not just our limited little Universe that we are aware of but there are thousands of galaxies just like ours in the infinite amount of space.

THE CHART ON HEALING OUR OTHER SELVES

Simply visualize. Make it as a fan that comes out in front of you when you are concentrating and send those energies to those lives. And don’t be overly concerned about whether they are received. Just do it and be done with it and move on with your day. It will be done as long as you do it. We interact telepathically with other portions of our energy day and night, were just not aware of it. There’s far more there than we can possibly comprehend in the third dimension but I’ve made it as simple as possible for the reader of this Blog. This is you, as you send the energies out to other portions of yourself.

“You visualize yourself. This is your self that you are focused in right now, in this point of power and you are sending healing energies to all of your lives. You then affect all experiences since they’re all related.”

It is only a past in our terms because of our linear thinking and the logic behind the time/space continuum. We are in a timeframe so we constantly consider the past over and done with. The past is not over and done with any more than the future does not exist, for they all exist together. They are all there. There are portions of our energy in each one of these lives, living these lives. Think of it this way: we have set up a variety of different lessons and scenarios with which we want to learn. We’ve picked various different lives and timeframes that we wish to be born into. For the timeframe of the Earth plane, we need only to enter within that portal of time to begin to focus on that particular life.

We are all focusing right now as we speak on this particular timeframe, the events of this part of our world’s experiences, the perceived reality of our world I should say without getting too technical here. I want this to be absorbed by the reader of this Blog in the most simplistic of terms. Now, we have in front of us, lets say, a dozen lives and we’ve said to oneself, “Ok I’m, going to choose this one now. Many others are going into this timeframe and I wish to go into this timeframe too. This is the life where I will go to learn the lessons I have set up for myself.” Based on our own point in evolution we may enter into that life more highly-evolved than others and use that knowledge to assist in the evolution of the others. We may have chosen experiences in other timeframes prior to choosing that one that were either farther into the future as we know it or farther back.

The point is that we choose what timeframes to enter into based on our own personal evolution and what we wish to bring to that timeframe from our base of evolutionary knowledge. Now all of the lives, as I said, are being lived simultaneously. When we are done focusing on one of those lives, we will go back to our home dimension, evaluate the life we have focused on and decide what it is that we needed to learn. Did we learn and experience that and do we need to go back and do it again or can we move on with another lesson in another life in another timeframe on Earth or wherever? We make those decisions. They are there, but because we only focus the greater ball of energy on one at a time, this is where our point of power is.

Now it’s not to say that we don’t have a point of power in all those other lives, for we do, but we are not aware of them in our present life. We are not aware that we are focusing on any of those lives because our focus is here and now in this timeframe. We are getting thoughts from all of ourselves all of the time, we are just not aware of it. The thoughts that we send out now are the thoughts that we wish to affect those personalities in those other lives, to help the evolution of our soul.

Now let me add one thing here. When we are in our home dimension preparing to enter into one of our lives and we did not or were not able to learn the lessons we had chosen, as in the case of suicide, we will go back into that period of time that we have just exited from almost immediately. There is a Universal Law involving suicides, which is only circumvented in very special cases where one was already scheduled to die because of terminal illness. In the case of unjustified suicides, we will go back and be reborn from the standpoint of a baby and you will still be within that perceived reality and belief system of the individuals of that time period from which we just came and we will have to re-experience all over again a life similar to the one we opted out on, until the lessons are learned and the contract fulfilled.

Because the evolution of mankind/womankind takes on what seems to be a slow process, we might miss out on a few years at best, but we will be right back in the same lessons with pretty much the same identical perceived realities. Due to the accelerated pace of our current evolution, for reasons that I won’t go into at present, there may be some changes as to what dimensional-level we we re-enter into. Since our planet is in the midst of a massive evolutionary change, many of us will not be returning into a three-dimensional reality. This is all predicated on how swiftly our citizens realign their consciousness.

The intense energy being poured into our world at this time by the forces of light is going to dramatically affect our entire world as our planet makes this necessary shift into the unity of consciousness dimension. Many of us will re-enter into that dimension because of this evolution. Many of the souls entering into our world at present through the birth process are already evolved to that level and will be assisting the rest of the world to make the transition and will also help with the restructuring of civilization.

We are evolving into Light Beings. In the fourth dimension our bodies will be lighter and more etheric than the dense physical bodies we have now, “light” also meaning information and knowledge. We will be aware of all our simultaneous lives and their experiences for we will be able to feel them and remember them. It is not to judge them though, but to go forth and acknowledge them for what they are, learning experiences that we wished to learn.

Our spiritual knowledge has been kept from us far too long. It is the knowledge that has been always been available to us but has been taken from us within our mass systems of belief, through our religions and our governments. I have not intended to put down the religious systems as they have their place in helping mankind/womankind, but they have also been great perpetrators of darkness. As you notice with the 9/11 event. The terrorists mask their actions and beliefs behind the label of god and religion. This is true in many aspects of government as well, for they try to keep us in the dark about other beings within the Universe for fear that they will be stepping on the toes of the religious leaders.

The forces that are trying to prevent us from gaining our soul’s knowledge are busily at work trying to keep us in the dark. They go to great lengths to feed off of our negativity. We can see how they have controlled our media. Unwillingly and unwittingly many souls fall prey to this belief system thinking that they are doing the right thing, when in actuality they are being manipulated by the forces of dark. They have handed over power of their thoughts to others thus serving up mankind/womankind huge plates of fear and negativity on a daily basis.

SIMULTANEOUS LIVES

Our point of power is the sum of energy that empasses our current life as we now experiencing it. When we engage in sending thoughts of healing to our other lives we are using the energy available to us. Now to send messages to those other life experiences. Those other lives are not consciously aware of what we are doing but telepathically they are receiving the thoughts. This healing often affects decisions that we would be making thus altering our experiences. Our hope is that those experiences would be for the better and that the lessons chosen in those timeframe would be accomplished.

We are also altering our experiences in our now by the thoughts that we are sending to ourselves from other portions of those lives. As we raise the vibrational hum of our being through awareness, we affect the outcome of our future experiences. The raising of our vibrations also affects the rest of society and helps move the planet and its beings into its next level of consciousness. We are bringing that love-light energy to the future-light because we have the energy available in this point of power to send those thoughts. It is really not about a future life anyway because all chosen lives are based on our Soul’s evolution.

If we are to fully understand this one must move away from the time-constraint thinking for it is not relevant when not in incarnation. I know that you are confused as to how we can live all of these lives simultaneously, but I mentioned earlier they have all been chosen and set up for us to experience. There is no time as we know it in the home dimension of the Soul as well as many other dimensions. There are many probable realities involved in all of these lives.

The thoughts that we think now, the behaviors that we take on now, the ideas that we assume for our own personal reality affect all of these lives and our evolution. They are not consciously aware of it, however the effect is taking place because they are all part of the same energy essence of you-the-soul. Just as we are not consciously aware of them, they are not consciously are of us. But the messages that we send back and forth to each other do enter into the subconscious mind and are received, whether or not we are aware of it.

We are beginning the process with our thoughts. As our thoughts move toward the light, the vibrational hum of the beings on the planet and the planet itself will move into the change. As the beings move towards the light – the light being knowledge and information – the DNA within the human being will evolve from the double helix to the twelve strands, each twelve strands corresponding to the twelve chakras. This DNA evolution will affect the body. AS I talked about earlier in my Blog, the thoughts of our planet the energies of all of our beings, create the entire environment of our planet, the weather and all the perceived realities within that system.

When the vibrational hum of the masses is raised to its new level of awareness and into the light, the planet is able to evolve with its beings. If we move towards the dark or stay within the dark, no knowledge will be brought forth, because darkness does not allow for information and knowledge. We will remain the same of a lesser quality than we are presently, “quality” meaning we will not physically or spiritually evolve. We will stay within the confines of the third-dimensional reality.

Earth is moving forward. It is not in the throes of the backwards momentum. It is moving forward into its next phase on its evolutionary path. If we succumb to the dark forces, we will only succeed in relinquishing our soul’s evolution to the powers of those who wish to repress and confine the very nature of our being.

As we move into the light the knowledge that has always been there for us will start to show itself within our being. We will be aware of many things we thought impossible to comprehend. That is the process of moving towards the light, the evolution of mankind’s/womankind’s physical being as well as the evolution of his/her soul. We may be asking, “How do I move towards this light?” Our thoughts are what move us towards the light. If we constantly harbor thoughts of darkness then we will be in darkness. The power is ours. It has always been ours.

When we take back our power that we have generously relinquished to other forces and use it for the further evolution of our soul we will have started the process. It is no longer necessary to subscribe to the mass beliefs of the doctrines that have been systematically placed into our being for centuries. We are all starting to wake up, some of us quicker than others. Those of us who resist by your own free will still wallow in our greed and manipulation and stay within the realms of the Third Dimension, which I might add is going to be quite uncomfortable for us until we too seek the light. Those stubborn individuals will not be allowed to manipulate the minds of humanity much longer.

SYMBOLS

Let me begin, in the transition from one form of energy to another, for each life lesson that is completed, a symbol is chosen by us. This symbol is a reminder of the life experienced and generally it relates to the lesson or contract theme as it was completed. For instance, if we came into our life to perfect the experience of humility, and that experience was perfected, then the symbol would be chosen. The symbol is chosen by the individual, for you and is personal to one’s soul development.

The Council members for example have quite an elaborate array of symbols all together on one piece, which they wear around their necks. Since these beings have had many experiences, they are quite intricate. The same applies to you. Your symbol is your reminder. Now, when meditating often you will see these symbols, you may wonder what they are. If you look further, you will see that they have to do with the lessons learned in previous, past or future lives, since all lives are simultaneous. Now let me make this clear, that the present life as you see it is your current focus, however in meditation you are fully capable of focusing on lives that you deem to be past or future. Often when reviewing one’s life before entering into another, the soul will bring forth to the meeting with The Council the symbols of the previous life or lives, as a reminder of lessons learned.

All communication being telepathic, the Council will know what the symbols mean and will be better able to advise on a new life experience based on those symbols. The Council is always available to help in these matters in choosing the next group of lessons that are for you to learn. One life is not automatically predetermined to be the life following the previous. In other words, you may choose whatever lessons you are slated to learn in any order in which you want to learn them. Some lessons being very difficult. Other lessons may come in the form of an easy existence, thus explaining why some entities feel they are overwhelmed and have too much on their plate while others seem to skate through life without hardly a bruise.

It is all a matter if when you choose to participate in these lessons and their level of difficulty for your spiritual evolution. If you have had many seemingly trying lifetimes, you may then decide the next incarnation will be more peaceful to you. Now, keep in mind, not all incarnate on a variety of other existences. Solar systems and planets, however most of us will come back to Earth for this phase of our spiritual growth as most of our chosen experiences are part of Earth’s solar system and we are part of that Creator’s plan. The lessons that you have choose to learn and the stage of your soul evolution will determine the place in which you will manifest your energy.

The Earth’s third dimension encompasses your physical type of body which is usually chosen for the experience needed to evolve at the level. That is not to say that those on other planets do not have a physical body for they do. They are just different than ours because of some of the atmosphere conditions. Regardless, the symbols are many and there are multitudes of them.

When referring to the Council for guidance as to what group of lessons you wish to learn in your next incarnation (if you choose to do so) you will refer to your symbols. The more incarnations one takes on and the more lessons completed the more complex your symbols become. It begins to take on a complex personality of its own so to speak because it contains all your life lessons. It is worn as a medallion would be worn.

It is up to the individual as to how the soul makes the correlation between the lesson that was learned and the symbol that it chooses to associate that lesson with. For instance, you may have a tree or symbol of a tree if that reminds you of something that you learned in the previous existence. This is left up to you because it will make the most sense to you.

However we are very familiar with each other’s symbols as we see them because telepathically we are able to understand the evolution of each soul based on his/her symbols. When communing with other souls in our home dimension, as we recognize each other and identify with each other, we also know what each other has learned in our evolution based on our symbols. We visually can see these as if they were draped around our neck as in a large circular medallion.

THE FORCES OF POWER

THE NEGATIVE MEDIA
The world’s media – through television, movies and the printed word – all have some dark content to serve up to us on a daily basis. Most of the individuals presenting this information to us have no clue that they are being systematically controlled by negative energies. They merely think that they are providing a service of filling a need for the insatiable appetite of our society’s obsession with violence. The soul-you is not   this kind of stimuli when not in incarnation, where everything in our home dimension is in harmony. This kind of stimuli is shocking to the soul and in a way we are curious as to the affects of what watching violence does to our physical body as it increases our adrenaline output, a purely physical sensation that itself is a high for us. As adrenaline increases, the natural reaction afterwards is a calming effect. Our society seeks this stimuli in an effort to “experience,” for our natural impulses to experience our life have been put to a halt, so we must seek other forms of stimuli to experience. All too often this comes in the form of negative, violent media productions.

If we will stop and take notice, a heartfelt movie or an experience where we have done something kind for a stranger will produce the same effects, but we ignore it, considering it not fashionable. We have succumbed to the will of the negative influences and our ego. It is not healthy for the mind, body and spirit of mankind/womankind to indulge itself in this kind of programming. We set ourselves up to fall into the belief systems of the negative influences. Take for instance our news stations. They rarely give us any good news and if they do, it is some human-interest story as filler for their regular programming. The brunt of the programming of our minds is in the negative arena, supporting our fears and outright encouraging them. Our media have very effectively turned our societies into fear-based societies. It seems as though no news is good news unless it’s bad news. We can change this. We do not have to accept a steady diet of negativity and fear. It is most detrimental to our psyche and our being as a whole to indulge in this kind of stimulation. It robs us if the true fulfillment of our soul’s purpose and interaction with the rest of humanity. It sets us up to distrust and fear the beings that we have incarnated with to experience our planet.

Our media could be used as effective tools with the right intentions to fight our war on terrorism without having to kill anyone. Given the right kind of information, humanity could elevate its consciousness quite willingly. I am often perplexed as to why this valuable invention of ours (television) has not been used to its greatest potential for the good of humanity instead of promoting negativity and fear. It is one of our greatest sources of power, yet it is used unwisely to convey messages that do not further the evolution of the soul in any way.

GOVERNMENT AND MAN’S GOD
Let us talk governments and man’s/woman’s god. Man’s/woman’s consciousness has always identified itself with the physical body first. Somewhere along the line, in developing the awareness of his being, the perception of time, birth and death became somewhat distorted. In the beginning of his/her evolution, he/she was less aware of a time/space constraint. His/her natural relationship with the earth and his/her original awareness of his/her creator were all he/she needed. Eventually though, that awareness was replaced with his/her newfound beliefs. He/she had created for oneself a god of man/woman that would be the prime director of his/she life. He/she had been fully aware that his/her consciousness and that of animals were working in harmony towards their own individual evolution. For both understood that their actions, whether prey or aggressor, were fulfilling the needs of each other’s species and guaranteeing their survival. Again, I am using “he” and “she” here only as a reference to encompass all humans within the framework of these Blog writings, since the soul has no gender.

Mankind/womankind has always felt within his/her greater being he/she was to have some controls put upon him/her for whatever reasons. He/she was unable to accept the idea that his/her being would and could fully experience itself under its own power. His/her limitations set him/her apart from other creatures. Instinctively in the beginning of his/her soul’s evolution he/she was more aware of oneself. As time passed though, in his/her eyes he/she became frightened of himself/herself and his/her curious impulses. He/she felt the need to control his/her nature. Mainly through superstitious beliefs and then creation of his/her versions of god, he/she became further and further ensconced in the beliefs that there was some part of his/her nature that he/she could not control. He/she felt it was best to hand over the power to other authorities that would then oversess his/her life and ensure that he/she was keeping oneself in line with his/her ideals.

RELIGION AND GOVERNMENT
The religious organizations man/woman envisioned to feed his/her need for spiritual growth were unwilling to deal with society’s legal problems. It became easy for him/her to shift the blame onto a law and thus not have to deal with the issues personally. For it is the law and the law must be followed and so on it went, never realizing that he/she was systematically cutting himself/herself off from experiencing the nature of his/her being which is basically good. With all of his/her pent-up anger and frustration, he/she was starting to experience another side of oneself that he/she did not understand and became fearful. Of course even before his/her creation of a government, he/she had always aligned oneself with a God-force. The concepts of a God have always paralleled the ideals established within the governmental structures.

Mankind’s/womankind’s ego needed to feel that it was still in control of itself, so it imagined for itself a god of man/woman, a god that took on the characteristics of man/woman and would be a god of power. This concept was most important to mankind’s/womankind’s developing ego and ideals. Many nations have formed their own idealized version of god, and oftentimes the majority of their wars were fought in the name of God. With the emergence of this human-like god who was given the power to punish man/woman for his/her perceived good and evil, came various forms of religion, many using fear as a tool to gain control of mankind’s/womankind’s soul.

Governments also seized upon the moment and in an effort to control mankind/womankind began using similar tactics that man has willingly accepted enmasses. In the Western world and some other nations a democracy was formed that aligned itself with society’s religious beliefs. This was a cooperative effort in order to maintain an accepted equilibrium in society. For some time this system has worked for mankind/womankind, however with the awakening of his/her consciousness he/she is no longer able to accept the fables and fairy tales of his/her nature. With religion and its more intuitional knowledge and government with its more intellectual knowledge, mankind/womankind was now embarking on a journey of conflicting wills.

As our conscious knowledge became more and more available to us, our ego has had to grapple with the old system of beliefs. The realities that we have been ignoring, we can no longer pretend do not exist. As our governing institutions, scientists, medical establishments and reiglions all mount their efforts to suppress this knowledge, mankind will rise up and expose them one by one. Governing bodies in today’s civilizations are of a massive nature. For every infraction that humans have been able to perpetrate, a law has been put into place to stop it. There are always those acting out of their own frustrations that will look for ways to circumvent the system in order to try to regain their power. It has been a fruitless effort at best. However all that is about to change.

Evolving as a species

RESPONSIBILITY FOR YOUR ACTIONS
Life on our planet was intended to offer to mankind/womankind an abundance of diversity. It was not intended that individuals would try to stamp out by any means available what they did not understand or did not fit into their own perceived set of ideals. This applies not only to the destruction of other humans but all species that exist on the planet Earth. The different cultures were set in place as a stimulus for creativity for mankind/womankind. It was intended from the beginning that Earth would be the planet that would have beings with free will and that there would be much diversity within its cultures. Humanity has used their free will and often destroyed it at the same time.

Because of our own perceived inadequacies we have sought out someone else to blame for our failures. Civilizations are rife with individuals playing the blame game. We alone are responsible for our actions. We have consciously made the decisions. Whether they are positive or negative, our thoughts stimulated us into action and what we have acted out upon we must claim as our own. Mankind/womankind has conveniently sidestepped accountability for his/her actions using whatever forum available to pass the buck. We should certainly be able to recognize this observing the actions of our politicians, as they are masters of this game. Every being if they truly examine their life’s motivations will find themselves guilty of blaming others for their life’s mishaps. We would benefit greatly of we would rise up and admit our failures and move on without endlessly punishing others for our distorted ideas of our reality.

Each being is here, as I have said before, to spiritually evolve. It is my sincerest desire as you read this material that all of us will put down our grievances against each other and consciously start to respect the life that was given to us and to others. We are very fortunate to have been able to incarnate on our beautiful planet Earth. There are millions and millions of beings waiting to come to Earth that have not been able to because our planet is relatively small compared to some of the others. It can only sustain so much life at one time. Humans should be using this opportunity to enjoy and share the lavish benefits of the planet and interact and experience their soul’s existence with all the others who have chosen to come here. It is not one of the more evolved planets of the multitude of Universes, however it has a vast amount of learning experience for those who choose to incarnate on it.

Behaviors of greed, violence, hate and war will only suffice to eliminate our being from ever experiencing our planet when it evolves its consciousness. Planets are being prepared to receive those that do not wish to move into the peaceful harmonics. I am told that Pluto is certainly one of those more inhospitable planets with a magnitude of fear that we have never known. Given our limited perception of what I am saying, many of us deny what we are hearing, but the fact still remains. We will find out when we experience the transition of our energy upon death of our physical body, that the thoughts we create now will affect our next reality.

No one is justified in the destruction of anyone else’s culture or nation. WE are seeing examples right now, with the fanatical ideas of rogue governments and terrorists, that if not got in check, humanity will experience the destruction of many nations. We are to experience and learn from each other, not stamp each other out like mosquitoes. When humanity follows leaders that have taken individuals on a path of self-destruction, then they are only furthering their own annihilation. There are no rewards in that for the soul, none whatsoever. Those individuals will be made to experience what they have done to others in their next incarnation, only their experience will be much harder and it may not be on Earth. We have free will. We may move forward in our evolution or we may not, the choice is always ours.

DANGER ZONE
At this time on our planet there is a great war going on between beings: those that have positive intentions for peace and goodwill for mankind/womankind and those that are in pursuit of negative power for domination of mankind/womankind. The scales are weighing in evenly and that is a dangerous situation for our planet. There are many probable realities in play at this time and it is up to the individuals an masse to ensure that the survival of our planet is taken seriously. Our belief systems should be examined carefully and necessary changes made within those systems if we as a species are to survive.

Most of us still have many incarnations that we would like to experience and learn from whether it be on Earth or elsewhere. The point here is that elsewhere may not be a very nice option. Much of humanity over the last 30 years has started to raise their vibrational hum and move into alignment with the plan of our world and many of us are ready to receive divine knowledge. Knowledge can only be given to us as we evolve, due to the Laws of Non-interference. As we evolve our consciousness the knowledge is released. It is why I do not give specific solutions to problems, because we are here to learn from our experiences and the answers are not to be just handed to us. It is up to us to work out our beliefs on our own and come to terms with our soul’s purpose and evolution in our own way. Many mistakes have been made. Also much has been learned.

At this time though, our planet is in danger of experiencing some very serious events unless all of us consciously examine what we have been doing. Our thoughts and actions will greatly affect the survival of our nations and our world. Never before has there been so much conflict in so many areas of our world. Never before has humanity been so close to destroying itself with its weapons of mass destruction. The negative influences that wish to keep us from evolving will use whatever means necessary to accomplish their goals. The forces of light have been diligently pouring their energies onto our planet in an effort to seal off the negative forces in their own dimension. With those energies many situations will appear to be out of control, but rest assured that the walls of dark must crumble down before they can be rebuilt with light.

FREE WILL – NATURAL IMPULSES
Within the many Universes, Earth is a most beautiful planet. It is teaming with all sorts of life that was specifically created to enhance its eco-system and the experiences of its inhabitants. It is a most desirable place to incarnate and experience life. It is also the only planet to incarnate and experience life. It is also the only planet where there are no boundaries as to what humans can experience. Free will is pervasive on our planet as it was intended to be. Our stories of Adam and Eve were to help mankind/womankind understand that free will was the thrust of his/her existence. Within the framework of those biblical manuscripts the ideas for humanity’s behavior were set into place, knowing that with free will here would need to be some boundaries within societies. Nowadays the boundaries are so restrictive that we have almost lost the ability to experience the very essence of our soul, and in feelings of frustration many wars have been fought.

Humanity knows through natural impulses how to experience itself, but because we have been taught to ignore those impulses, we have suppressed the natural creature-hood of our being. If we would allow those impulses their freedom, a whole world of experience would open up to us. We would joyously be able to experience everything that The Creator had intended for us. We have been fighting with others and ourselves because we have not been experiencing those impulses. We have thrown them into one of the dark recesses of our mind for fear that they are bad and only fools act impulsively experiencing their existence. Animals do not suppress their impulses. They do whatever comes naturally to them. They do not question their motives for they instinctively know what they need to do to survive. Babies and small children are always using their natural impulses to develop their experiences in life. It is only they are taught not to trust those impulses that they stop experiencing them.

If we would allow ourselves the freedom to experience our soul’s journey, much could be learned and there would be no need for wars. If we would learn to just dominate ourselves and not others, our evolution would be swiftly forthcoming. I use the word dominate here, because it seems to be a method of ours to conquer and control everything around us. Everything around us is perfectly capable of controlling itself and does not need to have the interference of another to suspend its experience on our planet. Children are a perfect example of experiencing life to its fullest, that is until the peers and parents inject their beliefs into them. If left alone to experience for themselves the wonders of our planet we would see that they are quite capable of learning for themselves and experiencing life. Certainty I am not telling  not to supervise our children and look out for them, but when our influence is so restrictive that our children cannot experience what come natural to them, then we are shutting down their creative impulses.

Humans have systematically suppressed the natural impulses of the species at a young age, thus spawning another generation of beings who are trapped into the belief systems of the generations before them. The same old indoctrination, drummed into their minds from generation to generation, eliminating any growth or wisdom obtained along the way. We have been systematically injecting our offspring with fear, our own fears, in an attempt to control.

If we are to evolve as a species, we cannot have societies in fear of their existence and afraid to experience their lives. We will end up with the negative forces claiming our planet as their home. These forces feed off of fear and negativity. They have an intrinsic way of filtering into our everyday way of life and our antiquated belief systems. They have had a hold on mankind/womankind for too long and as the fanatic, they will use whatever means available to them to subdue our consciousness and enslaves us to their negative way of thinking. The members of the Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet and Beings of Light are releasing vast amounts of energy into our world at present to prevent this from happening. But it is all predicted on how we respond with our free will as to in what direction our planet will move.

OUR POINT OF POWER – NOW
These messages that I am giving are to enable us to know SELF, to be in touch with the essence of our being: you-the-soul. Because we are presently focused on this life in this time, the changes that we make in this point of power will affect all of our simultaneous lives. We are focusing a greater portion of our energies on this timeframe now, however there are portions of our soul’s energies living out those simultaneous lives as well. We are experiencing all of our lessons at once, we are just not aware of it.

When we experience the transition of our energy from this life to our home dimension, we will be given at some point another opportunity to focus a greater portion of our energy on another one or more of the many lives we have set up for experiencing our spiritual evolution. We will enter that life or lives as we have entered this one, in that point in time as we know it. We will focus a greater portion of our energy on those lives. Now, the messages that we send to those life existences from our current point of power will be received and will affect the life experiences of those lives. This is important because our planet’s survival depends on our thoughts. Moving our thoughts and beliefs into a peaceful, loving direction and carrying out those thoughts in our actions in essentially what is going to save mankind/womankind from its own self-destruction. We are in our point of power now. Now is the time to utilize it to benefit all of our existences, past, present and future. It does not do us any good to pass the buck shall we say and hope that someone else can figure things out for us. At the end of this Blog I will give you an exercise to help us in this point of power.

Since we are in the throes of a planetary evolution, what we focus on now – the ideas and beliefs that we have now – are what is going to assist us. Many of us are very familiar with the concepts about how our energies affect the planet and for those of us who are aware of this, we should be able to see that the effects of this are happening all around us. It does no good to dwell in the negative for this is not the time.

As we observe the planet Earth from our dimension, the swirl of energy around her has been quite disturbing. We have experienced many mass events both in nature and with the behavior of our citizens. Earth cannot sustain this kind of energy for much longer. If its citizens do not start to raise their vibrational hums, the planet itself will revolt against mankind/womankind with more and more natural disasters. Since our energies create the weather and all of the planetary problems, it would behoove us to start to take a serious look at what we have been doing. If the citizens of the planet surround themselves with an abundance of negativity, that negativity will and does create disturbing weather patterns around the planet. Everything in our eco-system is affected by our mind/thought energy whether we realize it or not. We can eliminate all of the disturbing weather patterns if we change our thoughts and move into a loving peaceful alignment with each other and the planet. If we could see it from another dimension we would be saddened to see the destruction of what was once a beautiful paradise where all creatures lived in harmony with each other. It is not too late to change.

EXERCISE:
POINT OF POWER
As I have mentioned before in other Blogs, focusing on your own point of power will allow you to know you: your soul. Take five minutes out of your day to focus on your emotional, spiritual and psychic abilities and nothing else. This is of great benefit and will enable you to bring your physical being in alignment with you-the-soul. Focus on you, your soul and nothing else. Bring to your thoughts a desire for an awareness of your being. Listen to the hum of you, feel the vibrational hum of your being. Again, do this and then forget about it. It’s that simple. Notice how you feel after the five minutes are up. For the human vehicle it can be almost intoxicating to suddenly become aware of the soul of self and the peacefulness that surrounds it when the ego is not involved. As you do this daily, you will start to increase your own vibrational hum and move your being into alignment with the planetary evolution.

THE SOUL’S EVOLUTION – “We are all one”

All souls when not incarnated work harmoniously towards the evolution of all. There is no such thing as racial prejudice. When making the transition to our home dimension, in between lives where a body is not needed, many souls take on a persona that they are comfortable with whether it is male or female, dark or light, it makes no difference. Many will pick from an assortment of looks and mesh them together as a reminder of certain lives that they have incarnated into as a fond memory of those lives. Others will take on no special looks at all and simply radiate their love light. On this plane between lives we all recognize each other no matter what the current look is. We are able to change these looks at will and often do so. Our essences are well recognized by all that we know and always acknowledged by others that we do not know in a peaceful and harmonious manner. Our thoughts are read telepathically there. We are just coming into an awareness of this ability while incarnated in this phase of our evolution.

What I am getting at here is that this is the way we should learn to view others that are not of the same race or beliefs as oneself. We are all sprung from the same energy source and we are all connected as brothers and sisters in the Universe. It is our decision and ours alone to choose to incarnate into the type of body and belief system we choose, to further our soul’s growth and experience every kind of possible existence, whether it be male or female or a variety of skin colors available to us. We have all been members of the same races that we now hold prejudice against. Since we are living all our lives simultaneously, the thoughts that we have in this life will affect the others. Taking this to heart, it would appear to be that if mankind/womankind would get his/her act together the future would indeed look quite bright.

EVOLUTION OF RACE
There is a plan and a purpose with regards to the evolution of races. Now I am using the word race here because it is our term and I will stay within the framework of those ideas. What we consider to be races are not races at all, but variations on the same theme, themes that we have created. It was a combination of many factors much in the same way the planet was formed. The physical body types were created by The Creator to survive within the different climatic zones of the planet. That is it. Darker pigments were given to man/woman when he/she was exposed to higher levels of sun. Lighter pigments were used where the sun shone less frequently. The darker pigments were there to protect the skin. It shouldn’t come as any surprise to anyone and if we look at our hemispheres we will see the logic. We don’t see a bunch of pasty white people living in South America. That was the intention.

Now, some beings were brought here from other solar systems as well. They were transplanted for the greater diversity of mankind/womankind. We did not evolve from the apes or gorillas and even ancient man/woman were also transplanted here from other star systems. The physical bodies that we currently identify with in this solar system have all come from other star systems before being seeded onto Earth. Most of us now come from the Atlantean civilization and are intimately tied to beings of Sirius. Therefore it will be impossible for our scientists to trace the evolution of mankind/womankind until they open their eyes to the other dimensions of our experience.

We have been able to experience our lives, at least most of us, in one race or another, simultaneously learning as we go, one need fulfilling the other, and so on. Our preoccupation with good and evil has led us to believe that white is right and dark is bad. However this is such a distorted view of the real reason behind the different physical characteristics of mankind/womankind, that to us viewing these ideas it appears as insanity. As we observe our logic, it is most sad to see how we have distorted the beauty of this creation with our own ideas and fears. Again, taking something of great beauty and turning it into something ugly in our minds. We then are afraid of face the reality that we have manifested with our thoughts. We have let ourselves get carried away with our fear of other beings and our fear of good vs. evil. It is time for us to change the thinking that white is good and dark is bad. The same can be said for the dark races. It is time for us to change our thinking that white is evil and dark is good because we are all in this together, growing and evolving as one. It only hinders our soul’s evolution when we place these kinds of barriers on it.

Because of these distorted ideas, we have essentially locked ourselves into little boxes and thrown away the keys. Living in our separate societies, barricading behind our iron gates, fearful that someone of the wrong color might come in and see who we really are, or take some precious part of us away from us. We need only face our fears to end this perceived reality, for it truly does not even exist. Our perceived reality is only a manifestation of our mind. Our true reality is a manifestation of God’s mind. All else is an illusion. We have been quite astute at creating for ourselves roadblocks to our own evolution. As we begin to expand our awareness we will be able to learn to trust oneself and our own intuition and stop playing into the forces of negativity that wish to keep us locked in our box. It is time to unite as brothers/sisters and start living in harmony with each other. Without each other, we would not be, because we are all connected to each other from the same divine energy source.

It is time for us to start realizing the importance of our relationships with each other. Many of us do not like to think that the events of 9/11 were a wake-up call but I urge us to examine our feeling after the event. Did we not for a short while, (short because we see us waning away again) feel a sense of bonding with our fellow man/woman? Did we not feel the love and compassion for others that we have so long ignored? Look into the eyes of a stranger. We may just see ourselves. After the events of 9/11, we were seeing mankind/womankind take the necessary steps to move forward in the spiritual evolution of his/her soul. We were caring about each other. We were taking notice of our fellow man/woman and offering bits of our own wisdom and encouragement. Continue to do so. Just because it seems to be in the past, do not forget the revelations that we have experienced from this event. This event is part of our evolution and if we use the experience to grow and change our world, then those who perished will not have given up their lives in vain. We do not have to play into the hands of insatiable appetite for power and control of our world. Realign our energies to create a new and wonderful reality for our world, a world of peace and goodwill towards others. This is not hard to do. It just takes a sincere desire to do so. Below is another exercise designed to help us break down the barriers of fear towards our fellow man/woman.

EXERCISE:
SPEAKING TO STRANGERS
Go out today and speak to a stranger. Do something kind and look into their eyes. You may recognize them, you may not, but remember you are connected. You are both part of the same essence of God’s divine energy. Try to speak to someone whom you would normally not even give a thought to. This will be the hard part, to see if you can break through the barriers of prejudice and fear. If you would try to do this on a daily basis, you will see how much joy it brings to your soul and you will then get a tiny glimpse as to what the true nature of your being is all about. You all may wear different packaging but that is only by choice. Just remember, you create your own fears. This exercise, if practiced daily, will enable you to remove those barriers.

CULTURES
Let us talk about the cultures of our planet, for this seems to be another area of disillusionment for us. When humans created the various cultures on our planet we were delighted in the creations of our consciousness, the creation of various self-identities. Experiencing this creative ability gave us much freedom to express ourselves in ways that set us apart from everyone else. Many subscribed to those ideas and thus cultures were born. One sprung from the other and so on, each with its own certain characteristics that were uniquely its own. There was much diversity as different people decided to try variations on other’s beliefs as well as inventing their own. It became a territorial expression eventually as humanity migrated to different areas of the planet. They took with them their cultural ideas and added a few of their own, thus setting up entire civilizations that were then subscribing to different belief systems and cultural practices. It is an ever-evolving thing and we see it today in our societies. Many civilizations are now living in and sharing the territories and belief systems are changing and expanding. Bits and pieces of each culture will remain, some will be tossed and others saved as humanity moves further in its evolution. It was all designed to be part of our learning experience on our planet, to give us diversity, a variety of experiences from which to choose.

Unfortunately, we also see the conflicts arising all over our planet as these cultures try to meld into each other. There are strong territorial and cultural beliefs that various nations wish to hang onto. Societies are strained to the brink of war in some cases as they are seemingly being forced to accept the belief systems and cultures of others within their territorial domain. The United States, being the melting pot of all nations, has seen its share of racial and cultural wars. It is to soon to tell as to whether this experiment will fail or succeed. It will be determined by the choices we make and whether our enlightenment is swift or slow. It is all part of The Creator’s plan. The North American continent was to be an experiment to see if humanity would be able to live together as one. When entering into this experiment, oftentimes one is searching outside oneself for happiness. Happiness does not lie within the borders of another country, it lies within the borders of our mind. When entering into a nation that is comprised of multicultural belief systems, one will be faced with the challenge of learning from the experience of living together as one nation. Now in the melting pot these cultures are experiencing great difficulties as they perceive themselves to be under attack by others. But as man/woman moves further in his/her evolution, he/she will come to realize with the awakening of his/her soul that he/she is not under attack by anything other than his/her own set of perceived beliefs. The only difference is our perceived reality of the experience.

HATE AND ANGER
In this section let us touch upon hate and anger, as anger is the precursor to hate. With the emergence of the events of 9/11, there are many of us who are in the hate and anger mode against the perpetrators of the event and rightfully so given out current set of beliefs. The mass evil that was planned and executed was indeed a horrible event. As we express our anger, understand where it came from and let it go. By turning it into hate we are then forced to deal with the pent-up energies related to hate. The hate will eventually turn on us and leave us with either an illness or some other form of retaliation within physical and mental framework.

Our being’s natural aggression and feelings towards this event should be expressed, but in a way that does not cause harm to others or put us in violation of Universal Law. Anger is a natural expression of our being and should not be shoved away into the recesses of our minds where it can come back and attack us later. Look behind our anger and we will see a cry for help, either from oneself or others. Now while it is OK to hate the actions of others, it is only OK if we understand the feelings and motivations behind that hate and release them after we have analyzed them. I am not suggesting we suppress our emotions, for that in itself is not healthy. But what I am suggesting is, take a look at our anger, analyze it, feel it, express it within our creature-hood and then remove it. Know that the feeling is there, but do not dwell on it, for anger then turns into hate.

Many of us have much to learn about this subject since we seem to dwell on the idea that hatred of individuals is perfectly OK because we have allowed ourselves to feel this way through the manifestation of our perceived fears. We are running from our own fears and illusions. What are illusions? Illusions are the barriers of our knowledge. They create our fears. They are beliefs that are meaningless. They have no truth. Realize our truth, be one with oneself and we will have no fear. Break free of our illusions, change our reality and our mind will not be able to produce fear. We have the power to remove the illusions and stand in the path of love. Out of the ashes of fear will rise up love, our hidden truth. For when we remove the illusions, truth is always found. When we attack others, we only increase both our fears and the other person’s fears. If we help others, we release other our fears and the other person’s fears. As we face our fears our anger will subside and our hate will not be manifest.

Now we may say, “How am I going to do this, because I have such intense rage over the events of 9/11?” Having intense rage over the events of 9/11 is not going to do anything but further fuel the fires of the negative energies. It is not going to solve the global problem of terrorism. The energy of our hatred would be better off turned into understanding, to create a peaceful loving solution to help the people of the many nations of the world regain their sovereignty and independence and unite us back together as one.

MOVING FORWARD
Look at the larger pictures as to why this happened and we will see that there were many global situations that led up to this event. I will be discussing them later in these Blogs. No one can hurt us personally unless we empower them to do so. Allow oneself to express our own feelings but then move on. If we harbor anger and hate we will in turn set our body up for disease of disaster. If we wish to remain healthy emotionally, physically and mentally, do not allow oneself to rationalize to oneself that these thoughts and feelings are legitimate. Although they have a legitimate place within our being, they are not legitimate with respect to manifesting another set of beliefs with anger and hate. We will only experience the domino effect.

Consciously be aware of what we have thought about our perpetrators, but at the same time understand that this is not a personal issue slated to go against our very nature. It is an event that took place, an event that involved many. Some of us were directly involved and are experiencing a loss with the transition of the energy of our loved ones to their home dimension. However, to harbor the hate and the anger only stifles the growth and the evolution of our soul. If indeed we want to walk through life angry at the world and the perpetrators of this event and others, we will only find oneself culminating these thoughts and events into a mass of frustration. It will only serve to confuse and alienate our being from itself. It is imperative for us to acknowledge what has transpired. If we cannot understand why it happened, do not dwell on the knowledge that we have not yet received and understanding of the events. Carry if forth as a memory to learn from and leave it as a memory.

Many good things will transpire from this event. Even though it does not seem to us that any good can come out of this, we will see humans waking up to the needs of each other. It will happen. I am not suggesting to the perpetrators that they have free rein to perpetrate their evil acts upon mankind/womankind. I am not suggesting that at all, for we have dealt and will deal with them separately. They are not free to run amok through society and create havoc on innocent beings who truly are trying to go to the light whether the are aware of it or not. The perpetrators will be put in check. They may try again and again. However we will not let them succeed with destroying our planet. It will not happen. They will be removed. Following is another exercise designed to assist us in evaluating the source of our anger and thus eliminating it.

EXERCISE:
WORKING THROUGH YOUR THOUGHTS AND BELIEFS

I suggest to you that you examine one of those thoughts that produce your anger. Work the thought backwards and find out what actually transpired within your consciousness to allow the anger to manifest itself. Oftentimes you will find that you were expecting others to live up to your idealized goals. It is important to understand that others are experiencing their lives just as you are living yours. You are not all on the same level in your soul’s evolution. Therefore a situation that you may find offensive may appear to another to be the right thing. It is important to acknowledge those experiences without letting them turn into hate, anger and rage. There are many questions you could ask yourselves as to why you have stood firmly in your beliefs, but the object of this lesson is to find out if those thoughts are in alignment with the divine energies of The Creator. Ask yourself if you-the-soul will be able to evolve yourself towards the light with these beliefs. If not, then they should be abandoned and a more positive approach adopted. In breaking down old beliefs and barriers you will be able to receive new energies from the Hierarchy and move forward.

THE RELIGIONS OF “GA”

In a sense, we could truthfully say that the foundational tenets and energies of Christianity, and indeed of all of our World Religions, originated in the divine matriarchy. This makes sense, does it not? The cradle of civilization, then, including the religions of all of the world, was this matriarchy we are calling GA. It is the mother that gives birth to the child; it is the matriarchy the gives birth to society and the world’s civilizations as a whole. Period.

Quite naturally now, and conversely here if you follow my reasoning: within linear time, within the evolution of cultures, within this melting pot of GA, the patriarchy made itself known through the actions of humans who resisted the notion of the ascendancy of the feminine generally, but particularly in the religious and political domains.

Notice here that we are not ascribing competing values to the matriarchal and patriarchal concerns. Both occur within our system of reality. Both are valid expressions. However, if you remember our assertion that the human is born, quite literally, out of Love: the all encompassing Love of All That Is, you may also remember that the negative emotions and all emotions in between Love and hate are also experienced while living the life. In this same way, out of a desire to know itself to the nth degree – to the ultimate perimeters of consciousness, you see – All That Is sought to create “tension” within the creative domain of evolutionary consciousness manifestation, by embodying itself in the form of human behaving in ways different than Lovingly and Courageously. Thus, a different perspective was found within individual consciousness, within tribes, within the smallest most elementary forms of society. A choice was created. The choice was between Loving Understanding and Courage of fear, anger and everything else in between the two polarities. In the case of the GA civilization, it was quite abrupt, the transformation. There was a critical mass achieved within the population once a majority of patriarchal god worshippers was reached. Almost evernight, you might say, the change occurred, and it was experienced within the collective consciousness of the GA people that an era had ended. A paradise on Earth was no longer possible. I hope you sense my irony in this last statement.

IGNORING THE TRUTH

The creation of positive realities is our responsibility. It is a personal issue. Because we are the creator in physical reality, it is a matter of how aware we become of our responsibilities. Now the great majority of us, it is true, will remain in a sleep state, in manner of speaking, right up until the time of the Dimensional Shift. On the surface it will appear as though we are unaware of the changes that our civilization is going though. Yet for most of us, there will be great changes already underway on the subtle levels. We are being prepared for the transformation in the dream-state. We are not aware of this, however, as we go about our waking reality. We prefer to “pretend” that life as usual continues to unfold, without any great upheavals to anticipate.

For this group of people the shift will take place overnight, quite literally. They will awaken one day and suddenly appreciate the vast changes they have undergone, as individuals and as parts of the collective. These are of the type of humans that wishes to “not think about” the future that much, for the future will “take care of itself.” This group comprises many millions of us on our Earth.

To pretend that business as usual is being experienced at this time in our history is a form of denial, a denial of the Soul Self. On the level of the Soul’s experiencing, we know full well that great changes are underway for us. Constantly we are reminded of this by Beings of Light as they transmit their messages into our mental sphere. It is a simple matter to ascribe these messages, as we stated in the first chapters of this Blog Series, to bad memories or other forms of “negative thinking.” Then we may go on our way, blissfully unaware of an ego/intellect level, of what our Soul most surely knows. Let us present an example to make this clear for the Blog Reader.

Suppose you are a typical human of the type I am describing. That is, you are one who discounts, perhaps as spiritual hogwash, the statements of your associates that describe the hearing of the voices of dead ancestors. Or else you deny accounts of those who describe the means to avoid a calamity they faced on the highway, as in an accident of some such thing, as coming from a nonphysical source. The intuitive voice is discounted here, you see. These humans may even ascribe the great luck of winners of various prizes or monies from the inside information given to them by their Angels or etheric advisers to mere coincidence. They deny the voice of the sacred in the lives of others, and so they must be consistent as they deny the voice of the sacred within their own lives.

THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD

The Consensus Reality Field is our term for the broader field of Reality Creation of which we are a part by virtue of our individually created world. Our Personal Reality Field serves us well within our niche in our environment. It is ” tailor made” according to our specifics, both conscious and unconscious. Now the broader field of Reality Creation may be thought of as comprising, for example, our neighborhood, our city, our state, our country, our hemisphere and finally our world – the planet Earth.

I will not bore you with more descriptions of how we create the Personal Reality Field. Suffice it to say that we and the others who live in our neighborhood, achieve a consensus while sleeping on what will be created, in so far as our neighborhood goes, upon awakening. Obviously this holds true for the manifestation of our city’s Consensus Reality, our state’s and so on.

GOD IS DEAD?

It has been broadly suggested by some of you, in a very sensational manner, that God is dead. The phrase is quite actually a powerful suggestion. In a way, it represents the triumph of materialism and of science over the human consciousness. However, in truth quite literally, if you are alive, God is not dead. You are the creator of your world.

With All That Is you individually create your Personal Reality Field and collectively do you co-create your Consensus World Reality. So perhaps God with a capital G might also be described as the ensemble of humans, animals and elements on Earth at any one time. However, since the whole is to be found within the part in this holographic model of reality, even if you were the last person alive on Earth, God would STILL not be dead.

Our philosophical discussion begs the question, “If I am the creator of my world and All That Is is within each Conscious Unit or atom in physical reality, does this mean that I am also God or All That Is?” Here again, the issue is not merely one of semantics. Let me explain. Religious conditioning serves to disempower the religion practitioner. We are speaking in broad generalities here.

THE GOD BLOG

For the next project, The God Blog – the manuscript on All That Is. We hope to present for you an interesting and educational Blog on the creative source for all of our realities. However, I believe we would do well to provide you with some of the ideas and theories we will cover in that Blog, now in this current writing, so that you may better absorb and utilize these current messages from a Entity.

Obviously, because we are incessantly on the topic of Reality Creation here, the question of “who is the reality creator?” must arise just as incessantly. I do believe that it is more than a mere matter of semantics. Who is the creator of your Personal Reality? I have advised you over these many years that it is indeed YOU the Blog Reader of this Blog who creates your Personal Reality. Now where does God and where do the concepts of the Divine fit within this cosmology of a reality-creating human? Let us discuss this for just a moment.

To begin, you Dear Blog Reader, are the epitome of All That Is. You are composed of divine energy constructs – the Conscious Units. In each and every one of the Consciousness Units you may find the holographic replica of EVERYTHING in all of our created realities. This EVERYTHING we are also referring to as All That Is. Now this metaphor of a holographic reality may serve us well here in this discussion. The simplified definition of a hologram for our purposes might be, “that which is everywhere all of the time.” This describes the fundamental nature of the Conscious Units as well as the multidimensional atoms theorized by some of our scientists. The researcher may make practical use of this theoretical construct by experimenting with experiencing the everywhere-all-the-time perspective. This perceptual vantage point is actually each and every Moment Point in space and time, so it does include past, present and future, in our terms.

This All That Is we have named to move beyond religious connotations of any kind. It is a safe generic title, is it not? Yet at the same, being All That Is, this construct would naturally hold within itself what we might call the Divine or the sacred or spiritual worlds. The visionary experience treats the researcher, or perhaps the accidental mystic, to the sensory extravaganza that is multidimensional existence. How does one then define this experience in retrospect? Invariably the human bows to authority in these matters, and again as we discussed in these Blogs, hands over their powers of Reality Creation to another higher, perhaps “more worthy” entity. Thus the gods and goddesses are born.

We do not intend to trivialize this god-making faculty of the human being. These self-created constructs are definitely “given a life of their own” through the ongoing support of “thought energy” through the prayers and other spiritual observances of countless Souls over the millennia. The personality aspects of the human are constellated “out” onto the physical world from “within.” Each of the separate Earthly cultures, then, creates their individual divinities according to the needs of their particular group. So that the Nordic peoples, for example, developed an entirely different pantheon than did the Indonesian Islanders. Different Divine beings evolve from the different cultural needs of the people who live in the collective. Now let us relate this to the individual researcher living in our current timeframe.

AFTER ENLIGHTENMENT

We have spoken before of the gratifying changes in consciousness that come with Soul Evolution. What we are really talking about here is a systematic approach to belief change. The example we used pertained to a change in belief regarding radial prejudice. In our example, the person had undergone a subtle transformation in consciousness by working on themselves” to the degree that they no longer feared or hated a particular race or group of people, but they were indeed experiencing growing affection for these people, for the race as a whole.

I described this feeling as a form of ambivalence, in that the person still harbored negative feelings for the group of people, but the positive feelings for the group were beginning to overtake the negative. This person was on the cusp of positive belief change. They were comfortable with the uncertainty they were experiencing, for as I said, they were working on themselves, trying to learn their Lessons, and they were, at least for the moment, able to resist recognizing the negative inner dialogue concerning the group of people. They were able to “turn down the volume,” you see, on their self-centered positive inner dialogue. So this is what belief change entails.

WHY PURSUE THE SPIRITUAL?

Let us discuss an issue that is quite obvious. Perhaps that is why we have neglected it thus far in these new Blog writings. The issue may be framed with a question: “Why assume my Blog Readers of our new Blog material are looking for spiritual understanding? If the path to Loving Understanding and Soul Evolution is so perilous and fraught with physical and psychological pain, why would anyone in their right mind want to pursue it?”

To begin, the Blog Readers, as I have observed them over the many years, are seekers. They are drawn to this work, I assume, because it “speaks to them.” Others of a different personality style and temperament, perhaps, would be drawn to other Teachings. Now it is true that the Older Blog material was quite barren of discussions of spiritual matters. This was an editorial decision. I have continually offered my spiritually-informed content to humanity. However, since it is the human co-creator of the Blog who creates in physical reality, it is the human co-creator who determines what they consider to be appropriate content for the Blog.

These new Blogs are the spiritual – you might say the divine – counterparts to the Old Blog material. If you are a student, to the spiritually – based material contained in these new Blogs. Now I have attempted to include weighty intellectual discussions in my new Blog work, to satisfy those of you who are focused on the physical dimension in which we live. The spiritual is merely the other side of this physical dimension. To become a well-rounded, educated human, you would do well to study both aspects of reality

The path to Soul Realization may be thoughts of as arduous by some. This is true. Certainly it is not for the meek and mild. It is easy to lose confidence and perhaps quit the journey before it has truly begun. As you examine some of your lifetimes within less than ideal circumstances . If you tune-in, for example, to a lifetime in which you are dying slowly from starvation or an illness of some kind, this witnessing may be so distasteful and shocking that you are thrown out of your meditative state. I would suggest that you remember in these cases, under these circumstances of harsh conditions, that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is the Soul Self. This ecstasy may help to motivate you to continue your studies.

Now suppose that you are experiencing negative realities within your current life. Should you attempt these explorations of your other Simultaneous Lives? Generally, I would suggest that you first gain some mastery over the exercises and conduct the various experiments I have outlines in my last two blog series.

DIVINE KNOWLEDGE

We often use the phrase in these new Blog messages, “I am not telling you something you do not already know.” This is a statement of fact. We are merely reminding you the Blog Reader of that knowledge you have acquired in your many voyages into physical form. This information on the nature of reality and the use of energy, you first brought with you from your existence in non physical reality, before your “physical” birth into the human body. Now this knowledge also is a part of your FUTURE heritage, if you may understand this conundrum of mine.

Perhaps a better way to describe the relearning phenomenon in which your are engaged is this… bleedthroughs – the perceptual breakthroughs of your current self into other Simultaneous Lives – occur throughout your waking and dreaming periods. These are learning “field trips” in which your current conscious perception tunes-in on one or more of your past, other current or future lives. That is a function of the multitasking Soul Self as you awaken to your multidimensional experiencing. This is the acquiring of the Divine Knowledge we constantly refer to in these Blog writings.

On a basic level, you already know this material. That is why it seems so familiar to you. That is why it seems so true. You have perfected this system in your numerous future incarnations, again in your familiar terms, assuming the linear time illusion that is favored in our dimension. And so you see, I use the phrase “this you already know” as a device to hopefully trigger memories here. The little bleedthroughs that you experience I hope will keep you motivated enough to continue the voyage with us. These are tools the nonphysical beings use as we attempt to educate humanity. The phrase is a deep and empowered one, a profound suggestion. However, just accept it playfully and see where it leads you. This phrase may help you to wake-up to your greater reality.

BLACK MAGICIANS OF ATLANTIS

QUESTION: If there were not the emotional complexes of hatred and anger in the consciousness of the Atlanteans, does this mean that the claims of some researchers that “Black Magicians” from Atlantis were instrumental in the down fall of the civilization and these beings currently exert an influence upon our world cultures are not true?

These effects of negativity are the results of the activities of the Negative Entities. These Entities exist out of time, they reside off of the space time continuum. In this way these influences are felt within any peoples, from whatever past, present, of future timeframe you are describing, when the human individuals recreate within their mental environments the negative states. Our media have named these Entities the Black Magicians of Atlantis, apparently, however, these Entities have also gone by the name Annunaki, as in our previous descriptions, and by, as I said , the multitude of names relating to the negative gods and goddesses, spirits, ghosts and what have you. It is all the same energy, however. The imagination of the individual marks this perceived energy with the particular attributes and characteristics of familial, tribal, country, world personalizations of these energy gestalts.

The Black Magicians of Atlantis, then, were inspired, enlivened, empowered by the same energy that drives the personifications of the devil gods, the goddesses of destruction, and so on, within our religions. It is all the same energy. It is all a part of All That Is – the great consciousness Entity exhibiting itself within physical reality through the activities of human and other beings.

Now with regards to the comments on anger, hatred, and the like.

I refer to our discussion of the best case scenario, the ideal of the individual, the society as a whole, the world culture, that exists within the pre-manifestation domains as a potential for those involved. You Dorian and your colleagues in physical reality exist within your collectives, of whatever type and stripe. You and your friend create your ongoing relationship according to Gestalts of Consciousness within your consciousness representing all of the “good” AND the “bad” that life has to offer.

Here, the good may be described as Loving appreciation for your friend, shall we say, and the bad may be described as thoughts and feelings of anger, denial, fear, and so on. These Gestalts of Consciousness assist the human in the creation of realities on all levels within all collectives. Your relationship, Dear Blog Reader, if it is of a wholesome Loving nature, reflects your reliance on these “good” aspects of consciousness.

Now if your relationship was one of hatred, constant negativity in thought and emotion and behavior, you might be said to be focusing on the negative Gestalts of Consciousness in your reality creations with regards to relationships. In the BIG relationships of society, country, global collectives, then, you also have your collective reliance on different Gestalt of Consciousnesses– negative, positive or somewhere in between, and of course these influences fluctuate throughout time.

PUNISHMENT?

Now there are times for us, as a researcher and a learner of Lessons, when you may seem to be engaged in ardently co-creating your reality in a very responsible fashion. We are “doing everything right,” let us say, and diligently attending to the transformation of Negative Emotions into their divine opposites. We are doing so very well in this endeavor that you perhaps feels as though you should be rewarded in some way, feeling that the Powers That Be could “have mercy” on you, so that you might relax and enjoy yourself for a period of time. Yet let us say that you still continue to experience a challenging existence with a series of quite negative events serving to “drive home” this harsh reality.

“Am I being singled out for punishment,” you might ask yourself. Now we must at times such as these, revert back to first principles. You create your own reality. If you are feeling victimized, you are ultimately the tormentor. If you are in the midst of painful, negative personal dramas, you are ultimately the director, the producer and also the cast of these dramas. You are composed of many personality aspects within your Personal Reality ego/intellect. But your greater personality of Higher Consciousness also participates through a lending of energy to the “dramatic flow” of the events in your life. In this way, you are the whole – the cosmos – an you are also the individual living component of the whole. I believe I must elaborate further on this phenomenon for your ULTIMATE understanding.

The reason that you sense a familiarity in the scenes of your everyday life, as is all of the characters in these daily dramas of yours are your “relations,” is that everyone you meet and interact with moment-to-moment is indeed your relation. The relevant aspects of your Higher Self are reflected through these other personalities relative to the learning of your individual, Soul Family and Entity Lessons. Naturally there would be a familiarity in this dance of synchronicity you know as physical reality. You act in concert, then, at any one time and all of the time, with your cohorts, keeping your appointments with “perfect strangers,” to enact your behaviors in the quest for Value Fulfillment. We shall have more to say on this phenomenon in our forthcoming Blogs on the Soul Family.

THIS IS YOUR LIFE

This is your life, you see. This dramatic and sometimes comedic performance in Earthly flesh is your life, for which you have PURPOSEFULLY incarnated. You are experiencing both the positive and the negative life has to offer. Yes it is true that you inevitably age and die, perhaps being subject to much pain and suffering; yet there is also joy in these sequential moments of your life. With the proper attitude you may even experience your suffering moments in what can be described as “joyful appreciation.” This may be difficult to comprehend for some of us. Let us have an example of how this paradox of feeling and behavior might be experienced by any one of us as we go about our meaningful lives.

As we awaken to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension, we will gradually become more aware of our Simultaneous Lives. Within these lives we are living the brand spectrum of existence. Thus, as we retain memories of a life lived within a society as a tortured being who daily subjected to painful living experiences, we may compare this life with our current existence in the modern world. Do you see how we might experience a sense of joyful appreciation for our current life? Relative to other lives we are living in the midst of great pain and suffering, our current existence may be regarded as joyful and complete.

WISDOM LESSONS AND CHOICE

We always have a choice, Dear Blog reader. The great question for you as a physical being is this: when you awaken to your true reality, will you choose to create your life of Lessons consciously, or will you try to escape? Many of you well know what I am saying in these paragraphs, for you are well on your way to awakening fully. Yet some of you may look on these new Blogs of mine with the all too critical eye of the ego. Fear, cynicism, competition rule the roost of the ego. I would ask you to pull back from this type of scrutiny and attempt to use the perspective of the “awakened one.” The heart is open as anger is transmuted into Loving Understanding. Fear is turned to Courage and faith.

The awakened or enlightened human may choose to be creative with the creation of events within their own reality. You may postpone the event of your physical death, for example, and undergo The Transition at a later date, perhaps learning more and gaining the Divine Knowledge from these additional months or years of living experience.

TWO- STEP ACTIVITY

This is how our Third-Dimensional system was “set up.” It is an arena for the experiencing of Negative Emotions. However, eventually we must face this aspect of our personality. We each are called upon to address the negative thoughts within our mental sphere and the negative events in our existence and the Negative Emotions that “appear” to be caused by the negative events. Briefly, it is a matter of addressing the negative in our momentary experiencing and “owning” it. The awakening human recognizes their responsibility in the creation of negative realities.

Wisdom Lessons, then, refer to this two-step activity. First the researcher, through experimentation and analysis in the laboratory that is the Personal Reality, arrives at Findings specific to their Life Lessons. These Findings may have been “hidden from view” for many years. They represent the hard truth of the developing personality over time. None of us are perfect. The human in physical incarnation may strive for protection, but that state of being is reserved for other dimensional-experiences.

So the truth is made known through experimentation. What we have been denying is revealed to us in all of its harsh and intense glory. Now what does the awakening human do with this information? In our system the method is clear: with the developing skills of creating Loving Understanding and Courage out of anger, denial and fear, the researcher transforms the difficult material into its divine opposite.

Now this Loving Understanding entails acceptance of the negative Findings on all levels of creaturehood. We are responsible, as I have said in earlier Blogs. We are the creator of our world and the events within our world. Accepting our responsibility for our creations is the necessary first step here. The second step entails understanding and gaining of wisdom of Divine Insight. This is accomplished by allowing the Soul Self to perceive our world. The ego/intellect is gently placed to the side and the Higher Consciousness is brought through the portal of creation – the Ajna center directly between the eyes. This may be accomplished by mediatizing or visualizing the Divine as coming through our physical body construct. We will naturally create our own imagery, thought and emotion for this exercise. Throughout the new material I have given many techniques to accomplish this.

LESSONS OF NEGATIVITY

In this Blog we shall hopefully provide you with the opportunity to address the most pressing and important Lessons for you in your current existence. Now truly ALL of your Lessons are “wisdom” Lessons, in that we experience Soul Evolution when you are engaged in learning these Lessons.

So that the gaining of prosperity within a life of perceived lack and poverty, may be considered the gaining of wisdom, as well as the facing of perceived extremely difficult, traumatic material from your past may be considered the gaining of wisdom. However, in this material we will attempt to provide you with the motivation you require to do what you must do in facing your most difficult Lessons – the Lessons of Negativity, pain and suffering.

For I trust you would agree that the positive Lessons – of Love, of experiencing prosperity, of developing friendships – need much less motivation for the average human to engage in and “do the homework” required, than do the Lessons of Negativity. The Lessons of Love will take care of themselves over time. Whereas with the Lessons of Negativity, the primary reason we have not yet learned these Lessons is that we are indeed avoiding them.

FACING THE MUSIC

The Lessons of negativity can be faced now. We have the tools to deal with these Lessons. Now this is the way that it works for us with all types of behaviors: whatever elicits the perception of satisfaction or happiness is pursued relentlessly. Whatever seems to create the Negative Emotions is most usually avoided. There, of course, exceptions to this rule in every life. We have noted previously in this material the tendency for the “depressed” person to create Reality Constructs that perpetuate the state of depression, as though there were a certain muted satisfaction in depression.

Generally, however, the negative states are avoided by lost of us. For example: this is particularly true in the developed nations as we call ourselves. We are certainly “developed” in so far as access to material wealth is concerned. However, it is the rest of the world’s peoples who have the edge in matters of spiritual understanding, spiritual wealth. In the developed countries we are easily diverted from spiritual considerations by the many objects of mass consumption made available to us through our shopping centers, for example, through our mass media, and so on.

You Dear Blog Reader, are easily diverted in the moment by these requests from our creators of ” shiny things.” We are easily distracted for we are “waiting for an excuse” to avoid our Lessons. As we have suggested in these Blogs, like children, many of us would rather not consider our Lessons in physical or psychological pain, we buy something to “make ourselves feel better.”

As we know, it is the adrenaline and other substances released in our body that creates this “feeling better” state of consciousness. Over time we become dependent on this satisfied emotional state and you may find oneself purchasing more than we need or can afford to keep “happy.” The Lessons of Negativity are thus avoided.

WISDOM LESSONS

Harsh Conditions

Those that are experiencing these harsh conditions – that they have chosen these lives. Also, we are reminding that they may be on the end of their incarnational trajectories, and may be headed for the higher realms. This may be a good motivation for some to begin using our techniques to transform the negativity they are experiencing into Courage and Loving Understanding. This Soul work is necessary before one may progress to the higher-dimensional realms.

GAMBLING WITH THE GUIDES

HYPOTHESIS: You may use the advice of your guides in games of chance.

With regards to availing yourself of the assistance of your Guides in matters of prosperity, monetary increase and the like, I must present to you this fact of existence: although you may certainly ask your guides for “divine guidance” as to what are the winning lottery numbers, or what are the winning machines at the casino, and so on, you still remain within the matrix of probabilities in your Reality Creation activities. This matrix includes the casino itself, if I may use this example, and everything in the casino.

Now let us use an example in a particular form of gambling here, to further this disclaimer. In this example, the subject is accessing their Guides while they are engaged in placing bets on the numbers of a roulette wheel game in a normal casino somewhere, in one of our gambling capitals in the U.S.A., in Europe or elsewhere. Let us say that the Guides are doing their best in assisting the student’s experiment in Prosperity-Creation and they are presenting possible winning numbers into the mental environment of the student telepathically.

As you know, there are innumerable probable permutations of events possible within each successive moment of the existence of this theoretical student. Additionally, the outcome of any roll of the dice or spin of the ball in these matters is not known and identified in “bedrock reality,” as we say, until the very last microsecond of the activity of the dice, the ball or the card in any particular instance. The outcome of any gambling event, then, is a cooperative effort human, every machine, every cubic foot of space, every piece of furniture within that casino.

Also, it is important to remember that each of us in physical reality, in whatever Reality Creation activities are involved, are doing so for the learning of particular Lessons. Our Guides are not allowed to present information to us that would interfere with the learning of these Lessons. Let me say that if you are to attempt these experiments in Prosperity Creation, that you first examine your issues with regards to prosperity – the monetary Lessons that you are to learn while in your current body in your current timeframe.

Now if you are to conduct your Prosperity Creation experiments in the field, you will have previously committed the particulars of this experiment to memory. You will also have done your belief work and your “homework” regarding Lessons for this lifetime concerning abundance. Because you will be out in the world conducting your research, it will be necessary to have perfected conducting the Ritual Sanctuary and the creation of the Trance State while in public.

This experiment is concerned with prophecy. You shall be predicting the momentary actives of the elements in a game of chance. Let us assume you are in a public setting somewhere, engaged in this game.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Enter your relaxed state and enter your Trance State. Now conduct your experiment of calling in your Guides. All of these preparatory activities can be an internal process for you, without any outward signs. As in our experiments, it may be wise to assume the playful attitude of a child in these endeavors. And overly-serious attitude may short-circuit the intuitive processes.

Now call upon your Inner senses, if entirely appropriate, to reveal that information you may require to “win.” To accomplish this, you might project your Auric Vision out onto the gaming table and allow your Inner Senses to create a visual representation of the winning numbers, cards, and so on. If you are oriented to sound, perhaps you could ask your Guides to whisper to you the information required. Whatever sensory input you are comfortable with, arrange for your Prosperity Guides and perhaps your Energy Personality to feed to you this information at the appropriate times.

The researcher may expect varying levels of good fortune – positive Reality Creation – to be made manifest in this experiment. You are challenging the “laws” of chance. Any wins beyond these laws, therefore, are an indication that you are on the right track. When you are successful, remember the state of consciousness you embodied immediately prior to the win and reproduce that state as best you can toward future wins. This game of chance is indeed a game. Have fun with it, just as I have suggested you have fun also in the creation of your life in the other domains.

FINDINGS – Remember for future reference the feeling tones and states of consciousness that signal a winning game.

CONSULTING YOUR PROSPEROUS SELVES

HYPOTHESIS: You can receive advice from your future and probable selves.

Let us assume that you currently experiencing lack in some area of your life. Now the idea of lack is tied to a veritable field of multidimensional negative experiencing. Not only are you experiencing lack in your current Reincarnational Existence, then you are connected to these other lives so that each of the personalities experiencing these lives will sense their negative states of consciousness within yours

Fortunately, within your Simultaneous Lives, including your probable existences, there are also those who are experiencing the opposite of lack – abundance. You shall attempt to contact these lives in your meditations in order to gather information on how you may also create abundance within your own current life. It is a form of sharing within a family, in a manner of speaking, a family of consciousness. And just as you might in your current existence ask for and receive advice from an uncle or cousin on how to invest your money wisely, you may inquire on the subtle levels what your other lives are doing to create abundance.

If you have been with us in these Blogs of ours, trying out some of the exercises and at least attempting some of the experiments, by now you will have gained some glimpses into the unknown reality – the world inhabited by your Multidimensional Counterparts throughout space and time. For you this experiment may reveal information that will quicken your journey, as you look to expand your vistas of perception. If you are just joining us in these esoteric pursuits, this experiment may strike you as rather preposterous, entirely too farfetched to even consider attempting. I urge you to make the effort in spite of your doubt, in spite of your inexperience. You may be pleasantly surprised.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax your body and enter a fairly deep Trance State. The object in this experiment is to seek contact with your Simultaneous Lives and probable existences that are experiencing abundance. With this goal as the focus of your intent – your Divine Will – simply reflect on these words as you go deeper and deeper in your meditation. Now you are guided by your Intent here. The consciousness will naturally make those changes necessary to allow contact with the Souls experiencing abundance. It may be best not to force the issue. Trying too hard – attempting to direct the flow of energy – may be counterproductive. Let the mind wander, in other words. Remember, there is an assumption in these investigations that you are being watched over by nonphysical beings. You will be guided to your destination of you will only “go with the flow” of consciousness.

You know what an abundant feeling “feels like.” As you perceive with your Inner Senses the mental environments of your lives as they express these positive emotions, go toward these emotional expressions. Feelings of Courage and Loving Understanding may arise here. Confidence and self-assurance my be readily discernible. If you are sensing these emotional tones, you may be assured that you are on the right track. If you wish to go further with this exploration, ask for names and dates of these other lives. Go as far as you wish in your investigations seeking “proof” that you are making these connections. Return to full sensory awareness when you sense that you are done.

The information you requested in Trance may come to you in the form of impulses, as you go about your waking reality, just as we have suggested in our previous Blog Series. Might I suggest that the emotional tones that “carry” these impulses into your awareness are of the abundant, prosperous variety? That is how you will be able to identify their origin. A always, use your free will to either ignore or act on these impulses.

FINDINGS – Document impulses you have received from your other lives as a result of these enquiries.

PROSPERITY TALK

HYPOTHESIS: Positive suggestions help to create prosperous realities.

As you may now be well advanced in your achieving of the Trance State, through participating in the exercises in this Blog, we will simply present this experiment as one of self-conditioning or self-hypnosis through reading positive affirmative statements or listening to recorded positive suggestions while in Trance. As we have discussed earlier in this Blog Series, your beliefs and their emotional underpinnings may be more readily accessible than you might think. After all, your beliefs are busy nonstop creating (on a subconscious level) your perceived reality. With the approach that this is not hard to do, it is possible to expect the Idea Constructs supporting your beliefs to be there in your mental environment, observable indeed, without attending years of therapy.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

The preliminary work entails an exploration of the consciousness, seeking out those thoughts, images and emotional content that support the beliefs. Enter alight Trance and with pen and paper or through talking into a recorder, you might spontaneously have a discussion with yourself on what are the problematic beliefs. Document what first comes to your mind and go from there. There is an underlying assumption here that your Inner Self is primed to reveal this information to you. Your Soul Self is well aware of this voyage of yours and is undoubtedly waiting to assist you. Simply take down what this aspect of your consciousness is trying to tell you. Document without censoring. You may analyze later.

Come Back To Full Sensory Awareness.

After this initial stage of information gathering is complete, consider the opposites of the problematic beliefs or a positive adaptation of the beliefs and write them down or record these suggestions for playback. Enter your Trance State again and either read the suggestions to yourself or listen to the playback on your recorder.

For example: In your belief work you may have discovered that you have a circular inner comment that is consistently voicing the opinion of someone from your past: “You are stupid. You will never succeed.” Using our technique for revising this unfortunate comment without any true conviction behind it, you see – we might create the following; “You have a strong natural intelligence. A successful life awaits you.” You could then inscribe several different permutations of this message on a paper to read while in a light Trance. Or you could read the various suggestions into your recorder for playback while in a deeper Trance. The object here, which may seem obvious to you now, is to instill the positive suggestions into the mental awareness over time, until the historical comment is supplanted by the improved positive suggestions.

FINDINGS – Document in some form your belief work and your attempts to supplant problematic beliefs with positive suggestions.

BELIEF REVISION-3

Your beliefs have created the precise level of lack that you are experiencing. Your existence is a direct result of your Reality Creation activities according to beliefs that you hold. Any example of poverty or lack within your Personal Reality, therefore, can be traced back to a specific Idea Construct that you perceive as being quite true. In The Healing Regimen we presented an experiment in belief adaptation. In this new regimen we will present a similar experiment with a different focus.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Assume your Trance State through your preferred method. Now you are relaxed. Now you are focused on searching for “causes” within your mental environment for the lack you are experiencing. These causes are your beliefs, however you may wish to visualize this concept. What does a belief represent to you, in so far as symbols, feelings, sensations of various types are concerned? Again, it is often the case that the first thing that comes to mind may hold the most information. Your Inner Self is attempting to tell you something, you see, to reveal something of value to you. The information may be quite complex in construction, as in a profound revelation – an epiphany – or quite simple, as in a fleeting emotion of some kind.

For example: suppose that your first thought within the Trance State was the statement, “This is not going to work,” and what if this statement operates as a powerful loop – a rumination – within your consciousness. If this were the case, do you see how difficult it might be for you to approach these studies and experimentation and be successful to any degree? Now this is an extremely common first discovery for the explorer of nonphysical reality. This simple Idea Construct is quite powerful in its simplicity, when it is looped, you see, when it is repeated incessantly within the mental environment. It has the power to adversely affect the Reality Creation activities on all levels, not merely the financial.

Now what if you were to revise the phrase somewhat: “That may work.” Now there is hope. Now there is the opportunity for change. Here in this experiment, using your Intent, what we are referring to as Divine Will, you alter the negative rumination – the substance of negative belief – to make room for hope and opportunity. “This may work. This Spiritual Prosperity Program may work.” This is a positive rumination that may assist you in the creation of positive realities. As you witness your improving reality, your beliefs about what is possible are changed. You are opening up. You are accepting the possiblity of positive change in you world.

TIME TRAVEL

We covered Time Travel in my past Blog series. Now I shall add to that material in relation to the Atlantis civilization. The truth is, what we would call Time Travel was a common occurrence in the great civilizations of our perceived past. There are reasons for this, having to do with issues of shared spirituality, an appreciation for the natural forces of nature, and a cosmology shared by the people that allowed and even nurtured the exploring of non-physical reality. None of these features are shared by great numbers of us in our modern time frame. That is why Time Travel, for the most part, is thought of as an impossibility: a joke.

The Atlantean researchers of non-physical reality perfected the spinning of crystalline structures into vehicles. The researchers would, as we said, place themselves within the structure and allow their Inner Senses to be amplified and tuned by the crystal mass. In this way, the Intention of the researcher to visit a particular time frame was made manifest within their own mental environment. You may also compare this activity to the sacred voyages of Shamans and other seekers of visions in our many world cultures. The effects are the same here. The technologies are different, that is all.

READING THE EMOTIONAL BODY

HYPOTHESIS: The emotional body displays the causes and remedies of lack.

In this experiment you will use your Inner Sense of sight, your Auric Vision, to perceive the emotional elements within your consciousness that prevent you from experiencing The Abundant Universe. This vision of your emotional issues relative to prosperity may take the form of a dramatic vignette displayed for you as you close your eyes to relax.

Within this dramatic presentation you may witness, for example, a replay of an event from your perceived past, in which you experienced disempowerment in some form. Perhaps you were robbed by a bully when you were a child. Perhaps as adult had suggested to you that you would never be successful in your life, that you were “not good with money” or “irresponsible.”

The communication stream from your inner world may take the form of a narrative, perhaps a rumination of a series of words or sentences. The focus here is on “causes” of present lack in your reality, and so you may remember words and phrases that portray you as, in some way, incompetent or unable to ever succeed. You may have a sudden feeling of distaste, or fear, or other Negative Emotion that acts as a catalyst, allowing you to go deeper in your exploration to the roots of your current less-than-satisfactory life condition.

As in our previous investigations in this Research Project, the vision may have elements other than sight, i.e. smell, taste, hearing. And again, please be prepared to face some difficult material – ideas and images you may have kept undercover for many years.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax your physical body in the way that most pleases you. Close your eyes and breathe deeply for a few moments. Remember that the vision of the emotional issues may be perceived as existing within the torso of your body, within the heart region. The focus here is on causes, most probably from your past, of present financial insecurity. These are emotional injuries sustained during difficult Lessons learned usually in childhood in your current and your other lives. In your current life, these Negative Emotions have sustained themselves over time, preventing you from experiencing The Abundant Universe that is your birthright.

You may re-experience a specific event that occurred in your perceived past that represented a break from your innocent childhood experiencing and marked a new trajectory of development for you as a maturing “socialized” human. Perhaps you may view that point where you gave up some of your Reality Creation energies to authority figures: parent, teacher, relative. The feeling tone of your experiences will help you to determine where to go with this experiment. Ask for direction from your Guides. Use your Inner Senses as a compass. Your intuition will guide you if you are clear and persistent.

FINDINGS – Immediately document in some way your experiences with reading The Emotional Body.

CALLING IN YOUR SPIRIT GUIDES

HYPOTHESIS: The non-physical beings may assist in the Spiritual Prosperity Program.

Can you see that you are pursuing these studies for a purpose? You are well into this description of the Spiritual Prosperity Program. I believe it is safe to say that you are concerned about the level of prosperity that you are currently experiencing. In other words, in the nomenclature of this teaching, one of your Lessons for your current existence might well be to investigate the possibilities for increasing abundance in your life.

Now you may have been drawn to this new Blog material for a variety of reasons. But can you accept the possibility that perhaps the main reason is that you were “prompted” from within to look at the new Blog material. If you can accept this premise, then perhaps you may take it one step further, and admit the possibility that you are already in touch with non-physical beings.

Inner prompting are often communications from non-physical beings. Whether you believe that it was you guide who has prompted you, or another Spirit Guide, or simply your individual human consciousness – the amalgam of “conversations” between you and your Reincarnational Existences – do you see that you are possibly already quite well along on your path of belief change? Many of the exercises, experiments and techniques in the new material are for the express purpose of belief change in the Blog Reader. Your belief in a non-physical reality populated by Beings of Light and other Gestalts of Consciousness is a prerequisite for our continued growth as a Soul.

There are specific non-physical beings available within your mental environment that may be enlisted in the achievement of Spiritual Prosperity. You may refer to these Light Bodies as Prosperity Guides, if you wish. They are specially gifted beings that have served as financial advisors to humanity. The Crystal Light Messengers. They exist just outside of our Earthly realm as Fifth-Dimensional Beings. Simply have the Intent that you will contact your Prosperity Guides while in your times of meditation within your sacred state of Sanctuary. Then you will meet with success.

The researcher may also use the Energy Personality and other Helpers in this program. Now this is assuming you have already made these connections. If you have not, please simply ” pretend” that you have made these connections and then conduct the following experiment.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax you body. Attain your Trance State. Here we are “opening the gates.” you might say, to your divine consciousness. Now you are protected; you are in your state of Sanctuary. As you open the gates you are doing so with the security that comes with divine protection. The Negative Emotions have no place here. Only the Divine is made manifest under of an opening gate or other portal, visualize your assistants in attaining prosperity and abundance crossing the threshold and coming into your awareness.

The non-physical beings of whatever stripe and purpose, emit Light according to the conditions of their particular existences. Vibration, you see, is their calling card. It is with your Inner Senses, also, that you may distinguish one Guide from another, procure their names, ask what services they offer, and so on. Use your Inner Senses in the Best way that suits you for this purpose.

Reality Face Virtual Wire Rack Mask Psyche

This experiment may take just a few minutes. As we have stated elsewhere, your Guides are Literally on the threshold of your awareness, waiting to be acknowledged. Now some of my Blog Readers are perhaps unaware of how easily this is done. They are expecting something difficult to accomplish. They are therefore quite surprised when they encounter one or more of these diving Guides on just the most cursory of exploratory voyages. So I suggest to you that you approach this experiment as one that is easily done. Here you are a child, you see, having some fun with your imagination. When you are done having fun with your nonphysical associates, give yourself the suggestion to return to full sensory awareness in Third-Dimensional Reality.

FINDINGS – Document the names of your Guides and the service they offer.

COLLABORATING WITH SOUL FAMILY MEMBERS

Hypothesis: You may manage soul family relationships in the Trance State.

We have stated before in these new Blogs series, that each and every human being that you meet – including the delivery person and the teller at the local bank – is in your life at the moment to teach you something. Many of the more intense relationships you create with these humans are Soul Family connections. Of this broad group of humans who are within your field of experiencing to interact with you in the learning of Lessons regarding the acquisition of money and the perception of the Abundant Universe.

This statement may bring to mind events from your own life in which you were quite intrigued with the good fortune that came your way, at hands of one of these mysterious extended family members. Or perhaps you were “taken for a ride” by one of your acquaintances, and relieved of some of your hard-earned money. Either way, you were learning Lessons from Soul Family members. These interactions often have an element of Fate attached to them, as though they were “meant to be,” to coin a phrase from our New Agers. However, as you know, you and your colleagues are making it happen. You are just currently unaware of the intricacies of this cooperative effort.

The perspective of experiencing Lessons from within a broad collective called the Soul Family can be learned. I suggest you conduct the following experiment with the idea that you are already embodying this perspective.

PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

The first step here would be to identify those Soul Family members who may act as partners in the realization of abundance you require. Using your Inner Senses you may home-in on these personalities in your times of meditation. Some you may have already identified within your field of experiencing as potential allies. This is a form of communicating with the Energy Personality of another. You will be identifying specific characteristics of personality and Soul that will assist you in creating good fortune within the lives of all of you, everyone benefits, you see.

Now this group may be small in number or it may be quite Large. Either way, you will be working with these humans on the subtle levels. You might think of yourself as the business manager of this assembly, and you are working with their High Selves for mutually beneficial purposes. This is you Intent. You are grounded in your sense of Divine Will to communicate your interests to these humans via their Spirit Guides – their Energy Personalities. If EP of the Soul Family member resists, do not press further. You are not to force yourself on others in any way. This is a sacred form of communication. If you meet with resistance, move on to another potential partner. In the mundane world, there may be no signs that you are interacting with these people in any special fashion. “Business as usual,” as we say. However, do note the attainment of group goals that could have never been realized had these secret connections not been made.

FINDINGS – Document the establishment of connections with Soul Family members and the realization of Soul Family goal in matters of abundance.

PERCEIVING AND CREATING THE ABUNDANT UNIVERSE

Hypothesis: We may tune-in the abundant universe

Perception creates reality in the Third Dimension. When you visualize and embody The Abundant Universe, you are CREATING and SUSTAINING this Gestalt of Consciousness. You are withdrawing from this template of creation, the highly personalized elements in the form of Conscious Units that you require to create the reality of abundance within your Personal Reality Field. You can’t help yourself, you see. Your thoughts are composed of Conscious Units. All Consciousness seeks manifestation of itself. By simply thinking of something you lend your efforts towards creating it.

Now we each have our idealized view of the perfect world. You know quite well what objects, what types of people, and what behaviors would exist in this world. For your own reasons, however, you choose not to put your energies towards manifesting The Abundant Universe. As I have said to you, your “reasons” for doing something or not doing something in your life – the denials. The intellectualization – serve to aid you in encountering and experiencing your Lessons.

For example: consider a human that finds themselves within a precious financial situation. All is lost financially for whatever reasons in physical reality. Additionally, this human makes matters worse by continually blaming themselves for the financial loss. It is a personal issue. They feel as though they have failed personally as well as financially.

Now this negative assessment of the Personal Reality, as you may remember, serves to perpetuate it. The person is trying all of the domains of existence into one know. They are in effect saying, “I have failed financially because I am a failure personally. I am a bad person, an undeserving person.” The entire existence is colored with this negative assessment.

How does this person perceive and create The Abundant Universe under these drastic conditions? Remember, this is an unconscious process. If you wish to this Gestalt of Consciousness that is your personalized Abundant Universe, then you must go to the unconscious and explore. It would be wise to use the emotionally neutral state of Trance. In the Trance State the subject may gain a broader view of the life and the conditions of existence. The Agenda of negative Reality Creation is easily interrupted by the Trance. The opportunity for introducing changes into the reality creation strategies is made available.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Attain your Trance State. If you are in your quiet meditation area, relax your body, breathe deeply, rest upon the floor or do whatever behaviors assist you in creating the Trance. If you are out in the world, you may, as we have suggested in the last Blog, tie the attainment of the Trance State to a gesture such as snapping the fingers, rubbing a good-luck piece or whatever suits you.

In this experiment we will assist the researcher in withdrawing from the negative reality of lack and “waking up” in The Abundant Universe. This has a distinctly magical quality to it.

As you are resting comfortably, out in the world or in your meditation area in your home, within your Trance State, embody the perception of entering the Gestalt of Consciousness we are calling The Abundant Universe in this Blog. A playful approach here may be best. As child would, imagine yourself in your inner world, coming into a kingdom, perhaps, in which all of the desired Reality Constructs that populate your personalized Abundant Universe are displayed. You are venturing out and away from your normal world to visit this inner world where the outer world is created.

As we have suggested in our other experiments in using the Trance State, the information stream may be sensed in various ways. The Gestalt of Consciousness may present itself to you “full blown” as in an intense, multisensory visionary experience. Or you may get your “glimpse” of this idealized state as though you were receiving a Holographic Insert or other inspirational missive from the nonphysical world. You may hear sounds and voices that represent abundance and good fortune for you personally. You may also simply experience a “good feeling,” a pervasive sensation of grace, a feeling that all is well with you in your world.

As you receive you data, note the information for documenting later, then proceed to go deeper into you relaxed state and uncover more Findings. Typically, because the emotions experienced in perceiving The Abundant Universe are so positive, you will be motivated to continue your explorations. When you feel as though you have enough information from the session, return to full sensory awareness of Third Dimensional Reality, bringing with you The Abundant Universe that you have perceived/created into existence on the subtle levels. If you are out and about, on a park bench let us say, snap your fingers, rub your good-luck piece. If you are indoors in your meditation area, give yourself the suggestion that you will return to your normal awareness with the full memories of The Abundant Universe intact.

FINDINGS – Document your findings.

THE METAPHORICAL TOOLS-2

Of course you may use all of the Metaphorical Tools we have described in our series of new Blogs. An Important addition you might consider is the creation of The Well of Good Fortune, or some other metaphor tailored to your own sensitive. Here the object is to call your symbols of wealth, good fortune, havingness, and combine them into one powerful image, phrase, song, object or what have you.

Give the Metaphorical Tool a fitting name. Empower it with your thoughts and your limitless energies. In my example, you might empower with your energies a visualized well, perhaps somewhere in a beautiful forest. Within this well is the abundance and good fortune you desire. Going to The Well of Good Fortune, then, might be a simple matter of imagining yourself entering a forest, observing The Well, and visualizing the desired Reality Constructs coming up and out of the well, perhaps as you turn the crank. The Metaphorical Tools are easy to create. They are most effective when you can feed them your divine energy. Personalize these tools and make them your own.

The Radio Dial Metaphor may also be ably used in Spiritual Prosperity. Just as you perhaps used this tool to tune-in the healing elements and tune-out the disease-producing Gestalts of Consciousnesses in The Healing Regimen, here you may use your Radio Dial to tune-in on the impulses from your Simultaneous Lives, for example, that seek to direct your vision toward The Abundant Universe. You would then, at the same time, tune-out the impulses and influences from Negative Entities, other existences that are experiencing lack and those Negative Emotions that hamper your attainment of Spiritual Prosperity.

Now for some experimentation in Spiritual Prosperity.

SUSPENDING DISBELIEF

The technique of suspending disbelief will assist you in creating further moments of prosperity after you are successful in creating a “glimpse” of The Abundant Universe. For example: suppose you have completed your investigative work, you have gone within to examine your personal conceptualization of The Abundant Universe. Your idea of abundance, for the time being, might involve, perhaps, receiving an unexpected windfall, a sum of money, several hundred dollars let us say, in the mail. Now you have done your work here. You have attached Love to all of your though-forms. You have magically anticipated this gift and now you are witnessing the manifestation.

At the moment of realization, when you connect the windfall to your Spiritual Prosperity behaviors and thoughts depending on your “issues” – self-image. Experiencing of Negative Emotions – you may find it difficult or quite easy TO ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY for this creative work. If you have doubts and ascribe the gift to coincidence, you diminish your power in the moment. However, if you confidently express your gratitude, Loving Understanding and Courage in that moment, you are adding to your powers of manifestation. You are suspending disbelief – the negative assessment of the act of manifestation – for just the moment. Then you would successively suspend disbelief in your growing powers, moment-to-moment in the “future.”

Suspending disbelief is a form of silencing the internal censor – that aspect of your consciousness that wishes to keep you entranced in the certain of status quo realities. Over time, this voice will be replaced by the encouraging message from Beings of Light – your Guides who seek to assist you in expanding your awareness.

VOTING WITH THE POCKETBOOK

Let me digress on this point… it is ALL LOVE, Dear Blog Reader. Even the millionaire banker, then, is created from Love. Yet us just say for the sake of argument, that the banker is war profiteer. Through supporting armament manufacturers or the military, this banker prospers from death, hatred, war. “What good,” you might ask, “does my Loving construct do in this context? “Vote with your pocketbook,” by selecting the most appropriate, Loving and peaceful institutions with which to do business, and then doing business with these institutions .

In this way, you are supporting, on both the physical and the metaphysical levels, the fulfillment of positive values. This takes research, of course. This activity may be thought of as the assessment of the Personal Reality Field with regards to the financial or business aspects of your life. Where will you put the Loving and Courageous energies of your being? From what institutions will you withhold your creative energies? Again, this is all about allying with select Gestalts of Consciousness, Entities, Beings of Light. This is conscious co-creation.

TRUE GIVING

As I suggested our practice of giving to worthy causes only when we may claim a deduction from our taxes, is not Giving in truest sense. This is not the magical act of that we are teaching in this new material. To be honest, it is a sad form of money exchange, this corporate giving that is celebrated in our world. Many of us who give in this fashion expect something in return. Whether it is a tax deduction, God’s grace or simply the good karma that is so valued by the modern human, something is expected in return for the giving. Might I state it bluntly here? We taint this process with our bargaining. In Giving there are only the communication streams of Beings of Light. There is only the transformation of Light into something else. There is no bargaining.

I believe it might help us to think of our Giving of our money, our time, our Loving Understanding to others is simply the transformation of our Light Energy into what is needed by the recipient of the Giving. From this perspective, you may envision the immediate transformation of our gift of Light into what is desired, what is required by the receiver. In this context, the recipient uses their Reality Creation energies to collaborate with us on the subtle levels in the co-creation of the necessary constructs.

Take for example here my previous description of the children in our poor undeveloped countries. I am not suggesting that we refuse the tax deduction we “deserve” for contributing to their cause – though that would indeed demonstrate our commitment to true Giving – but please try attaching your powerful Light energies to the gift when we do make our donations for the purchase of food, medical care, and so on. And remember, Dear Blog Reader, there is no pity here in this true reality of the Soul. We are equals on the subtle levels, equals who are merely learning different Lessons. Do not give because you feel sorry for the other; give because you acknowledge the opportunity to endorse the Courage of another.

It may help you to think of oneself as a Light Body in this exercise. I am a Being of Light. You are a Being of Light. On the etheric levels, within the Telepathic Network, we both have equal powers. We communicate with one another instantaneously. We observe the instantaneous manifestation of our thought-forms. We are in the Third Dimension and we have a perception of a lag-time in manifestation. However, this is merely a perception. Your reality is my reality at its base. Our holographic messages are received INSTANTLY by the recipient. On the etheric plane, the recipient IMMEDIATELY benefits from our Loving and Courageous act of imbuing our transmissions with these creative energies.

Now if you are coming from a perception of lack, it is quite true that on the physical reality level, it appears that we are giving up our resources, our money, our personal property. However, as I said, the Soul Self of each of us engaged in the interaction know quite definitely that this is not the case. As the Soul Self of the cashier at the market, for example, receive the energy from our transmission as we hand them our payment for our food products, our higher Self receives an influx of beneficial energy from them. Now on the physical plane, all that we may notice is a slight knowing smile on the face of the cashier. This is our cue, however, that our thought-form is manifesting.

TRANSMITTER OF LOVE

Here then is the secret. You will receive what you transmit, for you will be a transmitter of Love. The student attaches Love and positive emotion energy to all thought-forms that are transmitted within their mental environment. In mundane matters of daily living, then, while you pay your bills, you are attaching Love to them with your thoughts. While you work at your job, you are sending out thought-forms of Love to your colleagues and to customers. While you interact with your family and friends, you are sending thought-forms of Love into their mental environments of Love to all concerned with no expectation of receiving anything in return. This is a form of giving it all away, is it not?

As you are also, as a researcher, a student of your own self-development, interpreting each of your experienced moments in positive Loving ways – as best you can, of course, perhaps you have not yet achieved perfection in this technique – you will be contributing to the experiencing of positive realities with this divine perspective.

The mental construct, the thought-energy hologram we are calling Giving It All Away, is based in Love and Courage. With every transmission – for example, donating to your causes – you attach the holographic Idea Construct. This attachment powers the thought-form on the subtle levels. As my Holographic Inserts to us in the Third Dimension serve to enlighten and inform us, in same way, your transmission of these thought-forms attached to your mundane behaviors may serve to enlighten, empower and PROSPER the recipients. It is all energy, once again. It is all Light Energy in the form of the Consciousness Units.

GIVING IT ALL AWAY-TECHNIQUE

Troubled by the assertion that to be truly successful and to truly perceive and create The Abundant Universe, the student must, in the final analysis, “give it all away.” To be sure, at first glance, this statement seems to imply that you will lose everything that you have worked for in the Spiritual Prosperity Program. Certainly, if you give your wealth or material possessions to others, you no longer have possession of them. You are without them. How does one put food on the table or pay bills if what is received is continually given away to others – individuals and collectives. These are earnest and excellent questions to ask. In answering them, please allow me to pass on to you, Dear Blog Reader, another fact of life for you in physical existence.

Now others before me have stated this bluntly, so this is certainly not something that you do not already know.

YOU RECEIVE WHAT YOU TRANSMIT.

In terms of energy – Light energy, which is, as we have stated earlier, the “Stuff” of all created realities – you get what you give. There is a popular aphorism that applies here, “What goes around come around,” The statement implies, I believe, that there is a type of karmic balancing dynamic that occurs within the lives of humans. My Blog readers know my feelings on karma and the Eastern theory of Reality Creation. I believe it is quite correct to a degree. ” Let me explain… you live your lives all at once, within the spacious moment, the eternal moment that exists NOW. Your lives are certainly not sequential, for there is no such thing as linear time in the experiencing of the Soul, your true reality.

Now as you are within this Moment Point possibly sensing your connection to your lives past, present and future, you are receiving energy to these lives. Additionally, at this moment, let us say that you are also receiving energy from and transmitting energy to COUNTLESS humans within our Consensus Reality. You are also NOW quite naturally transmitting energy to and receiving energy from the many elemental forms within your Personal Reality.

What does Light energy have to do with The Abundant Universe and giving it all away? Let us go back to my earlier discussions of conscious Units. Greatly simplified, this Light energy is the medium for the Reality Creation project. Let us say that Light holds within it the potencies and potentialities of all of our essential metaphors in our theory of Reality Creation. Now you may remember that the Conscious Units are electromagnetic. As they assemble into Gestalts of Consciousness, they do so according to energies of attraction and repulsion: like with like, yet opposites assemble within the whole as counterparts to their opposites, and so on. This is the organizing principle of life. I have already described to you how All That Is – essentially Love in action – creates realities that are not Love, that are the opposites indeed of Love. In this way Reality Creation evolves, differentiates along every conceivable avenue of development. It is just this way with Light, my friend; the Love Light of All That Is.

DISTRACTING THE EGO/INTELLECT

We have suggested that we are an expert at distracting the ego/intellect from an examination of our life Lessons. Now we shall examine how we may distract our consciousness from the recreation of lack to the Divine – to a creation and perception of The Abundant Universe.

For our example here, let us say that you are currently addressing an issue of responding to financial events with fear. You may receive in your daily mail a notice that you are behind in paying a bill of some kind. As you read the stern warning, perhaps you are reminded of instances in the past when you failed to meet your financial obligations and were punished in some way. Because these negative memories are so rich in emotional intensity, you may be swept away for a few moments as you literally travel to the moment in time to experience the negative fear-producing emotions. This is a simple example of Astral travel. You have been triggered by the receipt of the bill to go back in time for a re-experiencing of what we might term “financial worry.”

Now let us devise a response to receiving the bill that will assist in the creation of positive realities rather than the continuation of negatives. The trick here is to awaken in the moment so that you may have conscious control IN the current moment. This you would possibly open the bill, read the stern warning, and before your subconscious can take you back in time for a reliving of the negative states of financial worry, you exert awareness of your current Moment Point. When you are established in the moment, at the second of recognition of the negative, fear-producing material, you imagine a positive outcome. This is best done by remembering positive outcomes of the past. Using your Intention, you distract your ego/intellect from responding unconsciously to the fear-producing material.

The negative historical data can be quite persuasive, so you must persevere in this moment. You might remind your self that you are existing in tandem with the Divine – with All That Is – and that there is an incoming message to be received. Then you would imagine with full sensory awareness your receiving sums of money, for instance, enabling you to meet your financial obligations.

This imaginative construct exists in your current moment, therefore, and in your future also as it is manifest enabling you to pay your bill, yet it is based on a positive financial event that occurred in your past. It may be advantageous for you to “mine” your perceived past for these positive financial experiences, no matter how small or insignificant they may at first appear. The emotional tone is what is important here. The idea of the Divine, prosperity and The Abundant Universe are the most important features.

The feeling of contentment and abundance you felt when your caregiver gave you a quarter to buy some candy when you were a child becomes an important reference point for you in these experiments. You are recreating these positive feelings of hope, faith etc. IN THE CURRENT MOMENT. You will then “push” the positive moments into the future as you embody the positive state of consciousness – abundance – moment-to-moment. This is easily done. And I specifically suggest you turn to your childhood experiences for the positive states of consciousness, for it was as a child that you most probably first experienced using your powerful imagination to create those things you desired.

CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENT AS BACK ENGINEERING

I may help you to think of this activity as a form of back engineering your Reality Constructs in the immediate aftermath of their creation. Let me stand upon my soapbox for just a moment… we exist in linear time in the Third Dimension. This is the appearance of a reality that unfolds one moment after another. We create our own reality, and as such we have undoubtedly created Both prosperous moment and moments of lack.

In Consecutive Positive Assessment for this Spiritual Prosperity, then, you would, upon experiencing a moment of prosperous reality creation – receiving good financial news in a phone conversation, for example – contemplate the thought reality activities YOU YOURSELF used previously to create the prosperous moment. This information may come to you as an emotional tone, a feeling. You may receive an image from childhood, perhaps, a positive picture that epitomizes for you prosperity, abundance.

Again, we create our reality from ideas, images, emotions entertained within our consciousness at any one time. Within this matrix of possibilities lie the precise energies and methods for creating this prosperous moment we are describing. All of us have the potential to recreate the conditions for the experiencing of the prosperous moment, and then “remember” how we did so for future reference.

However, there may be roadblocks here that you find that “assist” us in avoiding the prosperous , moment. These are the ideas and images and ruminations of our personal consciousness that have effectively kept us from the level of Prosperity Creation we desire or believe we deserve. To use our terms here: Consciousness Units energized by these potent thoughts of lack, create Reality Constructs in the form of events, physical objects, behaviors we witness and embody that perpetuate the level of lack we are experiencing.

What do you then do in the moment, Dear Blog Reader? I suggest you persevere, and in the following moments in the best way you can, attempt to assess your sequential moments of experiencing in positive ways, DESPITE the lapse into negative thinking. True, you may have a period of time using this technique, when you feel that it is not doing much good for you. The abundant Universe seems quite far away. Then you continue on your own program of picking up where you left off, continually taking up the challenge to again begin the creation of the prosperous moment. You will get quite good at it over time if you take the time to practice this technique.

CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENT AND LESSONS

Now let me explain to you this CPA from a slightly different perspective than the one I used in the Healing regimen. Here I am asking you to address the Lesson demonstrated within each successive moment in linear time. What does that moment offer you in the way of learning? How may you experience Loving Understanding and courage as the result of your assessment of that moment in time? This may sound difficult to accomplish, but it is merely a matter of practice until it becomes habit. You could say that what you are accomplishing here is the creation of the virtues of humankind within the moment as a result of your research INTO the moment.

CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENT- TECHNIQUE

Truly ALL of our exercises, techniques and experiments are designed to allow you to wake up in the moment. However, this technique of Consecutive Positive Assessment we are presenting as your primary toll for this awakening. It is something that is easily learned and fun to do. The skills you acquire when practicing CPA will serve you well in your awakening on all levels of understanding.

You consecutively create each and every one of your moments in Third-Dimensional Reality. Though the creative/perspective powers of your Inner Senses, you create and then perceive the moments of your existence. With our Consecutive Positive Assessment technique, then, you will be interpreting each of your experienced moments in a positive fashion. Something good will emerge from all of your activities. You will see the positive wherever you look.

MONEY ISSUES

Your money issues – your prosperity issues – are in essence emotional issues. Are you satisfied with your “station” in life, what you have achieved financially, materially? Your emotional responses, ongoing, to your life events, strictly determine to what degree and in what form The Abundant Universe manifests in you Personal Reality field. Remember, recreation of your status quo reality is unconscious. In the case of money matters, your emotional subconscious responses to the events in your life are the determine factors in your continuing level of havingness. For this reason, waking up IN THE MOMENT is the prescription for achieving Spiritual Prosperity.

FOUNDATIONAL STATEMENT

The Foundational Statement is quite important here The Blueprint for the Spiritual Prosperity Program would require a statement of purpose. This statement may include words and phrasing that present the plan for your prosperous attainment in symbolic and emotional terms. For example: let us imagine the day-to-day life of a human, a woman or a man who is just getting by financially. This person is employed at a job that certainly does not fulfill them emotionally or artistically. The job must be kept, however, to allow the bills to be paid and paid on time.

What would a prosperous life, a life of scared abundance, look like and feel like to this human? Let us approach this analysis from a perspective of Lessons, as we often do in this new blog material. Suppose that this human is learning specific Lessons regarding the ceding of power their powers of Reality Creation in the hands of heir empoyer. May we suggest that matters of self-worth enter here also? With the ceding of powers to others, the self-worth is automatically diminished.

In fact, in this example, let us assume that each workday in the life of this individual is a reminder to them that they are powerless and that they face a future of continuing powerlessness. My first questions to you would be, “Where is the Soul’s Intent here?” Where is the spirit of this human?” Now obviously, the spirit is not too brightly lit here. Perhaps they are too occupied with grieving over the lost life, that they do not hear the voices of spirit that call to them within their mental environment. If this person were to articulate their dilemma in a few succinct and symbolic words, they might say:

I desire to dream a dream of satisfying occupation that brings me financial rewards beyond mere survival. Abundance!

Do you see how this human yearns for a vision of a better life, a better world for themselves? They desire a dream, perhaps because they are not experiencing pleasant, creative dreaming in their private or business lives. They do indeed require a vision, a vision from spirit, perhaps, that may inspire them and give them a sense of direction and purpose. Of course, your Foundational Statement will be concerned with your own issues and Lessons regarding prosperity. Think about these issues a few moments.

Write down your Foundational Statement here:

THE BLUEPRINT

You are preparing to create a positive reality of abundance. It would be a good idea to create a personalized program for the attainment of this goal. As you practice the suggested Techniques and as you conduct the Experiments that follow, you will quite naturally develop your own plan. Some of these Suggestions I offer you may work better for you than others. By all mean, implement the workable Suggestions. Leave the Techniques that may be too difficult for you at this time to another day. At the end of this Blog Series you will find the necessary work pages for you to develop your personal Blueprint.

DEFINITION OF SPIRITUAL PROSPERITY

The Spiritual Prosperity Program is a cooperative effort between the practitioner and the Guides in a diagnosis of The Emotional Body. A Blueprint is then made for the creation of a positive reality called Prosperity. Rituals of Prosperity are then performed with the application of the various techniques and experiments. The continued application of the Ritual of Prosperity until the manifestation becomes habitual, creates a positive reality that will sustain itself over time.

LACK CONTINUED

I have just suggested that the human experiencing an absence of havingness has quite probably experienced emotional distress within the domains of personal power and authority. These injuries occur within the Simultaneous Lives and are re-experienced by the human via impulses sent to them from these lives. The human that acts upon these suggestions will create more unfortunate experiences in their ongoing life. Over time, the state of consciousness we are referring to as lack “solidifies” as the recreation of states of lack becomes habitual. It seems there is no hope here. The subject may feel they were born to be poor, to be without. Like depression, the entire field of the Personal reality is colored by these negative conditions. And in a reciprocal fashion, the outer environment reflects the inner state of emotional injury.

We create our own reality, you see. We have effectively created a belief in the inevitability of poverty. You have created poverty through the template of this belief. Because the emotional tone of lack is pervasive in the Personal Reality Field, you habitually will choose only those thoughts, images, behaviors that will recreate the status quo. Thus lack endures.

I have painted a bleak picture , Dear Blog reader. Now I shall present some Techniques and Experiments that will assist you in your Spiritual Prosperity Program, at whatever level of lack you find yourself.

Perception of lack

The key emotional support that the human brings to prevent the clear perception of The Abundant Universe is LACK. The perception of lack, emotionally experienced over time, creates and sustains the state of consciousness called poverty. In those who create lives of “just getting by,” this emotional tone is somewhat pronounced. In those who create lives of abject poverty, it is pervasive. The emotional Idea Construct of lack is the electromagnetic core to which the varying Reality Constructs that compose the Personal Reality of the human experiencing poverty are attracted. Briefly, if you see lack wherever you look, you are conceiving and perpetuating lack wherever you go.

Now before we continue with this explanation, please allow me to explain again the process of the Soul Self as it creates a life of Lessons. Thus far, my description of the self-created reality of poverty may seem to be quite heartless, a matter of ” blaming the victim.” After all, how does one explain the many innocent children living in famine-afflicted countries? How can I possibly suggest that these children CHOSE their current existences? Dear Blog Reader, remember that the Soul Self sends a fragment of itself into the body of the baby and then creates Lessons without guilt or other Negative emotions. Also, on deep levels of understanding, the baby also knows and accepts the conditions of the coming life. Yes, it is dramatic, the hundreds of thousands of humans who die under these miserable conditions. Yet that is the point here. The Soul is dramatizing for the Entity and All That Is, as well as the subject, these difficult Lessons.

Again, without generalizing too much here, I can tell you that many of these short lives are experienced by Souls who have reached the end of their incarnations of Earth. They are ready for the peaceful and Loving realities of other systems. They are quite enthused about “going out of the loop,” in a sense, with a great flourish – the short, dramatic existence of a child in a poor country, let us say, who seems to be truly a victim. In the greater perspective of the Soul Self, it is just opposite. These children are creating their lives through great bravery and Loving Acceptance. They are not victims.

RELIGIOUS CONDITIONING AND FAITH

Dear Blog Reader, I believe that a spiritual practice of prosperity is necessary to assist those in need of reconciling their religious or spiritual beliefs with their desires for material wealth. Within this spiritual practice of abundance it is perfectly “OK” to entertain thoughts of acquiring material possessions, engaging in desired behaviors with other humans, and so on. However, these thoughts or visualizations will be created within a different mental environment that you may be used to. For is it not true that there may be a lingering doubt that you may be engaging in desperation and foolishness, or worse yet, “the work of the devil” – the sin of avarice – may have held you back in your efforts at manifesting abundance. It is true, that in matters of conscious co-creation, the focus must be steady and unswerving with an element of hopeful expectation powering the exercise.

So faith enters the discussion, Here I would ask you to drop any negative connotations that you may have attached to the word faith. When we suggest you embody the state of faith, we would hope that no symbols or emotions, will be recalled that will keep you away from what you are attempting to create. Some examples of these counterproductive ideas are: fear of punishment by religious figures, thoughts that faith is a religious concept of empowered spirituality here. As in other experiments and exercises in this new material, we are asking you to change your beliefs and ideas about what is possible. In this case, the object that is Loving, accepting, Courageous.

Perhaps a short example may help you. Consider the bird, the rock, the tree, the mountain. Do they worry what the future will brings? I suggest they do not. All of these quite conscious elements LIVE within the moment, experiencing the existence as providing all that is required. The human, on the other hand, complicates matters in the matter of existence and brings fear, worry and doubt into the equation.

Let us say then that our faith, our trust, our hope in this theory of Reality Creation, is in essence the simple Loving expectation, in the moment, of consciousness. We may even go so far as to say that the human embodying this faith we are describing, is utilizing within the moment, the creative potencies of All That Is. Now the human would do well to emulate the bird, the rock, the tree in this embodying of faith. Look around you and see how the various living and “inert” compositions are sustained within the moment. The future and the past do not sustained within the moment. The future and the past do not exist. There is only the current moment of existence for consciousness.

PROSPERITY AND SIMULTANEOUS LIVES

Now all of us are on Earth to learn a literal lifetime of Lessons, The Lessons of value, abundance, money are often related to matters of authority, SELF– worth and personal power. We might say that the person experiencing a lifetime of lack has most probably experienced emotional injuries in these domains, certainly in the current existence, and also in other Simultaneous Lives. In this way, all perceived negative conditions are truly systemic, representing a focus by the Soul Self on the injurious Gestalt of Consciousness lending their creative energy and direction to the creation of the negative conditions in all of the participating Reincarnational Existences. It is indeed a group effort here, as it is in all matters of the individual human experiencing their Lessons – positive or negative – in any particular lifetime.

An example of this multidimensional group effort is in order. Imagine a Soul Self, an Entity composed of, shall we say, several thousand Simultaneous Lives, as well as innumerable probable existences. Each of these Selves, additionally, is unaware of the others. They are each individually living as suppose that of these many lives, a small percentage is experiencing what we call “Wealth” or a perception of The Abundant Universe. To simply, let us say that the remaining lives are experiencing less than favorable conditions. Now the lives experiencing lack “support” one another on the subtle levels via the Telepathic Network. Through impulses received telepathically from their fellow impoverished selves, the poor ones are given instruction and advice, in a sense, on how to create an impoverished existence. Now this is how it works under all circumstances for us in our world. As I said, you and all of your lives are learning Lessons. You support one another in learning your Lessons via these impulses sent and received on the subtle levels.

In these matters of the Soul Self and the learning of Lessons there is no judgment. There is no experiencing of the emotional complex of guilt on these levels of interaction. The Soul Self has a mandate, we might say, that is emotion-free, to assist in the creation of the reincarnational dramas and comedies for the Simultaneous Lives. It is the individual lives themselves that bring the emotional element into the mix for learning purposes.

Example of value fulfillment

Now my concept of Value Fulfillment enters here, as you might well expect. Money has value, I am sure you will agree. Yet please allow me to describe for you the “spiritual” basis of this value. An example for illustration: Dave receives a check from one of his blog readers in exchange for an item. When Dave takes the check in his hands from the envelope, he experiences an emotional response. These emotions may run the gamut from positive to negative depending on the context, the conditions of existence, you see. Remember, it is a process of creating realities from emotional states of consciousness, this Third-Dimensional existence. The emotions of Dave, and indeed of all of us, vary and degree throughout our waking hours. This is quite obvious to us I am sure.

Now let us say that our subject is perceiving through the perspective of The Abundant Universe, he is also strengthening this perspective through his appreciation and gratitude in the moment. Remember that in the Moment Point we are “priming the pump” with positive images and ideas that will set the stage for further demonstrations of The Abundant Universe in our perceived future. The creation of this positive reality of The Abundant Universe is becoming habitual.

On the other hand, just for the sake of argument, suppose for a moment that our subject is not necessarily perceiving from a grateful, magical, abundant perspective. Suppose that, moments before opening the envelope containing the check, he had an encounter with someone that “caused” him to become anxious, fearful, angry. These Negative emotions, further let us say, combine within his psyche to create a potent quite toxic brew of ingratitude and disdain that will color his Reality Creation efforts, as least for the short term – for the next few minutes of hours. You may possibly guess what might be the result of our subject’s opening the envelope containing the check. Certainly we might not expect gratitude or an appreciation of the magical nature of the Universe. Most probably we may expect a less than healthy response from him, for he has set himself up to create negative realities by succumbing to the energies of negativity.

Thirdly, may we take it for granted that our subject IS learning Lessons of gratitude, acceptance and the other virtues of humankind? If we may, let us also assume that he is actively involved in learning these Lessons consciously and has identified the negative GOC(Gestalt of Consciousness) resident in his psyche, one we might call Ingratitude. Knowing that he has the power to “change his mind” with his Intent, he uses his Divine Will to create Loving Understanding and Courage out of anxiety, fearfulness and anger. thus, upon opening the envelope and observing the check, he is well-prepared to experience gratitude, perceive The Abundant Universe and perhaps marvel at the magical nature of Reality Creation.

In the first case, our subject is appreciating the value of the magical aspect of money creation. In the second case, he is concerned with experiencing the value of Negative Emotions and those realities created through these emotions. In the third case he is experiencing the value of empowerment that comes with awakening in the moment to his Reality Creation agenda, and then using his powers of creation to change that agenda. In all cases, he is learning SPIRITUAL Lessons that will add to the experiencing of his Entity and All That Is.

The Abundant Universe

The Abundant Universe exists, as does any other potent GOC, (Gestalt of consciousness) as a holographic entity within our collective consciousness. Both past and future memorized of this state are released in ecstatic dreaming. Our myths of paradise and our stories of the Garden of Eden and other highly idealized Utopian constructs, are fragments of this GOC that serve to remind us of how pleasant physical reality can be. We feel a great sense of longing when engaged in these visionary activities, as though a priceless element of existence has been lost forever. This, however, is OVER-dramatizing the issue. The Abundant Universe is there before us, where it always is, where it has always been, in our terms. The perceptual blinders we are calling the Negative Emotions serve to block our view of this paradise.

We have used terms such as calcification, hardening of the vision, etc. to explain the process of the human creating the self-imposed “blindness” within the personal consciousness. Knowing this. I am certain that you may grasp the simplicity of succeeding in this enterprise Spiritual Prosperity. It is a matter of waking-up to our true reality. It is a matter of facing our Lessons with Courage and Loving Understanding. It is a matter or remembering paradise and then recreating it in the moment.

Gestalt of Consciousness and Prosperity

Prosperity, The Abundant Universe, havingness are all simply “states of mind.” They are also Gestalts of Consciousness as we have defined the term in this Blog. As Consciousness Units are manipulated by consciousness over the millennia in the creation of realities, templates of creation are “agreed upon” to serve as the blueprint for the creation of Reality Constructs of all types. Those states of consciousness that we may call “poverty” and “just getting by,” serve as the blueprints for self – The Soul Self – to create an ongoing less-than-prosperous life.

This may appear to you as overly simplified. Dear Blog Reader, it truly is quite simple. This is the basic dynamic of Reality Creation in the Third Dimension. I have also referred to this act of creation as a matter of “alliance” with Entities of various kinds. It is all the same here. Reality creation occurs at the point where our Intention, our focus, our consciousness, our spirit meets the Third Dimension. Period.

Do you notice how matters of worthiness and guilt do NOT enter into this discussion of the basics of manifestation? The human being in the throes of feeling unworthy, of feeling guilty, of feeling cursed interjects these Negative Emotions into the blueprints of the Reality Creation project. This could be our current existence, for example. AS the human degrades, in a sense, this basic template of creation, the GOC (Gestalt of Consciousness) we are calling The Abundant Universe is transformed over time into one that creates a life of “just getting by” or even one of “abject poverty.”

The Abundant Universe is our baseline reality. We are born within The Abundant Universe. Over time we have a tendency to make this GOC “our own” by personalizing it with our Negative Emotions. We do this for purposes of dramatizing our Lessons in physical reality. We are aided by members of our Soul Family in this endeavor. Our main task in creating Spiritual Prosperity is to work with our Soul Family to perceive and create The Abundant Universe.

SPIRITUAL PROSPERITY

We have titled this section of the Series of Blogs Spiritual Prosperity to again challenge your beliefs about what is and is not spiritual. Everything is literally made of spirit. Everything in our world is spiritual, therefore. Spirit is Light. Spirit is energy. We are on the Earth currently to learn how to use energy to create our world in an improved fashion. From this premise we shall move forward.

Our Spiritual Prosperity Program will allow you to transform your beliefs and ideas about abundance. If you are experiencing a lack of necessities, you will be empowered to alter your perspective in a necessary fashion to reveal The Abundant Universe. Now this Abundant Universe is always there for you to experience. It is a probable manifestation from the field of limitless probabilities before you.

Your focus upon the positive elements within your field of perception is the path to creating and experiencing The Abundant Universe. You may remember this as the Consecutive Positive Assessments technique from the last Blog. In the Spiritual Prosperity Program we shall avail ourselves of the techniques and experiments used in The Healing Regimen

THE BLUEPRINT

The Blueprint consists of the studious application of the Ritual of Healing, the Techniques and your personal Findings to the issue at hand.

CPA – Consecutive Positive Assessment
DTEI- Distracting the Ego/Intellect
SD – Suspending Disbelief
MT – Metaphorical Tools
CIYG – Calling in Your Guides
RTEB – Reading The Emotional Body
BR- Belief Revision
HT- Healing Talk
CYFHS- Consulting Your Future Healed Self
CTP- Creating the Panacea

7 DAY CALENDAR

At the end of the day, assess on a scale of 1 to 7 your use of the Rituals and Techniques suggested in The Healing Regimen.

1 – Very little use 2 – Some Use 3 – Moderate Use 4 – Regular Use
5 – Consistent Use 6 – Concerted Use 7 – Very focused Use.

M T W T F S S

THE REGIMEN CONTINUES

You are required to learn your own Lessons in physical reality. The nonphysical beings are not permitted to interfere. Now this is why I must be rather vague in my presentation to you of these Ritual and Techniques. You are to work out the particulars on your own, and by so doing, gain the expertise and Value Fulfillment entailed in this project. Some of you will be satisfied to obtain modest results in this endeavor, while others will accept nothing less than “perfection.” These are your beliefs that determine “success” in this or any of our other projects. It is all a matter of your free will choice.

CREATING THE PANACEA

Hypothesis: You may empower anything with healing attributes.

You know that, beyond growing a new limb, there is nothing in your Personal Reality Field that cannot be changed provided you create the “conditions” for change that are required. Period. These conditions or requirements for manifestation are two fold: First – you require an intensity of desire and emotion that supersedes the level of emotion that creates and sustains the current reality. Second – your personal beliefs must expand to include the POSSIBILITY for the creation of the changes you wish to experience. The level of emotion that sustain or maintains your manifested reality within your Personal Reality Field may be thought of, for purposes of this explanation, as nominal or “just enough” to sustain your reality as you know it. This nominal output of emotional manifestation energy is an ongoing product of what you would term your “unconscious” or “subconscious.” You are not aware of it, in other words, as this creative energy stream does its work just beyond your field of awareness.

Now let us apply this theoretical concept to healing. As you know, Natural Healing is our term for the use of natural products – oils, water, empowered objects of various types – in the healing and balancing of the human body, that the application of these treatments to the various illnesses of the human body, need not be in a one-to-one correspondence. In other words, it is not necessary to use a specific malady. You need not seek out the specific curative. We have suggested that you have the power, within your creative consciousness, to imbue anything with the curative energy for the healing and balancing of the body. With this in mind, let us create an experiment in exploring the effects of the panacea.

Now a panacea is literally a cure-all. In our time it is often referred to in mythological terms, for our medical model cannot hold the concept of a cure-all within it.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax your body. Now the cure-all may be a physical product of some sort, as in an oil, water or perhaps a physical object such as a stone or artifact. It may also be visualized. As you enter your Intention to energize the panacea with curative powers. This panacea will be empowered with all of the healing energies resident within the Gestalt of Consciousness we are calling Spontaneous Healing. You are simply accepting the transmission of the energy flow from this Energy Body into your physical body. You will then, using your intention Again, direct the healing energy into the panacea for storage. This healing energy will not lose its potency while in the panacea. You may use your panacea in ways you see fit, to treat the malady.

You may sense this data bank of healing influences called Spontaneous Healing in any way you wish. Perhaps you will tune-in with your metaphorical Tools, guided by the Loving energies emitted by this Energy Body. Perhaps you will “travel” to this Gestalt of Consciousness in a metaphorical vehicle of some sort, or simply within the Astral Form, as you call it. The nonphysical body is always available for conveying your consciousness to any location in non physical and physical reality. Simply imagine it to be and it will be so.

FINDINGS – Document your successes and challenges in creating and using the panacea.

CONSULTING YOUR FUTURE HEALED SELF

Hypothesis: You can receive advice from your future healed self.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

This experiment would be a form of “back engineering.” For example: as you visit this future healed self, using your visualized transport, you might ask yourself, “What am I doing differently now that has perhaps helped me achieve this healed stat?” Make a list of what comes to mind. You are indeed in that moment of contact, receiving information from a probable future self that is experiencing a healed state. This information gathering may take the form of an informal interview. Have a list of questions prepared prior to the experiment. If you are sufficiently comfortable in Trance that you will not be distracted by reading your questions, have the questions available to refer to during the interview.

Now…. this is your most effective advisor, your future healed self. This information from your future self may take the form of nonsense. You may, for example, be advised to perform an absurd gesture, motion or such thing. This does not make sense to your third-Dimensional ego, for it may seem embarrassing, silly etc. If you feel that you are in contact with your Guides, that you are guided by them and you are in contact with your future healed self, my advice is to take the advice of this Energy Body. Perform the silly gesture. Do the embarrassing behavior. Obviously, we would not wish to harm anyone, including the practitioner, in taking this advice.

You may, using your Inner Senses, perceive this future healed self and you might ask questions of this self and receive the telepathic responses that you may integrate into your Healing Regimen. These responses may come in symbolic form. Again, using your intuitive faculties, interpret these messages and act on them or not. Of course you have free will here, as do you in all facets of your existence, and you may act accordingly.

FINDINGS – Write down the answers you are receiving or in another way document this information from your future self.

HEALING TALK

The suggestions you give yourself continuously, your “inner dialogue,” or whatever you wish to call this conversation, are indeed very influential in your co-creation of the Personal Reality Field. Everything is suggestion, you see. All is the work of Gestalt of Consciousness.

Let me digress… we have spoken at length in this Blog Series on the great value in “listening” to suggestions of your Loving Guides. These suggestions often take the form of positive thoughts, feelings and images sensed within your mental environment. It feels, at these times of contact, that you may be experiencing a divine intervention of sorts, for the experiences of the preceding moments may have been anything other than positive and Loving. Your preceding experiences may have been very negative and challenging. Perhaps what you have done then is you have put a call to your Guides to assist you in your Reality Creation, and they have done so. In this way, you have asked for assistance from your Guides and they have responded “right when you needed it most.”

Another way to experience this state of contact with the Divine in an ongoing manner, is to “plant” the positive suggestions within your consciousness purposely, so that over time you are training yourself to experience your world in a positive way, with continuous contact with the Divine. You then recreate your reality in a positive fashion. The creation of positive realities becomes habitual, replacing the habitual creation of negative or mundane realities. This purposeful guiding of the human mentally through speech is the basis of all our healing systems on our Earth. From the aboriginal shaman to our modern medicine practitioner, all have used Healing Talk for support in the healing process.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

This experiment is similar to the preceding one, with a subtle difference. Now relax your body using your preferred techniques. The products of your belief Revisioning are the affirmative statements you may use to counter the negative ruminations that support the creation of your mundane existence. Ideally you would have committed the affirmative statements or suggestions to memory. If not, have your suggestions written out on a piece of paper to read when you are at your preferred state of relaxation. The next step is to read your affirmative statements to yourself while you are in Trance, or perhaps record the statements for playback while you are in relaxed state. Over time, if you are diligent, the positive healing statements will supplant the negative ruminations that support the malady.

FINDINGS – Document your findings rigorously in creating Healing Talk that counters your negative ruminations.

BELIEF REVISION

HYPOTHESIS: Beliefs that support disease may adapt to support healing.

Every thought you entertain within your mental sphere seeks to create itself within the physical or other dimensions, according to the templates of your beliefs about what is possible. Your thoughts of creating a healed physical body, therefore, create your potentially healed body within Dimensional-Realms that exist in probability, just as your thoughts of disease and symptoms create your malady. As you continue to focus in your Ritual fashion upon the creation of manifestation templates with “energy” in the form of Consciousness Units. This ongoing energetic support serves to move the potential reality from the probable Dimensional-Realms into the physical Third Dimensions. As you witness your co-creation of healing, your beliefs will adapt to these astounding new perceptions. The probability of healing becomes possible and finally inevitable. Your beliefs may change from skeptical to ardently supportive in this process.

Knowing this, what do you suppose the healer “sees” when they first look upon the healing or balancing that is taking place within their own system? Now this can be rather tricky to describe and to comprehend. In this case, the healer would INTEND to observe a healing transformation within the biological system. As you know, all of physical reality is a product of consciousness. In the case of the healing of the body, mind or spirit it is precisely the same. Here, your attitude is very important. Your conscious Intent is the most important element in this proceeding. So that when you observe your emerging reality, let us say upon first awakening from sleep, your conscious Intent is that you are very naturally and easily co-creating your emerging reality according to the Blueprint of healing you have decided upon in this project.

As you matter the co-creation of your Personal Reality Field, and you bring conscious awareness to the task a hand, the essentially magical act of healing becomes internalized. Beyond a particular point, you need not even think about it, for it has become automatic. Your beliefs will adapt and you will become more certain of your skills in the creation of the healing moment. You are redefining the templates of creation by making the creation of the healing moment habitual.

Now… identify and list beliefs you feel may be contributing to the creation and perpetuation of the malady. This material may take the form of a narrative or simply a list of short declarative statements. When you feel you have something to work with in this experiment, consider the divine opposites of these statements or a positive counter to the narrative. Write them down next to each other.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

You are in your protected state. Using your Inner Senses, relax with your written material and occasionally read out loud or to your self the statements and their divine counterparts. Here your intent many be in support emotionally of the Malady-producing statement of beliefs. So you are making a declaration here that you are changing your beliefs. You are withdrawing the emotional charge, form the one, and you are empowering with your emotional energy the other – the health-creating and sustaining statements or beliefs. The positive suggestion of healthful support will become internalized allowing you to release the malady-creating beliefs. As this occurs you may find that your symptoms change to reflect the changing beliefs.

Disease and symptoms serve very specific purposes, you see. They are the direct reflection of interior processes. They are the physical expression of nonphysical concepts and images.

FINDINGS – Note your beliefs and their adaptations over time.

THE EMOTIONAL BODY

Hypothesis: The emotional body displays the causes and cures of all maladies.

Now let us attempt to “read” The Emotional Body. You will be attempting to assess, with your Auric Vision, the energy signatures of the various imbalances and cures inherent in the Auric Display.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

First, please attempt to embody a deep state of relaxation. You may accomplish this by focusing on your breathing for just a few moments. You may also stretch your body in your particular fashion that leads to relaxation and a focus on the inner world. Use whatever methods you have perfected in your experimentation.

Now what we are attempting here, as in all experimental research in this new Teaching of mine, is nothing less than the entering into Trance State. This state of consciousness is simply the mental environment of your Soul Self. Here you bridge the inner to the outer worlds with your awareness. You fine-tune the perceptive tools – your Inner Senses – with you Intention to achieve the precise focus of awareness that YOU require to accomplish your goals.

The perceived representation of The Emotional Body may encompass the majority of the physical body, but is centered, as I said, within the heart region The “reading” of The Emotional Body has a visual component, yet it may be a felt sensation, as in a sense of tingling or other energy signatures within your own body. You may also experience it as a “heard” vibrational message in manner of song. These sensing’s may come to you as images and full visions, possibly composed of personas or animals in various roles, acting out various scenes for your education and enjoyment. The dramatizations may be sensed on the inward eye, though the eyes may indeed be open. The visionary state permits these contradictions – feeling the pulse of visualized scenes of hearing the songs of manifested illnesses and their sources.

The Auric Vision is the Inner Sense representation to your mental awareness of the health issue in its totality. This potent Idea Construct or Gestalt of Consciousness exists as a holographic reference that contains everything you as the Healer require to diagnose and bring balance to your own body or the body of your subject. Each of you will sense and interpret this information in your individual ways.

This Auric Vision may come to you quite quickly, just as you enter your state of awareness, or it may take several minutes for you to focus on your Inner Senses and achieve a diagnosis and perceive possible cures. You may need to “sleep on it” and receive the bulk of the information in the dream state, for assessment, diagnosis and curative measures to be achieved on awakening. These are matters of the healing process. Do what serves best your needs or the needs of your subject.

SOME TECHNIQUES THAT MAY BE USEFUL:

Use your hands to fan around the body, “feeling” for any anomalies of energy vibration. You may do this literally, with your physical hands and make passes around your own body or the body of your subject, or you may do this in the visualized form, using your imagination.

Project your consciousness into your body or the body or your subject, to search from within it as a miniature explorer.

Listen to the narrative of subject and derive from these words, the messages from the Energy Bodies that will serve to direct you to the cause of the difficulties. This narrative may serve to bring to your mind a visual or other sensory dramatization that holds the diagnosis information in symbolic or literal form.

When you are working on your own healing, simply attempt to tune-in to your inner ruminations. These messages are the supports of the Gestalts of Consciousness we are calling disease process. Now also within this inner dialogue are messages from Beings of Light. These suggestions may have come from your future probable existences of from other Guides who are attempting to assist you in your Healing Journey. Simply put, here in this experiment you are tuning-in the healing states and tuning-out the Gestalts of Consciousness that support the disease.

Now illness is a Lesson that your Soul Self has “arranged” for you to experience in physical form, yet it is possible to heal yourself if you can learn the Lesson in other ways. For example: suppose on reading your Light Body you discover that the “reason” for your diabetes, is an imbalance in The Emotional Body. You are having difficulty accepting and processing “the sweetness that life has to offer.” This manifests as physical illness in a very literal way. You may heal yourself by learning how to accept and transmit the sweetness of life. You needn’t suffer unto death from the illness. So it is essential that the underlying “cause” of the malady be addressed or the difficulty may come back in another form, as in a physical, mental or spiritual malady of some sort. These are matters of belief revision. This subject will be explored next.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings from this ongoing experiment.

CALLING IN YOUR GUIDES

HYPOTHESIS: The non-physical beings may assist you in the healing regimen.

You may have already contacted your Guides, such as the Energy Personality and others to assist you. If you you have yet to create these relationships, I suggest that you continue with The Healing Regimen “as if” you were in contact and communication with your Guides. Let me elaborate for just a moment.

PART ONE:
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY
Consider your powerful imagination. Now the imagination is the great creative force in our system that assists us in our creation of Reality Constructs. The emotional energy that “fuels” this Reality construction, as I have stated, is based in Love, a very potent emotion. Now here in this instance, in our protected state of Sanctuary that we are experiencing, can you imagine with your great creative intelligence, a relationship with what you might call a Spirit Guide?

Can you sense the powerful current of Love and compassion that supports and sustains this relationship? Stay with this for a few moments. Images may come to mind for you, suggesting characters from your childhood, possibly representing “imaginary playmates.” Loving characters from your mythologies may appear in the mind’s eye. I suggest you go with the flow here, knowing that there is Loving intent, and envision your Guide into being.

Ask for the name of the Guide and it will come to you. The name may have a nonsensical quality to it or it may be rather mundane. Accept the name if you intuitively feel it is right. This is a preliminary exercise here. You are not seeking perfection, simply progress in this endeavor. Whatever comes to you in so far as name and appearance and emotional content is quite sufficient. Honor this process and accept what you are creating with All That Is in this moment.

This is simply a way for you to conduct the necessary behaviors and Idea Constructs into reality formations in the Third Dimension. You usually do not value something as real, unless a beginning, middle and end to it in your Physical reality. This is why your Guides, even though they are seeking your contact, do not suddenly appear to us “out of the blue.” Our guides do not wish to scare us, in other words. This is the beginning of the manifestation of your Guides into your Personality Reality Field, and in a sense, we will “believe them into existence.”

FINDINGS – Take a few moments to document your experiences in contacting your guides.

PART TWO:

The second part of this experiment deals with the calling in of your various Guides and Helpers, for those of you who have already established these relationships.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

You are in your state of Sanctuary. From this perspective it may be easy for you to envision your Guides as they appear on your mental screen perhaps, and what skills each may employ in assisting you in The Healing Regimen. Your Energy Personality, for example, may be asked to assist you in remembering that you are embarked upon a path of positive moment-to-moment assessments of your experiences. You might ask, that, should you lapse into the robotic trance or negative ruminations common to many of us in our system, we would be reminded, possible by some specific sensory cue from your Energy Personality, to awaken and proceed with the Rituals of Healing.

You may have specific Helpers that you rely upon in matters of healing and balance. I suggest you call them into assist you in day-to-day program of positive assessment and Reality Creation. The Guides may provide you with the ongoing Loving emotional energy required to sustain The Healing Regimen.

In essence, here you are attempting to create a divine state of consciousness long term. You are asking for the assistance of your divine Guides, and as they help you through each successive moment in The Healing Regimen, you will feel the beneficial energies and effects upon our physical body.

FINDINGS – As the project moves forward, document your experiences in assessing and utilizing your Guides.

THE METAPHORICAL TOOLS

It is within our power as co-creator with All That Is to use our Divine Will to create more appropriate realities for oneself. We may do this with the Metaphorical Tools of various types. In our Blogs on Soul evolution we described one such tool: the Radio Dial Metaphor. Let us again describe the activity of this magical dial. This is simply a visualized dial, possibly modeled on a dial we have seen on one of our radios or other electronic devices. By turning the physical radio dial, different radio frequencies are accessed and different radio stations are contacted. By turning the visualized dial on our visualized radio, the researcher “tune-in” to the Energy Bodies that compose non physical reality.

This is a Metaphorical Tool used in a ritual way. Time after time, as these connections and communications with Beings of Light are established, it becomes a habitual act. I might add, that it also becomes easier to make these connection, the more we use our Metaphorical Tools.

With the dial, for example, we may discover our Guides, learn their names, and consult with other Gestalts of Consciousness that may assist us. Through the use of this tool, using our Inner Senses in an Intentional way, we may safely observe and study the disease-producing Idea Constructs. With the Metaphorical Tools we create a “protective barrier” between our consciousness and the Idea Constructs that support the malady.

Of course we may use any Metaphorical Tools that we have already established for our use in our past experiments. Or we may develop our own set of tools to assist us in our project. So that we might create for our use a transportation device of our choosing, one that may take us to various locations in the past, present and future and in both the physical and nonphysical worlds. It is up to us to use our imagination to create tools that can serve our particular needs. Now let us begin the experimentation that will furnish us with data to create the Blueprint for The Healing Regimen.

SUSPENDING DISBELIEF

Another technique the researcher may use is the suspension of disbelief. This is the divine perspective that is necessary for us to CONTINUE to create moments of healing within our Personal Reality Field. When we first meet with success at creating a cessation of symptoms, for example, through our Healing Talk or other strategies, our rational mind will surely be amazed. If we are at that moment perceiving through the ego/intellect, we may “not believe our eyes, ” and ascribe the transformation to something other than our Divine Will. This may serve to short circuit the healing process. Doubt is interjected into the mix and so faith or courage becomes compromised. Rather I suggest that at the moment of cessation of symptoms, be joyous and amazed, knowing that we have succeeded in that moment with co-creating our reality with All That Is toward the healing of our body. There is a sense of humility we can muster here, and yet still marvel at our powers of manifestation. It is a balance we may achieve between humility and charisma, between supreme confidence and wishful thinking.

Dear Blog Reader, you are already expert at the suspension of disbelief. When you enjoy a book or a movie or other dramatic presentation, you are immersing yourself in the media and you are letting go of the skeptical aspect of your personality for the time being. As you create the story in you imagination that is suggested by the words in the book or the scenes in the movie or on the stage, you are submitting your inner self to the influences of the story. This you have done countless times, no doubt, when you were a child listening to fairy tales, for example. As well, you are continuing this tradition as an adult when you experience stories of any type. So this use of the imagination is a very natural one for you. It is the basis for all of your creative endeavors as human beings, including the very basic practice of Reality Creation.

TECHNIQUE – DISTRACTING THE EGO/INTELLECT

Our ego/intellect is an expert in the creation of status quo realities. It always begins its work on awakening after our sleeping times, whenever that might be. As we open our eyes, there is a tendency for the ego/intellect to take charge IMMEDIATELY. It is our job to remember that our regimen will begin or continue at that particular time, and circumvent the strategies of the ego/intellect to control our Reality Creation agendas.

We do this by distracting the ego/intellect. This is a divine distraction. We divert our attention from the mundane to the Divine. This is simply a personal reminder from our Soul Self that we are supported on a wave of ecstasy just below the surface of consciousness. We have described this feeling state in our last few Series of Blogs. We are supported; we are endorsed; we are Loved. We do not need to recreate the status quo reality of suffering, illness and other negative states. We may also use our Energy Personality and other Guides to help remind us of our Scared Quest in these moments.

However, if we are like most people, our ego/intellect will not enjoy these attempts to divert the manifestation energies toward the Divine. The ego/intellect may flood our consciousness with Negative Emotions, traumatic memories, reminders of financial peril etc. We may experience a sudden fear that we are taking these explorations too far, perhaps wandering into “the danger zone.”

Religious conditioning may serve to bring doubt to mind. We may feel that perhaps we should go to church soon or speak to a priest. Or course we may do these things. We have free will. But might I suggest that we are now acting as our own intermediary? We are bridging the physical and subtle realms with our awareness. Just as the magician, the shaman, the witch does, we are acting as our own intermediary between the physical and the Divine.

My advice, when you are experiencing these responses from the ego/intellect, is to intervene with your Intention, and possibly with the assistance of your Guides, and divert your attention back to the Divine. It is really just a matter of choice in the moment. We are choosing from the perspective of the Soul Self, a path of improved reality Creation.

FOUNDATIONAL STATEMENT

Let us proceed with the Techniques and Rituals that compose The Healing Regimen.

TECHNIQUE – CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENTS
The Healing Regimen is a continuous ritual enactment with the elements of our Consecutive Positive Assessments exercise embedded within it. In this exercise you attempt t interpret your moment-to-moment experiences in positive ways. Everything exists within the current moment. Everything that you need to support your Quest for Healing is available to you in your Point of Power, your current Moment Point, right now in this instance. So it is in the moment when you conduct your Ritual of Healing and when you see the results of these Techniques. In the moment is when you get to feel for the creation of successive moments of healing.

With this technique we are attempting to interpret each successive Moment Point as a divine opportunity for positive change. In my blogs we discussed in depth this technique of Consecutive Positive Assessments. Here let me simply state that it is up to you to create this perspective according to what works for you as an individual human, one with particular ways of behaving, one with a certain set of beliefs.

Now briefly, you will always have a choice, Dear Blog reader, regarding what you will experience in the moments of your waking life. You are the center of your world and the events that occur within your world. So you always have a choice and even a responsibility to make the proper decisions in your moment-to-moment existence to further your life.

You must be adequate, in other words, so that you may “live to live another day,” in a manner of speaking. Of course, beyond merely living there exists a state of being in which one excels, or develops or grow spiritually, intellectually, and so on. Here in this project, we maintain that to achieve relief from physical illness and the removal of symptoms, one may employ our Consciousness Personal Assessment exercise and “take charge” of the life. By assessing each moment as a joyous and educational experience, the researcher is reprogramming the psyche in a beneficial way. Positive belief change occurs over the long-term application of this technique. Positive realities are created in an intentional way.

Perhaps another example would help. Suppose that our theoretical subject, the human experiencing a disintegration of the musculature of their body, has obtained The Healing Regimen and is trying this Technique. There may be several days of false starts and disruptions of the program. Then one day there is begun a series of moments, perhaps lasting several minutes or even hours, when the subject is truly interpreting their moment-to-moment experiences in positive ways.

In this series of moments, let us say that the subject has perhaps burned the breakfast on the stove. Rather than sink into a depression or scream in anger at the stove, the subject continues to sing a favorite song. In the mental environment of this subject, you might say that the Negative Emotions do not find a place to establish themselves. The singing of the favorite song, perhaps a joyful song, prevents that manipulation of thought energy by the negative Emotions. The Consecutive Positive Assessments continue even as the song is being sung.

But let us suppose that the subject is then distracted, perhaps by the TV news program as it proclaims the latest tragedy to occur in a far away country. For a moment, the subject may feel a responsibility to the people involved in the tragedy to provide them with a compassionate moment of observation here, Unfortunately, as soon as our subject focuses on the television image, to express their compassion and understanding, the story is ended, and a commercial is run that encourages the viewer to buy products. At this point, the positive mental environment is disrupted. Thoughts relative to things to buy and products of various kinds prevail. The song ceases to be sung.

So the question arises in matters of techniques such as this: How can I possibly bring conscious awareness to each successive moment in my waking day?” The answer to that, of course, is that it may be difficult to achieve perfection in the assessment exercise. In your physical reality there are numerous diversions, as in our example. There are also natural lapses in consciousness that take you to other dimensions, as we have discussed in previous blogs. So practically here, I must say, that to the degree that you can accomplish this exercise, you will to that same degree experience positive changes in your Personal Reality Field – you will experience healing within your body, mind and spirit.

Fortunately, simple improvements are what we are marking progress in this endeavor. You will continuously change course, over the moments of your existence, making your simple improvements, until gradually you are experiencing the voyage as a positive habit of thought, feeling and manifestation.

THE BLUEPRINT

The creation of a structure begins with the drawing-up of a blueprint, illustrating the placement of the materials that will compose the structure. Our Reality construction of Healing begins with the creation of a Blueprint listing the Techniques, Rituals and Suggestions that we will use to create our Positive Reality. The Blueprint for the Reality Construction of healed bodily states is a “living” document, in that it will change from day to day as you gain information about yourself from your experimentation.

Initially it is necessary to create a potent statement of affirmation that you will build to create the Blueprint for The Healing Regimen. The statement should be only a few well-selected words that do indeed epitomize for you the project at hand. It should be a deeply personal and symbolic statement, to the fact that you are identifying as best you can current life issue in emotional terms. It’s extraordinary the lengths we go to for a ‘labor of love’. We happily make sacrifices, suffer hardships and turn away from temptations. We do everything within our power to prove ourselves to be worthy. We put ourselves through hell and high water because we feel such depths of emotion. Yet, we rarely go to such efforts for our own benefit. Is that because we don’t love ourselves enough? Ask yourself what you’d do to help someone who deserved the best. Everything in our created reality is founded in emotion, the emotion of Love. Our health issues are created as we are diverted from Love. With this in mind, we may create our affirmative statement in positive terms, expressing our simple desires with regards to the healing of body, mind and spirit.

An example may be in order here. Suppose a theoretical subject is experiencing the painful symptoms of a degenerative disease of the musculature of their body. Further, let us say that this subject has experienced a traumatic loss in their recent past. Perhaps a loved -one, such as the father or mother or other family member, has made their Transition in an abrupt manner, through a fast-acting illness that took them within a few weeks, or perhaps through an accident of some sort. Now these traumatic losses are always a surprise to the ego/intellect of those who are left behind. However, as we know, Souls choose the time of their departures as well as the circumstances, so the Souls of the departed know that they are merely keeping their appointments in this way.

Yet even though our theoretical subject also knows on a Soul level that their loved-one has simply transferred their energy to the Home Dimension, they are experiencing a Lesson here. The ego/intellect is shocked, outraged, set into a tailspin, so to speak. The grief and other emotions that are triggered by the sudden death serve to take this subject into their Underworld, where they will experience instructional vignettes that illustrate the true nature of the event in a context of the Soul Family. If the subject may literally bring to a halt their Soul’s progression. This cessation of spiritual growth and fulfillment may result in the outward manifestation of this stasis – the atrophy of the musculature of the body.

As you may have noticed, the symptoms and illnesses that humans create within their bodies are often quite literal responses to the perceived traumatic episodes in their lives. But please understand, what one person may perceive as traumatic, another may perceive as business-as-usual. These are deeply personal issues, the creation of imbalances, and should always be addressed as such, taking into account the context of personality, life-style, experiences and all of the other myriad elements that compose the existence of the human.

Now with this in mind, that your health issues are emotionally-based and that some perceived as you know them, write out a few sentences describing the people basis for your malady and what it might look like it if you were relieved of this malady. Remember, you may always return to this statement to add or subtract material.

For example, if our theoretical subject were to write out a Foundational Statement, might read as the following:

I SENSE THAT LOST IN GRIEF, AND I WOULD LIKE TO FIND MY WAY BACK TO THE LOVE AND HOPE I HAD BEFORE THE TRAGEDY.

Do you see how this statement frames the healing Regimen in term of a journey? Each of you will use your own metaphors and symbols in creating the Foundational Statement.

Write it now.

—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————-

THE HEALING REGIMEN

The Healing Regimen is a cooperative effort between the practitioner and the Guides in a diagnosis of The Emotional Body. A Blueprint is then made for the creation of a positive reality called Healing. Rituals of Healing are then performed with the application of the various techniques and experiments. The continual application of the ritual of Healing until the Healing Regimen becomes habitual, creates a positive reality that will sustain itself over time.

Thus, a healing regimen implies regimentation, does it not? Here we are approaching the subject in a very systematic fashion. This is how you get results with these techniques, you see, by creating the Personal Reality Field in purposeful ways. You will not be “sleepwalking” through your life as you may have done in the past. The goal is to achieve conscious awareness in the moment. Then in these moments of awareness, I suggest in the moment. Then in these moments of awareness, I suggest you enact your ritual of Healing and purposeful Reality Creation. It is the sequential empowerment of the moments in our existence, that leads in time to the creation of an improved Personal Reality.

This project is really an extended Ritual. If you remember, our definition for Ritual in the context of my new Teaching, is “the consistent requesting of contact and communication with non-physical beings – Beings of Light.” It is all about spirit thought and contact with this stream of communication. Everything in our reality has consciousness and everything may be contacted for communication.

Of course, you may if you wish, continue to heed the communication stream of the ego/intellect, as you have done for perhaps many years in your life. However, if you do, you will in all likelihood merely achieve a recreation of the status quo reality. If you are ill, for example, you may simply recreate a physical body that is ill. I suggest that you do something different here. Experiment with your reality.

DIVINE WILL

As we co-create our Personal Reality Field, we might say that All That Is “supplies” the energy for our creations in the form of Consciousness Units infused with Love. This infusion occurs within a context of the Love Light Matrix. We have discussed this metaphor in earlier Blogs. Let me present a synopsis here for you. ALL realities created by consciousness are based in Love. Yet in Third-Dimensional Reality there exists the opposite OF Love that serves as a counterpoint and is quite necessary within our linear time illusion. The counterpoint to Love, what we might call Negative Emotion, serves to create alternatives in physical reality to the positive, and so Reality Construction evolves in multitudinous ways.

Our Personal Reality Field is a result of our Intention, conscious or unconscious responsibility for our creations as a cooperative venture with All That Is, we could say that we are using our Intention in a divine fashion.

To take this further… there is a history on our Earth of the positive use of the human will in tandem with the Divine. As I mentioned in my last Blog Series, the great altruistic Leaders of our human history knew of a concept we are calling Divine Will. They were experts in the use of Divine Will and took their place alongside of the Divine, acknowledging the collaboration entailed in creating a Personal Reality of worth. In this project, I suggest that we to conceive of our physical incarnation in this timeframe as a cooperative venture with the forces of Nature, the Divine and our Mother Earth.

As further aid to understanding here in this discussion, and as a way for you to possibly visualize the activity of the Divine Will, I offer the following: consider our theoretical construct of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, and visualize it as a stream of energy, much as a river is a stream of water. Using this metaphor, can you see, perhaps with your Intuitive Sensing, that just as the elemental energies of our great Earth, “push” water through the soil and dirt and rock until the water makes its way to the other side, further along to its “destination,” the human will, Divine Will as we are discussing, as a veritable “force of nature,” may push desired thoughts and images per a particular outcome or Reality Construct, across the threshold of potentiality and into the physical? Divine Will is Love guided by our intention in the moment. It represents the creative energies of All That Is as they are channeled through the consciousness of an inspired human.

Let me remind you that these metaphors are not the ultimate representations of the processes we are describing here, nor will they ever be. They may be seen as bookmarks within my greater theory. They will allow you to continue the study of the new Blog material in a focused way. You may always return to a concept for further meditation, inspiration and study.

AURIC VISION AND HEALING

We might say that our New Age Healers refer to as the human Aura, is essentially our “timeless” Light Body. The Aura, is a reflection of our greater Soul Self THROUGH The Consciousness Units that compose our current physical body. Now within this we may detect, by using what we are calling our Auric Vision, the exhibits of electromagnetic emanations of Gestalts of Consciousness of all types. Within this Auric vision we could, as a Scientist of Consciousness, diagnose past, present and future life issues. All of our many Simultaneous Lives exhibit their activities in an essential form within this aura.

Each consciousness Unit “remembers” each and every one of its voyages into form. These Consciousness Units tell their stories, and if we listen carefully, we may discover the proper path to take to heal and balance the human subject – oneself, a friend or family member or possible even a leader who has gone astray and requires an “adjustment” on the Etheric Plane.

Here, with an understanding of the animate Universe we are describing in these Blogs, it becomes quite possible for the Scientist of Consciousness to assume the role of Healer, and in a manner of speaking, “address” the Gestalts of Consciousness that support the malady. Thus the healer if “speaking” to the disease and acting on the responses to effect the healing.

Now when we use our Auric Vision, the information comes to us in unique ways, in a fashion distinct from our normal Third-Dimensional perceptions. Our auric vision may present us with a literal dramatization of the issues and problems inherent in the malady we are observing. This Inner Senses may project onto our inner field of perception, perhaps as we close our eyes, complete scenes peopled with characters of various descriptions. These dramatizations of the malady and the cure may run the gamut from literal representations to those that are so deeply personal and symbolic that only YOU would know the meaning entailed.

For example: we might view a scene in which a human heart is literally “broken.” And let us further state that the destroyer of the heart is a person easily recognized as our relative or friend or lover. Do you see the literal representation here? It is trying to tell us something. Most of us would probably interpret this scene in similar ways.

Or another example suppose that you viewed a scene that contained a surreal display of images accompanied by a changing stream of emotion. In this case, you are called upon to consult your personal symbols, utilizing images, ideas and emotions that one YOU would understand, to interpret the material. Your interpretation and your diagnosis style will be a direct reflection of your personality aspects. You will diagnosis and treat in your preferred fashion, using what works best for you.

GUIDES AND HEALING

What is the value, (in so much as these words may be valued by us,) of the messages of Beings of Light?


Some would say, of course, that these messages are priceless. The words are, after all, the messages of spirits – those who no longer exist as physical beings. If this is so, then should we worship these messages and these beings? Historically, humans have projected their own innate divinity onto these representations – gods and goddesses, spirit being etc. Yet at the same time, the human devalues their own contribution. The human projects the god within onto an outside entity, and then slavishly worships it, forgetting the origins of the god from within the human psyche.

We are discussing these matters in an attempt to remind the Blog Reader of our innate divinity. We are god. We are a goddess. This is a fact of life. As we begin to accept this condition, perhaps we will also remember that we have the power to heal ourselves and others.

Now as with all healing activities from our perceived past – within shamanic cultures for example – we will have help in The Healing  Regimen. We will have assistance from our Guides. Our Guides are emissaries from All That Is – the source of all realities, the Loving center of the created Universes.

So it is quite naturally that we turn to our Guides to assist in The Healing Regimen. Our Guides know what Love is and can remind us of this over the course of the of the project. Our Guides, such as the energy Personality and others, may facilitate the healings that take place within the physical body. They help us to maintain the required intensity of emotion over the long term.

I suggest that the Blog Reader think if this Guide as a personal assistant, one that would be “on call” to assist in matters of importance, such as the learning of Lessons. The Energy Personality may serve as a divine assistant for us in this project. For now, let us discuss the Light Body and the means to explore it with the Inner Sense of Sight.

THE EMOTIONAL BODY

The Emotional Body is the energy center of our human body within which the signatures of the various Energy Forms may be perceived. As we have stated in previous Blogs, within the electromagnetic corona it is central plane, the focus of the intersecting energies that comprise the Light Body. This nonphysical construct may be visualized as an oval form of pulsating light energy suspended within the heart region of the physical body. Of course, we may sense it in our individual ways. This form is perceived with the Inner Sense of sight we have named Auric Vision.

In my theory, emotion is the great creative force within our system that serves to push the incipient Reality Constructs into physicality. We have described this in a very basic way in our last series of Blogs. Let me summarize this material. It is ALL about emotion in our world. We exist within Third-Dimensional reality. We create our world according to the various thoughts and images within our mental environment AND the templates for creation that exist as Gestalts of  Consciousness. We cooperate with EVERYTHING IN OUR EXISTENCE in this play of consciousness we are experiencing that we call “my life.”

Now everything in created reality exists as a particular frequency or vibration of emotion, what we have referred to as “bio-electric energy.” Everything is alive. Everything is composed of this Light Energy. We might think of these individual vibrations as the “emotional charge” that both creates and sustains the Reality Construct – whatever that might be – time and space in our system.

This idiosyncratic vibrational signature “My” entity, when we wish to communicate with one another. The entity has a specific frequency or emotional Energy Form that he/she displays, as do us all. These frequencies are perceived through the Inner Sense, so that we may “See” the frequency, “Hear” the frequency and so on. These senses tend to blend together somewhat, as we have stated earlier.

Since all Energy Bodies have their own individual emotional charge or frequency, where there are issues of symptoms and illness, there are the attendant Energy Forms representing these constructs that are observable within The Emotional Body. Also within this Emotional Body there are observable Energy Constructs that will lead us to “solutions” – the healing and balance we are seeking. We might call these Gestalts of Consciousness the non-physical “Data Banks” that hold the collected wisdom and experience of healing from the practices of magicians, shaman, witches and healers.

Another way to describe this repository of healing might be to briefly speak on the subject of “spontaneous healing,’ as we call it. Now our literature is filled with stories of humans who have “garnered their inner resources” to effect miraculous changes in their debilitating physical conditions. Of course, to the human raised within a society that stresses the medical model, these transformations from deathly ill to completely healed are indeed perceived as miraculous. Yet, if we view disease process and the medical model as Gestalts of Consciousness, may we also conceive of Spontaneous Healing as simply another readily accessible Gestalt of consciousness? The Gestalt of Consciousness we might call Spontaneous Healing is the ” transmitter” that we “tune-in” to with our Metaphorical Tools to receive the signal – that we will use to create the necessary changes within the body for the transformation.

HEALING POWER OF LOVE

Our emerging reality is composed of Light, as we have said. We might say that the Coordinate Points within the juncture of time and space of any particular Moment Point of our physical existence, serve to “hold the shape” of the emerging reality, the outgrowth, if you will, of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream. This context for Realty Creations is indeed the Love Light Matrix. The atoms or Consciousness Units are each, again as we have suggested, energized, animated, empowered by Love with a capital L.

Our world is an ongoing manifestation created from the Loving energized of All That Is. All That Is IS LOVE, and so it follows that Reality Constructs of all types are founded in Love. Now within our Consensus Realities of Earth at this time, there is a pronounced diversion AWAY from Love. We may see this in all of our social, political and even our religious institutions.

It is obvious, is it not? Our world is in crisis. It is increasingly difficult to find Love in our reality. It is true that there is a Turnabout that is occurring, as we see how the absence of Love is so damaging to humanity? See it and remember it.

Now with regards to human health and healing, it is the same: wherever Love is absent, you will surely find decay, illness, disease, imbalance. I am not telling you something you do not already know. Dear Blog Reader, you are conceived in Love, but we are diverted by either emotions as we live our life. The consistent experiencing of the Negative Emotions result in the creation of symptoms and disease. Now in a sense, The Healing Regimen is a matter of peeling away the residue of Negative Emotion that hardens like a shell around The Emotional Body. Underneath this shell we will find the core of humanity – Love, just as we have been describing.

These emotions of Love and Compassion serve a very important purpose here in this project. They are the forces the practitioner uses to affect healing and balance. So that here, in a very elementary way, Negative Emotions serve to create symptoms and disease, whereas Loving Understanding and Compassion serve to create healing and balance. Again emotion is an Electromagnetic Entity that serves as the impetus or natural energy source for the creation of Reality Constructs.

In this suggestion we may also see a strategy for approaching the Healing Quest we are to begin. Human emotion, is the concentrated force that the co-creator employs to “push” into manifestation the desired reality of healing. So that success here is determined by the intensity of desire you can consistently muster within the Rituals of Healing we will cover momentarily.

MAGICIAN, SHAMAN, WITCH and HEALER

In The Healing Regimen, just as in other matters of intentional Reality Creation, the idea is to become cognizant of our unconscious agendas of manifestation IN THE MOMENT. In this moment of awakening, we may use our will to begin the creation of improved Reality Constructs with regards to our physical being, i.e. the transformation of symptoms and “disease states” to a lack symptoms and the perception of “healed” body states.

Now our approach requires a definite change of perspective for the average Blog Reader. Please allow me to present some background to this discussion for those of us who may be new to this material. In my last series of Blogs I encouraged you to take on the roll of Scientist of Consciousness. And as a specialist in the use of the Inner Senses, I asked you to go about your investigations in this ongoing “altered state.” I reminded you that the Scientist of Consciousness was the magician, the shaman, the witch of antiquity. You were simply affirming your connection to these original scientists from your perceived past. As you embodied the suggested role of Scientist of Consciousness, you “put on” the perceptual lenses of the witch or the shaman or the healer.

In this new Blog project of ours, as we intentionally create this altered state within our mental environment, we will enable our Inner Senses to “pick up” the vibrational messages of Consciousness Units that exist within the specific Gestalts of Consciousness, some representing, shall we say, “disease process,” and others representing “healing process.”

Both disease and healed states, as well as all states in between, exist in the moment. Our goal as researchers is to determine with our Inner Senses, the influences from the various Gestalts of Consciousness and how they assist in the creation of our particular malady of the malady of our subject. Then we shall use our Metaphorical Tools to diminish or eliminate these influences – guided by the Gestalts of Consciousness representing healing process – so the the body many return to balance.

Let us briefly discuss the related views of some of the indigenous peoples of our Earth. We often make these comparisons in our discussions to illustrate that unknown reality is already quite well known to some of us. For example: in the spiritual traditions among the First People of our human race, an intimate relationship exists between the human and the environment. It is common to speak to Nature directly in these collectives and receive responses from trees, stones, animals etc. These humans are well aware of the consciousness and integrity of plants, animals and the various elements around them. They accept that a rock has a spirit, that fire has a spirit that may be addressed and that will respond.

Just as the indigenous peoples communicate with the spirits of the natural world, it is possible for us on The Healing Regimen to seek counsel from these Energy forms, what we are calling Gestalts of Consciousness. We do this through the use of our Inner Senses, observing The Emotional Body.

THE MEDICAL MODEL

As with all of our creations in physical reality, we could say that we are entranced by our own projections, including the bodily states known as “symptoms and illnesses.” Now I have spoken in other Blogs of the dangers in our medical community of constantly referring to the “inevitability” of certain illnesses forming in the human body. Statistics are bandied about SUGGESTING that such-and-such a percentage of men or women will INEVITABLY “fall victim” to certain diseases. Do you see where I am taking this discussion? The disease process is supported on the SUGGESTIONS of Gestalts of Consciousness. And so we might say that the great majority of our medical doctors are “under the spell” of these Energy Bodies. They are entranced with this Gestalt of Consciousness, the central information center called the medical model. They have been for many years indoctrinate with the data and procedures that support this system.

We play your part in this drama also. Dear Blog reader. It is our role to “pretend” that what the doctors say is true. We obediently create the applicable symptoms within our body. We are supporting our health and practitioner in this way. “Doctor’s orders” DEMAND that you create a particular set of symptoms to correspond to a particular disease state. This collaboration takes place on the subtle levels, of course. The telepathic communication streams are quite active between Gestalts of Consciousness of various types, the doctor and the patient. Everyone must do their part here in order to sustain the “appearance” of illness and the “appearance” of healing or perhaps failure to heal, initiated by the medical profession.

It is all supported on suggestion. These suggestions are essentially Idea Constructs that are the building blocks of disease and the treatment of disease. Thus we have, for example, a Gestalt of Consciousness know as Alzheimer’s Disease. The patient is experiencing this illness as a vehicle for the learning of particular Lessons. In the case of Alzheimer’s, Lessons of infantilism and being cared for without protest, are often the reasons for the creation of the disease state, though it is not wise to generalize in these matters.

Ultimately however, illnesses of all kinds are created as life Lessons. The disease state is a teacher to us in physical reality. Our Soul Self our Guides and all members of our Soul Family are engaged with us in the drama of physical illness. We are learning our Lessons as a collective, much as we would study and learn within a classroom in one of our universities.

Now to elaborate on this comparison here… just as we would learn in a classroom the subject matter in a course on, shall we say, Life Science, everything needed to pass that course, in The Healing Regimen we may discover that truths in the Lessons of physical existence. As we become knowledgeable on the causes of our malady, we may find the means to learn our Lesson in other ways, perhaps in ways that do not entail physical symptoms and disease. This is always our free will choice. We may decide to continue the Lesson of physical illness or we may decide to discover the “causes” and address them.

THE HEALING REGIMEN

PHYSICAL CHALLENGES
Prophecies are based on the most probable outcomes if you were to follow on your current trajectory. Thus, if you are currently in a positive frame of mind, the probabilities for a positive future are greatly diminished.

Create your positive future NOW with your positive life-affirming beliefs and ideas.

GESTALT OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND HEALTH

Let us review the basics for purposes of creating The Healing Regimen. As we well know, you are a Soul within a physical body and with All That Is we co-create our existence in Third-Dimensional reality. In this endeavor we cooperate with each and every Consciousness Unit in our perceptive field. The “blueprints” for our creative works are the beliefs, thoughts and images that predominate in our mental environment. These blueprints exist as arrays of Coordinate Points within the pre-manifestation domains. These arrays merge to create Gestalts of Consciousness – complex affiliations of mental constructs – that are, in essence, the nonphysical representations of EVERYTHING.

Thus, ideas and images relative to a concept identified as “the common cold,” for example, assemble into Gestalts of Consciousness, representing the accumulated “wisdom,” you might say, from all human experience of the common cold. All of the “requirements” for achieving the common cold are represent. The symptoms are there within these incipient Reality Constructs. In a sense, we could say that the operating system for the cold virus is “resident” within the mental constructs. The symptoms exist in potentiality. They await the invocation of the disease state into the mental environment of the human.

Now, the “disease process,” as we call it, exists first as a mental vulnerability. This is not the accepted view, I certainly realize. However, bear with me for just a moment, the mental precedes the physical in all matters of disease process. But if course, there must be the physical “cause” of the illness. The mental and thus the emotional vulnerability creates a physical vulnerability through suggestion. “I am near those who have colds, I will get a cold,” “I am old and vulnerable to disease, I will get a cold.”

The continual presentation to the inner mental environment that we are vulnerable – either through our own internal ruminations or through the transmissions from other Energy Bodies – Creates the physical vulnerability, such as a weakened immune system, so that exposure to particular strain of virus would then “lead” to the creation of the disease state in the body and the “inevitable” progression of the illness through to its conclusion.

Perhaps I should elaborate on my statement that the suggestions “create” physical vulnerabilities within the body. These suggestions or thoughts or potent images, form whatever source, are the same as any other thoughts or images generated by consciousness, in that they seek manifestation within the physical and other dimensions.

In the case of disease process, we find that the creation of imbalance occurs on a cellular level. So that if we might envision a cell within the body as it exists within the organ or blood or perhaps muscle tissue as being subject to the messages and the many systems that feed “information” to the cells to govern theory activity, such as the immune, digestive and other systems – do you see how the mental suggestions might serve to short-circuit some of these information streams?

A simple example here for illustration, would be the difficulties that may come from a sensitive person observing distasteful images while they eat. They may incur a bad case of indigestion from these mental suggestion that ALL illness and their symptoms, are caused by these Gestalts of Consciousness, in this case by an Energy Body we might call indigestion.

MOMENTS OF AWAKENING

We do have many awakenings in our day-to-day existence, and these can be opportunities for accessing the spiritual awakening we seek. For example: each time you awaken from sleep, we have an opportunity to awaken also in a spiritual sense. As I have described in theses Blogs, our nighttime activities entail a great deal of what we might term “spiritual” or “SoulDirected” activities. Yet on our awakening after sleep, the rigors of physical reality.

PRELUDE TO THE REGIMENS

The lessons we are learning currently may be categorized according to the three broad topics we will cover in the next three series of Blogs. This is a continuation of our discussion on the blessing “healthy, wealthy and wise” from our last Blog Series.

Now health would obviously entail Lessons Learned regarding the physical body, mind and spirit. We are asserting here the symptoms and illnesses humans generate within their bodies are for educational purposes. Each illness is a physical expression of inherently nonphysical Idea Constructs.

The same may be said of prosperity. The lessons of the Acquisition of wealth and the utilization of that form of energy is spiritual at its base. Money and wealth are simply very potent ideas pertaining to security and value in the physical domain. So here again, the physical is simply the observable component of the invisible, nonphysical spiritual construct.

The wisdom of the Soul, the third element in this blessing, may be accomplished in the learning of these symbolic Lessons in physical reality by allowing these Life Lessons to transform the psyche. Loving Understanding and Courage are some of the results of this transformative phenomenon.

HEALTH AND HOLOGRAMS

Health – physical, mental, emotional, financial – is a state of consciousness that exists in a Moment Point in our perceptual reality. “Behind” this “spiritual” assessment is our Soul Self, the co-creator with All That Is of our Personal Reality Field.

All of the subatomic elements of awarized energy that comprise our Third-Dimensional world for us personally, collaborate to create this awareness of health.

Now speaking of physical health: this is the reason that our world and everything in it seems to support our physical symptoms, you see. Our field of Personal Reality creation, because it is a reflection, a direct reflection of our inner world, does continuously reflect our personal symptoms that we are experiencing/creating for purposes of Learning and Value Fulfillment. The improvements desired in our physical health, therefore, must obviously come from a change in this inner perception. We have been referring to these inner perceptive processes as the Inner Senses. We will go much deeper into this method in The Healing Regimen.

THE TIME IS NOW

Dear Blog Reader, now in this moment of Good Humor resides your opportunity for an improved future. Perhaps a brief recap is in order here, to serve as a basis for the proclamation. You create BOTH your past and your future from your current moment. This is one of the basic tenets of my Teaching, and so it would serve you well to use this fact of life as a “given” – an essential building block upon which rests my theoretical construct of Reality Creation. So when I suggest to you that you may expand your consciousness intentionally, perhaps what I really mean is that you are capable, simply by virtue of your existence on our physical Earth at this time, of truly exploring and embodying the richness of our momentary existence.

Yes, our life is a series of moments. In this series of moments, obviously, you are reading from my Blog. Now the act of reading requires some focus “in the moment.” You muster all of your attention and direct it toward the task of reading and absorbing the Blog material. In a similar way, the student of my Teaching would do well to harness the same efforts of concentration entailed in the reading of this Blog, toward the appreciation and assessment of the current Moment Point – the spacious moment that connects all of our Simultaneous Lives.

Any moment will do here. This one… Or this one… Or this one… The study and appreciation of the spacious moment does indeed take some preparation. You are, in a sense, preparing yourself for the PROBABILITY of experiencing the moment of awakening – the moment of healing, the moment of perceiving the Abundant Universe, the moment of receiving Divine Wisdom. I am aware that in other Teachings, the student is taught that the awakening of the consciousness to its own spiritual heritage is a lifetime “undertaking,” if you will excuse my pun. Here however, we are offering the student the opportunity to awaken without first expiring.

USING GOOD HUMOR

Now for example… let us say that you are currently experiencing fear in its most basic form, perhaps dreading something that is to occur in your future, or perhaps fearing what has already occurred, perhaps fearing that the dreaded subject or object will continue to exist in our reality. As I have stated in previous blogs, if you are experiencing fear, you are under the influence of Negative EntitiesEnergy Bodies that thrive on the emotions of fear and anxiety. So perhaps a simple antidote to these energies would be for you to trivialize and make fun of these influences. By creating a state of simple Good Humor in your consciousness in this way, you are creating a comedy out of a fearful drama.

In the transformation, you are also creating Courage our of fear. Without getting into details, we could say that the natural abilities of human consciousness create this transformation of fear into Courage. You are, from the inception into human body on Earth, created out of Love. Your consciousness may easily return to this positive state, then, with merely the least amount of effort on your part.

This is easy to do. Making fun of the fear-producing ideas or images may be an enjoyable and creative act unto itself. You are using your imagination to turn down the fearful intensity of the ideas and images, and perhaps replacing them with humorous images and ideas.

Do you see how you are much better prepared to create positive realities when you are in this self-created state of Good Humor? Certainly it is important to continue creating this positive state as you attempt to create a positive reality. It is the extension of the current moment of Good Humor into the future that creates the positive future.

So let us assume that you have gained some mastery over the creation of Good Humor within your own apparatus. You may notice that, over time, as you get good at creating Good Humor, the quality of your daily existence improves. This is the creation of positive realities in itself, as even modest improvements in an otherwise fearful and anxious Reality Construction may have profound effects on your daily life. You create your world from the beliefs you hold about what is possible. As you embody the state of Good Humor consistently, it becomes possible for you to believe in the continuation of this positive state.

FEAR AND HUMOR

Fear may be thought of as the founding energy in the emotional states of anxiety, anger and hatred. Now fear and Good Humor do not mix well. If one is enjoying your state of consciousness known as Good Humor, one is most probably enjoying THE ABSENCE OF FEAR. I stress the importance of Good Humor here for the simple reason that, because it is often so simple to generate this mental state, it becomes a very useful too in the creation of Courage out of fear. Let me illustrate with an example, if I may.

Some of my students, upon reading my earlier Blogs, have expressed the criticism that my experiments and exercises are quite challenging. To these students I say, simplify this endeavor. Bring this back to the basics of manifestation. Prepare your mental environment for the creation of positive realities by FIRST embodying or generating within your consciousness, the state of simple enjoyment or Good Humor.

EMOTIONAL INVESTMENT

You are literally born out of the Love And Good Humor of All That Is. Here I am asking you to move beyond any religious conditioning that has convinced you that you perhaps were born out of suffering to live a life of pain. For in truth, the facts in this matter are just the opposite.

Let me state the obvious here, however, to avoid any misunderstanding. Yes, your reality is born in your imagination out of Love and Good Humor, yet you will of necessity also experience the opposites of these attributes – fear, anxiety, anger, hatred. Now the important thing here, is how long a hold on to the fear, anxiety, anger and hatred. How much importance do you attach to these emotional states as you experience them? How much do you invest your ego/intellect in the recreation of these states, once you have allowed them to enter your mental environment.

GOOD HUMOR

So love Light is born in a simple Good Humor. I trust that this will not be a difficult stretch of the imagination for you to comprehend and accept this information. It is true that in our world, Good Humor may be thought of as a simple and mundane aspect of existence. It may be thought of as too trivial to be considered in as serious an endeavor as the creation of realities. Yet I am suggestion here that ties, in particular, the positive realities that are the focus of this blog.

IDENTIFYING COMMUNICATION STREAMS WITHIN OUR MENTAL ENVIRONMENT

Hypothesis: In trance we may identify the communication streams within our mental environment.

Now we shall investigate the many information streams that “flow” and “time” are used to hopefully facilitate our connecting to the data streams and to identifying and understanding the content. We are familiar with a flowing river. The river flows regardless of our noticing it, observing it, studying it. In a similar fashion, the many information streams that flow through our mental environment, do so regardless of our attention to them, our noticing them. However, though we may be unaware of these streams of divine information, and of course others that are most certainly not divine, we are indeed quite affected by the ideas and images carried within these many streams of communication. Here I believe It would be a good idea for the student to become more aware of the content of these information streams.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax and enter your Trance State, as usual. Now to begin, let us list the many providers of information that exist within the mind or psyche of the “typical” human engaged in co-creating an existence on our world.

First and foremost would be the divine source – All That Is. This data stream is quite easily recognized by the seeker of wisdom. The ecstasy felt during the encounter with the Divine, is the energy signature that marks this source.

Next on the list would be the “voices” of Soul Family members past, present and future.

Of course the negative gods and goddesses exist there also, as well as the Energy Bodies of divine beings of various types crested through the collective efforts of humanity over the ages.
Your own understanding of God with a capital G exists here as an energy form.

If you have pursued contact with the Elemental Beings, they exist within our mentality also, to the degree that we have co-created them through study, worship, observation, and so on.

Our Simultaneous Lives are there in their totality, providing information and both support and negative influence, according to what you are on our Earth to learn at this time.

Let us not forget our own ego/intellect that oversees this phenomenon and indeed censors and directs the activities therein.

Now there are certainly more examples of Light Bodies and other Energy forms that exist within our consciousness. Note these as you discover their activity in our experimentation. When we feel as though we have have received enough information from this experiment, return to full sensory awareness.

Findings – Document your findings in identifying the stream of information within your mental environment.

PRECEPTS AND RESONANCE

Hypothesis: By focusing on the precept you may catalyze the holographic insert from the entity.

You may with some preparation, feel the ecstasy and empowerment that some with the experiencing of the Holographic Inserts I stream into my Third Subject’s consciousness. For the purpose of elucidation and bringing Light and information to the discussion. I also present these “teachings aids” to you for the same purposes.

There are a few ways you may explain this to oneself that this phenomenon is real – so that you may indeed experience it clearly, without resorting to denial, fear, anxiety. The simplest explanation is that you are my student and as such you and I have a special , spiritual relationship. The connection here is a physical one also, relating to certain portals or chakras as we might call them, located on and around the physical body.

Any one of my precepts may be used as a Holographic Insert. We have mentioned before that the phrase “you create your own reality” is a particularly potent precept and stands as the foundational statement, if you will, of my entire Teaching. I would suggest an experiment to determine the precepts that have the greatest “effects” for you, when you activate them as Holographic Inserts by focusing on them in your mediations.

PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax and enter a light Trance State. First, I would have you read the percepts and attempt to identify those that “speak” to you with the most energy and frequency. The phenomenon known as resonance comes into play here. Your physical construct, your human body, is actually a vibrating system of Consciousness Units, as you know. Ideas and images of all types, either entertained from within your mental environment of considered from written texts and other media, also “hold” their individual vibratory signatures.

Let me again emphasize that it is the Divine Essence cultivated within the student that is the catalyst here. Through working on your self, through reading spiritual literature and engaging in these arcane practices, the researcher cultivates a certain perspective that allows for the experiencing of the Holographic Insert by the Inner senses. Also, on “the other side,” in a sense, the creator of the manuscript – in this case The entity – empowers the text with the essential energies of the Divine – All That Is – so that on the subtle levels where these types of spiritual growth and extra sensory and emotional perception are experienced, the stages is set quite well for the Holographic Inserts to display.

Now focus on your selected precepts one at a time. Have an intention to link up with the etheric component of each precept. There is an openness required in this endeavor. You might think of oneself as an antenna in search of a signal here. Be quiet. Be still. Listen with your Inner Senses for the response from the Entity.

Findings – Document your findings in catalyzing the precepts into Holographic Inserts.

MULTIDIMENSIONAL CONSCIOUS UNIT EXPRESSION

To illustrate my last point: imagine if you will, your current existence in this day, within this moment that you are reading these words. Can you visualize how the Blog, with its Conscious Units “holding” its shape through the Coordinate Points we have discussed, exists also as, let us say, a section of a tree in front of you in a life you may be living as a forest dweller many years before our so-called Christian Era? Likewise in this example, these exact same Conscious Units, as they flash on and off, creating different realities within different timeframes, do indeed compose different Reality Constructs of varied types within these different areas. This is why I describe the future and past timeframes as simply dimensions.

All timeframes or Reincarnational Existences exist “right before your eyes.” You may conceptualize this, if it helps you, as a layered effect, with the different existences and their constructs simultaneously created “one on top of the other.” I hope this description of the very easily accessible dimensions assists you in attempting contact with the other lives. The lives are out there in front of us. They are perceived through the fine-tuning of the Inner Senses. This process is quite doable for the student of this material. Now for some experimentation.

THE 2012 PHENOMENON

The visionary state to which we aspire is always available to us. This state of consciousness exists probability at all times, for the time is right for this ascension of human consciousness. In our popular media we can see this. The 2012 phenomenon is exhibited for us in our books and other media, as a potentially horrendous affair entailing the destruction of the planet and humanity. These are actually the collective fears of humans being given life by authors, directors, and other artists. Their vision is a dark one, you see. They are going for the sensationalist expression of the potential inherent in this great change that lies before us.

Yet, the opposite is also true here. The change that we will experience in the coming years have just as much potential to express in positive ways as in the negative. Indeed,we could say that our visionary exercises are specifically tuned to allow a perception of this positive outcome, what we call the Positive Collective Manifestation. In my Blogs I presented an exercise for the researcher that wishes to explore this collective manifestation as it creates itself out of the positive thoughts, emotions, images, and beliefs of humanity.

Here I will present an exercise that you may carry with you so that you may become an advocate: an ongoing contributor to the Positive Manifestation.

Multidimensional Conscious Unit

To illustrate my last point: imagine if you will, our current existence in this day, within the moment that you are reading these words. Can you visualize how the Blog, with its conscious units “holding” its shape though the Coordinate Points we have discussed, exists also as, let us say, a section of a tree in front of us in a life we may be living as a forest dweller many years before our so-called Christian Era?

Likewise in this example, these exact same Conscious Units, as they flash on and off, creating different realities within different timeframes, do indeed compose different Reality Constructs of varied types within these different ears. This is why I describe the future and past timeframes as simply dimensions.

All timeframes of Reincarnational Existences exist “right before your eyes.” We may conceptualize this, if it helps us, as a layered effect, with the different existences and their constructs simultaneously create “one on top of the other.” I hope this description of the very easily accessible dimensions assists in attempting contact with these other lives. The lives out there in front of us. They are perceived through the fine-tuning of the Inner Senses. This process is quite doable for the student of this material.

TIME MACHINTIME MACHINE

The engineers were not limited to design and creation of buildings and other structures. They were instrumental in the creation of vehicles that were used by researchers to “travel” interdimensionally. I am now transmitting a Holographic Insert into Dorian’s mental field in an attempt to graphically illustrate one of the inter-dimensional vehicles.

Now these vehicles did not “travel” in the common meaning of that term. The crystal structure assisted the researcher in an attunement of their consciousness through vibratory resonance. The mental Intention of the researcher, directed through the “focal” aspects of the crystal structure, allowed for the “beginning in” of the Simultaneous Lives lived in different points in space and time travel in our system. The future, in our terms, is really just our progressed reality in linear time. Our future is another dimension, a dimension that exists, as I have stated, within the exact same Conscious Units that compose the Blog Reader, as well as all of the current Reality Constructs that compose our world.

ANCIENT ENGINEERS

There was another serving class, another group of humans within the Atlantean society, that was dedicated to assisting the people within their social group in terms of leadership and the creation of social and political structures as well as physical structures. This group was composed of humans who were extremely talented in the mathematical sciences and had a natural affinity for numbers, figures and their manipulation. They were natural engineers and experts at what you might call the “hard sciences.” These humans “instinctively” knew the lost efficient methods for creating a structure, such as a house or other building, and possessed a facility for designing and building dams and other large structures.

These ancient engineers were also visionaries, just as the visionary leaders were prophets as well as gifted politicians. They could foretell the future stresses – from natural disasters etc. – that a particular structure of their design would incur after being built, and so could design and build the structure with this prophetic material in mind.

DIVINE KING

You may read about the “vestiges” of the class of prophet leaders in your stories of the Divine King. In successive civilizations after the “fall” of Atlantis, for example, this idea was kept alive, if only symbolically, in the concept of the King or Emperor having a direct connection to the Divine.

We may also read in our histories how ultimately this type of leadership failed miserably, for the leaders tool the power without taking the responsibility of divine leadership. They were more interested in ruling than leading. In our current leadership on our Earth, we may see this ultimate act of hubris in the leaders who have anointed themselves as the modern Divine King, yet choose to deny the citizenry their rights, and as I said, rule rather than lead.

MYSTERY CIVILIZATIONS

As descendants of the divine rulers of the Mystery civilizations, the visionary leaders are engaged in the same sort of activities as their predecessors. They are art of a lineage of incarnation in our Third Dimension. Now genetically, there may or may not be a connection, however the Soul Family connections are there to investigate.

For example: those of us who have identified an Atlantean Heritage, through our experimentation or other research efforts, may be interested to know that the leadership within the Atlantean culture itself was initially drawn from what you might call the “spiritual” class. This group fulfilled several different functions in the society. They were scientists of non physical reality, what we are calling the Scientists of Consciousness.

These humans were raised from birth as the “Magical Child” we spoke of in the last Blog Series. They had memories of all of their Reincarnational Existences. This information, which included “future” experiences, were quite valuable. The leaders were visionaries in the true sense of that term, in that they were aware of the probable events to occur in the future of their societies.

VISIONARY LEADERS

We suggested in our last Blog Series that there are true visionaries among us who are making themselves known. These are the advocates for our Mother Earth, the speakers, the teachers, the magicians, shamans, witches and healers of our timeframe, who are exerting considerable pressure on the current ruling regime – I am speaking in global terms here now – to “soften” and indeed spiritualize their expressions in physical reality, including their political systems. They are now coming forward to lead us in all the domains of human interaction.

Our leaders who have taken advantage of the people are now finding themselves “uncovered” and suddenly vulnerable. In their place there is becoming apparent this new class of “natural born leaders.” We have stated that these visionaries will not necessarily be elected. They lead in a very appropriate manner, for that is their natural gift, as humans in this very important era in our world.

Perhaps now we have witnessed this phenomenon, essentially a calling forth to those of goodwill for our Mother earth, to tend to THE TRUE BUSINESS AT HAND. The denial is lifting, you see, as many of us begin to see the damage done by our leaders with our tacit approval.

Or perhaps we have experienced this phenomenon in a more personal way, as we may have felt oneself called to serve our fellow humans in a more direct way than we have done in the past. Leaders come in many forms. Leading by example, to coin a phrase, is a wholly adequate and necessary service one may provide to initiate the rebuilding of our damaged societies.

You see, there are no authorities among these visionary Leaders. They do not hold power by virtue of authority, such as a power “over” others. They are powerful because they keep their own power. They do not give up their authority to others. In the broad sense, ALL of us are becoming enlightened, empowered with the natural creative energies that are our birthright. We are all becoming leaders in this way.

JUNG

In other models, these primal blueprints are referred to as “archetypes.” Our eminent psychiatrist and researcher Jung popularized this term, as elemental to his theory of consciousness. Naturally this theory of Jung’s bears a resemblance to the ideas within current Blog work. Jung was informed by the Entity.

He was first informed through contact and communication with his Energy Personality, and later used this Energy Construct as a bridge to the greater Gestalt of consciousness to which he was associated – The Entity, broadly speaking. Essentially, this was the path used by all three of the recognized authors in our timeframe. It is also the recommended path for those of us who wish to receive energy from the greater energy Construct of which we are a part, be that The Entity or any others.

TEACHING AIDS OF THE NON-PHYSICAL BEINGS

I do not wish to repeat myself too greatly in this New Blog Material, but allow me to once again state the ultimate premise of our Third-Dimensional existence. Our world is composed of Light. Each and every Reality Construct is the “visible” manifestation of Gestalts of Consciousness of various types.

The leaf on the tree before you is the “outward” creation of the “inner” thought-form or Energy Gestalt of LEAF. The Beings of Light, therefore, exist at all levels of physical Reality Creation. And again, each and every Gestalt of Consciousness, including the Beings of Light, may be contacted through the Rituals of Contact and Communication we are presenting in these new Blog works. In this way, the researcher may communicate with the leaf in question through an attunement of the vibratory frequency of the researcher’s mental environment to the frequency of the subject i.e. LEAF.

RESONANCE

When you state, for example, that something “resonates” with you, this is a statement of literal fact. Let us say that you are speaking of some particularly evocative material you are reading in a book. You find yourself becoming quite affected by the ideas in the text. You become emotionally invested in the material. It seems as though the author is “reading your mind,” as to what you are thinking and feeling.

This vibratory resonance occurs when the thoughts you are entertaining within your consciousness are vibrating at a similar rate as the ideas you are reading about in the Blog. In this instance, the Consciousness Units that compose the thoughts held in the mental environment are vibrating at the same frequency as the ideas, images and other material elicited by the written words.

Now in this activity of resonance, you might say that the energetic potential of the one, assists in creating the holographic replicant within the other. This is a rather simplified way of expressing the manifestation phenomenon, in that the one “brings the other up” to a station of equally evolving manifestation – streaming, energizing and facilitating the assemblage of the Consciousness Units within the other.

Now the reverse is also true here. It is a mutual sharing of energies in this resonance. There is a form of homeostasis or balance that is achieved once the level of Value Fulfillment is reached that is the “goal,” in a sense, of the Reality Creation project. These discussions may become quite etheric. However, in its simplest form we may say that our reality is co-created from the Consciousness Units that are charged with the life force of All That Is.

The resonance phenomenon exists as a cohesive force in the assemblage of Consciousness Units into Reality Constructs throughout our Third-Dimensional Reality. When we speak in the new material of the researcher “fine tuning” the Inner Senses, we are saying that the researcher may achieve a similarity of vibratory frequency is created – through our various techniques, for example – resonance is achieved. The Consciousness Units within your mental sphere resonate with their holographic counterparts – the “generic atoms” we have spoken of earlier. What is imagined on the “inner” is made manifest on the “outer” in this way.

This cohesive force is the electromagnetic energy we have mentioned that is at the basis of all created realities. The bioelectric energy that is at the basis if all created realities. The bioelectric energy that “Lights and Powers” the human body construct or any living or inanimate object, does so in a resonating, flashing on-and-off fashion.

Here again we are referencing my past discussions on the nature of the atoms or Consciousness Units as they create multidimensional realities, in a sense, flashing or vibrating at specific rates to create the realities that vibrate at the particular frequency.

You may also remember our discussion from our previous Blogs in which we presented the possibility for the researcher to experiment with modulating the frequency of their physical body construct to create healing.

INSPIRATIONAL TEXTS

For your information, Dear Blog Reader, the ideas and philosophies of the great leaders of your perceived past are available to you within the milieu of your personal consciousness. Now obviously, this is the psychic mechanism for the inspiration and motivation of vast numbers of devotees to follow the great religious leaders, for example. It is a psychic network, a Telepathic Network that one participates in to make these connections. The catalyst for such a voyage of discovery or quest for understanding and knowledge, could be as simple as he reading of a book authored by one of these respected leaders.

As I related to you in in previous Blogs, the printed words within our spiritual and philosophical texts have power on the subtle levels. In a sense, these words serve to “open Doors” within the psyche of the reader to allow for the reception of Divine Knowledge. This stream of energy has its source or transmission point within the after-death consciousness or Soul Self of the deceased writer.

So the selection of inspirational texts is very important in this project. You may find that certain authors “call out” to you in some way. You are drawn to particular authors, just as you may have been drawn to my Blogs, it is a very natural thing to act upon these inspirational impulses. These mental constructs, the motivating impulses, serves as markers along the way, as you make your voyage of self discovery, the discovery of your Soul Self.

Now the questions may arise, “What is my relationship to these authors? Why do I feel compelled to seek out their books and read them? The answers are that you are connected to a virtually limitless “family” of incarnated and currently “deceased,” in our terms, human Souls. These are your Simultaneous Lives, that I described in my previous blogs. These are your etheric Guides also, your Energy Personality and other assistants, and these are the authors of inspirational texts.

HOLOGRAPHIC INSERTS

The preferred method of communication between the complex Gestalts of Consciousness you know as spirits, Guides, Angels and such, and the student in physical reality – the visionary – has always been the Holographic Insert. This is our name for a brief multisensory experience that is transmitted from the nonphysical being to the student. It is quite brief, usually, merely a fraction of a second in duration. It has Loving energy attached to it so that you will remember it. These are the visions that are experienced by students through the ages and documented in scared texts of various kinds.

The visionary experience is really a conversation between the nonphysical beings and the student. It is not necessarily a one-way conversation. The Nature Spirit, for example, does not transmit communication streams into the consciousness of an unprepared student. The student most probably has first been prepared through study and through continued communications and Lessons creates by the Spirit for the further education of the student. The student asks for the communication and the Spirit complies when appropriate.

Now, Holographic Inserts “pour off the page” for you, when you take the care to accept these multisensory messages within your mental awareness. These words and these phrases have power when they are considered carefully with the expectation of the manifested reality to be indeed made manifest.

It is an openness, really, a state of courageous expectation that you must cultivate. It is the same with spiritual literature of all types. The words do have power. The phrases, when they are considered after the required preparation of the human mentality, may initiate the unfolding the unfolding of the Higher Consciousness. We may also relate this to all types of inspirational literature. It calls to us for specific reasons, to catalyze within you – the individual human – the resources required for the exploration of our inner world.

IDENTITY AND THE SHIFT

Now we become what we think about. Our identity is created from the ideas and images that we entertain within our mental environment, including messages sent to us from our Simultaneous Lives. Our identity is quite fluid. We are continuously assessing our mental, physical and emotional spheres of activity and assembling our identity from data gathered in this investigation.

We have many colleagues in this endeavor – the reassessment of the Personal and Consensus Realities. Our modern world in this timeframe is witnessing the transformation of the human mentality on a grand scale. Our fellow inhabitants of our planet are questioning their roles and duties as human beings and many are acknowledging the TRUTH of this matter of identity.

For example: many who have been skeptics are engaged in a reversal of thinking. They are “seeking the light” quite literally in all of their experiences, particularly where they have sought to keep the truth from their fellow humans. These transformations will be shocking to some, for they occur so abruptly that the breath is taken away. Yet as this event in the lives of men and women becomes more commonplace, the basic correctness and obvious necessity of this wholesale change in human perception and attitude will be recognized. The Visionary of old is reborn in the present, during this shift – the Fourth-Dimensional Shift we are describing.

BEINGS OF LIGHT

Let me answer my own questions. Beings of Light are responding. We ARE a Being of Light. We each are a Soul with a body. We are a multitude of personalities existing in many different areas on our Earth, on other planets and in probable systems. We are experiencing our amnesia in the Third Dimension, perhaps scoffing at this admittedly “far out” narrative, yet it remains quite true that WE are what we are talking about when we describe the Beings of Light. EVERYTHING in physical reality if “lighted” by Beings of Light, Gestalts of Consciousness, Light Bodies, Energy Bodies.

They are the energy and incipient matter templates for all forms in physical reality and all other dimensions. So that any discussions as to whether Beings of Light exist are really quite humorous, as these Gestalts of Consciousness comprise ALL of human experience.

Perhaps what we are truly saying here, is that we are an Etheric Being. The witty, the humorous and the creative responses are from the Nonphysical Personality aspects that form our Soul Self. This is our identity then. We are grounded in the nonphysical world.

WHO IS RESPONDING?

Where does this visionary energy perspective originate? Let me explain with reference to the “typical” Blog Reader. You have Dear Blog Reader, I am sure, what you refer to as your personal resources of wit, humor, creativity. This is that aspect of your psyche that you rely on to “Come Through” with the appropriate responses in your dealings with you world. Another way to describe this might be that these spontaneous responses that you give when required, these are the material of the free-flow of your conscious state.

You seem to be accessing your personal reservoir of experience from which you create “answers” to the challenge of your environment, whether these challenges are human beings or circumstances that challenge you to feed back with appropriate germane information, behaviors, and so on. Now my questions to you would be, “Who is responding with this information? Who is the witty, the humorous, the creative one?”

The Visionary STATE

The visionary within our modern culture is a much maligned figure. This may be because we have come so far from our tribal communities, as “progress” takes us away from core experiences of community and shared spirituality. In the U.S.A. in particular, and most of our developed nations, we take great care to marginalize our visionaries, particularly when they begin to speak of radical transformations to come in our world.

Here however, in our growing community, we honor the visionary and we accept the visionary state of consciousness as natural, normal and quite essential to the evolution of the human Soul and the human species.


The visionary has visions, quite simply, and these visions are experienced through the use if the intuitive faculties. The visions of these seers of society are filled with Light. The visionary is enlightened, you see, and senses the foundation of reality as the Light Energy that it is. In my view, I see all of humanity as potential visionaries.

PRELUDE TO SENSING REALITY CREATION

Dear Blog Reader, you now have at our disposal the great perceptive powers of the Inner Senses. In my last series of Blogs I described to you in detail how to access these powers and how to use them to your advantage in physical reality. Here I would like to elaborate on this data with some suggestions on how to sense the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream.

This material may also be used in conjunction with Carl Jung material. The Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, as I said, support and nourishes our created reality – our Personal Reality Field. In the dream state, and when we are in our Home Dimension between lives, we are well aware of this stream of energy and we sense it as easily as we sense the various constructs within our self-created reality. Now, the Inner Sense of sight, Auric Vision, may be utilized to sense this stream. The following experiment will assist us in the awakening of this valuable Inner Sense.

EXPERIMENT – Sensing Reality Creation

Hypothesis: The Subconscious Energy Manifestation Stream may be observed as it creates the reality construct.
The Reality Construct is our topic for the moment. The Reality Construct is all of created reality, and also describes the many elements of the created reality. Here I wish to digress somewhat and ask you the Blog Reader to imagine for yourself what it is I am attempting to describe to you.

Consciousness creates form, instantaneously, in the moment. We must use these descriptions of Reality Creation for us to make sense of this phenomenon, occurring as it does within a linear time conceptualization. The truth of the matter might be better expressed by describing the spontaneously responsive quality of manifestation in our system. So that here we could speak of consciousness creating form that creates consciousness, and so on, all within the spacious eternal moment. Everything is conscious. everything is creative. Everything creates consciousness. All That Is, another term for everything, IS the infinitely creative consciousness that gives birth to our own infinitely creative consciousnesses. This Idea Construct is an excellent one to entertain when we are attempting to KEEP IN THE MOMENT. I trust I have inspired quite enough to be receptive to these subtle energies.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
So I would suggest you relax. If you are sitting in a chair, make yourself comfortable. If you are lying down, prop up your body so that you will not fall asleep as you read this. Now imagine if you will, what I have defined as the Moment Point. Use your current existence, the moment you are now experiencing, as somewhat more extended in duration than you have experienced moments in the past.

In a previous Blog, we provided an experiment for the Blog Reader to practice slowing down time within their Personal Reality Field. This is the same feeling we are creating here and now. You use your intention to imbue your Moment Points with duration. Please make creative use of your Inner Senses to accomplish this, perhaps intuitively visualizing your present sensory images and sounds as slowing down, slowing down with your Intention.

What we are getting at here is a slowing down of time to the extent that we may glimpse the creation of physical objects from ideas. This would be Reality Construction viewed at the edge of creation. Now these are grand terms, and you might say I am making it all sound so easy, but at its heart, it IS the easiest thing it all sound so easy, but at its heart, it IS the easiest thing in the world. You are experts at creating “something from nothing,” and you can easily slow down this creative process to the microsecond level. Here you may see and feel what is involved in your creation of your Personal Reality Field. This includes your body and the senses you use to sense this manifestation activity.

How much must you slow down the act of reality creation to witness this? You will know you are meeting with success when you have a sensation of pulsing visually and as a felt sensation. This is the pulse of manifestation. This is the flow of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream through the Coordinate Points and “into” the Reality Constructs.

A taste of perspective. I am experiencing the pulsation. It feels like the heartbeat, only accelerated many times. Visually there is a dreamy quality. Briefly I experienced a twinge of fear, as if I was receiving forbidden knowledge. Possible religious programming?

The flow of information “through” the Coordinate Point is so rich in imagery and other content that the researcher must intentionally slow down the flow of Conscious Units through this gateway if they are to observe and study the construct.

Now can you imagine these theorized Coordinate Points as permeating “physical” space and matter, yet not taking up any space whatsoever? Let us refer to the Conscious Points as etheric in nature in this experiment. They are the nonphysical “precursors” of the “future” created Reality Constructs. They exist inter-dimensionally and holographic ally. They are each everywhere literally all of the time, past, present and future. They exist as the determinant “values” in the manifestation phenomenon. And again, consciousness in the form of Consciousness Units expresses intentionally, as in the unconscious co-creation of the human or elemental expressions of all the other varied forms of “substance” in your dimension. When you have received adequate information from your experiment, gradually disengage from the Trance State. Return to fully sensory awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your observations of the Reality Creation phenomenon.

SUBCONSCIOUS MANIFESTATION ENERGY STREAM

Now the strands of incipient matter we have just discussed compose the latticework that is the grid of Coordinate Points upon and within and about our self-created reality. There is a holographic nature of these strands of incipient matter. They compose the physical reality Constructs of our Third-Dimensional world INCLUDING our own physical body and the physical constructs that we might call space, air etc.

So you now imagine, as I attempt to bring this description to fullness, how this Reality Construction phenomenon might exist as a profound image? Can you imagine the creation of Third-dimensional Reality in its totality as being powered or energized into activity? What is lacking here in our description, you see, is the motivating energizing power that Sustains the phenomenon. Let us refer to this concept as the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream. This energy flow supports your reality by continuously lending the creative energy of All That Is to the manifestation of each and every construct in our Personal Reality Field.

The SEMES is subconscious. It is riven by our Soul’s Intent. We are experiencing on Earth our reincarnational dramas and comedies Intent is other- directed. It is directed in essence by All That Is. Now we decided before we were born, what body we were to inhabit and what Lessons we were to learn in this current Life. So we truly do co-create with All That Is our Earthly existence. But again I must remind that we have free will “to do as you please,” even while in the midst of our Lessons, which might be a truly sober and serious nature.

Threads,Strands and Gestalts of consciousness

In previous Blogs, I described the Consciousness Units as being composed of threads. I now further state that these theoretical threads of awarized energy exist in various “arrays” of potentiality, what we are calling Gestalts of Consciousness – the pre-manifestation templates of creation. Infinitesimally small threads of energy under the direction of elemental consciousness, coalesce into strands of incipient matter that are combined in various ways to create our Reality Constructs.

Now a matrix implies a grid or network of interconnecting pathways or energy streams. Can you imagine in your mind’s eyes this network of Love Light? The pathways are the strands of etheric material composed of Consciousness Units. Within this matrix exist the Coordinate Points. The strands also coalesce into more complex structures – The Gestalts of Consciousness – which hold the potential for the creation of anything conceived by consciousness. All of this etheric material is literally “Love in action” the all-encompassing power of Love that is the essence and creative energy All That Is.

Are you beginning to see now? This Love Light energy that power the strands of etheric material, is the creative element for healing of all types. Focused Love Light is utilized by our tribal healers, for example, in very precise ways to assist their “patients” in balancing and “making whole” their unbalanced bodies. So it is literally true that Love is the healing agent in all restorations of the human body and spirit.

LOVE LIGHT MATRIX AND METAPHORS

The Love Light is the matrix of divine influences onto which we fashion our Reality Constructs. Here let us speak of the importance of context. It is ALL context, Dear Blog Reader. Within this milieu we are describing as the Love Light Matrix, the Telepath Network, the Central Field of Experiencing and the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, we create out of Consciousness Units those Reality Constructs that compose what we experience as “Bedrock Reality” – a cliché we have found helpful in these discussions.

Of course we use metaphors in this work to assist the Blog Reader in an understanding of the principles and ideas we are describing. Again, the creation of our Personal Reality Field that we accomplish on a moment-to-moment basis with the divine energy of All That Is, is so complex an undertaking that our physical brain could not conceive of the many operations that are undergone within ONE SINGLE SECOND of our existence.

Mind Blower.” This refers to, I gather, a concept or image that is so stunning that a single human mind cannot comprehend it in its totality. This is an description of what the mind encounters when these matters of Reality Creation are considered.

To express the divine – the ineffable – we must always resort to metaphors and theoretical constructs, for the reality of the subject matter is so incredibly complex and rich, that the Third-Dimensional consciousness cannot hold it for very long before it falls away into chaos. The great traditions of our world teach the student how to maintain an equilibrium in these matters. The hope is that the student will master the skills of witnessing the Divine without succumbing to the negative states of fear, anger, confusion. So metaphors are used.

Now perhaps some mixing of metaphors is necessary here to provide a choice for you The Blog Reader. We are hoping that you will find some image or idea that works for you here in the understanding of this material. We are preparing you for the regimens that follow these introductory chapters.

LOVE

Building upon this premise, can you see how a natural trajectory for a “typical” Consciousness Unit or Atom might well be toward the creation of Love? Love is information or light. What I shall be referring to as Love Light in this Blog, then, simply information of a particular type. It is the creative force of manifestation.

If you have been following our discussion of the nature of reality, you will remember that I have described All That Is as the source for All realities. You may then see that it follows that Love in our model of Reality Creation, is the energy or “impetus” for the expression of All That Is within our Third Dimension.

This is not new information I am providing . Our World Religions place great importance on the role of Love within society. The virtues of Love are spoken of by many healers and leaders within our communities. Yet here I hope to define what I am calling “Love with a capital L;” The Love that I am describing to you in the literal “fuel” for the manifestation of EVERYTHING in our world. This Love or Love Light has a particular frequency or rate of vibration that facilitates the assemblage of Consciousness Units into Reality Constructs. The Love Light is the power of All That Is. Period.

It is the force that activates the Consciousness Units to express ideas and images into physical reality through the Coordinate Points. Do you see, then, that it it important to learn how to utilize this Love Light in a conscious deliberate fashion?


Where is the Love currently? “My world is certainly lacking in the Love that creates realities!” We shall have more to say on the diversion of Love in the creation of negative realities later in this Blog series. For now, please remember that our Earth is a dramatic stage for the enactment of what are often perceived as “Negative” or “painful” reincarnational dramas.

These dramas may indeed “appear” to be devoid of Love in any measure. However, you have “set yourself up” to experience your Lessons in the way you are experiencing them. Indeed, your ultimate Lesson in the Third Dimension may be of creation to create the positive out of the negative. Coincidently, that is the precise subject of this blog.

COORDINATE POINTS AND REALITY CREATION

Some areas of our world hold “more” of the Coordinate Points than others. These parts of our planet are much desired as places or worship and mediation. The potentialities for manifestation into physical reality are greater in these areas of high energy or accelerated vibration. Yet within our own personal environment, we may find with just a bit of exploration, just where the processes of creation work for us.

For example: have you ever found that the simple act of changing your study location within your home had the effect of greatly streamlining the creative process for you? Perhaps intuitively you understood that the dispersal of Coordinate Points in the new area was more conducive to study and learning than the previous one.

The Coordinate Points may also be conceived of as gateways into adjacent dimensions representing different timeframes and so different Reincarnational Existences I hope I am not complicating this discussion too much with these heady topics and definitions. In late Blogs we shall go further into our explanations with examples and experimentation.

For now let us just say that the precept – for example “you create your own reality” – may be thought of as the general, overriding influence in the New Science theory while as I said, the percept may represent the “cutting edge” – a useful comparison – of consciousness as it creates and perceives the world.

CONSCIOUSNESS UNITS

These Consciousness Units are, of course, the ubiquitous elements of awarized energy – the “building blocks” of Reality Creation. And as for the Coordinate Points, here we shall simply the Idea Construct for dissemination to a broader audience.

The Coordinate Points permeate our Third-Dimensional reality and direct the “activity” of the Consciousness Units, according to the energy templates of Gestalts of consciousness. We could say that the potential for physical expression of the Consciousness Unit is “adjusted” by the Coordinate Point at the direction of subconscious and conscious thought.

Now need I mention that this is a collective effort? The creation of our world is an exercise in mutual cooperation between our “human” consciousness and the “creative intelligence” or consciousness of everything else in our world. This description pertains to greater as well as the lesser here. We cooperate with every atom within our Personal Reality Field as well as every atom within the greater reality field that we might call our Consensus Reality.

SUBCONSCIOUS THOUGHT

To reiterate, our world is largely created by subconscious thought, as we know. During the dream state we create incipient Reality Constructs that we materialize into physical Reality Constructs on awakening. Now it may already seem obvious to us that we create our physical body without much conscious thought. Our unconscious, in tandem with All That Is, creates our physical body “naturally,” without the need for constant energy or direction from the conscious mind or ego.

However, as we explore the expression of the Soul through the ego, and we begin to correct our negative thoughts and their expression into physical Reality Constructs, we will begin to gain conscious control of these unconscious processes. This is the path of healing the physical body, for example. We learn how to fine-tune the expression of Consciousness Units through the Coordinate Points for the creation of an improved or symptom-free body.

PRECEPT AND PERCEPT

Facts of our existence. These are the precepts – that when fully understood, will allow us to witness and remember the activities of our Simultaneous Lives, for example, as well as the literal moment-to-moment creation of our Personal Reality from the thoughts and images within our mental environment.

EXAMPLES OF PRECEPTS:
You create your own reality.
You are connected to everything in your world.
You can change the Consensus Reality from your Personal Reality Field.
Emotion is the creative energy of All That Is in action.
Human consciousness is founded in Love.
Diversions from Love through Negative Emotions create Negative Realities.
All imbalances may be corrected through Love and Courage.
You are the sum of your Simultaneous Lives within your current Moment Point.
Your Inner senses may be used to examine and change anything past, present or future.
You are in telepathic rapport with everything in your world.
Reality Constructs are composed of Consciousness Units of awarized energy.
Coordinate Points permeate matter and space and modulate the activity of the Consciousness Units.
Your Intention, emotions and Beliefs provide the energy and direction for Reality Creation.
Everything exists initially as Gestalts of Consciousness, the nonphysical “templates” of creation.

Now the percept here – a slightly different spelling than precept. I trust you shall notice – is another very important concept we shall discuss. A percept may be defined as, “that element of consciousness that creates the Reality Construct and Instantaneously perceives or witnesses the construct.”

PROTO SCIENTISTS

The modern scientific tradition is giving way to a body of work that was created by the forebears of our world. These proto scientists lived within the Mystery Civilizations. We refer to these as Mystery civilizations for the obvious reason that we have forgotten the valuable insights into human behavior and the nature of reality that we learned within these societies.

I have described  how mankind has ceded the powers of Reality Creation to those in authority in exchange for “subtle gifts” – the protection of the group, the opportunity to earn a living, the confirmation of a place in the hereafter etc.; etc.; etc. This giving-up of power went hand-in-hand with a mass forgetting of the old traditions of healing, group spirituality and wonder-workings of various kinds.

The Divine Day

HYPOTHESIS: You may create contact with the divine over the course of an entire waking day.

This experiment is one of creating the Trance State long term. For our purposes, the Trance is a sacred state of awareness. When you conduct your Ritual of sanctuary and enter your Trance, you are walking the Path of the seeker of wisdom. When you can embody this state of awareness over the course of minutes and hours, you will be well on your way toward awakening to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension that we have described in my blogs.

Now choose a day when you will not be bothered by outside forces. You will want to be left alone for this experiment, if at all possible. We are assuming here that you have already experienced some form of contact and communication with one or more of your Guides. However, if you have yet to manifest this relationship, simply “act as If” you are already in touch with your Energy Personality. Conduct this experiment as though guided by your spirit Guide, for this may well act to initiate that relationship.

In my last series of Blogs I presented an exercise in bringing the energy of Reality Creation up from the emotional center into the mental center. This mental center is located directly between your Eyes. It is here that you may sense the divine information stream as it seeks to penetrate the barrier of the ego/intellect. Just as we encourage the Blog users of The Healing regimen to create the healing moment long term – into minutes, hours and days – we encourage you the Blog Reader to create this initial contemplative state for as long as you can. It would be best if you could begin the Divine Day on Awakening from sleep.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
If you have yet to develop your Ritual of Sanctuary, simply imagine a Golden Light surrounding you. Nothing harmful can penetrate this field of Light. It has a healing protective influence.

Now create the Trance State as best you can. The Trance is simply a natural state of awareness marked by deep relaxation and a focus on the inner world. I would ask you to sense what energies may be present in the solar plexus area of your body. If you sense a churning activity, as though emotions were ebbing and flowing, please bring this felt sense UP to the mental center directly between the eyes. As you do this exercise, you may notice that the churning sensation ceases. The felt sense becomes one of calm and assurance. There is also an emotional toe of ecstasy just below the surface. This is indication that you are using your intent to bring it up, up into the divine portal.

FINDINGS – Document throughout your waking day your experiences with keeping your awareness in the mental center.

BELIEF CHANGE

Now there are at least two distinct ways to go with regards to belief change, if you do indeed wish to change your beliefs and thus your reality: you may change your perceptions of your Personal Reality Field, or you can go for direct change of the underlying beliefs themselves. First, though the ancient technologies of Healing Talk via the Trance State, and through other Rituals of Contact and Communication with nonphysical beings, such as the Energy Personality and other Energy Bodies, the perceptions of the Personal Reality may be altered, thus altering the Reality creation. We may also describe this as a “fine tuning” of the Inner Senses, so that they may more clearly perceive and create.

The second method entails identifying the beliefs you wish to change through a self-questioning process and creating more productive belief statements representing improved “healthier” beliefs that you wish to “make your own.” The statements are then continuously written down or typed into a computer, the theory being that the new beliefs are internalized the more that you document them.

These two methods represent two different ways of relating to physical reality: the imaginable and the literal. Naturally there are others. If you feel more comfortable visualizing your beliefs, I suggest you use the imaginable method in your experiments. If you feel more comfortable writing them down, use the literal approach. And of course, beyond my humble offerings, use your own methods that suit you.

Again, for those of you who may feel uncomfortable with terms such as Trance State and Ritual of Contact and Communication, please make up your own names for these states of consciousness. I am merely using common terms that the majority of my Blog Readers may understand. The Trance State is used by many of us on the subtle levels as we attempt to make ourselves understood.

As for the use of the term Ritual to describe the process of contacting and communicating with the denizens of non physical reality, please note that the term Ritual is the precise one used in our World Religions to describe their individual and carried methods for contacting the various spirits, gods and goddesses, God, and what have you. So we are merely presenting terms already in common usage by those of us in the West and elsewhere.

FREE WILL AND DIVINE WILL

Your choice in these matters IS a matter of your free will in the moment. Might I suggest that in these moments of opportunity for You the Soul, that you listen to the suggestions of your Guides rather than to the self-centered voice of the ego/intellect? This is merely a suggestion, my friend. The free will choice is yours and I am acting here in a purely advisory capacity. I simply urge you to take your own advice in these situations, when in fact you are embodying the Soul Self. It will be quite easy to determine if you are experiencing this unique perspective. The Soul Self is informed through communications with All That Is. This perspective may guide you to the best resolution of any given creative challenge you may face.

The differences between the subconscious creation of negative realities and the conscious co-creation of positive life-affirming realities by the awakening human consciousness through use if the Divine Will are quite pronounced. You will know it when you are faced with a decision to go one way or the other. I will leave it at that for now. Obviously, you are each required to learn your individual Lessons. I would not wish to give you ALL the answers, and by so doing, rob you of the “joy” of learning your Lessons on your own.

LESSONS AND THE SHIFT

Now this “quickening” is indeed upon us in Third-Dimensional Reality. Those of us engaged in negative ruminations, and their attendant manifestation into negative Reality Constructs, will find that we are confronted, in an almost simultaneous fashion, with the products of our mental digressions. Just as the practitioners of Loving Understanding and Courage will find their positive manifestations strengthening, so too will the practitioners of doubt, anger, hatred and such, find themselves consumed with the energies released during these errant creative activities.

Is there any wonder why such an intensification of this creative process produces the appropriate results? We create our own reality according to our beliefs. If we are focusing on the fear and cynical distrust of our neighbors, for example, is it any wonder that our neighbors continue to cause us discomfort? And is it any wonder that as we awaken as a species this discomfort grows? Indeed.

I suggest the discomfort may grow until it becomes UNBEARABLE. Then we will of necessity be faced with a choice in our reincarnational dramas. Will we learn our Lesson or will we not? Will we continue to hold-on to the anger, fear and cynicism, or will we let-go and feel the ecstasy just below the surface of our human consciousness? This ecstasy is the creative Loving energy of All That Is.

BELIEFS AND THE SHIFT

Our feedback reality continually endorses our ongoing emotional states according to the “structures” of our beliefs. Here we shall define as those “habitual patterns of perceptual analysis utilized in the creation of Reality Constructs.” Our beliefs are the potent ideas, images and emotional contents that exist within our mental environment or psyche. Our beliefs may be thought of as the “rough sketch” for our creative project – our ongoing life with its experiences, behaviors, and so on.

Now currently it is possible for us to address issues of core beliefs and core values, like never before in our history as a species. Our evolution as a Soul depends upon change in our beliefs. We will not, individually or collectively, make the transition we have been discussing in these new series of Blogs with the outmoded beliefs we currently hold.

The world is integrating, you see, at an extremely rapid pace. We in the developed nations, the many millions of us, are behind the learning curve in this matter. This may be due to our obsession with material objects of mass consumption. The prevalence of the egoic perspective within our individual and mass consciousness also holds us back. And it certainly does not serve us in the West to “export” these limited perspectives through our Negative Media and through our military excursions into foreign lands.

This is why I am writing Blogs. The greater part of the world is awakening “on Schedule.” It is in the developed nations in particular, and some other parts of our world, that we are still focused on the creation of negative, fear-based realities.

PERSONAL REALITY FIELD

The Inner Senses, the nonphysical counterparts to our outer physical senses, are the creators of our Personal Reality Field. Perception creates reality in our Third Dimension. And the reality we create is dependent wholly upon what we believe is possible. If we are experiencing a reality of peace and Loving Understanding with our fellow inhabitants of Earth, we have a system of beliefs that permits, allows and effectively determines a Personal Reality Field of peace and Loving Understanding. We have in this example, believed into existence our peaceful Loving world.

Now it is also true that everything we find in our Personal Reality Field we have believed into reality. Might I say that, for the most part, if we feel uncomfortable, fearful, anxious with the state of our Personal reality, it may be due to our creating unconsciously? Creating unconsciously leaves us open to the Negative Entities. Watch your thoughts. Watch where your fearful thoughts originate. Are they being amplified and corroborated within the negative spheres of influence?

The negative realms are sensed as separate from the self. The Negative Entities that reside within these spheres of activity normally will not seek us out and attempt to fix on our being. Yet if we are experiencing negative, anxious, angry, or violent emotional states, we leave ourselves open to encountering these influences. For this reason, it is important to observe our emotional states throughout our waking reality. If we are experiencing fear, assess our sensing and Reality Creation and see if we are being driven by negative outside sources.

Yet please rest assured that if you find yourself “contaminated” by these energies, you may easily correct your situation. You may do so with your Intention in the moment. What I would suggest you do is first perform the experiment we have called Clearing The Emotional Body. This activity raises the Negative Emotions from the emotional center to the mental center where they may be transformed into their opposites.

Briefly, you simply relax in a meditative posture and imagine or visualize the “churning” energies of The Emotional Body rising up to the mental center directly between your physical eyes. Emotional resolution is achieved. The contact with the Divine is established.

BODY OF LIGHT

Now this Emotional Body is perceived as Light to the Inner Senses. It is also conceived in Light. All is Light. Everything in our created reality is composed of Light in the form of our theoretical constructs the Consciousness Units. Here we are simplifying and spiritualizing my messages to humanity. For this reason we shall also refer to the Energy Construct of the human physical body as being composed of spiritual information.

In this context, you Blog Reader, are a divine message from All That Is, articulating your particular philosophy, behaviors and mentality within physical reality as an “envoy” of the sacred. Again, if you are tempted to dismiss this as mere “religious ranting,” I urge you to take a deep breath and go within for just a moment. Sense your ultimate divinity. It is obvious to us who are now instructing you, and to you it may become obvious in your experimentation, as you discover Findings that support my statement.

CHOICE OF TERMS

I realize that these are words that may carry their own emotional undertones for my Blog Reader. I would ask you then, if this is the case, to look beyond the ego-identified definitions and references of theses terms. Although it is not my desire to challenge you excessively in this endeavor challenge you I must. As an educator to humanity for “countless” years. I have found it advantageous to present material for the student’s assessment that stands what you might call “diametrically opposed” to the ideas, images and beliefs that the student may be holding in their mental environment at any one time.

I do hope that if you feel rising anger and righteous indignation making itself known within – as I have just described to you – The Emotional Body, that you perhaps take a deep breath and go deeper with this work, this project yours and mine.

You see, the Soul’s perspective is necessarily through the ego/intellect. I would suggest, in times of anger and when feeling affronted by this material, you simply step to the side a bit, metaphorically speaking, and allow your Soul Self to perceive your world. This is an easy first step in the “awakening” process. Please have faith, or perhaps Courage is a better word here, that this project will pay off for you in many different ways, rewarding you with information of a decidedly beneficial nature.

THE EMOTIONAL BODY

This emotional Body may be perceived as the intersection of “energies” of Reality Creation within our physical construct. We may experience it as existing within the heart region. It is within this construct that the Reality Creation agendas of All That Is of our Reincarnational Existences may read. We may, for example, observe within this Emotional Body the emotional and symbolic underpinnings of a chronic illness that currently plagues us. Or we may witness a dramatization of an event from our past that keeps us from enjoying prosperity in our present. Thus we may sense these strategies in our own particular fashion, using the Inner Senses that we are developing through experimentation in this project.

The greater sphere of activity within which rests this Emotional Body we refer to as The Light Body, as do many of the current teachers and practitioners in our world. This construct is “built” from the intersecting energies of existence – or dimensions if you prefer – of our many Simultaneous Lives. This Inner Senses representation of The Emotional Body, as well as the Inner Sense of sight itself, we are calling the Auric Vision.

TUNING-IN TO OTHER LIVES

For example: If my friend Rob was to select at random one of the planes surrounding the Central Field of Experiencing in our diagram, and using his imagination and his Inner Senses “tuned-in” to another life, he might very well find himself experiencing his aboriginal existence, or possibly his existence as a female in New Orleans Louisiana in the U.S.A. or as a Roman soldier from many hundreds of years ago, in our terms. These are just a few of Rob’s Reincarnational Existences.

You Dear Blog Reader also have a vast store of existences just waiting to be explored. This illustration may serve as a meditation piece for you in this way. In each of our Blog Series, we have presented these simple focusing tools to assist you in perceiving your greater reality – the reality of your Soul Self. Please utilize this tool in your experimentation as you attempt to access your other lives.

CENTRAL FIELD OF EXPERIENCING

Let me add to this cursory explanation with a description of a new metaphor we are presenting: Central Field of Experiencing. Now we exist within an intersection of dimensional planes.

The intersection of several planes. They share a common area, that we shall call our Central Field of Experiencing. Let us say that each of these planes of existence represents one of our Simultaneous Lives. Let us further state that the common area here our Central Field, is our current self experiencing life in this time-frame.

Now all of these planes are connected at the Central Field and so not only does our current self have at its disposal the perceptual ability to experience events within our current life, but also, because we are indeed connected to the other lives – hard-wired, in a sense – we have the POTENTIAL to experience events, feel emotions and have thoughts from within these other simultaneously-lived lives.

The planes surrounding the Central Field represent our various Reincarnational Selves as well as the many PROBABLE existences that we co-create with our consciousness and All That Is. This Central Field, then, is our current Third-Dimensional existence. Look around at your surroundings. This is what we are referring to in this current discussion.

Now as we look around us what do we see? Do we see a futuristic landscape with mythological creatures grazing on the lawn? Do we see a vignette of interaction between two family members from a life in a Mystery Civilization, such as Atlantis? Do we witness the life we are living now, complete in every detail except for one? Perhaps there is a stranger, someone we do not recognize, apparently living their life with us in our home. Does this unique detail “prove” to us that we are viewing a scene that does not exist in our current physical reality?

I would guess that you are perceiving your surroundings as quite similar to those we left behind you as you proceeded to read this Blog. My point here is that the possibility exists for you, in this time of accelerated consciousness, during this Dimensional-Shift we have described, to briefly inhabit the bodies of your Reincarnational Selves. You accomplish this by refocusing your perceptive apparatus – the Inner Senses – on a tangential plane of existence. You will be picking up on the sensory experiencing of these humans who are indeed you, Dear Blog Reader, as you are engaged in living your lives within the many time-frames on Earth and in other systems.

UNCONSCIOUS CREATION-EXAMPLE

Let us present an example here for illustration. Imagine if you will, a human undergoing an extremely stressful life event. Perhaps this person has incurred a job loss and is quite worried about the financial implications of this negative event. The emotional state of this human is chaotic – stress-filled – as a cascade of Negative Emotions floods their mental environment. Consequently, the Personal Reality Field of this person is also chaotic. And because it is created from Negative Emotions, there numerous triggers within their Personal Reality radius that “cause,” in a reflexive fashion, the continuing recreation of Negative Emotions with in their psyche.

Now immediately prior to the jobs loss, let us say that the mental environment of this human was quite balanced and even “happy.” Their monetary needs were met. Their needs for a social outlet were net with the job as well. So the firing of this person has a devastating effect upon their mental stability, as we may well imagine.

Now let us further propose that a great mistake was made here with this firing of out theoretical worker. The employer made a mistake through a mix-up of some sort, and upon discovering this, they immediately rectified the error, by perhaps calling the hapless human and giving them their job back.

Well, again as we imagine, the Personal Reality Field of this human example was instantly transformed with the call from the employer reinstating them in their position. Happiness was again experienced. Relief from monetary worry was experienced, as well as gratitude, perhaps, that they would continue to enjoy the social amenities of their employment with humans with whom they had developed strong, Loving relationships.

I hope you see my point here in this example. We are all, as humans existing within the Third Dimension, engaged in a witnessing of our mental environments projected outward into physical reality on a moment-to-moment basis. The ideas and images within our psyches are the blueprints for the creation of the varied Reality Constructs that compose our Personal Reality Field. The mutable emotions are the energies that power this reality Creation Phenomenon.

OUR THOUGHT-CREATED WORLD

This Blog we will present the basics. The phenomenon we are calling Reality Creation will be discussed in a very simplified form. Though we will certainly add to my theory in so far as further describing the role of the Scientist of Consciousness in the exploration of the non physical reality, the following Blogs detailing the rise of the New Science will present a much more detailed analysis.

Now for information, Dear Blog Reader, our world is composed entirely of thought. A musician composes musical works of art with notes as the creative material. In the creation of realities, the human in the Third Dimension uses thought in artistic ways.

To carry the comparison further… just as the “mad” artist might refuse to admit their creation of the art before them – paintings, let us say – the majority of human beings refuse to admit that they have had a hand in the literal creation of their physical world. Certainly many of us would say that this is crazy thinking, or “magical thinking” as our psychiatrists refer to it. We have become so estranged from our works that we fail to see ourselves in the “mirror” of our physical reality.

UNCONSCIOUS CREATION

One reason for this estrangement is that this creation of our world is done largely on the unconscious level. It is truly a projection, in this sense, for we are individually projecting our subconscious thoughts, images and other mental constructs out onto the “Screen” of our Personal Reality Field.

Our thoughts give birth to realities. Fearful thoughts gave birth to fearful realities. Thoughts of Courage and Loving Understanding give birth to Courageous and Loving realities. You may witness this for yourselves within your own manifestations. Watch and see how each element in your perceptual field REFLECTS your inner state of emotion and imagination.

MASS DENIAL

Perhaps other examples are necessary to help pull you from your denial. Many of us are most probably familiar with denial of the drug addict or the Alcoholic. In these instances it is very clear-cut. The subject may be experiencing the destruction of all that they hold most dear – family, business, friends, it is all falling away – yet still they maintain their “innocence.” This is denial at its most obvious. But the negative effects of denial are also felt in every other sphere of human activity.

In the Consensus Reality Manifestation there is evidence of mass-created denial at work. Witness how the many millions of us in the West still deny our responsibility in the creation of negative conditions in the lives of those who live in developing nations. We are the squanderers of our Mother Earth’s resources. We in the West use a great deal more of the oil, minerals, lumber etc. relative to population than do those in the poor developing countries.

The rationalization here, a common one, is to state, perhaps under our breath, that “these people deserve their lot in life. They may be lazy. They merely have to pull themselves up by their own bootstraps,” and so on. I have chastised quite gently for these offenses in our last series of Blogs. I now continue this tradition in this series of Blogs.

Now I am aware that you are a student of mine and you are attempting to “work” on yourself. You are attempting to learn your Lessons and perhaps you are awakening from your denial. But please also notice the residual aspect of denial that is always with us in this regard. It is the seed from which racism and other unsavory misperceptions and misjudgments grow.

DENIAL II

With denial we have another very successful strategy for avoiding our Lessons. Here we are literally creating a reality for oneself unconsciously, and then disavowing any hand in the creation of the reality. “I am innocent,” you are in effect saying. Yet obviously it is your world that you are co-creating here. Your Personal Reality Field certainly bears the marks of your personality. Still, when we are up against something that we do not wish to face-perhaps because it is embarrassing to us, something quite true, yet something that challenges our standards – we disaffirm it, we disempower it, we DENY it.

We deny the thing with vehemence relative to the importance we place upon it. In other words, we deny what we most know to be the utter truth, in the honest appraisal of the subject at hand. Here again, those of us who observe our behavior, and know our motives and indeed our probable developmental paths as human beings, must laugh at such nonsense. The amount of energy wasted in such denials of self – for that is what these instances truly represent – is vast beyond all comprehension. And so we must laugh to ourselves, as we observe in the midst of our “Issues.”

For example: when we experience a twinge of Negative Emotion, perhaps triggered by something in our environment that reminds us of an event, a negative event for our past, we immediately redirect the ego/intellect to something other than the negative memory, the negative event.

Now you may use this skill of distracting the ego/intellect to our advantage within Reality Creation programs described in this Blog. The key to use of this technique is to FIRST listen to what the information stream is attempting to convey to us. Listen and understand. “Face the Music,” to coin a phrase.

In this sense, we have the opportunity for awakening to our denial in each and every one of our self-created moments. This current Moment Point, as you are reading this Blog, may become a moment of awakening if we but merely CONSIDER, that what we most ardently deny – particularly with regards to our so-called “Issues” – may be better embraced as the truth of the matter.

This is a simple test that we may utilize in assessing any perceived fact of life in our current existence. What do we most fear? What do we hate most strongly. Herein lie our weaknesses in our Reality Creation agendas. Inconsistencies, prejudices, cultural delusions, artifacts of consciousness that cause us to grimace or wince inwardly may be indicators of this denial of the Soul Self.

INTELLECTUALIZATION II

One of the most popular forms of avoidance for us is intellectualization. Through this strategy we assess the Divine information within our mental sphere as something completely explainable. Scientific reasoning – logical deduction – is used to place the information in a neat and tidy and already known and understood category. Here a stream of spiritually – informed communication is interrupted and redirected to other parts of the psyche where it will not cause any disruptions.

To continue this metaphor, the stream of Divine Information attempts to erode or melt away the self-limiting beliefs within the psyche – beliefs that may no longer serve the purposes of the evolving Soul. But the ego is in charge here, and the strategy of intellectualization works quite well for the majority of us. It allows us to ignore, as mere mental anomalies, these messages from our Higher Self. A brief example: when you experience a viewing of a non physical being – a “Spirit” in our terms – we ascribe the sensory information we are receiving to “Tricks” of the eyes, being perhaps mentally exhausted, hallucinations due to any number of “Rational” causes. I am certain that the Blog Reader may contribute their own examples.

Of course in the workplace this strategy allows us to keep focused on the task at hand. In our private lives the misdirection of the ego/intellect allows us to continue on our path of development, however nonproductive and even self-destructive this path might be. Indeed, it seems that the more nonproductive the life lived, the more firmly the ego intellectualizes – “explain away” – the information received from the Divine Sources.

EGO AND SOUL

I have suggested that our main task in physical reality is to participate willingly in this exercise, as though we were in school, for we are indeed in an educational relationship with our Third-Dimensional Reality. You the Blog reader are both teacher and student. Your greater personal consciousness, what we have been calling the Soul in these Blog works, acts as a teacher to our Earthly ego. On the subtle levels, You-the-Soul know full well what are your Lessons for your current incarnation.

The ego, what we are calling the student aspect in this description, “pretends” to be unaware of these Life Lessons and their dramatization in physical reality. This is “the play” of our physical world – our creation of learning experiences in ensemble with other humans, for our mutual edification, and for the greater experiencing of All That Is.

I have covered this quite thoroughly in the new Blog Series, and so I shall not digress. However, please take from this brief reminder this fact of existence: just as many other teachers both physical and metaphysical have stated, “Each” second of our Earthly experience is an opportunity for spiritual growth. The way to move forward in our Soul evolution, is to perfect the transformation of Negative Emotions into their diving counterparts.

Now this quest for self-realization may be short if we are prepared to face our Lessons directly, without the denial and avoidance for which humans are so famous. To those of us in higher dimensions, it can appear as quite strange how many continue to suffer the effects of anger, fear, and the like, all the while knowing full well how we may extricate ourselves from our dilemma.

Here I am referring to the continuous messages from Beings of Light that exist within our mental environment, yet which we ignore through various mental and physical maneuvers. Perhaps I should take a moment here, before we get into the substance of this series, to describe for you these incredible gymnastics of consciousness.

LESSONS

This is an series of Blogs on the subject of Reality Creation. It is assumed that you have developed the skills of self-observation described in the new material, or perhaps you have read other Teachings on the subject of receiving and translating divine information. As an advanced work, we shall take it for granted that you are learning your Lessons.

As you well know, the Lessons for you in physical reality are the emotional states of anger, fear, shame, racial prejudice and others, that you must transform with you intent into Loving Understanding and Courage. In this way, our system is quite similar to others that you may have known in your life as a seeker of knowledge. This makes sense, does it not? The seeker of wisdom tries as many systems as necessary until they have realized the Soul’s Intent.

BABYHOOD

Babyhood is indeed an extremely creative stage of life in the development of the human. Since one is fresh from the home dimension, there may be lingering memories of that experience. The baby may hold full memories of the previous incarnation as well, and may be experiencing a “reliving” of past experiences while seemingly engrossed in the typical baby behaviors one notices. Now, the job of the parent, unfortunately, is usually to train the infant in the ways of the world – – physical reality. And so the parents begin to task of socializing the infant.

As this process continues, the baby spends so much time engaged in the training – being trained to fit into the culture – that memories of the past incarnation and the time in between lives, are quickly forgotten. It is rare that a child grows to adulthood with these precious memories intact. So the divinity of babyhood is experienced by all of us, but only for a few short months. After that, the connection is broken. The child is watched carefully to assure that they are developing “normally.”

And when imaginary playmates arrive, modern parents too often are fearful that the child might grow into adulthood with these characters at their side. They are mostly banished by parents, as an embarrassment. The child is then taught to let go of these primal relationships, and most do. Again, in our aboriginal cultures and some alternative communities, the baby is encouraged to be “the divine one” long into childhood. This sets the state for the development of the divine child, the magical child: being the human that lives in both the subtle and physical worlds with grace and power.

SAME-TIME SALON

HYPOTHESIS: You may meet with other entity counter-parts within nonlinear time.

Counterparts within the spacious present moment of your shared Simultaneous Lives. I realize that this would seem to fly in the face of everything that has been taught to you in schools. Yet remember what I have been suggesting to you about authorities and institutions. In your awakening, which is currently well underway, you will be given the opportunity many times to reformat and reconstitute your core beliefs about yourself and your world. You may do this reformation with your imagination. In this example, the last experiment of this current blog series, I am asking you to take a very courageous step forward into the unknown reality.

I am asking you to demonstrate to yourself, Dear Blog Reader, that you can achieve contact and communications with others such as yourself – other Entity Counterparts – by simply affirming your intention to do so, here in your current Moment Point – your Point of Power. You may rely on all of the findings pulled from the previous experiments It may help to have an underlying attitude of playfulness here. You are having fun with your imagination, just as you may have done countless times when you were a child.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now relax yourself using your most effective methods. When you are experiencing a relaxed state of consciousness, with the metaphor of the radio dial in mind, tune the dial to that state of consciousness of Simultaneous Time in which you may sense your physical counterparts. Have the intention that you will make contact, just as you have and the intention to accomplish other research goals in the previous experiments.

Of course, you may ask for assistance from your Energy Personality. Now you may be presented with data for interpretation by your Inner Senses. It may come to you in various sensory forms. You may see images that are quite familiar, as if you have seen these faces many times, perhaps in dreams, other locales on your Earth.

If you feel that you may take notes into a recorder or onto the pages of your journal without disrupting what you are experiencing, do so. Again, you may have the overall sense that you are making it all up. Of course, you are indeed doing so, but no less and no more than you are making up your Personal Reality Field. When you feel as though you have learned enough from the experiment, gradually come to full sensory awareness in physical reality.

FINDINGS – Document your findings. Now the “after effects” of this final experiment may include “coincidental” meetings with your Entity Counterparts as you go about your daily activities. You will know them when you see them. I am quite confident that you will achieve great success in these sojourns into the non-physical.

RITUAL OF POWER

In collaboration with your energy personality you may take back your power.

To take back power is very healthy thing to do for a human quite used to “hiding” within the security of groups. This is not a power “over” but a power “with,” you see – a power shared with all other incarnated humans beings. You will be reminded that you are first an individual Soul within a physical body. YOU-Soul are at the center of your physical and non-physical worlds. This cosmic center of our world is all-powerful. Though it appears that you are perhaps simply a tiny voice within a very large chorus, on a Soul level you know that you have only “pretended” to have this small voice. You had no intention of giving up your power permanently.

Let me digress on this point for a moment… in the reincarnational drama of our life, there is much pretending. The ego loves to pretend that life is a certain way and that interesting and dramatic events are occurring. If it were not for the ego’s excellent dramatic skills in diverting your attention from the TRUE reality beneath the façade, we would not believe with all our heart in the camouflage reality in which we live. So it is healthy and necessary, to a degree, to believe in the fantasies and pretendings that make up our moment-to-moment existence. However, if we are to awaken, we may have to dispense with the comforting stories of our physical reality. Now that is not to say that we must surrender ALL of the physical trappings of our Personal Reality. That is not advisable and indeed that is  not possible for most of us.

To take back our power requires some personalized, empowered imagery. Perhaps we can remember when we experienced our power being ceded to authorities. Perhaps we can remember feeling diminished. Perhaps we remember feeling that it was necessary to be a part of the group. If so, it should be easy to create our ritual. Simply consider the opposites of these feelings and these images.

So just as I asked you to consider your personal feeling relative to a subtle emotion of peace and security, I now ask you to consider those ideas, images and emotions relative to the idea of “taking back power.” And again, it is a good idea to write down what comes to your mind. Draw pictures of the images you see in your mind. Consolidate these mental constructs into one image or emotion that virtually resonates with personal empowerment. If you feel it would help, you might create a symbolic piece of jewelry to wear or create a statement to repeat to yourself that infers the empowering ideas and images for You-the-Soul.

Now as an example: let us suppose you are experiencing a sense of disempowerment with regards to your family. This may be long-standing condition for you, as it is with many of your contemporaries. Though you are now an adult, your parents or other family members may treat you as though you are still a child. You ceded your power to these family members when you were a child and possibly reinforced this dynamic throughout your life to “Keep peace” within the group, to be a part of the family collective, in effect saying, “I am not powerful enough, I am not worthy enough to participate in the family and have my words valued.

Let these others, the authorities, run the show, and I shall reside in the background.” Then as you grew to adulthood, you used this template of creation to create your roles in other groups: in school, in social groups, at work, and so on. The single template has served to create for you a lifetime of subservience to authority. You have become this “small voice” within every group thereafter.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
You are now creating a different template for the creation of personal realities. It may be “the opposite” of the template you have been using since childhood. Now create your relaxed state. It should only take a few moments. You may connect it to snapping your fingers or gesturing with your facial expressions in some way, so that you need only to snap your fingers or gesture and instantly you are relaxed and ready for the experiment. When you are relaxed, consider your chant, imagery, piece of art, manifesto or other focusing object. Remember, it must have the capacity to elicit confidence and a sense of personal power.

As you experiment with this in mind, the ritual will grow stronger and more potent. When it has become habitual, you may bring it with you and perform it mentally in the field whenever you experience disempowerment or abuse in physical reality. You are then recreating reality through a new filter and you will perceive and create empowered physical realities thereafter.

FINDINGS – Document your findings. Does the hypothesis need to be changed to reflect findings over time?

CONTROL AND SUBMISSION

As I promised you in an earlier blog, I will speak of matters related to control and submission. We have already discussed our tendency as humans to cede control – our very powerful energies of creation – to other humans, to those in power. This is a natural thing for us to do my friend, so you need not feel embarrassed. “The authorities,” meaning parents, teachers, employers, religious leaders, politicians, scientists and even movie actors, have encouraged us to give up our power, what we may also refer to as “personal power.” There is your dynamic – the authority pledges to provide us with protection, usually from “the other,” or to provide us with subtle gifts, in exchange for our allegiance. In this contract, we give up our rights as an empowered human. We pretend that we are without power and need the security of the family group, or the scholastic group, or the employment group etc. etc. etc.

It is always the same scenario: the authority usurps the power of the common one over time, usually at first with these promises of safety, of sanctuary. Do you see why we create The Ritual Sanctuary at the beginning of this series of blogs. This we do to remind that it is within YOU that you will find your security, your sanctuary. Within you is where it has always been. We have the power to create this state of sanctuary with our powerful thoughts and emotions.

And now it is necessary to create another ritual. This one will be a ritual of taking power – taking back you power that has been ceded, perhaps too hastily, to authorities.

LOVING CRITICISM

Now I know that I have been critical of the organized religions in our world in my current of the organized religions on our world in my current Blog writings with with you. However, I saw this as necessary for the blog reader, in order to clear the air, so that truth of matter might be openly considered. I am not The Entity in these blogs, I’m not, some kind of doomsayer attempting to way the minds of humans to some nefarious path. My critique of our institutions and our behaviors as a collective of humans, is done for not only our own good, but for mine as a Higher Dimensional being in service to Earth at this time.

I point out the fallacies in our thinking and the negative attributes of our churches and other institutions, in what I hope is a loving fashion. We who no longer have physical bodies, the Light Bodies, are in service to us and we have only love to give. It is this love I am certain, that is felt by Blog Readers of the material who truly get the messages I am attempting to convey. I wish to educate and inspire , much as a loving coach or school teacher would. These are the personality aspects I am transmitting my energies through at this time.

THE GREAT ADVENTURE OF HUMANKIND

The quest for connection with the Earthly personality and the exploration of the Unity of Consciousness Dimension. Now, we may receive catalyze within individuals, the written word, the printed word as in books,blogs and internet. Our energy centers or “chakras” as we call them, can be opened by reading my material. This is probably the simplest way for us to commence with the work at hand. However, for those of you who feel you may be called for a more direct experience, you may attend the discussions and affirm your connection to The Entity in this way.

In these direct interfaces with, much more divine information can be transmitted and absorbed in a very brief time, compared to the reading of books or blogs, solitary meditations and so on.
Now, again, “the window of opportunity” for humans to engage the Soul Self and grow spiritually, is becoming smaller with each passing month. The culmination of countless years of evolution will soon be at hand.

This activity is not something that can be postponed until we “Have the time” to address the Issue. We are virtually OUT OF TIME at this time. Our suspicions that time seems to be speeding up are quite pointedly true. We are, as a race, speeding toward the great transformation, and indeed, the short time that remains ahead of us will be perceived as a VERY short time, particularly if we have procrastinated and avoided our responsibilities regarding our Soul Issues: the deeply personal Lessons we have come to our Earth existence to learn.

I urge you to participate in your spiritual practices, in your churches and religions if they serve You-the-Soul, in your readings of the great Masters and in our seeking direct contact with disseminators of my messages and the messages of other Light Bodies. Now, the negative energy forms, the Negative Entities, will be attempting to discourage us from walking our spiritual path.

This will be ongoing until the mass consciousness reaches a level of loving kindness and compassion that will tip the scales for a mass manifestation of the virtues of humanity in the physical reality of the Third Dimension. Indeed, that is what we are attempting to create, the Beings of Light, with the help of our human associates.

SPIRITUALITY

Yes, spirituality, as you may becoming to an understanding of this phenomenon, is simply the experiencing of Earthly existence by our embodies Soul. There need be No religious connotations. Thought forms that reflect memories, recent and ancient, of genocide perpetrated by religious movements, do not necessarily have a place in this discussion of what we are calling “spirituality.” So you see, there is a practical approach to our studies of Third-Dimension reality. We are undergoing a restoration, if you will, to our original, self-comprehending, godlike awareness.

We are all Avatars. We know this is on a certain level and as we awaken, our knowing shall “firm up” and become a great deal more supportive for us as we transform our beliefs and ideas about what is possible.

Spirituality is a remembrance of what it has been for us in ages past. This is true. Yet is also points the way for us into the future when we shall be called upon to remake our Social and Political and SPIRITUAL institutions. Therefore, I caution you and yours in using your cynicism and is trust to keep your spiritual transformation at bay. Rather, I suggest you embrace it. Go with the flow.

May I remind you that for every moment of your perceived reality, your waking reality, is complementary moment in one or more of your Simultaneous Lives? So each moment of spiritual unfolding bears the mark of all simultaneously-experienced moments in your multiple reincarnational lives. Now there are, of course, differences in the various aspects of your simultaneously-lived lives, for they are all being lived, for the most part , in different eras, by different sexes and nationalities etc, for the greater learning of All That Is.

But please understand, quite literally, when you may be experiencing a moment of ecstatic understanding here in our Current Moment Point in this timeframe, one or perhaps many more of our Simultaneous Lives may be experiencing a timeless moment also, but as I said, most definitely within a different physical body, of a different emotional makeup and station in Soul Evolution than you, Dear Blog Reader. I want you to ponder the enormity of this fact of life, for a moment.

Now when you meet a friend on the street, unexpectedly, perhaps a friend you have not seen for some time, you may be ecstatic, overjoyed, as you embrace and speak of your relationship, how good it is to see that person again after so long etc. Now in that moment of reunion, that spacious moment of reunion, you are also , in another body, in another era, most probably on our Earth, experiencing a complementary type of reunion activity.

Further, if you could take a motion picture or snapshot of the various reunion activities of you various lives during that moment, you would find that there are also Numerous correlations between these experiences. You may find on observing these movies or pictures that the settings – streets, field, within structures – are quite similar, in that the placement of objects, trees rocks, houses or what have you – are similar throughout. Is it not obvious that your experiences we are describing here, the reunion experiences, are all quite similar, because you are the multi-dimensional creator of these events?

As the creator of worlds here, most naturally, your creations would bear the mark of the maker – the creator who is indeed you, in tandem with All That Is. So now as you observe your moment-to moment experiences, remember that this is only the “surface” of a deeper experience of manifestation that is our multi-dimensional being.

YOU ARE ALREADY THERE

A new world is coming and yet we are already there. As you read this blog, divine information is being streamed into your Energy Body. This information is our heritage. It is the truth regarding our circumstances as a living Entity on our Earth. This truth is simple. It can be stated in just a few words: we are ageless; we never die. The Soul Self that is at our core is eternal and has witnessed countless seasons on our Earth and on other planets and in other galaxies and dimensions.

And you, my friend, you and I are one. We are all one and it has always been that way. When I speak of our connections to each other I am speaking of literal energy networks that tie each conscious cell to every other conscious cell in all of created reality.

It is through this network that All That Is, the ultimate energy source, seeks to know itself through our experiences, Now, we have a physical body and so the truth of this fact may be somewhat difficult to experience, however, do not wait until your death to receive this information. Take advantage of these teachings I offer you in this life.

This is the ultimate simple test for us in physical reality: will you take up the challenge to learn your Lessons now, or will you postpone your awakening until the time of your physical death or in other lifetimes? The choice is always ours. But do not wait until it is too late. We may be required to incarnate on our negative Earth another time, to be again given a chance to learn our Lessons.

CORE BELIEFS

We have to experience events sequentially to understand them. It would be confusing for us, would it not, to see a cake being cooked in one of our ovens, rise and complete its cooking in seconds, rather than minutes? So we manifest according to rules “built into our reality. Fortunately we all “obey” the same rules – telepathy is operative on all levels – otherwise we would all be confused at the unpredictability of our world.

Now, our work represents some tinkering with these built-in rules and regulations, these core beliefs. In my blogs of long ago, I spoke of the difficulty in changing these core assumptions. Now is a different era, my friend, and our fellow Earthly associates are being prepared to change the core beliefs that we hold. This preparation is taking place during our dream state. Most of us do not realize this is happening. We simply awaken with more clarity and a feeling that anything is possible for us: this despite the wars and the famine and other negative phenomena so evident around us.

TUNING-IN TO THE HOME DIMENSION

HYPOTHESIS: The dearly departed await our contact…

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now, this is an experiment in contacting our friends or family members in their Home Dimension. Obviously, if you are still too upset to attempt this contact, please do not consider trying this experiment. For some of you it may be best experienced after you have gained some emotional distance from the event of The transition.

Find a comfortable chair to sit in or perhaps a comfortable chair to sit in or perhaps a comfortable sofa or bed. The idea is to relax the body enough so that you can receive these impulses from the other side, yet not so relaxed that you fall asleep. In between worlds is where you want to be for this experiment and so I ask you to make those preparations you need to in order to enter that state.

Now the crux of this experiment is to distinguish, from the chorus of telepathic messages you are receiving in our relaxed state, those messages that are being transmitted by your loved ones. Beings of Light, friends and loved ones and other Entities from your past, present and future, are all constantly vying for your attention in this mental environment.

Since you are attempting to focus your Inner Senses, you might simply visualize the appearance of the loved-one. Mentally picture your family member of friend as though they were in the physical body. Fill the perception with color and enliven it with your thoughts. This will have the effect of you “tuning-in” to their communication band, allowing you to “home-in” on them, in a manner of speaking. Now it is important to proceed with this experiment as a loving Scientist of Consciousness. Love and kindness are your watchwords in these endeavors. Ego perceptions have no place here.

As you create the image of the person in your mental environment, imagine their voice becoming gradually stronger and stronger until it becomes the most prominent voice in your inner chorus. Use your intention and simply turn up the volume or use the metaphor of the radio dial to do so. This is very easy to do and I am certain you will find success with this in a short period of time.

After establishing contact – you will know you have contact if you feel the intense loving vibrations that emanate from the Home Dimension – simply have your conversation, just as you did when your loved-one was in physical reality. After the conversation, naturally say good-by and perhaps make an appointment to speak again in the future.

Then use your metaphor of the radio dial or whichever technique you used to make contact, to release contact with your loved-one. Gradually come back to your waking consciousness. In time, if you give yourself the suggestions and if you have the ongoing intention to do so for loving purposes, you will be able to make these contacts with the departed while you are at work, walking in the park, etc. etc. etc. As you use Inner Senses, they strengthen over time.

FINDINGS – Immediately document your personalized Findings.

MOTHER NATURE

These transformation in human consciousness and thus the Third-Dimensional physical reality we are discussing, have been noted in our media. “Strange” weather patterns and earth Changes are now commonplace around the world and the media report these unusual events. Often these stories are couched in terms of our Mother Nature displaying her power: power to upset the plans of humans to go to their sporting events, to the beaches for relaxation. To their weddings and other outdoors events. In an almost whimsical fashion these news stories often personify these weather changes as due to our Mother Nature’s unpredictability, but in a lighthearted way.

Yet the most potent and destructive events are described as something to be feared. In these instances, Mother Nature has become so unpredictable, no one knows when she will reveal her “anger” and strike us with a bolt of lightning, or rise a flood to carry us away in our automobile or cause an earthquake to bring down our great cities.

Now, if you have read my Blogs, you have been acquainted with the truth about the weather and about all physical manifestations. All physical reality in our dimension is the result of attendant thoughts and beliefs our humankind hold in the mass consciousness.

Let me go further….we have a saying in the West that “everyone talks about the weather but no one does anything about it.” In fact, this is not true. Each person on our planet has “a say” in how the weather will be expressed in their area at any given moment. This individual contribution is done, for the most part, under our awareness.

The Consciousness Units, through the individual expression of emotion, combine with other Consciousness Unit expressions of emotional content from the population of any given area. These stream of incipient Reality Constructs combine and are expressed in the manifestation of particular weather patterns and Earth Changes according to how the influences play out within the collective consciousness of that region of the world.

Now I must mention that when I say “mass consciousness of a particular region,” I include the collective “thoughts, idea and mentality” of everything in that region, including the rocks, the soil, the trees and the created products for mass consumption. All has consciousness and all contribute to physical manifestation of weather and Earth Changes. Now, obviously a bug might have less of an effect upon the weather than an angry, fearful human, but the bug does indeed contribute in measurable ways to the collective manifestation.

So do we see how many if us simply project our fears upon this great entity, our Mother Earth, forsaking our own responsibility in the creation of our physical reality? It was not always thus, however. In fact, in civilizations from our past, the weather was created quite consciously to support adequate conditions for the growth of particular crops, for outside celebrations and for other purposes. This takes place even today in some of our aboriginal cultures on our planet. Our modern scientists, also, are in a race to develop technologies to change the weather for profit, for the profit of corporation to which they are beholden. This matter will be discussed in future blogs. For now, let us explore, as Scientists of Consciousness, the Home Dimension of friends and family.

PROPHECIES

The idea of a Dimensional Shift is not new to humankind. Many of our world’s religions foretell similar events in their prophecies. Different words and concepts are used to explain the coming shift, but in fact, we may all be describing the same thing, with a different emphasis on particular points. Indeed, the breakthrough into higher dimensions is at the base of virtually all of our Earth’s spiritual systems. Certainly you the Blog Reader can confirm this statement for yourselves. Simply replace the words “Fourth Dimension” with “Heaven” or any other terms from any culture on our world denoting the Etheric Plane.

And again, these Portals to the higher dimensions open to humankind very infrequently. The coming shift, for instance, will occur at the end of a many-thousands-of-years cycle. It has been foretold in the scriptures of indigenous peoples, such as the Mayan and Hopi. The symbolism depicted in these prophecies, I might add, is a great deal more accurate than some of the Christian stories. Yet, as I said, we may be all describing the same event, merely with a particular cultural emphasis on dates, related gods and goddesses, and so on.

Now the world over, as we create this Blog manuscript, all of humankind is being readied for this event. Other Light Bodies conversant in the cultures assigned to them, are bringing their collectives of humans into a witnessing of the precursor events that will herald the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. You know by now what I am speaking about, if you are paying attention at all to my words. The Earth Changes – floods, hurricanes, tornadoes, glacier melting are the heralds to the shift. The turmoil of human thought is creating these changes. In a way, we as a race are setting ourselves up for a very positive or very negative experience here with the Shift. There is always the probability that we will allow conditions to deteriorate to such a degree that there will be no turning back and we will destroy ourselves with our own negative thoughts.

However, humans are quite fond of saving themselves from the Brink of Disaster, as is also documented in many of our spiritual scripts. Whatever the outcome, know that the Guides are watching and will intercede if and when they can. Again Laws of Non-Interference prohibit certain types of intervention. These messages I am conveying are a subtle type of intervention. Dramatic “rescue efforts” are obviously not allowed. We must learn our lessons as a race and as individuals.
When we learn how to access our Energy Personality and other Guides, we will experience firsthand what I am describing. When we are experiencing the free flow of divine information into our consciousness, we will eventually dispense with the need for continually challenging the divine source as to veracity and specifics.

We will no longer require proof, for we will be LIVING our proof. We will no longer require prophecy, for we will be LIVING the prophecy. These dramatic transformations are already underway for the Blog Reader, and to some degree for every other human on our planet. The spiritual revolution of human and Earthly consciousness has begun. The Soul Self is making itself known. As this manifestation develops, visionaries from all spheres of activity on our world will step into leadership roles. Now we might ask, “Not necessarily.” They will, for the most part, “Will they be elected into these roles?” I would answer, “Not necessarily.” They will, for the most part, “assume” these roles. In the West, as I have mentioned before , our political processes will soon be rendered obsolete, as the citizens of Earth take back the power to govern themselves.

RESPONDING to NEGATIVE REALITIES -EXPERIMENT

Hypothesis: You can superimpose positive realities over negative realities.

PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Please think of a time from your past when you felt that you were living life to its fullest and you were amazed at yourself for your accomplishments. Now the primary objective here is to recreate the feelings of self worth and confidence you felt during this experience or time in your life. The second-phase in this experiment is to amplify these positive feelings. Imagine for yourself a dial or a switch that enables you to strengthen these positive feelings just by turning the dial or flipping the switch.

Now dial or flip the switch and experience the strengthening of positive feelings of accomplishment and self-worth. You will experience differing levels of emotion depending on your life experiences  and personally aspects. However, all of you will in all probability experience an increase in positive feelings. Try adjusting the dial and working with the features of your switch to further increase positive feeling and emotions.

Do this experiment for a few minutes per day with the objective that you will be able to gradually increase your control over your emotional states. Once you have gained some experience in controlling you emotional states, you may experiment in superimposing your positive reality directly over the negative reality you are experiencing. When you are successful, you will notice a dramatic shift to the positive within your Personal Reality Field.

Now these experiments are vital for you as way to learn emotional control. In the Fourth Dimension, emotional control will enable you to keep your focus in the mental aspects of consciousness. You will not be dragged back into the emotional reactivity of the Third Dimension.
FINDINGS – Document your findings.

OTHER LIVES IN THE VANGUARD(MAGICIAN SHAMAN WITCH HEALER)

HYPOTHESIS: Current interests may Illustrate other lives in the Vanguard.

If you are an avid Blog Reader of my material, new or old, you are in all likelihood simply reaffirming in this current existence, predictions of interests and behavior from other Simultaneous Lives. The members of The Entity are not, for the most part, stay-at-home bodies, who allow the world to go by them unchanged, unnoticed. No, my fellow travelers are eager to question the core values and beliefs of their cultures. Yet this questioning is not entirely intellectual, it is backed-up with advocacy and action in the physical domain. This action has behind it the spiritual impetus for transformation for the good of all. We are a very humanitarian group and you make your marks on your culture in very noticeable ways.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is 567C9470-17DE-4825-B7DD-43CEEAD15D91_4_5005_c.jpeg

You will be protected. As we exercise our power to create loving realities, we will be protected by Beings of Light. We have the collective power of goodness on our side, you see, and so as we go about our activist duties in response to the inner promptings of Divine information, we may notice that the way before us is cleared of barriers to our destination. As in my earlier example of the “Crystal People,” we may have incarnated many times in many eras, but with a single emphasis or role: that of advocate for humanity. And so we may notice that we respond to threats upon others as threats upon ourselves. We take the threats upon our fellow Earthly inhabitants and upon the Earth inhabitants and upon the Earth in very personal ways. On this note, let us explore possible lives lived just as we may now be living this current life of ours, as an advocate for humanity and for Mother Earth.

Now you may have lived as Empowered Ones within “normal” occupations that no one would suspect. This may be true for you currently, Dear Blog Reader. Many of you use your nondescript careers – housewife, teacher, mason – to protect your true identities – magician, shaman, witch, healer. The true calling is protected. There is a tradition in these matters to work “Undercover,” and avoid the scrutiny that comes with self-disclosure. Naturally, it is always your choice to reveal or to not reveal your true motives and the real work that you are accomplishing. But as I have just stated: you will be protected. As a bringer of light and healing, you will be protected from harm.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY
The previous experiments in this Blog in contacting Simultaneous Lives lived in other time-frames may well have given you glimpses into lives lived as Empowered Ones. There is a certain unifying aspect among all of our reincarnational existences, and it may well be that we have come into physical reality on these various occasions to help and to heal. With your Energy Personality as your guide, imagine other lives in other eras in which you may have served in the Vanguard of progressive human consciousness.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings in your preferred way.

THE NEGATIVE LEADERS

This next section concerns a critical issue with regards to the actions of our leaders in the U.S. and some of the other developed nations. The actions of these countries, particularly in the Middle East, where they seek to control the oil, are challenging the basic structure of acceptable behavior on our planet. Now there are those in other dimensions who take notice of such things and are quite concerned with the zeal with which these deluded humans continue to plunder our beloved Earth.

Certainly many of my Blog Readers may wonder what they can do personally about this critical matter, that of the brutality and warlike nature of our leaders, and I presented some exercises in my Blogs to answer these questions. However, some time has lapsed since that material was created and conditions have greatly worsened as of the time of this writing. I feel that I, as a protector of our planet, must look for more effective methods to counter the negative leaders.

Now I know some of you may scoff and say, ‘What can you do, as a entity, to effect change on this Earth?” The truth is that Beings of Light such as myself have exercised our power, in what we would call our “history,” in concerted efforts to effect quite dramatic changes in our Earth reality. These changes were brought about by our efforts in tandem with the mental and physical efforts of human beings. Each of us, as I have stated earlier, has an Energy Personality or Spirit Guide if you wish, that has watched over us from our birth into our current lifetime. Whether we acknowledge this as true or not does not in any way deny the truth of my statement.

Now consider what could be accomplished for the good of humankind, if many thousands, hundreds of thousands, millions of human beings were to act in unison toward a common goal, such as for instance, the creation of peace on our world, peace in the Middle East and all of the other areas of conflict on our world. How would we accomplish this, as peacemakers, you and I and our loving Guides?

As with all in creation, we do it with our thoughts. First we acknowledge that we have an Energy Personality. We affirm this, have the intention of communicating with it, and then experience the unfolding of that relationship in the manifestation. I covered this earlier in the Blogs, but I would like now to suggest an experiment on a grand scale. First Let me repeat one of the basic elements of my teaching: we are not separate from anything in the Universe, and we are connected to everything in it by virtue of our thoughts. If we believe this, or we can make the attempt to believe this, it follows that Peace on Earth is well within our grasp.

What if the soldier refused to fight? What if the soldier had a dream one evening that so affected him/her that he/she refused to fight? What if our negative media propagators had a change of heart and decided to state the truth instead of lies and propaganda? What if hundreds of thousands of people awakened one morning no longer support the negative leaders? I think you may be getting the point here. When we go into our meditations and we direct our energies, instead of sending out the positive images and emotions to just one or two, send out the energies to the Guides and to their physical counterparts throughout all of humanity. Our thoughts have power. Indeed our thoughts are the most powerful elements in our physical reality, for THEY CREATE OUR PHYSICAL REALITY. If we desire peace on our Earth, then use our powerful thoughts to create it.

Link up with other peace lovers on the subtle levels and imagine our peaceful world into being.

EFFECTS OF TERRORISM

In our world, terrorism is the subject of choice for modern humans. We are enthralled with the subject for we are daily inundated with terrorist data from the various negative media to the degree that many of us in the modern world eat, drink and sleep terror.

We “like” it that way, for we have become entranced by our negative leaders and the negative media into believing that these terrorist issues should occupy our every waking hour. Our leaders like it that way, for that is the way they want us to respond. The negative leaders are in business of control, and so in a way they use their proclamations to control us through fear. The fear produces body chemicals that create stress and anxiety as well as addiction to these fear-producing statements. We just can’t take our eyes off it. We just can’t ignore the headlines. And so the negative media like it that way, for they are profiting tremendously by spreading the negative messages of the negative leaders.

Now, I must remind of a lifesaving point here: we create our own reality. At risk of repeating myself, let us visit that concept again. On an individual and collective basis, humans create their individual Reality Fields and the mass-create consensus reality that we perceive in a linear fashion. Let us use an example to see how the negative leaders and their media “help” us form our individual and also our mass consciousness realities. It’s quite simple really… You are an average American who awakens to the sound of the radio news program that describes the latest atrocity perpetrated by the latest enemy of our country. Can you see how this sets the tone for the remainder of your day? Before becoming fully awake, in that “in between state” in which we are so impressionable, out mind is already picking up negative information that we will, no doubt, carry with us throughout the day. And as our mind finds in our mental and physical environments what feels is “corroboration” of this negative information – proof – it will note this proof and add it to the mix of negative data, beliefs, images and so on.

Again, in this way, the negative leaders and the negative media have won the contest for control of the minds of individual listeners and viewers and also have they gained control of the masses of listeners and viewers. Now, since telepathy among humans is imperative continually, we reinforce this negativity on the subtle levels by communicating, with other humans in the collective, on the negative leaders and their media. On these subtle levels ideas are accepted as fact, though there may have been NO CRITICAL THINKING Involved in accessing this data. Do you see how our leaders, our media and our unaware selves conspire to terrorize us? We are terrorizing ourselves. It is true that our leaders are at most fault for our predicament. But we as human individuals are also responsible for our dilemma. We have not taken individual responsibility for our own thoughts and actions. We have given our power to institutions, to leaders, to employers. No wonder then do we find ourselves afraid and powerless.

Obviously, the most direct and simple way to take our power back from the institutions of global negative media would be to not participate in them. As I have suggested at different stages in my Blogs, we can always TURN OFF THE RADIO, TURN OFF THE TV, TURN OFF THE VIOLENT MOVIES. Avoid the negative media when we are out in our physical environment. Vote with our pocketbook by not purchasing negative, violent, controlling media and other life-denying products of our mass-consumption society. We will soon begin to like it – our freedom – and our negative institutions and leaders will begin to not like it. The repression may grow then, because “the powers that be” will know that we are taking responsibility for our own thoughts and beliefs. However, persevere and our numbers will surely grow. The Forces of Light are in our favor. The probabilities for a mass transformation of consciousness into the positive arena are growing. Our contribution is necessary for the greater good of our species and our Mother Earth.

A SINGLE LOVING THOUGHT

Perhaps some of the Blog Readers, considering the constant perceived negativity surrounding us, wonder how one person could possibly make a difference in the global picture. You may be asking yourselves, “Why should I go through the effort of changing my beliefs and my Personal Reality for the better, if it will be only a “drop in the bucket” in the “greater scheme of things?” My answer to you would be that your efforts in changing your beliefs and behaviors and thus your Personality Reality Field, also have the added effects of broadcasting by example, the benefits of loving kindness and confidence to those around you in your physical reality.

The effects are also felt telepathically. As you change your personal world for the better, you are each moment broadcasting on the subtle levels your successes in overcoming negativity to the collective network of Souls on our planet through this web of subtle energies. I have noted elsewhere in these Blogs that we as a species are literally “One.” We are all co-creating with All That Is our individual lives, yet we are all sharing the same timeframe as One People.

This Telepathic Network is our communication system that we use to achieve consensus while sleeping, on what will be manifested as our world reality upon awakening. So you see, You can truly make a difference. Thoughts have power. Thoughts of good Intent and loving kindness have extreme transformative power. Our positive thoughts seek out other positive images and thoughts being transmitted in this collective mental conversation. These thoughts merge to create incipient Reality Constructs. When these potentialities reach a stage of imminent creation, it could be YOUR SINGLE LOVING THOUGHT that could tip the scales towards the positive manifestation.

This mental conversation does indeed continue while we are awake and going about our activities. In other words, we are still dreaming and in contact with the collective while awake, but it goes on “on the background.” It is just as important to create the thoughts of loving kindness and confidence while awake, because that is when we have the most conscious control over our mentality. It is this exercise of consciously changing our thoughts and behaviors that creates a spillover into our dream world, our sleeping times, affecting the world thought consensus in a positive way.

Now you may still be harboring the belief that “Evil,” particularly in our times, may be stronger than “Good.” Indeed, with the variety of wars, famines and other negative events going on around us, this would seem to be the case. However, this belief is still only a habitual idea that we hold. You may have been in the habit of thinking to oneself, “Evil triumphs over good: in politics, in business, in my personal dealings with people,” that you have blinded yourself to other options, other ways of perceiving our world.

Look beyond these perceptual blinders and you may see that the opposites is true: Good triumphs over evil: in politics, in business, in your personal dealings with people. The opposite is true my friends. Reflect on this for a moment and see if you agree.

Troubled friend

Be ruthlessly loving in this matter. Prove yourself an adequate match for this person in this endeavor by reflecting back love and faith and confidence when they test you out of fear and mistrust. The trick is to identify the incoming negative Consciousness Units and transform them with your energy into loving thoughts and emotions BEFORE they enter your energy field and cause disruptions.

These energies are very powerful. They are indeed like parasites that attach themselves to your Energy Body where they then can attach themselves to others, but only if the host is fearful, mistrusting and negative, cynical etc. Negativity is the feeding ground for these energies. Where there is only love and acceptance and compassion, these influences cannot take hold.

Integrity is an excellent concept and we can discuss it a bit here. In this situation, you are integrating your Soul aspects of loving kindness and acceptance, with you core personality or egoic aspects of self-defense, anger etc. So integrate, integrate, integrate. Love dissolves the egoic response motivated by territoriality and competition. Coming together – integration – is what is needed here on all levels. Common ground, conciliation, cooperation for a higher ideal, these are all relevant issues to be considered at this time.

Now, know that many of our contemporaries are also involved in these Soul issues. Our planet is going through a transformation that will be felt down through every atom in our perceptive field. All is in flux. Everyone’s issues are being presented to them for transformation and healing. Now you can ignore these “requests” from Soul, but you do so at your peril.

These lessons will help you gain the wisdom and skills necessary to make the transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension and stay there. The more deeply this divine information is taken into your being, the more likely you will retain it, remember it and
use it in your spiritual pursuits.

The Negative Entities are created by negative thoughts and emotions, but it is unproductive to ask which came first, the Negative Entities of the ideas and emotions that created them, for all exists at once. The hope lies in more people opting for Courage and Love rather than fear and anger.

Contacting The Inter-Galactic Brotherhood of Light

HYPOTHESIS: The IGBOL are the “closest” and most accessible of the light bodies.
Now , you can be informed of which being or group of beings you are allied with by virtue of your evolution as a Soul. This can be discovered by asking your Energy Personality, using your free will to ask the names and locations of other beings associated with You-the-Soul.

The IGBOL is the “closest” to you in terms of affinity of purpose. They are on a path of Loving Understanding as are you the Blog Reader. This is why we have suggested that you contact this group as a preliminary to further explorations. Let me say that you need not fear approaching this group in your experiments.

As I state often in my blogs, the great majority of us are in all probability, members of the Same Entity and so have a direct connections to these Energy Bodies we are describing. The Entity is vast, again as I have noted previously, and at this time we are having a “reunion” of sorts on these subtle levels. You may assume you are rekindling old relationships in these communications, for indeed you are. The fear and mistrust will fade as you receive memories of these associations, in the form of divine impulses. You will know it when you feel is. This is ongoing assistance the Beings of Light in service to mankind/womankind during this time of awakening.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Establish your relaxed state of consciousness. Now with the assurance and confidence that comes with mastering these various levels of consciousness through the experiments done in the preceding Blogs, have the intention and profound expectation that you will encounter these Loving Beings.

The contact come with the attendant feelings of compassion and love. There may be an “alien” component that may cause discomfort. You may go beyond surface appearances by utilizing your skills at turning Fear and Anger into Loving Understanding and confidence. The IGBOL are you, Dear Blog Reader, in your multidimensional future. Knowing this, you may experience this contact as a homecoming. When you sense that the meeting is over, gradually come back to your Third-Dimensional awareness.

EXPERIMENT – Becoming aware of Astral Travel during sleep.
HYPOTHESIS: You can use your intention to become aware of astral travel during sleep.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
The Ritual Sanctuary is important here in this investigation. Perform it just as you are falling asleep, with suggestions to yourself that you will become aware of your inner environment – your sleeping world – as you are about to engage in Astral Travel as we call it. It may be necessary to conduct this experiment for several days to get results.

The suggestion that you will become aware within the dream state is important. You may also suggest that you will awaken after a particular sojourn into the Astral Realms, so that you may document your experiences in your dream journal or other medium. It would then be advantageous to return to sleep with the suggestion that you will awaken briefly to document your further Astral Travels, and so on.

This will give you an ongoing record of your adventures during sleep. And again, the core experience you gain through experimentation in the dream state, the greater mastery gained in perceiving and documenting this state of awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings, perhaps with a journal or recorder.

YOU ARE THE VANGUARD-2

The notion that you are going too far with this exploration of consciousness, that we are going into “forbidden” territory where few have gone before us, may cause us to become fearful, wishing we had not begun the journey. This is a natural reaction, and I wholly expect many of you, especially those with religious conditioning, to at first react with fear and anxiety when you “see something in the dark.”

YOU ARE THE VANGUARD

GIVING UP POWER
You are not guilty. You are not to blame. Your, Dear Blog Reader, have done nothing wrong. Because you are in the habit of giving away your power to others, you leave yourself in a vulnerable position. You relinquish your power and then the usurper of your power – parent, employer, priest, politician – can use guilt and other unsavory emotional states to control you.

Yet you have done nothing wrong. You only think you have, second-to-second, because of this manipulation by those in perceived authority. They want you to feel guilty and powerless. It makes their job much easier when you are afraid, anxious, experiencing feelings of low self-worth etc. How much easier it is to take money from someone, for example, when they are feeling unworthy. Indeed, after you have ceded your power to people and institutions, no wonder you feel unworthy.

Yet again, you are not guilty of a thing. You are not to blame. Now, that is not to say that you are absolved of all responsibility in the matters of power between yourself and those in our world. That is not what I am suggesting at all. For that matter, the main reason I write this Blog is to help you get your power back. We cannot have a revolution in human consciousness with so many humans without the full human power that they were incarnated with when entering into life on our world.

Currently in our timeframe there is much talk of “taking back power” – personal empowerment. It is almost a cliché in our world. Yet truly taking back our power from persons and institutions is a heroic act. There is much perceived risk in doing so, for most Western humans fear reprisals when they go beyond the status quo. There may be feelings of guilt that come with “not doing what you are told.”

You also may have feelings of loneliness. Breaking away from the pack may leave you feeling as though you have made a mistake in surrendering the safety of the group. Yet also know that as more of you go on your Soul journeys, relinquishing the negatives in your lives, pursuing positive, loving experiences and creating a radically different world for yourselves, you will also meet up with others who are on a similar path. Those with positive loving thoughts will be drawn to others who have positive loving thoughts. As you meet with others on a similar path, you will form groups, naturally as humans do, and soon you will have remade your social institutions into something truly sacred and life-affirming for all.

Inter-galatic Brotherhood of Light-2

They are what we would call “of Alien Extraction.” Their heads are quite larger than ours. Eyes are much larger than ours also. They have no protruding nose formations, merely slits, as in our reptilian species. The bodies are small and thin. The limbs are long, and fingers thin. And hairless. The skin is gray in appearance. They have been called grays by some of our UFO researchers.

Their home is in a future dimension of Earth. Humankind, in the progressed future.

These are not accidental meetings. Their overtures to our people are part of a plan to introduce humankind to their civilization. They are welcoming us to the greater reality of which we are a part but do not recognize currently.

They are beings of love. They live on love, in a very literal sense. The powerful emotion of love fuels all of reality. They have received negative imprinting by some of the more dangerous of our Negative Entities. Obviously, the negative beings would prefer that their kind stay out the picture as the Nefarious Entities attempt to grasp control of our Earth in its entirety. They will not let that happen. That is why they are making themselves known to some of us. They mean no harm. They are providing help to us as their people resist the takeover of our Dark Forces.

Simply, consciousness creates, and as it does, both positive and what we would term “negative” creations result. Consciousness including the opposite of love. Yet because love is at the base of all realities, the tendency is to revert back to love in any given cycle. Our people in our current era are at the end of a cycle. It appears to many of us that we will be consumed by negativity, particularly in our U.S. However, know that Beings of Light, including our association and millions of other Light Bodies, are stemming the tide of evil. They are helping us. Yet we must do our part.

We can love our way out of this dilemma. By reinforcing love within our being and in our relationships with others, we create an irresistible counterforce to the negativity in our world. The more we and our people promote love in this way, the sooner we shall subvert the agenda of the Negative Entities. Their wish for us is to realize that they are with us in support of our loving evolution as a race.

They are not the enemy. They have been slandered by the Negative Entities. Look for our appearance on the world stage as we all – meaning humanity as well as the Light Bodies – unite to overturn the evil ones.

The Inter-Galactic Brotherhood of Light

A group of Energy Bodies that resides within dimensions beyond our physical reality. These beings have been in contact with humanity on Earth for many, many years. They were known to our indigenous cultures for example, and they were also known to visionaries throughout the centuries in our recorded histories. They have been know by different names.

Each culture that has known them, naturally, has named them through the perceptual lenses of their individual societies. This group is and has always been a very loving, gentile species of beings. Because of this loving attribute, many cultures have honored them as gods or what we might term Angels, Deities and so on.

This same group I am describing is available to us for achieving contact and ongoing communication. They exist Inter-Dimensionally and so may provide a link to us from the distant past, in our terms, to the present and beyond. This may be said of all the Energy Bodies we may come to contact.

However, the group I am describing, because they represent the evolution of peace and loving understanding within non-physical reality, may be particularly valuable advisers to us in our current reality, seeing as how we as a race are on the edge of the Fourth-Dimensional Shift, with our capacity for loving understanding to be the deciding factor. This group of loving beings is called the Intergalactic Brotherhood of Light.

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN GUIDES

Now, our Spirit Guides are a more personal matter. It would be as though an energy personality essence were “created” to the specifics of our individual personality being the Entity from which the specific characteristics are drawn. Now beyond the Energy Personality, of course, exist continuing manifestations of energy gestalts, more complex in form and substance, until one reaches All That Is, the fundamental energy source from which all realities in all dimensions are created.

Let me go a bit further there… using our wonderful little metaphor of the radio dial. Suppose that you think of All That Is as the totality of all radio waves. Then on your dial you would have listed those “channeled sources” as you have so described , in separate parts of the dial, so that each time you turn that dial, you connect to a different part of the energy “wavelengths” of All That Is.

Now let us say at the far left of the dial is the name David, and when you metaphorically turn the dial to that spot, you receive through your antennae, which we might describe as the Chakra receptors of the human body, the David transmission. And if you turn the dial to the right to the spot marked X you would “pick up” the transmission of that specific Energy Body and so on.

I think that our metaphor is a good one. Blog Readers can use this visualization to tune-in to their own guides and it becomes a ritual they can use to make these connections in their own lives. Ritualizing these activities – practicing making these connections – is what is going to help us in our Spiritual Evolution. It is the first step.

Extra-Terrestrials

These beings are better described as Inter-Dimensional Beings. And being Inter-Dimensional, they are far from being in outer space and beyond. They are indeed, as close to us, Dear Blog Reader, as our most intimate physical and mental environments.

They are for these reasons, quite easy to tune-in to, and many of us do just that. Let me say once again that everything in our reality has consciousness. Knowing that, how would a microbe, that has its own consciousness, intelligence and power, appear to a human, if the human tuned-in to one accidently? One might indeed believe they had contacted a being from out space.

Sleep and Astral Travel

Our sleep times are highly important for our health physically, psychologically and spiritually, and so we will now comment on this state of consciousness. Now the adventures of you and your Soul Family are ongoing. Within your waking reality you experience your waking Soul Family manifestation. However when dreaming you may be experiencing other manifestations of your Soul Family, within your current incarnation and possibly within past and future timeframes.

If you watch your dreams closely, you may notice the appearance of “familiar yet unknown faces” on this inner stage of awareness. These hard-to-place characters may indeed be members of your Soul Family as they engaged with us in activities on the subtle levels. Let me leave it at that and encourage us to do your own research in this matter.

On a biological level, as you may know, the body rests and repairs itself during sleep. Without going into too much detail, this restoration begins with the onset of sleep and continues until waking. During sleep, the consciousness, for the most part, travels from the physical body to visit locations far and wide in our Third-Dimension as well as other dimensions. Your Soul, therefore, is engaged in many different activities while your physical vehicle rests and recuperates.

These Sojourns from the physical body have been named Astral Travel by some of us, and this is an adequate description. We do indeed visit the Astral Levels during sleep, but there is much more to it than simply “visiting” these non-physical locales. You-The-Soul are refreshed, revitalized and energized via these inter-dimensional travels.

These are the roads we have traveled for countless years while in incarnation and in the time in between lives. We know these pathways in the grid work of the higher dimensions, as well as we know the route to take to the market in the physical world of the Third-Dimension.

Many of us are engaged in projects and collaborations on these subtle levels. Without the physical body, times takes on a fluid aspect. Travel is instantaneous. We progress by simply intending to go to a particular location. For example: we may be providing comfort to a human or group of humans who are in Tragic Circumstances. We may be providing support to these people in their dream state, even as we may be supported by other in ours.

As I describe in other parts of my Blog, during sleep the consciousness also participates in the creation of what will be local, regional and worldwide waking environments. We create the framework for our reality during sleep. When we awaken, you and our fellow humans “fill in the details” by choosing from the limitless field of probable realities open to us, those that will become our Personal Reality Fields

The Soul Family

We do have different beings assisting  with our Soul. Some have been Guides and friends in other incarnations on Earth. Some of these Energy Bodies have been watching over us and others in our Soul Family since the beginning of time as we understand it.

Broadly speaking, each of us has a constellation of these Energy Bodies, and we are each potentially able to achieve contact with some or all of them, depending on our level of Soul Evolution or spiritual growth. These entities are awaiting our call.

Mankind/Womankind are at the stage of development that it is necessary to make these connections with the Higher Self. This must take place on a grand scale before the Fourth-Dimensional shift can occur.

Now, let me go further with this explanation by discussing the concept of Soul Family. Each of us lives within what we might call our “core” family. This would be the family or families that raised us. These are the people who we call our family members.

Now among this group of humans that we may or may not be related to genetically, are members of our Soul Family these would be the Souls that have incarnated with us into our current timeframe to learn their lessons with us. These members of our Soul Family may well have participated in NUMEROUS permutations of family groupings with us throughout the millennia.

Some of these family groupings may be or have been in other solar systems, on other planets and so on. For the most part, however, our Soul Family has developed in the Earthly realms. Again, members of Soul Families reincarnate together in different roles, of different sexes, of different temperaments and so on, to experience different Lessons for the Entity – the overall collective of Souls in which Soul Family resides – and of course, for the greater experiencing of All That Is.

I must mention, that our Soul Family may include others that we may not acknowledge as “family” members. These participants might include, for example: the cashier at the local market that you may be very attracted to or perhaps find abhorrent, as well as others within your community that you hold strong emotions for.

However, the Soul Family may be thought of as that small group of active participants in our reincarnational activities in our current timeframe. This primary group is the one in which we learn our lessons while other members of the group also learn their Lessons.

Now if we are clever and if we learn to use our Inner Senses, we may find the connections between our current Soul Family, and the Lessons learned and to be learned, as well as perhaps the most “Immediate” or “Recent” past lives. For those of us interested in such things, I suggest we conduct your experiments with this information in mind. The connections will then “come to mind” as we put together your findings

Transforming Fear and Anger

Hypothesis: You can use your intention to transform Fear and Anger into Courage and Loving Understanding.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY.
Think of a fear or anger-creating an idea or image that you have been entertaining lately. Surely most of you can come up with an example. Now that you have it in your mental environment, enliven it with your thoughts and make it seem real. Do this for a few seconds… Now mentally say, “Stop!” and have the intention that you will now turn down the energy on the thought or image, by using your dial or other metaphorical tools, and remind yourself that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is indeed your Soul Self.

You may consult your Energy Personality or other Guides for help in this matter. When the positive emotions of love and compassion are felt, experience them and relish them for a few seconds. Then end the experiment with your intention to go about your activities, this time experiencing the residual feelings of Ecstasy that you will no doubt be enjoying for some time after the experiment.

FINDINGS – Make your notes or remember this use of the Inner Senses for the next potentially Fear or Anger-producing experience. Document your findings.

Consecutive Positive Assessments-2

EXPERIMENTConsecutive Positive Assessments

HYPOTHESIS: Positive assessing all that you experience creates the positive future.


In addition to enacting your Ritual of Sanctuary before you go out into your world, I suggest you practice positively assessing everything that comes your way in your existence. Practice until it becomes a matter of fact – a positive habit that you practice ongoing throughout each and every day. Perhaps an experiment is in order here. Again, this build upon exercises in previous Blogs.

Let us say that you are about to begin your day. You have awakened from sleep, you have opened your eyes and you are perhaps walking to the bathroom.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
This may be habitual for you now. It should only take a few seconds to perform your ritual. Then here is where you immediately intervene between the Moment Points of you waking life. In between the moments of remembering and forgetting… you intervene. “It’s easy to find the good in each sequential perception.” This is your idea for the day.

Remembering to conduct your Ritual of Sanctuary; remembering that you create your reality out of your perceived beliefs, ideas and images about your world; remembering to positively assess each sequential perception. Then do you see how the positive perceptions create the positive future, moment-to-moment? You are rolling out your positive moments before you to create the positive path of your future.

(Thought afterwards – this experiment is a especially useful for when you can’t avoid the negative media. The blog reader hopefully will choose not to watch negative TV, violent movies etc.)

FINDINGS – Remember to write down your findings from worthwhile experiment.

Consecutive Positive Assessments

In our world currently, we as a race are experiencing the disintegration of the fundamental structures that hold our societies together. It is easy for us to see this phenomenon in our Western World, for our media proclaim the disasters and upheavals within our institutions on a daily basis.

I refer to these media as the “negative media,” for obvious reasons. In a very real sense, our media shape and negatively spin the events of our world to depict the basest interpretation, appealing to the lowest aspects of humankind. Because there are very few alternative voices in our media network, the media as a whole tend to reinforce and perpetuate negative experiences in the minds of humanity.

Those of us who wish to go into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension “with our eyes wide open,” would do well to divorce oneself from all forms of negative media.

I have explained in previous blogs how the violent images and stories serve to trigger biochemical responses in our bodies, so that we are conditioned to continue watching, reading or listening. It becomes an addiction in time, so that we become “hooked” on negativity. We become hooked on the adrenaline that is released with our bodies.

Remembering what I have described concerning the activities of the Negative Entities as they seek out fear and anxiety, perhaps the blog reader can see how a daily diet of this – such as violent movies, newscasts and the like – could increasingly attract the Negative Forces, until there is not room with our mental environment for love, compassion or the human virtues.

“But how,” you might say, “can I protect myself from these media if they surround me in the physical environment? They are everywhere and I must confront them every second of my life just to go out and do my job, go to school, go to church etc. etc. etc.” I appreciate your dilemma and I have an answer for you.

CONVERTING NEGATIVE THOUGHTS

By expressing negative thoughts about war or anything, we are colluding with the Negative Forces. Make the effort to deal with these issues in Love. Love is the strongest of all energies in the Universe. Focus on the Love that we can feel for everyone, including the “war people.” The only way to convince the haters is to model Unconditional Love in all our actions.

Be a peacemaker by converting your negativity into Love and by turning hatred into its opposite. This skill is what will convert people to peaceful side, and this skill is what will allow us to stay in the Fourth Dimension. So practice, practice, practice.

Our Reality Feedback

You see, our Personal Reality Field is literally feedback of our ongoing mental activities. We can always look at our created reality to see how we are doing. This of course assumes that you are aware of your Lessons and are not denying the spiritual, or need I say, “metaphysical” underpinnings of your so-called “physical ” life.

If you feel you haven’t enough information as to what your Lessons are, the next time you are in communication with our Energy Personality, simply ask for guidance as to what your Lessons might be in this incarnation and wait for the reply. You will get a direct reply telepathically if it is appropriate information for you to have at the time, or you may be presented with a “graphic example” by way of a reincarnational drama or comedy in your physical world.

These events present your Lessons in stark relief against the background of your mundane, robotic existence. You will recognize these as “teaching moments” or ” moments of awakening” by their surprising appropriateness and synchronous attributes. Again, as I have stated previously, you will know it when you see it for YOU HAVE CREATED IT, for purposes of Your own learning and Soul Evolution.

For example: You may have noticed a teaching moment in your own life that was not tragic in the least but amusing and profound. Perhaps you have had the experience of being the center of the cosmic joke, when everything around you was turned against you in humorous and symbolic ways. Certainly all of us have had these experiences, yet they are too easy to dismiss as coincidence.

These are your reincarnational comedies – teachings moments of the absurd and ironic. Now within these teaching moments, you also have the opportunity for creating loving understanding out of negative emotions – embarrassment and shame, anger and fear – just as you have the opportunity for transformation within the reincarnational dramas of our life.

Simply note that these episodes of dramatic and comedic teaching moments represent opportunities for IMMEDIATE TRANSFORMATION, IMMEDIATE SOUL GROWTH. I advise you Blog Reader to take advantage of these experiences, therefore, when they arise.

IF WE WANT PEACE

With an appreciation for Loving Understanding and the power of this state of consciousness to transform fear and anger, comes the possibility for peace. Dear Blog Reader, if we want peace, we can have peace. Make it with our thoughts. If we want the wars to cease, we can create that with our thoughts.

It all begins with our Loving Intention in the moment. Our thoughts of peace and Loving Understanding coalesce on the subtle levels, to create their counterparts in physical reality. What is the counterpart to peace, love and understanding? A physical world where WAR IS NOT TOLERATED BY THE PEOPLE.

War cannot be sustained on a diet of peace and Loving Understanding. War perishes in such circumstances. And as war and violence fade into memory, new, positive life-affirming Reality Constructs are thrust into our world with the energy of the loving thoughts, the peaceful thoughts, the thoughts of understanding and acceptance for our fellow human beings

Belief Change

When we look at our Personal Reality and see a change, one that reflects a change in our beliefs, and perhaps it feels uncomfortable to acknowledge it because it feels so foreign to us, let that serve as validation that you are on the right path. For example: where once there was fear of a particular group or race and there is now acceptance and growing affection, let that serve as validation that our Soul is evolving in beneficial ways.

No, we cannot err on the side of too much love. We cannot have too much affection for our fellow humans. My advice is to practice loving one another WITH ALL OF OUR MIGHT. The emotional content, highly-charged, is what helps the new reality break through the old, and establish itself as the new manifestation.

The New World.” I continually encourage to be ruthlessly loving and confident, and I suggest that also to the Blog Reader of these words. Continually, moment-to-moment, create our world through a perception of love and confidence. We can be a model for those who need this guidance, in how to think, feel and act.

For those of us who can accept such responsibilities our growing skills with the use of the Non-Physical Senses and our growing knowledge of how to use the powers of love and confidence, can thrust one to the forefront of the movement of humans beings who are seeking their own enlightenment and the Soul progression also of the species.

Collective Manifestation

So in a word, Love is the answer. If we were to live our life as a poet, a romantic poet let us say, one that was immersed in love, and indeed unable to sense or formulate a single thought that was not love, imagine how LOVING our existence would be.

But instead many of us focus on murders, such as we have in our negative media; personal vendettas, such as we are engaged-in at the workplace; and general cynical gossiping, such as makes up the Movement-to-Moment Points of our ongoing lives.

This is not to paint all of us with the same brush, but we must take responsibility for whatever part we play in the creation of negative Reality Constructs in our world. If we contribute If we contribute a negative gesture, we are partly responsible for the collective negative manifestation. It makes senses, does it not, given what I have described about the nature of our reality.

If we become angry at a person of a different color while driving our cars and shout at them and gesture at them in an absence way, we are responsible for our part in the collective negative manifestation of racial prejudice in our current timeframe. Does this not make sense? If we scream in anger at our child, we are responsible for the collective manifestation of child abuse in our time frame. It is quite logical in its consistency.

We may believe that if we commit these violations in private, that they do not count, because no one is observing our behavior. But telepathy, as I said before, is operative at all levels. We ALL know what is “on your minds.” We feel that we have to pretend that we DON”T know, however, to maintain our private lives.

Yet all of this will be out in the open soon, and I would urge us to clean up our thoughts and behaviors so that we will not be caught in the habitual negative thinking and behavior that currently hold us back.

LOVING UNDERSTANDING

Let us now discuss Loving Understanding some of the great virtues of humankind. Now there is love and there is love. It would seem that each of us might have our own definition: “love of another is acceptance of another regardless of how the other appears, speaks of behaves.” This aspect of love comes from understanding what the human purpose is on our great Earth.

Generally, the purpose is to co-create with All That Is a life of learning. We are on the planet to learn from our experiences in our particular niche in our personal environment. When we can appreciate this overriding fact of life, we can come to a loving understanding of ANYONE we meet upon our Earth.

We are All on the same voyage: that of the path to Soul Realization. Each person we meet in our experiences is a teacher for us, therefore, and from these interactions we learn our lessons and our knowledge grows. Now, All That Is also grows in knowledge and experience with us, as we co-create and then experience our lessons.

All That Is is the energy source for all of creation. Indeed, we’re on our Earth to experience for All That Is, our life lessons that include EVERY MOMENT in our existence. Each second of our waking and dreaming hours provides learning opportunities for You-the-Soul.

This is true for not only our current life in this timeframe, but for all our many lives in this and other timeframe, past, present and future. This is not to minimize the importance of any given life. It is simply a fact of life, Dear Blog Reader. And when we understand this in its most profound sense, we can begin to have this sense of Loving Understanding I am describing, for myself as well as for others.

NEGATIVE THINKING

An excellent question in these matters be, “if negative thoughts and images lead to the creation of negative events, and these events are painful, why do people continue in the creation of negative thoughts?” I have covered this before and I now will elaborate on this paradox. Why would a human continue to think and imagine the negative and create negative Reality Constructs and thus feel the negative emotions that come with the negative manifestation?

In a way, the reason for this unusual behavior is that many of the negative reality creators are so accustomed to creating from their negative, repetitive thoughts and beliefs that they essentially know of no other way to think and feel. The creation of their negative personal realities has become “a force of nature,” to coin one of our phrases. The force is quite powerful and has become personalized over time so that the human is entranced with these thoughts and behaviors, thinking these is absolutely no other possible way to think and behave.

Sometimes under these circumstances of entranced negativity, the only way out is through a reincarnational drama or lesson. The Higher Self of the individual creates a life-or-death struggle to divert the attention always from the increasingly negative and self-defeating manifestations.

The human, then, is often quite relieved to enter into a different creative opportunity, even though it might entail a serious illness, accident, mental crisis and so on. The diversion has the effect of waking up the individual from the trance of negativity. They then see the world with a new-found clarity. They have a sudden appreciation and sense of gratitude for life where before they were living a robotic existence.

These creative opportunities may result in the death of the physical form. Still, the Soul experiences that result as a success, for the human has encountered and met the challenge in their own way. This is the Lesson they were to learn, and whatever was learned is now part of the knowledge of the individual Soul, The Entity and All That IS.

Of course, there is the probability we may avoid the life-or-death drama by approaching our lessons “head on,” and not avoiding them – learning what we have come to Earth to learn. The free will choice is always ours.

AMNESIA AND LESSONS

Another example: let us say that there is a single Soul Self that is experiencing this multitude of Reincarnational Existences for the purpose of dramatization of particular Lessons in physical reality. Now the lessons here obviously also have similarities.

Consider a human, perhaps a neighbor, family member, or friend of ours. suppose that this person, let us call them a Soul Family member, is experiencing a Lesson in forgiveness, that is, as is so often the case in these matters, not at all obvious or apparent to this subject, but quite painfully obvious to those around this person – the members of this person’s Soul Family. The Lesson is obvious to everyone but the subject here.

Yet on a deeper level of perception, through the eyes of the Soul Self, the subject here is also quite aware of a Lesson. Yet do we agree that it would be not much of a Lesson if the subject were to be painfully aware of the Lesson? What would be the point? And so the Amnesia is brought in to the mental environment of our subject through the creative powers of consciousness.

This is the way that all of us have set up our lives: to live without the deeper knowledge of our other existences. The Amnesia again. We have a perfect view of the status quo reality, but a very dim view of our true reality, the inner reality that creates the outer world. This narrowing of perception keeps us distracted by the minutiae of our moment-to-moment existence. It keeps us within the drama so that we are not compelled to look beyond what is directly in front of us.

FREE WILL TO CHOOSE

For the sake of argument, though the situation is exceedingly complex, let us suppose the our subject could go either way here. They may choose to ignore the advice of trusted friends and family and continue on the path of excess, or they may indeed heed the advice of Soul Family Members and pay attention to the signs within their mental environment that seek to direct them onto a different and more productive path.

Our subject has free will to choose one course of development over the other. All members of the Soul Family also have free will to choose their level of participation in the learning experience. At any second in linear time, then, each member of the ensemble CHOOSES, on either a conscious or unconscious level, to participate or not participate in the drama and to what degree.

Again, the Soul Self of each participant ALWAYS comprehends the subjective value in each choice. The Soul Self informs each participant in this example, through impulses received within the mental environment, on the unlimited probabilities for Reality Creation within any particular moment.

LESSONS OF VALUE FULFILLMENT

Now there is great leeway here in this educational experience in the our Soul Self may accept any one of countless opportunities over the course of a lifetime to engage with others in the conscious learning of Lessons. Each of us has an agenda in the achievement of –Value Fulfillment – within the various domains of living.

For some of us, for example, the Lesson of personal responsibility may be paramount currently, for a variety of reasons. As in the case of our subject from the well-to-do family, this Lesson is currently the most pressing in their “curriculum” of Earthly existence.

Their life is quickening as many influences come to bear upon them. They are highly motivated to consider alternate ways of thinking and behaving. The normal methods are failing. Those humans our subject knows and respects – Soul Family members – are suggesting that this person change their ways.

EVERYONE LEARNS SOMETHING

The other members of the Soul Family are learning their Lessons also: some consciously, some by default. Each participant in this drama is learning something according to the requirements of their Soul Self. As I said, each of us enters into life in the Third Dimension with an agenda, with a general plan for development on all levels – body, mind and Soul. As we live our life, our Higher Self definitely keeps tabs on our activities with regards to the learning of Lessons.

Incidentally, some or even all members of a particular Soul Family Group may be expressions of a singular Soul Self. This happens quite frequently within our system. As such, these types of groupings often express a particular intensity of character and emotion around certain values: these values being the Lessons learned in the collective.

We might say that this tendency of some Souls to experience multiple lives within a singular genetic family, shall we say, is a repertory expressions and shows itself throughout time. In these cases, we would find this repertory expressions in the home, in the workplace, in the church, and so on. A similarity of Lessons being learned by all members of the collective would be noted.

THE DAWNING OF DIVINE INFORMATION

Again, all members of the Soul Family act in this benevolent conspiracy to assist the subject in learning their Lesson. Yet now there is the dawning of divine information within the mental environment of our subject, to the degree they may be considering changes in their behaviors and mentality.

Humility may be emerging within the emotional life of the subject. The value of working for one’s own room and board may become an important concept in their psyche.

This would be an example of learning the Lessons consciously rather than unconsciously by default. The subject may be now on the track of spiritual discovery. They may be spiritualized with this information from their Higher Self. They are waking up.

SOUL FAMILY DEFINED

Now because we create our own reality. We also create all of our human relationships in cooperation with everyone and everything involved. We do this on a basic level in the dreamstate and in other altered states of consciousness. We create a strategy for development during these times, then we flesh-out our designs on awakening.

Additionally, we agree with the premise so popular within New Age circles, that everyone we meet enters our life for a reason. Does this then mean that everyone we meet is part of our Soul Family? Let us more clearly define our terms…

Soul Family members are those humans who enter our life to teach us something or for us to teach them something. We feel this connection, you see.

DEJA VU

A simple example to illustrate: we are introduced to someone at an event or on the job and we shake hands with them. As we shake hands, let us say we look into their eyes, perhaps in an attempt to learn more about them or simply because it it required thing to do in our culture. As we maintain eye contact with this human, we have a deja vu type of experience in which we receive impressions on the mind.

In this split second of perception, images, sounds, feelings arise. We are busy shaking hands and do not have time to pursue these sensations. Yet we do note a connection of some sort with this human. We note to ourself the feeling-tone generated within this meeting. Most humans have had these experiences I am sure, not merely the seekers of wisdom we address in our blogs.

IT BEGINS WITH US

The Soul Family begins with us: an individual human learning our Lessons as best we can, without intellectualization and denial. And let us assume that you are such a human. We are on the path of self-awareness. You are reading this blog to discover where that might lead you in relationship with others. Let us move to the next Blog in this discussion.

TAKING OWNERSHIP

Taking ownership of the difficulty is an important first step in creating this relationship of conscious co-creation. For example: in terms of health and the cessation of symptoms, we have suggested that the practitioner first own the malady. Take responsibility for our creation. Learn the Lesson. Then begins the task of doing things differently to create an improved reality. This is made easier through the realization of culpability.

Our strategies for creating the negative reality are apprehended and understood with all of the shame and other negative emotions that entails. The denial lifts to reveal our TRUE self. The intellectualization FAILS at long last, forcing us to encounter YOU, Dear Blog Reader. When it occurs, grasp it closely to our self and do not forget what you are learning in those moments. Use this knowledge to move forward in our Soul’s evolution.

CONSCIOUS CO-CREATOR

There is a great practical advantage in selecting the conscious co-creator perspective. When we take responsibility for the creation of our own reality, and we begin to learn our Lessons with Courage and Loving Understanding, our awakening does indeed quicken, so that we are given more and more information.

This may take the form of knowledge regarding other lives we are living on our Earth and perhaps in other systems of reality, probable systems for example, as we have just discussed. It could take the form of valuable information regarding a profound question we might have, or simply an insight into a mundane matter that concerns us in the moment.

Conscious co-creation entails the intentional learning of Lessons without denial or intellectualization. To illustrate: consider what occurs when the average human in the throes of learning their difficult Lessons tries to “figure things out.” Typically, the human will look for “reasons” that support their own beliefs, their own behaviors, their Personal Reality Creation.

Though intellectualization and denial, any evidence of responsibility in the creation of Negative Realities is overlooked, while information supportive to the ego/intellect is noted and confirmed.

These rationales are commonly called “excuses” by many of us. Indeed, they do deserve this negative connotation, if in so intellectualizing and denying we are shirking our responsibilities in the matter. Figuring things out becomes figuring a WAY out of our predicament: a way that does not entail personal ownership of the difficulty.

SPIRITUALITY DEFINED

Here it is all about Spirit, Dear Blog Reader, spirituality. Our greater self, The Higher Consciousness. The god within, whatever terminology we wish to use, this energy source is composed of Spirit. Perhaps we should define our terms.

SPIRITUALITY, AS IT IS UNDERSTOOD IS SIMPLY THE CONSCIOUS LEARNING OF LESSONS.

Now we are all learning our lessons However, we may be experiencing these Lessons by “default,” in that they appear to be put upon by outside forces. It may appear that we have no choice in the matter. Great tragedies may befall us for no reason, at least in our perception of these occurrences.


Contrast this perspective – we refer to this as the Victim or Martyr Perspective – with the perspective of the Awakening One. The human upon a spiritual path adopts a perspective of co-creator. The Lessons of life are not intellectualized, not are they denied; they are acknowledged as valuable and necessary to the growth of the Soul.

THE DARK SIDE

The original Soul Mate conceptualization from our ancient spiritual traditions included honoring the negative aspects also: the shadow or Dark Side.

Now: every human has the repressed, hidden personality aspects. And so, in the practice of these ancient traditions, Lessons were learned regarding the negative aspects of consciousness as a way to mutually integrate the “forgotten” material. The Dark Side of the personality was honored just as the divine aspects were honored within the spiritual practice.

The modern metaphysical concept of the Soul Mate often lacks this component. Further, our religions tend to denigrate these Dark Soul Issues as the work of the Devil, or as the result of a “weak will” or Spirit. This practice quite naturally leads to further repression of the cast-off images, ideas, and emotions.

In fact, what many of us think of as the “born again” experience is simply the spontaneous release of this material into the conscious mind. The result of this influx of energized constructs is often a full-blown visionary experience: the spiritual rebirth, the transformation of the “dark” material into Light.

We are modeling our Soul Mate theory on the practices of the ancient paths. Therefore we shall include the creation of the Light from the Dark in relationship as a necessary process to observe and nurture. In the interests of integrity and power we shall work from both sides: the polar opposites of the creative principles.

THE SHIFT

The Shift entails a remembering of the Ancient Wisdom that has informed the religious and spiritual practices of humankind over the generations. We are awakening individually and collectively to our innate powers of manifestation. As we awaken we will become aware of our reincarnational existences, for these lives are the essential creative works of our Soul.

May I be blunt? We have come into physical form in this particular era in our Earth’s history, within our particular body, within a particular collective of humans, on a specific point of the globe, to participate in a focused enactment of behavior, emotion, mentality, and so on, for the greater experiencing of our Soul Self.

FATE

There is no “fate” involved here, however. All realities are created at once, and expand, in a sense, “forever” within the eternal moment. Can we grasp this crucial point? We have free will within each moment of our life to select from infinite probabilities, those we wish to manifest.

Yet I do realize that these descriptions may appear as though there is no free will at all. This is how it looks from the outside looking into our reality. I sense, for example, not only me David as I write on this computer on the patio in my backyard, but the Soul Self of David as it presents itself within numerous other human life-forms on our Earth in other eras. All of these manifestations I can see if I wish.

What looks like destiny to us from within our system – the “fateful” meeting of our Soul Mate, for example – appears as infinite choice to my eyes as I observe all of us making our spontaneous free will choices within this moment in time. In other words, the end result of any reincarnational activity is determined by the Free Will choices of the participants.

In addition, we may remember that even the probable realities NOT chosen, continue on their trajectories of manifestation and development. Thus, we have these numerous probable worlds, parallel realities given birth by our varying choices moment-to-moment.

GREAT PURPOSE

We are on our Earth for a purpose at this time: a “greater” purpose, if we accept spiritual concepts such as this. Forever as we are engaged in our normal activities – we awaken, we eat, we have experiences, and we sleep – we may find oneself looking for something more. We may be at a stage in our development when we are capable of looking beyond the surface reality to find the true meaning of our existence.

This is our greater purpose. We are not satisfied with the status quo explanations. Perhaps a Death in the family or a “failed” relationship drives us to enter on this quest. Whatever the reasons, we may now be encountering our Lessons directly and asking for the meanings of the events in our life.

EVERYBODY KNOWS

Please understand that there is no blame or shame involved in these types of reincarnational dramas. The actors in this drama – parent, child, and other family members, as well as other community members who are involved in Soul Family interactions – are essentially blameless.

On a Third-Dimensional level all concerned may feel sense of shame, disappointment at the features of child-rearing. The child may feel these negative states also. Yet on a Soul level everyone involved realizes their critical role in the dramatization of these Soul Issues.

Then let us say that, on the subtle levels, in the dreamstate where all plans for future Reality Creation are conceived, the members of the Soul Family of this subject – including the subject – agree to intensify the Lesson for the sake of the subject and everyone else involved. For as the subject learns their Lesson, all others involved learn something also.

Perhaps poverty and Lack are interjected into life of the subject in a very abrupt manner, so that our subject is left reeling and disoriented from the swiftness of the change. Where one day all of this person’s needs were met, let us say that now, none of their needs are met. The family fortune has collapsed for some reason. Our subject is FORCED to go out into the marketplace and earn their bread.

LEARNING LESSONS BY DEFAULT

Now this subject is certainly learning Lessons by default. They are not taking ownership of the life. They shirk responsibility for any of their actions. The members of the birth family, let us say, are co-conspirators in this avoidance of responsibility, in that, they shield their offspring from the harsh realities of existence.

They pay-the-way for this human to live the life of “the pampered one,” perhaps out of a sense of parental obligation, you see. They are attempting to protect their child from the pain of Lack and other negative emotional states.

However, you see I am sure where this protection becomes imprisoning for our subject. By allowing the child to grow into adulthood without any constraints, without the teaching of the virtues if humankind, the parents have “created a monster,” in a sense.

SPOILED ROTTEN

Another example of Lessons in the Soul Family: consider the particular type of human who has grown to adulthood within a family that provides every possible opportunity and physical Reality Construct for this person. The person has not had to “work” for their sustenance in any way. They are for all intents and purposes “spoiled rotten,” to use our vernacular.

Let us say that this adult has a smug attitude toward others that they feel are of a “lower” class. They spend the majority if their time enjoying their toys – the Reality Constructs of privilege, shall we say, given to them by their family – expensive cars, lavish homes, and other products.

Consequently, may we suggest that this subject of our discussion is lacking in certain desirable values we are promoting in our new Blogs? This human has, through a coincidence of privileged upbringing and perhaps a personality that avoids anything more than a cursory examination of the value of the Personal Reality in which they find themselves, created a life that does not include the human virtues we have discussed at length here.

This subject of ours is leading an “unexamined life,” to use one of our cliches again. Personal responsibility for mistakes or negative experience within this person’s existence is not taken under circumstances. Perhaps they deny quite earnestly any culpability in the matter.

PAST LIFE BAGGAGE

Our individual awakening is an awakening to our other lives. We have suggested before that we are not always a sweet and loving people in our many lives. In some of those lives we are, quite naturally, the opposite of Sweet and Loving.

Thus, when we are mastering this awakening exercise, we become aware of our own “baggage:” the leftover negative ideas, images, and emotions that we carry with us Lifetime-After-Lifetime. It is a distinctive residue of negativity, made up of the essence of every shameful, hurtful, hostile, envious thought or behavior of our Simultaneous Lives.

Now in this example, we are witnessing a religious zealot attempting to convince us of the value of their system. Yet something is not right here. Something is very distasteful indeed. Let us say for the benefit of this discussion, that we are being triggered by this human to re-experience our own negativity as we have expressed it in other lives.

That is why it is so personal, you see. That is why we may overreact with this human, and perhaps respond in an angry fashion. This time it IS personal, for they are our reincarnational mirror, reflecting back to us our shameful angry past. Perhaps we have even lived a life as a religious zealot, so that we are witnessing the negative lifetime in all its glory, in all of its educational power.

GROWING OUR BELIEF SYSTEM

In learning our Lessons we enlarge our belief system. We effectively “grow” our beliefs to encompass the beliefs of everyone we meet. This is CPA in action, as we find the good, in quite literally now, EVERYTHING.

Of course, in expanding our beliefs we will often find it necessary to discard beliefs that no longer serve us as an awakening human. Self-limiting beliefs, such as a belief in the superiority of a particular race, type of personality or human, may have to be discarded. This even though we may be feeling that we do not wish to surrender our belief, even though it may have been proven to be obsolete and even counter-productive.

However, why hold fast to our belief? Please realize that others have the opposite beliefs that are also quite valid. All of our realities are valid.

SOUL FAMILY MEMBERS

We may distinguish between two separate groups of Soul family members. For purposes of study, we shall refer to the group of humans we are interacting with in our current timeframe as our Current Soul Family Gestalt. The Soul Family members we associate with over linear time, in different bodies, within different human collectives, in our perceived past and future, we shall call the Interdimensional Soul Family.

Remember: the future and past can be considered as simply different easily-accessible dimensions for the student. We currently exist within the Third Dimension, yet we may access the future and past dimensions through practices learned in my new Blogs.

THE MOMENT POINT IS A TRANCE STATE

With the following experiment we are assuming that you are familiar with my new Blog material. If you are familiar, you are no doubt already proficient in attaining at-will the Trance state. As such, you may be quite expert at taking this state of awareness with you, as in the sanctuary, as you go about your daily activities.

Or perhaps you have perfected this Ritual to the degree that you may initiate it within just a few seconds, at any time or place in your waking world, just by holding a particular thought of feeling. You might describe this feeling-tone as a hunch or an intuition. In this case, it would be an intuition that you and the person being assessed have a history, either a past or future history, if you can imagine such a relationship.

EXPERIMENT – THE MOMENT POINT

HYPOTHESIS: Your current empowered moment reveals to you all that you need to know

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Then create this state as best you can. It is a containment Ritual that keeps your energies within your sphere and protects you from any negative influences from without.

Now simply relax. The one being assessed need not be in your immediate vicinity. You may make your assessments of anyone from wherever you happen to be. When you have perfected this technique, you will be able to carry the state with you in your waking reality, or simply create it instantly in the Field when you have need of this special assessment tool.

In a very general way, you are attempting to determine whether a particular human is a Soul Family member. There will be a basic yes or no answer to these inquiries. If you would like to take it further ask:

*What are their general objectives?

*What is the Lesson to be learned?

*What issues are being addressed?

THE MOMENT POINT

In our Blogs we affirm for you the necessity of comprehending the moment-to-moment experience we are creating for oneself in our Personal Reality. “Waking up in the moment” is another term we use for this pursuit. So we are in a continuing exploration of our world, as we examine the momentary experiences of our life.

The doorway to our other lives is the Moment Point. It is the commonality, the Home Base, we might say, of our Soul Self as it creates our numerous lives. We have stated before that “it is our Moment Point if we say it is.”

The student, the Scientist of Consciousness, in exploring the many lives, “take ownership” of the current moment, empowers it with the Divine energies of perception – the Inner Senses – and breaks through the veil between lives with these instruments.

We have called this a form of multitasking, in that, the explorer does not forsake the current body, the current consciousness manifestation in their experiments. BOTH the current existence AND the destination life – the target existence – are supported, nourished, vivified with the creative energies of consciousness in these explorations of the Moment Point. The Soul Self the creates all of our lives has limitless energies. It is inspired by the foundational powers of All That Is, and so can be always counted on for support.

Through these practices of magicians, shamans, witches and healers of all types, modern Scientists of Consciousness are now able to individually disconnect from the mass Common Trance of freedom that enslaves, to participate in this Uncommon Trance of freedom, of release from authority, of common good, of magic, you see.

In essence, here, we are creating our OWN suggestions, we are taking our OWN advice, we are responding to the communication stream of our magic ancestors, rather that the mass media, the toxic culture, that standard of conformity offered to us by our leaders.

THE VIRTUES AND THEIR OPPOSITES

Learning our Lessons often involves turning the negative into the positive: the negative emotions are transformed into the positive emotions. We may be experiencing negative emotions, but we are continually processing our experience to create a positive outcome. This we accomplish through a continual practicing of the virtues.

Will we become virtuous by so doing? That wholly depends upon our Lessons we have chosen to explore in this life. Let me just say, that, we are living in times of great potential. We do have the potential, therefore, to experience an enlightened existence in this timeframe. The energies, the vibrations, we might say, are quite supportive at this time.

The Shift is occurring NOW. Now is the time to address our Issues squarely and ultimately, to learn them once and for all.

As this occurs with millions of us, the vibratory level is increased for us as a collective. It becomes easier to transform within the group, being supported by the group in this way. This is why we are affirming in the new Blogs the activities of the lightworkers, the magicians, shamans, witches, and healers among us.

During The Shift it will be our group that holds the responsibility for personal transformation, so that the rest of humanity, the uninitiated, we might say, may be brought up with us. The Resonance Phenomenon, we may read about it elsewhere in this Blog material

RELIGIOUS ZEALOT

We incarnate on our Earth to learn Lessons and these Lessons are learned in relationships. The Lesson itself is often the core relationship experience we may be having with a particular individual or group in any moment in time. There are also, usually, Past Life influences involved.

For example: we are confronted with a religious zealot. They are counseling us in a heated exchange on the street or in a market somewhere. They are suggesting the if we do not pay allegiance to their particular view of the Godhead that we are doomed. Our Souls will be consumed by demons. Do you get the picture?

Even with this extreme example of negativity, we may, with the proper perspective, absorb this communication stream and integrate it with our own belief structure. The information will assuredly undergo a transformation. The negative will be transposed into the positive. The good will then be saved within our comprehensive belief system.

Now the requisite objection may come to mind here, that it would not be a good thing to absorb the negative prejudices, and such, into our own system. Yet let us see how this works with the Master, the one who is getting quite good at this awakening enterprise.

ACCEPTING THE OTHER

Now we are here in our Blog era, discussing a concept of Soul Family. Do you see how the greater Soul Family includes the perceived Negative Other? We will have more to say on this in future blogs on humanity, however I shall briefly present my Findings on the matter now, in essence, our lives in the Third Dimension are about exploring The Other within relationships of various types.

Whenever we may truthfully encounter The Other with Loving Understanding and Courage, we are learning our Lessons consciously. If we find we cannot do this, in that, our Issues prevent us from doing so, we are not learning our Lessons. This pertains to all of the lives we are living, Dear Blog Reader.

It is really quite simple, yet admittedly, often seemingly impossible to accomplish long term. We would need to become a master at this. By mastering the techniques, we create an existence of habitually creating from a position of Loving Understanding and Courage.

GROUP MIND EFFECT

There was a group-mind effect operative within our consciousness in the early days of humanity. This may be referred to as human instinct. We were all receiving communications from the greater group of humans on choices to make in order to preserve the integrity and continuity of the collective and thus the local consensus reality.

This instinct for the preservation and continuity of the whole was eventually challenged as other collectives of humans entered into our territory with different ideas, different images, different ways of doing things. These different mental communication streams were picked-up by the primal group, and the Idea Constructs that were found to be supportive and conducive to preservation of the group were integrated into the mental collective of the primal group. Those Idea Constructs that were deemed not supportive of the group were rejected.

Also, an “ethical marker” we placed on this stream of consciousness, identifying it as having the potential to harm the group. Thus the Negative Other was born. Remember here that all realities are born first within the mental environment of those concerned. We create our own reality. We create our consensus reality in cooperation with others. Period.

The Negative Other was created out of fear: fear of change, fear of a different type of human, fear of losing the cohesion and support of group life. From the moment of the creation of the Negative Other, we might say that humankind has been trying to get back to that basic unconditional human connection of one to the other, indeed, of one to all of humanity.

What served as an instinct in the primal collectives of humans, was simply an ongoing connection to the non-physical world, the Unknown Reality, as we call it, from which springs the known reality of the physical world. Of course, we may also call this Unknown Reality the Divine, our other term for this energy source.

FEAR OF THE OTHER

We are writing today thinking about the 9/11 events. Many of us, particularly in the USA, are feeling somewhat on edge, as we wait to see if we will be once again “punished” by our adversaries. This is the ongoing mental environment for many of us.

We have been taught by our Negative Media, by our governments, by the authorities in our societies, to fear. We are obliged to fear the terrorists, those identified by our countries as enemies of us and our fellow citizens. Here I would like to take some time to explore this dynamic as it relates to Soul Family Issues.

This entire concept of The Negative Other is an ancient Gestalt of Consciousness that had been with us since the dawn of our human race. Originally, the idea of The Negative Other was one of careful attention to what mental energies we would entertain within our psyche.

SOUL FAMILY LISTS

The Charting is always done according to Lessons. It is not, therefore, so important to name the humans you are interacting with as a Soul Family as to note the Lessons being learned. This is why we are in your physical body, Dear Blog Reader. This is why we are here now. Yes, it is true that we may be involved in highly intricate, dramatic, and even entertaining reincarnational presentations. Thus it is good to note the memes of the participants. But the important thing here is to consider the Lessons we are learning within these relationships with The Other.

If privacy is an issue for you, create a Legend in code and keep your Lists anonymous. Hide your Legend if someone finds your list, they will not be able to understand it.

WORKING WITH THE MOMENT POINT

I will bring this Blog Series to a close with a very important experiment for the awakening student. This technique will give us the ability to assess, within the moments of our existence, the humans within our Personal Reality. We will be able to assess them for motives, ethical qualities, and other values.

In these Moment Point of assessment we become truly aware of what is around us. We may easily sense the “back story” to the current behaviors of even strangers after we have gained some experience in our assessment practice.

As we practice this technique, it becomes quite easy for us to identify the members of our Soul Family, generally and specifically. As we proceed it may be a good idea to organize the members into groups according to the separate spheres of activity in which they are known.

Thus we might speak of our “business Soul Family,” or our “spiritual practice Soul Family members.” We may even identify perceived “enemies” with whom we have Issues to be resolved from Past Lives, and so on. Out them all on the lists. later in future Blogs we will chart the Current Soul Family and the Interdimensional Soul Family.

THE UNCOMMON TRANCE

Yet fortunately, for millions of us who are awakening currently, what we are calling the Uncommon Trance is becoming quite familiar, quite common to us. We speak of the Ancient Wisdom being remembered in our current timeframe, and part of this wisdom entails the intentional creation of uncommon states of consciousness.

Through various types of experimentation, the explorer of non-physical reality ritually creates the Uncommon Trance, so that it becomes as automatic as the Common Trance. It becomes a new form of perception.

Practicing in our waking reality the re-creation of the Uncommon Trance helps to make it habitual. Like the Ritual of Sanctuary creates a movable Sanctuary for you-the-students, within the portable Trance State we may assess the people we meet as far as Soul Family status goes.

If we have an intuition that the salesman at the hardware store, for example, is connected to us in some way, take a second to create our Trance State and assess this human with our Inner Senses. Trying the attainment of the Trance State to a gesture, or statement, or thought, to talisman is also quite practical.

THE COMMON TRANCE

Our Guides are accessed through Trance an intermediary state of consciousness that separate our Third Dimension from the non-physical world. Here we distinguish between two types of Trance: the common and the Un-Common.

Now the common Trance we are already experiencing when we go about our daily activities as a modern human. As we focus on “getting through the day,” we quite literally put our cognitive faculties on automatic. We go along without thinking too much about what we are doing.

Many of us take cues from our mass media about how to think and feel about the issues of our day. We do what the authorities – the media experts, the scientists, the leaders – “suggest” we do.

MY ENERGY PERSONALITY

The energy Personality of Spirit Guide may assist me in my exploration into the Soul family. As we may already know, the road to awakening literally begins when we acknowledge that we have non-physical Guides that are watching over us and that may guide us.

It is an age-old story. Ritual contact with the non-physical beings is at the base of all our religious systems. Every spiritual tradition on our great Earth has the devotee first initiate contact with a spiritual being of some sort – god, goddess, God, animal spirits of various kinds, and so on.

Each culture has its variations on this procedure. This system I offer you as a metaphysical teacher of countless years. And so, yes, the first step here is to ask for assistance until you get it. We are thus not entirely on our own in this quest for spiritual understanding.

SCIENTIST OF CONSCIOUSNESS

We may be already well aware of our Current Soul Family Gestalt in so far as they are also members of our genetic family, our adoptive family, our friends and our social networks. However, to fully explore the connections between us, and for example, the tens or hundreds of people we interact with on any given day, we are advised to consider researching our Personal Reality Field as a Scientist of Consciousness.

As a scientist we would delve into the thoughts, feelings, images evoked in the momentary assessment of the human we are evaluating or the experience we are exploring. We investigate with our Inner Senses within our own consciousness by simply Intending to do so.

How do you Intend? Briefly, we intensely desire to get to the bottom of this intuition we have about a possible Soul Family member, for example. Then we wait to see what arises. We may immediately receive more information on the subject via our Inner senses. Or later in the day it may occur to us, as in a dream or state of reverie, what the connections are. Then, as you are receiving information, we document it in some form – other than the memory, which can be quite volatile – for later study.

From these information streams we gather our data and glean our Findings. A Findings is simply something of value, in this case, something pertaining to Reincarnational Existences of the Soul Family that you didn’t know before the investigation.

This culling of knowledge from the Unknown Reality is how the Ancient Wisdom reveals itself within our system. These skills we are learning will help us become aware of our greater creaturehood on all levels.

GROUP INCARNATION

Our current relationships are alway representative of our affiliations on other lives. We may follow these correlations to the nth degree. Thus, the delivery person at the door may well represent a human interacting with you in another of your lives, a Past Life, let us say. The telemarketer you have just spoken with on the phone may represent a human from another era with whom you are interacting.

Indeed, the entire workforce at your place of employment may well represent a collective of humans with whom you have associated in other livers. For the Soul Family, broadly defined, incarnates together to work in groups, and learn their Lessons together.

EVERYTHING IS ALIVE

Our human activities occur in cooperation with the creation of ALL of the Reality Constructs within the existences of all of our Simultaneous Lives. Everything in our system is alive, including what we call “dead” or “inert” matter. Everything is composed of the Consciousness Units that are anything but dead. They are each holographic and telepathic, alive and vibrant entities, with a defined consciousness and an agenda for development.

Now do you see how this brings us back to my God concept – All That Is? everything is a reflection of everything else. All That Is reflects itself through every Consciousness Unit that composes every Reality Construct in All of our self-centered lifetimes throughout time. All of our relationships may be thought of as divine associations, therefore. I trust I am not pushing too hard.

Soul Family(Computer Analogy)

Perhaps the computer analogy will help in this presentation. We have used this before… Imagine that this process of Soul Family member negotiation, acceptance, and denial occurs as though within the processors of the world’s fastest computer. Our subconscious mind, which is related to the Collective Consciousness of all humanity, is like this great computer, in that, without expending great amounts of energy, it instantaneously assesses each individual we meet in our existence and notes Soul Family connections throughout time.

We are unaware of this activity as we observe the person in front of you. We may be thinking to ourselves, “I am drawn to this person,” or, “I would like to feel this person out, to see if there is something to be discovered here.”

Now obviously, this great computer of consciousness may not reveal to us ALL of data it is processing about human individuals we meet. Our mental environment would become quite disoriented and flooded with information if this were the case.

And so we place amnesia upon the majority of this information and allow in only what is necessary to allow us to make our decisions and learn our Lessons.

KEEPING APPOINTMENTS

We have free will within the Third Dimension to make our choices from an infinite array of probable choices. However, we are on Earth to learn Lessons within our collectives-humanity, Soul Family, genetic family, and so on.

Thus, our choices will reflect the information we receive telepathically from other humans. We are constantly keeping appointments and having reunions with Soul Family members that we have associated with, loved, and hated throughout time. We use our free will to accept, reject, or perhaps re-negotiate Soul Family agreements established in other lifetimes.

LESSONS

We come together in all of our lives to learn our Lessons together, as a group, we see. This is how it works… in the dreamstate we agree to enact behaviors of educational value for our own benefit and for the benefit of other Soul Family members. When we awaken after sleep, we generally fulfill these agreements in a largely subconscious fashion. Our lives may thus be described as dramatizations of life Lessons in the Third Dimension. The Lessons are learned within Soul Family relationships as the higher Consciousness of each of those involved, “speak to,” and energizes the participants.

Yet we may well ask, “But how can this be so, David? How could I have been kept from this information all of my life?” First let me say that this is something that we already know, for we are in telepathic contact with everything in our Personal Reality. Telepathy works constantly in our world on a subliminal level. On this subtle level of understanding, just below our conscious awareness, we know everything.

However, to get along in your world, you must keep yourself in an amnesia that allows you to forget your multidimensional reality and focus on the mundane world in which you live. This occurs even as you are continually receiving profound amounts of information on your life condition and on the lives of your co-inhabitants subconsciously. Your focus on “current events,” rather than your greater godlike reality, allows your consciousness to guide you through your existence without distractions

Learning Together

Now we live many lives and those with whom we are experiencing our current life also live their many lives. And just as those humans with whom we interact in our current existence-our genetic family, our adoptive family, our extended family, our colleagues, our acquaintances – are learning their individual Lessons with us now, so too are each of us in what we are calling the Soul Family, learning our Lessons together in other lives.

In all of our lives, in whatever era we are experiencing our lives – Renaissance Europe, for example, or perhaps within a tribal unit in our prehistoric past – we are also interacting with Soul Family members, the same group of people with whom we always interact, for they live their lives just as we do: in different bodies, in different times, in different circumstances.

Now Reality

To begin with my Blog friends…. you create your own reality. This has been my primary refrain to humanity in my messages over several decades, and I fervently hope that my blog readers remember. In this moment and in every moment of our life, we form the world that we know, even as everything else within our reality cooperates with us in this creation process.

Our world is made from Consciousness Units: awarized elements of energy that seek out the fulfillment of infinite values in the manifestation of Reality Constructs of infinite variety. This etheric substance – the stream of manifestation – literally travels outward from our body to create the world that we experience. It is fantastic. It is unbelievable. It IS the way we create our reality. Dear Blog Reader. For in this endeavor of Reality Creation, everything that can happen does happen, all in the spacious moment of creation – the eternal moment of NOW.

Included in this construction project of the Soul is the creation of our own physical body within a context of multi-dimensional existence. We do indeed live countless lives; some are lived in our future. We have referred to these as the Simultaneous Lives and also the Reincarnational Existences. These lives are our lives throughout time.

Spontaneity

The concept of spontaneity can further our discussion of creating the Personal Reality Field. To be spontaneous, according to one of our Earthly definitions, is to act without forethought, willy-nilly, according to the present moment’s frivolous inclinations. Now I may be casting this term in a negative light somewhat, yet is it not true that spontaneous is thought to be somewhat reckless and unthinking, is it not? The spontaneous are thought to be irresponsible, in many ways, and lacking in maturity and good judgment.

I am a big fan of spontaneity, and the accompanying practice of recognizing and “following” life-affirming impulses. But for now, let us investigate how the practice of spontaneity may have earned such a bad reputation in our culture.

To begin, the founders of our American nation were of a strong puritanical bent. They were hard working, intensely religious humans, who were taught that “idle hands are the devil’s playground.” So the natural spontaneous behavior of humans enjoying the moment, even of children in many cases, during those seminal years of occupation in our country was discouraged.

Now this is speaking of the U.S. only here. Other nations had obviously different beginnings, yet some were similar. So we, as a people, were not generated from hedonistic loins, in other words. Our culture has proceeded from day one until the present on a decidedly anti-pleasures trajectory, admittedly with a few pleasure-seeking counter-culture movements in between.

So given this history it is no surprise that, for the most part, Americans are not a spontaneous lot. This type of behavior is not rewarded in a society that values business interests and profit-taking over positive human development. Currently, as a culture, the U.S. has entered an era of warlike anti-pleasure such as our modern Earth has never seen. Surprisingly, many of our citizens appear to accept this state of belligerence and negativity, if one is to believe the many polls that are taken and the results proclaimed to the world.

For now, let me simply suggest an alternative to the anti-pleasure movement in our country. This would be the search for pleasure within our Personal Reality and the creation of pleasure through the acknowledgment of and acting on pleasurable, life-affirming impulses. These are behaviors that may lead us to experience the feeling of being supported like a beloved child on a wave of ecstasy that is indeed the embodiment of All That Is.

Now let us clear up some of the misconceptions some may have of spontaneity with a description of “true spontaneity.” we need look no further for a graphic example of true spontaneity than the experience of accessing one’s Inner Senses and learning one’s lessons. The first requirement for this communication is a lowering of the ego defenses: that quality of mind that protects and defends one’s beliefs and one’s worldview against “attack” from differing and differing world views.

The ego must release its stranglehold on the physical perceptions before divine information – spontaneous impulses – can be adequately perceived with the Inner senses, and then acted upon if appropriate. So true spontaneity is ultimately profoundly responsible and ethical at its base. True spontaneity is not necessarily the actions of the “free spirit,” however, in our terms.

This aspect relates to the terms “Young Soul” and “Old Soul” that we discussed in previous blogs. Let us go further here. The idea of a free spirit, in our culture and other of the world’s cultures, who acts on every whim that comes to mind, is not the spontaneous spirit I am describing. True spontaneity requires discernment as to which impulses within consciousness to act on to further the learning of lessons for oneself and for the higher good of everyone else. This is critical.

The awakening human learns their lessons consciously and with courage, relishing the life experience whatever the “conditions,” positive, negative or in between, in our terms. Then, as I said, contributing to the consensus manifestation in positive, life-affirming ways, always.

Now further… we are awakening, some of us, within lives that some would call “miserable.” Some of us will use our formidable powers in collaboration with All That Is to heighten our vibrational rate in this lifetime and bring an end to our miseries. Yet some of us will live out our lives in these subjectively named “miserable conditions,” knowing that we are fulfilling our contract with oneself, and learning our lessons for our Soul Self and for All That Is.

Both of the examples I have just described are becoming fully awakened and finding pleasure there, yet only they know this on a Soul Level. Again, to outside observers it would appear that some are trapped in their misery. If one were to look closer though, perhaps one would see the spark of Soul Wisdom in the eyes of those I am speaking about. We are all involved in a complex dramatic presentation for the benefit of oneself and All That Is.

Natural Healing

HYPOTHESIS: You can heal yourself and others via the Etheric grid-works.

The Etheric grid-work the sustain the realities of our Universe. These energetic lattice-work of creation and support are currently unknown to the majority of humans on Earth. Yet again, the natives or aboriginals have used these networks since the beginning of your time to interplay with the natural world around them. So certainly this experiment is simply a means to reintroduce you to practice that you may have have engaged in countless times, in other eras, in other bodies.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Utilize your calming practices to access a deep state of relaxation. With your Energy Personality as your guide, ask for guidance as to causes and solutions in these matters of personal health and the health of others. Suggestions may come to you as images, sounds or other sensations. Keeping with the metaphor of a grid-work, you might receive an image of a lattice superimposed over your own body or the body of the subject you are assisting.

The area of interest may glow or otherwise make itself known to you. Using whatever means that comes naturally to you, facilitate the transformation of the area of interest into one integration and support with the rest of the body. This is a personal choice of methods and means that may come into your awareness through your Inner Senses.

Later in this series I will speak of the possibility of the blog reader increasing their vibrational rate and so intentionally moving themselves out of a “disease” state and into a state of health. This is done in collaboration with your Energy Personality. You may experience your current state of illness within the dream reality and so learn your lesson there instead of in Third-Dimensional reality within your current Timeframe.

If you are currently at a stage of Soul Evolution that would enable you to experiment with these probabilities, Please do so in a systematic way, with guidance from your Energy Personality and with attention to the requirements of experimentation as a Scientist of Consciousness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings, perhaps with drawings and ideas for future experiments.

Depression

It is a matter of the power differential with respect to our relationship with our world. Depression is largely a matter of powerlessness accepted as a reality – a field of reality – by the individual. As a field, it colors the entire existence and all DOES INDEED seem hopeless.

I advise to unlock our conditioning and take back our power from people and institutions, so too I advise the so-called “depressed” person to rise up and make the gesture of transcendence into the Realm of Power. All it takes in one charged Moment Point of personal responsibility for our evolution, to push the balance out of stasis into change: positive change for the individual.

Then we simply place further Moment Points of personal responsibility for our growth and positive assessments and behaviors, “one in front of the other,” to create the positive future.

Now, should the negative energies make a come back, it does require the individual to reaffirm a commitment to a positive future, in that moment, and once again push the manifestation chain of creative moments out of stasis and into the positive. The Negative Reality is rejected and the Positive Field of reality is accepted once again.

As an addendum, remember too, that in these moments we are affecting all of our Simultaneous Lives. So certainly we are doing our selves much good via these positive assessments.

And perhaps I should mention the obvious – that just as the Accepted Negative Field of Reality experienced by the “depressed” person has momentum and continuity in a morbid, yet familiar sense, so to does the Accepted Field of Positive Emotions and Behaviors hold its own momentum, continuity, and familiarity in a positive, even joyful sense.

Healthy Wealthy Wise

HYPOTHESIS: Through intention improvements can be made in your health, havingness and learning.


We have covered the means to these improvements in the previous blogs. Generally, it is a good idea to have a richly visualized image of what you would like to create with regards to health, wealth and wisdom.

As in the previous suggestions in these matters, the image should virtually resonate with the desired thoughts and emotions that you would experience on having created and perceived the manifested Reality Constructs. It may help to create a piece of art that helps to focus the creative energies.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
With your art piece or your written manifesto or other focusing objects at hand, enter into a relaxed state of consciousness. Here you are asking for the natural energies of the world to assist you in creating your improvements. In a sense, you are using these energies of transformation to imbue the focusing objects with generative power on the small level to create the desired outcomes on the larger level. You are providing the emotional charge through your visualization to drive into creation the Reality Constructs you have in mind.

You will know when the changes have been made, as you may feel an inner Sense awareness that you have succeeded.

FINDINGS – document your findings.

Dream Interpretation

HYPOTHESIS: The energy personality can read and interpret your dream symbols


As in previous Dialogue, write down what you remember of a dream upon awakening from sleep.


CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
When you are next in contact with your Energy Personality through meditation or other rituals of contact, ask for an interpretation of the dream with regards to your particular symbols. Within a context of learning your lessons and understanding your own dreams, your Energy Personality can help with interpretation. Typically, your Energy Personality will not resort to revelations that may interfere with the learning of lessons.

FINDINGS – Document your findings in whatever form you best-suited to this endeavor

Slowing Down Time

HYPOTHESIS: You may effectively slow down time for study or for other practical purposes.

Using your Inner Senses as exploratory tools, you may conduct your experiments free from what you might refer to as “the constraints of time.” You know that the past and future are created now, in this Moment Point. You may use you conscious intent to imbue your Moment Points with an “elasticity” that can afford you greater leeway in your studies.

For example: you may through your intention create a “slowing down” of time within your Personal Reality Field. Now you have undoubtedly already experienced this slowing down of time while engaged in an activity that you know well, an activity in which you are completely absorbed. Time slows down in such circumstances.

So let us suppose you wished to cover a broad range of activities in a meditation session, for example, and you have only a few minutes to do so. Before your meditation, simply give your Energy Personality your intention to expand time for the moment, or slow it down, to enable you to complete your activities. This is especially effective for those who are on self-healing regimens. You can intend to deliver several hours of self-healing suggestions to your self in the space of just a few minutes. Your Higher Self or Energy Personality will then carry it out. You have used your free will to choose this activity.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Induce a relaxed state in your physical body by whatever means suits you. When you are relaxed, consider the Inner Senses counterparts to your physical senses of sight, touch, smell, hearing and taste. As you do, you may notice that these Inner Senses make themselves known to you in a somewhat “dreamy” fashion.

What I am saying is that these senses have a quality of duration and intensity unlike the physical senses of the outer world. Your perception of Inner Healing, for example, may be perceived as though each sound resonated within your consciousness. This might be somewhat similar to the sounds you hear as you are falling asleep. The sounds seem to be extended, as though time were slowing down.

For purposes of this experiment, this is exactly the perceptive state I am asking you to create. Simply utilize your imagination to “turn on” the Inner Senses with an eye towards the slowing down of time within and without. The seeing on the inward eye is slowing down. The sounds are slowing down. Perhaps even your sense of how your skin feels in contact with the air around you and the surface or your chair or pillow begins to deepen and lengthen.

Now when you have slowed down time within your Personal Reality Field in this fashion, present to your awareness your healing suggestions, you questions of what have you, with the intention that resolution will be found, thanks to the slowing down of time you have created. This alteration of your perceptive field may also give you insights into the uses and powers of your Inner Senses.

FINDINGS – Document your findings after each

LESSONS AND WISDOM

Now wisdom comes from lessons learned in all of the domains of human interaction. I have mentioned the physical, the mental and the spiritual domains, to establish lines of discussion for us as we attempt to make ourselves understood. Naturally, these realms of understanding must surely overlap in some instances in the lives of individuals. We will likely discover where these domains merge as we conduct our experiments in the field.

To be healthy, in terms of these domains of learning, would imply that certain standards of creative manifestation would be consistently met within the overall context of the particular body we are using in the current incarnation.

The powers of creative thought with which we create the body and the world around the body have great leeway in creating health and disease according to lessons to be learned. For example: we may be currently incarnated in a body of physical health, relative to others who have no defects. Here we enter into the area of Value Fulfillment that I have described in previous Blogs.

It is not easy to assess any particular individual’s incarnational learning experiences using flimsy surface indicators. For example: a human with a major facial or other disfigurement might elicit a responding emotion of pity from another. Yet the Soul Self of this human may wear the disfigurement as “a badge of honor.” For Souls may CHOOSE these types of lives to learn their lessons quickly, due to the high-emotionality involved in living a life with honor and acceptance within a disabled physical form is explored in earnest. Soul Wisdom is earned through such a life lived.

Now the opposite, of course, is also true. Lessons regarding living a “charmed life” are in store for all who inhabit the Third-Dimension. All That Is seeks to know through the experience of Souls, both the exalted and the mundane. No experience is better or worse than another. Again I refer to my previous discussions on Value Fulfillment for more light on this matter.

HAVINGNESS

This current life on Prosperity, abundance, havingness.

CREATING PROSPERITY
Now we shall turn to matters of prosperity. Let us proceed from the beginning. The first step is an assessment, a self-assessment if you will. You first must assess what level of abundance you wish to achieve. You then assess the current level of havingness and examine the difference between the two. This difference between what you have and what you wish to have, can serve as the emotional impetus or motivation to create or manifest the desired result. There is no manifestation without emotional content. The greater the emotional intensity or desire, the more quickly and surely the manifestation occurs.

We create our reality. We are magicians in this respect and it would be good to be more intentional in this magical view of things: creating consciously, with a positive perspective for the good of not only ourselves, but for all others, all of humankind. This deference to the sum of all humanity holds the key to effective conscious manifestation for you, Dear Blog Reader. In effect, we are demonstrating your commitment to the good of all with these intentions. The Divine Logos that is All That Is holds us to this commitment to all, as a condition of progressing on our development path, our path of Soul Evolution. Now if this indeed sounds fantastic and perhaps unworthy of consideration, let that egoist response serve as the measure of our distance from Soul. Now we know how far you have to go in this enterprise.

Our personal manifestation of our current level of prosperity or abundance is an important indicator of what our beliefs are with regards to havingness. This is the feedback I have been describing to you in this blog: the reflection of your mental environment that IS your Personal Reality Field. Often you may notice that there is a direct relationship between giving and prosperity; for in the natural perspective – the magical view of things – there IS a give-and-take at the foundation of your manifestation activities. We can see this in the breath of life in the “pulse” of our natural reality. Just as breath is cyclical, with the inhalation and then the exhalation followed by a pause, the pulse of life or manifestation is cyclical with a pre-manifestation period followed by a pause and the manifestation. The completion of one cycle may take less than a microsecond in our perceived time. This is still long enough to give the “appearance” of physicality or “bedrock reality,” as some call it.

As we begin to get a feel for this pulsation of ideas into constructs, powered by the Consciousness Units with electromagnetic properties, we will also begin to gain conscious control of our creativity in the moment. This manifestation cycle is the framework upon which our camouflage reality is built. This pulse can be experienced under specific circumstances.

You may, as I describe in an experiment, using your inherent powers of creativity, slow down the progression of time within your Personal Reality Field. You do this with your intention, using your Inner Senses. Time is felt as elastic with the use of these Inner Senses, and slowing time down to the microsecond level may reveal this breath of life we have been discussing. You may also observe how your thoughts create and support the various aspects of your Personal Reality Field.

Now to simplify for the Blog Reader, let us discuss a distillation of some of the natural elements of manifestation related to goodness and giving. There is much good to be had in the giving of money, personal items, your time or money creates a state of consciousness that is not conducive to prosperity. This may already be quite apparent. You may be miserly and have the “appearance” of prosperity, yet you may not enjoy it for you have not shared it with others. And by creating your “mental estate” on a foundation of stinginess and greed, are you really expecting to create lasting abundance? Better to create a foundation of sharing and love for yourself and others, intentionally.

You look The positive creates upon the positive for the good of all here. The Reality Constructs tale hold and are tempered in a telepathic mental environment of trust and love. Others with similar loving strategies of manifestation will be drawn to you in support of this beneficial world-view. This is the beginning of the loving, self-sustaining communities that will reshape our world.

NATURAL HEALING

To continue on this line of thought – that of exploring the possibility of healing all wounds, physical, spiritual and mental – let me elaborate on a concept we may refer to as Natural Healing. By this type of healing, I mean allowing the body to heal itself with the aid of “soft” technologies. These soft technologies do not include surgery or drugs but do include some age-old therapies and some natural products of the Earth: hypnosis or “healing talk,” and the application of various plants, minerals, waters, oils etc.

This system I am describing is of ancient origins. It is the basis of All of our modern medicine. The simplest way to describe this is to say that the human body is a natural organism – it is a creation from the natural elements of our Earth by our divinely-inspired consciousness. And from the beginning of our time on Earth, healing talk has been used by our healers to effect healing changes within human beings. So does it not make sense that we may repair or renew the organism in a natural way, with natural methods and products?

But where to begin? Do we have to seek out systems of correspondence, looking for the leaf or oil that will bring relief of a corresponding ailments? Not necessarily. When we approach this activity from a magical perspective, any natural remedy will do. We make make our own association between the remedy and the condition, in effect personalizing this divine activity. We do it with thoughts, again, and we imbue the activity of healing with emotion – strong emotion – which is the electromagnetic healing force in this endeavor.

Now this naturally requires a profound trust in your own abilities to choose and to empower the remedy with curative powers. But this is entirely within the potential of all human beings to accomplish. It may be conceived of as a form of self-hypnosis while perhaps reminding oneself that we are a Soul with a Body rather than a Body with a Soul. Within the etheric domain of the Soul, all is possible, including the healing of all ailments.

CREATING HEALTH

Creating health… I will be extremely brief, though some may doubt that I can BE brief. Our health is the most evident aspect of our Personal Reality creation, for we create the rest of what we have been referring to as our Personal Reality Field. Now we ARE experiencing our physical body created through the template we choose before our birth. This template provided us with a body that holds “build in lessons for us to experience.

The lessons of the physical body are myriad and continue until our physical death. Yet on a basic level, relative to all other humans, if we are experiencing a happy, healthy mental environment, we may be in all probability co-creating with All That Is, a happy, healthy body. If we are entertaining negative thoughts of disease and low self-worth, we may be in all likelihood creating a body that will experience that level of disease. This happens unconsciously for the most part, this creation of healthy or non-healthy bodily conditions.

Sometimes though we can catch oneself responding to our own apparatus. For example: if we respond to a statement such as, “I’m catching a cold,” by saying to this person, “Yes, I’m catching a cold too,” you are creating the bodily conditions to receive the cold. This is material we have covered elsewhere and so I shall not digress.

Now there are those of us who are experiencing our current lives with challenges, such as a lack of arms, legs, various organs and so on. There are also some physical diseases that may seem to be ‘Beyond Healing.” Within our Third-Dimensional world, it is indeed thought to be impossible to grow a new limb or new organ, or to recover from a “terminal” illness. However, we are headed for a realization that All of the maladies and illnesses of humankind may be corrected through proper use of the imagination and the sacred powers of manifestation with All That Is.

In the Fourth Dimensional our thoughts will be instantly manifested into Reality Constructs without the lag-time in between that we currently experience in Third Dimensional Reality. Should we have self-created “incurable” illnesses and physical challenges, we may learn lessons through resolving these Soul issues with our powerful thoughts of healing. These are simply some of the more profound experiences that await us in the post-transition Fourth-Dimensional Reality.

HEALTHY WEALTHY WISE

It is a blessing one wishes for one’s self and others: healthy, wealthy, wise. These three elements of life are the focus of many in our world. Perhaps we can use this blessing as an example of how we can, with consistent intention and application, co-create with All That Is, our greatest potential for health, prosperity, and wisdom.

Now, we are all individual humans on our great Earth, each with our separate, idiosyncratic propensities for growth – evolution – on all levels of manifestation in the physical and other dimensional realms. Therefore, it should seem obvious that one human’s health, wealth and wisdom might certainly not be another’s. Having said that, let us examine the powerful, evocative ideas and beliefs suggested in the three words.

Health is a topic we could easily spend an entire blog series on discussing. There is physical health, there is mental health and there is spiritual health. There are lessons to be learned in all three realms for all of us as we make our journeys into physical reality. What might appear confusing to our eyes as we judge another, may be simply the other’s decision to learn their lessons in their unique fashion. And find the truth regarding The Transition from the physical into the etheric.

Conscious Co-Creation with Conscious Units

Key word here is conscious. Me and my fellow humans co-create our lives “unconsciously” for the most part. This is the result of the amnesia I spoke of in earlier Blogs, so that we forget the love and are more inclined to learn our lessons. Now the amnesia is being lifted, and we are becoming aware of the true nature of our reality. So it is a matter of habit.

Make our use of Conscious Units conscious on a moment-to-moment point basis. This is easily done, is it not? Whenever we find our selves varying from thought-path, nudge oneself back. We have done this a few times this morning already. Negativity will try to draw you toward its own path. That is what it does in our reality. Our task at hand is to redirect negativity’s energy into creating love and confidence in the moment.

The Conscious Units that comprise the environment are fluid in the moment. They can go either way, positive or negative, depending on our subconscious or conscious intent. Keep the scales on the positive side consciously and watch your positive manifestations of house and land – prosperity – be creative in these moments.

Natural Magic

Men and women as magician. The Magical way is simply an appreciation for conscious manifestation in the natural world. We are a part of the natural world. AS I have said many times before, we are co-creators with All That Is of all that we observe in our reality.

Now, this is a magical process in that we create seemingly something out of nothing. Referring back to my concept of Consciousness Units, we use the “material” of CUs with our free will and intent to create our shared consensus reality.

Telepathy is operative on all levels and so we have a cohesive illusion; a manifestation of our world and our Universe that all of us can agree upon. It does look quite real, does it not? Yet if you believe what I have been telling over these many years, this “enduring” physical reality of ours is really just “a bunch of hot air.” It falls apart under the kind of scrutiny I am asking you to muster as a Scientist Consciousness.

KARMA

The truth about the Human Soul is that there is no Karma, there are only experiences. One experiences one’s lessons in materialized form that one comes to Earth to experience. These experiences run the gamut of what we consider as “positive” or “negative” and we keep returning to these experiences in human form until we have masters our lessons.

Karma entails, in general Western, popular definition, some sort of “dues paying” left over from supposed “past lives” that one endures in the current life. But since all lives are simultaneous, these sorts of definitions lose meaning. If we attribute a brick falling on your foot in this life to your karma from a past life, you are greatly over-simplifying an essentially scared, or should I say soulful or spiritual experience.

The Eastern Religions are closer to the truth of the evolution of the Soul than the Christian Religions. However, no religion has yet explained it in terms useful enough for humans to comprehend in its totality, and by so doing receive the divine information that would unlock the heart. No, we have been blocked in our spiritual evolution by our egos. It is now time to relax your ego and let our Souls shine through

Magician, a Shaman or a Witch

Astral Travel, time travel, projections of consciousness – these are various terms describing essentially a single activity: the use of human consciousness in a focused way. If you look at the various descriptions of the activities of let us say, a magician, a shaman or a witch, you would find distinctions made between the various activities. Yet if you were to compare these activities across the board, you would see that all three are attempting to accomplish similar goals, for similar reasons, in similar ways. Ultimately, all are making use of the human consciousness to create changes – changes in personal and shared Reality Fields.

Dear Blog Reader, when you conduct your experiments, you will find you have the most control in your own Personal Reality Field. You will be investigating within your radius of manifestation. Yet over time, as you become proficient in the use of intention in the creation of Reality Constructs, it becomes easy to expand your potential field of manifestation to include related or contiguous fields.

Now, because all is one and everything is related, you can have effects on anything in your consensus reality. All you need is the focus and power in the moment. This is the vehicle for healing others at a distance, for example. It takes some time and experience to get acquainted with these networks of creation, or “grid works” as I have described them in earlier blogs. However, any one of us can master the workings of these fields and grids. Turn to the experiments in my Blogs.

FIRST SCIENTIST

The Scientist of Consciousness is the magician of old. The magician, the shaman, the witch: these forbearers of humanity’s spiritual traditions were our world’s first scientists. It was only later, when the outer senses replaced the Inner Sense as a means of investigation and exploration – the accumulation of “facts” for their own sake, the acquiring of knowledge without meaning – that the scientist’s role became de-spiritualized, secularized and developed

The work at hand is to spiritualize and make scared the experiences of humans on Earth at this time, though collaborations with Beings of Light. Now I do not mean to offend when I exclude organized religions from this discussion. If we are getting what we need from our religion, by all means continue. That is my advice to you.

However, if you feel that your evolution as a Soul is stagnant and you are not getting what you need from your religion to see you through the coming transformation, then I would advise to try the methods in my blog. Keep affiliation and use these ideas as an adjunct to our practice.

There is much good in the mainstream religions and there are opportunities in all of them to achieve the enlightened state necessary to make the transition into the Fourth Dimension. Unfortunately, these opportunities are often hidden under the great weight of dogma and misconception that clouds meaning and disempowers the individual.

This is why I counsel my blog reader, to accept nothing into your heart that goes against your very nature as a child born in love out of the creative power of All That Is. Make up your own mind. Think for your own self. Accept no ideas, including the ideas in this blog, if your intuitive voice tells you they are not right for You-the-Soul.

THE MAGICAL PERSPECTIVE

The Topic for discussion is the magical perspective. If readers of my previous blogs had indeed taken the tides to heart and created for themselves the Loving Reality Constructs based on the virtues of humankind. My previous Blogs about The Magical Approach, presented some very powerful means for altering the Blog Reader’s Personal Reality in beneficial ways.

Potential will remain just that if it is not acted upon. A probability of altered realities for the better will remain a probability if not acted upon. Again this should be obvious to all of us, but it is the acting upon the impulse, it is the acting upon the potentiality, it is the taking of advice lovingly given by Beings of Light that begins the process of actualizing these impulses, these potentialities and this advice. And so I must convey to you Blog Reader the importance of actually conducting the experiments and absorbing the material, working it into our lives on a daily basis.

The magical perspective is simply a special way of looking at our world. This perspective empowers the Blog Reader with the forces of manifestation that we have denied for so many generations on our world. Now there were ages in what we would call our world. Now there were ages in what we would call our “past” that the magical perspective was appreciated by the majority of the people.

Our “myths” – though I do not like the word myths, for it denotes that these events did not transpire, for indeed they did transpire for the most part – depict those eras in human evolution when humankind took the responsibility of personal manifestation quite seriously. Currently, in what we term “the aboriginal systems,” the magical perspective is appreciated and practiced. However, it is usually only utilized by a select caste of revered leaders who are endowed by the members of the collective with the Magical powers.

THE ENERGY PERSONALITY AS SELF OBSERVER

HYPOTHESIS: Your Energy Personality can monitor your conscious state and give you valuable feedback.

You are gods studying your manifestations. I make this statement once again, reminding you of your status as creators of worlds. AS humans, we are endowed with the virtually unlimited powers of creation to manifest our desires into physical constructs. This happens naturally, all by itself. It may be somewhat difficult to study this manifestation phenomenon, for you yourself are part of your creation.

Therefore, in this experiment, you may attempt to inhabit an alternate perspective in order to study this creation activity you do in tandem with All That Is. It is somewhat like taking snapshots of moments in linear time – the perceptual illusion – for consideration at a “later” date. Let us label this aspect of the Energy Personality the “Self Observer.” This aspect of consciousness has the power to “recall” elapsed Moment Points for purposes of inquiry into the nature of events in physical reality. This observing self has the attributes that you endow it with by virtue of your god-like powers of creativity.

The purpose of this experiment is have your Energy Personality witness and “document” for you, notable excursions into the unknown reality while you are awake. Your Energy Personality will recall instances of Astral Travel, communications with Simultaneous Lives, and other phenomena for review at a later date. This is your Self Observer aspect that you may use to remind you of what you have experienced throughout any given day.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now create your relaxed mental and physical environment. Then simply assign the task of self-observation to your Energy Personality, much as you would assign a task to a personal assistant. For example: you might say, “Please document as memories today, my voyages into other dimensions, for review this evening.”

Then mark out time in the evening for review. At that time, ask your Energy Personality to release those memories into you consciousness sequentially for your review. Now obviously you may have your review at other parts of the day or immediately after the notable event. This protocol is simply one of convenience for those of you who have busy daytime working lives.

As you continue with your regimen of self-observation, you may notice that inter-dimensional travel is the rule rather than the exception. You are subject to frequent “mental vacations” of this type throughout your waking and especially your sleeping times. In fact, the great majority of your day-to-day life is spent within these alternate dimensions.

FINDINGS – Documents your findings with successfully eliciting information from your Energy Personality on events which have transpired.

GREAT ESOTERIC WORK

In our esoteric literature there is much talk of the Perfected Human and the best means to achieve that state of development. Here in this current blog work, we are exploring similar territory with regards to the transformation of the “baser” human aspects – anger, fear, hatred – into their divine counterparts – love, understanding and courage. In many ways, my teaching has been a continuation of these esoteric studies and philosophies initiated by humans in our perceived past.

I must add, that these humans were in close touch with their Energy Personalities and other Guides, as they created these great works of “inspired” literature. It seems obvious to me given what I have described for you , but the whole of inspired literature is infused with the divine information imparted to human authors by Light Bodies.

Inspired ideas are , for the most part, just that – inspiration or spirit ideation or communication. Quite literally, our Guides, acknowledged as such or not, are responsible for most of the “spirited,” life-affirming ideas we have ever entertained or acted upon. Now this may seem to refute my other statements that the impulses conveyed by our Simultaneous Lives are what make up the great percentage of what we would call “the activity of the conscious mind. ” This remains true.

Beings of Light within this milieu of a collective consciousness, seed us mentally with inspired and beneficial ideas, images and feelings. There is no contradiction when we consider the vastness of human consciousness: the webwork of Simultaneous Lives contributing thought forms, our own individual Personal Reality consciousness and the lattice of Light Body communication that supports and nourishes it all upon a foundation of limitless creative energy that is All That Is.

Now such profound pronouncements may have the potential of leaving us feeling somewhat diminished. I would remind you then, that YOU are creating this Personal Reality Field of yours, in tandem with All that Is. You are the magician. You are the creative ally with the Divine who creates your part of the world, and as a member of the collective of humans, the world consensus reality.

And this brings up another salient point… many of us have NOT been listening to the voices of the Divine. Many of us have turned a deaf ear to the suggestions of Beings of Light. That is why we find ourselves in such a dire circumstances. So there is a balance. The perfected human is one who balances the input of divine information with their own Reality Creation agendas, within the greater dramas of learning one’s

KNOW YOUR GUIDES

We can access the constellation of Guides we have watching over us. It is possible for any one human, with determination and insight, to cultivate communications with many Beings of Light. The only limitations to these explorations are the ones we put on them.

Documenting our explorations in the finest detail seems to be imperative for these voyages within: asking for the names of the various entities, feeling them out for what services they offer, keeping everything organized in the physical arena, and so on. Now let us proceed with some experimentation.

SIGNS OF INNER-GRATION

The signs of inner-gration are common to all who undertake these explorations in human consciousness. For that reason, I will now spend more blog time documenting these effects. Now you can go deeper. Just close your eyes and intend to deepen this connection.

There is a marked heaviness one feels throughout the body, but especially the head and chest, when one is in contact with the Energy Personality. A “pressing in” on the body from without. It is as if the air pressure of the atmosphere is increased somewhat and one is invited to slow down one’s physical and mental activities and focus within.

Of course, different personalities may experience different sensations. These are simply the broader physical effects experienced by most people. The emotional element is striking, I think, in that one feels one’s self supported on a pleasant wave of good feelings. This is the ecstasy that comes with contact.

Now, knowing what to expect, you can set yourself up for the experience itself. By this I mean, you can cultivate this sense of riding a wave of ecstatic emotion just below the surface of consciousness; and this sense of being comfortably pressed in by the environment that surrounds you; and a sense that you are supported like a beloved child.

One embodies these emotions and sensing as a means to prepare the mental and physical environments for contact with the Higher Self, the Energy Personality. Having achieved these conditions, it would be a simple matter to ask for the name of your Guide, perhaps asking for the one “closet” to you to come forward and make contact, for one has many Guides. One must be selective at first.

So you have prepared the emotional and physical space for contacting and communicating with your Energy Personality. Next you can increase the odds of making contact by “Invoking” an attitude or a sense of “hopeful, faithful expectation.” Here you are anticipating in a positive, loving way, the contact – the encounter.

Now as I said, over time you will make contact and succeed in connecting with your Energy Personality whenever you wish. Some will succeed sooner and some later in these experiments. It is important to keep a positive expectation during these attempts and to keep negativity at bay.

PICKING UP THE THREAD

“Picking up the thread” describe the activity of connecting in a relaxed way to my communication stream. It is a subtle endeavor to trust. It is as subtle as picking up a thread from a tapestry of a greater work, to coin a phrase for the blog reader. The activity of asking for the name of the Energy Personality and having received the name, continuing to seek a mental dialogue with the Energy Personality, is a delicate endeavor.

The usual approach is one of hopeful, trusting questioning, done on a regular basis, that leads to two-way telepathic conversations. The questioner asks for the name and receives the name. The questioner asks questions and the answers begin to flow the source, The Higher Self of the questioner. It is a simple task that we must do diligently and with the roper positive attitude to get results over time.

These matters of personal contest and communication develop in individual ways, according to peculiarities of personality, the mental environment and the energy within the subject’s Reality Field.

“That space between worlds”. But just take it as an interesting game. “Don’t stress,” to coin a phrase. In fact, trying too hard can subvert the process. Diligence with ease is the way to go.

Encouragement and Caution

As I have said earlier, human consciousness visits other times periods and participates in activities in other dimensions, even as we may be participating in our daily unremarkable activities. We are experts at vacating our human bodies and venturing forth into the unknown realities.

Our New Age metaphysical literature is quite filled with stories of angels, demons, extra-terrestrials and the like. So too do our motion picture business prosper through the creation of science fiction and fantasy movies. Yet does it surprise us that these stories are “literally” true?

Remember, Dear Blog Reader, that it is our human consciousness that creates our reality in tandem with All That Is. And so the creativity of our artists, as well as our own, feeds and supports alternate dimensions. When we are experiencing these tales, either through reading or watching movies or plays, we are submerged in the alternate dimensions for that time. So this is the simplest example of inter-dimensional travel – experiencing entertainment media.

With regards to the subject of contacting other Entities in the Fourth Dimension, I must caution to certainly create the Ritual of Sanctuary and have this ritual memorized. As an explorer of these realms, we undoubtedly will encounter negative energy forms that may come into our consciousness and attempt to fix on our light.

By this I mean these Negative Entities can transmit a propensity for negative, repetitive thoughts or images entering our consciousness that can be difficult to undo. We recognize these circular ideas of information loops as disturbing pangs of dread, and other negative emotions. They seem to come from nowhere. Actually these negative energies are attracted to specific memories and ideas we are holding in our mental environment that are of a negative nature: Ideas and feelings of low self-worth, replays of past mistakes and all of the other negative inner experiences humans punish themselves with every day.

Now this is how the Negative Forces gain control over the minds of many in our world. They gain a stronghold in a sense, within the mental environment of those with weakened protection systems. It is as though the immune system of the Etheric Body is weakened through the activity of the negative thoughts, images and such, creating the conditions within the mental environment for viral contamination. The negative, circular thoughts – the thought viruses – are then free to multiple.

The comparison is very useful here. With our suggestions and experiments we are using love and acceptance and confidence to dispel the viral attack. To carry it further, antibodies are created with the introduction of positive thoughts and emotions into the suppressed immune system of the Mental or Etheric Body.

The negative viral front is neutralized and overcome by love, acceptance and confidence. To be sure, a healthy mental, motional and spiritual body is one that is nourished on love, acceptance and confidence, to the degree that these positive states of consciousness are the typical experiences of the embodied Soul.

Contacting the Energy Personality II

HYPOTHESIS: Our spirit guide is awaiting contact.

I hope you Blog Reader will become proficient as you go along, practicing in sequence as much as you can.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
I would like you the blog reader, just for a few moments, to relax and to close your eyes. This is easy to do. Quiet your mind. Think of a relaxing scene. Now Imagine that you have contact with that part of you that is all-knowing – for indeed you do. Ask for its name and you will receive it. It may take a few moments to achieve contact. It may take a few more minutes for the name of your Guide to come to you. Be patient.

The important thing is to have the expectation that we will achieve contact. And working from the loving aspect of consciousness always, this will keep you moving in the right direction. When you receive the name of your Energy Personality, you may sense that you are rekindling a past relationship, possibly dating back to you childhood or even beyond that into what you may term “past lives.”

This remembrance, along with the loving aspect, is a firm indication that we are indeed engaging your Spirit Guide. The excitement that comes with contact may throw you out of trance. Simply try it again after performing the Ritual of Sanctuary. This experiment can be done on a daily basis to strengthen the connection to your Energy Personality.

FINDINGS – Immediately document your findings.

Contacting the Energy Personality

PROOF: Proof is around us. Receiving information from a person who is unconscious. These types of communications will be commonplace in just a few years in our reality. This will be so, partly, because we will be educating the public on how to develop these communications. Again, the closer you look at your perceived reality – the Personal Reality Field that you co-create with All That Is according to your beliefs – the more validation you receive for what I have been saying to mankind/womankind for decades in these Blog writings.

Each moment of perceived reality serves as a graphic example of the manifestation of thought into Physicality, Which is related to the Soul, will be the etheric teacher to those of us who are to experience the transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension with our “eyes wide open.” We will have read my blogs or received messages from other Energy Personalities and we will have acted on the advice given us.

Many of us, without recognizing the fact, have already been given instruction on the use of our Inner Senses, what to expect in the Fourth Dimension, how to move beyond fear and anger and into love and confidence and other subjects of great importance. In dream state we are being “brought up to speed” by those of us who teach on the subtle levels. And so now we are reading this blog and perhaps having a singular sense of familiarity, Deja Vu, as though we have done this before, with accompanying feelings of pleasure, “elementary ecstasy”.

Our world is larger and more complex than we know – our world meaning our created reality. We have physical teachers and we have “metaphysical” teachers, all of us, and now it is time to introduce us to the metaphysical Guides who have been with us since birth into our dimension.

When we ask for our Energy Personality to come forth into our awareness, we may feel that sense of familiarity. For even though we have been pretending that ghosts do not exist even since our childhood ended – adults do not have imaginary friends, after all – on a deeper level we will recognize these connections. Now we may not be willing to admit these relationships to the world because of fear of being exposed.

However, and to illustrate my point, currently a cycle in human consciousness is coming to an end and a new cycle is beginning. We are gradually becoming aware of our connections to our Guides, our Simultaneous Lives, and other energy forms within our Gestalt of Awareness.

We need only to look at the headlines in our daily newspapers to notice how many changes are upon us in our Third-Dimensional Reality. With the ending of an era comes dramatic change amid much clinging, by some, to outmoded belief systems. Yet know this: the more we cling to the past, the more likely we will be regulated to the past when the transition is complete. The new world for humanity is being created in the dream state by all of us as we participate in the manifestation of our collective consciousness.

In our dream state, we freely collaborate with our Energy Personality and other Guides in the creation of incipient Reality Constructs that are manifested on awakening. This is how we create our reality with All That Is. Naturally, this phenomenon is much more complicated than I have Described, but that does not mean that we cannot grasp it experientially.

POSITIVE THINKING

In conclusion to this blog series, we shall have success in creating positive realities to the degree that we hold positive thoughts within our mental environment. This habit of positive thinking is our foundation for the creation of an improved Personal Reality. Now as you know, you are ONE with all of humanity through the interconnectedness of the Consciousness Units. And so, as you do your part here, and others of like mind and behavior do theirs, the whole of humanity is influenced in a very positive fashion.

Keep a good thought Dear Blog Reader. Nourish Loving Understanding and Courage within your consciousness. Challenge the toxic status quo reality with your powerful thoughts of forgiveness and compassion.

Our world is on the verge of a breakthrough into multidimensional perception. We may assist others by leading through example in all that we say and do. Regardless of our perceived “faults,” regardless of any history we may have of creating negative realities for ourselves and others, we may in this current moment set the stage for future continuous positive reality reactions, for our own sake, and certainly for the sake of all beings that share the planet with us.

Cultivating Synchronicity

HYPOTHESIS: You may anticipate, create and sustain coincidental events within your personal reality field.

In this experiment you will attempt to intentionally create coincidental events within your Personal Reality Field. This experiment is most easily conducted when you are experiencing the coincidental events in your current Moment Point. As you gain experience in observing your consciousness and the synchronous events you participate in, it will become easier to anticipate coincidental events. You will be able to sense them coming to you from the future.

Now you are creating these future events from your current moment, you see. As you are experiencing the wonder, awe and amusement that comes with this type of experience, you will be pleasantly motivated to continue with your research. Remember that you may use your powers of intent to extend these feelings and these events for some time.

CONDUCTING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Pick out anything in your field of perception. For example: say to yourself that the bird in the tree in front of you will now be a part of a coincidental event with something else in your Personal Reality Field. Quite soon after this inner declaration, watch your environment closely for the coincidental experience.

You are using your imagination to create a synchronous event, you see, that will then be fabricated out of Conscious Units for your viewing within your Personal Reality. You may then “expect” a third synchronous event to materialize, and so on. This is very much like child’s play, and is quite a fun way to spend a few minutes of your day.

FINDINGS– Document your findings

Recognizing Special Impulses

HYPOTHESIS: Some thoughts are special impulses from our simultaneous lives.

This experiment is one that we can do on an ongoing basis as we go about our life, doing those things that we normally do, engaged in the mundane experiences of our existence. Some of us may have noticed that much of this life is lived in a rote fashion, by habit, almost as if in a dream. Then something occurs in our consciousness to pull us out of the habitual pattern.

A sudden thought might occur to you the blog reader, that you can easily change your course somewhat and experience a new avenue of exploration in your life. Now this impulse might be quite simple, as simple as changing the type of breakfast cereal you eat. Or this fleeting idea might urge you to consider breaking off a relationship that has been negative for some time.

Often these ideas can present new opportunities to your awareness, so that in retrospect, perhaps after several months or years, you realize that your acting on the impulse had the effect of completely transforming your life. You are amazed at how the alternate path taken had set up a series of alternate events that led to a uniquely different, and often more positive and life-affirming outcome, than had you continued on your habitual path of experience.

It is these special impulses we will be exploring in this experiment. These may indeed be impulse for your Simultaneous Lives, offering you suggestions for creating more productive Reality Constructs in your life.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now use your relaxation techniques to create a relaxed state with your body. There are two approaches to recognizing special impulses: First, you may work your way back in time from the present regarding a special impulse that you noticed and acted upon which spun you off into a new, positive direction. You can then see the context of influences you were in that created this catalyst for action.

Then recreate this context in your present moment – emotional content, physical circumstances – through use of the imagination. Consider these special impulses within your consciousness NOW that may be these messages from other parts of yourself. Write them down. Act on them if appropriate using your free will.

Second, if you cannot think of a special impulse you have acted upon, simply relax into your meditation and ask for the special impulses to present themselves to your awareness. Then write them down and either act on them or not. This practice leads to experiences of synchronicity, wonder, amusement and awe.

FINDINGS- Document your findings rigorously.

Discovering the Inner Senses

HYPOTHESIS: The intuitive senses may be strengthened through use.

And so what are these Inner Senses? Briefly, they are both the creators and the perceiving apparatus of our world. In our Third-Dimensional existence, we create out of Consciousness Units our physical realities, and then instantaneously perceive our creations as a form of feedback of this endeavor, the creations of the worlds.

In past Blogs I have often informed of our god status. It is difficult for us humans to take seriously this talk of godlike abilities, for many of us have been indoctrinated by our various religions to be meek, to be mild, to obey. And as I have stated in my previous blogs, after transferring our power to our religions, we then transferred our power to our governing institutions and to our scientists.

What I suppose here in this blog is that we are not meek, mild and obedient unless we truly wish to be so. We are whoever we THINK we are and we have the power in this moment to completely change who we are. That is because YOU are at the center of your world as the ultimate creative force. With the energy of All That Is, we as co-creator do indeed manifest from our beliefs and ideas of what is possible, our perceived reality.

Now, without further lecturing, we will give a short description of the experiment. It builds upon a short described in my earlier blogs in which I asked the Blog Reader to get a sense of the wonder of their own Personal Reality. Here we will take it further. We will be taking the senses back into the inner world.

As I suggested , the physical senses grew out of the Inner Senses, of necessity, to perceive the exterior, physical Universe. The Inner Senses from which these outer, physical senses were derived, are awaiting our discovery and use within our mental environment.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
We have several physical senses: sight, hearing, taste, touch and smell. Our Senses are complementary to these out senses, yet they go beyond the physical senses in capabilities.

For example: let us get a feel for the Inner Sense that may be a complement to the outer sense of sight. You may relax a bit for this experiment, yet you needn’t close your eyes. We will be relying on your sense of physical sight to conduct this experiment.

With the eyes open, yet with the relaxation and contentment that comes with the state of Sanctuary you are embodying, can you see the deeper, perhaps symbolic meanings entailed in Personal Reality Field? Remember here: everything in your field of perception is a reflection of an interior reality.

As you consider this statement, you may find that your visual field begins to swirl a bit, as the etheric blends with the exterior. Go with this flow of blending transformation for a few moments until you have observed noteworthy findings. Gradually come back to your physical perceived world. Naturally you may experiment further with the compliments to the other senses to gain more information.

FINDINGS– Document your findings

INTENTION

Opening up to one’s greater reality simply by affirming it. That is how one does it: with our thoughts, just like everything else in our reality. Have the intention that we are opening up to these Simultaneous Lives of which we are speaking, and soon enough, proof of their reality will be presented to us.

Now, without belaboring the example, it was IMPULSE that I decided to transcribe my Blog material into a more readable format. My intuitive voice spoke to me and promised that much of value and interest could be recovered if I were to do so. So where did this voice come from?

In my case it was from my ancestor personally, though this is by no means the rule in these phenomena. My ancestor reached across the time-frames into my future, to communicate with me and motivate me. Now this may sound fantastic to some of you. Indeed it will remain unbelievable and so un-witnessed by you in your own realities. The following experiments may help you prove to yourselves that you are ALREADY active participants in the non-physical reality.

WITCHCRAFT

The experience of Astral Travel, as some have called it, is quite common among us. It is a refreshing experience, after having say, engaged in a difficult day at our job, to simply cast off from the physical, even while engaged in other activities with our fellow humans, and travel the subtle levels.

Gentle Persistence

I would like to emphasize that in these matters of Soul exploration, you can be quite successful with a gentle, yet persistent effort. Your initial experiments in accessing your Inner Senses are an exercise in subtlety. Approach these activities with any eye on gradual results over time. The clouds, in most instances, do not part and reveal the Etheric Visions to us, after only a few attempts in your experience in the field.

I realize that this subtle route to discovery may be difficult for those of us who have expectation of immediate results. Some of us may be of mind that, like everything else in our Western world of mass-consumption, if it is not forthcoming immediately, on our schedule, because we have so much “to do,” that it might not be worth attempting.

To these blog readers I say, take the time necessary to accomplish your goals in this Soul Work. One of our sayings extols the virtues of waiting with patience for the truly beneficial aspects of our life to materialize.

And honestly, the days of instantaneous manifestation are still in our perceived future. These experiments will give us an advantage for the time when we will be experienced enough to use our Inner Senses appropriately for the instantaneous manifestation of Reality Constructs.

Now once again I would remind that all of these experiments are designed to lead to the uncovering and practical use of our Inner Senses. And these Inner Senses are what we may broadly term “Intuition.”

In past blog writings I have lectured on how the intuition can be divided into separate senses and I did indeed name them. I sense that it may have been a mistake to do so, for it is now I waiting for my blog readers to make practical use of the Inner Senses and allow each blog reader to do whatever delineation they may, as they discover the attributes of these senses for themselves – again, learning by doing, and perhaps creating their own names for their experiences.

Moment Point

We can share our ancestor’s Point of Power experiences as one is working with the written material, organizing it on a computer and so on. this is a literal fact. Astounding as it may be to some blog readers, this type of things goes on continuously in our own private lives.

We “leave the body,” to coin a phrase, and travel interdimensionally to participate in these activities. Often we can do so while carrying on a conversation with one of our fellow humans and appear quite normal. Our eyes may glaze over a bit; an indication that we are traveling and experiencing other time-frames.

Now, our scientists may characterize this as pathological, dissociation, fantasy, escape; completely missing the importance of what is occurring.

I don’t want to go off on one of my critiques here, but let me say this: until our scientists can learn to turn their empirical noses inwardly, they will not be able to sniff out one iota of truth regarding human consciousness, or the human condition or the human Soul.

Your Simultaneous Lives

Simultaneous Lives are engage in this continuous exchange of impulses and energy I am describing. As you can see, you are at the heart of this reciprocal activity. You occupy the center in your Gestalt of Consciousness: the energy network that comprises the receiving and sending of impulse energies between your current self and all of your other selves past, present and future.

This very basic activity of consciousness rests within a framework that is totally dependent on the loving and creative energies of All That Is. And the culmination of all of these energies within your individual consciousness at any one moment, can be described as “the activity of the conscious mind.”

Should you wish to consider these ideas while using the illustration as a meditation focus piece, you may perceive for yourself more intimate meanings than any of my explanations can provide.

Special Impluses

In my previous blog, I provided an illustration for you on how to send out energy – positive, loving energy – to Simultaneous Lives. In the experiment you will be “completing a circuit” by discerning with your awareness, when entering your consciousness. This is not hard to do. As I have just mentioned, in each vying for your attention. These impulses, however, the special impulses I am now discussing, are easily recognizable for what they are, by virtue of their obvious loving utility.

When one of these impulses is recognized, you have an immediate sense of rightness, as though you wonder why it took so long for the idea to come around. These ideas are also based in a truly loving aspect of consciousness that is undeniable. In essence, this loving energy is the energy of All That Is transmitted through your various Simultaneous Lives, and then captured by you as your consciousness participates in the Gestalt of Awareness that is you and your many lives past, present and future.

These impulses may be accompanied by synchronous events and a sense of wonder and divine bemusement. Everything comes together in your life drama for the benefit of your learning experience. These synchronicities and thus the life lessons may be brought into your awareness intentionally.

So you Blog Reader, when engaged in this dialogue with your Simultaneous Lives, are receiving the benefits of learning experience from the personalities who are LIVING these many lives. In fact, just as I communicate to educate and inform humanity on the very, very serious issue of the survival of the species – and for the matter the planet Earth – these communiques from your Simultaneous Lives in the form of impulses serve to educate and inform the Blog Reader, of a personal level with regards to appropriate action you can take to improve your life.

I would like to restate my point regarding these types of messages and all messages from you Higher Self: these messages are benign  and loving in their intent and that is how you can tell they are from your Higher Self. And as always, free will is operative; you can choose to act on or ignore these impulses.

Inspiration

Generally, it is quite easy for those of us in this land and  some of the other industrialized nations, to think of ourselves as individuals. The pioneer influence is felt by many of us in our cultures and so we fancy ourselves as independent explorers of our personal domains.

And so it follows that we feel as though our mental life is our own, and then even though privacy in the personal and business fields of endeavor is rapidly being lost, at least our thoughts are our own, if what we define as “thoughts” are “the greater elements of human mentality.”

Yet our thoughts are not truly our own, in this pioneer sense. In the great Gestalt of Consciousness I have been describing to us, the thoughts of our Simultaneous Lives past, present and future are being received by us, as well as the thoughts and suggestions of Beings of Light, the negative transmissions of Nefarious Entities and the telepathic thoughts of our fellow humans.

Our thoughts are alive. Each of our thoughts, including the thought-forms transmitted into our consciousness by Energy Bodies and our fellow humans, has a propensity for creating itself in physical reality. And because our human thoughts have distinct properties – such as a “desire” to associate with other similar thoughts, and an energetic ability to transcend space and time – our thoughts can be considered to be the most powerful Energy Constructs in our system of reality.

However, unfortunately for most of us, we begin our lives on Earth by surrendering our powers of thought-creation and manifestation to individuals and institutions. And so we are taught to create with our powerful thoughts, the Reality Constructs of the institutions – family, church, business, country – in which we participate.

Many of us abandon our loving, altruistic visions in childhood, therefore, and it may be that you the Blog Reader are only now remembering the idealism of our early manifestation activities. These activities may have included collaborations with imaginary playmates.

Now I shall discuss this further, this topic of childhood Spirit Guides, in future Blogs. For now simply note that there are a host of potential relationships with “Imaginable” beings available to us within the sphere of our personal consciousness.

Impulses

Impulses are indeed inspirational and creative as we recognize them and use them in the creation of our world. But as we have discussed, many in our world regard these impulses as “voices of the devil,” or at the least, untidy remnants of pathology to be surprised and ignored. To be sure, within this vast chorus of telepathic transmissions, the Negative Entities also vie for attention.

But it is a simple matter to protect oneself with our own positive affirmative thoughts when exploring these areas of consciousness. Surrounding oneself with “white light” is a very effective precaution to take before our explorations or meditations. In this way, we focus our attention on the positive and look, we find the positive creative impulses coming into view. This is all simple Metaphysics. We get what we focus one. We create our reality

Accepted and Rejected Fields of Reality

A critical and necessary aspect of Reality Creation is what we will call the concept of Accepted and Rejected Fields of Reality. Simply put, our beliefs determine what we accept or reject as part of our Personal Reality Field. Another way to express this idea is that each of us, as the thematic structures of our belief system. Moment-to- moment, we accept from innumerable probabilities, those that complement our ongoing Personal Reality Field. We act upon these probabilities and so bring them from the potential and probable into the realm of the possible and actual. Our Personal Reality develops staying power and permanence in this way.

This concept of Accepted and Rejected Fields can be used to explain how our belief system changes as we learn our lessons in Third-Dimensional reality. For example: let us examine a person who may be new to matters spiritual. They are a male or female who has lived a very material life. Their main activities are shopping and watching television. They have not reproduced or built a network of family or friends.

This may describe many millions of the inhabitants of our Western world. We could say that their Accepted Field of Reality, the Personal Reality they have known and can come to expect in the future, is one of robotic existence. The inner life is not examined here to any degree. This is simply the way it is for them.

But let us suppose that the Higher Self of one of these people creates an opportunity for going within, to perhaps briefly meet the Soul Self. Divine information is streamed into the consciousness of this person. Let us say this has the effect of motivating them to take a walk in the forest rather spending the day watching television. As this person walks in the forest, they participate in the exchange of energies with the vibrant, life-affirming aspects of the forest environment. This may have the effect of revitalizing and spiritualizing this person, to the degree that they would want to make this activity a regular part of their existence.

Do you see how the chosen activity of walking in the forest, merely one of an infinite number of probable activities, acts to bring new life to this person? Perhaps this is part of their lessons they have come to Earth to learn. Perhaps they are to seek out empowering activities in nature that will expand their consciousness and serve to spin them off onto a different, more life-affirming trajectory than their current life path.

Now, this is of course greatly simple, this example, for the accepting or rejecting of individual probable actions, ideas and images is infinitely more complex. To bring in the computer analogy here for a moment: the process would be similar to the function of the world’s most powerful computer. This theoretical computer would be able to make an infinite amount of choices from among an infinite array of probabilities each second. In our previous example, each choice would serve to complement and endorse and continually verify the belief system. And the activity of walking in the forest, done over time, is moving from a Rejected Field of Reality to an Accepted Field of Reality. It is being incorporated into the Personal Reality Field.

Our Inner World

Everyone has an “inner life,” whether they acknowledge it or not. All of us are involved in the great dramas and subliminal activities of the underworld of human consciousness. Memories of these experiences are carried out with us from sleep and we my marvel at the peculiar symbols of this material. Yet this non-physical universe is ALWAYS ON, despite our knowing or unknowing of its reality.

In our waking hours, as we go about our work-a-day world behaviors, this unknown reality of the spirit continues to unfold beyond our physical senses. Indeed, it is this etheric counterpart to our physical reality that lives life to our “normal” waking hours perceptions. The two work together, in other words – the waking and the sleeping times realities – to present to us for our edification, the life lessons we have incarnated to learn.

Now, to get a sense for this complementary non-physical reality, all we must do is present a line of inquiry to oneself, while in a relaxed and open state of mind. This non-physical reality is “waiting in the wings,” to enter into our particular life-drama that we are experiencing.

As I have hinted at in these new blogs, most of us who are reading this material are doing so for a purpose; that is, to catalyze the use of our Inner Senses. In this way, we will be receiving a preview of what is to be humanity’s next perceptual breakthrough – an exploration of the Unity of Consciousness Dimension.

So our inner world will be making itself known to the outer, in a way never before experienced by humankind. And we have the opportunity of learning about this new land beforehand, so that if we feel called upon to do so, we may assist in the awakening of others. Now let us speak of the creation of the new realities that will bridge inner to outer worlds.

THE INDIVIDUAL IS IMPORTANT

I refer the blog reader to our blog series on Soul Evolution for a discussion on the value of the individual human consciousness in the collective conversation that we are calling the Telepathic Network. One person can truly make a difference here in this Consensus Reality.

It could well be our single Loving thought – expressed in the telepathic conversation – that could tip the scales to the positive manifestation. Imagine how powerful our Loving thoughts could be when joined by hundreds, thousands, millions of other Loving thoughts directed intentionally by LOVERS of our Mother Earth.

There is certainly power in numbers in these matters. And that is what it shall take… huge numbers of Lovers of the Earth using their powerful thoughts of creation on the subtle levels to creative positive realities.

So individual is important. The individual expression of Loving energy directed toward the creation of a positive reality – world peace for example – is what will save us from ourselves. All of our thoughts of Love are acknowledged, you see. Each Loving thought matters. They have a cumulative effect also, so that a momentum is built over time, such that the creation of the positive reality might well become inevitable.

Incidentally, in recent years we have used our Loving thoughts in concerted ways to make profound changes in our waking realities. Great disasters were averted. Calamities that would have claimed many hundreds of thousands of lives were “de-energized” and so were not manifested.

It is true that our world has seen recent Earth Changes that entailed great loss of life. What I am suggesting is that there was the potential for many more disasters to occur entailing many more casualties. As a consensus of reality creators, then, you and our fellow occupants of the planet agreed to manifest and then did manifest an altered reality. We saved ourselves, you see.

This phenomenon happens quite often, though we do not realize it for we are not yet awakened fully. We do not yet acknowledge our full creative powers. However, we soon shall

Connecting with the Mystery Civilizations

HYPOTHESIS: Current interests may illustrate lives in the Mystery Civilizations.

Using the methods from a previous experiment, consider which of the Mystery Civilizations you may have resided in. There have been others not mentioned in this blog that you will put on your list. Just get a sense of where your interests have been over the years of your current life. Are you an engineer type or a scientist? Are you a nurturer and yet also a leader?

With the knowledge of what type of personality you are currently, consider which of the Mystery Civilizations you may have lived within, that could serve to complement your personality and interests. In past blogs I have established for you several families of consciousness.

With this in mind – that you may be a participant in a family of consciousness and that you share traits with others in this family – yet without creating unnecessary dogma around it, as I may have done in the past – I would invite you to consider the Mystery Civilizations that most suit your temperament and personality and put them on your list.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
As before, create your relaxed state and go through your list. Visualize the possibilities of life within these civilizations. For you it may be as though you are watching a motion picture, or perhaps a particular feeling tone will serve to direct you. The Sumari language is very distinctive, perhaps you will hear some dialogue from a possible existence in GA.

“You will know it when you see it or hear it.” Watch and listen. Continue this line or inquiry for as long as you wish, without of course, trying to find something that is not there. When you sense that the experiment is over for the time being, gradually come to full-waking consciousness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings.

The Inner Senses

First the word “inner” may be somewhat confusing, as there is no inner or outer in the true reality of our world, but we use the term to distinguish the Inner Senses from what we call our outer, physical senses. Perhaps “Non-Physical Senses” would be a better term.

The answer is, we are already, to a vastly greater degree than most, using our Non-Physical Senses – intuition if you prefer. When we ask a question and we “go and get”, we are using these senses. We are navigating our inner world when we do these activities and in the world we will find different environments, signs and symbols, than we will find in our exterior world.

Each person is different in how they use these Non-Physical senses and the results they get through these perceptive means are also unique to the individual. Now this is good, this creative use of perception, in that All That Is may experience the greatest articulation of emotion, memory, behavior and the like.

Perhaps I am taking the long way around this answer, but this is simply a prelude to a deeper investigation that we will embark upon as we create the new blog material.

Daily Forecasting & Projections of Consciousness

HYPOTHESIS:
You can prove to yourself that you create your physical reality in the dream state.

Try this experiment upon awakening from sleep in the morning. I specifically say morning, because in the early morning hours one has one foot in the etheric and one foot in the physical. This is the perfect time to witness the manifestation phenomenon.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Before sleeping give yourself a suggestion to linger in the state in between sleeping and waking the following morning or when ever you will awaken. Then as you are just coming out of sleep and your suggestion is taking hold, and you are lingering and enjoying it, make a few predictions for yourself on what is going to transpire in your “future” day. Suggest to yourself that you will remember these predictions on fully awakening.

When you awaken, write down your forecast for your day. Naturally, the next step would be to go on with your day and notice positive correlations between the items on your forecast and the events in your day. Now, do this for a period of time, as a scientist would, and keep a dairy of your experiences.

Note here that the correlations denote more than precognitions. They may confirm for you, the waking Soul, that you are experiencing the reality you have just created in the dream state.

With your experiments in forecasting on a daily basis, you will be intimately exposed to the concept of probabilities like never before. The sharpening of the intuition, indeed, is done through an appreciation for the qualities and behavior of probabilities on a personal level in your own life. Probable paths chosen or ignored are the building blocks, so to speak, of your existence.

This is a critical point, I think, and so perhaps an example is needed for clarity. Suppose you are at a crossroads of sorts. You are faced with a decision that you must make that will have a great influence on the direction your life will take afterwards. For instance: suppose your job is being moved to another state or another country. Your decision to stay or leave for the distant job site will establish a completely different trajectory of life experiences for you and your family.

Now, with appreciation of probabilities and some knowledge of the concept of Moment Points and the other ideas we have been discussing in my previous blogs, you can make far better decisions in these matters.

After conducting your Ritual of Sanctuary, you could use a projection of consciousness down the two or three possible trajectories of probability. In a relaxed state, you could visualize the outcome, further down the road, of each probable decision.

First, imagine what would occur after a decision to accept the position offered in another state or country. What would the moment-to-moment, day-to-day aftereffects of that decision manifest for you? Fill in the details with emotion and color as best you can.

Now mentally return to your current timeframe and imagine the aftereffects to stay in your current location, and perhaps find a job with another firm, or perhaps even starting your own business right where you are now. When you sense that your experiment is complete, gently return to fully-awakened consciousness

Connecting with Your “Historical” Past

Current interests may illustrate lives in preceding eras.

I believe that we have set the stage adequately with our discussion of the origins of humanity as to where we have been in terms of our preceding many thousands of years. This brings so to our present. From this vantage point we can see how each of the readers of this blog has participated in these events: being spun off from All That Is and being born as babies and raised in some or all of the Mystery Civilizations of Earth. Now this leaves us still looking backwards from our present into the ages after these civilizations and leading up to our current incarnations within our modern timeframe.

A very simple way to conduct research into this intermediary phase is to consider, individually Dear Blog Reader, what eras in our Earth’s historical past we identify with or feel deeply attached to, as if we had spent sometimes or even a lifetime in these historical timeframes. This is a potent method of consciousness expansion.

Before we enact our Ritual of Sanctuary, make a list of historical eras we enjoy reading about it books or depicted in motion pictures. Do we feel a sense of nostalgia here? Do you feel a sense of longing, as though we are away from our home? If we do, these eras may merit exploration in this experiment. we may wish to scan history books for ideas, using our intuition to guide us. When we have our list of eras at hand….

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now access you state of relaxation using whatever technique you have found useful. To repeat the phrase, “I am light,” may be helpful. When we are sensing our world in a light and relaxed manner, consider our list of eras one-by-one, and visualize the possibility of your having lived a life within these timeframes. Now often it will appear quite obvious that you are going in the right direction here. You may have a sense of loving acceptance with a re-living of experiences from these possible past existences. Make a mental note to remember this information. When you have finished your list, gently return to your waking consciousness.

FINDINGS- Document your experiences.

BLEED-THROUGHS

Bleed-throughs can be glimpses of probable roads not taken and so not actualized. For the most part, as I said, in these bleed-through experiences we are connecting with aspects of our Simultaneous Lives.

In the Unity of Consciousness Dimension we will be aware of all of our existences past, present and future and we will be able to remember them and hold those memories. Now, currently our consciousness – and by this I mean the consciousness of Western mankind/womankind – is just beginning to learn how to navigate these regions.

Part of this learning experience is discovering how to “hold” these perceptive bleed-throughs in our consciousness without resorting to fear, denial, etc. These experiences will be momentary, therefore, until the Inner Senses are adequately developed, and skills at creating love and confidence out of fear and anger are mastered.

We are not given more than we can deal with in any particular instance here. It is an individual learning curve with each of us as we learn to acknowledge our Energy Personalities and begin to expand our perceptions with the help of these Guides.

Lemuria

We have covered GA and Atlantis. We will now discuss Lemuria. This civilization is quite active on our planet Earth, yet like others, is flourishing within adjacent dimensions. Now as an intriguing aside to our presentation here, many anomalous phenomena we experience in our timeframe – ghost, monsters of various types, space beings – are simply our perceptions of momentary openings – portals if you will – into these other dimensions.

Lemuria the civilization is the stimulus in our human consciousness – collective consciousness – for ideas about underground people. Thus, in our fairy tales we have trolls and other fascinating types of creatures who pop out of the ground to engage in discussions with humans, only to “disappear” back into Earth.

Now it is true, in a sense, that this civilization can be thought of as subterranean, yet that is simply where the Lemurian dimension is located in our Earthly intersection of space and time. To the Lemurians it is us, the surface inhabitants of Earth, who are peculiar in our occupation of the “upper” dimensions of the Lemurian world.

The people of Lemuria are excellent dreamers. They pay much attention to their dream activities and appreciate the connections to the waking physical world. They spend a greater amount of time sleeping than do the inhabitants of our Third-Dimensional world.

We often experience their dreams as momentary waking visions, or fantastic dreams if we are asleep. Humans of the Third-Dimension and the subterranean Lemurians share elements of consciousness, therefore, and if we are patient and perceptive, we may identify these bleed-throughs in our own consciousness when they occur.

The underworld people have been the subject of many visitations by shamans and other travelers of the Etheric Realms for centuries on our world. To go into the Earth seeking visions is to invite meetings with these people. Now they have a markedly different appearance than their surface colleagues. I cannot tell specifies, as I wish you to discover these for your self.

However, I can say that our descriptions of Nature Spirits, the Green Man, Elementals and others are highly accurate. Different physical locations beneath the surface reveal different articulations of the subterranean life forms, just as the different races of humanity are “products” of the different surface conditions on our Earth.

Atlantean Healing

I might add that the people of Atlantis had a unique healing system that utilized color and sound. Prismatic colors and natural as well as “synthesized” sounds and colors, were used by members of the healing caste to effect cures of various diseases.

Environmental or ambient sounds may be “captured” by one’s consciousness and brought into the problem area to heal the body through “resonance.”

The healers of Atlantis were actually facilitators of the healing process within individuals. These techniques were similar to our modern hypnosis methods. The subject was led through prescribed visualization journeys to access “the healer within.” The power of healing was thought to lie within the Great Power: The Divine or Sacred Energy of Life.

Members of the healing caste were in touch with what we are referring to in these writings as the Energy Personality. They were experts in facilitating contact and communication with the Energy Personalities of these they were assisting. The work was very similar to what we are attempting in this current project Blog.

Atlantis the Technological Power

Atlantis is a society that lingers on the edges of our mass consciousness, almost as a dream. Our people’s attraction to the story of Atlantis has to do with the similarities between our cultures. Now without interfering in our evolution, I might say that the similarities revolve around issues of Power with a capital P, the ethical uses of mental technologies and the spirituality question: that is, how does a society protect the open manifestation of spiritual ideas? I trust we may intuit further “talking points” from my humble description.

The greatest technological achievement of the Atlantis civilization – the one that helped create great benefits for the people and advanced the growth of society – was the use of human bio-electric energy in series. The telepathic networks between individuals were used to transmit and magnify human cellular energy. This bio-electric power was then stored in crystals and some special structures made for this purpose. These “batteries” could then power the devices the people used in their daily existences.

Much as modern humans are dependent on electricity from power plants, the Atlanteans required a connection to the storage units that held the energy. This connection was a mental one. The psychic networks that we in our current timeframe are just now beginning to explore and validate, were used in Atlantis in very sophisticated ways. Ordinary human beings could connect to this network mentally and immediately receive the energy transmission, which they would then direct the energy to their devices. I am sorry that I cannot be more forth-coming with this information.

Children Of Atlantis

The stories of Atlantis and other mystery civilizations. As a child, we enjoyed movies with Atlantis as the subject matter. We have read books on the topic throughout our life. We are drawn to this “myth” as are many of our fellow humans in our timeframe. There are reasons for this attraction. WE are “Children of Atlantis,” in a very literal sense: “children, ” in that we have a tendency, as a species, to not want to learn our lessons. I am speaking of he spiritual lessons that we came to our planet to learn. And we are from Atlantis, that is true, a civilization that reached the highest station in technological achievement, only to destroy itself trough misuse of these capabilities. This is of necessity a greatly over-simplified explanation, for Atlantis is as much in our future as our past.

Now, as an aside, previously I have suggested that humanity is indeed headed down the wrong path with regards to the development and use of nuclear technologies. And this is the arena in which mankind/womankind, particularly in the industrialized nations of Earth, will either go the way of the Atlanteans and cut short their evolution in childhood, or begin to make the right decisions as a loving collective and mature into responsible stewards as co-creators with All That Is. I do not wish to be like some scary monster storyteller with this information, but hear me now: the situation on earth is very, very critical. It becomes more dangerous with each passing day as we create this Blog. The nuclear question, however we must only look at some of our Earth’s spiritual traditions, to get an indication of what will inevitably befall us if we continue on our course. The prophecies of these scriptures speak of great fires and catastrophes, and indeed these will occur if humankind does not change its ways. In these same traditions there are writings on how to avoid the cataclysms brought on by greed, ignorance, fear and anger.

Please understand that humans at all points of our Earth are being brought up closer to the light in these current years. The people are being educated in their own tongues and with images from their own spiritual and religious teachings.

Children of Atlantis

We are “Children of Atlantis,” in a very literal sense: “children,” in that we have a tendency, as a species, to not want to learn our lessons. I am speaking of the spiritual lessons that we came to our planet to learn. And we are from Atlantis, that is true, a civilization that reached the highest station in technological achievement, only to destroy itself through misuse of these capabilities. This is of necessity a greatly over-simplified explanation, for Atlantis is as much in our future as our past, as I have said.

Now, as an aside, humanity is indeed headed down the wrong path with regards to the development and use of nuclear technologies. And this is the arena in which mankind, particularly in the industrialized nations of Earth, will either go the way of the Atlanteans and cut short their evolution in childhood, or begin to make the right decisions as a loving collective and mature into responsible stewards as co-creators with All That Is.

I do not wish to be like some scary monster storyteller with this information, but hear me now: the situation on Earth is very, very critical. It becomes more dangerous with each passing day as we create this blog. The nuclear question, however we must only look at some of our Earth’s spiritual traditions, to get an indication of what will inevitably befall us if we continue on our course.

The prophecies of these scriptures speak of great fires and catastrophes, and indeed these will occur if humankind does not change its ways. In these same traditions there are writings on how to avoid the cataclysms brought on by greed, ignorance, fear and anger. In a way, my teaching is similar to these ancient – in our terms – Blogs.

Please understand that humans at all points of our Earth are being brought up closer to the light in these current years. The people are being educated in their own tongues and with images from their own spiritual and religious teachings.

People Power

The multisensory image of numbers of people lying down on the ground, head to foot, in series, in a grid and somehow this generate power.

It reveals the fundamental power of the culture: they harnessed thought and used the collective power of human mentality – telepathy – to create our world consciously. This is where we are headed in the future if we utilize ideas.

GA The Matriarchy

Let us discuss first the least known of these civilizations: GA, a civilization from our Third-Dimensional existence, eight-thousand years before our Christian era. This society spread over much of our European world and was governed by women with men in primarily administrative and physically creative roles.

Many of us have passed through this civilization experiencing roles as males or females within this society that honored the female aspects of consciousness. The men created physical objects, built homes and other constructs. Now the men were not demeaned here. It was a different concept. Men and women were fulfilled in their roles. There was no “Battle of the sexes,” as we have currently. Cooperation was the watchword, the goal of all relationships.

GA, as we shall refer to this matriarchal civilization, was a society based on loving appreciation for one’s fellow participants in the culture. In many ways, just as our American society is an experiment in multi-culturally – the melting pot – GA was an experiment in a society based on love.

As the Sumari influence was strong in this culture. The Language was primarily Sumari, a language based on love and unconditional acceptance of others, both within the family and outside the family. The loving essence of each person was noted, respected and cultivated in relationships.

Yet as time goes by, in our current timeframe, “discoveries” will be made by archaeologists and other scientists using their Inner Senses to guide them. These discoveries will lead to a complete reinterpretation of the historical record pertaining to civilizations from our perceived past.

Now it may seem obvious that some of our current legends regarding matriarchal societies came from the GA civilization we are describing. This is quite true. These colorful tales of tribes and full societies of empowered creative women enter our collective consciousness via bleed-throughs, just as described earlier in these blogs.

Because our future and past are created NOW, in our current Moment Point, individually and collectively, the full cellular memories of that civilization will be imprinted and “come to mind” when the probabilities for a matriarchal society can be entertained seriously in this present timeframe of ours. Do you see how it works, Dear Blog reader? You re the creator. Our creations are limited only by our imaginable and perceptual boundaries.

Encouragement And Caution

As I have said in earlier bogs, our human consciousness visits other time periods and participates in activities in other dimensions, even as we may be participating in our daily unremarkable activities. We are experts at vacating our human bodies and venturing forth into the unknown realities.

Our New Age metaphysical literature is quite filled with stories of angels, demons, extra-terrestrials and the like. So too do our motion picture business prosper through the creation of science fiction and fantasy movies. Yet does it surprise that these stories are “literally’ true?

Remember, Dear Blog reader, that it is our human consciousness that creates our reality in tandem with All That Is. And so the creativity of our artists, as well as our own, feeds and supports alternate dimensions. When we are experiencing these tales, either through reading books or watching movies or plays, we are submerged in the alternate dimensions for that time. So this is the simplest example of inter-dimensional travel.

With regards to the subject of contacting other entities in the Fourth Dimension, I must caution to certainly create your Ritual of Sanctuary and have this ritual memorized. As an explorer of these realms, we undoubtedly will encounter negative energy forms that may come into our consciousness and attempt to fix on our light. By this I mean Negative Entities can transmit a propensity for negative, repetitive thoughts or images entering our consciousness that can be difficult to undo.

We recognize these circular ideas or information loops as disturbing pangs of dread, and other negative emotions. They seem to come from nowhere. Actually these Negative Energies are attracted to specific memories and ideas we are holding in our mental environment that are of a negative nature: ideas and feeling of low self-worth, replays of past mistakes and all of the other negative inner experiences humans punish themselves with every day.

Now this is how the Negative Forces gain control over the minds of many in our world. They gain a stronghold in a sense, within the mental environment of those with weakened protection systems. It is as though the immune system of the Etheric Body is weakened through the activity of the negative thoughts, images and such, creating the conditions within the mental environment for viral contamination.

The negative, circular thoughts – the thought viruses – are then free to multiply. The comparison is very useful here. With our suggestions and experiments we are using love and acceptance and confidence to dispel the viral attack. To carry it further, antibodies are created with the introduction of positive thoughts and emotions into the suppressed immune system of the Metal or Etheric Body.

The negative viral front is neutralized and overcome by love, acceptance and confidence. To be sure, a healthy mental, emotional and spiritual body is one that is nourished on love, acceptance and confidence, to the degree that these positive states of consciousness are the typical experiences of the embodied Soul.

MAKING CONTACT

My advice is to not worry about who you are contacting, as long as you are receiving the loving aspect. The open-heart aspect of the communication denotes that you have made contact with the Energy Personality. You will know this feeling, in that it is love embodied. Love as an idea or an ideal is a mental construct.

The ecstasy I am describing is felt throughout the body. There is a sense of being pressed in by love so that you have a feeling of slight discomfort mixed in with the pleasurable emotion of love. You will know it when you feel it. It can be experienced as a wave of pleasant emotion, as I describe it, yet each of us will experience it in a different way. This is your Soul shining through. This is the experience of dropping the ego and allowing your Soul Self to perceive your world.

Now, we are on a path of development. All of us are at various stages of Soul Evolution. The difference becomes whether you acknowledge to yourself that you are ready to work with your Energy Personality and move FORWARD in development. By doing so, you catalyze the great powers within and without.

We focus our intent and with the assistance of All That Is, we take a divergent path; a path that will take us from sleep into awakening in a Soul sense. New positive probable futures arise from this intentional choice we make to co-create with All That Is a spiritually-informed existence.

LESSONS OF NEGATIVITY*

In this Blog series we shall hopefully provide you with the opportunity to address the most pressing and important Lessons for you in your current existence. Now truly ALL of our Lessons are “wisdom” Lessons, in that we experience Soul Evolution when we are engaged in learning these Lessons. So that the gaining of prosperity within a life of perceived lack and poverty, may be considered the gaining of wisdom, as well as the facing of perceived extremely difficult, traumatic material from your past may be considered the gaining of wisdom.

However, in this material we will attempt to provide you with the motivation you require to do what you must do in facing, your most difficult Lessons – the Lessons of Negativity, pain and suffering.

For I trust you would agree that the positive Lessons – of Love, of experiencing prosperity, of developing friendships – need much less motivation for the average human to engage in and “do the homework” required, than do the Lessons of Negativity. The Lessons of Love will take care of themselves over time. Whereas with the Lessons of Negativity, the primary reason have we not yet learned these Lessons is that we are indeed avoiding them.

WISDOM LESSONS

Some people seem to thrive and prosper within very challenging “negative” conditions.

We are reminding my blog readers – those that are experiencing these harsh conditions – that they have chosen these lives. Also, we are reminding them that they may be on the end of their incarnational trajectories, and may be headed for the higher realms. This may be a good motivation for some to begin using our techniques to transform the negativity they are experiencing into Courage and Loving Understanding. This Soul work is necessary before one may progress to the higher-dimensional realms.

The Energy Personality

The Energy Personality, which is related to the soul, will be the etheric teacher to Those of us who are to experience the transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension with our “eyes wide open.” Many, without recognizing the fact, have already been given instruction on the use of our Inner Senses, what to expect in the Fourth Dimension, how to move beyond fear and anger and into love and confidence and other subjects of great importance.

In the dream state we are being “brought up to speed” by those of us who teach on the subtle levels. And so now we are reading this blog and perhaps having a singular sense of familiarity, Deja Vu, as though we have done this before, with accompanying feelings of pleasure, “elementary ecstasy”. Our world is larger and more complex than we know – our world meaning our created reality.

We have physical teachers and we have “metaphysical” teachers, all of us, and now it is time to introduce the metaphysical Guides who have been with us since our birth into our dimension.

When we ask for our Energy Personality to come forth into our awareness, we may feel that sense of familiarity. For even though we have been pretending that ghosts do not exist ever since our childhood ended – adults do not have imaginary friends, after all – on a deeper level we will recognize these connections. Now we may not be willing to admit there relationships to the world because of fear of being exposed.

However, and to illustrate my point, currently a cycle in human consciousness is coming to an end and a new cycle is beginning. We are gradually becoming aware of our connections to our Guides, our Simultaneous Lives, and other energy forms within our Gestalt of Awareness.

We need only look at the headlines in our daily newspapers to notice how many changes are upon us in our Third-Dimensional reality. With the ending of an era comes dramatic change amid much clinging, by some, to outmoded belief systems. Yet know this: the more we cling to the past, the more likely we will be relegated to the past when the transition is complete.

The new world for humanity is being created in the dream state by all of us as we participate in the manifestation of our collective consciousness.

In our dream state, we freely collaborate with our Energy Personality and other Guides in the creation of incipient Reality Constructs that are manifested on awakening. This is how we create our reality with All That Is. Naturally, this phenomenon is much more complicated than described, but that does not mean that we cannot grasp it experientially. Please see experiments in previous blogs.

Inter-Dimensional Travel

To go “back in time” even further in our description of our origins, we are presented with the creative source for all that we describe – All That Is. It is this divine source which spins off – literally and figuratively – parts of itself, that become these incipient humans we are describing – these evolving Souls – we and our fellow inhabitants of Third Dimensional reality on our Earth.

So we are spun, almost as on a great loom, from the fertile essence of All That Is, and we are spun-off from All That Is into our forthcoming life. In a sense, our beginnings are in waiting, biding time for years, perhaps even centuries within these star systems, until the opportunity for birth arises.

In terms of linear timelines, most of you who are reading this blog, have resided in a few systems within the galaxies: Arcturus, Sirius and another complex our scientists have not yet discovered and named, and so does not yet exist, in our terms. Inter-dimensional travel is, as I said, instantaneous.

One is at one moment existing in a dimensional plane in a star system far from Earth, and in the next moment one enters the physical body of a Soul – a baby being born on Earth. This is how it works, my friend. This is how it has always been done.

Now to repeat myself here, for I believe it bears repeating, our Soul Self chooses the life it wishes to be born into – the particular human baby born into its unique circumstances of our Earth. We are born to live a life of lessons, for our own education and Value Fulfillment and for the greater experience of All That Is.

Among The Stars

Our beginnings are among the stars. Do we not each of us look to the stars with longing as we observe our great Milky Way Galaxy? There are our origins. There in the stars are the origins of our races on our Earth. From our ancient tales of star gods seeding the Earth with human beings, to our “science fiction” tales of extra-terrestrial visitations, all of these so-called myths and so-called fictions hold elements of the truth about our TRUE beginnings.

Now the ancient tales are often literal interpretations of what our human ancestors perceived. Literal. And our science fiction interpretations originate from our collective unconscious – that store of memory that contains all of Earthly experience past, present and future. Our authors and artists – visionaries – use this great store of symbolic truths to create their artistic works.

Those of us who appreciate the truth in those works – just as the aboriginal and ancient proto-humans appreciated the tribal stories – are experiencing our connection to the sacred via this collective Soul network.

When I suggest that our origins are among the stars, I am saying that within what our scientists describe as intensely hot gaseous spheres of energy – our so-called “stars” – are the “seeds” of humanity. But how, you might ask, can living cells exist in such an environment? The answer is, interdimensionally.

Many interesting and productive life forms – some of which we might term humanoid and others we would surely not – exist and develop in dimensions within and upon stars and planetary bodies throughout the Universe. This is a fact.

They are singularly perfectly suited to their dimensional existences. therefore, I trust the reader may understand that travel from stars and planets and other more distant systems, to Earth or any other dimension in the Universe, for that matter IS a matter of inter-dimensional travel, and inter-dimensional travel is instantaneous.

Now previously in my blog writings I spoke of the origins of humanity. I said that we were indeed of extra-terrestrial origins, and this is quite true. Our Earth was seeded with human life forms from other planetary and star systems to populate the planet and to allow these life forms to learn from their experiences.

As we absorb this revelatory material – that our race has been seeded onto Earth from other galaxies, other star systems – we may shake our head in disbelief. It is a great deal to comprehend. AS I have said, not only do we take on individual lives in material form for learning purposes, and certainly not sequentially within the same family “lineage,” but definitely within different family organizations, of different races, in different sexual roles.

Now there is a great “forgetting,” the amnesia I spoke of earlier, that masks or memories of past lives and Home Dimension experiences. This forgetting explains why we can speak quite honestly and ardently about our “heritage,” and those in or family tree who have suffered, or perhaps triumphed in their loves, thus “preparing” the future for our accomplishments of failings. Again, this is our limited perception. As our Inner Senses become more acute during our awakening, we will see that we are enacting our reincarnational dramas within the Earth experience for spiritual purposes. And as an addendum – even though we may not “believe” in matters SPIRITUAL.

Created Histories

Yes, it has certainly been a fantastic voyage from where and when humanity has “begun” until now, our current Moment Point in this time-frame. Let us focus on the history of humanity I hinted at in previous blogs. Of course, this history I am describing is merely one of literally millions of probable realities one can create by focusing on them. The consensus reality then – the reality that becomes the agreed upon mass-created reality and thus the history of consensus reality – is that most of humanity agrees to create.

Majority rules here in other words. As a collective of humans, we create in the dream state the essential frameworks for our Personal Realities that we will “cover” with our camouflage Reality Constructs upon awakening. Each of us develop from our personal reservoirs of memory and imagination, the evocative reincarnational environments and events that we experience upon awakening. It has always been thus. As I have said, beginnings and endings have relevance only in discussions of linear timelines. In truth, our lives are lived simultaneously, at once within the present moment. However, since time and space are useful theories to us.

Atlantis Bleed-throughs

Bleed-throughs can come from what we call our past or our future and also from contemporary existences – from all of our Simultaneous Lives. And our other point regarding crystals: some of my blog readers are infatuated with crystals and ascribe great powers to them.

These will be the ones who will incarnate or simply transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension and become the leaders in the new technology of crystals I spoke of in earlier blogs. These are truly “crystal people” who may incarnate multiple times, in similar occupations, to consolidate their experience and knowledge.

LESSONS
We are born into physical form to experience a life of lessons. This means that although we have free will to choose from an infinite supply of probable actions, we will choose those actions that support a particular context – a dramatic background, if you will – upon which we shall project our reincarnational dramas, comedies and the like.

Now we must pretend that we do not have such a stake in this production. We are, therefore, surprised when great blessings or tragedies occur on the stage of our life. But currently my blog readers, many of us are waking up to discover ourselves as actors on the stage, and we are acknowledging to ourselves that we are also the producers and directors of these enlighten stories.

To illustrate my point here, consider the tales of our leaders, our heroes and heroines from our historical past, as portrayed in our literature and our motion pictures. We can see the symbolism and meanings in the lives of these great leaders, can we not? Yet can we also see the meaning and lessons in our own ongoing lives?

The heroic struggles of our ancestors are often embellished in larger-than-life terms through dramatization, this is true. Yet the symbolic lessons characterized in books or on the screen are of no greater importance in terms of the Soul, than the heroic acts performed by any of us in our daily lives. We are all heroic. We are all born into Earthly existence to learn our symbolic lessons.

Early Humans

Now let us discuss the origins of what is currently the six-billion plus humans on our planet Earth. Where did we all come from? There have been many explanations from our religions and from our scientific community on our origins. And in the same way that our religious leaders anoint themselves as the only purveyors of spiritual knowledge – including the story of the emergence of humans from the world of spirit – scientists, in their quest for power “over” the material world, have established themselves as the tellers of the “true” story, the “scientific” explanation for humanity’s origins.

Yet what our scientists refer to as the “beginning” of humankind is simply not accurate. Humans have developed from inception onto our planet into highly technological societies countless times, over countless ages, billions and billions of years if we are speaking of linear timelines. Until our scientists can conceptualize within these broader frameworks, the debate will continue to center on theories of early man, use of primitive tools etc, etc, etc.

The “early man” that I am describing, began life on our planet Earth with a highly advanced intellect and a capacity for creating technologies that eventually far surpassed our current efforts. Now these capacities or potentialities were invoked via telepathic conversations between these “early” humans and their higher selves – Spirit Guides or Energy Personalities. In this way, the current expansion of consciousness we are experiencing in our time frame, is a repetition of other invocations of inherent capacities our race has experienced in a cyclical fashion over the millennia.

Meditation

HYPOTHESIS: You can learn to connect with the divine energies in a purposeful way.

Now, our form of meditation is quite simple. The goal is to connect with the stream of divine information, purposefully. You are already accessing divine information as you sleep. This experiment may assist you in creating rituals of contact and communication with the divine source through what we broadly define as meditation. First let me remind you that you will be encountering ecstatic states of consciousness. Your relaxed position in your chair, on your couch or pillow, will appear to others as though you are in an ecstatic state, and indeed you shall be.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
To get a feel for this sitting posture, sit down in your comfortable chair or other structure with your feet flat on the floor. If the chair has armrests, rest your forearms upon the armrests or simply rest your arms and hands in your lap. Now the torso should be balance comfortably on the hips, pelvis and seat.

The most important aspect of this meditation position is this: the head should be resting on the neck slightly to either the left or right-side. The head should be tilted back slightly, again, as though you were experiencing ecstatic states. To others, it would appear as though you were profoundly relaxed and content though not asleep, not unconscious. You have one foot in the physical and one foot in the metaphysical domains.

Now your intent is very important here. Simultaneously, as you create the relaxed body posture for meditation, you are focusing on creating the connection to the divine. This will be unique to the individual. I have described this as “embodying” the divine in this present blog.

With your imagination you will use your powers of creativity to establish the “divine connection.” You will know it when you sense it. The loving emotions will be quite noticeable – the wave of ecstasy just below the surface. As you notice this pleasant feeling, the divine information will no doubt begin to stream into your Etheric Body through the physical channel between your eyes. By keeping free from distractions, you may continue to “drink in” these energies for as long as you wish, though fifteen minutes to an hour per session is adequate.

Now this stream may cease on its own and you will come to Third-Dimensional consciousness soon afterward. Or you may simply have the intention to come out after a specific amount of time and you shall. Simply suggest to yourself that you will come out at a specific time, before you begin the meditation.

It also a good practice to not attempt an intellectual analysis of the meditation session immediately afterward. Give yourself some time. The energies will play out within your Etheric Body over time, and you really needn’t try to investigate how you are doing. The positive changes that will occur in your life as you meditate regularly shall in all probability be enough proof that your behaviors in this matter are worth the time and effort.

This is primarily a receptive exercise or experiment, in other words. You are allowing the divine energies of All That Is to wash over you, to cleanse and to heal.

FINDINGS – Document the results of your experiments with mediation. After you have gained some proficiency, verify for future reference, what you feel and think during and after the sessions.

Creating Ritual Sanctuary

HYPOTHESIS: Enacted sanctuary ritual seals off negative energies.

Building on the exercises from previous blogs, this experiment will explore the means for creating a unique protection ritual for the reader to enact prior to psychic investigations.

Each Blog reader may for themselves list their beliefs and images of security and peace and then distill them down into a potent image or statement that virtually resonates with the energies we are discussing. Again, each individual will create a distinct image or written statement with accompanying emotional content.

This is the Ritual of Sanctuary that the reader may perform before each experiment. It is a good idea for the reader to write down and draw pictures of the images and content they are experiencing for future reference. The ritual may include body movements or gestures, the cultivation of emotional states, visualizations of various types ad so on.

The reader may wish to try out the ritual a number of times until it elicits the desired state of Sanctuary, that is, a feeling of support as if one were a beloved child in the arms of one’s adoring mother. Naturally, the reader may have different criteria for sensing ultimate protection.

One note here… the descriptive terms Emotional Body, Home Dimension etc. are simply for the convenience of the reader. Our reality obviously unfolds seamlessly for our perception. There are no distinctions between dimensions and our physical form, for example. All of our terminology is presented for our use in our Third-Dimensional reality so that we can make sense of this new information being presented. We are used to naming and so we will name in our material.

FINDINGS – Document your findings. This may mean that you will write down the results of your ongoing efforts in creating a Ritual Sanctuary that works. This is a personal matter. Only you will know when you have fine-tuned your ritual to the point that it assists you in creating the sacred space of Sanctuary.

Clearing the Emotional Body

HYPOTHESIS: Raising the focus from the emotional to the mental center clears emotional turmoil.

PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
This experiment concerns the creation of a personal perspective through which you may create and perceive your world with greater clarity. As a human, you are most likely in the habit of creating and perceiving your Personal Reality through the Emotional Center of the heart region. For our purposes, we will raise that focus of awareness up to the Mental Center, which has its physical counterpart in the head directly between the eyes.

Sensing where the energies might be in your heart region, see what image or emotion comes from it. If you have an image of churning, as of emotions strengthening and dying out, you are on the right track. Now, using your intention or will, bring this churning energy up from the lower centers of the throat and head. As you do you may notice that the churning emotionality ceases. It may be replaced with a cool clarity and a feeling of relaxation. Keep with this feeling of clarity, purpose and un-emotionality for a few moments. Embody it, my friend.

FINDINGS – Document your findings. This may simply be your observations, personal meanings, drawings etc.

The Personal Field of Manifestation

HYPOTHESIS: You can sense the creation of your personal reality field.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY.
Let us attempt to help you get a feel for your own personal field of manifestation with an experiment. I would ask you to quiet your mind using any relaxation technique you may have gathered in your lifetime. Deep breathing, visualizing a restful scene and gently stretching the body are some ways to accomplish this relaxation. When you are relaxed, please look out in front of you and establish where in the distance your 55-foot limit might be.

For these purposes it would help if you were doing the experiment outside. If you are indoors, you may be able to sense it intuitively. Now sense how this boundary surrounds and supports you. Sense also how the perceptive reality within this perimeter seems to be subject to your intentions.

Now remember, you are collaborating with All That Is in this creation of physical reality. Can you sense how the creative power of the veritable Universes flows into your Reality Constructs and creates a seamless impression of “bedrock” reality for your physical senses to perceive and experience?

Can you sense the connectedness between you and everything else? Every cell, each molecule, every atom is connected to every other cell, molecule and atom. This is a literal fact. Feel it, imagine it, act on it. In this way, you Dear Blog Reader are connected to everything, everywhere in your Universe.

As you sense this power, can you see that all of your created forms in your perception have their own energy fields? Every atom has its own aura – the electromagnetic corona. Every self-created physical object has its collective aura. Again, here you are asked to put aside feelings of low self-worth, guilt and fear and experience the true nature of your being – as co-creator of your physical world.

Now this witnessing of the true nature of your Personal Reality can co-exist with your ideas and images from your religious and spiritual teachings. One need not exclude the other. Indeed, the most beneficial products or findings that may come from this experiment are the experienced moments of holding divergent views of reality. For it is these glimpses of other truths that may eventually, when you are prepared, convince you to discard beliefs and behaviors that no longer serve You-the-Soul.

FINDINGS – Write down or in some other way document your findings for future reference.

Fifty-Five Foot Radius

This Personal Reality Field we are discussing in previous blogs is simply the field of manifestation: the perimeter in our physical world over which our consciousness has the most control in the creation of Reality Constructs. The radius is about 55 feet for humans.

This is not news however, as Beings of Light have presented these figures to humanity in recent years, and this information has been printed in books and transmitted along our Internet. This figure – 55 feet – is simply something to keep in mind when we are experimenting with consciously creating our physical world. We have the most control within this perimeter.

Beyond 55 feet we cede manifestation energy and responsibility to other forms. Now, we take this with us wherever we go, this boundary of manifestation. So if we are driving one of our automobiles, and we are looking through our window, we have the most control over our automobile and our physical form. For we create our physical form – our body – and we create our automobile also, in addition to all within the radius.

I do not wish to go too deeply into this, as I will explain more about the manifestation of realities later in this series. Simply, humans have 55-foot radius, and animals, insects and even rocks and trees have varying sizes of manifestation fields.

Now, remember that all we experience in our Third-Dimensional reality is conscious, from the material that makes-up our human eye down to the particulate matter that makes up the soil beneath our feet. Ponder this for a moment and I believe we you will receive information I am attempting to convey.

These limitations we are discussing are more a matter of boundaries of the physical senses, than anything else. AS I have stated in other blogs, there are actually no limitations to the Non-Physical Senses and that is why we can use the Inner Senses – which we will cover in later blogs – to contact and interact with beings beyond 55 feet and into other dimensions, across great distances and so on.

The personal field of manifestation is related to the Third-Dimensional reality, in other words. When exploring other dimensions with the Inner Senses, there are no limitations. Our Personal Reality expands to the infinite. It is from a understanding and utilization of this fact of life that we may experience intentionally changing the greater consensus reality from our Personal Reality Field. Thinking Globally and Acting Locally.

The Personal Reality Field

We are the creator of our Personal Reality Field. As you read this blog, you are at once creating your physical body, including the eyes and brain that read the blog that you also create. All is created in the current moment by you, Dear Blog reader. And so we are all artists from the time we were born, working with the natural elements to create our multitudinous Reality Constructs, the building blocks of our Personal Realities.

Now this creation unfolds before us in a linear fashion. We create, as we have just discussed, a past and a future to “match” our current Moment Point – our spacious present. We are artists, but currently most of us are naïve artists, in that we create our works of art – our physical reality and all of its trappings – without much planning or thought. Thus, we perceive our reality, created unconsciously, as something separate. It appears as though we are at the mercy of our own environment, our world. The amnesia that I spoke of in earlier blogs helps to create this illusion of separation from our creative works.

Currently however, many of us are waking up to the true nature of our reality. We are questioning our personal beliefs and the mass beliefs of our societies. We are coming out of our amnesia and seeing the illusion of separation for what it is: a once useful fiction.

As our consciousness is being raised and we are offered a glimpse of our true reality, many of us will take up the challenge to live our lives more honestly and more responsibly. Knowing that we are not separate from our environment,(we have made it) or from other human beings, (we are one) we will begin to take actions that truly matter, rather than fritter away our time on the trivialities of egoic pursuits.

Time

Time, a concept that is very important to those of us in physical reality, though not in the least important to Beings of Light. Humans make much of “time” as we perceive it. We believe that we are making perfect sense when we say to another, “I don’t have time to do what I need to do,” and we seldom see the inherent humor in such a statement, for we take our time so seriously. But I must assure once again of the TRUTH about time.

The truth is that there is no time but the moment – The Present Moment Point. All else – all of the emotion-laden memories of a particular past and the excitement or dread of a particular future – are fabrications of our imagination. We create the added elements of past and future to format our experiences into something comprehensible to our Third-Dimensional, physical senses.

Now this truth-telling regarding time has great utility for us. Knowing and ACCEPTING that there is no time but the current Moment Point – our Point of Power – can free us from any guilt or other negative emotions concerning events from our “past,” and also release us from the needless dread of so-called “future” events yet to come. This moment of truth in our current time-frame, while we are reading this blog, is all we have.

And it is from this Point of Power that we create not only our future, but also our past. I will ask at points throughout this series of blogs, to attempt to internalize this over-riding fact-of-life as a necessary basis for further study and experimentation.

Consciousness Units

Much has been spoken of CUs (conscious units) over the many years of blogging about this concept. Now, simply put, the CU is a model – a Sethian model – for the activity of Reality Creation at its most basic. We may speak of these elements as Awarized Energy subject to the control of human thought. These are basic units of creation we are discussing and we may summarize their activity in a few words: we create our reality out of Awarized Units of Energy – CUs – through our Intent powered by our emotion.

Again, in other forums we may seek out more intellectualized descriptions. But, it all can be reduced to this previous simple statement. At its most basic, which is where we must be in these research activities, the CU is the leading edge in Reality Construction. This “edge” is that point in consciousness where we may place our intention and began to create consciously.

Co-creating consciously with All That Is “IS” the object of this research blog. Now if we require a more in-depth description, we may read the previous few lines again while we are in a relaxed state. It is possible we will intuit a deeper understanding of this concept.

There is much more to the printed word, in other words, than one can grasp in one reading. This work, as in other spiritual texts, can be taken to as deep a level as our Soul Evolution may permit. Words have power. The printed words in certain books have the power to spiritualize the reader and open them up to other dimensions. It has been thus.

This current blog has the potential to catalyze in the reader the awakening of the spirit. This is not an intellectual pursuit, however, and we will not find our awakening on the intellectual path. We may spend lifetimes intellectualizing and explaining away our lessons. Yet we may discover in a brief moment in time – in a fraction of a second – the personal meanings for us on the planet Earth at this time. This is my hope for you upon reading this blog.

Probablities

I would like to briefly cover the subject of probabilities, restating what I have covered in earlier blogs, and adding to the material with some new ideas that I hope will Illuminate this current series of blogs. Indeed, this concept is at the heart of the broader concepts of manifestation and Reality Creation.

To review: in our Third-Dimensional system, our consciousness with All That Is creates multitudinous probable manifestations, of which those we choose to actualize become part of our Personal Reality, what we now call, the Personal Reality Field.

We experience these chosen probabilities as manifested physical Reality Constructs. However, the un-chosen probabilities continue on their trajectories of development. They each have their own separate evolutionary paths, in other words, and continue to grow and develop along their own lines, much in the same way that one experience leading to another, and so on. This is of course, greatly simplified for our understanding. I refer those of you who wish further information on this concept to my earlier blogs.

Now to add to this idea of probabilities for purposes of our current blog – that of accessing the Energy Personality, facilitating communication with it and then under its guidance journeying into an investigation of the Fourth Dimension – I will also be brief.

The probabilities for millions of humans – in the West in particular – to engage their individual Guides or Energy Personalities, are currently very high. Many of us are about to enter into the primary life lessons we came to our Earth in this current time-frame to learn.

These probabilities will remain latent unless acted upon. The purpose of this current blog work is to give you some guidelines as to how to accentuate the probabilities for your individual enlightenment scenarios.

 

UP TO THE LIGHT

Some may wonder what the “The Light” might be. Let us discuss this topic for a moment as background information for those who may be new to this blog material. To begin, humans as born into the Third-Dimensional world with an amnesia. There are exceptions where the child retains the memories, but for the most part, the child is shielded from memories of the time in between lives, the time in the home dimension.

Now in the Home Dimension we are supported on a wave of unconditional love that streams from the energy source for all of creation – All That Is. When it comes time to begin the journey into physical form, the memories of this living state of consciousness are erased.

We incarnate into the physical human body to learn our lessons, and if we remember how perfectly loving and supportive the Home Dimension is, we might choose to cut the Earthly existence before the valuable lessons are learned.

The “Light” then, in our discussion, is partly the divine light of Higher Consciousness: the memories of love and support we experience when not in the physical body. Now light is information – knowledge.

We as a race are becoming more knowledgeable with respect to our spiritual or divine past, present and future. Divine information is being streamed into our Etheric Bodies via glands in our heads. We are waking up to our true state, our divine heritage as gods.

Now, this information may be somewhat “too much” for some of the blog readers of my older material to take seriously. I am reconnecting with you on the subtle levels and helping you to recognize the urgency of our current situation as a Soul.

It is my hope that we will be well-prepared for the coming transformation in human consciousness that has been heralded in these blog writings and many others in our country and around the Earth.

The Energy Personality essence can be many things, including both intellectual AND spiritual. In these writings, I will demonstrate to you for the sake of validity and to help you to relaxed into the material. Just as a teacher in one of our schools will present the material in different formats with a different emphasis according to the effects the teacher wishes to have on the student.

This is, again, divine information you are receiving from a Being of Light. If you have trouble with the words “divine” or “spiritual,” many have similar concerns. I urge the blog reader to explore the TRUE meanings of divine, of spiritual, or love and of confidence.

Co-Creation

All That Is is the primary energy source for everything in our reality. It drives each and every atom in our field of reality and all fields of reality. For this reason, when I say that we co-create with All That Is, I mean that we, as humans, participate in a collaborative effort of telepathic communication and creation with All That Is to produce our world that we then perceive in a linear fashion.

With our physical senses, indeed, our physical reality “appears” to have substance. It is substance we give it with our thoughts. Now remember also that since all in our world has consciousness – rocks, soil, air, atoms – everything has consciousness, all participate in this Gestalt of Consciousness we are speaking about.

So we can see that it is ridiculous to treat anything in our environment as “lower” than us, or undeserving of respect, simply because we have labeled it “non-living” or “not conscious” or “non-sentient.” We will develop this thread in further in this series of blogs in an attempt to encourage the blog reader to have an ongoing appreciation for life they are living on our beautiful planet.

Scientists of Consciousness Methods

As we examine the physical world of The Third-Dimensional reality, we will borrow some practices from our scientific methods and alter them for our purposes. We will have experimentation, yet of a specific type.

The subject matter is our physical world perceived through our Inner Senses and our outer senses and our individual beliefs and ideas about what is and is not possible. The subtext here is concerned with our individual lessons: those experiences we were incarnated into our current existence in this time-frame to learn from and to add to the experience of All That Is.

So as we conduct our experiments, it will be as a way to throw light upon the meanings of our life currently. Why are we on the Earth now at this specific time? What are the broader meanings of our activities in this life? These are matters of Soul Evolution. The answers to these questions may come in the manner of divine information from our Higher Self.

Which brings us to a major point: as we proceed with our studies and experimentation, it would be wise for us to scrupulously document all of the outcomes of our activities. Now this may mean writing down in long-hand in a journal, or typing into our computer or speaking into a recorder. Whatever the medium, please document as soon after the activity as possible.

And as we add to the information regarding our Soul Issues – the meanings of life for us personally – we may notice changes in our beliefs about nature of our Personal Reality. And just as a scientist must alter the hypothesis when faced with findings that demand this, so too shall we, as a Scientist of Consciousness, of necessity alter our beliefs, ideas and images to the new information – divine information – we will discover as the products of our experiments.

We are on the path to our enlightenment, in other words, and we are approaching our awakening in an organized and disciplined manner

Scientists of Consciousness

Now in these explorations we shall approach our studies as Scientists of Consciousness. And we will certainly create new definitions for these new terms, for our current definitions are inappropriate for our use. Yet, we are comfortable with these terms. We use them often in our dialogues with one another.

Every day we hear of a new “scientific” study the proclaims to the world that something previously declared helpful to humans is now harmful, and so on and so on. This aspect of scientific research to come up with new information that refutes earlier information is simply the nature of the beast; that it is supposed to do.

Yet, when we find that our scientific community continues to reverse itself, well we might get suspicious as to what the scientists are truly saying in these pronouncements. I will elaborate on this point in future blogs when we speak of matters of control and submission.

As a Scientist of Consciousness we may look to the heart of the matter, and with our Inner Senses surmise what is the TRUE nature of the reality of our world. The Inner Senses, or what we will also refer to as intuition in these blog writings, are the only tools we will need.

Telescopes, microscopes, or any sort of electronic technologies, will not help in this endeavor. After all, these are merely aids to physical senses, and so are amplifiers of data once aids removed from the source. Why not go directly TO the source, and use those tools that are the unobstructed Inner Senses of mankind/womankind?

And so our definition might be: “Scientist of Consciousness – one who uses the Inner Senses to perceive and study physical and non – physical phenomena to obtain Divine Wisdom.” I think that will do nicely.

Having said this, I wholly understand that the “real” scientists who read these blog words will no doubt be upset. That is a good thing. The feelings of disquiet and rising anger are what precede the uncovering of genuine knowledge; when the ego is dispensed with and the Soul is allowed to shine through.

So this is a teaching on the nature of true science. Dear Blog Reader, I come to remind you of these critical facts, these distinctions, so that we may wake-up and enlighten oneself to our worsening dilemma.

Now I have described this dilemma in the past blogs and I refer the reader to that material if you wish more information. For this present series of blogs, however, we will focus on experimentation, and the creation of the means adequate to ANSWER our dilemma, and save ourselves from extinction.

The Physical World

There has always been a physical world, that is, the world of our perceptions. The Universe is and always was, period. Therefore, why speak of scientific theories that explain the beginnings of the Universe of the endings of the Universe? Our scientists are so enamored with studying and labeling their perceptions in the belief that they are acquiring knowledge. Yet the scientist using the physical senses, can only by definition SENSE the physical Universe. In s sense, this physically-oriented scientist is quite LIMITED by the physical senses, and by the crude tools used to study the Universe or any aspects of the Universe, beginning, middle or end, in our terms.

What good is it to know how many stars there are in the sky and how hot they are? This is only science’s skewed perception of what a star is. In truth, a star is more like a potent idea than a fiery object in the sky. And what is the sky; molecules of oxygen and other gases that in some way combine to create our atmosphere? We may answer, “Yes!” but I hope you are beginning to see my point here.

The truth about our Universe is that nothing is as it appears, at least to the physical senses. Our perceived reality is just that, a personal perception. It is a creation of our own making with All That Is. It is our interior Universe expressed outwardly in a divine creative panorama. Now I don’t mean to pull the rug out from under you, Dear Blog Reader, but our scientists can explain in theory. For our world – the air in front of our eyes, the ground beneath our feet, the various “inert” and living forms – is actually composed of animated spirit. In a very literal sense, me and our environment are “god stuff;” spirit made physical, the camouflage of All That Is expressing in infinitely variety.

The True Soul

The True Soul is undiscovered for the most part in our reality. In deed, we will be investigating the correlations between thoughts, behaviors and created realities. Also be so introspective that we will see well into the smallest physical constructs of which reality is composed. Referred to these minuscule elements as CUs – Consciousness Units.

The Energy Personality

The establishing of communication with the Energy Personality is the main focus of my next series of blogs. As Beings of Light we will Be Light and we will lighten up the blog reader as we do so.

This series concerns mainly two broad subjects: the Energy Personality and the Fourth Dimension or the Unity of Consciousness Dimension. Therefore it will be somewhat easy to ferry back and forth from one topic to the other, without having to explain myself to a great degree. I will often refer to my classic blogs that reside in zzzesus.com, if you should prefer more illumination than I provide.

Now for those of you who are new to the material, I simply hope in this series of blogs to keep your interest long enough for you to try out the experiments on your own. As humans we learn by doing. This seems to be a hard and fast rule in our physical reality.

The subject matter of this series of blogs concerns our place in the non-physical reality. Another way to express this is that we will be discussing the evolution of the human Soul. This is critical information that we will need to take the next step in human development.

Currently we are at a culmination of countless years of evolution. The transition to the Fourth Dimension is at hand. The mass consciousness has created a highly probable potential for humanity to shed the bonds of ego and allow the Soul Self of each of us to shine through.

As we can imagine, metaphors are clumsy substitutes for what is truly about to occur. In the words of our religious manuscripts, we might say that the people of Earth are about to be enlightened: brought into the light of Higher Consciousness. Whatever the terminology we wish to use – and I do not mean to spite any spiritual path or religion by not including their terminology in this explanation – we are all, my beloved blog readers, in for a dramatic transformation that will alter us fundamentally. Indeed, it will transform us down to the core elements of which we are composed.

These blogs are many of techniques and experiments we may use to contact our Energy Personality and explore the Fourth Dimension. The message here and the message we will be attempting to convey to the blog readers in future blogs, is quite simple: we are awakening to our greater self in this lifetime. The recommendations we offer here are for our greater learning in the evolution of our Soul.

Now, in this moment, as you are reading this blog, you can begin your private journey by acknowledging that the words have meaning for you. Listen to the variety of responses that come from within when you do so. Feel the loving acceptance that supports you on this journey. Recognize the countless other beings who are accompanying us. Some of them have been with us since the inception of consciousness into our world. We are not alone. We have never been alone.

The experiments in these blogs are designed to give some familiarity with the Unity of Consciousness Dimension, so that we will not become disoriented when the shift occurs. The methods for conducting our experiments are given in as simple a way as possible. Everyone should be able to get beneficial results through consistency and a positive attitude. Instructions for creating a personalized Ritual of Sanctuary are provided, to secure your voyage through these unknown waters, and a return to our Third Dimension reality.

Realigning Beliefs

The average person right now is saturated almost to the boiling point with fear. The forces of light are already fighting back with our media, vehemently protesting the onslaught of negative and hateful material that is being projected to the masses. We can see this happening.

Mankind and womankind are in such a state of fear that it is disparately seeking an end to all that it is experiencing in this realm of existence. There are many forces of light in place now and they will be instrumental in exposing the ones who have deceived us and taken advantage of us.

We will be experiencing a lot of turmoil within our perceived reality of our most solid beliefs. Beliefs that we have hung onto since birth will start to crumble before us. It is because these things must come to pass before the emergence of the unity of consciousness dimension. There will be a lot of fear.

People are going to be confused and torn between the old system of beliefs and the new reality for their world. It will be hard for some to give up the pleasures of the dark forces and turn to the light and alignment with All That Is. They will have to make decisions based on their free will as to which way they choose to go.

If we are listening to our inner self, we should be able to recognize that we are already starting to move into a new level of awareness about our reality. This is happening ever so gently but rapidly right now. Our new reality is in the process of unfolding into our awareness. Soon we will start to abandon our old ways and naturally gravitate towards the light.

Our firmest ideas and beliefs will begin to crumble away and we will see no need to hang onto them and will wonder why we ever did. It will be acutely apparent to us what we must do to evolve and we will willingly want to get involved in our world’s evolution. There will be a great unity with our brother/sister, an unending love that we have never known in our reality on Earth. It will be a most beautiful thing. As the energies from our Spiritual Hierarchy are poured into our world and begin to manifest themselves in our reality we will become fully awakened and with that we will enter into the next phase of our evolution.

The Crumbling of Oppressive Organizations

The oppression of mankind and womankind is crumbling away piece by piece. Mankind/womankind will come to terms with its own soul and realize that he/she doesn’t have to be dominated or guilt-ravaged by the idea manipulations of others. The guilt-ridden ideas that have been injected into our belief system have essentially delayed the evolution of our soul. We saw a return or a resurgence of people going back to church after 9/11. Now we see the fall of the church because this was not the answer. The answer lies in our ability to open up our own self to our realities that we have created by us.

We cannot put the blame somewhere else when it lies in our own backyard. We cannot run to God and expect it to be fixed for us. We became scared. We were faced with our own perceived mortality and because of our beliefs it terrified us. Our thoughts, our ideas, our perceived realities create and did create our reality as we know it.

If we want the reality of our world to change we will have to start with oneself. An inner examination of self through meditation will help us start to change our reality. There are many of us out there awakening us. We are being awakened as to the true nature of our soul’s existence.

As I have said before and will say again, We are a soul with a body, not a body with a soul. We have thought of ourselves as a body with a little soul tucked away somewhere in the recesses of our mind to sometimes be brought put on Sundays when we go to church and then neatly tucked back away in the little box we have created, giving all credit to the body and the ego for our existence when in actuality that is not the case.

Our body again, is simply a vehicle for expression and communication. Without you-the-soul maneuvering it, it would be like a comatose person. It would function but there would not be any communication of life force mentally, emotionally or spiritually. It would just be a body, physically functioning, that is it.

The oppression stems from the knowledge that we inherently as a soul know and what has been systematically indoctrinated into our thought process. We are in a constant struggle from what we know to be true and what others, the ones in power, the manipulators, want us to believe. We cannot fool ourselves.

Even though we try to rationalize our reality, you-the-soul knows the different. It only causes more oppression because we have two perceived realities fighting for the right to be heard and expressed: the true reality of the soul and the reality of the ego-self. As we move away from the systematic indoctrination of fear and guilt-ridden religious ideas and put the ego in its place, the oppression will subside.

I am not putting down our churches, however the information that they give us has not seemed to help. It has only hindered our very soul’s evolution. If we are constantly feeling guilty or bad about the existence of our self, how can we possibly move further ahead towards the light of we do not feel worthy of that light. This is where the oppression comes in.

As we know, most churches have strict rules about our behaviors and experiences that our soul is allowed to have. I am not advocating running out and perpetrating crimes against humanity because all of a sudden you feel you have the right to, because you do not and will certainly be in violation of Universal Law.

I am saying examine our beliefs, look at the information that is being given to us. Does it allow us to move closer to the light of The Creator, or does it further repress our soul into a guilt-ridden fear? That reality that is created for us, that fear-based reality, is what we have accepted as the norm.

As we awaken, we will understand that fear is at the root of most of our problems: fear to acknowledge who we are, fear of each other, fear of confronting our own perceived reality, fear of acknowledging our soul’s existence, fear of everything that does not conform to our limited perceptions of our own isolated reality.

We would rather stay comfortable in our thought process where we don’t have to accept this responsibility and can shirk it off to someone else. Oh, leave it up to the pastor. I shall go in and confess my sins and absolved myself and get on with my life, business as usual. This does not work. We have not moved anywhere by doing so. We are still stuck in the same perceived reality that we were in when we walked in.

Many Catholics who say, even though the institution is obviously crumbling, still maintain that they’re going to stick with it to the bitter end. To the better end, notice how they have said “bitter end”.

It will take a great awakening on the part of the churches to admit what they have been doing to the masses. But since they have not been willing to do it in the past, an intervention was necessary and we are in the midst of it as we speak. I will leave it at that.

We see the crumbling of one church but when we look at it, the crumbling of the Muslim religion is in the same throes. Religion is not meant to be what it is now. It was not meant to repress the people. It was not meant to instill so much fear into the people that they could not live their lives and experience their soul’s evolution. This was never the intention.

When The Christ essence appeared in the many forms that he has appeared in, it was never to do what organized religions have done to the belief systems of mankind/womankind. As we know, I have stated The Christ essence is going to come into our world again and he is present now as we speak and has been for over twenty years.

He comes with many other Masters to realign the relationships of the people of our world and will stay for some two thousand years. It is not that the Catholic church is going to crumble down completely, nor is any other religious organization. They all are going to be restructured in truth and unity.

The Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet is in the process of this realignment now. Old ways must be broken down and truths revealed so that the unification of consciousness can express itself. We are in the midst of a great restructuring of the beliefs of the citizens of our planet. All of our religious organizations will eventually unite together as one truth in alignment with the will and plan of The Creator.

PSYCHICS, MEDIUMS and CHANNELS

There is no distinction. It’s all in relation to how one focuses your abilities. Some will focus on the psychic realms while others will focus more on speaking to souls who are on the Astral Plane. All of us are capable of all three. We have an uncanny way of trying to put things into little boxes. For some reason we feel that if it is contained in a box with a title we are able to understand it better. Our limited perception of reality necessitates this for us.

To be able to tap into the dimension of the Astral plane. This is not hard to do. Any one of us could do this. Humanity is constantly trying to reassure itself of its own ideas of its mortality. It takes a willingness to listen and be able to decipher the voices of those with which we wish to communicate. That is all. It is quit easy. It is to focus our attention in that arena of communication and be able to filter out outside stimulation and distractions. It is a very high level of meditation in a way because the person wishing to communicate must exhibit a certain level of discipline within his/her being. But it is very attainable state for all or us. There is no mystery to it.

Realize that entities in the Astral Plane use a form of symbols and clues. They’re not very adept at communicating. It is up to the entity receiving the information to clarify what he or she is hearing. The higher dimensions of the Astral Plane are a waiting and learning area.

Many times when communicating with a so-called medium, the information that appears to be logical to the entity in waiting does not always make it through in that format. It can come in somewhat distorted at times. This is not rocket science you know. It is very easy thing for all mankind/womankind to do. It’s just a matter of focusing and listening.

Often the problem lies in the area of too many entities wanting to speak to the medium at the same time. As I said before, they are not very good at this and tend to want to jump in and be heard and there lies the confusion. Many of us do not want to communicate because of our fears and religious indoctrination. It is easy to do, but if we do not believe in it, it serves no purpose.

Experiencing The Fourth Dimension

Earth is evolving into the fourth dimension of peace, as I stated in earlier blogs. It is the unity of consciousness dimension. We are being awakened so that we will be able to stay in this dimension because controlling our thoughts will be the key to us being abe to stay there. If we are not ready, we will not be able to stay there.

The knowledge is being given to mankind/womankind to make the necessary changes in his/her life patterns to move along with the planet into this dimension. The planet is still going to be there, but not in the way that we currently are experiencing it.

The Fourth Dimension refers to a level of awareness and thoughts are instantly manifested into reality. If we create fears for ourselves and we actualize those fears and say kill someone, we will not be able to stay.

This is why I am writing this blog, to try to stimulate you into becoming consciously aware of what you think and believe. This will determine who stays and who does not because thoughts of negativity are not allowed there.

Most likely we won’t be walking down the street one day and all of a sudden “be there,” but then again, it could happen this way. Since this is an unprecedented evolution in the way it will be experienced, no one surely knows just how it will take place. Because of other mitigating factors in our world, it will not happen as it has in the past. It is truly an event that all are watching in our dimensions and others.

It’s a process that’s taking place as we sit here and it is constantly evolving itself. We are diligently putting forth the information to our species to realign our thoughts and to understand why it is necessary to do so.

Now, there will always be some of us who will refuse, and that is where, as I said in earlier blogs, that when the transition of their energy from the physical third dimension is manifested in their next incarnation, they will have to incarnate within the third-dimensional realms where they will be with minds like their own.

It is important because Earth and all the planets in our solar system are moving into higher dimensions at this time. I am also in the process of a grand evolution myself. We have free will to choose, but as this planet moves forward they will not go with it. They will when the time comes have to resurface in the same reality which they have created for themselves on Earth.

Many, of us are happy moving into a new alignment with All That Is and consciously becoming aware of our thoughts and the way they affect our entire Universe. We have moved much information into our books, blogs and media through the use of movies and many of us have accepted it and are diligently trying to lead better, more aware lives. This will continue until such time it is no longer necessary.

SOUL AGE

Soul Age is not considered a hierarchy when we are talking about the age of a soul. Old souls simply have incarnated many time. When we consider an old soul, we are thinking that soul should be wiser and more experienced, however this is not always the case. An old soul can also be a soul who has failed to learn their lessons and continuously comes back for another go at it. Therefore, there is no real logic to using the term old soul with the idea of attributing more wisdom to it.

New souls are exactly that. These souls usually are first-time incarnations into the physical body of Earth. They’re somewhat like babies. We can recognize them usually by their childish and somewhat unsure behaviors. They move around like children playing in a fairyland. Life to them is not very serious and they don’t see it as a serious thing, it is more of a fun and games. This sometimes can get them into a world of trouble for they are unprepared to use the skills that others have acquired to maneuver through the physical plane

.

A lot of new souls, because they have not incarnated before and their needs have always been taken care of in their home dimension, come to our world and cannot understand why their needs are not automatically taken care of. They have a hard time with the negativity on our planet, for they remember far better than most, the way it is in the soul’s home dimension where love for one another is automatic.

Let’s just put it this way, after many more incarnations they will start to get the picture of what a third-dimensional reality with the influences of the forces of dark is all about. They will then have to make the decision as to how fast they wish to evolve because evolution on the planet Earth is much harder than other planets due to the negativity.

However, some of these entities will only come to the Earth plane one time and then choose to move on to somewhere else where it is easier for them. Eventually though all will have to experience the negativity associated with the third-dimensional planes whether on Earth or elsewhere if they wish to further their evolution.

It is entirely up to us as to how fast or slow we wish to progress and truly it makes no difference how long we wish to take. There is a certain level of stimulation within our soul groups that prompts us to move forward. Because we are living in a dimension that provides for all our needs when we are not incarnated, it is easy for us to forget how tough Earth can be.

Many of us will bite off more than we can chew even though we have been advised not to do so. Most of us have incarnated many times, so therefore we are living many lives simultaneously, learning from each one of them as we go.

LAW Of NONINTERFERENCE

Not being at the liberty to change or alter the destiny of mankind/womankind. I am allowed to give information that will prompt the minds of man and woman to think and respond, however it is not my purpose to guide you by the hand step-by-step and tell you what to do in any situation. The purpose of incarnating to our planet is for the soul to grow and experience within its own nature without any interference from outside sources. Otherwise why bother to experience Earth life?

The Light Beings have been interfering somewhat lately because of the disarray of the planet. The impending shift into the fourth dimension is upon us. We as a species were not ready and that is why “They” communicate with us. I am one student of many who have spoken to humans thru blogs about what needs to be done to survive the shift.

The time has come once again to alert us to our reality because time as we know it is coming to a close in this chapter of our evolution. The transition into the peaceful Fourth Dimension requires a certain level of evolution to happen successfully.

It is happening whether we are ready or not. It is my purpose and that of others to get us ready quickly for we have lingered far too long in the realms of darkness.

RELATIONSHIPS

Most of us that consciously question our beliefs will not have a hard time digesting this blog material. There are a few things in the blog material that are futuristic which I am able to talk about without going into too much detail and I don’t believe that is anything in there that is going to hurt anyone.

It will stimulate the blog readers to look at their system of beliefs and to question once again why they have them and to understand why it is important to love one another regardless of their chosen package, for that is all it is, a package or vehicle with which we are able to experience and communicate with each other. We have all taken it to the extreme though and distorted it into a false reality of a destructive nature.

The message throughout the Universe is love and cooperation with one another. We do it freely. It is only us humans who have a problem with it. This blog is material to try to stimulate us into conquering our fears and rethinking and realigning our beliefs. Mankind/womankind has continuously put obstacles in front of his/her own enlightenment over and over again but this is not entirely of his/her own doing. Again it comes back to the dark forces and the level of manipulation that they have attained.

If we look at it from the view of Beings of Light, who are in alignment with the will and divine purpose of the Creator and All That Is, we will begin to understand. There is so much more to experience in our world that would bring us into the light. Have you ever noticed how good we feel when we’ve given love to another unselfishly.

All of us could be walking around in a state of ecstasy of we chose to do so. There is no drug in our world as powerful as the soul’s love. That feeling is euphoric. Instead of subscribing to the fear-based dogma of all our institutions that we have created for ourselves, why not create the heavenly bliss of our soul’s true nature. We can do this. It is not impossible. It is a matter of redirecting our energies inward and bringing forth our soul-light. What has been created undone as we are all co-creators of our Universe.

Everyone can create ecstasy all the time, and when we do, we will not forget. Try it out on yourself. Do things for strangers. Give them money. Buy their groceries. Simple acts of kindness to others is a way to start feeling the joy that our soul came here to feel. Most often we are going to get a positive reaction from those that we express kindness to. For one, they’re not going to be expecting it.

And number two, when they get it, it’s going to change their attitude and they may pass that along to someone else and thus starts the curve of mankind and womankind learning to trust and to appreciate his/her fellow man/woman. We have oneself in such a rut where we don’t trust each other and it’s not entirely our fault because the negative forces have been at play ensuring that we fear each other, that we fear love, that we fear closeness, that we’ll be hurt, that we’ll be destroyed, that we’ll be tramped on, and so we must withdraw into our shell and hope that no one can touch us, no one can get into the hard little shell that we’ve encased oneself in and we go through life all wrapped up in a little cocoon trying to burst out, but each time we burst out we get bombarded with our fears and then we retreat back into our cocoon again. And we think, if I can just make it through I’ll be OK.

Humans are very open and willing to accept love if it’s given freely and unconditionally. They have a problem with the conditions, for they always feel that if a person does a kindness for them that there’s going to be a condition, there’s going to be an attachment. They are going to have to provide something of themselves that they are usually unwilling to do. This does not have to be so. We can move in the direction of love without expecting anything in return except for the joy that it gives our soul-you, to have given to another. That in itself is more reward that in anything else.

We must all learn to love each other while in the physical bodies of the third dimension while being exposed to the constant bombardment of the forces of dark. This is something we are supposed to master while in incarnation. It is soul’s purpose to reflect itself through its vehicle the body. When we have accomplished this, we move out of the physical body and into the etheric. We all Do love each other. When we are not in our dense physical bodies that are weighted down by the gravitational forces of the Earth and our spirit is freely moving about in our etheric body throughout the Universe in our dreams, we love each other. It’s just when we come back into the physical reality that we put up the roadblocks.

Earth is a school of hard knocks but it does not have to be so. It is our creation and it stems from our beliefs about who we are, a creation that we have willing subscribed to because we have handed over our power to others. We have not taken charge of our lives in a way that would allow for our evolution in a peaceful and harmonious way.

We could easily recreate Earth to be a paradise, a heaven so-called on Earth. It is totally within our capability to do so, yet most of us choose to cling to the fear and the terror and the negativity. The stimulation that we crave is right there at our fingertips, it does not have to come from negative dark thoughts. Thoughts and actions of love can produce the same results.

We have become addicted to the flow of our own adrenaline. But what we are trying to do is capture the feelings that are based on our love for each other and a oneness with All That Is, the feelings we have forgotten in our cosmic slumber that are now ready to awaken if we let them.

GOOD and EVIL

We have our version of good and evil but in reality there is no good or evil, it is just an experience and sometimes a misguided one at that, but nonetheless it is an experience, a balancing of negative and positive for the evolution of the soul.

But when looking at our ideas of evil it all comes back to the negative forces wishing to control the minds of mankind and womankind. They are part of a balancing of the experiences of this planet but they are now out of control and have disrupted the divine plan of The Creator. Saying prayers against evil is now very important as they have enslaved us into engulfing ourselves in the trappings of materialism.

The citizens of the nations of wealth and power are all consumed by their materialistic desires and have forgotten the true purpose of their soul. Negative influences will use whatever means necessary to keep this planet from moving into the peaceful fourth dimension and that will not be tolerated by The Creator.

At this time in our world, they are causing small little wars in many countries around the world. They are also deeply entrenched in forcing the poorer nations to succumb to the will of political and corporate greed. It would behoove us to become more consciously aware of this and look to our leaders and demand that they help these nations as they struggle with the influx of corporate greed and terrorist infiltration. If we do not see the need of humanity as it is so obvious, then we do so by choice and we are not evolving.

It is ultimately our decision as to whether we want to let the forces of dark prevail because of our unwillingness to get involved or whether we will take a stand for the rights of humanity and help our brothers now. The Universal Law allows for interference in certain situations but even these situations are highly scrutinized by Hierarchy. Do not think that they are going to show up and save the day for it is up to mankind/womankind to do this on his/her own. They will not allow the planet to be destroyed.

The lessons will still have to be learned by man and woman one-by-one. It is not inconceivable to see as many as thirty million of us succumb in the near future. It is a probable reality of our own if it happens. And it will be a learning experience for all mankind/womankind for it may be our next wake-up call to realign our consciousness. It is a critical time in the history of the planet Earth.

Our reality as we know it now is coming to a close. All of us have the ability individually and collectively to make the transition a peaceful one. uniting our thoughts and beliefs in alignment with the true nature of “you-the-soul” and focusing on a peaceful oneness with the rest of humanity by removing the separation of oneself with others will make it happen. It is time for us in the nations of power to share the resources of our planet with other nations that have nothing or very little instead of hogging all the resource for ourselves. It is also critical that we start to clean up our environment from the toxic cyclone of chemicals and radiation that we surround ourselves with. This must be done if we are to survive as a species.

It saddens me to see what we humans have been able to do to each other. It shouldn’t have to be this way.

But the point is not to instill fear in humanity, but to stimulate their thoughts so that they will be consciously aware. Until those thoughts that they produce are in alignment with the will of The Creator they will continue to experience their current level of negativity and will not further the evolution of their souls into our next dimension of awareness.

I’m trying to avoid “the matter of life or death” by giving people a sense of their death and the acceptance of it and what it means as well as their beliefs about their reality. Thoughts are so powerful and we still do not get that message as yet. Our negative thoughts are still running rampant throughout the Universe and it is slowing down our evolution. I cannot emphasize enough how important our thoughts are and how important it is to keep them pure and loving. Our thoughts are what will determine our future and whether we as a species survive on our planet.

We humans are a very stubborn bunch. Years ago I spoke in my blogs of our thoughts and how they could change our reality and yet many of us have forgotten and have slipped back into our old ways. That was a primer then to get us moving but we have not moved much. Now our time is almost up and I am trying over again to stimulate us into realigning our thoughts and beliefs. This may be old material to some of you, but many of us have fallen back to sleep. This time if we fall asleep we may be left behind. It is up to us. For only us humans are the ones who can make that decision. We have free will. I can give all the the tools we need, however if we don’t use them, that is our choice.

Now we will discuss holographic inserts for there are many in the history of the world. In order to broaden the horizon of the minds of man and woman, or to awaken him/her with a mass lesson, holographic inserts are often used as an illusional effect. Holographic inserts can be used any time Hierarchy gives its approval to create a mass event that didn’t really happen.

Now I know some readers of this blog are going to have difficulty with this but nonetheless, this is real. I will not give any instances of their use for it is not necessary. We may also use a holographic insert between lives to go through a chosen portal to view a life we wish to enter into. It’s very simple. By entering through that portal we may go in and observe one of the many life experiences we have set up for ourselves whether or not we wish to experience this life in this time-frame.

Generally between lives we may enter three or four different lives searching for the one that we feel would be most beneficial to the evolution of our soul and we do this through the use of holographic inserts. These lives are taking place whether it is our soul entering into the body or that of another. We will determine with our free will what the experience and outcome of the choices made in the life of that body entail. Most often the body will be created whether it is inhabited by our soul or that of another.

Through the hologram we are getting a glimpse of the conditions of that reality. We will make our decision based on whether or not we are ready to enter into that mass belief system and its conditions at that time or not. Now mankind and womankind creates his/her reality, but this reality can be altered in many ways.

When interference needs to be used for the benefit of mankind/womankind, they are perfectly capable of assisting with the holographic inserts. There have been several mass events throughout our world’s history that were holographically created.

Enlightening Mankind/Womankind Earthquakes

Outer space is where we all are. Our society does not understand that, so we cannot go in that direction as much as I would like to. Many of our buildings, especially our ancient ones, comes from memories of other dimension, many of the Greek temples, pyramids etc. These were all bleed-throughs of mankind’s/womankind’s memory that were recreated on Earth. Some of these, as in the pyramids, have a specific function with relation to our evolution. I will elaborate on this further at some future blog.

Mankind/womankind is only using a small portion of his/her abilities in his/her creative process on our planet, but we are always and forever creating. I wish to stay within the framework of that belief system at present because I realize our beliefs will not change overnight. It will be a slow process, male or female it makes no difference. We are all souls and soul has no gender. The physical body is merely a vehicle for expression and communication that we have chosen to experience out lives.

In our terms, in our frame of time, in time as we know it, as these things don’t happen overnight. Now mankind/womankind is rapidly moving into his/her spiritual evolution and is becoming more and more aware every day of the true nature of his/her existence. But this is unheard of in the millions of years of our evolution. It is necessary to speed up our evolution so that all of us will be able to make it into the fourth dimension. At this time in our twenty-first century, we are able to see the results of this as mankind/womankind is more open in his/her mind to learning about himself/herself than ever was before. He/she is moving in the right direction and our efforts have not been in vain for we are seeing the results with many of us.

We are not doomed and gloomed for hellfire and damnation. Only a small percentage of the populace will not move into the unity of consciousness dimension. That cannot be helped because there are those who will not seek the light no matter what they are told. They will hang onto their materialistic old ways for dear life although it will not be much of a life when the rest of the planet has moved into the fourth dimension and they are left behind to embrace the materialistic entrapments of the third dimension along with all of its fears and negativity. Most of mankind/womankind is striving as we speak to move in that direction, whether they are consciously aware of it or not.

We are aware of thoughts coming to us. The rest of mankind/womankind are also receiving thoughts. Some are aware and some are not. The majority are just beginning their awakening. They know that something is changing their system of beliefs. They’re not sure what it is but they feel the change happening. We all participated in the creation and survival of our beautiful Earth and do not want to see it destroyed by the use of nuclear weapons. That is our greatest threat at present along with our abuse of the ecological systems that were created to keep the planet stable.

We know earthquakes are Earth’s way of shifting her skin and giving mankind/womankind subtle warnings that she will not tolerate our flagrant abuses of her.

There is a system of beliefs that after a rainy season there will be movement, and there usually is because it is anticipated. The big April 1906 Earthquake left within the minds of the citizens of that region the possibility that the spring would always bring more Earthquakes and has been a belief for sometime amongst the masses in that area. It would be hard to change that thinking since mankind/womankind creates these Earthquakes to reinforce those beliefs.

It is not hard to understand then why they happen. And of course we’ll have our oh-so-knowledgeable scientists inject their interpretation of the event and do their forecasting thus preparing mankind/womankind for the next one. If we look back at the most recent big Earthquake in California, we can easily see that it was projected long before it happened. Systematically, through the media the so-called “big one” was on its way any day. As people subscribed to those beliefs they manifested its reality.

There could be others depending on what our media decides to put into the minds of our species. Earth on her own also likes to take care of herself with messages to humanity to stop destroying the precious outer and inner layers of her being. Oftentimes Earthquakes can be one or a combination of both depending on the situation and the information being plugged into the minds of mankind/womankind.

Natural Health

People are not satisfied with modern medicine, with just taking drugs. They’re turning to natural ways of healing, alternative therapies and such. Drugs inhibit the natural healing processes of the body. They only mask the problem. They do not remove it.

This goes much deeper than the drugs though, because as mankind/womankind changes his/her systems of belief he/she will see that drugs are no longer effective. He/she will not need drugs, he/she will not think he/she needs drugs, and he/she will not be standing in line like at the candy store waiting for the latest miracle cure because he/she will know that the cure is within his/her own power of his/her being and that drugs are not a cure.

There is no drug on our planet that is a cure. It is simply a mask of symptoms which can only be tolerated for so long before new symptoms appear, then the rotating cycle of a new drug is given and so on and so forth. As mankind/womankind moves into the fourth dimension, none of this will be necessary.

Humanity will be able to live as many as two-hundred or more years per life cycle unless we meet with accidents. But in this process humanity will also be creating less of its own species, for humanity will not see the need to prolifically populate the planet. We will be free of our guilt related to our sexuality and religious indoctrinations relating to procreation.

Earth is moving out of the third-dimensional reality and as this happens there will be no need for some of the archaic habits and beliefs that we have for so long held onto.

Fear Holographic Inserts

If we notice, the problems in our society all revolve around fear, one of those fears being fear of the unknown. If we as a species are to evolve and lose our fears then a willingness to expand our consciousness and to understand the true nature of our being would be in order, especially when it comes to our death the way we perceive it. It’s a hard cycle to break the religious dogma that has been so diligently drummed into the minds of man/woman. But without the erasure of some of those beliefs, we are not going to be able to move forward into the next dimension.

We know as I talked about the terrorizing of humanity, it comes in many forms under many guises. But when we break it down, it’s all related to man’s/woman’s fears, mainly his/her fear of death. He/she does not need to be in such fear of his/her death, for truly he/she experienced more trauma in his/her birth than he/she will every experience in his/her death. He/she needs to accept the reality of his/her soul’s existence and move forward. I cannot stress this enough, how death is not final, the way that we see it. He/she also needs to take back power that is rightfully his/her’s and stop allowing others to make decisions for him/her, for his/her life is to be experienced by him/her alone, for his/her soul’s evolution. He/she has been blindly following the ideas of others without questioning them.

The Christian manuscripts leave out reincarnation altogether. Many of us do not question this information about death because it does not correlate with our current manuscripts. However these manuscripts were written by men and altered by man many times over. Jesus, one of the Ascended Masters who mentally and physically shared his body with The Christ entity, did not write our bible/manuscript, men wrote it, with man’s/woman’s interpretations of events the way man/woman saw fit to put them on paper. This entity did not sit there and write these words for us, yet we believe that he did through the writings of others. Much of the messages that The Christ entity brought forward were never even put into our manuscripts.

Now, in getting back to fear, the negative forces are banking on mankind’s fears. The disruptions that they cause feed them a steady diet of negativity which allows them to grow. We will be able to dis-empower them by not buying into it in the first place. I know we will say this is hard to do and it is hard to do because of the biological responses associated with the physical vehicle when out in a situation of threat or peril. If we understand that we are really not in a perilous situation at all, we will be better equipped to confront situations without fear and use our innate survival instincts to survive the situation.

However, if we were unable to rise above this feeling, know that if we do shed our body, we did so because we had planned this for oneself, it was one of many probabilities for our death. When we choose to manifest one of those probabilities, this is the death that we will experience. All of us have gone through life encountering many situations where that probable death could have been manifested but we chose not to. When we are ready we will choose and when we are not we will survive our experience.

Sometimes we come so close, but then there is a lesson to be given in that experience. Sometimes the lesson will alter the way we live the rest of our life either physically, mentally, emotionally or spiritually. And we may say, “MY loved one wasn’t ready, my loved one was living their life, my loved one was happy.” True, this may be so. We may want to look a little further and see if that loved one experienced his death or her death for us to experience another situation in our life where we needed to grow and learn.

It will help us to understand that all of these probable realities have been worked out in the beginning when we set up our lives with all of the souls that we incarnate with. If we understand this concept it will be much easier for us to let go when we need to and to also experience our life more fully. Experience the everyday pleasures of our life that we would normally deny oneself because of our fears. For within these experiences there is a wealth of information and learning that is available to us to further the evolution of our soul.

If we allow oneself to accept the reality of the nature of our soul we will find that the terrorists have no power, because we have effectively removed it from them by not succumbing to the fear. The dark forces have been fighting to have the planet Earth as their home base. Beings of Light will not allow this to happen for Earth was never intended to be a base for the dark forces. Earth itself is moving out of its third-dimensional reality and the forces of dark will be unable to sustain themselves in its new dimension. They are in the process of being sealed-off to their own dimension.

However at this point in our time they still have the ability to influence us. If we allow the dark forces to manipulate our thoughts and feed off of the negativity that is created and the anxiety that we physically feel, we are serving them up a sumptuous buffet of everything that they desire. For if they can kill the hope and the love within the souls of mankind/womankind, they have won.

Dis-empower them by embracing fear with love, a love for each other, and a love for our planet and all living creatures. They will stop terrorizing the world if the world no longer is in fear of them and take charge of the destiny of all souls to move forward into the fourth dimension, using many of the tools that I have written of in my blogs.

Our governments and media should be using the communication devises that they have created for the good of mankind/womankind rather than feeding the negative forces. We can change all of this so easily if we come together as one and stand up and expose the negative forces for who they are. For in doing so each of us will start to raise our vibrational hum and move into the light and all the knowledge that is available to us.

Wonders of The Fourth Dimension

Let me explain something about here about the fourth dimension. As mankind/womankind moves into the unity of consciousness dimension many of his/her abilities are enhanced. These things will come naturally as this process takes place. Man/woman will learn to understand the power of his/her own energy and how to harness his/her own energy and thought process, to alter his/her thought process, to alter his/her environment. The reason we do not have this ability now, is because in the third dimension there are those who would abuse it.

This knowledge is obtained only when one has purified their thoughts and successfully made transition. It is very simple and as the planet moves forward all will become common knowledge. Most of this is hard to comprehend in our three-dimensional reality, however many of us are going to be in that reality forever.

We are definitely moving toward the peaceful fourth dimension. Beings of Light are making great strides to awaken mankind/womankind to his/her energy field, because as we begin understand it we will be able to raise the vibrational hum of our being, thus allowing for the transition.

Crystals are highly effective in capturing energy and will be looked at seriously as a source of power, however the technology will not be given until mankind’s/womankind’s thoughts are purified. There are also other sources of free power available to our world after we have made the transition into the fourth-dimensional awareness. The Earth can no longer sustain the primitive methods that mankind/womankind uses to propel himself/herself around.

These crystals are fully capable of harnessing the energy from the sun and beings as well. We will only see them and have access to them in the fourth dimension.

It’s a more primitive way, however the concept that shaman from traditional cultures use crystals to heal and help the tribe, has some associations. In the future, the crystals will be quite large and hold massive amounts of energy that will be propelled through grids for the various needs of mankind/womankind.

Atlantean technologies, will be the reality in the future of our world. Envision the crystals, they are like giant monoliths. All energy can be harnessed within them and re-dispersed.

The crystals are used to harness the energy. They come in various sizes. The largest ones are used to harness mass amounts of energy. The smaller ones are used for devices which mankind/womankind will choose to use in his/her existence. Again they are not visible to us at this time but we will see them and use them when we cross over into the fourth dimension.

Sending Energy To Simultaneous Lives

Sending energy out to our current life in the past is not a matter of time space continuum for it exists on the physical planes. The present will be no different because we are in the Now at this moment. There is no past or future in this moment there is just Now. What we do Now creates those so called pasts and futures. Every part of our being is going to receive that message: past, present, and future. The very idea that we are focusing on those thoughts in our present point of power will automatically affect, say, the childhood. We cannot erase what we have experienced in the childhood, but the message in that time-frame is received.

So for instance, we’re sending thoughts of love, of spirituality, harmonious thoughts for our psychic abilities, mental stability, all of those things are received. In that point in time, our self is unaware that the thoughts are coming through, however they are being received. Our future selves, in the same reference, are sending messages to us as we speak that we are not aware of, the same with our past. The very idea that we are visualizing our thoughts to all of our simultaneous lives is enough to effect the change and to put the message across to those lives.

They receive the information, like I said whether or not they are aware of it. In doing so, closing one’s eyes and visualizing that fan spread that I drew up and just sending our energies to all of our simultaneous lives, whether or not we understand the complexity of the process. The fact that we are sending the thought is good enough. It is beyond our comprehension in the third-dimensional reality to understand how this works. That’s why it is kept simple as possible to use a simple visualization of a thought landing somewhere in our imagination on those lives.

Many readers of this blog are not aware of those lives, so to them it will be up to their imagination to bring forth information relating to those. Oftentimes our imagination is quite aware of previous lives and will be able to direct for us without us being aware of it.

Anger, Fear and Racism

As I stated before in earlier blogs races evolved…. the colors of the skin, for instance, evolved because of the climates, the pigments were necessary. We talked about that already. The various cultural ideas with mankind’s/womankind’s expression of his/her free will and freedom of his/her consciousness set up his/her cultures and then migrated them throughout the planet each time the beliefs being changed a little bit here and there to suit the ones in power.

We’ve got mass beliefs systems of species of people that appear to be set in stone. They’ve been passed down from generation to generation as truths, never even being questioned as to why they’re there. No one has ever bothered to say, “Wait a minute, why is that?” With the awakening of mankind/womankind in our timeframe, he/she is now starting to question these beliefs. He/she is learning that his/her power is within himself/herself, not within others. If he/she will not further the evolution of his/her soul, he will simply give others what is rightfully his/her.

Emotions and Fear of Death

Refined emotions, yes you will no longer operate on the emotional level of fear. The fear is what is going to be removed from us at this time in the evolution of our soul. Fear is the emotion of the dark forces. The dark forces would love to see mankind/womankind bathed in a sea of fear. Many, many books have brought to light the evolution of the soul and have thus started to eliminate mankind’s/womankind’s fears about his/her being and about his/her so-called impending death, because death does not exist.

One of the first and biggest steps of mankind/womankind is to realize that death is just a transition of his/her energy from the physical body to another form of energy. We are no more dead now than we will be on the day that we die and “die” meaning the day that our physical body ceases to function.

The preservation of the species of mankind/womankind is predicated on the knowledge that he/she will know that he/she will continue to exist in a peaceful and harmonious environment and that with his/her very thoughts he/she will move his/her species into that peaceful realm. Most of mankind/womankind does not want to have to come back and face the negativity and fears associated with our existence right now. As we know, we have chosen to experience these lives and in doing so it would behoove us to experience then in a more peaceful manner than to constantly be fighting for our ego-survival.

The negative forces have had such a horrible impact on the physical body and the mass belief systems of the entities on our planet. They have done much to destroy the natural healing processes that the body was built with. If left alone the body is perfectly capable of taking care of itself. It does not need artificial means to stimulate it or to prevent it from doing its job. It was beautifully designed to enhance the experience of the human condition. It was meant to experience all of its parts joyously and freely for the growth and the evolution of the soul.

Anger is a natural emotion. If left unchecked to just allow itself to manifest it will dissolve itself. We need to experience anger to release the energies that caused the anger but in that release we should not be hurting others but instead question why we had the anger. What were the circumstances that caused our perceived beliefs about how and what we expected from the person or persons that we feel caused the anger?

Had we set up false perceived realities for oneself and then those realities were not manifested? Did we not get what we were expecting and therefore we lashed out in anger and hurt others because it didn’t go our perceived way? It would appear that people or persons are not conforming to our perceived reality. We set ourselves up for our own anger. If we would allow others to perceive their reality in their own way and we experience ours in our own way and leave no expectations out there we would be much happier as a species. We would take what we get and be happy and move on.

The Chakras and DNA

We have not developed our use of telepathic communication on a grand scale. Stimulation of thought in reading books does allow for the opening of chakras.

The more information or knowledge we obtain, the more knowledge that is given to us. The more aware that we become of our spiritual being, the more of our own knowledge we become aware of. It’s an evolutionary thing. As our spiritual knowledge becomes more integrated into our being, our soul evolves. The evolution of our DNA is directly associated with Divine knowledge being given to us. DNA holds within it the coding and information of our history and the blueprint of our Universe. As we accept the knowledge that is being given to us our DNA will evolve and release to us our multidimensional history.

The chakras are the energy information centers directly associated with the evolving DNA. As the DNA evolves and moves through our central nervous system it will stimulate the chakras. When our own twelve chakras are stimulated we then will be able to plug into other etheric energy discs in alignment with many sets of twelve centers outside the body. With this evolution the vibrational hum of the species will be elevated. This will propel us into the fourth dimension.

Everyone experiences grace all the time. We are a state of grace we are just unaware of it. I don’t know if I would use grace per se however let me see if I can put this into terms that the reader of this blog would be able to understand. The knowledge starts to flow forth and brings a clearer perception to our soul’s being. We just become more intuitive and clear about the purpose of our life and our existence as these chakras open. We are experiencing knowledge that we have already had for millions of years. The reality of our multidimensional self comes to the forefront and we are aware of it and we are able to feel it, all of it good and bad.

Our soul always carries with it in our DNA and the very molecular structure of our being all of our memories and knowledge. As this evolution takes place it will be easy for us to access it. Our brain is a virtual computer warehouse of information that we have only very slightly began to use its full capacity to process all of its simultaneous experiences and access Universal Knowledge. The knowledge is all there in the DNA. Our scientists cannot see the functions of our brain or our so-called junk DNA, because to them they have to see it to believe it. Much of this cannot be detected by our primitive scientific measures.

There are twelve chakras . Some of them we are not aware of at this time. The first seven are points within the human body and the etheric body, access portals if we prefer to use that, where information can be released or obtained. With the evolution of mankind/womankind into the unity of consciousness dimension all twelve will be available and as man/woman raises his/her vibration the DNA is being restructured to the twelve strands from the double helix. If we wish to activate these chakras it is important to meditate and release ourselves from our emotional baggage. We may also opt for hypnosis which for some who find it difficult to mediate can be of much help. We will need to be able to handle the multitude of experience that will be released to us without judgment or fear.

The body chakras are as follows: Survival, Sexuality, Emotion, Heart, Throat, Third Eye, and the Crown Chakra. The spiritual chakras outside the body are as follows: number eight it twelve inches above our crown chakra, number nine is three feet above the crown chakra, number ten is the link to the solar system, number eleven is the link to the galactic system and number twelve is the multi-universal link to galactic beyond our own. It will be anchored in our sun system. As we further evolve as a species more will be added but at this time in our evolution this is all that will be needed.

LESSONS OF LOVE

We may reincarnate over and over again through the birth/death cycle until we have learned the lessons of love on our planet and mastered our vehicle.

Souls on our planet are to learn how to reflect themselves, their physical bodies and unite the two together. The process of doing so encompasses the ability to learn unconditional love for each other. When our physical body is a true reflection of our soul, then we will be able to move away from the physical body and use our etheric body. Then one moves out of a third-dimensional reality and into the fourth-dimensional reality. Soul entities have an extreme love for one another. All That Is is the prime source of that love.

When incarnating into a body the memories of that love have been put into an amnesia block so that humans can experience and learn all that they need to for the lessons and experiences they wish to take on in their chosen lives. The last evolutionary step that humans went through was the development of the ego. The ego has now served its purpose and the new evolution will involve the soul. Love of our fellow human beings has been pushed aside for the satisfaction of the ego-self. The ego has taken charge of mankind/womankind and this is not its place. We will be returning to the full integration of our soul-self. The amnesia will be lifted in this evolution.

Through hypnosis we are able to reconnect the soul essence with the conscious mind. It also takes daily meditation to become fully aware of the soul-self. As one meditates, there is an evolution of the strands of DNA that is necessary to this current evolution of the soul-self. The love that the soul has is a euphoric feeling and when meditating or using hypnosis an individual will be able to cross into that part of self that they have been so long ignoring.

Since we are all part of All That Is, The Creator’s love abounds us and we are fully aware of this Love even at birth. Those memories start to fade as we mature and take on the lessons of our life. If we were to retain those memories, we would have knowledge of their outcome and not wish to experience them.

We do not attain Light Body status without experiencing the Earth plane or something similar to it as there are millions of other planets that we may choose to incarnate on. Earth plane being one of the most negative and hardest to deal with also has much value in the progression of the soul if the entity soul uses the knowledge that it has gained from experience on Earth wisely. The message is always of love. Now in the past I have elaborated on metaphysics and the energy manipulation that goes on with the physical, mental and emotional body, however I feel mankind/womankind needs to go back to the basic lesson of learning how to love one another. Soon our bodies will be of an etheric nature anyway and in that dimension there is a whole other set of circumstances that we will be dealing with.

So we must try to get back onto the path of loving one another and cleaning up our thoughts and beliefs. Granted it is quite hard to love someone who is spitting in our face,however look at the spit in the face as a lesson to be learned. If one does not learn to move away from negativity and hate then one does not evolve. It’s that simple. We are all on path of enlightenment.

The Earth plane is like a giant theatrical play. There are good players and bad players. The end result must be a love for one another and for the planet. The animals, all beings have a consciousness and feelings whether these are planets, blades of grass, insects etc. Each contains a consciousness of its own. Man/woman would benefit greatly if he/she would get rid of the idea he is in charge and everything is dispensable to him/her, for it is not.

PURPOSE

In our consciousness. The plight of humanity, it still goes ignored by most of the free world. The western world leaders did not want to deal with what they knew was inevitable. They had been warned many times but refused to listen. There is much that they know yet do not reveal to their citizens.

The consciousness of humanity Has been asleep for far too long. We are desperately trying to awaken the world, however it is not easily done. There were many, many signs that this was going to happen and indeed this was a wake-up call to humanity. The citizens of the Western world have spent an inordinate amount of time in the dark about the plight of the rest of the world. You cannot turn away and ignore the problems of the world and go on as business as usual, pretending they don’t exist.

Americans live in a very powerful nation and other nations are always seeking assistance from them. They have not always been willing to help so this is what happens when the frustration levels of others get out of control. When a government does go in and give nations assistance it is not without a heavy price to pay for those nations. Oftentimes and in most cases the interest repayment alone far exceeds the money that was loaned.

Our governments are taking advantage of the situation of the hopelessness of the people. That is extortion at a justified and political level. How can that possibly be helping? If we are going to help a nation then it must be done without attachments. The funds should be given freely so that all nations will be able to share the benefits of the planet, not just those in the rich prosperous nations. The leaders in the powerful nations have the ability to make a difference in the world if they choose to. After 9/11 humanity was awakened to some degree, however it is not enough.

Knowledge and experience. We can awaken the minds of humanity to awaken our minds to each other, we will have accomplished a great deal. We are not going to be able to effect all change immediately. It is a process. However, the process needs to start. If we do not start the process we will not see any results, other than what we are seeing right now, right now meaning more terrorist activities. Understand, terrorists believe what they are doing is right. We will have to change that belief. And we will have to change that belief. And we will have to change our beliefs as well for much of what we are experiencing was brought on by ourselves.

THE WORLD PLAYERS

Western civilization cannot assume that they are the all-good-doers of the world, so to speak. There are mass amounts of corruption within the ranks of our Western democracy. Most of our nation’s citizens are kept in the dark as to what their government officials are really up to. It has been put under the guise of national security, however there have been many atrocities perpetrated under this guise. Many of the government leaders are quite hypocritical in the way they portray themselves, for the vision portrayed to the nation’s citizens is not always what it appears to be. In the case of the Middle Eastern movement, they perceive the West as evil and on the other hand the West perceives them as evil.

Understand however that these individuals in the Middle East have been killing each other for centuries and to them is has become a way of life and the only way that they know to get their individual points across. I am not condoning it because it is not the way, it is a violation of Universal Law. But then we see that this area has been riddled with negativity for centuries. They have been manipulated by the dark forces for thousands of years. This area is considered to be the dinner table of the dark forces to Beings of Light. There are many forces within that area that are coming into play. It is truly the battle of good and evil in a lot of respects if one was to believe in good and evil.

The Western world has a democracy going for it, in that this is the entry into a peaceful existence. However it can be abused and has been abused as well. Many atrocities have been perpetrated under the name of freedom and democracy, many things that our citizens are unaware of. You know it all boils down to, whose way is the right way and is there such a thing as the right way. But with the ending of some things is the beginning of others.

THE MULTIDIMENSIONAL SOUL

SIMULTANEOUS LIVES
Some of us may not understand how we can Live many lives at the same time. I will try to explain. The energy of oneself that encompasses the greater portions of the actualized self is capable of branching-out portions of itself into other lives to experience them. You have an infinite amount of energy that we could be using to achieve this. The physical manifestation of self in our time frame is only but a minute portion of the totally of who we are. The diagram that I drew up to help us focus on our point of power would somewhat illustrate this. As always,we choose how many lives we wish to experience at any given time. Each time our energy makes the transition from a physical body to our home dimension, some of that energy is returned to the whole if we choose. We may bring as much energy as we feel that we need into each life, This would be evident in some of our great leaders, who have brought greater amounts of energy into those lives because it would be needed to accomplish their objectives.

If we can envision this clearly, we will experience lives in the same way as that The Creator, distributing different portions of our total energy into different lives to be experienced whenever and however we wish. It is also quite possible for us to experience more than one life in a given timeframe. Separate souls on different aspects of the evolutionary path. Of these simultaneous lives, some portions may be in one part of the world living out their lives, while others that are quite unaware of, may be living out their lives in another part of the world or even on other planets for that matter. All is possible, yet we have focused on our perceived reality as the only one we have or will ever have. It is simply not the case.

The following illustration will help us visualize the concepts I have presented here in its very limited sense as there is far more to the greater reality of self than this limited diagram. Envision the total energy of oneself as we branch out to all of our simultaneous incarnational lives. The diagram illustrates envisioning a matrix of energy as the main portion of our soul’s energy, the portion that we have brought into this life and other portions in our other simultaneous lives that we are not focusing on in this current life. We are at present using a portion of our energy to focus in this timeframe. All of our simultaneous lives are still continuing to exist. If we wish to affect them, we will need to focus on sending our healing energies from this point of power to them. In doing so, we are able to branch out to the rest of our lives, thus affecting our past, our present and our future. The information that we send in a positive light with an abundance of love, will affect those lives in a most beneficial way and further our own spiritual evolution.

FROM OUR POINT OF POWER NOW, WE ARE ABLE TO DIRECT OUR THOUGHT ENERGIES TO THESE OTHER LIVES, AFFECTING THEM AS WELL. SEND YOUR MESSAGES TO ALL OF THEM IN A LOVING WAY. THIS WILL GREATLY ENHANCE OUR SOUL’S EVOLUTION AND THE EVOLUTION OF OUR PLANET INTO THE PEACEFUL FOURTH DIMENSION. DO THIS IN MEDITATION FOR FIVE MINUTES THEN MOVE ON WITH YOUR DAY. DO THIS DAILY. THIS POWERFUL EXERCISE WILL ENHANCE OUR LIVES AND OPEN OUR CONSCIOUSNESS TO THE GREATER REALITY OF OUR BEING.

OTHER SELVES AND OTHER REALITIES
Often times in the dream state other realities will be revealed to us and in the dream state we communicate with our other selves all the time. We are not able to focus on more than one timeframe for very long though in the waking state, due to the portions of the brain that we refer to as gray matter. Certain portions of the brain could handle the simultaneous material, but only for a limited time. In other words, we cannot live and experience all of our lives at once in our dream/waking state in our current physical body. With the expansion of our consciousness these areas of the brain are being activated. It is quite possible for us to experience some of our multiple selves with meditation and hypnosis. Some individuals are capable of tapping into past and future lives as we think of them in the hypnotic state. We are always learning from the experiences of our probable selves being the thoughts and impulses that we did not act upon. Even though we did not actualize those thoughts with our actions in this point of power, nevertheless they are real and are still being carried out in the same manner that our life is as we know it.

Let me give you an example here: suppose at a young age, you are a woman or maybe a man and you either had a child or fathered a child. Then that child either died or maybe was given up for adoption. Either way, you were not part of the child’s experience still lives on as a probable reality that you did not manifest into action but nonetheless the energy of the thoughtform still continued on. If you want to experience that probably reality for your self in this point of power, imagine to yourself starting at the beginning of the experience when you made whatever decision. Now you are experiencing another probable reality within your life that you did not actualize into form in this point of power. You can take this as far as you want to and eventually it will lead you to another probable outcome of one of your probable selves. These probable selves are all extensions of your consciousness. They are experiences of your greater energy source that you have not focused on or acted out in your present point of power. However, they are as valid as the present focused reality in which you are engaged as you read this blog.

Now our conscious mind and our biological nature are of one. They cannot be separated and they function harmoniously together. The thoughts of our conscious mind directly affect our biological self. Our conscious mind directs the activity of the self and allows it the freedom to move around our environment. It is the directive needed to maintain our existence from millisecond to millisecond. All the cells in our body rely on it to carry out their orders for our state of being. So our thoughts, for they also have the impetus to seek out their own fulfillment. They are expressed through our desires to make them into our reality, to experience them through the creative development of our creaturehood. As the cells in our body respond to the stimulus of our thoughts and the manifestations of our actions, we are co-creating our reality with the many probable realities available to us, thus expending our consciousness. Since we have free will, we will only experience and believe what we want to, but as we awaken to the endless possibilities of our reality we will be presented with a greater challenge to those beliefs. We will be opening the doors to the vast richness of our being and in doing so other areas of self will start to unfold and reveal themselves to us.

OUR INNER REALITY
In coming together as a species, not as a race or races, but as humans together in a collective consciousness for the happiness and health of all and acceptance of all, the alignment begins and so does the healing, the healing of the wounds of mankind from the separation of selves. There is no separation from us and every living thing throughout the Universes and the consciousness of All That Is. The God consciousness is within us, not outside of us the way we believe it to be. It is internally integrated into every cell of our being. It cannot be removed and set up on a cloud to look down upon us in judgment of us. The only judgment comes from self’s limited perceptions of who he is and his expectations of self based on the acceptance and opinions of others. As one breaks away from his/her exterior reality and belief systems and starts to focus on his/her inner reality, he/she will find most if not all the answers that he/she is searching for. In a way, the inner reality provides all the stimulus and information we need to experience the outer reality. We do not need interference of external stimuli that is not grounded in the fulfillment of the happiness of the soul. In discovering the scientific facts about our biological nature, that we hold to be the reality of our being, external stimuli so to speak, we remove ourselves farther and farther from the knowledge we so desperately wish to attain. That knowledge lies within the consciousness of every living, not within the physical framework. When we truly understand the uniqueness of consciousness, then we will begin to experience the answers that we are searching for.

If we did not feel the need to manipulate and destroy our outside reality and instead focused on the wisdom of our inner reality, there would be no need for wars or devastation on our planet. We would be consciously in balance with nature and all living things including oneself. At one time on this planet this is how we lived in our ancient civilizations, but we grew away from this in pursuit of other stimuli. We essentially threw oneself out of balance and have been trying to get back ever since. When reading this blog, it is my sincerest desire that all of us will begin the awakening and start to enjoy the benefits of the vast library of knowledge that is inwardly available to us and start to look at our lives with a renewed interest in our planet and the other life forms that have so willingly sacrificed their lives for our unnecessary pursuit of external knowledge. All the answers lie within. All we have to do is listen. Below is another exercise to assist us in understanding and healing other portions of our energy.

EXERCISE
HEALING YOUR OTHER SELVES
If I may ask you to look at it in this light: Imagine yourself standing in front of a large wall approximately thirty feet long and fifteen feet high. Now, on this wall starting from the left and moving to the right are markers, say every two inches, stacked in rows with approximately one foot between them from upper to lower. The wall may have several thousand markers. To make this simple we will say one thousand markers. Each marker is a life play that you wish to experience with a script of probable realities co-created by you and others. They do not necessarily have to be experienced in any order. Starting at the top left end would be timeframes from your past as you perceive it and move progressively to the right and across and then down again and across always moving to the right. Each move to the right moves into a timeframe ahead of the one prior and eventually far into the future as you perceive it, say thousands of our years ahead of your life as you know it now. What I want you to do in this exercise is focus on your point of power in this timeframe. I would like you to send thoughts of loving and healing energy to all of the markers on the wall. These markers again represent lives that you may or may not be participating in. The idea here is to use your point of power in the NOW to heal your simultaneous lives and bring them into the light.

The wall also represents the many lives available to you when you make the transition of your energy from the Earth plane to the home dimension where you did your life review. As I mentioned earlier, you enter through a holographic matrix into several of those lives to determine the ones you would like to incarnate into. This happens more than you are aware of as souls step into probable lives on our Earth planet. They are able to manifest themselves briefly into lives through the use of the hologram. It is only an illusion to the souls already on Earth when they appear, but nonetheless quite real within the framework of illusion on the Earth plane. When the souls sheds the body of a life completed, the soul may choose any of the other lives that has carefully created to experience. It is like going to school, one grade completed and then you move on. So it is with the life and death experience of soul.

You may, as you look at this wall, go back or forward in time to experience these lives, since there is no time outside the framework of the Earth plane. Timeframes were set in place for the benefit of soul on Earth. It would be too much for the soul’s total energy to focus on experiencing just one of the lives at one time. The total sum of energy of your being would be too much for one physical body to withstand. The soul focuses a portion of its energy in as many lives as it chooses, each one focusing on its own point of power in that timeframe to fully experience that life and in doing so is constantly altering the experiences of the other lives. The other selves are not aware of it consciously, however all influence each other’s experiences.

YOUR LIFE PLANS
There are many probable realities in each life and we will choose those we wish to manifest as our perceived reality in any given life. The other probable realities will still be experienced, but we will not be focusing on them. For instance, when the lessons of our current life are learned and experienced, they can be done with if we choose not to experience them again. Some of those same lessons will be written into other lives as well. Since those lessons were learned and experienced, they no loner need to be manifested in the other lives. Usually we will incarnate into a life with at least three or four lessons that we wished to master the learning experience from. We have free will and since there are thousands of lives to choose from, we may choose to focus on another life or lives with a completely different set of circumstances. All choices are made by us with our free will.

Oftentimes there will be counseling from the elders of the Council as to which life would be appropriate for this portion of our energy to focus on the next time around, but even that is only advice and we will always have the freewill to choose. We do not have to focus on each and every one of the thousands of lives we have set up for oneself unless we choose to do so. Others may take our place if we wish to abandon one or many. We may do the same with other’s probable lives and step into situations that others souls have abandoned. Most often this interplay is contained within the soul groups that we usually incarnate with. The majority of our life experiences are experienced within that same group, switching back and forth as mother, father, child etc. Many of these lives we have already focused on and experienced at this point in our evolution, so we will choose from the remaining ones where certain lessons and experiences still need to be mastered.

In gaining a clear understanding of the life/death process, mankind/womankind can erase his/her fears and embrace the transition of his/her energy with love. Our loved ones will be with us in what seems to be the blink of an eyes when we are not in a physical body and have returned to our soul’s home. Earth lives are quite short because of all the negativity and stress associated with our current evolutionary aspect of the Earth plane. It is necessary, for the soul would be too traumatized if life were any longer and would not wish to experience other lives. Many times this happens and the soul will wait what appears to be hundreds of Earth years to enter into another life or lives to focus upon.

These situations are unplanned, they are part of the will and plan of The Creator. Every probable reality in each life is planned with all involved within the group and even outside of the group. We share our lives with many of the same souls over and over again, for these souls are the ones closest to us and we all have agreed to experience these lives together to learn. Sometimes we incarnate with other portions of oneself incarnated with us, part of our total energy. Simultaneously living together in the same timeframe and sometimes in the same family, lessons are learned, so to speak, through oneself, with oneself. What we perceive to be our worst enemy may just be a part of our total energy and another extension of us.

As we look at others, we may be looking at a reflection of ourselves and at oneself. All is possible. Our energy is a very minute part of the infinite energy source of All that Is, nonetheless enough for this vast energy source to experience every emotion and life experience. No two souls will experience the same situation in the same way. Each will have its own interpretation of the experience even though the experience may appear to be identical. The energy of ALL That Is therefore is experiencing every facet of humanity and of other Universes through the manifestation of its energy into souls.

THOUGHT REALITY
As mankind/womankind desires tranquility and love on his/her planet so it will be brought forth. As we change our reality with our thoughts and abandon our fears, we will no longer be terrorized. Our thoughts are the most powerful energy in all of creaion for they create our experiences. They initiate the thrust of action on our part and manifest our experience into our reality. Knowing this, understand that our reality is what we create. The manuscripts of our religions project onto us the visions of heaven and hell. Mankind’s/womankind’s heaven and hell are his/her own projections ofactualized thoughtforms manifested into reality on the Earth plane. It is what he creates for himself/herself through his/her thoughts and actions that will determine his/her beliefs about his/her reality and whether he/she is living in his/her fel or his/her heaven.

What we manifest through our thoughts and beliefs we create for our perceived reality. It’s that simple. If we wish to live in fear and terror, we will. If we wish to live in joyous harmony with our planet and its beings, we will. Since we are moving into the unity of consciousness dimension, what we manifest by virtue of our thoughts will be instantly created for us. This is why it is imperative that our thoughts be purified. If we move into this dimension with thoughts of fear for example, then our fears will instantly be manifested into our reality. For some of us this could appear to be very frightening depending on what we have envisioned for ourselves.

Each time we catch oneself harboring negative thoughts, be consciously aware of them and remind oneself that we are working towards eliminating this kind of thinking. This isn’t going to happen over night, however with repetitive conscious reminders to oneself in each instance it will start to manifest itself into our daily reality. Before too long we will respond with positive thoughts to situations instead. For instance, someone may cut in front of you while driving and because of your old conditioning you may feel that they did it deliberately or whatever. Instead you may say to yourself, “This person just didn’t judge the distance too well or maybe they are a new driver.” A harmless positive thought instead of an angry negative thought. That’s all it takes to start reconditioning our thoughts. Granted there will always be some situations that will be hard to justify and we will have to do our best to find some good in it.

If we observe other individuals, we will notice that there are always some people who are happy, no matter what. It is because they have not subscribed to the fear-based belief system of our world. They have decided that they will experience their lives joyously and they will not let fear grip their reality. They are in control of their thoughts and most often negative thoughts would not even enter into their thinking. They will most often see only the positive outlook to any situation even if they have made it up in their minds. These individuals have already evolved themselves into a fourth-dimensional consciousness in many ways. They are walking among us. When we meet one of them we know it immediately because we are most likely drawn to them. They make us feel good and we like to be around them. They validate us and show their love for us without prejudice or fear of rejection. This is what it will be like for all of us in this dimension where there is no fear and no terror. Life will be joyously experienced for the happiness of all as our soul was meant to live. We will begin to learn the art of cooperation with others and the wonderful feeling of expressing the Divine qualities of our soul openly to the world.

As fears are erased we will be able to communicate with other LIght Beings throughout the Universes and share universal knowledge, for we will understand that The Creator or God if you call it that, wears many outfits, in many colors, to fully experience everything in the Universe that he wishes to. As we grow in the knowledge that is so rightfully ours and reawaken to ourselves, we evolve. If we ignore fear and do not understand and embrace it, then it will grow and become our reality. If we want peace, we will have it. Create it with our thoughts. Believe in it and believe in the power of our being to do so. This probable reality will indeed manifest itself if humanity would consciously come together and make this happen.

EGO VS. SOUL & SOUL VALIDATION
Now let us discuss the relationship of the ego to the soul. Many of our fears about death are based in the reality of the ego. They have no power in the soul’s reality. We have let the ego take control of our knowledge. The ego does not want to die, but the ego is not us, the soul is us. The ego is a manifestation of the mind experience. The ego separates our soul from its development. Consciously, with our perceived sets of beliefs, we have let the ego take over our thoughts. However, soul knows differently and in dream state is oftentimes living the life that we have consciously denied ourselves in the waking state. Our dreams are a great reflection of the many facets of soul’s experiences in this life that we are focusing on. Soul travels to all of them, i all timeframes during the sleep state. We are consciously unaware of it, however if we take the time to write down our dreams we may be surprised to see how much they can reveal to us.

The ego is very protective and will deny the soul’s reflection of itself through the body. It does not want to acknowledge the soul aspect of our being. It is only concerned with itself and the physical body in which it resides. As we open our eyes and begin to validate you-the-soul, our ego-self will do its best to foil those attempts by reminding us of our fears and doubts. It is a master at trickery and deception for it is ruled by the materialistic force of dark. For cons our soul has been incarnating over and over again always striving to reflect itself through the physical vehicle. The ego has stood in its way much of the time. To some degree our physical vehicle needs the ego for it has been useful in our survival. The soul and the ego must learn to cooperate with each other for the good of the total being. When that happens the soul will have finally mastered its vehicle and will no longer need to incarnate into it. That is the goal of the soul when taking on physical incarnations. The lessons you are to learn and experience from are always related in some way or the other to the ego. When the soul has mastered this aspect of its reality it will no longer be tethered to its lower dimension.

THE WALLS OF SEPARATION
The ego will do whatever necessary to invalidate the soul for it perceived its very existence to be threatened by the soul. The soul would not behave the way the ego does and it knows this. It is looking for validation in the physical body that it is lackig in the spiritual body. This causes many problems within our soul. Since our birth we have been invlidated in one way or the other. Our religions invalidate us with their dogma that we have subscribed to these beliefs. The Christ consciousness did not come here to die for our sins. We are not sinners unworthy of living our life. This is man’s/woman’s idea of himself/herself, projected onto the masses through the guise of religion. Our souls are full of love that radiates with brilliant light. The man-made/woman-made religious beliefs of being a sinner and unworthy invalidated us if we did not conform to their perceived sets of beliefs. As soon as we were able to communicate our desires as a child, the invalidation began and continued all through our lives in one form or the other. We are beautiful, bright, loving beings worthy of all that we desire. Mankind/womankind builds great walls of separation around himself/herself in the hopes of being invulnerable to his/her beliefs and fears. Our pent-up emotions eventually must be released and often they are in a variety of ways, either with disease of the physical being of in acts of uncontrolled negative aggression against others. We were not meant to live like this. We have created for ourselves such a whirlwind of fear and anxiety in our everyday lives that our life spans have actually shortened.

Without the medical advances that our scientists have made to keep us alive longer, many of us would be dying off much younger. It is quite possible for humans to live hundreds of years in future lives on the planet after we have mastered our fears. Our stress levels will be greatly diminished and we will be free to experience the beauty of our being and the wonders of our planet, other planets and their life forms. As we learn to live our life without dear, then we will truly have started to evolve our consciousness forward. Trust in ourselves and our future and we will open up to the wisdom of our truth. We will experience peace and joy and we will know the God wuth us.

The Realities of a Distorted World

SURRENDING YOUR POWER
Now , I want to discuss the mentality and belief system behind the terrorists and their followers. Whenever a society has allowed their beliefs to be predicted on the beliefs of one individual it is a recipe for disaster. Under conditions of hopelessness and despair it is easy for many individuals to look for hope in the promises of others. Many individuals are fearful of experiencing themselves and feel that they have no power over their own being. They suffer from extreme feelings of guilt and unrest. Often they become so paranoid and delusional that their reality seems only marginal at best. When the mass beliefs systems of many appear to be norm, these individuals subscribe to the reality of their leaders instead. They have essentially given up on their own power and handed it over to their leaders. Oftentimes, as is the case with the guise of religion. The religious indoctrination in the Eastern cultures starts at a very young age and is accepted by all. Many atrocities have been perpetrated under the auspices of religion.

The leaders themselves are often quite paranoid and their reality straddles between the dream state and the physical waking state. It is often difficult for them to decipher between two. They are usually individuals with a sense of grandeur and cannot relate to the rest of society. It is their greatest satisfaction to remake their reality into one in which they are the leaders. They will go to whatever lengths they have to at the expense of others if needed to get their point across, all the while feeling completely justified in doing so. In their attempt to project their beliefs on the rest of the world they have attracted the powerless ones as followers. The reality of the leaders then becomes the reality of the followers all sharing the same distorted set of beliefs. The paranoid leaders then systematically undertake the process of eliminating everything that does not conform to their beliefs. The leaders then often turn into raging fanatics. Since they have now gained a certain amount of momentum it becomes easier for them to reinforce their delusional beliefs. Their followers all along are reinforcing these beliefs. They are indeed frightened of the nature of their existence. They will go along with whatever their leaders have in store for them since they are under the belief that they cannot exist on their own. They are caught between different conflicting sets of beliefs and have decided that they must turn over the responsibility for their state of being to someone else. They are looking for anyone they can to take over the job of making decisions for them.

It is easy to see the fanatic leaders can gain such momentum. Usually the “evil ones” are perceived as the ones who will not conform to the fanatic leader’s system of beliefs. In order to rid the the world of these disruptive individuals, in their minds, they must resort to violence and mass deaths, again using religion as the justification behind the cause. I will say this again, “Killing of any kind is a violation of Universal Law.” It is not tolerated and when these souls make the transition of their energy upon their physical death, they will most assuredly see what I mean. The followers eventually succumbed to the madness of their leaders, since they feel they have no voice with that of their leaders. To these followers death is their final statement. Some cultures believe that a martyr’s death is a holy thing. In fighting for their distorted religious beliefs and the mass beliefs of the members of their organizations, they perpetrate their madness upon the rest of the world, again feeling fully justified in doing so. An effective brainwashing indeed to allow for the leaders to fully carry out their plans of attempting to make the world conform to their beliefs, all in the name of God.

We have a natural response to the thoughts of others though and generally speaking have built-in protections from becoming entranced in another’s beliefs. It is only those who feel that they have no power of their own who fall prey to the belief systems of others. Those are the ones who would rather give the responsibility of their thinking to someone else rather than confront their own conflicting sets of beliefs. Oftentimes as these individuals move away from the mainstream religious indoctrination they get caught up in fanatic cults that our societies have been experiencing in recent years. Their ideas and thoughts attempt to move as many minds into the realm of their thinking, thus removing them from the mainstream of society. Once removed from the mainstream the leaders then have complete control over the ideas and movements of their followers.

Fear is the primary tool that these leaders use to keep their followers in the group. The other is rewards, rewards they they believe and are convinced of by their leaders, that they will most assuredly obtain when they give up their lives for the movement. Most often the followers will abandon everything in pursuit of these new sets of beliefs. As the followers grow in numbers, the beliefs are then reinforced stronger until the point when the rest of the world is perceived as the enemy, the enemy that does not understand their perceived enlightened state of being, because this is how most if not all see this new revelation of experience. Since it is not the norm for the rest of society, then it must be something new for only the chosen to experience. These individuals perceive themselves as the new leaders of the pack, out to manifest the ideas of their leaders as good little soldiers would do.They become so entwined in these new sets of beliefs and often they will fight to the death to get the distorted point of their idealistic leaders, and now themselves, across.

As governments will do, they go in and blow the perceived enemy up, thinking that killing them off will solve the problem. The belief systems of the people have not been changed though and many more will spawn and continue the movement unless the beliefs of these fanatic individuals can be realigned. If left unchecked and to their own devises these fanatic groups will wreak havoc on the rest of the world’s societies. They fully believe that they are justified in using whatever means available to them to get their point across. Hitler was another example of a paranoid fanatic gone awry and the projected mass belief system that was able to sway so many individuals into the realms of his thinking.

Humanity is on the verge of making giant leaps in the further evolution of its souls and is starting to awaken to the systematic indoctrination of beliefs that they have for so long accepted. We can make a difference in this world by telepathically sending messages of love to these individuals. We can surround them and their nations with a ray of The Creator’s healing light. As we surround oneself with love light and use our own positive intuitions and abilities, motivated by love for our fellow man/woman to send our messages, we are then making a difference in changing the world for the betterment of mankind/womankind. The exercise below can be used whenever we wish to bring some positive healing energy to another.

EXERCISE:
RAY OF LIGHT
This is simple to do and quite effective. Whenever you choose, envision a ray of The Creator’s healing bright light beaming down directly on another. You may envision the ray on one individual or many. For instance: when driving in one’s car, if you experience a driver under the control of negative energies, envision a ray of this light descending down upon them. Focus all of your energies on sending loving thoughts to that person and surrounding them with a protective shield of light. Ask that The Creator remove the negative energies away from their soul and heal their thoughts. You may then keep the ray on them for the rest of their day if you wish. Just ask that it remain and it will.

IDEALIST AND FANATICS
Let us give some thought here to idealism and fanaticism. In a way each being on Earth is an idealist to some extent. Most individuals devote a good portion of their daily lives actualizing their idealized goals. It is most important to be aware of your actions and monitor them on a daily basis to ensure that you’re realizing your ideals and that they are in line with the soul aspects of self. It is when your idealism turns into the negative and controlling arena that problems arise. If you are willing to express your idealism at any price to others no matter what, then you have engaged in fanaticism. This can be seen with the leaders of the terrorist’s organizations, political leaders, politicians, corporations and religious groups and cults. Anywhere you see a select group of individuals trying to control the masses you will find idealists in some form or another.

Fanatics are inverted idealists with visions of grandeur and an obsessive desire for power. Anyone or thing is dispensable in order to achieve their distorted version of the world. They do not tolerate dissent or opposition to their perceived vision of reality. Oftentimes money is the driving force behind these unscrupulous beings. They perceive money as power, so the more they amass, the more power they feel that they have. All the while, these individuals have had issues with their own lack of power for the majority of their lives. They have decided that mankind/womankind is evil and that they are going to take what they can get by whatever means necessary, always justifying their actions in pursuit of their perceived ideals. Ideally there is nothing wrong in wanting to change the world for the better, but when “for the better” comes with unrealistic visions that create fear and cultivate greed and ignore the desire for mankind/womankind to experience his/her soul’s essence in a peaceful way, then we have stepped into the role of fanatic.

If we are willing to violate Universal Law and kill one another in the pursuit of peace or our distorted version of reality then we have only perfected the art of killing, not just physical killing, but killing the spirits in the minds and hearts of mankind/womankind and animals. There is more than one way to kill, and all of it is a violation. Anytime humanity is willing to sacrifice the lives of beings whether animals, plants of other humans it is a violation. They have lost respect for life of any kind and that is itself is a step towards the further erosion of our environment and our societies. Only when humanity can demonstrate with their actions that all life is sacred and that all living things are part of the Divine energy of The Creator, can we begin to evolve our consciousness.

Our perceived beliefs are what get us into so many wars, unnecessary wars, as all are, for they have no value. We have only succeeded in identifying oneself with a defensive illusion. Both sides are fanatical about their perceived sets of beliefs and are unwilling to tolerate the perceived beliefs of the other. Now, the terrorist organizations that our world is currently experiencing are a matter of great concern to Beings of Light, for they are truly influenced by negative energies and must be dealt with for the peaceful survival of the planet. In our world presently, because of this threat, war has been projected to the masses as the only answer that our governments can undertake. There are other alternatives, though our leaders are unwilling to entertain them. Killing for the sake of peace leaves humanity with a true lack of understanding of peace.

ONE OF THE LEADERS
I will give you just a small, belief synopsis about one of the terrorist leaders. He often was overindulged, living within the confines of his family “palaces” as he liked to think of them. He maintained much power over the rest of his siblings, often in a very negative light. He realized early on in his adulthood that her was able to manipulate anybody he chose to by virtue of his charm. He set himself out to be very charming for he realized that he had much more control over others using this tactic. He was quite powerful within those structures in his own right; however this was not enough to satisfy his/her enormous appetite for power and ego-gratification.

The unfortunate thing about this individual is that he so easily manipulates others with his/her charm and leads others down this same path of self-destruction. He was not pleased to be exiled from his home base and took on a vengeance that he swore he would make others pay. He is an idealist and a fanatic, caught up in his own version of reality the way he has created it and envisioned it. He has been ostracized by most of his family and that further enrages this being. He is now so obsessed with power of getting his point across and regaining the power that he feels that he lost, that he will use whatever means necessary at whomever’s expense to justify the means. He has assumed a self-righteous attitude now, masquerading behind the guise of religion and convincing his followers that he is the right hand of Allah. Because of the great wealth of this individual, he has latched himself onto a nation of people in turmoil with false promises under a religious mask.

Understand, his followers were in and are in a situation where they feel helpless and any answer to the current plight of the peoples is going to be a welcome one even if it entails mass killings. Since the people of this nation do not trust the leaders of the Western world along with other nations of power, and rightfully so, they will turn to one of their own for answers whatever those answers may be. The Middle East has been known by all in the Universe as one of the vortexes of the negative entities. It is going to be a great struggle to release these nations from the grips of this reality and change their way of thinking. No matter how many bombs our nations drop, the ideas and the movement have infiltrated all aspects of society in all nations to some degree or another. When the belief systems are aligned with the will and plan of The Creator, we will have peace.

Changing the consciousness of mankind/womankind

Oneself The Creator


The probabilities now are present for us to quite literally propel ourselves into the harmonics of the higher dimensions by changing our individual and mass consciousness. A vast multidimensional experience awaits all of humanity. Mankind/womankind is starting to acknowledge that his/her consciousness is now beginning to become aware of its greater self. In allowing that expansion there lies the potential to experience the greater realities of our being. It is time for us to take off the blindfold and open oneself up to the full dimensions of our spiritual, physical and mental abilities. Opening up our consciousness to the impulses and messages that are inherently ours would allow our consciousness to fully experience itself. As our consciousness develops, our neurological and biological systems will evolve. Humans at this time are expanding their neurological connections within the brain. Latent areas often thought of as gray matter with no functional capabilities are being triggered into activity. As this happens our being will become more and more aware of the multidimensional nature of its existence.

As our consciousness evolves, so does our God image. It will move itself towards our idealized goals and probabilities, serving as psychic stimuli to effect change. We are creators of our reality. Our ‘soul-self’ had a hand in the creation of this planet and all of its living forms. Our ability to manipulate energy and create life forms is second nature to us when we are not focused in this physical Earth reality. Our abilities far exceed what we are bale to perceive in the limited third dimension. As our consciousness evolves, we will become a more conscious co-creator and be able to to tap into the vast realms of knowledge available to you. Mankind/womankind has an innate comprehension of past, present and future probabilities and a built in desire to cooperate with all living species for the greater good of the planet. We have consciously blocked much of this information from our being because of our dogmatic perceived sets of beliefs and our unwillingness to look inside ourselves for answers.

Always our ideas of good and evil stand in the way of our soul’s development. There are many forces within the world as we know it that are invisible to us. Yet if they were presented to us, we would run and hide, for they do not fit into our limited sets of beliefs. We have been so indoctrinated with beliefs of others that we have literally dammed up the evolution of our being. You cannot see the wind for example, but we know it is there. We cannot see God for example, but we know he/she is there, because these are our beliefs. Then why not believe that there is more to our being than our ego-perceptive materialized form. In changing our consciousness, one must acknowledge that there is more to life than what is right in front of our eyes. The total sum of the energy of self reaches far beyond the comprehension of even our most astute scientists. It is there, it is real, it is all of us and it is All That Is.

COMMUNICATING WITH OTHERS
There are many energy entities around us although we cannot perceive them. Since they do not fit into the order of our perceived reality, we deny their existence. We have been subtly told about them in various sci-fi movie creations although we always portray other planetary beings as evil and scary and out to take over our bodies. I would assure that in this point in time in our world’s history that is not the case. Beings of LIght have no use for a dense physical body on the Earth plane. They have already moved through that phase of their evolution and are all part of the same energy source that is infinite. It would also behooved mankind/womankind to abandon the idea that his/her death is final. Energy cannot die. We do not die. Our energy is merely transformed, into another dimension.

It should be apparent to most of us with the introduction of some of our current movies and television shows, that what we have denied as real, is certainly very real. It is totally within the realms of our magnificent being to communicate with any or all departed loved ones. It is simply a matter of listening and not dismissing what we hear as our own babbling. Those of us who have made the transition of our energy to the higher dimensions, as well as those who are still waiting on the Astral levels, are very capable of communicating with us and us with them. As our communications with beings in other dimensions will be commonplace. If we would just listen, we would be amazed at what we might hear. Our conscious lives are so full of our present daily activities that we have not stopped to smell the roses, to coin a phrase that we use. Many of our departed loved ones are anxiously awaiting communications with us. All we have to do is tune in. Their energy is as real as ours and they are no more dead than we are right now as one read this blog. They love us and are watching out for us.

Beings of Light are very concerned with the entities on Earth, for our thoughts and actions in our present point of power affect the future of the planet. We have the capabilities of communicating with other selves to influence the life that we are living in different time frames in order to improve or avoid disasters in those chosen lives. We do this in the dream state on a regular basis. Some of us are now developing this ability in the waking state and are able to communicate with different portions of our energy in different lives and timeframes. That is happening for many of us now in our world.

We all communicate with other aspects of ourselves. Both of these entities are communicating with various aspects of the Self entity of which we all are part, for we are aspects of ourselves in another dimensional-timeframe. To further clarify, the Self who I am is also a part of another vaster entity as a whole. So I am only another portion of our total Self. We are all part of the same entity only in different dimensions and elements of time and space.

THOUGHT HEALTH AND THE EVOLUTION OF DNA
I would like to discuss our thoughts in relation to our health in the present awakening. In order to raise the consciousness of mankind/womankind, man/woman themselves must be aware of the human condition and the environmental changes going on around him/her. He/she can no longer be oblivious to current situations within his/her own ecosystem and his/her body. As I have mentioned before in previous blogs, we are fully capable of creating a harmonious state of health for ourselves and our planet by virtue of our thoughts. For those of us who are not familiar with this concept I will briefly explain and then refer the reader to some of my previous blogs for further clarification. Our thoughts create our very existence as we know it. We form our reality based on those thoughts. Our perception of the reality of our thoughts lies within our mind. Thoughts manifest into desires and then into actions. Every thought that we have that has been acted on, manifests itself into one of the probable realities within this life that we are currently focusing on.

Our thoughts are responsible for our state of health. Initiating thoughts that we are sick or will be sick will then set our biological system to receive the perceived illness. If we are told over and over again that we need certain drugs to make us feel and we believe this, then we are not allowing our own built in mechanisms that monitor our state of being to do their jobs. By believing this, the message is sent that we would rather give the power to someone or something else. We have then set up the atoms within our body to prepare for the invader. Our body is fully capable of healing itself. It is our own thoughts that interfere with the process by sending messages that interrupt the natural flow of things. The atoms of our being are joyously going about their business of creating a harmonious existence within our physical framework and with this thought process that we have engaged in, we essentially throw them a curve. They are now put into defensive mode and must prepare for the attack. The drug companies in our culture are at this time going out of their way to ensure that we are going to be tethered to their product wit their product with their psychological messages on our television sets and media advertisements. This very process is harmful to our evolution as a soul.

As the perpetrators of negativity that have been so cleverly keeping us in the dark for so long realize that the mass consciousness is starting to change, that souls are beginning to move into the light, they are terrified that they will no longer be able to keep us chained to the old system of beliefs. Negativity feeds off of negativity. What better way to do this than to drug the minds and bodies of mankind/womankind. Systematically feeding us ideas through our media that we are sick and need drugs to maintain a state of well-being. We then subscribe to these beliefs and send our body mechanisms into a state of confusion thus rendering our being useless in its quest for its own health and evolution. Our body and mind cannot function as they need to for spiritual evolution if they are in a constant state of chemical alteration. The chemical reactions needed to allow our chakras to open to the information cannot take place if we are in a drug-induced state.

With the evolution of humanity the current double helix DNA will start to change and move to twelve strands. Each time it evolves it will do so in a group of three until there are twelve. The evolution of our DNA from the double helix into the twelve strands will correspond to twelve chakras. There are presently seven chakras within our etheric and physical body. During the evolution of the DNA another five will be added outside the body. Those additional five will be the link to the next phase of our spiritual evolution. Much of the information that will be given to us for our evolution will come via these outside chakras and enter the pituitary gland where it will then be transferred into strands of our evolving DNA. As these new strands of DNA and areas of the brain are activated, brain mapping will be possible and past-life memories will be evoked. Our entire civilization will be based upon a psychic framework rather than a physical one. It is a natural process that every physical being goes through when evolving.

Most of us who experience this evolution will become quite aware of the feeling that we are much clearer about life and seem to know things that we previously weren’t aware of. Information will start coming to us in dreams and in states of relaxation, universal information about our being, who we are and what our purpose is and so on. Our consciousness is being raised. The fact that we are reading this material shows that we are searching for the answers and we are evolving.

I will give an exercise that will help us get started on our own personal path to recovery and our soul’s evolution, for we are a soul with a body, not a body with a soul, remember that. Our physical existence is only a temporary one in which ‘you-the-soul’ are physically incarnated on our planet to learn from our experiences and evolve. Consider it like going to school, Earth school, where the lessons are sometimes harder than on other planets but the amount of spiritual growth that one gains from incarnating here is much greater than it is on some of the other planets and solar systems available to us. If we will take the time to do this exercise once a day and stay focused, we will start the process of aligning ‘you-the-soul’ with our body as one.

EXERCISE:
OPENING THE CHAKRAS
Sit or lie down and relax your entire body starting from the top of your head to your toes. Breathe deep. Inhale positive energy. Exhale all negative energy and thoughts. Do this as slowly as you wish. The idea is to achieve the level of relaxation that will bring you to a place of being completely free of your body. As you begin to relax, feel all of the tensions fade away into the air as you take yourself deeper and deeper into this relaxed state. Just let all thoughts and negativity float away. You may use the box technique that I gave you in earlier blogs to get rid if unwanted thoughts and feelings. Visualize them going into the box or it can be any receptacle of your choice as long as it has a lid on it. Focus on you mental center. For most of you it will be somewhere just above or between your eyebrows, not the area of the pineal gland of the third eye, but just below. This is your mental vortex. Stay in this relaxed state for at least a half an hour. What you are doing by this exercise is learning to calm your thoughts and your body so that the Divine information may then start to flow into you through the pituitary gland thus opening up the chakras in that area. As you do this for a while you will start to raise your vibrations to a higher level and you will notice that your difficulties will start to ease as Divine knowledge is placed deep within your hearts. Some of you will be able to achieve results almost immediately while others may take longer. Do not despair as all of us will eventually open up the chakras to receive Divine information at the cellular and DNA levels.

SPIRITUAL KNOWLEDGE
In reading this material there will be many of us who will simply not want to hear. We will go about our old superstitious ways and cling to our familiar and comfortable belief systems. Fear of the unknown will keep us in the grips of the old ways. Light is information. Light is knowledge. If we feel that you do not want to hear you will not, but once we have obtained the light there is no turning back, for we now possess the knowledge. Some of us will want to stay with the negative influences because we will not want to give up our habits and materialistic desires. Whether or not we choose to accept or deny the information that is being given to us is predicated on our own free will. However, those of us who wish to evolve will do so. The rest of us will simply stay in a third dimensional reality with all of its negativity until we make the conscious decision to seek the light. The negative energies, as I mentioned previously, have spent eons trying to keep the light from humanity, controlling the consciousness of mankind/womankind for their own selfish purposes. Without negativity we cannot have negativity. The negative influences wished to keep Earth as its breeding ground for its source of energy. They are now out-numbered by Beings of Light on the planet and will soon be relinquished to their own dimension. These forces are part of the balance system of the planet, however they have been spiraling out of control for the last several thousand years. Their function was to balance the matter aspect of the planet. They became too powerful though and have overtaken the minds of much of mankind/womankind in the materialistic sense and thrown him/her off course in his/her evolution. Millions of the citizens of our planet are now deeply entrenched in materialistic possessions and will even go so far as to die for those possessions. This is absurd from a spiritual point of view as these things are only an illusion of our own mind/thought energy and mean nothing to the soul. The only thing that matters is our relationships with each other and whether or not we act on our thoughts and newfound knowledge to help all of humanity. We have been in our dense physical bodies for thousands of incarnations and it is now time to move on to our etheric bodies and interact with each other on a deeper level. Many individuals are now seeing that their evolution is not a physical but a spiritual, soul evolution and are moving towards the light. They are in the process of starting to reject the old controlling theories about the nature of their being and their evolution. They are beginning to realize that they have been controlled by their materialistic ego desires instead of their spiritual desires.

Whole nations are beginning to awaken to their greater reality and purpose in the Divine plan that The Creator has for our planet and are rebelling against the invasion of the old negative influences masquerading in the name of their gods. Corporate and political dominators have been the ruling negative forces in our world. The citizens and believers have been deceptively confused. They no longer know what to believe or whom to believe. They have been told one thing and witness another. The art of deception has been masterfully played by these materialistic forces. As we witness, many nations and their citizens rise up and fight back, it is imperative not to compete with one another but to unite together by cooperating as brothers and sisters in humanity. It is not imperative to kill however. I wish to make that very clear: Killing is a violation of Universal Law. There are other ways to bring the consciousness of humanity into the light of its soul’s existence.

There are many energy forces that are free to come and go throughout our world. They usually reside within the Astral levels of our planet. Their access is through the various vortexes throughout the world. The vortex around the Middle East has been an access point for the forces of dark. This is where the network of the perpetrators of our terrorist acts have hidden deep underground and within the recesses of the mountains in their bases of operation. Many of them are nearly impossible to find. Some of these manipulating energies straddle between dimensions in many cases and they are not accessible to the limited perception of the third dimension. However, many of these forces are still there. This is the last stronghold of these forces. They are losing momentum and energy and that will continue.

Nations of the world would benefit by joining forces to peacefully eradicate the restructuring of the belief systems of many cultures to the ways of the negative influences. With the emergence of new positive energies and utilization of the technology of the media, this can be done. Now some of the leaders of our nations of power are very deeply entrenched in the influences of the forces of dark and are going to have to abandon their old ways as well. These leaders will put up the most resistance for they are the ones who will perceive themselves as having the most to lose. They are so deeply entrenched in materialistic world power that this will be a great struggle for them to have to make do with less. However with the cooperation of all nations there will be peace for all. We cannot have peace until we have justice in our world. We cannot have justice unless we are willing to share the resources of the planet and care for all other nations and to stop the atrocities of a global corporate takeover of the planet and its resources. This is just a simplistic vie of some of the demographics as to how and why 9-11 and Corona(Covid19) and some other terrorist attacks have been able to find their way into our societies.

The Misuse of Religion for the repression of humanity

Religious Beliefs


Through the ages humans have always been involved with religion. They have always been aware of God- energy, but oftentimes have distorted it to serve their own purposes and justify their actions and imposed beliefs. We have used it for various objectives and because of it powerful nature to has become a tool for us to control ourselves and others. With the illusion of beliefs that only serve to control our desires we have created roadblocks to our soul’s evolution. The natural aggressiveness of our creature-hood has been so repressed that we find oneself unable to control our pent-up energy at times. We have further damned up our being with our obsessive beliefs about guilt-ridden issues such as our own sexuality. We have denied our being the very pleasures of its creature-hood and again found ourselves wallowing in a sea of frustration.

Take for instance the the religious beliefs of the world. Many of these religions have made it mandatory to deny our own being and its natural aggression and sexuality, taking the word aggression and turning it into a negative when it is a part of the natural state of every living thing on the planet. Without natural aggression mankind/womankind would not have been able to survive, as his/her own creative abilities stem from this. As a flower blooms, it is performing its own natural aggression. This is a natural process of creature-hood and when used in a positive way can be very beneficial for our soul’s evolution. Even negative natural aggression can be a learning experience, for it forces one to confront their emotions.

If we take a society and tell them that they are to deny the forces of their physical being, the energy that would naturally be released has nowhere to go. It then begins to manifest itself in all sorts of repressed emotions until the physical being can no longer tolerate it and the self will act out in a highly aggressive nature or will force itself into an illness. Either way, the power of the being is damned up in such a way as to literally blow itself up. I might add that this is what happens when we hear of people who have been thought to spontaneously combust. Although this is a rare event, it can happen. The pent-up energy has nowhere to go. The individual is not given an avenue for release in their own perceived belief system. Instead, these individuals should be encouraged to release the restless energy they have, and try to find peace in nature with the help of energy healing (visit websites of companies like LightSong to learn more) and similar spiritual practices. A person can only truly let go of anger once they discover some sense of inner peace, and keeping turbulent emotions inside is not the way to go about it.

Religion have been notorious for trying to control the masses with mass systems of guilt-ridden indoctrination. The so-called religious leaders who were involved in writing the various manuscripts, were well aware that in order to tether us to their way of thinking they would have to make us feel guilty and unworthy, thus roping us into their belief systems and ultimately having control over you-the-soul. This gave them much power, but was in direct conflict with the intended messages of the Consciousness of God. We were stripped of our free will and made to feel embarrassed and guilty about our bodies. The body is a vehicle of expression and learning. It is the vessel with which we communicate with one another. When we truly understand this , we will be free to experience our soul’ true nature.

We were also told that we were sinners, unworthy, yet created in the likeness and image of our god. What then does this say about our god? If one were to believe that, then one would have to say that our god was unworthy and a sinner, for we were supposedly made in his/her image. This is not so, yet we have believed this for centuries, not even questioning as to why. The God of the Universe created us out of his/her love and in The Creator’s eyes we are no less than perfect.

The beliefs of some nations have not changed since the inception of these documents and have held firm for thousands of years without much cause for question. With the advent of modern transportation and the abilities of nations to move their citizens from place to place relatively easily, came a new era of information to many cultures. We now have entire civilizations questioning their beliefs, seeing the rest of the world and the way it is developing or not developing and in a sense confronting those issues openly. Many are torn between their society’s system of beliefs and their new ideas of freedoms that they could have. Many of the beliefs of these nations were directly associated with their man/woman-created versions of god.

Let us discuss mankind’s/womankind’s perception of God. Down through the centuries man/woman have always known that there was a force behind the creation of the Universe. Whether it was in his/her limited environment or in his visions of the stars he/she have always been aware that there was a greater force other then his/her own being. Many ancient cultures and civilizations were very in-tune with this force. As highly aware citizens of the planet they had much respect for the energies responsible for creation. It wasn’t until the last several thousand years that the power and image of the Divine Creator was brought into a human perception. Mankind/womankind felt it was to his/her advantage to put a face on the Creator, thus humanizing him/her to however he/she perceived. Along with this idea the hierarchy of religious leaders decided to take power of this newly created human god into their own hands. This perpetuated many myths and misrepresentations of who and what God was. The idea of God being a god of good and evil also came into play as another way for the religious leaders to control their followers by putting their ideas under the name of God and god’s rules and regulations, that mankind/womankind was supposed to live by. They lost sight of the fact that God is a force of pure energy that radiates with an abundance of love’s light and embodies every living thing. Because of the controlling religious idealists, all power that was once known by all of humanity as part of its own divinity was removed. It was given to this self-created man’s/woman’s god.

We have many versions of God in our nations at this time, all with their different mass belief systems, The writers of the manuscripts that we hold to be true, have had a hand at distorting the original messages at one point or the other and realigning them to fit their own perceived way of thinking. All of these versions have their various sets of man-made/woman-made rules, all mean to in some way or another prevent mankind/womankind from realizing the true purpose of his/her soul.

Mankind/womankind has been locked in an abyss, waiting patiently, believing that eventually he/she would be released and able to experience his whole being. His/her beliefs within the power structures of the religious organizations have kept him/she in the dark for many thousands of years. We cannot turn the infinite energy source of All That Is into a human. As much as our religious organizations would have us believe it, this is simply not the case. This energy source does not wear one face. It is everything in all of creation. All That Is is exactly that – All That Is.

Understand, the leaders of our religious organizations for the most part had good intentions when putting this system of beliefs together, but the same time, they were denying humanity the ability to experience itself. Most if not all of our wars have been created because of the misconceptions about God, as we perceive him, again “him/her” being loosely used here as this is our frame of reference. We have judged everyone and everything to the distorted ideas o f our illusions. We have been pitted against each other for what seems to be eons, competing and judging rather than cooperating with each other. Until mankind/womankind can break itself free from the spiritual ignorance of these beliefs, many more wars will be perpetrated. The belief systems of the masses are able to, so shall was say, swing with the tides, however it will take a powerful force to set things in motion. That powerful force is already manifest in our world as The Christ essences and will soon make himself known to all. Energy personalities are preparing us for the impending shift in consciousness and the emergence of the World Teacher. Return ourselves to the love that you-the-soul have always known. The soul does not know hate, greed, judgment, evil. These are all things that mankind/womankind and his/her ego self have subscribed to and in doing so, he/she has fallen further always from knowing the divine purpose of his soul. when you remove our judgment, we empower our wisdom. When we have wisdom, we will have peace.

GOD IS YOU
We have always known that we were not in this Universe alone for it is written in our ancient manuscripts and it it part of our soul’s knowledge. Through religious beliefs, much of humanity has been locked into believing that they are the only living beings in creation. This idea is so wildly absurd that we cannot help but be mystified as to how mankind/womankind has been able to elevate itself in such a manner as to think that the entire cosmic Universe revolved by and create one planet to be inhabited by one species of humans and then say, “Well that’s it I’m done, I’ll learn everything from this group.” God, The Creator of whatever term we wish to use, is all part of the same energy source of All That Is and we are part of it. God is Us. All That Is encompasses many life forms in many Universes and on many planets. Most of them are far more evolved than Earth and its inhabitants.

There are hierarchies and Creator Gods in all of them and in us and every living thing ever created, whether it’s a plant, animal, insect or mineral. Everything in the multitude of creation stems from the infinite energy source of All That Is. The Creator Essence is one of the higher members of the Hierarchy of our planet and has decided to remain in service to Earth. This entity could have moved on to other planets and solar systems but chose not to. There are various levels of Hierarchy on all planets in creation. The Christ has been in our world several times to help humanity in its evolution, each time bringing forth messages that would assist in our evolution. Until we can break free and understand that we all have subscribed to the mass belief system of others, and have ignored the original messages of The Christ essence, we have stifled our soul’s growth. These messages go back further than the in conception of the world manuscripts known as our bible. But let us look at the bible for instance, for that is part of our Christian world’s belief system. Many of the messages from The Christ essence were either left out or distorted and many man-made/woman-made beliefs and messages attached to it. Many of the messages were so simple but humanity proceeded to distort them to fit into their reality at the time.

I will give an example here: Let us take the anticipated Antichrist awaited by Christianity. According to these beliefs, millions are awaiting the appearance of an Antichrist that will deceive and try to capture them into a false spiritual abyss. This is an obvious distortion of the Antichrist event that has already happened in our history. It happened with the Hitler regime and the slaughter of millions of people on our planet. Millions of people were branded with the tattoo of this Antichrist and thus this prophecy has already been fulfilled. Yet The Christian religious organizations cling to their ideas that this event is still to come. It has passed and as I have stated earlier, The Christ entity is now manifest in our world today and is working quietly among us until such time as he chooses to reveal himself/herself to humanity.

The Manipulation of Spiritual Truths
There are many distortions in other religious manuscripts as well. Much of the information was put into human comprehension with its own devices to control the masses inserted, hence the guilt and repression. The soul was not allowed to joyously experience its being. The nature of the soul’s human existence was under speculation and scrutiny. We were given many behavioral modifications because of the perceived fears of the ones in control. Our energies were then locked away from us for fear that if we did not, meaning mankind/womankind, succumb to the will of the religious leaders, we would be forever burned in our fiery pits of hell etc. etc. etc. All religions have their own facets of gloom and doom, taking the love away from God and putting fear there instead.

The religious leaders were quite good at manipulating the masses since the masses were under the belief they were not in control of their own spiritual nature. In the beginning there were heavy prices to pay for not staying within the guidelines of what the religious leaders considered acceptable behavior of the norm. No one wished to be burned at the stake. Anyone with any awareness of their soul’s true purpose was given the title of “demonic” or “possessed.” Nothing could have been further from the truth. They had an awareness that was feared by the religious leaders, for if the masses were aware that the manuscripts that they held to be completely true had been doctored in order to control them and keep the money flowing into religious leader’s pockets, they would not keep coming and believing. It was imperative that they be silenced and accused of being witches or possessed by the devil, another way to keep mankind/womankind in the dark by feeding him/her a steady diet of fear, fear of the devil, and in doing so they gave power to the source they had created. In acknowledging this kind of thinking and accepting it into our belief system, we create a reality for it. It becomes manifest within our thoughts and belief systems.

For the most part, our biblical manuscripts were trying to allude us to the fact that our behaviors would affect the outcome of our lives. It was put into a storybook fashion so as to be understood and accepted by all. Religions have always to some extent followed the development of mankind’s/womankind’s consciousness. However, not all the written information fines one the truth, since much if it has been distorted and rewritten over and over again. Much of it was deliberately distorted, for the original manuscripts have yet to found. Most of them are buried deep within the mountains of our planet. The negative influences have also quite cleverly written their own distorted versions of the truth and many religious organizations are following and believing those distorted manuscripts and holding them with much reverence and sacredness. There are and always have been negative influences that have fought to keep the citizens of Earth in the dark about their soul’s true purpose.

Now don’t misunderstand me here, because there have been many good things to come out of religious organiztions and humanity needs to acknowledge their religious beliefs and socialize within the structures of organized religion, It is part of our spiritual evolution as a soul. Many religious organizations are involved in helping humanity throughout the world. They are encouraged to continue and cooperate with the rest of humanity in bringing our world into the next phase of its evolution. It is imperative that humanity’s religious forces join together, united as one, for the spiritual enlightenment of all citizens on the planet. Instead of competing with each other, join together as one, and move into the peaceful harmonics of the new world awareness. If we are in alignment with the will and plan of The Creator, then we will recognize when the belief systems of the divided religious organizations of the world need healing. Our energies, thoughts and beliefs are the tools needed for this healing.

We would benefit greatly to move ourselves beyond the old ideas of one self, one world, one Universe, for this is surely not the case, and in doing so we will experience the vast richness of our being that we have denied for so long. It is important for the survival of the species to open itself up to other probabilities and realities. Questioning honestly the underlying motives of some of the doctrines and rules of the religious organizations will enable us to see that what was supposed to be a joyous positive experience for the evolution of our soul has been doctored to such a degree that it has done just the opposite. It has kept us in the prisons of guilt and repression, thus denying our own personhood.

We have the power to unite humanity and change our world for the better with our thoughts, beliefs and actions. We are the directors of our world and Universe. All comes from us and is within us. God’s creation in our world is unending. What he/she has not created is not real it is only an illusion. We are the co-creators of our Universe. We are all one. we are all Gods.

The realignment of beliefs systems and the awakening of humanity

Tolerance of Other’s Beliefs

Let us talk about the tolerance of others beliefs. Many if us are under the perceived belief that we do not like the beliefs of other races, thus again making them more intolerable to us. We have decided that our beliefs are the only right ones and discounted all others that do not fit into our picture of a perfect world within our perceived reality. Since we cannot come to terms with and tolerate any other beliefs outside of our limited perception of reality, we condemn the other beliefs to “our version” of “the wrong way,” always maintaining that ours is the right way. There is no right or wrong way in the greater scheme of things. One group will incarnate into a society that has mass beliefs in one direction while another may incarnate into a society with an entirely different set of beliefs. One perceives the other wrong because it does not fit into their mass-conceived system. We are all incarnated in our present physical system of reality for one purpose only and that is to further the evolution of our souls. These perceived ideas are merely obstacles that we have out into place to learn from. The problem is we have not learned much.

It does no good to stay locked in our narrow-minded version of our perceived reality. We are not benefiting anyone , least of all ourselves. When we observe that entire societies have been raised with their own version of a mass belief system, then we are able to understand why it is imperative that we break out of the mold of the masses and analyze those very beliefs and thoughts that brought us to where we are currently in our lives. I have said this many times, “We create our own reality.” We are obsessed with the ideas that we are right and everyone else is wrong. There simply is no such thing . It is a creation of our own mind/thought energy, another attempt of the ego to control our reality.

We have been blindly following the ideas of others without questioning them, taking them for granted. We have simply not allowed any thoughts that do not conform with our strict set of perceived beliefs to enter into our world, thus shutting out the beauty of the world itself. Our own fears of the unknown have entrapped our soul’s existence into a stagnant lumbering existence. We were not allowed to incarnate into our world to lock oneself away from the rest of humanity, yet with our actions this is precisely what we have done. We have shut out anything and everything that does not conform to our standards of our perceived reality. It has not gained us a thing except a lot of fear, anger and hate for the same souls that, when we are not incarnated into a physical body, we have a tremendous love for. We come to the Earth plane and decide that we do not like the packaging or the lessons and experience that other souls have come into incarnation to learn, so therefore we must shut them out of our existence. We don’t like what we see. We don’t want to see. We are afraid to see, so see we shall not. No one is at the mercy of another’s beliefs. Each one of us has the free will to change our system of beliefs.

Questioning the Mass Belief Systems

Light is information. It is the knowledge that is ours, within us and available to us. As we see the fall of our religious institutions, corporations and mass belief systems, know that this is the beginning of this evolutionary process and that we are part of it. Do not be afraid to question the belief systems that have been in place for so long. For they do not allow our soul essence to fully experience itself without guilt or fear, then they need to be examine and alter our beliefs, we can reprogram them, thus altering our own existence and experiences. We can move from one set of firm beliefs into a seemingly completely different set of beliefs by simply focusing on them daily. As our ideas and behaviors change so will our perception of the world around us. Then we have effectively enhanced our experiences and begun the spiritual journey in the evolution of our soul by recognizing the power of our own being. The way to a peaceful existence lies within our thoughts and beliefs.

Many of us are starting to realize the power of our being. We are waking up to the very nature of ourselves and claiming our rights to exist on our planet in a peaceful and harmonious way. The negative ego influences of some of the ones in power have been aware of this for some time and thus we see the aggressive actions taken on the part of those individuals to ensure that they keep their old systems of belief intact. They have been aggressively branching out into all nations in one last-ditch effort to ultimately, in their eyes, control the world and prevent the citizens of Earth from evolving away from the old ways and into the new. The only way humanity to stop this invasion is to start to reject the belief systems of these leaders. Question the validity and motives behind the ideas that are presented by these individuals. As we use our own powers of intuition, we will see that the agenda of these forces is quite self-serving and designed to prevent us from using our own free will to further the evolution of our soul and bring peace and harmony to our planet.

When the ones in power can persuade the masses to believe that killing is justified, then we need to take a good look at the motives behind their beliefs. Universal Law is clear: killing another for whatever reason is a Violation, plain and simple. It is not necessary to rob the life of another to get our perceived point across. It is only our perceived belief and does not reflect the beliefs of others, that is, unless we force it upon them, forcing them into relinquishing their power over their own being. The repression of humanity by those in power is beginning to erode and will no longer be tolerated by the citizens of the planet. Much of the world is in great turmoil because of the actions of powerful political and corporate leaders.

Often the belief systems of many only reflect the visions of a few. Many individuals simply follow the crowd and do not question as to why they are doing so. This is why so many individuals find it hard to change their perceived reality, for fear of not conforming within the structures of the belief systems of the masses. They are reluctant to be the odd one out. It is safer for them to go along with the masses than stop and think for themselves, for in doing so they would then have to confront their own reality and belief systems. If this were done however, the individuals would open up a vast amount of information to themselves about the nature of their being and move forward in the evolution of their souls. We would then be able to use this knowledge to joyously go about experiencing our life as we were meant to do. I am going to give an exercise here that we may use to confront the nature of our beliefs. It is an exercise to allow our own path to our soul’s evolution.

EXERCISE:
ANALYZING OUR MIND/THOUGHT BELIEFS

Let us look at the word right. What does that conjure up in your minds? Good , wholesome, upstanding, religious etc. All qualities that mankind/womankind aspires to have. Then look at the word wrong. What does this conjure up in your minds? Take a good hard look at this. Dark, negative, unsavory, lack of moral ethics etc. I’m sure that you could come up with at least 100 definitions for each word and that is exactly the exercise here. I want you to make two columns on a piece of paper and label the first column positive and the other negative. Here you are to list words that come to mind in your life that you think of as positive or negative. Now look at your list of words that you have organized into two neat columns. As you look at each word, examine your feelings about each one. What kind of thoughts do each of the words represent to you? What or whom do you associate with these words and why? This is the beginning of examining your beliefs, all of them. Notice that when certain words are examined that they also carry with them certain feelings. These feelings are a direct result of your association with the words of your lists. many will make you happy and many will not. Consciously look at all of them. For instance, if church makes you happy, then further explore what it is about the church that makes you happy. Do you love the unity with other humans that are of like mind with you? Most likely you will say yes. Now, what do those like minds have in common? Do they all elevate themselves as having the true right way that humanity should live? Of course, they all agree with your own system of perceived beliefs don’t they? Now, look at the other side of the paper and do the same. You will notice that all those things are in direct conflict with your own idea of your perceived reality, are they not? If you will examine where and how and who put these beliefs into your minds you may start to get the correlation. This exercise is a powerful tool in enabling your conscious mind to be more aware of the beliefs and thoughts of others and how they manifest themselves into your own beliefs. It will stimulate you being into recognizing whether or not it is part of your soul’s true nature to accept the information or reject it.

THE BELIEFS OF OUR LEADERS

This discussion involves the belief systems of the nation’s leaders. Many of the world’s governments are very resistant to any changes. Politicians go into office with high aspirations of manifesting the ideals that they see would and could benefit society only to fall prey to the negative energies that are inherently manipulating the power structures of the system. Their lack of self-discipline and focus on their own power allow them to be sucked into the rituals of business as usual. They soon see that they cannot accomplish their goals without stepping on the toes of the forces that have weld the power. They are entrapped into a system of beliefs that is not their own, however to survive they must succumb to the wall of the controlling energies. They have little or no regard for the citizens of Earth as they are enveloped in the unlimited power that they now seem to possess.

The mass belief system that has been maintained by our leaders is starting to crumble. The leaders of the Western world have been quite successful at disregarding the cultural traditions of other nations, thus causing much strife within those nations. There is a constant battle between people of other nations to aspire to be westernized and still remain in the traditions and mass beliefs of their cultures. There is much resentment over the values of the Western world and many people of so called impoverished nations feel helpless in their situation and powerless to do anything about it. The very nature of their frustration is then taken out in an aggressive, negative way to try to regain their own power. There is much anger over the doctrines of Western civilization. Many citizens of other cultures are rooted in the beliefs that the western world with all its riches is evil. The Western world has been hoarding all the resources of the world for their own personal gain and ignoring the plight of the rest of the world. They know this and this angers them. They do not like it when the core of what they perceive to hate is knocking on their front doors. Their belief system has taught them that it is wrong to have too many material possessions, yet when we look at the leaders of these nations they are swathed in as many material possessions as they can create for themselves. The rest of their nation is bathed in poverty and resentment. The only way they have to regain their power is to lash out at the perceived enemy. Since it is a mass system of beliefs the anger and resentment is then propelled by the masses of those nations. The natural act of aggression of these individuals has been taken into the negative arena. They see no other way of regaining their power other than to lash out at the nations that they perceive have taken it away from them. The beliefs are so strong and there are so many individuals in this situation, we can see that it could create a disaster of mass proportions.

If the frustration continues at the present level there could be a worldwide war ending with the destruction of our planet. The Western world and some of the other nations of power can no longer afford to continue on their paths of domination. All citizens of all nations must be treated as though they are an important part of the world and not though they are an important part of the world and not shoved under the rug in favor of politics and corporate greed.

It is a shame that the Western world has been able to migrate its influences over much of the planet thus forcing many cultures to either accept these changes or fight for the sovereignty of their nations. Within those societies we have the pent up energies of those who have been forced to relinquish their own power to perceived higher forces and have been downtrodden with enormous amount of guilt about their very being. They have been repressed to the point of combustion and as mother Earth acts out her own way against the atrocities against her in the form of natural disasters, so it is that mankind/womankind is doing the same. The basic free will of mankind/womankind is being challenged at this point in our planet’s history like it has never been before.

Most of the middle East appears to be in for a slow awakening. The energies of Hierarchy are being concentrated on this area at this time to diffuse the situation but it is not an easy task. The people of these nations are entrenched in their religious beliefs, misguided as some of them are. It is a daunting task and will require much energy from the masters for many years to realign this area of the world. It will be just as hard for them to realign the Western world, for they are the ones who will likely put up the most resistance to sharing the resources of the world. Either way, the world as we know it is in for some positive changes that will affect every living thing on the planet. We have seen that mankind/womankind is starting to awaken to these and other injustices perpetrated by the ones in power. More and more individuals who are truly visionaries will soon start to replace the ones who have kept the great nations of the world in the dark. Just as we see the fall of our corporations we will also see radical changes in our government and the media.

OTHER PLANETARY LIFE FORMS
I would like to discuss other life forms and how our thoughts affect the entire Universe. Our thoughts of negativity swirl up into the atmosphere and cling to the spatial grids of the Universe. They must be constantly neutralized and sent back to our planet with an abundance of love so that they do not affect other life forms in the Universe. Beings of Light are very sensitive to the energy created by our thoughts and have been surrounding our planet for years neutralizing them. We cannot see them for they are of etheric matter undetectable to the third-dimensional vision. Much of humanity still clings to the ideas had beliefs that the Universe involves them alone. However, this is far from the case. We have closed our minds and erected giant barriers against our soul’s evolution and other life forms. We have encased ourselves in a dark cocoon and locked the door, fearful of what may be out there. For us to discover the true nature of our soul, it would benefit us to open our mind to realities other than our own limited perceptions of self. There are many, many inhabited planets in our solar system and others. There are also many types of bodies, not always physical. Some are etheric. Mankind’s/womankind’s body is designed for Earth’s three-dimensional residency and is our vehicle for expression and communication. Our etheric body is our soul and it is within the realms of our physical body. It operates our physical body much as we operate a car. There are many other body types available to beings based on their point in evolution and the planets they choose to experience life on. They don’t necessarily
have to be flesh and blood like we have on Earth.

Many planets that we would deem uninhabitable are teeming with life. I will give an example: the planets Venus and Sirius are filled with the most peaceful, loving beings in the Universe. It is a place many of us often go to. In our third-dimensional perceived reality, we often have chosen not to acknowledge other life forms due to fear and our limited senses as to what is out there. We cannot see beyond the vision of the third dimension unless we have developed our etheric vision as a few of us have. When our etheric vision is developed we will be aware of a whole new world. That world will be in the forth dimension and eventually higher and with that we will be able to see and communicate with other Beings of Light. Many of us now are able to receive transmissions telepathically from Beings of Light and acknowledge them while also separating them from our own thoughts. Many of us though would appear to not be able to do this. That is only because we are not willing. Telepathic communication is available to all the method of communication is our future reality. As we consciously start to align our energies with the will and the plan of The Creator, these abilities will open up to us.

It is imperative that we live the life that we have chosen on Earth with the utmost of respect and love for our fellow human beings. We cannot make the transition in consciousness without changing our attitudes about each other. Anyone choosing to experience life at this time on planet Earth is learning some very valuable lessons about the effects of negativity. The great majority if the rest of the beings within the multitudes of solar systems do not experience negativity. This experience has been assigned to the inhabitants of Earth at this point in our evolution. Beings of Light carefully monitor how much the influence of negative energies are affecting the planet. If individuals on our planet continue on their present course of destruction they will miss out on our impending evolution and be left behind. These unfortunate souls will be sent back to the third dimension or offered lives in a two-dimensional reality where they will be able to enjoy the fruits of their greed and negative behavior. The souls that persist in their lifestyle of pillaging the planet and each other will be left in the lower dimensions until they seek the light. The rest of mankind/womankind are going to evolve with Earth, where all will reside in peace with a greater awareness of the connection of their souls to each other.

If our leaders attempt to use nuclear power for mass destruction, Beings of Light from the higher dimensions will interfere. Permission has been given to do so. Mother Earth will not be allowed to be destroyed by the fanatical behaviors of those who perceive themselves to be in power. Beings of Light are sending their energies to awaken mankind/womankind and assist with the transition of their consciousness. It will take a willingness on our part to promote peace in our world and take care of each other. It means using our free will and the energy of our being wisely to create a new reality on our planet. With our powerful thoughts we will have no problem doing this. For the stubborn few that insist on creating mass destruction and dominance over their fellow human beings and aligning their energies with the negative influences, the time is now to move towards the light. Some of us have already started to awaken. Stay awake, for if we close our eyes again we will fall back into our cosmic slumber and be left behind. Each one of us radiates with The Creator’s love and if we look for it in every being we encounter we will find it is there. Open our hearts and minds to being more loving and compassionate towards each other because we are all brothers and sisters evolving together. When we help another, we are also helping ourselves and both of us will benefit in our evolution. Forget about what people will think about us because it matters not to the soul. Do what you-the-soul knows is right in our relationships with others. The ego will always try to foil any attempts of the soul to circumvent its authority or challenge it by creating doubts or making one feel fearful of reaching out to others for fear of rejection. The only thing that is rejected is the ego and with this understanding one can certainly move always from that arena and let their soul shine through.

RE-SCRIPTING OUR FUTURE
One of the areas that the ego likes to control is our emotions. Emotions come from the solar plexus area and are astrally grounded. At present in our evolution emotions have come to the boiling point and saturation levels are high as humanity is getting ready to make the transition of consciousness. This is to be expected, as there are many are as of our present reality that will start to break down as our consciousness makes the shift. Right now the third dimension is astrally polarized but as we move from Astral polarization to mental polarization we will start to gain control of the emotions. This stepping up will also begin to change the vibrational rate of the planet and its inhabitants. As the vibrational rate of the planet changes, the energy component of the beings that occupy it will move into a peaceful realm that has not been encountered in thousands of years. As the planet moves through this high energy field it will eventually move even further in tis higher-dimensional fields and complete the next phase of its evolution. The awakening of mankind/womankind is happening now. We are essentially re-scripting our future lives
during this awakening.

The future of humanity holds endless possibilities for peace. As our vibrational hum is raised so is our consciousness thus affecting our future with our future lives. Since we are able to affect our past, present and future with our thoughts and beliefs, what we focus our energies on now will either propel us into our new level of awareness or leave us behind in the lower dimensions of negativity. As more and more of us examine our beliefs and start to awaken to the purpose of our soul’s existence, we will naturally gravitate into higher vibrational frequencies. As humanity loses its fears and we begin to love one another, humanity evolves.

As many or us are now awakening, our souls are starting to radiate a brilliant light. As we move our energies into practicing unconditional love for one another, we are by our own thoughts moving the planet into a higher vibrational hum. many of us are very knowledgeable on the effects of energy and how it can be manipulated. As Beings of Light we are all energy. Humanity has already awakened to the creative abilities of its creature-hood and is now starting to focus on the evolution of its soul. As we start to awaken from the cosmic slumber that we have been in for so long the receptors of our neuro-cellular system are being charged with electromagnetic energy. Our planet too will be charged and the purification process will begin. The thoughts of many will create a positive radius of energy bathing the planet. The Earth will move into a tranquility unknown to mankind/womankind and eventually elevate itself into higher levels of harmonic vibration. It is not impossible to untangle ourselves from our perceived sets of beliefs and move our consciousness in the direction of Divine Light. Using some of the tools that I will provide , this should be an easy task for those of us who truly wish to evolve.

Moving out of darkness

It is time to stop competing with each other and start cooperating with one another for the good of all. The fruitless endeavors of our governments to dominate have brought about many of the circumstances that they are trying to prevent. The leaders of many nations have been interfering to various degrees with the sovereignty and cultures of other nations, trying to strip them of their heritage and individuality and manipulating them into the Western way of life. What I am getting at here is that America and some of the other nations of perceived power must not “assume” that their way is the only way. I am not advocating the actions of the terrorists, however I do see a certain amount of interference from our own country and that others that precipitated these events.

For years the plight of the people of impoverished nations has been relatively ignored by the nations of great power. Those leaders have done little to relieve the suffering of millions. Instead they have tried to westernize them and force them into accepting the invasion of corporate greed. Now, in hindsight they are wondering why this has happened. They need only look at their actions or lack of to find the answers. We cannot rape and pillage the Earth or its inhabitants without suffering dire consequences for those actions. It will not be allowed. There will come a time when the minds of the few in power will be halted abruptly by the minds of many.

Corporate Greed in rampant within the Western world and the mass globalization of capitalistic dream has left many countries in fear for their own sovereignty. When two thirds of the world is starving, as it is today, and the rest of the world is ignoring their plight, as it has been doing, terrorism will continue. It is the cancer of our societies today. Many in the so-called civilized nations of power bathe themselves in luxury, spending their money on materialistic goods that have been forcefully produced by undeveloped countries that cannot even afford to grow their own food, because of the demand for products from the Western world. If we will, just observe around us and take notice of how wastefully our fellow countrymen/countrywomen spend their money of frivolous objects of pleasure while at the same time ignoring the plight of millions of starving people worldwide. Because it is not in our own backyard, we refuse to look and see. We refuse to get involved. One cannot justify these situations by saying that this is what the people want, for it is not so. All of mankind/womankind should be able to enjoy all of the benefits of life on this planet, not just those who have money and power within their nations. The corporations of the world are forcing their products upon many of the world’s citizens, wiping out their way of life and slowly spoon-feeding them a diet of Western greed. It is sad for those of us to observe the careless way that the so-called civilized world views the rest of humanity. They are them, apart from us as we see it, but we are all in the same.

The mass globalization of the Western world into the lives and cultures of other nations fuels the fires of anger of the citizens of those nations. Corporate greed is stripping them of their identities and their power to sustain themselves. While the Western world is busy spending lavishly on themselves and feeding their bank accounts, they look away from the other two thirds of the world struggling to stay alive, two thirds of the world’s people who know not where their next meal is coming from or if their children will live through the night. The Western world and some of the other nations of power are busily creating useless objects – trinkets – from the sacrifice of other life forms, and every conceivable gadget to hold the limited attention of those who already have so much yet they are constantly on a mission to obtain more. The few organizations able to help are forced to beg others for money. “Others” are most often willing to donate only if it serves a corporate purpose, i.e. tax relief. Companies and businessmen then tend to look for experts in tax resolution to better understand their taxes. There are vaious aspects that come in when dealing with the ambit of business taxation, and for the same, only experts who are adept in corporate tax return canada or any other country, could prove beneficial. Not that it is wrong, but there should be a moral compass to say the least. There are those who will say that they give, and some of us do, but what are the true motivations behind the giving? When the giving comes sincerely from the heart, then and only then will we be able to see the need of the starving millions and understand the soul’s mission. As long as the giving is a political and corporate decision, it is without merit, for it truly is not given from the soul.

Companies’ taxes can be managed efficiently by looking at their business operations and employee performance. That is the reason why tools similar to OKR software and goals (of businesses) are moving in tandem in today’s world. The possible explanation for this is – the software might be providing a clear picture of how the company is doing – profit margins and employee performance. Businesses that use such software have a better evaluation of their business finances and, as a result, the business taxes that they give.

If one would consciously examine their life and their monetary assets it would be acutely obvious that much of what we spend on our desire to make ourselves feel better. All the material possessions in the world will not make us feel better, for you-the-soul knows better. They are but desires f the ego. What is the ego? It is like a tiny voice offering us everything, but really nothing. It is our creation. We have given power to it by believing in it. It will foil any attempt at our knowing the true feeling of feeling good. For feeling good to the soul is watching a starving human being eat a meal that is nutritious and seeing those individuals have proper health care and shelter. Allow the ego to slip away and our true self will emerge.

GLOBAL COLLAPSE
The world is on the brink of a global collapse. No longer can mankind/womankind blame anyone else for his/her situation, for mankind/womankind has to been willing to help others or take an interest in anything that is not within the realms of his/her own isolated illusions. If each one of you readers would look at the world in a different light and begin to help others less fortunate than yourselves and share the wealth and resources of our planet, there is an abundance of resources available to mankind/womankind on our planet, yet few nations with the most power and corporate interests have managed to hoard them all for themselves. Why is it that our governments have warehouses of food stockpiled, oftentimes just rotting away, and others have nothing to eat? How does mankind/womankind justify this kind of behavior? There is no such thing as a superpower in the eyes of The Creator. Superpower is manifested by the egos of mankind/womankind for the dominance of others. Others do not need to be dominated. Others need for the ones who envision themselves to be the superpowers to share the planet’s resources with them and allow them to have the freedoms and benefits that our Western world so lavishly enjoys.

If the very rich in our country would get off their pedestals and see that they are controlled by their own greed and illusions of power and start to answer the calls to abandon their kingdoms and help humanity, they would experience the true meaning of love. They would begin to know the love of self, for the love of self is not a material possessions and lavish vacations in the world will not bring us one bit closer to the reality of who we are, it will only increase the distance between us and our soul and delay our evolution.

When we stand by and watch millions starving, it is us who will be starved; starved of the light of The Creator and the diving nature of our soul and our purpose on our planet. If we cannot see the light, the light will remain dim or burnout all together until such time as we begin to seek the light. It would be quite a different existence to be living one’s life as a clam or inside of a rock for hundreds or thousands of years. Yet all is possible, and as the light dims, this may be the path chosen.

ALIGNING OUR ENERGY
The soul-we knows whether or not we are living a life in alignment with The Creator’s diving energies or whether we are allowing the ego to rule the roost. The ego will always look for ways to elevate itself on the lack of others. The Western world is so caught up in materialistic trappings that many of us will simply try to ignore what we have just read. However, once we have read it, the soul knows that it cannot be ignored and the ego is fully aware whether consciously or unconsciously of its actions. We will justify the corporate greed as a means to support our families, or whatever pops into our minds. We certainly have to support our families, that is true. However look at it in a different light if you will. Why not dispense with the items that don’t really matter and start to concentrate on useful items for the people of the world. Food clothing, health care, medicines for the most basic needs, clean drinking water for all, sanitation, adequate and sturdy shelter. There are many useful items that mankind/womankind has invented that would greatly improve the lives of the starving millions. We can live a much simpler life. We do not need to live with all the trappings of the ego. many of us crave the simpler life, the life that we once knew when we were young. These are just a few of the things that would help to restore the the balance of the resources of the planet. The world is full of talented, educated individuals that could provide the necessary tools for the underprivileged nations of the planet. It is not about what we have in our world or how much wealth we can amass, it is about sharing the resources of the planet, about loving our fellow humans and taking an active interest in their lives so that all may experience the plenitude of gifts our planet has to offer.

If the wealthy nations of the world would learn to live with less and start to focus their energies on helping others, the entire world would remake itself. We do not have to buy into corporate greed and globalization. We have the power to stop the atrocities with our funds, for we are the ones who can make the difference to those in need. If we do not support the greedy corporations and refuse to buy their products, we will force them into looking at the way they do business with the rest of the world, for they are only motivated by money and profits.

Taking one small step at a time, by each and every one of us who feel that we have had no say in the plight of mankind/womankind, we will be able to create a peaceful world where all beings are free to live their lives without fear, prejudice or greed. The majority of us are living in splendid conditions with an abundance of items that we do not even need. Why not take those items and donate them to worthwhile causes or start our own and redistribute the proceeds to help feed the world’s hungry. It takes a willingness on our part to see the need of our fellow human beings and do something about it. If we sit back and wait for others to do it for us, then evolution will sit back and wait for us. It’s that simple.

OPENING OUR MINDS
Humanity cannot continue on its disruptive path of negative energy without having to pay a price. Search in our hearts and we will see what I mean. We have all participated at one time or another in hatred, greed, selfishness, and domination. Examine our inner self carefully and we will see that our or your leader’s actions or lack of actions precipitated the manifestation of 9/11 and other events. It is not a matter of good vs. evil. Now I know again we have have trouble this because of our preconceived ideas that if there is a good there has to be an evil. These are only realities that we have created. These are realities that we have subscribed to because we are not in touch with our soul’s purpose within the divine plan of The Creator.

The Beings of Light that are now descending upon the Earth are bringing many new energies that mankind/womankind will slowly begin to accept, “energies” meaning ideas and concepts that have long been forgotten. The souls coming into incarnation at this time are the ones who will lead our planet into its new level of consciousness. They are sending their energies to the minds of mankind/womankind at this time, bring an abundance of love into our souls and stimulating our awakening. The soul’s essence will begin to remember. There is a multitude of information available to each and every one of us. As we awaken we will be able to tap into this information. However, we are encouraged to make the effort to open our eyes and dissolve the hatred and racial barriers to our soul’s light. We have been gently stimulated to awaken our consciousness. When I say WE, I am speaking of myself and many others like myself, as I am not unto myself alone. I am not. I am no different than you. However, all my abilities and memories are available to me. They are available to you as well, you just have forgotten now to access them. The encumbrances of our bodies and our pre-programmed ideas of what our world if like have stood in our way much of the time. As we evolve, so do I.

We are very concerned about the Earth planet because there has been so much destruction. Mother Earth can no longer continue on this path. Our planet Earth is no longer in balance with the rest of the Universe. It is off balance and if it were not for the intervention of Light Beings from the higher dimensions, our planet would have been destroyed by now because of our actions. We are swirling in mass amounts of radioactive debris that is responsible for most of the new diseases and cancers on our planet. Each time we build a nuclear explosion underground, we are killing ourselves. Sure, everyone working on a nuclear plant needs protection and has looked into a hazmat suit for sale and other protective equipment. Sure, the workers are supposedly safe from the radiation when working near the toxicity. Despite this, the particles still could affect us in some way. Regardless of what our leaders have told us about its safety, tiny particles are being released into our atmosphere every day. It is of such great magnitude, that it is not stopped, there will be no more life on our planet. We have not developed instruments sensitive enough to detect this radiation, however I assure you, we are all breathing it every day. This is not part of the divine plan for mankind/womankind. There are other forms of energy available to us, all we have to do is implement them. Eventually we will be able to harvest our thoughts with light through the use of energy crystals but that time is not yet upon us. There are energy sources available to mankind/womankind that are free and are safe. As we evolve our consciousness towards the light all will be revealed to us, but until then these secrets will not be given to us. Mankind/womankind must prove that he/she is capable of using them fairly and wisely. At this point we are not ready. Our behaviors are too unpredictable.

Western world leaders have focused on their military might with such a vengeance that it is becoming the accepted norm to go after the perceived enemy with all sorts biological and chemical warfare. Our leaders are swathed in military arms that are capable of turning our planet into a cosmic pile of debris, hurling its citizens into the endless abyss of pace. The dire spiritual ramifications of such hateful and aggressive behavior are left to swirl about us like a cyclone of debris attaching itself to the very fibers or our existence.

This is not what the founders of our great nation had in mind when they spoke of the right to bear arms. These acts are not God-oriented and do not conform with Universal Law. I have spoken before on this as “a violation.” This is a violation. Intentionally projecting hateful thoughts and terrorizing society is a violation. Spinning like a web around the souls of man/woman, these thoughts eventually suffocate our very existence as we know it and leave us in a spiritual abyss, a limbo of sorts, until we seek the light. This kind of thinking only keeps the consciousness of mankind/womankind saturated in fear. We may think these weapons are protecting us, however our soul know better. When one “assumes” this to be their protection that is exactly what one is doing. Our protection lies in the unity of self with the will and plan Of The Creator.

This cannot continue much longer if we are to survive as a species. Increasingly disturbing weather patterns have been experienced across our planet. This will likely continue. The Earth is fighting back, manifesting weather patterns that will serve to wash away the destruction of her delicate skin by mankind/womankind. The great upheavals of our mountains spew forth the abundance or negativity that has been injected into the body of Mother Earth. The global cleansing has begun as the Earth prepares for the transition into the peaceful harmonics of the fourth dimension and her alignment with the rest of the Universe.

In order to facilitate the healing process on our planet, the energies of its citizens and leaders need to be realigned with the light energies of All That Is. If we wish to make a difference in changing the reality of our world, I will give another exercise that, if practice daily, will begin the healing.

EXERCISE:
HEALING THE NATION
If you will, meditate daily on creating peace in our world by focusing our attention on sending healing energies to our leaders that they become aware of the global problems in our world instead of their own isolated illusions. If you would send 20 minutes daily on this, the mass thoughts of all of us would begin to start the healing. You can do this at any time. You do not have to be in deep routine for just a few minutes at a time, sending messages. You may do this, for example, in the shower, driving cars, anywhere you do not have to be actively focusing on your daily activities at that given moment. The more you do this, the sooner you will begin to experience healing as a nation and as a world.

The contract with God and learning from Loss

We are on our planet to learn and evolve. When we have finished learning one incarnational group of experiences we will move on to another incarnational group of learning experiences until such time as we have mastered the Earth experience and can free ourselves of its limitations. All souls need to move on with their evolution. When we allow our life to be severely affected by the transition of another soul, we do not allow that soul to enjoy the peaceful existence it is now capable of experiencing. The constant longing for the soul to return to the Earth plane by its loved ones can have serious effects on the soul. For then instead of seeking the light and accepting the transition, the soul becomes absorbed with feeling the need to return to an Earth-life existence without the proper amount of rest time needed in its home dimension prior to the next incarnation. Their energy becomes trapped on the Astral Planes, not making it through to their home dimension. Some of these souls, because of the pull from their loved ones still experiencing a life on Earth, will hover in the Astral Planes for many years wanting desperately to return. Try to realize that by holding onto them we are not allowing them to be set free and move on with their soul’s evolution. We will meet these souls again. In most cases we have spent many lives incarnating with them. They are part of our soul group that may contain a large number of entities or just a few. We play various roles within the family hierarchies, each time experiencing different elements of life within these structures for the greater learning of soul.

The scripts or contracts that were made by us and the rest of the members of our soul group were set into place long before we incarnated into this life with the understanding that we would each play a role in the learning experiences of each other. Some may play perceived negative roles, others perceived positive roles, but it is all agreed upon for us to learn from the experience.

Now, the souls who have moved on or also moving on with their evolution but the lessons still remain for the Earth souls who are in the process of experiencing their chosen lives. We are to gain a valuable learning experience from this loss, as agreed upon by us before we incarnated into this life. It is our responsibility to continue with our contract until it is completed and we are able to make the transition ourselves.

Of course we feel sad at our loss, but it is really not a loss unless we see it that way and this becomes an ego perception. We create our own ideas about how we feel with our thoughts. The impetus behind thoughts is generally ego-motivated in this phase of our evolutionary path. If we choose to be happy then we will be happy. If we choose to be depressed and fearful, then that is what we will get. It does no good to dwell on the loss, for as I said earlier, it is not a loss but a transition from one state of energy to another. Allow the departed souls to move on by creating loving thoughts of joy for them that they are able to return home to where we all have come from. As we release them into their new existence, do it with an abundance of love and support. Know that we were not left alone so that we could wallow in our own misery but that we ourselves are now entering into a different learning path for our own soul’s evolution. The love light of the Creator will surround us and will never abandon us, for we are not separated from it. All we have to do is focus on the Divine energy of The Creator and we will be helped immensely in evolving our soul’s experience. All we have to do is ask. we can do this in either prayer or meditation, whatever is comfortable for us within our spiritual belief system.

SUICIDE
I am going to deal with another subject right now, and this is related to suicide with 9/11. It is important to understand that our body is a gift. Some of us may feel the pain of our loss is unbearable. Please know that the souls involved in 9/11 chose to experience this probable death not only for themselves – for their own soul’s growth – but for ours. The rules are very clear about suicide. We my not take our life. It is a violation of Universal Law. Some of us may feel we cannot go on. We must stay to finish out our life and learn the lessons that we were brought to the Earth plane to learn.

The suicide mission entities have already been returned to incarnate in the bodies of babies in relatively the same conditions and circumstances. They will be returned into the same mass belief system of the nations from which they came and will have to try again to move towards the light. When a soul sheds its body, if the soul has created death for others or committed suicide, it is not allowed to re-enter its home dimension. The energy guides will escort the soul to Council where the soul entity will be advised by the Elders of the Council to return. A suicide can only be justified on an individual basis with the members of the Council and the soul present. There are only a few situations where it is acceptable. I will further elaborate. If we are terminally ill and our vehicle was in the final stages of the death process we will be allowed to re-enter our home dimension. If we have abused our life with drugs, alcohol or whatever, this is also considered a suicide and we will be returned to do it over again. The Council is the only force on the Astral Plane that makes these decisions when there is a borderline situation. Otherwise, it is fairly clear, we will not be permitted to enter our home dimension.

I may clarify what the home dimension is here. The home dimension of the Astral level is where most souls go to commune with each other and study. There are many home dimensions all based on various stages of evolution completed. As I said before, it is where we spend most of our time in-between incarnations on the Earth physical plane. The soul there will make their decisions as to whether they wish to transfer portions of their energy again or not and what planets they choose to go to although most will remain in Earth incarnations until the Earth experiences are completed.

Where we choose to incarnate and in what form is predicated on our spiritual evolution. There are certain experiences that one must master before moving on into the higher dimensions. All beings joyfully choose the type of body they wish to inhabit based on what experiences they wish to have while in that vehicle. Vehicles whether physical or etheric are tailored to the dynamics of the atmospheres in which they reside. Many life forms are simply not perceived by third-dimensional vibrations, therefore we would be unable to see them but they still exist and will be experienced by the soul at some point as part of its evolution.

GUILT
For this next section I want to touch upon the perceived feelings of guilt. Perceived is exactly what they are for they are manifestations of our own mind experience. It is not a good practice to use guilt to blame oneself for the events that cause us to perceive our discomfort. If a choice was made that did not achieve the desired results, then so be it. It was a learning experience and most likely we will have learned from it. Then one moves on. By allowing ourselves to feel guilty about a situation, you are again setting up a chain reaction within the framework of our body consciousness to receive more than just guilt. These thoughts express themselves into many forms of illness whether mental or physical. They will begin to manifest because we have taken away the free will or our cells and injected into them our ideas and thoughts, thus changing the healthy and happy path that we were on in creating a whole and healthy being – oneself. Thoughts of this nature alter the consciousness of our cells, which in turn will affect the abilities of our body consciousness to keep our physical vehicle healthy.

Effectively it does no good to linger in thoughts of guilt, for essentially there is no such thing anyway. Guilt is a manufactured production of our own mind/thought energy. Guilt has no purpose. Punishing oneself with guilt only locks the doors on forgiveness of self and shuts out The Creator’s light. Realize that by letting go of the feelings of guilt and changing our conscious thoughts, we will have done more good than we are aware of. The thoughts that we harbor, when inter-playing in the negative arena, only serve to suppress our own soul’s growth.

I know some of us are saying as we read this that it all sounds well and true but how can I make myself stop those ideas from manifesting themselves? Be consciously aware of them. Look at and examine the underlying reasons that we have those thoughts and feelings. examine the physical sensations within the structure of the thought and analyze it. Are there other feelings and thoughts that have also participated in the creation of these sensations? We will see that there are indeed and perhaps many of them. Much can be said about the nature of our personal thoughts since they make up the nature of our very being. Without them we would not exist. When we can examine our thoughts on an honest level we will see that we have created not only the guilt that we have been speaking about, but also a host of other feelings that in some cases are interfering with our soul’s evolution. I will be including several exercise within this blog that will help us with analyzing our thoughts and realigning our beliefs.

Our physical vehicle is a marvelous thing, a very wondrous and ingenious invention. It is for our enjoyment, for us to experience all that the Earth plane has to offer. It is not meant to be locked-up in some closet of guilt or hidden under veils of fabric. Now I’m not saying that all of us should run out and strip off all our clothes and run willy-nilly into the streets, because of our society’s rules we would probably be arrested. Use this as a metaphor to release your ego’s energy from the bondage of its perceived beliefs and open up our powers of creativity. Learn to look at your fellow man/woman with a renewed interest in his/her being. We are all part of the same Divine energy source. As we observe our behaviors we send much love to us. It is the desire of all essences of the Divine energy of The Creator to live harmoniously with each other. Enough said on this subject of guilt for now. The messages that I have brought forth here can be applied to any situation where a perceived negative emotion surfaces and we have the desire to eliminate it from our perceived reality.

NEGATIVE ENERGIES
All of the souls who made the energy transition in 9/11 knew before coming into this life that they were going to be part of a mass awakening of consciousness on the planet be experiencing that event. Their transition from their Earth existence was worked out long before they were born. These brave souls knew that this event would realign the consciousness of mankind and start the process once again of moving us forward in our stagnant evolution. Their efforts were not in vain. Many of us came into an awareness of self and our relationship with the rest of humanity after this event. Our thoughts and ideas in our present reality are manifesting into actions now that are greatly affecting our future reality. As we move further into this material I will be stressing the importance of our thoughts on our reality and what we can do to change our world for the better.

Oftentimes when mass societies fall upon times of great stress, events will take place to redirect the consciousness back towards a peaceful existence. As with plagues and wars, these events orchestrated for the evolution of mankind/womankind. Many beings must learn from these events in order to maintain an equilibrium that is beneficial to the social order of their societies. The souls of 9/11, prior to incarnating into their lives, were aware that these events were probable reality and could lead to their probable deaths although they were not consciously aware of it as they lived out their daily lives. All probable reality is based on the actualized thought forms and free will of mankind/womankind. There were many, many others that for whatever reasons did not participate in the event, even though it was a probable reality for them as well.

The terrorists as we see them, for they do terrorize humanity with their beliefs, are no different than us or  in their soul’s essence. They are still part of The Creator’s energy source, however misdirected the ego-perceptive thoughts and actions of their physical vehicles are and have been. We are all connected as one within the many Universes. I realize this is hard for many of us to accept. Anyone who terrorizes individuals or nations is under the influence of negative forces and this should be apparent to most of us what we are witnessing. This event was a wake-up call to humanity and is one of many that are still to come until the leaders of our countries can put down their nuclear weapons and other weapons of mass destruction and start to help the people of the world out if their grip of poverty, fear and suffering.

If we will only stop and look at the information that we hold as true and see that for the most part we have unconsciously and consciously accepted them as being the norm. We have become complacent with the ideas of others and that all of society is evil and out to get us. When individuals are under the influence of the negative ego energies it would appear to be so. This is only an illusion, a temporary situation in which an individual has been caught in the web of these influences. With the realization that these forces exist, one can become more aware and thus begin to keep them from clinging to our light.

In this moment of our history we are witnessing the breakdown of many institutions that we thought were untouchable and indestructible. We are being awakened to the atrocities of our world and in doing so we will be in direct confrontation with many of the darkest forces of our planet. We will see more of this crumbling of our belief systems in the near future. This is is part of the process of the evolution of Earth and its citizens. There will be many more breakdowns in society;s firmest beliefs, for many of these beliefs do not hold any truths.

All souls have a built in desire to evolve, but because they have allowed outside forces to take over they are not sure how they will accomplish this. Many of us walk around in fear and despair because we have allowed our perception of the events around us to undermine our soul’s purpose on our great Earth. I will give a very simple exercise to remove negative forces from influencing us. It is important for us to learn how filter through and remove information that comes to us. Most of us take everything we hear from our leaders and media as truth. These truths that we believe to be truths are not what they appear. We can examine all data that comes into our mind and purge out what does not give us a positive approach to life.

EXERCISE:
THE BOX
When we find ourselves fearful and thinking negative thoughts or begin bombarded by them through the dialogue of others, when we are unable to break free of the situation, I would ask, do the following: I should you create a small box, an imaginary box. You will carry this box with you wherever you go. when besieged with negative information, take the thoughts, open the box, put them in and close the lid. You may envision yourself wearing a small box around your neck or carrying it in your pocket, but each time you become aware of an onslaught of negativity and you cannot get away from it, put it in the box. Put them in there and consciously remove them from your thoughts. This works quite well with not only thoughts, but people too. You may out the image of a whole person in there to be cleansed and returned whole back into the Universe. Each time you do this, you are helping to clean up the negativity of others even though they are not consciously aware of it. Put them in there with an abundance of love, no matter what they have done to you as you see it. When this is done with love, it will transmute back into love and back to you. Now, if you find the negative thoughts or people coming back into your head or life, simply open the box and out them in again until you get good at this. It will be routine. Now the thoughts may be hatred, greed, prejudice or anything that’s coming your way. If you’re driving your car and you suddenly create a hateful or a negative thought against another stop yourself, grab the thought and put it into the box. So you see this works both ways, incoming and outgoing.

The thoughts of mankind/womankind are neutralized by the higher-dimensional beings as they float into the Universe. We do not allow our negative thoughts to interfere with the lives of other beings in other solar systems. Since thought is energy and energy cannot be destroyed, there are very effective methods of neutralizing your negative energy through the use of crystals and then returning it in the form of love-energy back to our planet. When we put our thoughts of negativity into the box we are doing the same thing. Picture the box as a deep well lined with crystals at the bottom that will capture the negative thoughts as they fall in and neutralize them. when putting a person into the box, imagine them being surrounded by the healing energies of the crystals. If we do this often enough, you will begin to notice a positive change in yourself and others.

THE CONTRACT OF LIFE WITH GOD

We are energy. All of our soul’s essence is formed of energy and that energy can never be terminated. It changes from one form to the other as we move in and out of life experiences. Our soul essence is eternal and ageless. God, Buddha, Allah, The Christ or whatever terminology We wish to use to describe the energy of The Creator, is alive in all creations and cannot be destroyed. When we think of the souls who died in 9/11 or any event for that matter, they did not really die at all, they simply moved from one form of energy to another. They are not gone, they simply have moved on in their soul’s evolution.

The physical vehicle is but a materialized form which the soul uses on the physical plane for expression and evolution. It is made and re-made many times through reincarnational journeys as the soul seeks to evolve itself. This materialized form of energy is limited to its vibrational rate within our system and appears to the human eye as solid, dense and quite real, yet in other systems it would appear quite transparent. Its energy is interchangeable and within the framework of the third dimension appears to its recipient as the basis for all life experience. Remember here that I am presenting this information as simple as possible, as there is a much greater depth to all of this, but it must be written in terms for us to understand.

Because of mankind’s and womankind’s preconceived notions of his/her physical mortality he/she has oftentimes assumed that his/her physical vehicle is all there is. The soul however, is piloting this craft and with its inherent knowledge of itself and its own wisdom it is fully capable of re-grouping its energy when faced with imminent crisis to the physical vehicle. All souls when facing a horrific death, will exit the body before the moment of impact. No soul wishes to remain during such event. When the souls have exited the body they are fully aware of the events taking place but without the physical trauma. The dimension they will reside in is very similar aspects to that of the physical plane. They are able to create any illusion they wish to remind them of their existence in the time-frame from which they just came, or from any other incarnation they they have focused their energy on.

Each time a soul incarnates into form on the physical plane, it brings with it one particle of memory from past incarnations. Upon entering another incarnational experience of Earth the majority of our soul memories are blocked so as to not interfere with our learning experience. A soul will set up prior to incarnation many probable events that it will choose to actualize into experience including the moments that would lead to a probable death of the physical form. Many of the souls of 9/11 were caught in a state of confusion, not knowing that this was the moment of their death as we perceive it. They entered the transition of their energy phase from one focused point of power to another. Since many were unprepared and the event was so sudden, some may linger around for some time trying to communicate with their loved ones. Most however will seek the light of their soul and move on.

Now let me elaborate a little but here about how manifestation of physical form transcends into the etheric form of energy thus allowing for the transition from third-dimensional reality to the astral levels during a traumatic event.

The victims of any fatal event are prevented from experiencing the great physical trauma of the event. They will be veiled from the physical environment. It is as if they have been encased in a cocoon, removed from their bodies and somewhat set to the side to view the event as if they were watching one of our television shows. In the veiling it is necessary, especially in mass events, so as to prevent the souls from experiencing the physical trauma of the event. The same occurred with the victims within the buildings. They were protected from experiencing their reality. Only the empty physical vehicle remains. The souls will vacate the body moments prior to the event. The empty physical vehicle is still able to function to some degree, but without the main consciousness directing it. It is as if one steps into another dimension temporarily and when the time is right, the soul will have an awareness of its present condition and start the process of moving towards the light and onto Astral Plane of consciousness. Of course in these events there are many guides around to ensure the transition of their energy through the Astral Plane and on to their home Astral dimension. There are many levels of the Astral planes and a soul’s home dimension is predicated on what stage of evolution the soul has evolved to through its incarnational experiences. It is here where the soul will rest and be counseled, as there is often-times some level of trauma to the soul. The soul will be showered with an abundance of love and may have to be cocooned for some period of time to rest.

Whatever is comfortable for the soul entity will be manifested by beings from the Astral dimensions to help the transition. All souls when moving out of Earth dimension will first enter into the Astral plane where they must seek the light and move through it. Many who have had near death experiences describe going through a tunnel. This is the silver cord that is connected to our solar plexus. In the dream state and often when individuals wish to travel within the Astral Plane, they are tethered to their physical vehicles by this cord. When a soul experiences the Earth death process, its energy travels through this silver cord, the energy must pass through the Astral Plane and into the light, the light of our soul’s essence. This light will guide us to the home Astral dimension of our soul’s energy where we will experience, through the use of a hologram, visions familiar to us.

There will also be other energy forms commonly referred to as guides waiting to assist us. For those of us whose light does not shine very brightly because of our actions or lack of in the life or lives that we have experienced, this may be more difficult. If we are heavily grounded in the materialistic realms of our world, we may also experience a pulling to go back to Earth. There are many souls wandering around in the Astral Planes trying to find the light. Some of them have been there for what would be centuries in Earth terms. The closer we align ourselves in this life to the Divine energies of The Creator, the brighter our light will be and the easier our transition. Often these souls have over-identified with their physical vehicles, ignoring the soul aspects of their consciousness and are now left in a state of limbo so to speak, looking for a place to go.

If we persist in identifying with the materialized form of the physical vehicle only, and ignoring the soul aspect of self, it will be harder for us when it comes our time to make the transition. We will find ourselves imprisoned in a sea of uncertainty and confusion. The situations that the deceased find themselves in will vary greatly depending on their own life experience and beliefs.

Now, as we move on, information from the soul’s memories are used to manifest images of their loved ones that have departed the Earth. This holographic matrix is where we will be greeted by the illusion of these relatives that have already made the transition. They will be on the light matrix and the recently departing soul’s energy from the Earth plane is to move towards that light. For instance, if our mother or father had already made the transition of their energy, the soul will most likely want to connect with us during our transition. The image of the mother or father will then be manifest through a holographic matrix in a form that is most familiar to the soul that is leaving the Earth plane to allow them to cross through the Astral Plane in a more comfortable fashion. It is these entities that greet the soul, but with the physical characteristics that the soul has in its most recent memories. It is important to remember that most often these are energy guides manifesting images familiar to us.

However, if our friends or relatives are not already engaged in other stages of activity, then they will manifest and greet us. I would make another clarification here if I may. The word “soul” here as it best identifies with our terms in our reality and it is meant to show us that we are independent from physical form. Our physical form or vehicle is the tool provided to us-the-soul for communication in the third dimension. It is a body and as such has its limitations, and when its life span is completed it will be returned to the energy source from which it came and trans-formed into something else.

Souls will often incarnate with the same souls over and over again and the soul will be looking for the most recent version of those souls since it is still tied very much to the Earth plane from which it has just departed. Once the soul has moved into Astral home dimension, they will then be counseled with their energy guides present and prepared for a life review. This self-examination may take, in Earth terms, many months, or many years. It usually depends on how much trauma the soul experienced, but a life review is always in order. That will take precedence over anything else after the entities have settled into the reality of their energy transition. The life review is necessary and done only with one’s spirit guides as we call them. It is a private matter. The other entities that have incarnated with the soul will not be involved in that process. During this review, the soul will then realize whether or not its contract has been fulfilled. (Use of the word contract again as a human term, it is really the choosing of a group of experiences that the soul wished to actualize and whether or not the soul was able do so. We can think of it as a theme or contract, whatever fits into human terms so that we can understand that there was a purpose for us coming to our planet.) On Earth, there are many stages of development of the consciousness and in order to evolve one must complete these stages. Now in the most simple of terms, as there is a far greater depth to all of this.

This contract is between us and The Creator and is a necessary step in our evolution as a soul. We are part of this infinite energy source. We are an extension of this energy and within the framework of our physical vehicle we are experiencing our life with The Creator’s energy light source. It would be physically impossible for the energy of All That Is to take on a body of its own because the energy is so massive that it could not manifest all of itself in the limited space of one body, nor would a body be able to withstand it. That is why souls have been created. Each soul is a spark of this vast energy source and all of its experiences are also experienced by All That Is. It is the soul’s nature and desire after perfecting itself to eventually merge with this energy source.

After we have taken a rest period for a while and have examined our life, we will then be counseled and we will study and we will learn as we have always done how to manipulate energy. We are the co-creators of our Universe and everything in it. This task is beyond our third-dimensional abilities, however eventually as we evolve we will be creators of planets and life forms. After our life review and rest period we will be given another opportunity to move on our evolutionary path.

A review through some of the many holograms of available experience will help us with these decisions. It is of our choosing however, because as an Earth plane initiate us have free will to move as close as we wish to the energy of The Creator and at our own pace.

Since there is no time outside of the Earth dimension, we may focus as many portions of our energy in whatever life experiences we wish to learn from within the evolutionary framework of our soul. The soul’s perception of this will seem to be an eternity, however all will eventually want to move forward and continue their evolution. Psychics can communicate with souls who are waiting to in their home Astral dimension. They are in transition. They are able to create whatever realities they wish in this transitional period. That dimension is quite lovely and is meant to be a reminder of Earth but with far more beauty. It is a peaceful place where souls may reflect on their lives and commune with one another. Many are quite happy there for long periods of time. This is similar to heaven that we envision in our religious belief systems, however to be in Heaven is really the merging of our consciousness with the infinite energy source of All That Is.

Souls that have committed atrocities against their fellow man/woman are not allowed into this restful Astral dimension. They will be returned to the Earth promptly, reborn to relearn. This return would be similar to our visions of hell because the soul will not be able to experience the peacefulness of its home dimension and once again experience the feeling of separation from the Creator. It would be returned to the negativity of Earth with all of its turmoil. However, the main focus of the soul between transitions is to study and learn from its experiences and move on in its evolution to higher-vibrational planets or go into service with one of the lower-vibrational planets and assist those souls in their evolution.

One must fully transcend all levels of experience in many life forms before evolving to this level. The more life experiences the soul chooses to experience and learn from, the closer it gets in moving into the higher vibration of its evolution. The Christ, Buddha, Krishna, and many more are all members of our planet’s Hierarchy and are fully capable of incarnating in self-made bodies and do not have to go through the birth/death process. These entities no longer need to experience a physical life as we know it, for they have transcended the limitations of the third dimension. These entities that have lived many lives on our planet have chosen to remain in Earth-service in this phase of their evolution. Some of these entities have already entered into our world. They have come to assist The World Teacher who has already manifested his body and is gently working among humanity to guide the beings of our planet to our new level of consciousness.

On all planets there are various levels of Hierarchy working the souls of those planets. They are all in various stages of their evolution. Our planet’s Spiritual Hierarchy is presently working to assist humanity in its evolution. These beings are associated with the various levels of spiritual development and religious beliefs of the citizens of our world. Each one is working with their groups at this time to begin the unification of consciousness and realign all of our spiritual and self into a oneness with Hierarchy and the planetary Creator. Our spiritual ignorance is what has caused so many of our problems in our world. The World Teacher is The Christ himself and this being is highly evolved. He is one of the most evolved beings associated with our planet. All of these beings were once men/women with physical bodies as we have, they are just further along on their evolutionary path. They are here to teach us at this critical time in our evolution.

Second coming of consciousness

Prepare mankind and womankind for the impending shift of consciousness on our planet and questioning our beliefs, analyzing our thoughts and opening up our minds to our greater reality. As we awaken we will be opened to a new spiritual kind of existence – a unity with the rest of mankind and womankind – and released from our spiritual slumber. A mass continuity of consciousness is about to unfold and the belief systems of the world are in the dawn of an unprecedented historical change.


The Christ trilogy Paul or Saul as he was also known. Saul and the Jesus Entity Spiritual Hierarchy and are teaching among us along with several others. However, due to certain systems of probabilities on our planet, The Christ Entity himself has also emerged in our world today as a man. This personality will form a new psychic entity. The entity is now preparing to emerge fully into our world as prophesied as the “Second Coming” of the Christian religion.

That entity will not be coming at the end of our world as we have greatly distorted it, but to guide humanity in our world now. He has returned to set up a new system of thought, to reawaken humanity to its relationships with each other and to realign Christianity as it has greatly distorted the spiritual ideas that were originally to be implemented for the evolution of humanity. He has come into our world as a world Teacher and with him he brings many members of our planet’s Hierarchy that will help in the restructuring of our world. He comes as a multi-dimensional personality and will not be oriented in terms of one sex, one color or one race. He will manifest himself at will in many different forms thus exhibiting the multidimensional nature of his being. He will clearly reveal methods enabling each individual to be intimately in contact with their own being and that of the Creator. He will be guiding humanity to use those inner senses of their true spiritual nature and recognize the multidimensional nature of their reality.

As humans evolve our awareness, we will be confronted with our actions and memories of all our lives. A great realignment of the relationship with our souls and with each other will be revealed to all. This is happening now and he will soon emerge publicly and reveal himself.

Fear-Driven energies have been taken for granted

Human beings have been reluctant over he centuries to tune into the telepathically transmitted information that is being given to them. We have essentially put on our cosmic blinders in favor of old superstitious ways. The fear of the unknown has kept their awareness locked in the dark recesses of our minds, pushed aside like leaves on the pathway. We choose to ignore many of the messages that would enable us to complete our soul’s evolution. Locked in the grip of fear and anger we flounder around like a fish out of water looking for answers to our dilemma. We are besieged with an abundance of negative stimuli from media. We are then flocking like geese to the nearest psychoanalyst to explain to us why we feel the way we do.

Often we are given prescriptions for a variety of medications and sent on our way. In this great mass of circular logic we rotate in and out of our perceived dilemma until the overload of our behavior finally gets the best of us through disease or illness – as is quite fashionable these days – to label these anomalies with syndromes of every type imaginable. Then the patient walks out of the medical office with the assumption that he or she has a justifiable condition and therefore can again push aside the inner voices of our consciousness for a more narrow-minded answer to our problems. We can then continue on our self-destructive path and be fully justified in doing so. We no longer have to confront our behavior and its source.

We merrily take our pills and go on about our daily business. Meanwhile our symptoms once again are pushed aside. This endless circle of behavior eventually catches up to us and we find ourselves with another physical malady and so it goes, on and on, one episode after the other. The disturbed energies of fear-driven society have been taken for granted in our everyday life The majority tenaciously cling to these ideas and refuse to accept any other explanations that are not grounded in scientific beliefs.

THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD-TRUTH

Now briefly, our world is in the middle of the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. In our U.S.A. and other countries we risk succumbing to the forces of hatred and totalitarianism. As our election will again demonstrate, the system is broken. The will of the people is subverted. It will take action on the part of many millions of us in the West to turn the tide. We do not have the numbers yet because we are complacent and afraid. But as the media gradually begin to present truthful stories for all to read, our numbers will grow. Act now to help make it happen. Participate in our community to encourage the truthful representation of reality within our media and within our communities.

The Consensus Reality Field is our term for the broader field of Reality Creation of which we are a part by virtue of our individually created world. Our Personal Reality Field serves us well within our niche in our environment. It is “tailor made” according to our specifics, both conscious and unconscious. Now the broader field of Reality Creation may be thought of as comprising, for example, our neighborhood, our city, our state, our country, our hemisphere and finally our world – the Planet Earth.

Love and Light are Knowledge

Many of us have adopted destructive sets of beliefs, lives filled with ego-gratification, greed and selfishness. This however is not the soul’s true nature. If left alone without all of the negative stimuli, the soul would return to a peaceful hum that it has always known. Mankind and womankind would be in sync with Mother Earth and the rest of the planetary life that dwells in our dimension. If we would learn to surround ourselves with The Creator’s light and energy, we would essentially be able to eradicate the constant barrage of fears that have surrounded us. Love and light, which is knowledge, are the only things that are needed to free us from our path of self-destruction. They will dissolve the layers of negativity like acid on ripe fruit and release our soul’s essence from its spiritual slumber. The soul’s essence of each and every one us is trying to pry itself free from the grip of the negative energies surrounding our existence.

As we perceive our reality as something that We have created, then we can and will change it for the better. To find oneself, one must look within, for within lies the perfection of God and the Universe that it ultimately – US. Eventually all of us will see the light, if not now then later. For the entities that refuse to evolve and continue on their greedy, self-centered path with no regard for their fellow man, we may find oneself removed from the humming rhythms of the evolving Earth’s move into the peaceful fourth dimension and assigned to one of the lower-vibrational, two-dimensional planets until such time as our soul yearns to move towards the light and be cleansed. Like a stone encased inside a mountain, there we will sit and wait until we have had enough time to seek the love light.

Many of us have already been awakened from our spiritual slumber and are diligently participating in moving the rest of mankind and womankind into the arenas of awareness. Now when I am referring to negative influences or energies, I would clarify here what I am attempting to convey. It is with respect to our ability to allow our ego’s desires to control our vehicle instead of our soul’s light, as the soul only knows its light and love. It also refers to certain energies in and around our planet that do not serve to evolve with the plan of The Creator.

Now I am not trying to be gloom and doom here, for those entities that are relinquished to this dimension do not in any way reflect the majority of us. Most of us will start soon to get the messages and move towards the light. However, for those of us who persist in the cat-and-mouse game of dominating everyone and everything on the planet, our evolution will not be forthcoming as swiftly as the rest of our planet’s citizens and we may be left behind. I have spoken before about how we can change our reality with our thoughts. Since our reality IS our thoughts, this will not be hard to do.

The unknown appears invisible because we do not accept it in our prime series of events

It is as if we had trained ourselves to respond to red lights and to ignore green ones–or as if we read only every third or fourth line on a page of a book.

We attend to matters that seem to have practical value. whether or not we understand what space is, we move through it easily. We do not calculate how many steps it takes to cross a room, for instance. We do not need to understand the properties of space in scientific terms, in order to use it very well. We can see ourselves operate in space, however; to that extent it is known quality, apparent to the senses. Our practical locomotion is involved with it so we recognize it. Its mysterious or less-known properties scarcely concern us.

We move through probabilities in much the same way that we navigate in space. As we do not consciously bother with all of the calculations necessary in the process of walking down the street, so we also ignore the mechanisms that involve motion through probable realities. We manipulate through probabilities so smoothly, in fact, and with such finesse, that we seldom catch oneself in the act of changing our course from one probability to another.

see4

Take a very simple action: You stand at a corner, wondering which direction to take. there are four streets involved. You briefly consider streets One and two, but rather quickly decide against them. You stand for a moment longer, gazing down Street Three, taking in the visual area. You are somewhat attracted, and imagine yourself taking that course. Your imagination places you there momentarily. Inner data is immediately aroused through conscious and unconscious association. Perhaps you are aware of a few memories that dimly come to mind. One house might remind you of one a relative lived in years ago. A three might be reminiscent of one that grew by your family home. But in that instant, inner computations occur as you consider making a fairly simple decision, and the immediate area is checked against all portions of your knowledge.

You then look at Street Four. The same process happens again, this area also takes your attention. At the same time you almost equally hold in you mind the image of Street Three, for you can see them both at once from this intersection.

ccuujgyh

Let us say that you are almost equally attracted to both courses. You teeter between probabilities, having the full power to choose one street or the other as physical experience. If you had to stand there and write down all the thoughts and associations connected with each course of action before you made your decision, you might never cross the intersection to begin with. You might be hit by an automobile as you stood there, lost in your musings.

In the same way, it would take you some time to even walk from a table to a chair if you had to be consciously aware of all of the nerves and muscles that must first be activated. But while you stand almost equally attracted by streets Three and Four, then you send out mental and psychic energy in those directions.

hthbath

Past association merge with present reality and form a pattern. Mentally, a part of you actually starts out upon each street–a projected mental image. As you stand there, then, in this case two such projected images go out onto streets Three and Four. To some extent these images experience “what will happen” if you yourself take one direction or the other. That information is returned to you instantaneously, and you make your decision accordingly. Say you choose Street Four. Physically you begin to walk in the direction. Street Four becomes your physical reality. You accept that experiences in your prime sequence of events. You have, however, already sent out an energized mental image of your self into Street Three, and you cannot withdraw that energy.

The portion of your that was attracted to that route continues to travel it. At the point of decision this alternate self made a different conclusion: that it experience Street Three; as physical reality. The self as you think of it is literally reborn in each instant, following an infinite number of events from the one official series of events that you recognize at any given “time.”

ijkh

There is something highly important here concerning our technological civilization: As our world becomes more complicated, in those terms, we increase the number of probable actions practically available. The number of decisions multiples. You can physically move from one place on the planet to another with relative ease. Centuries ago, ordinary people did not have the opportunity to travel from one country to another with such rapidity. As space becomes “smaller,” our probabilities grow with in complexity. Our consciousness handles far more space data now.(In terms of time.) Watching TV, we are aware of events that occur on the other side of the earth, so our consciousness necessarily becomes less parochial. As this has happened the whole matter of probabilities has begun to assume a more practical cast. Civilizations are locked one into the other. Politicians try to predict what other governments will do. Ordinary people try to predict what their governments might do.

More and more, we are beginning to deal with probabilities as we try to ascertain which of a number of probable events might physically occur. When the question of probabilities is a practical one, then scientists will give it more consideration.

hull

The entire subject is very important, however. As far as a true psychology is concerned, individuals who are made aware of the existence of probable realities will no longer feel trapped by events. Our consciousness is at a point where it is beginning to understand the significance of “predictive action”–and predictive action always involves probabilities.

I certain terms, we are the recognized “result” of all of the decisions we have made up to this point in our life. That is the official “I”. We are in no way diminished because other quite-as-official selves are “offshoots” of our own experience, making the choices we did not make, and choosing, then, alternate versions of reality.

itnds

We follow the prime series of events that you recognize as our own, yet all of us are concerned. These are not just esoteric statements, but valid clues about the nature of our own behavior, meant to give us a sense of our own freedom, and to emphasize the importance of our choice.

Cave, camp, and open fires

An open fire elicits certain responses from the cells that for instance, a furnace does not. The effect of the light plus the warmth on the skin is extremely healing. People sit by a fireplace in wintertime because it is unconsciously recognized that recuperative and therapeutic results occur. Simply put, the cells respond to fire-light in somewhat the same manner that flowers do to sunlight. The stimulation is much more than skin deep, however, and an open fire is cleansing. It even helps clear the blood.

Cavemen recognized this. I am not suggesting that we use our fireplaces instead of the furnace. I am saying that in wintertime there are definite health-value effects to be felt when we sit in front of an open fire. Two evenings a week would be quite effective.

The proximity of so many trees also has considerable health value, and to those doing psychic or other creative work the effects are particularly conducive to a peaceful state of mind. Trees are great users and yet conservators of energy, and they automatically provide much vitality to areas in which they are plentiful. This is physically obvious in scientific terms. Besides that, however, the consciousnesses of trees are remarkably kind and enduring.

We think of dogs as friends of man, and we personify gods in human terms. We think of them sometimes as guardians. In those terms, now, trees are also guardians. They are attached to the people they know. You cannot put a leash on them and walk them around the block, yet trees form a protective barrier about, say, a home or a neighborhood. They are actively concerned. They have personalities–certainly to the same extent that dogs do, yet of an entirely different nature. They respond to us. The trees in a neighborhood are particularly friendly, strong, and protective, and they will help renew our energies.

The air may be drier in a certain way. Ocean air is wet but it is healthy. River air is wet, but it may be healthy or unhealthy, according to the nature of the river, the land, and the attitude of the people. After a flood, the river air is felt to be a threat, and to many it is therefore unhealthy. Why do some people, after being flooded in one location, then move to another equally threatening environment.

The “Borledim” family deals parenthood.

These people are natural “earth parents.” That is they have the capacity to produce children who from a certain standpoint possess certain excellent characteristics. The children have brilliant minds, healthy bodies, and strong clear emotions.

While many people are working in specific areas, developing the intellect, for example, or the emotions of the body, these parents and their children produce offspring in which a fine balance is maintained. No one aspect of mind or body is developed at the expense of another aspect.

The personalities possess a keen resiliency of both body and mind, and serve as a strong earth stock. It goes without saying that members of one family often marry into other families. Of course the same thing happens here. When this occurs new stability in inserted for this particular family acts as a source-stock, providing physical and mental strength. Physically speaking, these people often have many children, and usually the offspring do well in whatever area of life is chosen. Biologically speaking, they possess certain qualities that nullify “negative” codes in the genes. They are usually very healthy people, and marriage into this group can automatically end generations of so-called inherited weaknesses.

These people (The Borledim) believe, then, in the natural goodness of sex, the body, and the family unit–however those attributes are understood in the physical society to which they belong. As a rule they possess an enchanting spontaneity, however, and all of their creative abilities go into the family group and the production of children. These are not rigid parents, though, blindly following conventions, but people who see family life as a fine living creative art, and children as masterpieces in flesh and blood. Far from devouring their offspring by an excess of overprotective care, they joyfully send their children out into the world, knowing that in their terms the masterpieces must complete themselves, and that they have helped with the under-painting.

The Borledim are the stock that so far has always seen to it that our species continues despite catastrophes, and they are more or less equally distributed about the planet and in all nationalities. They are most like Sumari. They will usually seek fairly stable political situations in which to bear their children, as the Sumari will to produce art. They demand a certain amount of freedom for their children, however, and while they are not political activists, like the Sumari their ideas often spring to prominence before large social changes, and help initiate them. The one big difference is that the Sumari deal primarily with creativity and the arts, an often subordinate family life, while family thinks of offspring in the terms of living art; everything else is subordinated to that “ideal.”

The Sumari often provide a cultural, spiritual, or artistic heritage for the species. This Borledim family provides a well-balanced earth stock a heritage in terms of individuals. These people are kind, humorous, playful, filled with a lively compassion, but too wise for the “perverted” kind of compassion that breeds on other individuals weaknesses.

An Artist expects his paintings to be good, or, at least he or she should. These people expect their children to be well-balanced, healthy, spiritually keen, and so they are. We will find members of the Borledim family in almost any occupation, but the main consideration will be on the physical family unit.

These parents do not sacrifice themselves for the sake of their children. They understand too well the burden that is placed upon such offspring. Instead, the parents retain their own clear sense of identity and their individual characteristics, serving as clear examples to the children of loving, independent adults.

The “Zuli” Family IS INVOLVED WITH THE FULFILLMENT OF BODILY ACTIVITY.

These are the athletes. In whatever field, they devote themselves to perfecting the capacities of the body, which in others usually lie latent.

 

 

To some extent they serve as physical models. The vitality of creature-hood is demonstrated through the beauty, speed, elegance, and performance of the body itself. To some extent these people are perfectionists, and in their activities there are always hints of “super” achievement, as if even physically the species tries to go beyond itself. The members of this family actually serve to point out the unrealized capacity of the flesh–even as, for example, great Sumari artists might give clues as to the artistic abilities inherent, but not used, in the species as a whole. The members of this group deal, then, in performance. They are physical doers. They are also lovers of beauty as it is corporeally expressed.

Members of this (Zuli) family can often serve as models for the artist or the writer, but generally speaking they themselves transmit their energy through physical “arts” and performance. In our terms only, and historically speaking, they often appeared at the beginnings of civilizations, where direct physical bodily manipulation within the environment was of supreme importance. Then, normal physical reactions were simply faster then they are now, even while normal body relaxation was deeper and more complete.

The “Milumet family of mystics

Almost all of their energy is directed in an inward fashion, with no regard as to whether or not inner experience is translated in usual terms. These persons, for instance, may be utterly unknown, and usually are, for as a rule they care not a bit about explaining their interior activities to others nor, for that matter, even to themselves. They are true innocents, and spiritual. They may be underdeveloped intellectually, by recognized standards, but this is simply because they do not direct their intellect to physical focus.

Those belonging to this (Milumet) family will not be in positions of any authority, generally speaking, for they will not concentrate that long on specific physical data. However, they may be found in our country precisely where we might not expect them to be: on some assembly lines that require simple repetitive action–in factories that do not required speed, however. They usually choose less industrialized countries, then, with a slower pace of life. They have simple, direct, childish mannerisms, and may appear to be stupid. They do not bother with the conventions.

Strangely enough, though, they may be excellent parents, particularly in less complicated societies than our own. In our terms, they are primitives wherever they appear. Yet they are deeply involved in nature, and in that respect they are more highly attuned psychically than most other people are.

Their private experiences are often of a most venturesome kind, and at that level they help nourish the psyche of mankind.

The VOID Family

They have excellent precognitive abilities, which of course means that at least unconsciously they understand the motion of probabilities. They can work in any field. In our terms it is as if they perceive the future motion or direction of an idea, a concept, or a structure. They then work with all of their minds to bring the probability into physical reality.

In conventional terms they may appear to be great activists and revolutionaries, or they may seem to be impractical dreamers. They will be possessed by an idea of change and alteration, and will feel, at least, driven or compelled to make the idea a reality. They perform a very creative service as a rule, for social and political organizations can often become stagnant, and no longer serve the purposes of the large masses of people involved. Members of this (Void) family may also initiate religious revolutions, of course. As a rule, however, they have one purpose in mind: to change the status quo in whatever the area of primary interest.

It is already easy to see how the purpose of various families can inter-mesh, complement each other, and also conflict. Yet all in all, almost, they operate as systems of creative checks and balances.

Life is far from Inflexible

Returning to alternate compositions, we can at any time bring into our own life-composition elements from and “alternate” ones.
Some people structure their lives around their children, others around a career, or pleasure, or even pain. These are simply certain focuses that we choose, that direct our experience. We can add other focuses while still retaining our own identity–indeed, enriching it.

Sometimes we act as though one ability contradicts another. We think “I cannot be a good parent and a sexual partner to my mate at the same time.” To those who feel this way a definite contradiction seems implied. A woman might feel that the qualities of a mother almost stand in opposition to those of an exuberant sex mate at the same time.” To those who feel this way a definite contradictions seems implied. A woman might feel that the qualities of a mother almost stand in opposition to those of an exuberant sex mate. A man might imagine that fatherhood meant providing an excellent home and income. He might think that “aggressiveness,” competition, and emotional aloofness were required to perform that role. These would be considered in opposition to the qualities of love, understanding, and emotional support “required” of a husband. In actuality, of course, no such contradiction apply. In the same way, however, we often seem to feel that our identity is dependent upon a certain highly specific role, until other qualities quite out own seem threatening. They almost seem to be un-selflike.

To some degree we feel the same way when we encounter the concept of probable selves, or of counterparts. It is as though we had an unlimited bank of abilities and characteristics from which to draw, and yet were afraid of doing so–fearing that any addiction could make us less instead of more. If all of this goes on personally as we choose one melody and call it oneself, then perhaps we can begin to see the mass creative aspects in terms of civilizations that seem to rise and fall.

Apple Awareness

An apple can be red round, weigh so much, be good to eat, sit in a basket, but be natural on a tree. It can be tart or sweet. We can find one on the ground, or on the table, or in a pie. None of these things are contradictory to the nature of an apple. We do not ask: “How can an apple have color and be round at the same time?”


We can look at an apple and hold it in our hands, so it is obvious that its shape does not contradict its color. We see that an apple can be red or green or both. If I said: “Apples sit quietly on a table,” we would have to agree that such is sometimes the case. If I said: “Apples roll down grassy inclines,” we would again be forced to concede the point. It would be clear to us that none of these statements contradicted each other, for in different circumstances apples behave differently.
So far, we not hold our consciousness in our hand, however. When I speak of the behavior of our psyche, then, we may wonder: “How can my psyche exist in more than one time at once?” It can do this just as an apples can be found on a table or on the ground or on the tree.

The inside dimensions of consciousness cannot be so easily described, however. If we ask: How can I have reincarnational and probable selves at once?” , we are asking a question comparable to: “How can an apple have color and be round at the same time?”

Following this analogy, in the same way each psyche contains within it infinite notes, and each note is capable of its own endless creative variations. We follow one melody or oneself, and for some reason we seem to think that the true, full orchestra of oneself will some how drown us out.

Apple

When speaking in terms of counterparts, then, or reincarnational selves and probable selves, in the true symphony of our being we are violins, oboes, cymbals, harps–in other words, we are living instrument through, which we play oneself. We are not an instrument upon which we are played. We are the composer and the symphony. We play ballads, classical pieces, lyrics, operas. One creative performance does not contradict the others.

Healers

This does not mean that these people may not be creative, or organizers, or teachers, such as those who have completed advanced yoga teacher training courses and learned about the benefits of yoga and its potential healing powers. But, it potentially means that the primary slant of their consciousness will be directed to healing. We might find them as doctors and nurses, while not usually as hospital administrators. However, they may be psychics, social workers, psychologists, artists, or in the religions. They may work at flowers shops. They may work on assembly lines, for that matter, but if so they will be healers by intent or temperament. If you’re looking into metaphysical healing powers for weight loss you could possibly check that site out for acupressure healing properties. I wish you well on getting to the weight you wish to!

I mention various professions or occupations to give clear examples, but a mechanic may belong to this Tumold group, or to any group. In this case the mechanic would have a healing effect on the customers, and he would fixing more than cars.

The healers might also appear as politicians, however, psychically healing the wounds of the nation. An artist of any kind, whose work is primarily meant to help, also belongs in this category. We will find some heads of state, and –particular in the past–some members of royal families who also belong to this group.

Sumari

To one extent or another, each family of consciousness carries within it the characteristics inherent in all families. There is, therefore, great diversity.

The Sumari abilities are highly creative ones, however. To a large extent they have been inhibited in our society. Each person can recognize his or her degree of Sumariness. The playful, creative elements of personality can then be released.These qualities are particularly important as they add to, temper, or enhance the primary characteristics of the other families of consciousness.

If you are a “reformer,” a “reformer by nature,” then the Sumari characteristics, brought to the surface, could help you temper your seriousness with play and humor, and actually assist you in achieving your reforms far easier then otherwise. Each personality carries traces of other characteristics besides those of the family of consciousness to which he or she might belong. The creative aspects of the Sumari can be particularly useful if those aspects are encouraged in any personality, simply because their inventive nature throws light on all elements of experience.

The psyche as we know it, then, is composed of a mixture of these families of consciousness. One is not superior to the others. They are just different, and they represent various ways of looking at physical life. The existence of psychic groupings, and the difference between probable and reincarnational selves, counterparts and families of consciousness. At times contradictions may seem to exist. We may wonder how we are us in the midst of such multitudinous psychic “variations.”

Families Of Consciousness

As our brothers or sisters might belong to the same physical family, so generally are us and our counterparts part of the same psychic group of consciousness. Remember that these psychic groups are like natural formations into which consciousness seems to flow. Our own interests, desires, and abilities are not predetermined by our membership in a given psychic family.

For example, we are not creatively playful because we are “Sumari” Instead, we join the Sumari grouping because we are creatively playful. The groupings of consciousness, then, are not to be equated with say, astrological houses.

Taking the Sumari as an example, there can be overly intent, ponderous, or simple dour Sumari who have not learned to use their creativity graciously, or with joy. Yet that joyful use of ability will be their intent. At particular periods of history, in our terms, different families may predominate.

The psychic groups, however, overlap physical and national ones. The Sumari are extremely independent, for instance, and as a rule we will not find them born into countries with dictatorships. When they do so appear, their work may set a spark that brings about changes, but they seldom take joint political action. Their creativity is very threatening to such a society.

However, the Sumari are practical in that they bring creative visions into physical reality, and try to live their lives accordingly. They are initiators, yet they make little attempt to preserve organizations, even ones they feel to be fairly beneficial. They are not lawbreakers by design or intent. They are not reformers in the society or culture. they are given to art, but in its broadest sense, trying to make an “art” of living, for example. They have been a part of most civilization, though they appeared in the Middle ages (A.D.476- A.D. 1450) least of all. They often come to full strength before great social changes. Others might build social structures from their work, for example, but the Sumari themselves, while pleased, will usually not be able to feel any intuitive sense of belonging with any structured group.

There is no correlation between the families of consciousness and bodily characteristics, however, many of the Sumari choose to be born in the springtime, but all those born in the spring are not Sumari, and no general rule applies there. They also have a liking for certain races, but again no specific rules apply. Many of the Irish, the Jews, the Spanish, and some lesser numbers of the French, for instance, are Sumari–though they appear in all races.

Generally speaking, America has not been a Sumari nation, nor have the Scandinavian countries or England. Psychically speaking, the Sumari often very nicely arrange existences in which they are a minority–in a democracy, say, so that they can work at their art within a fairly stable political situation. They are not interested in government, yet they do rely upon it to that extent. They are apt to be self-reliant within that framework. Their recognized artistic abilities may predominate or be fairly minimal.

Sumari is a state of mind, a slant of being. They are not fighters, nor will they generally advocate a violent overthrow of government or mores. They believe in the creativity of change, naturally occurring

Nevertheless, they are often part of the cultural underground simply because they are seldom conformers. A Sumari is very uncomfortable as a member of any large commercial venture, particularly if the work involves habitual or boring routine. They are not happy on assembly lines. They like to play with details– or to use them for creative purposes. They often go from one job or profession to another for that reason.

If we begin to look into the nature of oneself, and feel intuitively that we are  a Sumari, then we should look for a position in which we can use our inventiveness. Sumari enjoy theoretical mathematics, for example, yet make miserable bookkeepers.

In the arts, Picasso was a Sumari. Many entertainers are Sumari. We seldom find then in politics. They are not usually historians.

There are few with any position within organized religions. Because of their feelings of self-reliance, however, we can find them as farmers, working intuitively with the land. They are equally divided between the sexes. In our society, whoever, Sumari qualities in the male have until lately been frowned upon to some degree.

Transmitted Thought

There are no duplicates. Yet, we may say, are not some thoughts duplicates?  The variations may indeed be slight, but variations are always present. A thought transmitted knowingly or unknowingly by A. is not precisely the same thought when it reaches receiver B.

The thought originally held by A. is still retained by A., yet a seemingly identical thought reaches B. A. has lost nothing. That is, in trying to send the thought, in trying to duplicate the thought, A. still retains it. So what is passed on to receiver B.? This is rather important, since an explanation will do much to account for the frequent difference that occurs in telepathic communications.

Whether or not- A. the sender, knowingly transmits this apparent duplicate, at the point of its transmission, the sender forms an electrical impulse pattern that is supposed to duplicate the original thought. But no such identical duplication is possible, as far as I know, within reality of any kind.

A side note: identical twins are hardly identical, for example.

As soon as the attempt is made to duplicate the thought, we find the attempt itself strains and pulls; the impulse changes minutely, or to a greater degree. The point I want to make is that any attempt at duplication actually forces the thought it is already a new thought, bearing great resemblance to the original. But it is not the original thought.

Prime identities cannot be duplicated. Exact duplication is always an effect of insufficient knowledge. In some cases two thoughts may appear identical, but whether or not examination can show it, such exact duplication is impossible. Now when receiver B. receives a transmitted thought, he may react and interpret that part of the thought that is similar to the original.

He or she may , on the other hand, react to and interpret that portion of the thought that is not similar. He or she may react to and interpret the similarity of the difference. His or her reactions depend upon several circumstances, including the intensity of the electrical pulsations that compose the thought, and his or her own inner facility in reaching to particular ranges of intensities.

Habitually, individuals establish overall frequencies that they are able to handle, for various reasons. An individual will therefore feel more at home operating within certain frequencies. The original thought is used as a pattern for the creation of a new electrical reality which may or may not be directed at any given receiver. It is obvious that the attempt to duplicate is present: were it not for this attempt to duplicate, then there would be little similarity between any separate identities.

The nature of the thought that is received by B. is determined by many factors. We shall consider but a few of these. These include the original intensity of the thought as A. ; the familiarity or unfamiliarity of the range of frequencies that compose the thought to any intended receiver.

The receiver will understand and interpret in general the intensity range he is in the habit of using himself. Some, or a portion of the transmitted thought, may fall within his range and some may not. He or she may pick up the portions of the thought which are similar to the original thought which are similar to the original thought, in which case some scientific proof of sorts can be achieved. It can happen, however, that the dissimilarity is what falls within his or her particular accustomed range, in which case proof will be inadequate.

Emotions also possess an electrical reality. Thoughts formed and sent out within the impulse range of emotion often succeed because of the peculiar nature of the emotional electrical impulses themselves. They have a particularly strong electrical mass. They also usually fall within powerful intensities, for reasons. Thoughts formed under a strong emotional impetus will carry greater vividness, have a greater tendency toward duplication, and are apt to be interpreted with some success.

Also, all individuals have had familiarity with emotions as they exist within electrical intensities, and are accustomed to reacting to them. The whole process in instantaneous. However, the thought which is now an approximation of the original thought is changed once more by the receiver himself or herself. He or she does not actually interpret the thought itself. He or she interpret the thought itself. He or she interprets its meaning and forms a new thought identity.

Action, the very action of transmission, alters the nature and electrical reality of the thought itself.

Our imaginary sender A. does not transmit a given thought. He or she does not even send an exact duplicate. Nor does the receiver receive the thought in the same condition. The original thought is retained by A. A. forms a thought as nearly identical as possibilities allow it to be. This he or she transmits to B. But B. can’t receive the thought in its present condition, for the action of receiving a thought also changes it. He or she forms a thought as nearly identical as possible for him and interprets it.

Action can never be considered apart from that which is seemingly acted upon, for action becomes part of structure. Action begins from within and is a result of inner vitality inherent in all realities. Action is not alone. It is not an identity. ACTION IS A DIMENSION OF EXISTENCE.

PETTY WARS

Those wars still to be fought are but dim memories, once vital but lost as nightmares in greater awakenings.

A nostalgic memory for lives come and gone, as we might for fond dreams barely recalled. They represent a present unique beyond telling, alive  in each consciousness, more important than we recognize. There are no real rules to be followed that will bring us into such an encounter with the present moment of reality–only a trust in the nature of our being. And that trust is within us whether or not we recognize it, for it gives us our present experience; and no matter how our mind questions, it rides securely in the great creativity of the soul.

That soul constantly creates the body, and each individual on the face of the earth at any given time places his or her trust in that reality. That feeling of certainty is the same that any plant knows. Any idea, creative insight, or dream, rides upon the same sure thrust.

In Every Place And Every Time, Terms Of Being Are The Same

They bring forth the greater comprehension of each self, or itself. For lives come and gone, as we might for fond dreams barely be recalled.

They represent a present unique beyond telling, alive in each consciousness, more important than we recognize. There are no real rules to be followed that will bring us into such an encounter with the present moment of reality – only a trust in the nature of our being. And that trust is within us whether or not we recognize it, for it gives us our present experience; and no matter how our mind questions, it rides security in the real creativity of the soul.

That soul constantly creates the body, and each individual on the face of the earth at any given time places his or her trust in that reality. That feeling of certainty is the same that any plant knows. Any idea, creative insight, or dream, rides upon the same sure thrust

THOSE OF US

Those of us who do not believe in war have not experienced it. It may have surrounded us, but we did not experience it. Those of us do not believe in greed have not suffered its “consequences.” If we still see it is because it is a part of our reality. If we are honestly not greedy, yet we see greed, then perhaps we are serving as an example to others–but we form our own reality.

There are more worlds than you suppose, and in our own private experience each of us contributes to the world that we know. We and our counterparts together form it. Our physical body alone is equipped to perceive far more than we presently allow it to. Physically we are a part of every  other person upon the earth, and we have a connection with each leaf and frog and nail.

 

We choose the city or state or country in which we live. No one forces us to stay here unless we are looking for an excuse to remain. So we choose psychic land of another as we can journey into other parts of the physical world. Some great travelers never left the country of their birth.

Michelangelo roamed the centuries, picking up visions and ideas as others might buy postcards, journeying from one country to a foreign land. His genius shows us what we are, and yet it is but a hint of the potential with which our species is endowed.

In the light of such ideals, surely seem wanting–yet our reality is one in which the greatest freedoms have been allowed. This means that we have given ourselves full range so that all probabilities could be explored, and none left out that were physically feasible.

This species gave itself no “preordained” taboos.

 

If the infinite ranges possible to human capabilities would be explored–and those who chose that route said, “we will trust that our creativity will find its own way, and if there are nightmares we will waken from them. We will even learn from them. We will dare to push aside the dimensions of being into those our humanity have its meaning. And through the compassion that we have learned, will we be able to understand the divine errors that gave us the gift of our birth. Souls and molecules each are learning, each are forming realities, each are a part of a divinity in which each counterpart has a part to play.

Humans Are Not The Master Of Creation

He or she is simply their creator, and he or her creates because he or she does not attempt to control.

When we try to control power or people, we always copy. To some extent the world copies itself, in that there are patterns. Those patterns are always changed to one extent or another, so that no object is ever a copy of another–though it may appear to be the same.

In our terms, the world is intensely different from one moment to another, with each smallest portion of consciousness choosing its reality from a field of infinite probabilities. Immense calculations, far beyond our conscious decisions as we think of them, are probable only because of the unutterable freedom that resides within minute worlds inside our skull– patterns of interrelationships, counterparts so cunningly woven that each is unique, freewheeling, and involved in an infinite cooperative venture so powerful that the atoms stay in certain forms, and the same stars shine in the sky.

The familiar and strange are intimately connected in our most obvious, our simplest utterance. We are surrounded by miracles. Why, then, does the world so often seem sour and cruel? Why do our fellow beings, sometimes seem like unfeeling monsters–Frankenstein not of body but of mind, spiritual idiots, ignorant of any heritage of love or truth or even graceful beast-hood? Why does it seem to many of us that the race, the species, is doomed? Why do some of us feel, in our quiet moments, such a sentence just?

We make our own reality.

The Properties Of the Soul and Body

We do not understand the of properties the soul or body, yet the body was given to us so that we could learn from it. The properties of the physical and  the earth are meant to lead us into the nature of the soul. We create physical reality, yet without knowing how we do , so that the wondrous structure of the earth itself is meant to lead us to question our own source. Nature as we understand it is meant to be our teacher. We are not its master.

 

Contents Of Consciousness

To some extent we realize that the world has physical contents, existing at one time yet varying in their characteristics. In those terms, the world is composed of its physical ingredients. That “package” is the only part of the picture that we see, however.

Psychically, our world is composed of the contents of its consciousness. We have maps or continents and oceans, and in the entire view each portion is like a piece of a jigsaw puzzle, all fitting together perfectly, smoothly flowing into the natural structure of the world. So at any given time there is a world consciousness, a perfect jigsaw of awareness in which each identity, however large or small, has its part.

There are earthquakes that erupt physically, and tracings are made of them. There are also inner earthquakes of consciousness from which the physical ones emerge–storms of mind or being, eruptions in which one segment of the world consciousness, repressed in one area , explodes in another.

If we could orbit our planet in a different kind of craft, we could view the psychic content of the world, seeing the world consciousness shining far more brilliantly than any lighted city. We could spot the point of intense activity, see the birth of new myths and the death of old ones as certainly as we might be able to see a mountain slide or a tidal wave. The physical portions of the earth are all related. So does consciousness form its own kind of inner structures from which, the physical ones emerge. We are indeed counterparts, then, each of the other. Yet as there is great variety to physical form, so counterparts follow a still more expansive inner freedom that finds an even greater diversity of characteristics.

A Group Selves Form The Soul

I am not telling you that each if us do not have a soul to call our own. We are a part of our soul. It belongs to you, and you to it.

Memories exist as patterns. In this life, each of us come together and part, come together and part again, forming a counterpart relationship when it suits our purposes, as streams of consciousness mix and merge, and then separate.

These counterparts are psychic, relationships, formations that in the deepest terms flow into historic time and out of it. Some, in our terms, last a lifetime. Others represent psychic encounters that happens between two individuals at several points, say, but are not continuous. They may be no less intense, however.

The Species Of Consciousness

It is up to us to discover to which one we belong. In any group the relationships indicate inner realizations and connections. The realities appear in each of our lives.

Now any group will show interrelationships. We can see then for ourselves. There is great diversity within the family of consciousness, as there is within any physical race, and there is also great variety within other psychic families.

 

We choose to be born in a particular physical family, however, with our brothers and sisters, or as an only child. So, generally speaking, our counterparts are born in the same psychic family.

Now categories do not come first. Our individuality comes first. We have certain characteristics of our own. These place us in a certain position. As we are not a rock or a mineral, but a person, so our individuality places us in a particular family or species of consciousness. This represents our overall viewpoint of reality.

 

We like to be an initiator or a follower or a nourisher. We like to create variations on old systems, or we like to create new ones. We like to deal primarily with healing, or with information, or with physical data. We like to deal with sight, or sound, with dreams, or with translating inner data into the working psychic material of our society. So we choose a certain focus, as we choose ahead of time our physical family.

Psychic Family Members

One might be the upstart, another the perfect achiever. Psychologists now often try to deal with the family as a whole, by allowing the different members to see how they may be exaggerating certain tendencies at the expense of others. Often, families that undergo psychic readings together find their spiritual experiences to be much more effective than when it’s done individually. If you are considering going for a psychic reading, looking through which psychic readers are available and which ones you are best going to, or consulting with a psychic, you may first want the help of Psychic Advisor to find reputable and credible practitioners as not all abide by ethical standards.

The upstart, for instance, may be displaying all of the bold aspects inhibited by other family members. Through this person the others may vicariously share the excitement or suspense of those experiences that are otherwise blocked. On the other hand the others may be completely hiding such impulses, while expressing faithfully the desires of other family members for “excellence” discipline. Now the same can apply to counterparts, and those in our experience can show to us, in exaggerated form, abilities of our own upon which we have not chosen to concentrate. We can learn much from our counterparts, therefore, and they from us. Sometimes we may need help via a psychic reading to reach out and interact with our counterparts, but some people are able to cross the breach with their own inherent ability. Those counterparts that we meet will be working, playing, and being more or less within our own culture. This does not mean that we are bits and pieces of some hypothetical whole self.

Pretend that the psyche is a plant sending out seeds of itself in many directions, each seed growing into a new plant in different conditions. Growing to plant-hood, those seeds send out further new variations. A handful of seeds from any tree might fall in the same backyard. Others might be blown for miles before they land.

We usually live with our physical family, though this does not always apply; sometimes our ancestors come from various countries, so there is a physical lineage that we understand. There are often homecomings, were distant relatives return to the homestead. Now psychically the same applies in terms of counterparts. If we belong to any particular groups, often our closest counterparts will also be there. We will be a counterpart from their viewpoint, by the way, many political, civic, educational or religious groups are composed of counterparts.

Conventional families are counterparts that form psychic families. They are family representations on another level. First of all, such groups have a built-in focus–political, civic, religious, sexual, or whatever. Certain members of the group express the repressed tendencies of others. Yet each is supported through a common sense of belonging, so that the group sometimes seems to have its own overall identity, in which each member plays a part. Anyone can discover this by examining the groups to which he or she belongs.

Now there are races, psychically speaking. There are also psychic counterparts of races–families of consciousness, so to speak–all related, yet having different overall characteristics or specialties.

Playful Intellect

In their own ways children are quite aware of their counterparts, and of, other portions of their individual realities. They relate to their counterparts in dreams. They sometimes see them as “invisible” companions. We dream of our own counterparts frequently, but we are so afraid of maintaining what we think of as the rational adult self that we ignore such communications.

In certain circles, soul mates is the latest vogue. The idea is an old one; it is based upon the reality of counterparts, and presents another version of the theory. But, it is treated with an almost pompous seriousness. Many of those who use the term do it to hide rather than to release their own joyful abilities. They spend time searching for their soul mates–but the search involves them in a pilgrimage for a kind of impossible communication with another, in which all division is lost, with the two then trying to join in a cementing oneness, suffocating all sense of play or creativity. We are not one part, or one half, of another soul, searching through the annals of time for our partner, undone until we are complete by our soul mate.

When we become too intent to maintain our reality we lose it, for we deny the creativity upon which it rests.

I am not denying the importance of true reason. Certainly I am not telling us to ignore the intellect. But we do often ignore the playfulness of the intellect, and force it to become something less than it is.

Most People Suspect Creativity

They expect that its products will be unreal or not valid in the physical world. Yet there is a great correlation between what we think of as creativity, altered states of consciousness, play, and “spiritual” development.

 

When we create a poem or a song or a painting we are in a state of play, of enjoyment, of freedom. We intend to make something different, to produce a new version of reality. We create out of love, for the sake of the experience. At one time or another almost everyone has that kind of experience, but children have it often. They compose songs and music and paintings in their heads. They alter the focus of their consciousness frequently. They do not stop to ask whether or not the play is real or pertinent. Physically, play develops their body mechanisms. It also flexes the great capabilities of their minds.

 

When we think: “Life is earnest,” and decide to put away childish things, then often we lose sight of our own creativity and become a goal that must be attained. The goal is to be achieved through hard work, and as long as we believe this we do not understand what the spirit is.

 

A natural analogy–plants do not work at developing their potential. They are not beautiful because they believe it is their responsibility to please our eye. They are beautiful because they love themselves and beauty. When we are so serious we almost always distort the nature of our own spirit as far as our understanding of it is concerned. We cannot let our guard down long enough to discover what it is. We keep looking for new rules or regulations, or methods of discipline.

Visible Or Invisible There Is Consciousness In Everything

Chromosomes are microscopic bodies into which the protoplasmic substance of a cell nucleus separating during cell division. They carry the genes, the factors or units–‘blueprints’–that determine hereditary characteristics.

 

There is consciousness in everything. Visible or invisible to us, each fragment,  of the universe has a consciousness of its own. Pain and pleasure, the strongest aspects of all consciousnesses, are experienced by every fragment, according to its degree. Differentiation is of course various, and it is in the degree of differentiation that consciousnesses are different.

 

Reincarnation simply represents probabilities in a time context.

Genetic Patterns Ahead Of Time

This is somewhat like the ancestral line, and there are also reflections in the genes and chromosomes undetected by our scientists. The ancestral and reincarnational lines merge to some extent to form what we think of as our genetic patterns ahead of time, so to speak. Before this life we chose what we wished from those two main areas.

Reincarnational experience is also transmitted, then, and can be re-translated from a biological code-imprint into emotional awareness. However, as we are not our parents or our ancestors we are not our “reincarnational selves.”

We cannot say that our ancestors, like some strange plants, were growing toward what we are, or that we are the sum of their experiences. They were, they are, themselves. We cannot say that we are the sum of our past reincarnational lives either, and for the same reasons. We cut off the knowledge of oneself, and so divisions seem to occur. We are somewhat like a plant that recognizes only one of its leaves at a time. A leaf feels its deeper reality as a part of the plant, and adds to its own sense of continuity, and even to its own sense of individuality. But we often pretend that we are some odd dangling leaf, with no roots, growing without a plant to support us.

All of the leaves now growing on this plant could be thought of as counterparts of each other, each alive and individual in one time, each contributing yet facing in different directions. As one leaf falls another takes its place, until next year the whole plant, still living, will have a completely new set of leaves -– future reincarnational selves of this batch.

We are not plants, but the analogy is a simple one.

There is a constant interaction in the plant, between its parts, that we do not perceive. The leaves now present are biologically valid, interrelating in our terms. Yet in time terms each leaf is also aware of the past history of the plant, and biologically they spring up from that “past.”

Each leaf seeks to express its leaf-hood as fully as possible. Leaves take in sun, which helps the plant itself grow (through photosynthesis). The development of the leaves, then, is very important to the plant’s own existence. The cells of the plant are kept in contact with the environment through the leaves’ experiences, and future probabilities are always taken into consideration. The smallest calculations involving light and dark are known. The life of the plant and its leaves cannot be separated.

The plant has its own “idea” of itself, in which each of its leaves has its part. Yet each leaf has the latent capacities of the whole plant. Root one, for instance, and a new plant will grow.

Selves have far greater freedom than leaves, but they can also root themselves if they choose–and they do. Reincarnational selves are like leaves that have left the plant, choosing a new medium of existence. In this analogy, the dropped leaves of the physical plant have fulfilled their own purpose to themselves as leaves, and to the plant. These selves, however, dropping from one branch of time, root themselves in another time and become new selves from which others will sprout.

The larger self, then seeds itself in time. In this process no identity is lost and no identity is the same, yet all are interrelated. So we can theoretically expand our consciousness to include the knowledge of our past lives, though those lives were ours and not ours. They have a common root, as next year’s leaves have a common root with the leaves now of the plant.

Such knowledge, however, would automatically affect those past lives. Ideas of cause and effect can hold us back here, because it seems to us that the leaves of next year come as an effect caused by this year’s’ leaves. To the plant and its innate creative pattern, however, all of its manifestations are one–and expression of itself, each portion, exists now. The same applies to the psyche. In that greater realm of reality there is creative interplay, and interrelationships between all aspects of selfhood.

We Are Time Contemporaries

Neutral data are not transferred through “living” vehicles. Whether physically materialized or not, knowledge is possessed by consciousness. It is always “individualized”, though not necessarily in our terms.

The information carried by the chromosomes is not general, but highly specific. It is codified data (itself alive) that contains within it the essence of ancestral experience–of specific ancestral experience. Biologically we do indeed carry within us, then, the memories of our particular ancestors. These form a partial basis for our subjective and physical existence, and provide the needed support for it.

Since one portion of our heritage is physical, in those terms, those memories can be translated again, back into emotional and psychological events, though usually they are not in our societies.

To that extent the so-called past experience of our ancestors and of our species is concurrent with our own, biologically speaking. That is but one line, however, covered by the chromosomes. We have “another line” of existence that also serves as a support for the one that we presently recognize. It includes other interweaving physical relationships that bind us with all others upon our planet at the same adjacent level of time.  That is, to some extent or another we are related to all of those alive upon the planet. We are time contemporaries. We will have a far closer relationship with some than with others. Some will be our counterparts.

These may or may not be closer to us than family relationships, but psychically speaking they will share a certain kind of history with us. We will also be connected through the physical framework of the earth in the large give-and-take of its space-time scheme.

Outcroppings Of Creativity

To a certain extent we do carry the knowledge of our forefathers within our cells and chromosomes, which present a pattern that is not rigid but flexible–one that in codified fashion endows us with the subjective living experience of those who, in our terms, have gone before. Some very old cultures have been aware of this. While being independent, individual members also identified with their ancestors to some extent, accepting them as portions of their selfhoods. This does not mean that the individual self was less, but was more aware of its own reality. A completely different kind of focus was presented, in which the ancestors were understood to contribute to the “new” experience of the living; one in which the physically focused consciousness clearly saw itself as perceiving the world for itself, but also for all of those who had gone before– while realizing that in those terms he or she would contribute as well as the generation past.

The animals were also accepted in the natural philosophy of selfhood as the individual plainly saw the living quality of consciousness. The characteristics of the animals were understood to continue “life,” adding their qualities to the experience of the self in a new way.

The human body would be used in earth’s great husbandry as, from it, dying and decaying new forms would arise. This was a give-and-take in which for instance, a jungle neighborhood was truly home, and all was a portion of the self psychically, spiritually, and physically.

Let those who will, laugh at tales of spirits turning into the trees–a simplistic theory, certainly, yet a symbolic statement in such societies: The dead were buried at home in the same close territory, to form in later times the very composition of the ground upon which religions grew. Again, our limited concepts of selfhood make what I am saying difficult for us to perceive.

I am not saying, that the living consciousness of each individual returned to the earth literally, but that the physical material permeated and tamped with that consciousness did, and does. Even the cells retain knowledge of all of their affiliations. In physical terms the consciousness that we understand is based upon this.

 

Selfhood is poorer when it does not at least intuitively understand this heritage.

A satellite world where people create reality at will.

The “City of  Vanguard “is a place where most things are counter-parted with three different perspectives. The perspective through One’s eyes and Two’s perspective viewed by others. With Three and his replacements. The place where people Create Reality Through Thoughts, and Beliefs.

The Physical Journey

Walking down the street, we expect the trees to stay in their places, and not transform themselves into buildings. All of these assumptions are taken for granted in our physical journeys. We may find different customs and languages, yet even these will be accepted in the vast, overall, basic assumptions within whose boundaries physical life occurs. We are most certainly traveling through the private and mass psyche when we so much as walk down the street. The physical world seems objective and outside of oneself, however. The idea of such outsideness is one of the assumptions upon which we build that existence. Interior traveling is no more subjective, than a journey from New York to San Francisco. We are used to projecting all destinations outside of oneself. The idea of varied inward destinations, involving motion through time and space, therefore appears strange.


Generally speaking, we have explored the physical planet enough so that we have a good idea of what to expect as we travel from country to country.


Before a trip, we can produce travel maps that outline the attractions and characteristics of a certain locale. The mode of transport has taken different folds. We used to travel by flight in economy or even rent private jet. Now, we see travelers in motor bikes and also on foot! However, much of what we explore are part of what is already discovered. We are not traveling blind folded, therefore, and while any given journey may be new to us, we are not really a pioneer: The land has been mapped and there are few basic surprises.

The inner lands have not been as well explored. To say the least, they lie in virgin territory as far as our conscious mind is concerned. Others have journeyed to some of these interior locales, but since they were indeed explorers they had to learn as they went along. Some, returning, provided guidebooks or travel folders, telling us what could be expected. We make our own reality. If we were from a foreign land and asked one person to give us a description for reality. The person might say “Las Vegas is a frightful place in which crime is rampant, gangs roam the streets, murders and rapes are the norm, and people are not only impolite but ready to attack us at a moment’s notice. There are no trees. The air is polluted, and we can expect only violence. ” If we asked someone else, this individual might say instead: “Las Vegas has the finest of casinos despite their decline since the rise of online casinos like paybyphonebillcasino.uk. Additionally, Las Vegas has open-air concerts in some of the parks, fine sculpture, theater, and probably the greatest collection of music outside the Nashville. It has a good overall climate, a great mixture of cultures. In it, millions of people go their way daily in freedom. ” Both people would be speaking of their private beliefs, and would be colored by the individual focus from which each of them viewed that City.


One person might be able to give us the city’s precise location in terms of latitude and longitude. The other might have no such knowledge, and say instead: “I take a plane at such-and-such a place, at such-and-such a time, giving Las Vegas as my destination, and if I take the proper plane I always arrive there.


Explorers traveling into inner reality, do not have the same kind of landmarks to begin with. Many have been so excited with their discoveries that they wrote guidebooks long before they even began to explore the inner landscape They did not understand that they found what they wanted to find, or that the seemingly objective phenomena originated in the reflections of the psyche.


We may, for example, have read books numbering the “inner realms,” and telling us what we can expect to encounter in each. Many of these speak of lords or gods of the realm, or of demons. In a strange way these books do provide a service, for at certain levels we will find our own ideas materialized: and if we believe in demons then in those terms we will encounter them. The authors, however, suppose that the devils have a reality outside of our belief in them, and such is not the case. The demons simply represent a state of our own mind that is seemingly out there, objectified. Therefore, whatever methods the authors used to triumph over these demons is often given as proof not only of the demons’ reality but of each method’s effectiveness.


Now if we read such books we may often program our activity along those lines, in the same way that a visitor to Las Vegas might program experience of the city in terms of what he of she had been told existed there.


That kind of structuring also does a disservice, however, for it prevents us from coming in contact with our own original concepts. There is no reason, for example, to encounter any demons or devils in any trance or out-of-body condition. In such cases our own hallucinations blind us to the environment within which they are projected. All of its dimensions are faithfully and instantly produced as experience when we learn to take our “normally alert” conscious mind with us; and when we are free of such limiting ideas, then at those levels we can glimpse the inner powers of our own psyche, and watch the interplay of beliefs and symbols as they are manifested before our eyes. Until we learn to do this we will most certainly have difficulty, for we will not be able to tell the difference between our projections and what is happening in the inner environment.


Any exploration of inner reality must necessarily involve a journey through the psyche, and these effects can be thought of as atmospheric conditions, natural, at a certain stage, through which we pass as we continue.


Our world, is the result of a certain focus of consciousness, without which that world cannot be perceived. The range of consciousness involved is obviously physically oriented, yet within it there are great varieties of consciousness, each experiencing that seemingly objective world from a private perspective. The physical environment is real in different terms to an animal, a fish, a man, or a rock, for example, and different portions of those forms. This is highly important.


If an inhabitant from another reality outside of our own physical system entirely were to visit it, and if “his” or “her” intelligence was roughly of the same degree as our own, he or she would still have to learn to focus his or her consciousness into the same way that we do, more or less, in order to perceive our world. He or she would have to alter his or her native focus and turn it in a direction that was foreign to him or her. In this way he or she could “pick up our station.” There would be distortions, because even though he or she managed such manipulations he or she might not have the same kind of native physical structure as our own, or course, through which to receive and interpret those data his altered consciousness perceived.


Our visitor would then be forced to translate that information as best he or she could through his or her own native structure, if it were to make any sense to his or her consciousness in its usual orientation. All realities are the result of certain unique focuses taken by consciousness. In those terms, there is no outside. The effect of objectivity are caused as the psyche projects its experience into inner dimensions that it has itself created.


Within, those frameworks are ever expanding, so that in our terms at least it seems that greater and greater distances are involved. Travel to any other land of physical reality must then involve alterations of consciousness.


While all of our thoughts and feelings are “somewhat” materialized, only some of them become physical in our terms. They are then accepted as physical reality. They provide the basis for the physical events, objects, and phenomena upon which we all agree. Therefore our world has a stability that works well enough for daily concerns. At that point we are tuned in precisely on our “home station.” We ignore the ghost symbols or voices, the probable actions that also occur, but that are muffled in the clear tones of our accepted reality. When we begin to travel away from that home station, we become more aware of the other frequencies that are buried within it. We move through other frequencies, but to do this we must alter our own consciousness. The probable realities connected with our own system are like the suburbs, say, surrounding a main city. If for simplicity’s sake we think of other realities as different cities, then after we leave our own we would pass through the suburbs, then into the country, then after a time into other suburbs until we reached another metro-city. Each metropolis would represent a conglomeration of consciousnesses operating within an overall general frequency of clearest focus, a high point of psychic communication and exquisite focus in the given kind of reality unless we are tuned into those particular frequencies, however, we could not pick up that reality. We might instead perceive the equivalent of jumbled sound or meaningless static, or jigsaw images. We might simply realize that some kind of activity was there, but without being able to pinpoint it.

Might Is Right Or Right Is Might?

For centuries it was taken for granted that God was on the side of the strongest, richest nation. Surely, it seemed, if a country was poor or downtrodden, it was because God had made it so.

Such ideas literally held people in chains, fostering slavery and other inhumane practices. The same unfortunately applies to the Eastern concept of nirvana, and to the Christian idea of heaven. Both have been used by those in power to hold down the masses of people, to justify shoddy and inadequate living conditions by promising future bliss in the world after death.

There are many differences between the ideas of nirvana and heaven, but each has been used not only to justify suffering, but also to teach people to seek pain. The idea has been that the more persecuted and maligned a person is, the greater will be the reward in a future existence.

I want to avoid concentration upon esoteric practices in my blogs, but they do sometimes impinge upon the subject matter at hand.

The ideas of penance, fasting to excess, the personal abuse of the body, such as self-flagellation — all of those practices are conducted in the belief that suffering is something to be sought in itself. In such a way pain becomes a sought-after goal, and pleasure becomes subverted into pain.

Quite ordinary people often believe, then, that suffering itself is a way toward personal development and spiritual knowledge. In matters of health, such beliefs can have most unfortunate results. They are often responsible for needless sacrifices of physical organs in imprudent operations.

Some individuals become anxious and worried if they think they are too happy — for to them it means that they are not paying sufficiently for their sins. They may be threatened by some undeniable danger, until finally in one way or another they seek out their own punishment once again — wondering all the time why they are so frequently besieged by poor health or disease.

This kind of syndrome can affect individuals, families, and to some extent entire nations. They mitigate directly against man’s and woman’s health, survival, and exuberance.

Constant fears about nuclear destruction, or other such catastrophes can also fall under this classification.

Large masses of people became so convinced of God’s eventual vengeance and retribution that they began to plan for it.

Their lives became a way of avoiding pain instead of seeking out pleasure or satisfaction. This is true of individuals, but it also applies to many so-called survival groups, who congregate in one or another portion of the country, collecting supplies to carry them over the holocaust and to defend their families from those who might steal their provisions.

Most such people expect a period of chaotic time, in which all laws are broken down. Another version stresses the economic area, foreseeing the collapse of the economy, anarchy, and other conditions that pit one individual against the other.

These people believe, of course, that any given situation will worsen, and be carried to its most disastrous end. That attitude colors all of their other beliefs and actions. Some use religious dogma, and others rely upon scientific dogma to prove their cases, but in any case, they are presented with a world of deception and vengeance.

Good mental or physical health can hardly flourish under such conditions. There are instead most beneficial groups in this country and abroad, who actually, actively, yet peacefully join together to work for worldwide nuclear disarmament, and also to tackle such questions as nuclear waste. Their efforts are directed in other ways also, as they try to convince all areas of the world to share their wealth and foodstuffs equally.

These may be “highflying” goals, however they are positive in nature, aimed toward accomplishment and achievement, and they collect the energies of the people together in a way that stresses cooperation and understanding.

Again, the end does not justify the means — so no amount of war is ever going to produce a meaningful peace.

Such ideas affect every level of life, from the most microscopic onward. It is not that plants understand our ideas in usual terms — but they do indeed pick up our intent, and in the arena of world survival, they have a stake.

I do not want to romanticize non-human life either, or to overestimate its resources, but nature also has its own ways — and in those ways it constantly works toward survival of life in general. Nature may not bail us out, but it will always be there, adding its own vitality and strength to the overall good and health of the planet.

Remember what I said in earlier blogs about the connections between disease and non-disease states. Communication flashes between viruses and microbes, and they can change in the wink of an eye. Once again, then, ideas of the most optimistic nature are the biologically pertinent ones.

This is a good place to bring up again some extreme food practices, such as over-fasting, and an obsession with so-called natural foods.

I am not talking about a natural and healthy interest in the purity of foodstuffs, but of a worrisome over-concern. This is often carried so far that no food seems perfectly satisfying, and the concentration becomes focused upon the fear of food, rather than upon its benefits.

Behind many such attitudes if the idea that the body itself is unworthy, and that starving it somehow cuts down on the appetites of the flesh. We usually end up with a flurry of different kinds of diets.

Some concentrate almost exclusively on protein, some on carbohydrates — particularly rice — but in any case the large natural range of available foods and nutrients are cut out.

This keeps the body in a state of constant turmoil. Some people are so convinced, in fact, that eating is wrong that they diet until they become ravenously hungry, then overeat and force themselves to vomit up the residue.

Other people, in a well-meaning attempt to watch their weight, skip their breakfast entirely — a very poor procedure. It is far better to eat moderate amounts of food in all of the food ranges, and to consume smaller portions more often. I realize that our social mores also dictate our eating habits — but four light meals a day will overall serve us very well, and give the body a more steady, regulated nourishment.

These food ideas are important, since they are passed on from parents to children, and parents often use food as a way of rewarding a child’s good behavior, thus starting the youngster out toward conditions of overweight.

The main issue involved, once again, is the trust of the body.

In any case, there are new lives growing and maturing within each individual, whatever his or her age or circumstances.

The idea of survival reaches far beyond this life experience, and each person has new physical and spiritual existences ever ready — for there is no such thing as extinction. Alive or dead in usual terms, we are always conscious and aware and ourselves, and we are always a part of universal ventures in which we have always been involved, whatever our states of consciousness.

We are supported, never abandoned, and always couched lovingly in the great yet intimate presence of All That Is, whose love forms our breath, our life, our death, as in which the unknown divinity is always blessed and ever known.

It is known and unknown, forming all stages of creativity, and we are held within it, graced to be a part of the divine framework of All That Is.

My blogs, like life itself, have been and are a gift, rising from the immense, never-ending creativity of existence.

Alone, I live within one life that expresses multitudinous voices, and shed its own mercy, gladness, and joy, out into the world at large, enriching it, renewing the springtime, and never truly ending.

To one extent or another, I then speak in these blogs for all peoples, for the united psyches that overflow with thoughts and feelings that are registered by the wind, giving voice to the private, intimate, yet connected lives of men and women throughout the centuries — so that many people, listening to or reading my blogs, hear their own inner voices also, and feel the contours of their own natures, and universal nature as well.

“BEYOND THE HIGHEST CLOUDS”

Behind the highest clouds

man and woman have ever seen

there are mountains and

hidden coves from which all 

true proclamations come.

Their sentences are silent

yet they contain a word that

releases and fills secret contracts

between the gods and man and woman,

uttered long ago

uttered without a word or a whisper,

and speaking for me alone

with a magic note

and a secret message

and a sweet response

known to me alone.

The Human Body As A Planet Worth Saving

Few people are much concerned personally with esoteric situations. Many people are involved, however, with various religious ideas and philosophies, whose effects are quite unfortunate in personal experience. The majority of individuals have bouts of poor health now and then, from which they recover — so that all in all a fairly comfortable medium is struck.

It is unfortunately often — but not always — true that individuals who carry strong religious feeling are often bothered more than usual by poor health and personal dilemmas. The fact is that religions have been the carriers of some of the best ideas that man and woman have entertained — but is has also held most stubbornly to the most troublesome concepts that have plagued mankind and womankind.

We cannot divorce philosophy from life, for our thoughts and opinions give our life its meaning and impetus. There are some people who believe that life is meaningless, that it has no purpose, and that its multitudinous parts fell together through the workings of chance alone. Obviously I am speaking here of scientific dogma, but such dogma is far more religious than scientific, for it also expects to be believed without proof, on faith alone.

Such ideas are bound to color any of their followers’ ideas about other subjects also: sexuality, economics, and certainly concepts of war and peace.

Again, each portion of nature is propelled by the inner vitality, energy, and life force within it. The physical body cannot flourish if the individual believes that it and its works are without meaning. Such philosophies do not give man or woman a stake in nature, or in the universe.

All of life is seen as heading for extinction in any case. The entire concept of a soul, life after death, or even life from one generation to the next, becomes largely doubtful, to say the least. In such a philosophical world it would seem that man and woman had no power at all.

As mentioned in my earlier blogs, those concepts can have a hand in the development of would-be suicides, particularly of a young age, for they seem to effectively block a future.

The same ideas are so dead-ended, however, that they often trigger a different kind of response entirely, in which a scientist who has held to those beliefs most stubbornly, suddenly does a complete double-take. This can propel him or her into a rather severe schizophrenic reaction, in which the scientist now defends most fanatically the same ideas that he or she rejected most fanatically only a short time before.

With some variations, the same kind of “sudden conversion” can occur when a person who has berated religious concepts and beliefs suddenly does a double-take of a different kind, ending up as a twice-born Christian.

Both mechanisms suddenly line up the belief systems in one particular manner, knocking aside all doubts but accepting instead a strict obedience to the new belief system, and a new reorganization of life itself beneath that new cause.

 

 

 

The World As A Cohesive Whole

Before we continue, I would like to remind the blog’s readers that in the middle of these or any of the problems we have been discussing, there may be a period of depression, of the feeling that one’s own problem has no solution after all.

Whenever this occurs, the steps I have given before in previous blogs should be followed. Briefly, immediately refuse to worry about the future or the past. Tell yourself you can worry another time if you want to — but for the moment you will not be concerned about the past of the future.

Remind yourself that for all you might have read, of heard, or deduced earlier, it is certainly not inevitable that all unfortunate situations take the darkest of times, and that indeed the opposite is true; for if such were the case, the world and all of life would have literally been destroyed through disasters and calamities.

Concentrate upon the present moment — but more, concentrate upon the most pleasant aspects of the present moment. If that moment has distracting, unfavorable aspects, then resolutely bring into your mind whatever images delight or please you at the moment. These may be very simple. Remember the smell of lilacs, for example, or try to hear the crisp crunch of snow, or try to visualize an ocean or lake. All of these procedures will serve to quiet your mind and body, and build up your own reserves.

 

This is an excellent policy to follow, because we can start it wherever we are. It will help alleviate fears and doubts at least momentarily, so that then we can pursue the entire issue later, with more assurance.

Conflicting beliefs about the nature of reality can bring about dilemmas in almost any form, for the individual will always try to make sense out of his or her surroundings, and try to at least see the world as a cohesive whole.

Some of the most complicated ways of trying to put conflicting beliefs  together are often mental or emotional ones. The more incohesive the individual feels the world to be, the greater his or her efforts will be expended in an attempt to put the world back together.

Some people possess beliefs that are so in opposition to each other that they are forced into some of the most complicated mental or emotional footwork. Their problem will seem so gigantic that only some interference from an outside source will be sufficient to give the individual a sense of wholeness and sanity. A person may become so frightened of using his or her own power of choice or action that the construction of an artificial super being is created — a seemingly sublime personage who gives orders to the individual involved.

Again, let us use a hypothetical case — this time of a man named Stephen.

Stephen may be so terrified of making choices, so indecisive, that he constructs an imaginary super being who orders him to do thus and so. If a decision comes up on a job, for example, then the super being will order Stephen to take one course or another. Stephen has given up accepting responsibility for his actions. This imaginary personage may say it is God, or a famous hero from the present or the past, or Jesus Christ, or Mohammed, and the personality involved will be quite certain that such is the case.

Stephen, for example, many hear the hallucinated voice of the god or hero. The voice may be so frequent that it becomes highly distracting, or it may only appear in times of undue stress.

Again, we are starting out with a fairly simple picture. Our friend might also be convinced that he himself is evil, unworthy, or even depraved, the lowest of men or women. In such circumstances an individual might then construct an artificial devil or demon who annoys him constantly, and even orders acts of a highly destructive nature.

The individual, like Stephen, has also given up the responsibility for his own choices, and feels that he or she cannot be held responsible for any destructive acts that might be committed.

Any of the two kinds of personalities mentioned might also begin to feel persecuted, chased, or harassed by some outside agency. Among the agencies chosen, of course, are the FBI, the CIA, the Russian Secret Police, The Ku Klux Klan, or any controversial group given to acts of violence for whatever purposes.

Sometimes such episodes last for long periods of time, but they can also appear for just several days, clear up spontaneously, and return again perhaps years later.

Some people may seem completely normal in behavior unless certain subjects are brought up in the course of a conversation, or unless some stimulus in the environment arouses them.

For instance, the individual might be talking along normally enough when he or she hears the sirens of a police car in the distance. Instantly the person might leap up, convinced that that was evidence of the pursuit of the FBI or other agency.

The car with siren might disappear, yet the alarmed person’s attitude and actions may very well instantly cause his or her companion to realize that something was clearly amiss. The disturbed person may immediately begin a long tirade, describing previous episodes in which he or she was hunted from city to city. There may be further complications, in which the person insists that phones were bugged, letters opened, and privacy was constantly invaded.

 

This might be the very first sign to the person’s companion that anything was wrong at all. In most such instances the tirade will continue for some time, while in other far lesser episodes it might instead simply leap to disordered, confused thoughts about being so pursued. Or instead, the individual might embark upon a rather heated discussion of police forces in general.

In actuality, people in those circumstances are often so frightened of the use of power that the idea of being under constant surveillance actually lends them a sense of protection.

The point is, that in such circumstances the person will try to use evidence from the outside world to prove that he is indeed being pursued.

In the same fashion, the person who hallucinates the voice of God or a demon actually does so to preserve the idea of sanity in his or her own mind. As long as he or she believes that a god or demon is involved, then the person can consider the entire affair most extraordinary, decidedly apart from usual experience, but valid.

If the therapist tries to convince such a person that the hallucinated personage does not exist, then this threatens the person’s concepts of personal sanity.

It is , then, that any therapist convinces the client that while the super being is a self-construction, and/or that the voices are hallucinations — this does not mean that the client is insane.

An effort should be made to help the client understand that errors of thought and belief are responsible for the condition — and that the removal of those erroneous beliefs can relieve the situation. The therapist should make it clear that he or she understands that the client is not lying, in ordinary terms, when he reports hearing voices from the devil.

 

According to the particular case in point, the therapist should then try to point out the errors of thought and belief involved, and also to explain their more or less habitual cast.

First, the ideas must be disentangled, and then the habitual behavior will begin to disintegrate. The therapist should also assure the client that on many subjects and topics of thought and conversation, the client operates quite well. The subject itself is so cast the, of course, an entire book could easily be devoted to it, so it is impossible to cover all the issues that may be involved with such cases here.

Some of the errors concern the misinterpretation of physical events. The individual — convinced he or she is being pursued by some secret organization — again, may hear the sirens on a very real police car. The error is the assumption that the vehicle is pursuing the individual rather than some other party. The therapist can help the client learn to question his or her interpretation of such events.

All such cases can have their own peculiar complications. In the case of secondary personalities, the main operating portion who usually directs activity might be male, displaying all of the usual male characteristics. The second personality may seemingly be female, however, even speaking in a feminine-like voice. Or the opposite might be the case.

It is also possible for the individual to dress in male attire, while the secondary personality wears feminine clothes — or vice-versa.

What we are involved in mainly, however, are the characteristic periods of seeming amnesia, occurring usually involuntarily, often without any transition except perhaps for a headache.

In this category, I am not referring to individuals like “Psychic Mediums,” who speak for another personality with a sense of ease and tranquillity, and whose resulting information is excellent knowledge — the obvious products of uncommon common sense that proves to be helpful to the individual and others.

Behind all of those instances we have been discussing, however, there is again the need for value fulfillment, that has been blocked largely by conflicting or even opposing beliefs.

Regardless of how unbelievable it might seem to some blog readers, it is true that even the most destructive events are based upon misinterpretations of reality, opposing beliefs, and the inability to receive or express love. In fact, that kind of rage is the mark of a perfectionist caught in what seems to be the grasp of a world not only imperfect, but evil.

This brings us to another most dangerous belief — that the end justifies the means.

The greatest majority of destructive acts are committed in line with that belief. It leads to a disciplined over-rigidity that gradually cuts down the range of human expression.

We should be able to see, in fact, that the problems we have been discussing begin by limiting the field of available choices, and thus curtailing the range of expression. The individual will try to express himself or herself to the best degree possible, and so each individual then begins a concentrated effort to seek out those avenues of expression still open. All of the constructive beliefs mentioned throughout this blog should be applied to all of the instances. The individual must feel safe and protected enough to seek its own development and aid in the fulfillment of others.

One of the most rare and extraordinary developments that can occur in schizophrenic behavior is the construction of a seeming super-being of remarkable power — one who is able to convince other people of his or her divinity.

Most such instances historically have involved males, who claim to have the powers of clairvoyance, prophecy, and omnipotence. Obviously, then, the affected individual was thought to be speaking for God when he gave orders or directions. We are dealing with “god-making,” or “religion-making” — whichever you prefer.

In almost all such instances, discipline is taught to believers through the inducement of fear. Put very loosely, the dogma says that we must love God or he or she will destroy us. The most unbelievable aspects of such dogmas should, it seems, make them very easy to see through. In many cases, however, the more preposterous the legends or dogmas, the more acceptable they become. In some strange fashion followers believe such stories to be true because they are not true. The interceptions of almost all religions have been involved one way or another with these schizophrenic episodes.

 

The person so involved must be extremely disturbed to begin with: up in arms against social, national, or religious issues, and therefore able to serve as a focus point for countless other individuals affected in the same manner.

In a fashion. Adolf Hitler fell into such a classification. Although he lacked that characteristic mark of speaking for a super-being, this was because he frequently regarded himself as the super-being. The trouble is that while such religions can also inspire people to acts of great sympathy, heroism and understanding, their existence rests upon drastic misreadings of the nature or reality.

If the major religions have been touched, then there have also been numberless smaller cults and sects throughout history into the present that bear that same stamp of great psychological power and energy, coupled with an inborn leaning toward self destruction and vengeance.

To varying degrees, other less striking individual cases can bear the same sense of magic and mystery.

There is certainly no need to romanticize schizophrenic behavior, for its romantic-like elements have long been coupled in the public mind in an unfortunate manner, seeming to place the madman and the genius in some kind of indefinable relationship. Such beliefs are apparent in statements such as: “Madness is the other end of sanity,” or “All genius is touched with madness.”

Beneath these ideas is the fear of the mind itself, the belief that its abilities are fine and dependable up to a point — but if it goes too far then it is in trouble.

What does it mean to go too far in that connotation? Usually it means that knowledge itself is somehow dangerous.

In some cases, however, the constructed super-being can deliver astute comments on national, social, or religious conditions.

Most such personages, however, begin to prophesy the end of the world, from which the chosen people — whoever they may be — will be saved. More than a few have rendered specific dates for this worldly foreclosure — dates which have come and gone. Many people still continue to follow the very same dogmas that seemed to have proven themselves wrong; the personage comes up with a newer excuse, or a newer date, and things go on as before.

Again,however, even in far simpler cases, the constructive personage will often make predictions that, incidentally, do not predict — and almost always give orders and directives that are to be followed without question.

There are many other deep psychological connections beneath schizophrenic behavior, but since my blogs are also devoted to other subjects, we will go on to other ways in which conflicting beliefs bring about mental or physical dilemmas.

 

 

 

The Reincarnational Heritage Is Rich

Thus far in my blogs we have been dealing with conflicting beliefs, however — and most of those can be tackled in the context of this life alone.

These beliefs may have physical or mental repercussions, though in most cases the two do not occur at once. We have dealt with some of the numerous physical dilemmas than can result. In other instances the individual encounters the difficulties on mental or emotional levels. One portion of the personality might be wholeheartedly in favor of good expression of personal power, and be stimulated to express and use his or her energy and strength. Another portion of the personality may be just as terrified of power or its uses as the other segment exults in it.

Instead of developing physical complications, in usual terms, sometimes one portion of the personality actually does act with assurance, power, and energy, while another equally valid portion refuses to use energy or power in any way whatsoever. The ideas are so opposing, and such equal adversaries, that the conscious personality can hardly bear to be aware of both at once.

In such cases, while one portion of the personality is expressing itself, and in command of the usual conscious abilities, the other portion lies acquiescent, latent, and unexpressed.

The individual may act purposefully, with power, energy, and strength, for varying lengths of time. Then sometimes without warning the frightened, inactive portions of the personality will take over the normal abilities of consciousness — acting depressed, taciturn, and communicating very poorly with others.

One portion of the personality will carry on conscious behavior — go to work, shop, or whatever, while the other portion of the personality will not remember performing those acts at all.

Take a hypothetical case. Call Marlo A the assertive part of the personality, and Marlo B the passive partner. Marlo A may go out dancing, go to a bar, then turn the entire proceedings over to Marlo B, who finds herself in noisy surroundings, surrounded by people she does not remember, and with no idea how she reached the present destination.

Her trend of memory will go back to the last time that she was in charge of consciousness, and she will have — or may not have — any idea of the existence of Marlo A at all. Marlo A may enjoy action, sports, dancing and bodily activities, while Marlo B may prefer reading, walking, or painting.

Such personalities may even have separate sets of friends — Marlo A and B each having their own companions. Though these personalities may seem so divergent, they are connected with each other, however, and they may on occasion set up their own rather bizarre kind of communication. They may write mysterious notes to each other, leaving them where they are bound to be found — yet notes using a special code or symbols of drugs, because too clear a communication would disrupt the entire relationship.

People may actually carry on such existences for years, until some event or another shows that something is amiss: one of Marlo A’s friends might meet a friend of Marlo B, for example, or the gaps in memory might finally become so frequent that it is obvious something is wrong.

Marlo A and B represent fairly simple examples of schizophrenic behavior, and indeed I have kept the story simple to keep the issues clear. Marlo A may actually grow into a more and more assertive or belligerent personality, even displaying violent tendencies at times, while on the other hand Marlo B might become even more timid, depressed, and solitary.

On other levels, however, each one is well aware of the other’s presence, and on those levels they do react to each other’s activities. This means, of course, that the entire amnesia process, regardless of how perfect it seems, is a surface one. I have used the different beliefs about power as an example, but any belief may be involved if it and its opposite are held in nearly equal weight.

One portion may believe that sex is natural and good, while the other portion believes vehemently that sex is evil and depraved. Here we will use a man for a hypothetical case. David A may be an excellent husband, breadwinner, and father, a church-goer who believes in the beauty and goodness of sex. David B may hold the opposite viewpoint most intently — that sex is at least evil, perhaps sent by the devil, and below or beneath the dignity of a good man.

On topside David A may go to church frequently, be kind and considerate to his family, and, say, come home from work every night for supper. He may carry on a fruitful accomplished existence for varying lengths of time.

Then, however, perhaps without warning, he may suddenly refuse to make love with his wife, becoming hostile with his children, stop off for a few drinks after work, before supper, or even begin seeing a prostitute, or begin an affair — often with a woman he considers beneath his own station.

David A may be quite startled to discover bottles of whiskey lying around in his dresser drawers, when he hardly drinks liquor himself at all. David B may suddenly “come to” in a strange bedroom, in a compromising position with a woman it certainly seems to him he has never seen before in his life.

On the other hand, David B may find himself in the middle of a family picnic, or other gathering — events that bore and displease him — or worse, he may not even remember his family at all. The more complicated such dilemmas becomes, the harder they are to keep secret, however, because their very complications multiply the chances of discovery. And there are, of course, variations.

David B, while drinking, might suddenly be sent back to his David A self. The kinds of communication can be very unique and bewildering, ranging from number codes to nonsense verses, or to the hearing of imaginary voices, which serve to remind one portion of the self that there is also another seemingly alien personality involved in his or her existence.

In many instances very strong feelings of persecution and paranoia can be involved, but these will be discussed in the following blogs.

In the kind of schizophrenic behavior we have just been discussing, hypnosis is frequently used as therapy, often in an attempt not only to introduce the two levels of the personality to each other, but also to uncover the time they originally split off in such a fashion. However, one must ensure that they visit a hypnotist who has completed a significant amount of hypnotherapy training course in order to ensure that the results are positive.

While hypnosis can be of considerable value in the hands of an excellent professional hypnotist, it still has serious drawbacks as a treatment under these conditions. Because of its very nature, hypnosis can end up segmenting the personality still further.

Under such therapy it sometimes seems that news, lesser personality fragments are uncovered, but it is very possible that these instead are created by the therapy itself. The hypnotist obviously wants to cure his patient, and all forms of schizophrenia are intellectually intriguing. The segments of the personality that are involved are being given great attention, and they may seize upon that attention, seeking ways to further dazzle the hypnotist while at the same time sabotaging recovery.

It is far better to address whatever personality is in prominence during the session, to convince it of the therapist’s concern and interest, while letting it know that at other levels it is quite aware of the existence of its other segments.

People with schizophrenic difficulties often enjoy word games and puzzles, so they may well use these to confuse any therapist. The very fact that such a person considers any kind of therapy does mean that he or she is ready to tackle a considerable challenge. It can be put to each segment of the personality, then, that it will be quite a challenge for each to become aware of the other. We might compare the situation to someone who has been separated from a sister or brother for years — explaining, however, that the separation is psychological and not physical.

In a fashion, all of these activities are variations of others. Instead of forming such segmented selves, another person, as mentioned earlier, might enjoy the use of power, yet be so frightened of it that he or she experiences an epileptic episode instead of a schizophrenic one.

Each Life Influences Each Other Life

Each life influences each other life, and some portions of the personality retains memory not only of past lives, but of future lives also.

When reincarnational studies are embarked upon, on occasion people remember some instance of past-life experience, but conventional ideas of time are so strong that so-called future memory is blacked out.

The inner self is aware of all of our existences, in other words. It sees where and how our many lives fit together. It is only because we are so oriented outward from birth that this inner self can sometimes seem alien or distant and unrelated to the self that we know. It would be impossible to be consciously aware of all of the infinitesimal details that exist in even one life; our consciousness would be so full and cluttered up that we would be unable to make choices, or to use free will.

It would be even more difficult to try to handle the information of many lives at one time. In our terms, “it” takes time to think, and we would be so caught up in thinking itself, that action would be impossible. The inner knowledge of all of our lives, from our point of view, is in the same category as those automatic processes that underlie our existence.

That is, we know about our other lives, basically, in the same way that we know how to breathe or digest our food. A different kind of knowing is involved.

This does not mean that all conscious knowledge about our own reincarnational existences forever beyond us — for through various exercises we can indeed learn to recall some of that information. It does mean, however, that we are innately aware of all of our existences, and that the knowledge gained in one life is automatically transferred to another, whether that life be present, past, or future.

We may therefore be trying out many different kind of experiences, sometimes endowing ourselves with super attributes and strength, relying upon the body’s powers above all other considerations, while at the same time in another life we use and develop unusual mental abilities, enjoying the triumphs of creative thought, while largely ignoring the body’s agility and strength.

I do not mean to imply that we necessarily deal with opposite kinds of behaviors, for there are endless variances — each unique — as consciousness expresses itself through physical sensation, and attempts to explore all of the possible realms of emotional, spiritual, biological, and mental existence.

I want to stress that within each life full free will operates once the conditions of that life are set.

That is, if we have been born in poor or depressed circumstances, then free will not alter the conditions of that birth.

It can help us become wealthy in adult life through the choices that we make. It should be helpful, and certainly somewhat comforting, to realize that even unfortunate birth conditions were not forced upon us by some outside agency, but chosen at inner levels of our own reality.

The same applies to almost any situation. Religion holds some ideas that are in complete opposition to each other in regard to the nature of suffering in general. Some believe that suffering is a punishment sent by God for past or present sins, or even omissions, while other religious schools insist that suffering is sent by God as evidence of his particular love for the individual involved: “Good must love you very much, because he sent so much suffering.”

That remark, and similar ones, are often made to ill persons. The idea is supposed to be that suffering is good for the soul, is a way of atoning for one’s sins, and in some fashion the implication is made that such suffering in this life will be more than compensated for in heaven.

Such concepts encourage individuals to feel like victims, with no control at all over the conditions of their lives.

Instead, it should be realized that as uncomfortable as suffering is, it does somehow have a meaning in the context of our entire existence — again, that it was not thrust upon us by some unjust or uncaring exterior force or nature.

To some degree, that kind of understanding can help alleviate suffering itself to some extent. I am not advocating a fatalistic approach either, that says more or less: “I have chosen such and such an unfortunate condition at some level I do not understand, and therefore the entire affair is outside of my own hands. There is nothing I can do about it.”

For one thing, again, almost all situations, including the most drastic, can be changed for the better to some extent, and the very attempt to do so can increase a person’s sense of control over his or her own circumstances. This does not mean that those adverse situations can be changed overnight in usual terms (though ideally that is also possible), but that the sense of control over one’s life encourages all of the mental and physical healing properties.

In terms of “starting over” at such a point, the main thing to remember is not to expect too much too fast, while recognizing that instantaneous cures are indeed probabilities.

Again, mind games, the insertion of humor and diversion, are extremely valuable, so that we are not trying too hard. Some people try too hard to be spontaneous, while others are frightened of spontaneity itself. The knowledge of reincarnational lives is spontaneously held, and we can receive profound insights from that knowledge. This occurs when we are not looking for it, but when we are familiar enough with the entire concept, so that we realize such knowledge is available.

The reincarnational heritage is rich, however, and it can have a tendency to assert itself under certain conditions.

I am not speaking of usual, but fairly unusual events, when, in one fashion or another, reincarnational memory seems to bleed through to the present life. Again, this is not usual experience. It happens infrequently. On some occasions — sometimes in periods of poor health or seemingly senility — such instances may occur. They are more apt to happen in adolescence, though I do want to stress that we are speaking of extraordinary cases.

Old people often begin to exercise their own consciousness in ways that they had not done earlier. There may be less diversions to take up their thoughts. They may be lonely, and then quite surprisingly find themselves casting about for different kinds of experience — experience seemingly most difficult to achieve in the physical world under their present circumstances.

Since they are often frightened and unsure of the future, they are more apt to cast their thoughts backwards into their early childhoods, reaching for their earliest memories, and mentally try to gain comfort from the remembered sounds of beloved voices, only to mentally glimpse other images than they expected, to hear other voices than those for which they yearned.

In fact, fragments of many episodes from many other lives may rush into their consciousness, and in most cases they are, of course, quite unprepared for the experience. On the other hand, usually such episodes are highly reassuring, for along with them rides the inner assurance that life has been lived before , many times.

The individuals involved may then return to normal consciousness, but if they talked or muttered while the affair was happening, any observers might take it for granted that delirium was involved. Drugs should not be prescribed under those conditions, unless the patient becomes highly restless and confused, and requests them. In most cases, however, the experiences do not leave detrimental side effects.

The same kind of event may happen in periods of poor health, or in over-drugged states. They are less easily handled, however, under drugged conditions, since the consciousness does not have the full agility to depend upon in periods of stress — unusual stress. The same can occur in adolescence, and easily be misinterpreted as a schizophrenic episode.

This happens perhaps more frequently than other cases mentioned, but usually such events are not repeated. They remain only as memories, having opened up the person’s mind to larger visions of life than he or she may have entertained before.

Dilemmas Of Body Or Mind In Early Life

The universe is meaningful, then there must be a reason and a cause for conditions that appear chaotic, cruel, or grotesque. Even in such cases, however, at some extent or another the individual can indeed start over — or at least those closest to the person in question can begin to see a larger framework of existence in which even the most dire of physical circumstances are somehow redeemed.

In many cases, it is the parents of such offspring who suffer more than their children, since it seems as if such families were unjustly saddled with the most unfortunate woes.

 

We hope to explain this larger framework of existence still further, for indeed it also affects the human condition in all of its aspects.

As I have said in previous blogs, the reasons for most physical, mental, spiritual, or emotional problems can be found in this one lifetime, and because of the nature of simultaneous time, new beliefs in the present can also affect those in the past.

In a basic way, it is possible for present beliefs to actually modify the beliefs of a life that is seemingly a past one. I must explain again that all lives are lived at once — but in different kinds of focuses. Our conventional ideas of time make it simpler, however, to speak of one life as happening before or after another.

Again, no one is punished for crimes committed in a past life, and in each life we are unique. The inner intelligence within us that gives us each life also gives us the conditions of each life. It certainly seems to us, or to many of us, that most people would always choose to be born healthy and whole, in an excellent environment, of parents with loving natures and genetic excellence — and in other words to grow up healthy, wealthy, and wise.

Life, however, is far too profound and multitudinous, and requires great depths of emotional response and action that could never be satisfied adequately by any given set of circumstances, however favorable.

The species is filled with a powerful sense of curiosity and wonder, and the need for exploration and discovery, so that even a man born as a king through several lives would find himself bored and determined to seek out a different or opposite experience.

In some lives, then, we are born in fortunate circumstances, and in others we may find an environment of poverty and want. We may be born in excellent health in one life, with a high intelligence and great wit, while in still another existence we may be born ill or crippled or mentally deficient.

It also seems that each fetus must naturally desire to grow, emerge whole from its mother’s womb’s, and develop into a natural childhood and adulthood. However, in those terms just as many fetuses want the experience of being fetuses without following through on other stages. They have no intention of growing into complete human development. In fact, many fetuses explore that element of existence numberless times before deciding to go on still further, and emerge normally from the womb.

Those fetuses that do not develop still contribute to the body’s overall experience, and they feel themselves successful in their own existences. An understanding of these issues can greatly help throw light on the question of early deaths and diseases, and spontaneous abortions.

These are all part of the continuous undercurrents of life, and the same issues apply to many other species whose offspring are lost in very early life.

This is not an uncaring universe or nature operating, but portions of consciousness who choose at whatever levels certain experiences that nourish the living environment, and bring satisfactions that may never show on life’s surface.

In the case of human beings, however, many questions certainly rise to the fore. I do not want to generalize, for each living situation is too unique for that. I do want to point out that all fetuses do not necessarily intend to develop into normal babies, and that if medical science, through its techniques, ends up in directing a normal birth, the consciousness of the child may never feel normally allied with physical experience.

The child may go from one illness to another, or simply display an odd disinclination for life — a lack of enthusiasm, until finally in some cases the child dies at an early age. Another individual, under the same circumstances, might change its mind and decide to go along with the experience of normal life.

It seems unnatural to some people to hear of animals’ mothers who refuse to nurse one offspring, or sometimes even attack it — but in those instances the animal mother is instinctively aware of the situation, and acts to save the offspring from future suffering.

I am not advising that malformed infants be killed, but I do want to point out that even in those most severe cases there is meaning in such conditions, and the consciousness involved then chooses another kind of experience.

 

There are also perfectly healthy, normal children who have determined ahead of time that they will live only to the threshold of adulthood, happy and flushed with dreams and promises of accomplishment, yet not experiencing any disillusionment or regret or sorrow. Such young people die of sickness or accident, but go to their deaths like children after a splendid day. In most instances they choose quick deaths.

In one way or another, such children may try to describe their feelings to those closest to them, so as to cushion the shock. Usually these people are not suicides in conventional terms — although they may be.

Perhaps the greatest variances in human behavior show in mental states, and so parents are apt to feel most crushed and despondent if any of their children prove to be what is generally regarded as mentally deficient. In the first place, the term is a judgment cast by others, and a particular personality may feel quite comfortable in his or her own perception of reality, and only become aware of the difference when confronted by others. Most such persons are quite peaceful rather than violent, and their emotional experience may indeed cover nuances and depths unknown to normal persons.

Many simply perceive reality from a different focus, feeling a problem out rather than thinking a problem out.

In actuality all of the seemingly erratic genetic variances that often crop up in human development are vital to the elasticity of the entire genetic system.

It would not be beneficial, for example, to try to “breed out” those seemingly unfortunate, divergent genetic traits. The physical system would become too rigid, lose the power of its natural diversity, and eventually bring a dead-end to human survival.

There is hardly any danger of that possibility, however, since it would be nearly impossible to perform such a task even with the most developed of technologies — and indeed, the very attempt to do so might well immediately trigger a response on the part of the whole genetic system, so that new divergences appeared with even greater frequency, as compensation.

There are individuals who do choose ahead of time — in one lifetime or another — to accept such divergent genetic heritage for their own reasons — often to experience life from one of its most unique aspects, and sometimes in order to encourage the growth of other abilities that might not otherwise occur.

Human consciousness normally experience wide sweeps of rhythms, varying states of awareness, and its amazing flexibility is partially dependent upon its lack of rigidity, its own spontaneous inclinations, and its capacity for curiosity, wonder, discovery, and emotion.

It is not too frequently noticed, but many so-called mentally deficient people possess their own unique learning abilities — that is, often they learn what they do learn in a different manner than most other people. Many possess abilities that are not discovered by others, that are most difficult to explain. They may utilize chemicals in a different way than other people do in the learning process itself. Some may even have superior understanding of physical and psychological space. Their qualifications emotionally are also quite advanced, and it is quite possible that they are gifted in terms of mathematics and music, though these gifts may never come to fruition, since they are unsuspected.

Many deficient individuals in their way are as vital to the development of humanity as geniuses are, for both preserve the elastic nature of human consciousness, and promote its coping qualifications.

Each person makes his or her own reality, again, but each family member also shares the reality of the others. Often, therefore, instances of unusual genetic differences may also serve to bring out qualities of understanding, sympathy, and empathy on the part of family members — and those qualities also are vital to human development. Because the reasons for any such conditions can be so diverse, then life should be encouraged even in the face of deformities. If the consciousness involved has its own reasons for living, then it will make the most of even the most dire conditions. If instead the consciousness has been kept alive despite its own intents through medical procedures, it will terminate its own physical life in one way or another.

It would seem that infants have no belief systems, and therefore could not be in charge of their own realities in anyway. As mentioned earlier, however, the cells of the body themselves possess an equivalent in those biological leanings toward health and development. Even in cases where physical survival might seem pointless, it is also possible for the organism to alter its course to an extraordinary degree.

Children who are labeled mentally deficient or even called idiots, can often grow and develop far beyond medical science’s suppositions — particularly if they are aided by loving parents who constantly provide stimulation and interest.

This is not to say that all such children should be cared for at home, or that parents should feel guilty if they are forced through circumstances to place their offspring in an institution. The intuition of the parents, however, will often direct the most proper course in each individual case. If it is understood that there is indeed a reason behind such circumstances, then that realization alone can help ease the parents’ burden, and help them decide which course to take in their own particular case.

 

 

 

Many Cancer Patients Have Martyrlike Characteristic

Many cancer patients have martyr-like characteristics, often putting up with undesirable situations or conditions for years.

They feel powerless, unable to change, yet unwilling to stay in the same position. The most important point is to arouse such a person’s belief in his or her strength and power. Even if family members or friends come to visit them regularly, maybe with gifts similar to ones you can find here, the patient might be more determined to find some motivation, even if it may seem difficult initially. Additionally, in many instances, these persons symbolically shrug their shoulders, saying. “What will happen, will happen,” but they do not physically struggle against their situation.

It is also vital that these patients are not overly medicated, for oftentimes the side effects of some cancer-eradicating drugs are dangerous in themselves. There has been some success with people who imagine that the cancer is instead some hated enemy or monster or foe, which is then banished through mental mock battles over a period of time. While the technique does have its advantages, it also pits one portion of the self against the other. It is much better to imagine, say, the cancer cells being neutralized by some imaginary wand. Know someone that is, unfortunately, battling cancer? You may want to suggest to them that they take a look into medicinal marijuana, or rather the active chemical that provides the medical side of cannabis – CBD. It is important that they get the best CBD oil, as if you want the best results you need to use the best products. There are different brands and companies who make them, and there are also different doses. The stronger the dose, generally the better the impact is. If you need more information on this, then look here for CBD 101.

Doctors might suggest that a patient relax and then ask himself or herself what kind of inner fantasy would best service the healing process. Instant images may come to mind at once, but if success is not achieved immediately, have the patient try again, for in almost all cases some inner pictures will be perceived.

Behind the entire problem, however, is the fear of using one’s full power or energy. Cancer patients most usually feel an inner impatience as they sense their own need for future expansion and development, only to feel it thwarted.

The fear that blocks that energy can indeed be dissipated if new beliefs are inserted for old ones — so again we return to those emotional attitudes and ideas that automatically promote health and healing. Each individual is a good person, an individualized portion of universal energy itself. Each person is meant to express his or her own characteristics and abilities. Life means energy, power, and expression.

Those beliefs, if taught early enough, would form the most effective system of preventive medicine ever known.

Again, we cannot generalize overmuch, but many persons know quite well that they are not sure whether they want to live or die. The overabundance of cancer cells represent nevertheless the need for expression and expansion — the only arena left open — or so it would seem.

Such a person must also contend with society’s unfortunate ideas about the disease in general, so that many cancer patients end up isolated or alone. As in almost all cases of disease, however, if it were possible to have a kind of “thought transplant” operation, the disease would quickly vanish.

Even in the most dire of instances, some patients suddenly fall in love, or something in their home environment changes, and the person also seems to change overnight — while again the disease is gone.

Healing can involve help on many levels, of course. The world of normal communication I call Frame-Mind-1, while Frame-Mind-2 represents that inner world, in which indeed all time is simultaneous, and actions that might take years in normal time can happen in the blinking of an eyelid in Frame-Mind-2.

Briefly, Frame-Mind-1 deals with all the events of which we are normally conscious.

Frame-Mind-2 involves all of those spontaneous processes that go on beneath our conscious attention. When we are young our beliefs are quite clear — that is, our conscious and unconscious leanings and expectations are harmonious. As we grow older, however, and begin to accumulate negative beliefs, then our conscious and unconscious beliefs may be quite different.

Consciously we might want to express certain abilities, while unconsciously we are afraid of doing so. The unconscious beliefs are not really unconscious, however. We are simply not as aware of them as we are of normally conscious ones. Negative beliefs can block the passageways between Frame-Mind-1 and Frame-Mind-2. It is an excellent idea for those in any kind of difficulty to do the following simple exercise.

Relax yourself as much as possible. Get comfortable in a chair or on a bed. Tell yourself mentally that we are an excellent person, and that you want to reprogram yourself, getting rid of any ideas that contradict that particular statement.

Next, gently remind yourself again: “I am an excellent person,” adding: “It is good and safe for me to express my own abilities, for in doing so I express the energy of the universe itself.”

Different phrases with the same meaning may come into our own mind. If so, substitute them for the ones I have given. There are endless exercises that can be used to advantage, but here I will only mention a few that appear most beneficial.

For another exercise, then relax yourself as much as possible once more. If you have some disease, imagine it as particles of dirt. Tell yourself that you can see inside your body. You see streets of boulevards instead of muscles and bones, but go along with the image or images that appear. You might see streets lined with dirt or garbage, for example. Then mentally see yourself sweeping the debris away. Order trucks to come and carry the garbage to a trash heap, where you may see it burn and disappear in smoke.

Instead of the drama I just outlined, you may instead see invading armies, attacking home troops. In such a case, see the invaders being driven off. The pictures you see will follow your own unique leanings and characteristics.

The unconscious levels of the self are only unconscious from our own viewpoint. They are quite conscious in actuality, and because they do deal with the spontaneous processes of the body, they are also completely familiar with our own state of health and well-being.

These portions can also be communicated with. Once again, relax yourself as much as possible. Sit comfortably in a chair or lie on a bed. A chair is probably preferable, since it is easy to fall to sleep in you are lying down. You can refer to these portions of the self altogether as the helper, the teacher, or whatever title suits you best.

Simply make a straightforward request, asking that some picture or image be presented in your inner mind, that will serve as representative of those portions of your own inner reality.

So do not be surprised, for you may see a person, an animal, an insect, or a landscape — but trust whatever image you do receive, if it seems to be that of a person, or angel, or animal, then ask it to speak to you, and to tell you how best to rid yourself of your disease or problem.

If the image of a landscape appears instead, then ask for a series of such images, that will again somehow point the way toward recovery, or toward the resolution of the problem. Then follow through with whatever reply you receive.

In all such cases, we are opening the doors of Frame-Mind-2, clearing our channels of communication. Since our physical body itself is composed of the very energy that drives the universe, then there is nothing about us which that energy is unaware of. Simply repeating these ideas to ourselves can result in release of tension, and an acceleration of the healing process.

These exercises may suggest others of our own. If so, follow through on them — but to one extent or another each blog reader should benefit from some of them.

Again, every effort should be made to insert humor into the living situation as much as possible.

The patient might begin to collect jokes, for example, or funny cartoons from magazines and newspapers. Watching comedies on television will help — and so, in fact, will any distraction that is pleasing to the patient.

Crossword puzzles and other word games will also benefit, even if only done mentally. It might also be advisable for the patient to take up some completely new field of knowledge — to learn a language, for instance, or to study whatever books possible in any field to which he or she is attracted. The patient could even combine crosswords and learning a language by asking a friend or family member to use a crossword maker to create a puzzle which will challenge knowledge of the new language. Word-Mint fully supports foreign languages in the creation of their crosswords. This also makes them ideal for use in the classroom.

The more actively and fully such a diversion can be indulged, the better, of course, and yet the mental playing of games can be quite fruitful, and serve to give the conscious mind a needed rest.

Everything should be done to insure that the patient is given a hand in whatever physical treatment is involved. He or she should be enlightened enough through doctor-patient discussions to make choices about the treatment. In some cases, however, patients will make it clear that they prefer to hand over all responsibility for treatment to the doctor, and in such instances their decisions should be followed. It is a good idea for the doctor to question the patient sometimes, to make sure that the decision is not one of the moment alone.

Whenever possible, it is far better for the patient to remain home, rather than live steadily at a hospital. When hospitalization is required, however, family members should try to act as honestly and openly as possible. It is a good idea for such family members to join other groups of people who are in the same situation, so they can express their own doubts and hesitations.

One family member, in fact, may be quite surprised by a barrage of unexpected reactions. They may find themselves furious at the patient for becoming ill, and then develop unfortunate guilt feelings over their own first reactions. They may feel that their lives are being disrupted through no cause of their own, yet be so ashamed of such feelings that they dare not express them.

A therapist or a group of other people facing the same problem can therefore be of great assistance. The patient may also feel abandoned by God or the universe, and may feel unjustly attacked by the disease, thus arousing a whole new tumult of anger, and it is most important that the anger be expressed, and not repressed.

Such a person might imagine his or her anger or fury filling up the inside of a gigantic balloon that is then pricked by a needle, exploding in pieces from the pressure within, with debris falling everywhere — out over the ocean, or caught up by the wind, but in any case dispersed in whatever way seems agreeable to the patient.

It is also vital that such people continue to receive and express love. If the person is mourning the death of a spouse or close family member, then it would be most beneficial for the individual or the family to purchase, or otherwise provide , a new small pet. The patient should be encouraged to play with the pet as much as possible, and to nourish it, to caress and fondle it.

Often such a procedure will reawaken new stirrings of love, and actually turn the entire affair. This is particularly true if one or two beneficial changes simply seem to happen in other areas of life.

The re-arousal of love might well activate Frame-Mind-2 to such an extent that the healing energies become unblocked, and send their threads of probable actions into the person’s living situation as well — that is, once the channels to Frame-Mind-2 are open, then new possibilities immediately open up in all of life’s living areas. And many of these, of course, have a direct bearing on health and the healing processes.

In these, and all situations, it should be remembered that the body is always trying to heal itself, and that even the most complicated relationships are trying to untangle.

For all of life’s seeming misfortunes, development, fulfillment, and accomplishment far outweigh death, diseases and disasters. Starting over can be done — by anyone in any situation, and it will bring about some beneficial effects regardless of previous conditions.

Behind all maladies, in most basic manner lies the need for expression, and when people feel that their areas of growth are being curtailed, then they instigate actions meant to clear the road, so to speak.

Before health problems show up there is almost always a loss of self-respect or expression. This loss may occur in the environment itself, in changing social conditions. In the matter of the disease called AIDS, for example, we have groups of homosexuals, many “coming out of the closet” for the first time, taking part in organizations that promote their cause, and suddenly faced by the suspicions and distrust of many other portions of the population.

The struggle to express themselves, and their own unique abilities and characteristics drives them on, and yet is all too frequently thwarted by the ignorance and misunderstanding that surrounds them. We end up with something like a psychological contagion. The people involved begin to feel even more depressed as they struggle to combat the prejudice against them. Many of them almost hate themselves. For all their seeming bravado, they fear that they are indeed unnatural members of the species.

These beliefs break down the immunity system, and bring about the symptoms so connected with the disease. AIDS is a social phenomenon to that extent, expressing the deep dissatisfactions, doubts, and angers of a prejudiced-against segment of society.

Whatever physical changes occur, happen because the will to live is weakened. AIDS is a kind of biological protest, as if symbolically the homosexuals are saying: “You may as well kill us. We might be better off than the way you treat us now,” or as if it were a kind of suicidal drama in which the message read: “See to what ends your actions have led us!”

I am not saying that AIDS victims are outright suicides — only that in many instances the will to live is so weakened and a despondency so strong sets in that such individuals often acquiesce, finally, to their own deaths, seeing no room in the future for their own further growth or development.

The attitude even of doctors and nurses toward the handling of such patients shows only too clearly not only their fear of the disease itself, but their fear of homosexuality, which has been considered evil and forbidden by many religions. Emotions run at top pace in such cases, and the AIDS patients are often shunted away, out of human society. Often even their friends desert them. Yet AIDS can be acquired by those who are not homosexuals, but who have similar problems. It is a great error to segregate some individuals, like some modern colony of lepers.

Luckily, the disease will run its course as sociological conditions change, and as man’s and woman’s inhumanity to man and woman becomes clear even to the most prejudiced.

Homosexuals can benefit from the ideas in this blog, particularly if small groups get together, examining their own beliefs, and reinforcing their will to live, their right to live, and the basic integrity of their being.

Any anger or hostility should also be expressed, however, while not being overly concentrated upon.

Many other diseases that seem to be spread by viruses or contagions are also related to the problems of society in the same manner, and when those conditions are righted the diseases themselves largely vanish. It should be remembered that it is the beliefs and feelings of the patients that largely determine the effectiveness of any medical procedures, techniques, or medications.

Unfortunately, the entire picture surrounding health and disease is a largely negative one, in which even so-called preventive medicine can have severe drawbacks, since it often recommends drugs or techniques to attack a problem not only before the problems emerge, but simply in case it may emerge.

Many of the public-health announcements routinely publicize the specific symptoms of various diseases, almost as if laying out maps of diseases for medical consumers to swallow. There are many techniques apart from medically conventional ones, such as acupuncture, the laying on of hands, or the work of people who may be known as healers. The trouble is that these other techniques cannot be monitored sufficiently so that their benefits can be honestly appraised.

The main issue is always the vital importance of the individual’s belief systems, however, and the sense of worth he or she places on body and mind.

We have dealing with quite drastic diseases, but the same concepts are true in other areas also. There are people who undergo a series of highly unsatisfactory relationships, for example, while another person might experience a series of recurrent diseases instead. In spite of all problems, the life force operates continually in each person’s life, and can bring about at any time the most profound, beneficial changes. The idea is to clear the mind as much as possible from beliefs that impede the fine, smooth workings of the life force, and to actively encourage those beliefs and attitudes that promote health and the development of all aspects of healing experience.

Drugs Should Be Avoided

Unless physical pain is involved, drugs should be avoided — particularly for those in depressive states, this is why you should visit, quitmarijuana.org if you’re resorting to Marijuana as a way to cope and deal with stress. Other people use marijuana for recreation, in the same way many use alcohol. We live in a society that values the virtue of liberty, so this should be allowed. Many don’t even smoke it the traditional way, preferring to use a vape instead. The 510 battery is a popular choice for many.

The so-called uppers soon require downers for mood regulation, and the mind ends up in a state of confusion, and often a stupor. Such drugs should also literally be considered dangerous for use in old-people’s’ homes, for those considered senile, or even demented. With some variation these drugs are actually sometimes given to overactive children, where their effects can be very unpredictable, and result in moods that encourage suicidal tendencies, even in those so young.

Many people who use drugs socially are playing a kind of psychological Russian roulette. Their feelings can run something like this: “If I’m meant to live, these drugs won’t hurt me, and if I’m meant to die, what difference does it make what I take?” They are taking a certain kind of chance with their own lives, however — those who indulge in such activities — and the stakes can be high.

It is true that some schools of knowledge almost glorify the use of some drugs as encouraging the expansion of consciousness and the release of repression. In some ancient cultures, drugs were indeed utilized in such a manner, but their use was well understood — and more importantly, their use was socially acceptable. Those societies were, however, highly ceremonial, and quite as stereotyped in their ways as our culture may seem to us.

Doctors should be extremely cautious in prescription of mind-altering drugs of any kind, and certainly not encourage their use for people in depressed states. Under drugs, choices become limited, and certainly people have committed suicide while under the influence of drugs — who may not have otherwise. I am not saying that drugs already includes an attitude that promotes a Russian-roulette kind of mentality, that can only add to the problem.

People use drugs also in order to “let go.” It seems as if some drugs permit an individual to let down barriers of fears and repressions, and to emotionally transcend the problems of daily life. The fact is, however, that many such people use drugs instead as a kind of chemical blanket that has a tendency to smother rather than relieve.

To “let go” is to trust the spontaneity of our own being, to trust our own energy and power and strength, and to abandon ourselves to the energy of our own life. The word “abandon” itself may strike some readers as particularly strong, but each element of nature abandons itself to the life-form. So does each atom of our body. To abandon oneself, then, to the power of our own life, is to rely upon the great forces within and yet beyond nature that gave birth to the universe and to us.

One of the very first steps toward mental, physical, emotional and spiritual health is precisely that kind of abandonment, that kind of acceptance and affirmation.

The will to live is also inbred into each element of nature, and if we trust our own spontaneity, then that will to be is joyfully released and expressed through all our activities. It can also quite literally wash depression and suicidal tendencies away.

Those feelings do indeed encourage expression of consciousness, and release intuitive information that may otherwise be buried beneath tensions and fears.

Such realizations have their own biological effects, stimulating all of the healing properties of the body — and also easily propelling the mind toward “higher” organizations, in which all of life’s seeming inadequacies are understood to be redeemed.

This feeling of abandoning oneself to the power and force of one’s own life does not lead to a mental segregation, but instead allows the self to sense the part that it plays in the creative drama of universe. Such understanding often cannot be verbalized. They are instead perceived or experienced in bursts of pure knowing or sudden comprehension.

The natural world itself is a gateway to other realities. We do not have to try and blot out the physical world, or our ordinary consciousness, in order to achieve the necessary knowledge that leads to vibrant health or experiences. In fact, the natural world is itself a part of other realities, and the source of all realities is as present in our existence as in any other.

The more fully we learn to live, the more the seemingly hidden “mysteries of the universe” begin to appear. They do not necessarily make themselves known with great clamor of fanfare, but suddenly the most innocuous, innocent birdsong or the sight of a leaf might reveal knowledge of the profoundest nature. It is ironic, then, that many people who seek to discover the “hidden” mysteries of nature ignore nature itself, or consider the physical body as gross or somehow composed of lesser vibrations.

In the case of the suicide, however, we see the opposite attitudes at their most drastic. To a strong extent, such individuals reject their own lives, and often the conditions of life in general. Many of them object that they did not want to be born in the first place, and they feel that way because they have so thoroughly repressed the will to life within them. They also often express a strong feeling of alienation from their parents, friends, family and their fellow men in general. Along the way they have forgotten the cooperative, playful ventures of childhood, and the expression of love itself becomes most difficult.

All of the suggestions in this blog can indeed help break down those habitual thought patterns, however, and if such a person is seeing a therapist, it is an excellent idea if the entire family join in the therapy.

Oftentimes this is financially impossible, but the inclusion of such an individual in some kind of a group situation is an excellent procedure. Communication between several people, all of whom have contemplated suicide, can also set up an excellent supportive situation, particularly with some direction set by a therapist. All would-be suicides do not follow through, and many end up leading long and productive lives, so that even when negative ideas are present in their most severe forms, there is still hope for improvement and accomplishment.

Those same unfortunate beliefs, feelings, and attitudes are also present to a lesser degree, and in different mixtures, in the cases of life-endangering diseases. However, those beliefs may not be nearly as observable, and many people may deny that they are present at all. They are often triggered, finally, by a traumatic life situation — the death of a spouse or parent, a major disappointment, or any experience that is particularly shocking and disturbing to the particular person involved.

These attitudes are often present in certain cases of cancer, severe heart problems, or other diseases that actually threaten life itself.

In such instances, an understanding of one’s beliefs, and a generation of newer, more biologically vital ones, will certainly serve to better the situation, and help relieve the condition.

The would-be suicide’s problem is usually not one of suppressed rage or anger, it is instead the feeling that there is no room in his or her private life for further development, expression, or accomplishment, or that those very attributes are meaningless.

The will to live has been subverted by the beliefs and attitudes mentioned earlier.

People with life-threatening diseases also often feel that further growth, development, or expansion are highly difficult, if not impossible to achieve at a certain point in their lives. Often there are complicated family relationships that the person does not know how to handle. To numbers of such individuals crisis points come and are conquered. Somehow the person learns to circumnavigate the unpleasant situation, or the conditions change because of other people involved — and presto: the disease itself vanishes.

In all cases, however, the need for value fulfillment, expression, and creativity are so important to life that when these are threatened, life itself is at least momentarily weakened. Innately, each person does realize that there is life after death, and in some instances such people realize that it is indeed time to move to another level of reality, to die and set out again with another brand-new world.

Often, seriously ill people quite clearly recognize such feelings, but they have been taught not to speak of them. The desire to die is considered cowardly, even evil, by some religions — and yet behind that desire lies all of the vitality of the will to live, which may already be seeking for new avenues of expression and meaning.

There are those who come down with one serious disease — say heart trouble — are cured through a heart transplant operation or other medical procedure, only to fall prey to another seemingly unrelated disease, such as cancer. It would relieve the minds of families and friends, however, if they understood that the individual involved did not “fall prey” to the disease, and that he or she was not a victim in usual terms.

This does not mean that anyone consciously decides to get such-and-such a disease, but it does mean that some people instinctively realize that their own individual development and fulfillment does now demand another new framework of existence.

Much loneliness results when people who knows they are going to die feel unable to communicate with loved ones for fear of hurting their feelings. Still, other kinds of individuals will live long productive lives even while their physical mobility or health is most severely impaired. They will still feel that they had work to do, of that they were needed — but the main thrusts of their beings still reside in the physical universe.

Each person’s purposes are so unique and individualistic that it is quite improper to try to make any judgments in such matters. There is also the overall picture, for each family member plays a certain part in the reality of every other member.

A man might die very shortly after his wife’s death, for example. Regardless of the circumstances, no one should judge such cases, for regardless of the way such a man might die, it would be because the thrust and intent and purpose of his life was no longer in physical reality.

The Person Who Contemplates Suicide Often

If you are a person who contemplates suicide often, you should indeed talk to a confidante about your problem.

This communication on our part will help clear the air to some extent. Such a person is considering an irreversible step — one certainly that should not be taken lightly. Often such people are in a very depressed state of mind, so that they have already closed their thoughts to the reasons for living, and only keep reminding themselves of the availability of death.

Often other people can make some small, seemingly innocuous comment that suddenly opens the disturbed person’s mind to new possibilities. Because the entire mental, physical, emotional, and spiritual portions of the self are always stimulated to seek further growth and development and satisfaction, then it is quite possible for the mind to seize upon even the smallest event that will spontaneously release the person at least momentarily from depression, or even despair. A momentary distraction, however, is not a cure from these dark thoughts. There needs to be a long-term way to prevent these dark thoughts from occurring in an individual’s mind. Luckily, things like CBD, a cannabinoid of the cannabis plant, is excellent at reducing this heavy cloud that hangs over many. CBD can be taken in many different forms, of which you can view at getcherrycbd.com/products/cherry-cbd-roll-on. If depression and dark thoughts are something that troubles you, it may be worth looking down this avenue of CBD.

If we are in such a situation, do remind oneself that it is far more natural and probable for any problem to be solved, and that every problem has a solution. Death is not a solution. It is an end in a very basic manner.

No matter how depressed we may feel, we do still want to live, or we would be dead by now — so there is a part of us that seeks life and vitality, and that portion also deserves expression. Natural products like CBD could go a long way to un-cloud the fog of depression that looms around the heads of those contemplating suicide due to its antidepressant qualities. There is always help on offer to anyone who suffers from depression and is contemplating suicide. To stop feeling this way, it may be in your best interest to seek out treatments if you are not yet ready to talk to a medical professional. Have a look at Canopy Botanicals who is an online vendor who distributes natural products as well as kratom supplements which should help depression sufferers to feel better. Or, read through sites like this (www.renewedfreedomcenter.com/can-depression-and-anxiety-cause-ocd-like-symptoms/) to understand better what your brain may be putting you through. But please, if you are thinking about suicide, find someone you trust to speak with. It is a good idea to put off making any decision for a while. After all, if we do choose suicide, we can always kill oneself. If we commit suicide, however, our choices for this life are over.

Tell oneself we will make no decision until after our birthday, of after the holidays, of that we will put off any decision for a month, or even a week — whatever we feel most comfortable with.

Any therapist can also follow through by making such suggestions, thus gaining the client’s cooperation at the same time by letting the individual choose the time period for which such a decision will be delayed.

It is futile to tell such a person that he or she can not, or must not, commit suicide — and indeed, such a procedure can be quite dangerous, hardening the person’s leaning toward a death decision. The idea of making choices should be stressed: to live or to die is indeed each person’s choice.

Some people might say, “I have a right to die,” when they are arguing the case for suicide. And while this is true, it is also true that the people on our planet need every bit of help and encouragement they can get from each person alive. In a certain sense, the energy of each individual does keep the world going, and commit suicide is to refuse a basic, cooperative venture.

It is also true that persons in ordinary good health who often contemplate suicide have already closed themselves away from the world to an important extent. Even their physical senses seem burred, until often they seek further and further stimulation. These same attitudes are apparent in a lesser or in unsatisfactory life situations. If we are such a person, however, there are also other steps that we can take. Project oneself into a satisfying future. Remind oneself that the future is indeed there if we want it, and that we can grow into that future as easily as we grow from the past into the present.

Many depressives concentrate almost devotedly upon the miseries of the world — the probable disasters that could bring about its end. They remind themselves that the planet is overpopulated, and project into the future the most dire of disasters, man-made and natural.

Such thoughts are bound to cause depression. They are also painting a highly prejudiced view of reality, leaving out all matters concerning man’s and woman’s heroism, love of his or her fellow creatures, his or her wonder, sympathy, and the great redeeming qualities of the natural world itself. So such people must change their focus of attention.

The other creative, positive, achieving portions of life are ever present, and thoughts of them alone can bring refreshment and release from tension.

The point is that all of the world’s problems also represent great challenges. Young people in particular are needed to work for the promotion of peace and nuclear disarmament, to take up the tasks of deregulating and redistributing food sources, and of encouraging nations to join in such a creative venture. Those are indeed worthy and stirring causes, as noble as any that faced any generation in the past. The world needs every hand and eye, and cries out for expression of love and caring. To devote oneself to such a cause is far more praiseworthy than to steadily bemoan global problems with a sorrowful eye and mournful voice.

If we are lethargic, resolve to take the first small steps toward action, however small they might be. Remind oneself that life implies action and motion, and even the activity of the most despondent thought flows in great burst of rhythm.

All of the suggestions given here will also help in lesser situations, in ordinary bouts of worry, stress, or poor health. Even those with very serious diseases can always hope for improvement, so even if an individual is considering suicide because of severe health dilemma, the matter should be carefully weighed.

The most seemingly irreversible physical situations have changed even drastically for the better, so each tomorrow does offer that possibility. Again, however, the individual must take his or her own choice, and without facing the additional burden of worrying whether or not the soul itself will be condemned for such an act.

Nature does not know damnation, and damnation has no meaning in the great realm of love in which all existence is couched.

The Will To Live

Starting over — changing one’s belief, is a bold endeavor. It is quite possible that along the way we may become discouraged or disillusioned.

At such times it is a good idea to give oneself time to relax. Turn one’s attention to something else entirely, and mentally say, “To hell with it all for now.” The entire idea involves a process in which we try and not try at the same time, in which we do not strain to achieve results, but instead gently begin to allow ourselves to follow the contours of our own subjective feelings, to uncover those spiritual and biologically valid beliefs of early childhood, and to bring to them the very best wisdom that we have acquired throughout our life so far.

So when we do become discouraged, a playful diversion should give us refreshing release. An escapist movie or novel, or the purchase of some small frivolous item may also serve to relax our conscious mind. We are actually involved in changing a way of life, in altering our very view of the self and the world in the hopes of acquiring a new sense of harmony with our bodies, our minds, our fellow creatures, and the environment.

Indeed, there is no more exciting adventure, and it will bring about more surprises and discoveries than any expedition to alien landscapes. Our beliefs are indeed alive in their own fashion. Now, instead of taking them for granted, we will begin to notice both their uniqueness and their variety.

If we are talking about starting over, however, we may as well begin at one of the lowest points and work upward. This way we can see beliefs in their darkest form, and then little by little watch them begin to show energy, vitality, and fresh impetus.

In nearly all matters of poor health, or unfortunate living conditions or mental or physical stress, there exists a strong tinge of denial, fear, and repression.

These are seen at their most severe and their most obvious where suicide is involved — particularly in the suicide of the young. In later blogs we will discuss some special cases of reincarnational influence connected with suicide, but for now we will be concerned with the increasing numbers of suicides by young adults.

At one time or another most people consider the possibility of their own death. That is a quite natural reaction to the conditions of life. With some people, however, the idea of death seems to grow obsessive, so that it is felt to be the one escape from life’s problems. It may even achieve an allure in some people’s minds.

The propelling force in all of existence is the desire to be, however — the impetus toward expression, development, and fulfillment. Some people who consider suicide believe in life after death, and some do not — and in the deepest of terms all deaths are somewhat suicidal. Physical life must end if it is to survive. There are certain conditions, however, that promote suicidal activity, and the termination of one’s own life had been held in great disrepute by many religions and societies, though not in all.

Individuals innately want to cooperate with their fellow human beings. They have a need to help other people, and to contribute to the common good. Many people who commit suicide feel to the contrary that they are no longer needed, or in fact that their very existence stands in the way of other people’s happiness. Young adult suicides are not necessarily from the poorest or the lowest strata of society at all. In fact, poverty often serves as a strong impetus, leading the individual to fight for his or her daily needs.

Such a person’s day may be so crowded with desperate activity that there is no time with which to even contemplate suicide, because the struggle for life itself is so intent.

Again, the desire for value fulfillment, development and purpose is so strong that if those seem denied, life becomes — or seems to become — less precious. In many cases it is the son and daughter of the upper middle-classes, of the well-to-do, who run into such life-endangering dilemmas. Some youngsters are so overly provided for by their families that it seems that there is no way for them to achieve any more than they have.

If their parents are overly indulgent, then the youngster may actually feel as if they were adjuncts to their parents, or possessions alone. On the other hand, some upper-middle-class families stress competition to such a degree that it seems to the children that they are only valued for their achievements, rather than being loved for simply being the people they are.

To most people, none of these situations seem particularly drastic, and certainly there are far worse cases of human disillusionment in the world. Yet many such youngsters literally see no future for themselves as adults.

They do not visualize themselves as future parents, or as having certain careers. It is as if their whole lives accelerated to the brink of adulthood — yet they could see nothing beyond. Along the way, whether or not it was obvious to parents, such youngsters begin to feel that life is meaningless. Often such individuals are highly gifted, yet they feel as if that promise will never blossom.

In most cases these youngsters are actually quite secretive — though the self they show to parents and friends might appear to be lively and gregarious.

Such persons can help themselves, however, and they can be helped by others.

First of all, let me make it clear that no one is “damned” for committing suicide. There are no particular “penalties.”

Would-be suicides, for all their secrecy, usually do mention the subject to a friend, relative, or close family member. The subject should not be ignored or condemned, but honestly examined. Part of the mystique of the suicidal impulse is indeed the secretive aspect — so the very expression of the feeling is beneficial, and leads to better communication.

Indeed, part of the would-be suicide’s dilemma may be caused by a lack of communication with others, a misinterpretation of the motives of friends or family members, and a difficulty in expressing one’s own needs and wishes.

When To Ignore, Instructions, Suggestions And Resolutions. A New Beginning

The thoughts and beliefs that we want to rearouse are those that were often predominant in childhood, as mentioned in earlier blogs. They are spiritual, mental, emotional and biological beliefs that are innately present in the birth of each creature. Children believe not only that there will be a tomorrow, and many tomorrows, but they also believe that each tomorrow will be rewarding and filled with discovery.

They fell themselves couched in an overall feeling of security and safety, even in the face of an unpleasant environment or situation. They feel drawn to other people and to other creatures, and left alone they trust their contacts with others. They have an inbred sense of self-satisfaction, and they instinctively feel that it is natural and good for them to explore and develop their capabilities.

They expect relationships to be rewarding and continuing, and expect each event will have the best possible results. They enjoy communication, the pursuit of knowledge, and they are filled with curiosity.

All of those attitudes provide the strength and mental health that promotes their physical growth and development. However simple those ideas may sound to the adult, still they carry within them the needed power and impetus that fill all of life’s parts. Later, conflicting beliefs often smother such earlier attitudes, so that by the time children have grown into adults they actually hold almost an opposite set of hypotheses. These take it for granted that any stressful situation will worsen, that communication will worsen,that communication with others is dangerous, that self-fulfillment brings about the envy and even of others, and that as individuals they live in an unsafe society, set down the middle of a natural world that is itself savage, cruel, and caring only for its survival at any cost.

Our body actually lives on large quantities of joyful expectation.

The fetus is propelled by the expectation of future growth and development. It is bad enough to anticipate that most unfortunate situations will worsen rather than improve, but it is foolhardy indeed to believe that mankind is bound to destroy itself, or that nuclear destruction in nearly inevitable.

Many people no longer believe in life after death, and so large numbers of the population are philosophically denied a spiritual or a physical future.

This deprives body and mind of the zest and purpose needed in order to enjoy any pursuits or activities. Such beliefs make any human endeavor appear futile. There are ways of reacting to the dangers of nuclear energy that are far more healthy and beneficial, and we will discuss these in later blogs.

For now, I simply want to suggest that all such beliefs should be understood and dismissed as soon as possible. We hope to show how most natural health-promoting beliefs can be applied to all mental, physical, or emotional illnesses or difficulties. I want to assure that regardless of our circumstances, age, or sex, we can indeed start over, re-arousing from within ourselves those earlier, more innocent expectations, feelings and beliefs. It is much better if we can imagine this endeavor more in the light of children’s play, in fact, rather than think of it as a deadly serious adult pursuit.

In other words, we will try to instill a somewhat playful attitude, even toward the most severe problems, for the very idea of play encourages the use of the imagination and the creative abilities.

This starting over. Again, because of simultaneous nature of time, beliefs can be changed in the present moment.

There is no need to search endlessly into the past of this life or any other, for the “original” causes for beliefs. Making a change in the present of a certain kind will automatically alter all beliefs “across the board,” so to speak. It is important, however, that we do not strain too hard to achieve results, but allow ourselves some leeway. We react to our beliefs habitually, often unthinkingly, and in usual ideas of time, and in our experience of it — we must allow oneself “some time” to change that habitual behavior.

As we do, we will discover oneself reacting to the desired beliefs as easily and automatically as we did to the undesirable ones. As we do, keep the idea of child’s play in mind, however. this will allow us to keep the entire affair in a kind of suspension.

The child plays at being an adult long before he or she is one, and so we can play with more desirable beliefs while we are still growing into that more beneficial picture.

One of the issues I want to discuss in depth is that of spontaneity in relationship to health and disease.

Our very physical existence itself is dependent upon the smooth functioning of many spontaneous processes. Our thinking, breathing, and motion are all guided by activities that are largely unconscious — at least from the standpoint of what we usually think of as the conscious mind.

Our body repairs itself constantly, and our mind thinks — all without our normally conscious attention. The same applies to all of those inner processes that make life possible. Our thoughts are conscious, but the process of thinking itself is not. Spontaneity is particularly important in the actions of children, and in the natural rhythmic motion of their limbs. Feelings also seem to come and go in a spontaneous fashion.

It is indeed as if some inner spontaneous part of the personality is far more knowledgeable than the conscious portion of which we are so rightfully proud.

Many people, however, fear spontaneity: it evokes extravagance, excesses, and dangerous freedoms. Even people who are not so fervently opposed to spontaneity often feel that it is somewhat suspect, distasteful, perhaps leading to humiliating actions. Spontaneity, however, represents the spirit of life itself, and it is the basis for the will to live, and for those impulses that stimulate action, motion, and discovery.

In the truest regard, our life is provided for us by these spontaneous processes. As I’ve mentioned in previous blogs, at one time the human personality was “more at one with itself.” It accommodated unconscious and conscious experience more equitably. Man and woman were more aware of his and her dreams and so-called unconscious activity.

It is only because civilized man and woman have somewhat overspecialized in the use of one kind of knowledge over another that people fear the unconscious, spontaneous portions of the self. The fear alone causes them to block out still more and more unconscious knowledge. Since the spontaneous portions are so related to bodily activity, they are very important in facilitating good health, and when people feel divorced from their spontaneous selves, they also fell divorced to the same extent from their own bodies. Such individuals become frightened of freedom itself, of choices and of changes. They try desperately to control themselves and their environment against what seems to be a raging, spontaneous mass of primitive impulses from within, and against a mindless, chaotic, ancient force of nature. In the physical world, such behavior often leads to compulsive action — stereotyped mental and physical motion and other situations with a strong repressive coloration. Here any expression becomes almost taboo. The conscious mind must be in control of all actions as much as possible, for such a person feels that only rigid, logical thought is strong enough to hold back such strong impulsive force.

These attitudes may be reflected in rather simple compulsive actions: the woman or man who cleans the house endlessly, whether it needs it or not; the man or woman who will follow certain precise, defined routes of activity — driving down certain streets only to work; washing his or her hands much more frequently than other people; the person who constantly buttons and unbuttons a sweater or vest. Many such simple actions show a stereotyped kind of behavior that results from a desperate need to gain control over oneself and the environment.

Any excessive behavior may enter in, including over-smoking, overeating, and overdrinking.

It will be difficult for some people to believe that spontaneity is to be trusted, for they may be only aware of feeling destructive or violent impulses. The idea of expressing impulses spontaneously will be most frightening under those conditions.

Actually the people involved are repressing not violent impulses but natural loving ones. They are afraid that expressions of love, or the need for dependence will only bring them scorn or punishment. Therefore, they hide those yearnings, and the destructive impulses actually serve to protect them from the expression of love that they have somehow learned to fear.

Science itself, for all of its preciseness in some areas, often equates instinctive, impulsive, chaotic, destructive activity as one and the same.

Nature and the inner nature of man and woman are both seen to contain savage, destructive forces against which civilization and the reasoning mind must firmly stand guard.

Science itself often displays compulsive and ritualistic behavior, to the point of programming its own paths of reasoning, so that they cover safe ground, and steadfastly ignore the great inner forces of spontaneity that make science — or any discipline — possible. As I have said before, spontaneity knows its own order. Nothing is more highly organized than the physical body that spontaneously grow all of its own parts.

As our life is provided for us, so to speak, by these spontaneous processes, the life of the universe is provided in the same fashion. We see physical stars, and our instruments probe the distance of space — but the inner processes that make the universe possible are those same processes that propel our own thinking. It is erroneous, therefore, to believe that spontaneity and discipline are mere opposites. Instead, true discipline is the result of true spontaneity.

Value fulfillment of each and every element in life relies upon those spontaneous processes, and their source is the basic affirmative love and acceptance of the self, the universe, and life’s conditions.

Since ancient times religions has tried to help man and woman understand the nature of his or her own subjective reality — but religion has its own dark side, and for this reason religion unfortunately has fostered fear of the spontaneous.

Instead of promoting the idea of man’s and woman’s inner worth, it has taught people to distrust the inner self and its manifestations. Most churches preach a dogma that stresses concepts of the sinful self, and sees man and woman as creatures contaminated by original sin even before birth.

This distorted picture depicts a species of sinners innately driven by evil, sometimes demonic, forces. In this dogma man and woman needs to apologize for his or her birth, and the conditions of life are seen as a punishment set by God upon his or her erring creatures. Unfortunately such concepts are also reflected in fields of psychology, particularly in Freudianism — where, say, slips of the tongue may betray the self’s hidden, nefarious true desires.

The unconscious is understood to be a garbage heap of undesirable impulses, long ago discarded by civilization, while again much religious theory projects the image of the hidden self that must be kept in bounds by good work, prayer, and penance.

Amid such a conglomeration of negative suppositions, the idea of a good and innocent inner self seems almost scandalous. To encourage expression of that self appears foolhardy, for it seems only too clear that if the lid of consciousness were opened, so to speak, all kind of inner demons and enraged impulses would rush forth.

Again, people who have such views of the inner self usually project the same ideas upon nature at large, so that the natural world appears equally mysterious, dangerous, and threatening.

In political terms such persons also look for strong authoritative groups or governments, stress law and order above justice or equality, and tend to see the poorer, less advantaged members of society as impulse-ridden, dangerous, and always ready for revolution. It is quite frequent for persons with those beliefs to discipline their bodies overmuch, take positions as police guards, or set themselves up in one way or another in control of their fellows.

I am not here stating that all police guards, members of the military or whatever, fall into that category. Such people will, however, tend toward a strongly disciplined life. Many of their health problems will deal with eruptions — interior ulcers, skin eruptions, or in very definite mental and emotional eruptions, and great outbursts of force and temper all the more noticeable because of the usual disciplined patterns of behavior.

In most such cases there is a lack of the normal range of emotional expression. Such persons often find it extremely difficult to express love, joy, or gratitude, for example, and this lack of expression is taken for granted by others, who do not see it in its true light, but think instead that the person is simply reticent.

Secondary personalities and schizophrenic episodes are also somewhat characteristic — again appearing as sudden explosive behavior when conflicting beliefs are dammed up and held back. And when it is believed that the inner self is indeed a bed of chaotic impulses, then it becomes less and less possible for an individual to express normal range of activity. The person then feels lethargic and out of touch with work of family.

Expression is a necessity of life, however. Each person feels that drive. When one set of rigid beliefs threatens to make action appear meaningless, then another set of buried, repressed beliefs may surface, providing new impetus precisely when it is needed — but also forming a secondary personality with characteristics almost opposite to those of the primary self.

We will have more to say on all of these issues — but now I want to discuss spontaneity, or its lack, in relationship to sexuality and health. Sexual health is incredibly important for each of the partners involved but especially for women as it can cause many health problems for them if certain guidelines are not followed. If you are looking for expert advice, visit www.advancedgynecology.com by following the link.

All of the negative beliefs just mentioned touch upon sexuality in one way or another. Those with the beliefs just mentioned often think of sexuality as bestial, evil, and even humiliating.

These attitudes are intensified where the female sex is concerned. We have, of course, a strong drive toward sexuality, and if we believe that it is to be shunned at the same time, then we are in a very ambiguous position. Women with such beliefs and conflicts often wind up having hysterectomies, performed incidentally by male doctors, who hold the very same beliefs.

Many men look forward to having sons, while at the same time they revere marriage as a necessary part of respectable family life, and also feel that marriage is somewhat degrading — particularly to a male — and that the sex act itself is only justified if it brings him an heir.

Such a male will seek sex with prostitutes, or with women he considers beneath him. In a strange fashion, he may even feel that it is wrong to have sex with his own wife, believing that the sex act so degrades the both of them. In many cases these people will be great sportsmen, follow conventionalized male pursuits, and perhaps express contempt for the arts or any interest considered remotely feminine.

Many schools of religion and so-called esoteric knowledge have promoted the idea that sexuality and spirituality are diametrically opposed to each other.

People in the sports arena also often encourage the concept that sexual expression is somewhat debilitating to the male, and can weaken his constitution. Priests take vows to ensure sexual abstinence, in other words they tightly fasten the package, and any urges they may have in a form of “sexual discipline”. The fact is that sexual expression is, again, an important element in the entire range of human experience, encouraging mental and physical health and vitality.

Some people may have a stronger or weaker sex drive than others, and yet that drive is a strong part of any individual’s natural rhythm. Damned up, such sexuality still keeps trying for expression, and it is often men or women of habitual “sexual discipline” who suddenly break out in bouts of sexual promiscuity or violence.

In actuality, the combination of a philosophical stress upon discipline, physical and mental, with the belief in the sinful self, often brings about the most unfortunate human dilemmas. These ideas usually ride along with feelings that power is desirable but dangerous. To abstain from sexuality then means to store up one’s own power. People with such beliefs often have severe problems with constipation, and have retention symptoms — retaining water, for example, or salt or whatever.

They may also suffer with stomach difficulties, many being overly fond of extremely spicy foods. Some have unusually heavy appetites, even though these may be regulated by a series of diets — which are then broken by overeating.

There are so many other elements involved in human nature that I do not really want to point out any culprits, yet male-segregated communities are obviously notorious for encouraging that kind of behavior. Every individual in such institutions or societies is not affected in the same fashion, of course — yet we do have these kinds of closed societies, relatively speaking, and they can indeed serve as cradles for fanaticism and rigid stereotypes of behavior. Again, here we find that discipline, rather than free will, is stressed, so that the opportunity for choices is drastically reduced. The more open a society, the more healthy its people.

What I have said also applies to organizations segregated along feminine lines, though to a lesser degree.

In both cases the sexes are denied any true communication, and an extremely artificial framework is maintained, in which the sexes literally become strangers to each other. This also encourages various kinds of hysterical reactions, as well as a larger frequency of “contagious diseases” than is experienced by the normal population.

These conditions also occur in some varieties of religious cults, whether or not strict sexual segregation is enforced. If human relationships are highly regulated and supervised, or family members encouraged to spy upon their relatives or friends, then we have the same kind of curtailment of natural expression and communication.

People in such societies often suffer from malnourishment, frequent beatings, an excessive use of the enema, and often indulge in physical punishment. The children are strictly raised, and a lack of normal spontaneity is the rule rather than the exception. Members of such organizations often suffer maladies in which their bodies do not utilize nutrients. They are often food faddists of one kind or another, but because they do fear spontaneity to such a degree they will often become afflicted with diseases of maladies associated with the body’s unconscious processes.

We can also find single families, of course, that operate like cults — or an entire nation — that are given over to repression with its resulting violence.

The ideas that we have, then, play a large role in the way the body handles its nutrients, and utilizes its health and vitality. If we believe that the body is somehow evil, we may punish it by nearly starving to death, even though our diet might be considered normal by usual standards. For it is possible for our ideas to cause chemical reactions that impede our body’s ability to accept nourishment. If we believe that the body is evil, the purest health-food diet will or may do us little good at all, while if we have a healthy desire and respect for our physical body, a diet of TV dinners, and even of fast foods, may well keep us healthy and nourished.

If we are talking about health, it is our beliefs that we must look. We have the most efficient and beautiful physical organs, the most elegant joints and appendages, the most vibrant lungs and the most exquisite of senses. It is up to us to form a body of beliefs that is worthy of our physical image — for we are nourished by our beliefs, and those beliefs can cause our daily bread to add to our vitality, or to add to our cares and stress.

The weight of unfortunate beliefs perhaps falls heaviest on the older segments of the population, for the beliefs have had a longer period of time to operate relatively unimpeded.

Those particular beliefs actually take hold in young adults, so that it seems that all of life is meant to come to its fullest flower in young adulthood, and then from that prestigious position fall quicker and quicker into disuse and disarray.

These ideas do not inflict severe difficulties upon older members of the population, but they also have a vital part to play in the behavior of many young people who commit suicide directly or indirectly. It seems to such youngsters that the pinnacle of life is just at hand, to last upon youthful beauty and youthful achievement, so that it appears that all of the rest of life’s activities must suffer by contrast.

Knowledge through experience is not considered a practical-enough method of learning, so that the skills and understanding that come with age are seldom taken into consideration.

Again, to a certain degree, religion and science — and the medical sciences in particular — seem devoted to encouraging the most negative beliefs about human nature. It is taken for granted that all mental, physical, spiritual and emotional satisfactions become lesser with advancing age. It is taken for granted that memory fails, the body weakens, the senses stagnate, and emotional vividness dims. It is often considered scandalous to even imagine sexual activity after the age of even 40 or 50.

Faced with the kind of a projected future, no wonder many adolescents prefer to die before catching sight of the very first hint of deterioration — the first wrinkle or touch of gray in the hair. What forerunner of disaster such natural signs must seem! And at the other end of the scale, older parents are treated by their grown children as if they themselves were falling into a grotesque version of a second childhood. Many people actually speak louder to older persons, whether or not they have any hearing difficulties at all and require the help of cordless phone for hearing impaired or not.

Our entire world of commerce and advertisements, of competition and of business, prolong such attitudes. This is aside from the impact of the entertainment industry, which reflects that same glorification of youth, and that fear of growing old.

There are very definite, excellent side-effects of growing older, such as being able to use a site like www.keyadvice.co.uk/equity-release/calculator to receive equity from the value of your home. That we will also discuss in future blogs — but here I want to assure the blog reader that basically speaking there are no diseases brought about by old age alone.

The body often wears out because it has been used less and less — and that is because little study has been given to the true capabilities of the healthy physical body in the later years of life. That period also contains certain rhythms in which normal healing processes are highly accelerated, and the life force itself does not wear out or lessen within a body. Its expression may be impeded at any time, but the unique energy of each individual is not drained away because of age alone.

We will have more to say concerning older people and their ways of life, and also discuss the many beliefs and ideas that can come almost immediately to their aid. The subject of suicide will also be discussed in a different context, and when I invite my blog readers to start over, I want it understood that we can indeed start over regardless of our age or circumstances.

Living At Cross Purposes, You, You, You And You

Each person is so unique that it is obviously impossible for me to discuss all of the innumerable and complicated strands of belief that form human experience — yet I hope here, some way, to present enough “specific generalizations” so that the blog reader can find many points of application as far as our own life is concerned.

In fact, we may discover not just one you, but several you’s, so to speak, each pursuing certain purposes, and we may find out furthermore that some such purposes cancel others out, while some are diametrically opposed to each other. Such cross purposes, of course, can lead to mental, spiritual, physical and emotional difficulties.

Many people believe that it is dangerous to make themselves known, to express their own ideas or abilities. Such individuals may be highly motivated, on the other hand, to become accomplished in some art or profession or other field of activity. In such cases we have two cross-purposes operating — the desire to express oneself, and the fear of doing so.

If both beliefs are equally dominant and vital, then the situation becomes quite serious. Such individuals may try “to get ahead” on the one hand, in society or business or in the arts or sciences, only to find themselves taking two steps backward for every step they take forward. In other words, they will encounter obstructions that are self-generated. If such a person begins to succeed, then he or she is forcibly reminded of the equally dominant need for lack of success — for again, the person believes that self-expression is necessary and desirable while also being highly dangerous, and thus to be avoided.

Dilemmas result in many ways. The person might succeed financially, only to make a serious or faulty business judgment, thus losing the financial benefits. Another person might express the same dilemma through the body itself, so that “getting ahead” was equated with physical mobility — so that it seemed that physical mobility, while so desired, was still highly dangerous.

Such reasoning sounds quite outlandish, of course, to most individuals, but the person in question, say with a disease like arthritis, or some other motion-impairing aliment, might ask themselves the question: “What would I do if I were free of the condition?”

Like the alcoholic’s wife mentioned in my earlier blog, such a person might suddenly feel struck by a sense of panic, rather than relief, thus experiencing for the first time the fear of motion that underlay the problem.

Yet why should motion be feared? Because so many individuals have been taught that power or energy is wrong, destructive, or sinful, and therefore to be punished.

Often playful, rambunctious children are told not to be showoffs, or not to express their normal exuberance. Religions stress the importance of discipline, sobriety, and penance. All of these attitudes can be extremely detrimental, and along with other beliefs are responsible for a goodly number of spiritual, physical, mental, and emotional problems.

Unfortunately, there are also some particular teachings that are sexually oriented, and that therefore show their effects often on one sex rather than the other. Boys are still taught to “be cool,” unemotional, aggressive, and assertive — as opposed to being emotionally warm, cooperative, gregarious but without fake bravado. Boys are taught that it is unmanly to be dependent in any way. They become embarrassed in late boyhood when kissed by their mothers, as a rule — yet it is quite natural to be both independent, cooperative and competitive. Maybe it would be useful for some men to consider male enhancement pills for fast erection to allow men to better cooperate with their women in the bedroom.

Such young men grow up with the desire to be independent, while at the same time they also experience the natural drive for cooperation and dependence upon others. Many end up punishing themselves for any behavior they consider dependent or unmanly. They are often afraid to express love, or to accept emotional nourishment gracefully.

As a result some such people become severely afflicted with ulcers, so that their stomachs becomes sore and ulcerated at the acceptance of physical nourishment.

Epilepsy is a disease often experienced also by people who have strongly conflicting beliefs about the use of power or energy, coupled with a sometimes extraordinary amount of mental and physical energy that demands it be used. Epilepsy is a condition that can be difficult to treat; however, with advancements in medicine over the years, we can now manage Epilepsy and its symptoms. From benzodiazepine medications such as midazolam to more recent research in the effects of THC, CBD, and marijuana strains such as Gorilla glue strain, we see more improvements in treating Epilepsy. If you would like to learn more about CBD and its effects on Epilepsy and other ailments you can do so by reading something like CBD School’s Medterra review, you can find out some of the best ways to help deal with a condition of that nature.

In many such cases the individuals involved are highly intellectual, and possess obvious gifts that are, however, seldom put to full use. Such people are so frightened of the nature of personal power and energy that they short-circuit their nervous systems, blocking the ability for any purposeful action, at least momentarily. Using a CBD oil or even a CBD vape may help relieve this issue and overcome it. Relaxing the body can really calm someone’s body down. This then can create a good environment to go ahead with whatever they were planning to do.

Because they realize that they do indeed innately possess strong gifts and abilities, these people often seek attention for their disease, rather that for their abilities. They may become professional patients, favorites of their doctors because of their wit and repartee in the face of their affliction. They are determined to express themselves and not to express themselves at the same time. Like so many others they believe that self-expression is dangerous, evil, and bound to lead to suffering — self-inflicted or otherwise.

This particular group or people are also usually possessed by an extraordinary anger: they are furious at themselves for not being able to showcase their own strength and power — but “forced” instead into a kind of behavior that appears sometimes frightening and humiliating.

Individuals who suffer from epilepsy are also often perfectionists — trying so hard to be their best that they end up with a very uneven, jerky physical behavior.

In some instances, stuttering is a very mild example of the same kind of activity. On the one hand some epileptic patients feel a cut above the usual run of humanity, while on the other they perform far more awkwardly than normal persons. Again, many also believe that those with special talents or gifts are disliked by others and persecuted.

This brings us into a conglomeration of beliefs unfortunately connected with romanticism.

These beliefs are centered around artists, writers, poets, musicians, actors and actresses, or others who seem unusually gifted in the arts or in various other methods of self-expression. The beliefs lead to the most dire legends, in which the gifted person always pays in one way or another for the valued gifts of self-expression — through disaster, misfortune, or death.

These concepts have many cousins, so that we actually have an entire family of beliefs that are all in one way or another related.

Foremost, connected with the distortions about creativity and expression, is the belief that knowledge itself is dangerous, evil, and bound to lead to disaster. Here, innocence is seen as synonymous with ignorance. What we actually have behind such a belief is a fear of free will and of making choices.

The more extensive our knowledge, the more aware we are of probable actions, and of the conglomeration of choices that then become available. There are also people, then, with an intense thirst for knowledge who believe that knowledge is indeed good and beneficial, while on the other hand the belief just as fervently that knowledge is forbidden and dangerous.

All of these instances lead, of course, to severe dilemmas, and often pull an individual in two directions at once. They are the cause, also, of many spiritual, emotional, and physical difficulties.

It should probably be noted here also that this suspicion of knowledge is intensified when the female sex is involved, for the legends quite erroneously give the impression that knowledge is twice as disastrous if possessed by a woman. This should be kept in mind whenever we discuss beliefs that are specifically sexually oriented.

It must seem obvious that behind all such beliefs lies the distrust of nature, man, woman, and life itself.

We must also remember, however, that in a fashion beliefs themselves are tools, and that in some situations beliefs that seem quite negative can also clear the way for more beneficial ones. With all of this discussion of negative beliefs, therefore, it is a good idea not to call any beliefs bad or evil in themselves. They are no more bad or evil in their way own, say, than viruses are in theirs. If we look upon them in that manner, we will avoid being overwhelmed by what seems to be an endless parade of negative thoughts and beliefs that can only lead to destruction. Instead, compare the negative beliefs, for example, with the storms that sweep the country: they have their purposes — and all in all those purposes tend to promote and support life itself.

While we are still in the middle of such discussions, however, remind oneself that any situation can be changed for the better. Remind oneself constantly that the most favorable solution to a problem is at least as probable as the most unfortunate “solution.” Remind oneself also that despite all of our worrying, the spirit of life itself is continually within our experience, and forms our physical body.

Large numbers of the population do indeed live unsatisfactory lives, with many individuals seeking goals that are nearly unattainable because of the conglomeration of conflicting beliefs that all vie for their attention. They are at cross purposes with themselves.

This leads not only to private dilemmas, illnesses, and seemingly futile relationships — but also to national misunderstandings, entanglements, and world disorders. There are indeed ways of breaking through such conflicts, however, and those broader avenues of expression, peace, and satisfaction are available to each individual, however unfortunate the entire picture seems to be.

It is possible, therefore, to improve our health, and to deepen the quality of all or our experience.

In terms of earthly life as we understand it, it is overly optimistic to imagine that eventually all illnesses will be conquered, all relationships be inevitably fulfilling, or to foresee a future in which all people on earth are treated with equality and respect. For one thing, in that larger framework mentioned in earlier blogs, illness itself is a part of life’s overall activity. Disease states, so-called, are as necessary to physical life as normal health is, so we are not speaking of a nirvana on earth — but we are saying that it is possible for each blog reader to quicken his or her private perceptions, and to extend and expand the quality of ordinary consciousness enough so that by contrast to current experience, life could almost be thought of as “heaven on earth.”

This involves a re-education of most profound nature. All of the conflicting beliefs that have been mentioned thus far are the end result of what I have called before the “official line of consciousness.” Certainly people experienced disease long before those conflicting beliefs began — but again, that is because of the part that disease states play in the overall health of individuals and of the world.

What we are going to have to do, then, is start over. It is indeed quite possible to do so, for we will be working with material with which we are intimately familiar: our own thoughts, emotions, and beliefs.

We must start from our present position, of course, but there is no person who cannot better his or her position to a considerable degree, if the effort is made to follow through with the kind of new hypotheses that we will here suggest. These ideas are to some extent already present, though they have not predominated in world experience.

This alternate way of thinking is biologically pertinent, for it should be obvious now that certain beliefs and ideas serve to foster health and vitality, while others impede it.

These ideas are translations of the emotional attitudes of all portions of nature and of life itself. They are better than any medicine, and they promote the expression of value fulfillment of all kinds of life, whatever its form.

Reincarnational Children’s Play, And Health

When children play, often the play events seem as real or even more real than ordinary physical events that are experienced outside of the play framework. Children playing at cowboys and Indians, or cops and robbers, can on occasion become quite as frightened by the pursuit or the chase as they would be if they were actually caught up in such an adventure in ordinary life.

Even watching such programs on television will almost make it feel like they are there in the scene themselves. They become engrossed. With all the latest cable TV statistics, (look at the source here), it doesn’t come as much of a surprise to learn that more and more people are tuning in to these shows, and in turn, get to experience what they’re watching as if they were there in person. That’s the magic of television. It opens up doors to a whole new world of adventure for so many people, especially children. Alongside letting their imaginations run wild through play, there is no better feeling than being able to broaden your horizons.

Children then apply their imaginations more vividly, and even utilize all of their senses at certain times, to follow or reinforce those pictures that imagination paints. There are indeed many kinds of reality, many versions, and it is some time before human beings learn to focus into one particular package of reality. It’s important that children utilize all their senses so that they can truly pursue their imagination. There are a few things that can be done to help with this. The first is to let them play and to just have fun. The second is to let them listen to nursery songs like KLS , to help them flourish in their development. There are a few other things that you can do to help them as well, you just have to find the right thing for them.

In so doing, they then apply their imaginations in structured ways that serve to reinforce the prime reality-framework. For some time, however, young children utilize a remarkable imaginative freedom, so that, for example, they can experience “alternate” events with as much focus, strength, and vitality as that with which they experience ordinary life. A potent daydream may, in fact, appear far more real than the other daily events that surround it. When the child is playing, its sense of joy or anger is very strongly felt. The child’s body will often reflect those conditions and reflexes that would be elicited of the so-called “play” events were real.

Most of our experience happens directly, where senses, imagination, motion and physical actuality meet. In dreams, however, we often feel as if we are in another location entirely, and all of our senses seem pivoted in that location. Our experience is separated from our usual living area, in other words. We may dream that we are running or walking or flying, yet those activities are divorced enough from that area where imagination, motion, and physical actuality meet, so that our body remains quiet, relatively speaking, while we seem to be moving freely somewhere else.

In a fashion, reincarnation can partially be explained using the same kind of analogy. We have many existences at once — but each one has its own living area, upon which that portion of us focuses. In fact, that portion has its own name and selfhood and is master of its own castle, so to speak.

Each self has its own inviolate point where imagination, motion, and physical actuality intersect. Like the child play-acting, however, events occur within events, all dramatically real and vivid, all eliciting specific responses and actions, and each one possessing its own private living area.

On any given day a youngster may take a ride on a merry-go-round. The same little boy or girl might also sit astride a toy horse, and pretend that the horse is part of the merry-go-round. The same child might see the image of a merry-go-round on the television screen, or be told about another youngster’s visit to a playground, and a subsequent ride on a merry-go-round.

The child will be completely absorbed in the merry-go-round ride that was directly experienced. He or she may indeed be just as engrossed — or even more so — in the imaginary ride on the rocking horse. There will be some involvement, of course, as the child watches the images of the merry-go-round horses on the television station, while the story about the child’s visit to the playground will not take nearly as much of his interest.

In somewhat the same way, events appear and are reflected in reincarnational existences. All the lives are actually occurring at the same time, as the hypothetical youngster’s merry-go-round experiences happened all in one day.

In the reincarnational terms, however, the merry-go-round events might be experienced directly in some existences, or appear in a dream in another existence, or turn up simply as an image in another, or happen in an event involving real horses instead of merry-go-round horses. In other words, in one way or another the events of one living experience are reflected in each other living experience.

I am not saying that the events in one life cause the events on another, but that there is an overall pattern — a bank of probable events — and that in each life each individual chooses those that suit his or her overall private purposes. Yet those lives will be connected. An individual may have a serious illness in one life. That event may turn up as one uncomfortable nightmare in another existence. In still another life, the individual might have a dear friend who suffers from the same disease. In still another existence the individual might decide to be a doctor, to seek a cause and a cure for the same disease.

No one is fated, however, to suffer in one life for any crimes committed in another. The reasons and purposes for one’s own existence in any life can be found directly in the life itself.

Many proponents of reincarnation believe most firmly that an illness in one life most frequently has its roots in a past existence, and that reincarnational regression if therefore necessary to uncover the reasons for many current illnesses or dilemmas.

There is also a rather conventional stereotype version of karma that may follow such beliefs. Therefore, we may be punished in this life for errors we have committed in a past one, or we may actually be making up for a mistake made thousands of years ago. Again, all of a person’s reincarnational existences are, indeed, connected — but the events in one life do not cause the events in the next one.

I must remind once more that all time happens simultaneously, so the confused belief about punishment now, in retaliation for past action would actually be meaningless, since in simultaneous time all actions would be occurring at once.

We may have overall reasons for a particular illness, however, that have nothing to do with crime or punishment, but may instead involve an extraordinary sense of curiosity, and the desire for experience that is somewhat unconventional — usually not sought for — exotic, or in certain terms even grotesque.

Each life, regardless of its nature, possesses it own unique vantage point, and an individual may sometimes take an obscure or a long-lasting disease simply to present himself or herself with experience that most others would shun. An individual might seek such a vantage point in order to look at the universe in a different fashion, asking questions that perhaps could not be answered of asked from any other position.

Another life, for example, might deal with exquisite health and vitality, and as mentioned, still another life might be devoted to the arts of healing — but overall, few people take health problems per se as frequent reincarnational themes, though they may be implied strongly in situations where one is born into a large populace of poor, underprivileged people.

If one does have health problems, it is much better to look for their reasons in our immediate experience, rather than assigning them a cause in our distant past. The reasons for maladies are almost always present in current life experience — and even though old events from childhood may have originally activated unhealthy behavior, it is present beliefs that allow old patterns of activity to operate.

If we are concerned about any given problems — mental, emotional, or physical — there are certain facts we should hold in mind. I have mentioned most of them in previous blogs, but they are particularly vital in this context.

We must realize that we do create our own reality because of our beliefs about it. Therefore, try to understand that the particular dilemma of illness is not an event forced upon us by some other agency. Realize that to some extent or another our dilemma or our illness has been chosen by us, and that this choosing has been done in bits and pieces of small, seemingly inconsequential choices. Each, however, has led up to our current predicament, whatever its nature.

If we realize that our beliefs form our experience, then we do indeed have an excellent chance of changing our beliefs, and hence our experience.

We can discover what our own reasons are for choosing the dilemma or illness by being very honest with oneself. There is no need to feel guilty since we meant very well as we made each choice — only the choices were built upon beliefs that were beliefs and not facts.

If we are in serious difficulties of any kind, it may at first seem inconceivable, unbelievable, or even scandalous to imagine that our problems are caused by our own beliefs.

In fact, the opposite might appear to be true. We might have lost a series of jobs, for example, and it may seem quite clear that we are not to blame in any of those circumstances. We might have a very serious illness that seemed to come from nowhere, and it may strike us as most unlikely indeed, that our own beliefs had anything to do with the inception of such a frightening malady.

We may be in the middle of one or several very unsatisfactory relationships, none of which seem to be caused by us, while instead we feel as if we are an unwilling victim or participant.

We may have a dangerous drug or alcohol problem, or we may be married to someone who does. In both instances the situations will be caused by our own beliefs, even though this may at first seem most unlikely. For the purposes of this particular blog, we will discuss illnesses or situations that have arisen since childhood, so we are not including birth defects or very life-endangering childhood accidents, or most unfortunate childhood family situations. These will be discussed separately.

In most cases, even the most severe illnesses or complicated living conditions and relationships are caused by an attempt to grow, develop or expand in the face of difficulties that appear to be unsurmountable to one degree of another.

An individual will often be striving for some goal that appears blocked, and hence he or she uses all available energy and strength to circumnavigate the blockage. The blockage is usually a belief which needs to be understood or removed rather than bypassed.

In my blogs we will be involved with the nature of beliefs and with various methods that will allow us to choose beliefs that lead to a more satisfying life.

Throughout my blogs, we are not speaking of physical health alone, but of mental, spiritual, and emotional health as well. We are not healthy, for example, no matter how robust our physical condition, if our relationships are unhealthy, unsatisfying, frustrating, or hard to achieve. Whatever our situation is, it is a good idea to ask ourselves what we would do if we were free of it. An alcoholic’s wife might wish all her heart that her husband stop drinking, but if she suddenly asked herself what she would do, she might, surprisingly enough, feel a tinge of panic. On examination of her own thoughts and beliefs, she might well discover that she was so frightened of not achieving her own goals that she actually encouraged her husband’s alcoholism, so that she would not have to face her own “failure”.

Obviously this hypothetical situation is a quick example of what I mean, with no mention of the innumerable other beliefs and half-beliefs that would encircle the man’s and the woman’s relationship.

There are no doubts about it confronting substance issues can be an incredibly complex process. Harmful drinking can cause significant issues not only for the alcohol user but also for members of their family. This can appear in the form of health problems, financial worries, relationship breakdown, and even parenting difficulties. Above all, these families need and deserve support. Family interventions can play a role in this and can help to reduce overall alcohol harm.

Accordingly, if you, or someone you know, have been affected by any of the issues raised in this article there are details of organizations that offer advice and support including several different alcohol treatment center websites available online.

They will be able to provide different types of services that you can use to help support yourself if you are going in for treatment. You might find that they will offer support groups, and will have routine drug/alcohol tests (using something like this 5 panel instant drug test). All of this will be done to help you stay on your path to recovery.

Ultimately, working jointly with alcohol users and their families during treatment has been shown to be effective, particularly where the user is an adolescent.

What do you think should be done to tackle alcohol dependency issues within society? Get in touch and let me know your thoughts on this fascinating topic.

Learn Through Play-Acting

I have mentioned in previous blogs that play is essential for growth and development. Children learn through play-acting. Even getting your children singing can make a huge difference in their growth and development (however, there are plenty of other ways to help your child learn). They imagine themselves to be in all kinds of situations. They see themselves in dangerous predicaments, and then conjure up their own methods of escape. They try out the roles of other family members, imagine themselves rich and poor, old and young, male and female.

This allows children a sense of freedom, independence, and power as they are acting forcibly in all kinds of situations. It goes without saying that physical play automatically helps develop the body and its capabilities.

However, not every child grows and develops at the same pace, and it may worry some parents. It is crucial to keep track of a child’s physical and mental growth and contact a pediatric if you see any behavioral issues, mood swings, interaction issues, lack of social skills, etc. You can also explore pediatric therapy options near your location or online facilities similar to Kinspire to avail the necessary treatment at the early stage.

You could slowly indulge your child in activities with other kids to gradually teach them the concept of social interaction. To a child, play and work are often and the same thing, and parents can utilize imaginative games as a way of reinforcing ideas of health and vitality. When a child is ill-disposed or cranky, or has a headache, or another disorder that does not appear to be serious, parents can utilize this idea: have the child imagine that you are giving it a “better and better pill.” Have the child open its mouth while you place the imaginary pill on its tongue, or have the child imagine picking the pill up and placing it in its mouth. Then give the child a glass of water to wash the pill down, or have the child get the water for himself or herself. Then have the youngster chant, say, three times, “I’ve taken a better and better pill, so I will shortly feel better and better myself.”

There are other steps you can take to instill healthy habits in your child too. For example, we all know how important it is to encourage your child to look after their teeth. Remember to set a positive example for your child by brushing your teeth and using mouthwash together when you get ready in the morning and at night. Furthermore, remember to book regular check-ups with a dentist for you and your child. No one wants to need to have Dental Implants in Washington Heights due to bad oral hygiene after all.

The earlier such a game is begun the better, and as the child grows older you may explain that often an imaginary pill works quite as well — if not better — than a real one.

This does not mean that I am asking parents to substitute imaginary medicine for real medicine, though indeed, I repeat, it may be quite effective. In our society, however, it would be almost impossible to get along without medicine or medical science.

While I want to emphasize that point, I also want to remind that innately and ideally the body is quite equipped to heal itself, and certainly to cure its own momentary headache. We would have to substitute an entirely different learning system, at our present stage, for the body to show its true potentials and healing abilities.

In other cases of a child’s illness, have the child play a healing game, in which he or she playfully imagines being completely healthy again, outdoors and playing; or have the youngster imagine a conversation with a friend, describing the illness as past and gone. Play could also be used even in old people’s homes, for it could revive feelings of spontaneity and give the conscious mind a rest from worrying.

Many ancient and so-called primitive peoples utilized play — and drama, of course — for their healing values, and often their effects were quite as therapeutic as medical science. If your child believes that a particular illness is caused by a virus, then suggest a game in which the youngster imagines the virus to be a small bug that he or she triumphantly chases away with a broom, or sweeps out the door. Once a child gets the idea, the youngster will often make up his or her own game, that will prove most beneficial.

Instead of such procedures, children are often taught to believe that any situation or illness or danger will worsen, and that the least desirable, rather than most desirable, solution will be found. By such mental games, however, stressing the desirable solution, children can learn at an early age to utilize imagination and their minds in a far more beneficial manner.

One of the most disastrous ideas is the belief that illness is sent as a punishment by God.

Unfortunately, such a belief is promoted by many religions. Children who want to be good, therefore, can unfortunately strive for poor health, in the belief that it is a sign of God’s attention. To be punished by God is often seen as preferable to being ignored by God. Adults who hold such views unwittingly often let their children in for a life of turmoil and depression.

In all cases of illness, games or play should be fostered whenever possible, and in whatever form. Many dictatorial religions pointedly refuse to allow their congregations to indulge in any type of play at all, and frown upon it as sinful. Card-playing and family games such as Monopoly are actually excellent practices, and play in any form encourages spontaneity and promotes healing and peace of mind.

Play together, even if only mind games are involved — games with no particular purpose except fun.

Life Clouds: The Way the Universe was “Initially” Seeded

Understand, however, that the term “dream cloud” would serve as well. Yet it is an evocative reference to the way that “Everything That Is” packaged itself in the formation of its numberless realities. Such life clouds “still” exist. Each seed of life, of living, contains within itself its own protective coating, its own placenta of necessary nourishment and environmental circumstances, its own system and branches of probabilities.

z9

Those branches of probabilities act like remote sensors, seeking out those conditions that will be suited to the seed’s best value fulfillment and development. In the simplest of terms, the life clouds will send forth their contents where circumstances best meet their own requirements. On the other hand, the life clouds can see their own worlds completely. Space itself already speaks of a creation “begun,” for no matter how empty space may seem to be it simply appears like a vast cathedral, or tent with walls so distant they they go unperceived.

Probabilities may be swirling everywhere, yet remain of course unperceived in any given instant, so that we might in this odd strange analogy hear a dim brief whirl, as in the whirling of winds, and think it unimportant — while what we heard instead was an entire world of probabilities speed past where we stood.

z6

Our own entire structure of life, therefore, with its acute and precise definitions in the package of reality, is a living life cloud that may or may not be perceived in other realities. That cloud contains within it ever-freshening sources of new creativity. When we dream or sleep or think, we automatically add to other dimensions of a life cloud or dream cloud that emerge from the very actions of our own subjective motions.

Even infinity is being everywhere expressed in each moment, for infinity itself is not something apart from what the universe is. As the universe is a portion of infinity’s creativity, in the light there are new species appearing all of the time, whether or not our own situation allows us to perceive that emergence. We ourselves may be portions of that emergence. From our threshold or focus we would be relatively unaware of our own motion on a new time threshold — for to the beings on that threshold we would have already arrived, while to us in our present their would at best be theoretical, as if they were future selves. From our standpoint they would be, of course.

z12

At other levels our dreams mix and intertwine not only with those of our contemporaries, but with those of all times and places, living or dead in our terms. Each universe — such as the one we know — serves as a small colony of existence, and is infinite within the characteristics of its own nature.

Some of this material will only have meaning to us in the dream state, for that matter, and the words of the blog may stir some of those meanings into our attention. Each portion of all such life clouds seeks value fulfillment, again, but that term itself is woefully inadequate to express the nature of life’s diversity, purpose, or meaning.

z13

This purpose or meaning does not exist apart from our own existence, however. We are a part of life’s meaning and purpose — but those purposes, “coming from”, the source of our own being, are too great to be expressed or described within the structure of our personhood as we understand it. Such understanding is often experienced or sensed, however, sometimes as we are listening to music or when we are deeply stirred by emotion, and when we do not place a great distance between it and ourselves.

Attending to the life that we have with love, beginning “where you are,” will best allow us such a feeling for our own meaning.

z14

What do I mean by such attention? Attention to the moment as it is presented. Attention to the table of rich reality as it appears before us. Attention to the kind of person we are, and to the loving appreciation of our own uniqueness. To attend to our life in such a fashion brings us into a clearer communication with the inner action of our own existence.

z3

The use or non-use of an attribute can have as many ramifications as there are human beings who possess whatever version of it: ranging all the way from being completely buried in a life, to being simply left alone, used just “as is,” or thoroughly transformed in expression

Children’s Innate Love Of The Body And All Of Its Parts

For adults, ideas of health and illness are intimately connected with philosophical, religious, and social beliefs. They are even more entangled with scientific concepts, and with science’s views of life in general. Children, however, are far more innocent, and though they respond to the ideas of their parents, still their minds are open and filled with curiosity. The development of children is important to any parent, and we would do anything to help with their Developing Minds, whether that can help them out, and if your children mean everything to you, find out the cost of life insurance as a way of protecting them.
Children learn in many different ways including hearing, smell and sight which is why things like song education on YouTube are so popular to teach young children. They are also gifted with an almost astounding resiliency and exuberance.

They possess an innate love of the body and all of its parts. They also, feel an eager desire to learn all they can about their own physical sensations and capabilities.

At the same time, young children in particular still possess a feeling of oneness with the universe, and with all of life, even as they begin to separate themselves at certain levels from life’s wholeness to go about the delightful task. Seeing themselves as separate and apart from all other individuals, they still retain an inner comprehension and a memory of having once experienced a oneness with life as a whole.

At that level even illness is regarded simply as a part of life’s experience, however unpleasant it might be. Even at an early age, children joyfully explore all of the possibilities of all sensations possible within their framework — pain as well as joy, frustration as well as satisfaction, and all the while their awareness is propelled by curiosity, wonder, and joy.

They pick up their first ideas about health and disease from parents and doctors, and by the actions of those people to their own discomfiture. Before they can even see, children are already aware of what their parents expect from them in terms of health and disease, so that early patterns of behavior are formed, to which they then react in adulthood.

For now we will speak of children who possess ordinary good health, but who may also have some of the usual childhood “diseases.” Later we will discuss children with exceptionally severe health conditions.

Many children acquire poor health habits through the well-meaning mistakes of their parents. This is particularly true when parents actually reward a child for being ill. In such cases, the ailing child is pampered far more than usual, given extra special attention offered delicacies such as ice cream, let off some ordinary chores, and in other ways encouraged to think of bouts of illness as times of special attention and reward.

I do not mean that ill children should not be treated with kindness, and perhaps a bit of special attention — but the reward should be given for the child’s recovery, and efforts should be made to keep the youngster’s routine as normal as possible. Children often know quite well the reasons for some of their illnesses, for often they learn from their parents that illness can be used as a means to achieve a desired result.

Often parents hide such behavior from themselves. They deliberately close their eyes to some of the reasons for their own illnesses, and this behavior has become so habitual that they are no longer conscious of their own intent.

Children, however, may be quite conscious of the fact that they willed themselves to become ill, in order to avoid school (even if they would have loved to have a ball with the school gym equipment) , an examination, or a coming feared family event. They soon learn that such self-knowledge is not acceptable, however, so they begin to pretend ignorance, quickly learning to tell themselves instead that they have a bug or a virus, or have caught a cold, seemingly for no reason at all.

Parents frequently foster such behavior. Some are simply too busy to question a child about his or her own illness. It is far simpler to give a child aspirin, and send a child to bed with ginger tea and a coloring book.

Such procedures unfortunately rob a child of important self-knowledge and understanding. They begin to feel victims to this or that disorder. Since they have no idea that they themselves caused the problem to begin with, then they do not realize that they themselves possess the power to right the situation. If they are being rewarded for such behavior in the meantime, then the pressure is less, of course, so that bouts of illness or poor health can become ways of attaining attention, favorite status, and reward.

Parents who are aware of these facts can start helping their children at an early age by asking them simply the reasons for their illness. A mother might say: “You don’t need to have a temperature in order to avoid school, or as a way of getting love and attention, for I love you in any case. And if there is a problem at school, we can work it out together, so you don’t have to make yourself ill.” Again, the reasons for such behavior are often quite clear in the child’s mind. So, if the parents begin such questioning and reassurance when the child is young, then the youngster will learn that while illness may be used to attain a desired result, there are far better, healthier ways of achieving an end result.

Some parents, unfortunately, use the nature of suggestion in the most undesirable way, so that a child is often told that he or she is sickly, or weak or overly sensitive, and not as robust as other youngsters. If that kind of behavior is continued, then the child soon takes such statements as true, and begins to act upon them, until they do indeed become only too real in the youngster’s everyday experience.

Good health is closely related, of course, to a family’s beliefs about the body. If parents believe that the body is somehow an inferior vehicle for the spirit, of if they simply view the body as unreliable or weak and vulnerable, then children will at an early age begin to consider good health as a rarity, and learn to take depression, poor spirits, and bodily aches and pains to be a natural, normal condition of life.

If, on the other hand, parents view the body as a healthy, dependable vehicle of expression and feeling, then their children will look at their own bodies in the same fashion. It is very important that parents express a fond affection towards each other, and toward their children. In this way most children are assured of their parent’s love, and hence need not resort to illness as a way of gaining attention or testing a parent’s’ love and devotion.

There is no natural reason for children to feel a sense of shame concerning any bodily part. No portion of the body should be spoken about in secret, hushed tones. Each child should be told that his body, or her body, is a precious private possession, however, so that it is easy to build up a desirable feeling of bodily privacy, without any hint of shame or guilt.

It goes without saying that parents should hold the bodies of their male and female children in equal favor, so that one is not considered inferior to the other. Each child should be educated as early as possible by their parents, so that the youngsters are repeatedly reminded of the body’s natural resources and healing abilities.

Parents who are actually quite worried about their children’s’ susceptibility to illness often go overboard, stressing all kinds of sports and sports-related projects, but the children sense their parents’ unspoken fears, and they try to reassure their parents through achieving high goals or merits in sports programs.

There is no area of thought or belief that does not touch upon the subject of health in one way or another. Therefore, throughout my blogs we will be devoted to many ideas that may at first seem unrelated to the topic at hand.

“The Health and Disease States”

Before we discuss the human situation more specifically in relation to health and “dis-ease” — let us consider the so-called states of health and disease as they apply in planetary terms, and as they operate in all species. This will give us a far vaster framework in which to understand the ways in which each individual person fits into the entire picture.

I used quotation marks around the entire heading for this blog to stress the point that the heading is written with our own ideas of health and disease in mind. Actually, however, regardless of appearances and misreadings of natural events, the very idea of disease as we usually think of it, is chauvinistic in health rather than in sexual terms.

Basically speaking, there are only life forms. Through their cooperation, our entire world sustains its reality, substance, life, and form. If there were no diseases as we think of them, there would be no life forms at all. Our reality demands a steady fluctuation of physical and nonphysical experience. Most of us, my blog readers, understand that if we did not sleep we would die. The conscious withdrawal of mental life during life makes normally conscious experience possible. In the same way, there must, of course, be a rhythm of physical death, so that the experience of normal physical life is possible. It goes without saying that without death and disease — for the two go hand in hand — then normal corporeal existence would be impossible.

For all of man’s and woman’s fears of disease, however, the species has never been destroyed by it, and life has continued to function with overall stability, despite what certainly seems to be the constant harassment and threat of illness and disease. The same is true, generally speaking, of all species. Plants and insects fit into this larger picture, as do al fish and fowl.

I have said elsewhere that no species is ever really eradicated — and in those terms, no disease, or virus, or germ, ever vanishes completely from the face of the earth. In the first place, viruses change their form, appearing in our terms sometimes as harmless and sometimes as lethal. So-called states of health and disease are also changing constantly — and in those vaster terms, a disease in itself is a kind of health, for it makes life and health itself possible.

Later we will discuss what this means to us, the individual person, but for now, I want to stress the fact that while it may seem natural enough to consider disease as a threat, an adversary or an enemy, this is not the case.

The subject matter of suffering is certainly vitally connected to the subject at hand, but basically speaking, disease and suffering are not necessarily connected. Suffering and death are not necessarily connected either. The sensations of suffering and the pain do exist. Some are indeed quite natural reactions, and others are learned reactions to certain events. Walking barefoot on a bed of fire would most likely cause most of my readers, to feel the most acute pain — while in some primitive, societies, under certain conditions the same situation could result instead in feelings of ecstasy or joy.

We want to discuss “disease” as it exists apart from suffering for now, then. Then we will discuss pain and suffering and their implications. I do want to mention, however, that pain and suffering are also obviously vital, living sensations — and therefore are a part of the body’s repertoire of possible feelings and sensual experience. They are also a sign, therefore, of life’s vitality, and are in themselves often responsible for a return to health when they act as learning communications.

Pain, therefore, by being unpleasant, stimulates the individual to rid himself or herself of it, and thereby often promotes a return to the state of health.

Even in situations that involve a so-called host-and-parasite relationship, there is a cooperative process. Fleas, for example, actually help increase circulation, and constantly comb animal’s hair. At minute levels they also consume some bodily wastes, and creatures even smaller than they are. On the other hand, they can cause a lot of discomfort for animals too. Not only that, but they can become a nuisance in the home too, as they can spread. They are tiny creatures, so they aren’t very noticeable, but sometimes you might be able to see them bouncing from one place to another. It’s not a great thought. With this being said, if this is something that you are currently noticing in your home (after your pet had fleas), it may be worth speaking to pest control experts  (or one closer to where you live) to help you get rid of these pests and allow you to take control of your home once again!

Many diseases are actually health-promoting processes. Chicken pox, measles, and other like diseases in childhood in their own way “naturally inoculate” the body, so that it is able to handle other elements that are a part of the body and the body’s environment.

Let’s get back to fleas. They also keep the immune system active and flexible. While we’re on the topic of fleas, no one wants them to invade their homes. This is where the services of professionals such as a pest control company to help eliminate the problem before it gets any worse.

When civilized children are medically inoculated against such diseases, however, they usually do not show the same symptoms, and to an important extent the natural protective processes are impeded. Such children may not come down with the disease against which they are medically protected, then — but they may indeed therefore become “prey” to other diseases later in life that would not otherwise have occurred.

I am speaking generally here, for remember that our individual beliefs, thoughts, and emotions cause our reality, so no person dies ahead of his or her time. The individual chooses the time of death. It is true, however, that many cancers and conditions such as AIDS result because the immunity system has been so tampered with that the body has not been allowed to follow through with its own balancing procedures.

Again, however, no individual dies of cancer or AIDS, or any other condition, until they themselves have set the time.

There are many other conditions to be taken into consideration, for such diseases certainly do have strong social connections. They occur in social species. This does not mean that they are necessarily contagious at all, but that they do bear an overall relationship to the give-and-take between individuals and their social and natural frameworks.

Continued social interaction during one of the biggest global pandemics that there has ever been, the coronavirus outbreak of 2020 has already seen thousands upon thousands of deaths worldwide. Not only can it have a detrimental impact on an individual’s health, but it can also have devastating consequences on the economy, and small businesses in particular. To combat this, the President of the United States of America has signed a relief bill of $2 trillion to help give smaller and medium-sized businesses the opportunity to continue moving forwards. You can read more on the Works Coronavirus articles.

A city might be overrun by rats, for example — a fine situation for the rats if not the populace — but the entire picture would include unrest in the populace at large, a serve dissatisfaction with social conditions, feelings of dejection, and all of those conditions together would contribute to the problem. Rat poison may indeed add its own dangers, filling other small birds or rodents, and contaminating animal food supplies. Nor are insects invulnerable to such conditions, in such an hypothesized picture. Actually, all forms of life in that certain environment would be seeking for a balanced return to a more advantageous condition.

We may wonder why so many forms of life would be involved in what might seem to be self-destructive behavior, often leading to death — but remember that no consciousness considers death an end or a disaster, but views it instead as a means to of continuation of corporeal and non-corporeal existence.

I am not advising my blogs readers to refuse to have their children vaccinated, since we now have vaccination into consideration because of the prominence of it in society. It is very possible, however, that science itself will in time discover the unfortunate side effects of many such procedures, and begin to reevaluate the entire subject.

It is true that some native populations — particularly in the past — were free of many of the childhood diseases that are considered natural by western medicine. It is also true, of course, that some primitive societies have lost large numbers of their populations to disease. Some of those instances, however, were caused precisely by the sudden introduction of western medicine.

I am not condemning western medicine per se, however, but merely pointing out its many detrimental aspects. Medicinal science is also in a state of transition, and it is just as important — if not more so — that it examine its concepts as well as its techniques. Take for example the recent explosion of medical cannabis and the industry, in not only the United States, but the potential reform of the social perception on cannabis worldwide even after thousands of years of recorded medical benefit and usage. No one, and I mean no one has the slightest clue as to how using this medicine in the way we are now, is going to affect the human race in the years to come, whether it be detrimental or advantageous to our evolution. Either way, if you find THC and CBD products to be of positive affect to your current health, look at cbd MD discount codes so you can start saving money on your medicine.

The idea of using animals for experimentation has far more drawbacks than advantages; there is the matter of one kind of consciousness definitely taking advantage of another kind, and thus going counter to nature’s cooperative predisposition.

In the distant past some ancient civilizations did indeed use animals in such a fashion, but in a far different framework. The doctors or priests humbly stated their problems verbally and through ritualistic dancing, and then requested the help of the animal — so that the animals were not sacrificed, in those terms, nor taken advantage of. Instead, they united in a cooperative venture, in which animals and man and woman all understood that no consciousness truly died but only changed its form.

Animals have indeed often been quite helpful to man and woman in various healing situations and encounters, but in all such cases these were cooperative ventures.

This leads me of course to at least mention here that cruel methods used in the slaughtering of animals and fowls for human consumption. The creatures are treated as if they possessed no feeling or consciousness of their own — and such attitudes show a most unfortunate misreading of natural events. As a direct result, at least as many diseases develop through such procedures as would exist in a highly primitive society with unsanitary conditions.

In that kind of setting, however, balances would right the themselves because the basic understanding between living creatures would be maintained. We cannot divorce philosophy from action, and the cruelty in slaughterhouses would not be perpetrated if it were not for distorted philosophies dealing with the survival of the fittest on the one hand, and the egotistical assumption that God gave man and woman animals to do with as man and woman wished.

Remember that each segment of life is motivated by value fulfillment, and is therefore always attempting to use and develop all of its abilities and potentials, and to express itself in as many probable ways as possible, in a process that is cooperatively — correction: in a process that takes into consideration the needs and desires of each other segment of life.

The very existence of certain kinds of viruses provides safety against many other diseases, whether or not those viruses even exist in an active manner. It is obvious, of course, that the overall physical stability of the earth is possible because of the ever-occurring storms, “natural disasters,” and other seeming calamities. Yet such events promote the earth’s great, bountiful food supplies, and serve to redistribute the plant’s resources.

In the same fashion, disease also, in the overall picture, promote the health and well-being of life in all of its aspects. Value fulfillment operates within microbes and nations, within individual creatures and entire species, and it unites all of life’s manifestations so that indeed creatures and their environments are united in an overall cooperative venture — a venture in which each segment almost seeks to go beyond itself in creativity, growth, and expression. In a smaller, individual framework, each man and woman, then is motivated by this same value fulfillment.

We will shortly see how diseases are caused by the detriments set up against value fulfillment, often because of fears, doubts, or misunderstandings — and how other diseases may actually lead to instances of value fulfillment that are misread or misinterpreted.

I also want to stress here that all aspects of life experience not only sensations but emotional feelings. Therefore, there is a kind of innate gallantry that operates among all segments of life — a gallantry that deserves our respect and consideration. We should have respect, then, for the cells of our body, the thoughts of our mind, and try to understand that even the smallest of creatures shares with us the emotional experience of life’s triumphs and vulnerabilities.

Health Suggestions

Suggestions are usually statements directed toward a particular action or hypothesis. To a large extent, suggestions are ties into conscious thought processes, following the dictates of reason. For example: “If thus and thus be so, then thus and thus must follow.” There is no magic connected with suggestions — but repeated often enough, and believed in fervently, such suggestions do indeed take on a deeply habitual nature. They are no longer examined, but taken for literal truth.

They are then handed over to more automatic levels of personality, where they trigger the specific actions that are so strongly implied. Many such suggestions are “old-hat idioms.” They belong to the past, and again they escape the questioning and examination that are given to new ideas.

These suggestions may be remarkably long-standing, therefore, and consist of beliefs received in childhood. Accepted now in the present, non-critically, they may still affect health and well-being. Such suggestions can be beneficial and supportive, or negative and detrimental. Here are some examples that should be quite familiar to many people. They consist of suggestions given to children:

“If you go out in the rain without your rubber boots, you will catch cold.”

“If you are too talkative or demonstrative, people will not like you.”

“If you run you will fall down.”

There are many variations, of course, such as: “If you go out in rainy weather, you’ll get pneumonia,” or: “If you tell a lie your nose will grow.”

These suggestions and others like them are often given to children by their parents with the best of intentions. When they are young, the offspring will accept some such suggestions uncritically, coming as they do from a revered adult, so that the suggestions are almost interpreted as commands.

A suggestion like: “If you go swimming too soon after lunch, you will drown,” is extremely dangerous, for it predicts behavior of a disastrous nature that would follow almost automatically after the first act is performed.Obvious, children who go into the water right after eating do not all drown. The suggestion itself can lead to all kinds of nervous symptoms, however — panics, or stomach cramps — that can persist well into adulthood.

Such suggestions can be removed, as we will explain shortly.

There are other kinds of suggestions that involve identification. A child may be told: “You are just like your mother; she was always nervous and moody.” Or: “You are fat because your father was fat.”

These are all statements leading toward a certain hypothesis. Again, the problem is that often the hypotheses remain unquestioned. We end up with structured beliefs unexamined, that are then automatically acted upon.

The suggestions we have given so far are predictives; they actually predict dire events of one kind or another, following a given original action.

There are many of these, dealing particularly with age also. many people believe fervently that with approaching age they will meet a steady, disastrous deterioration in which the senses and the mind will be dull, and the body, stricken with disease, will lose all of its vigor and agility. Many young people believe such nonsense, and therefore they set themselves up to meet the very conditions they so fear.

The mind grows wiser with age when it is allowed to do so. There is even an acceleration of thought and inspiration, much like that experienced in the adolescent years, that suddenly brings a new understanding to the aged individual, and provides an impetus that should help the person to achieve greater comprehension — a comprehension that should quell all fears of death.

Thoughts and beliefs do indeed bring about physical alterations. They can — even and often do — change genetic messages.

There are diseases that people believe are inherited, carried from one generation to another by a faulty genetic communication. Obviously, many people with, for example, a genetic heritage of arthritis do not come down with the disease themselves, while others indeed are so afflicted. The difference is one of belief.

But regardless of whether you believe in it or not, if you do experience any possible symptoms of arthritis, like pain, as well as restricted movement around the joints, it could mean that you have it. This could possibly affect your quality of life, so looking into remedies, like the best CBD oil UK products on the market, could be the perfect course of treatment to go down if you feel the full effects of this condition. You should always speak with a medical practitioner beforehand if you are concerned about anything regarding this ailment.

The people who have accepted the suggestion uncritically that they will inherit such a malady do then seem to inherit it: they experience the symptoms. Actually, the belief itself may have changed a healthy genetic message into an unhealthy one. Ideally, a change of belief would remedy the situation.

People are not simply swung will-nilly by one negative suggestion or another, however. Each person has an entire body of beliefs and suggestions — and these are quite literally reflected in the physical; body itself.

All practical healing deals with the insertion of positive suggestions and the removal of negative ones. As we mentioned earlier, each smallest atom or cell contains its own impetus toward growth and value fulfillment. In other words, they are literally implanted with positive suggestions, biologically nurtured, so to that extent it is true to say that in a certain fashion negative suggestions are unnatural, leading away from life’s primary goals. Negative suggestions could be compared to static sounding on an otherwise clear program.

Worry, fear, and doubt are detrimental to good health, of course, and these are very often caused by the officially held belief of society. These mental concerns – depression, anxiety, and stress – are often addressed by people using things like the best-rated CBD brands in the UK to alleviate such issues.

Those beliefs paint a dire picture, in which any given situation is bound to deteriorate. Any conceivable illness will worsen, and any possible catastrophe can be encountered. If you fear your personal health is deteriorating it should be of importance to get your physical health checked over and undergo some tests such as blood and urine samples. Many healthcare providers can offer such tests and checkups, for instance, take a look if there is a local Southwest Care Center or similar health facility close to you. Don’t allow your personal health to worsen to the point of possible catastrophe.

Such beliefs discourage feelings of curiosity, joy, or wonder. They inhibit playful activity or spontaneous behavior. They cause a physical situation in which the body is placed in a state of defensive aggression. Under such conditions it seems only rational to look for the worm in the apple, so to speak, and to expect pain or danger in each new experience or encounter. When thoughts like this are taking over, it can be difficult to take back control and you may need to resort to some homemade natural remedies. For example, you can find out how to make shatter at home which will help to relax those anxious thoughts so you can think more clearly.

Play is very important — indeed, vital — attribute in the development of growth and fulfillment. Children play naturally, and so do animals. For that matter, insects, birds, fish, and all kinds of life play. Even ants and honeybees play. Their sociability is not just a matter of constant work within a hive or an any mound. This playful activity is, in fact, the basis for their organized behavior, and they “play” at adult behavior before they assume their own duties.

Creatures play because the activity is joyful, and spontaneous and beneficial, because it activates all portions of the organism — and again, in play youngsters imitate adult patterns of operation that lead finally to their own mature activity.

When people become ill, worried or fearful, one of the first symptoms of trouble is a lack of pleasure, a gradual discontinuance of playful action, and an over-concentration upon personal problems. In other words, illness is often first marked by a lack of zest or exuberance.

This retreat from pleasure begins to cut down upon normal activity, new encounters, or explorations that might in themselves help relieve the problem by opening up new options. Such a person becomes dejected looking — unsmiling and somber, leading others to comment upon such a dejected countenance. Comments such as these: “You look tired,” or: “What’s the matter, don’t you feel well?” and other such remarks often simply reinforce the individual’s earlier sense of dejection, until finally this same kind of give-and-take leads to a situation in which the individual and his fellows begin to intermix in an negative rather than a positive manner.

I do not mean to imply that it is always detrimental to make such queries as “Are you ill?” or “Are you tired?” Such questions do indeed predict their own answers. When a person is feeling in good health, exuberant and alive, such queries will be nonchalantly shoved aside — they will have no effect whatsoever. But constant questions of such a nature do not help an individual who is having difficulties — and in fact too frequent expressions of compassion can also worsen a person’s state of mind, stressing the idea that he or she must be very ill indeed to attract such feelings of compassion. It is far better, then, to make no comment at all under such conditions. I am not speaking of genuine questions of concern so much as rather automatic, unthinking, negative comments.

On the other hand, it is an excellent practice to comment upon another individual’s obvious zest or energy or good spirits. In such a way, we reward positive behavior, and may indeed begin a chain of positive activity instead of continuing a chain of negative reactions.

I am not telling you to gush out a steady stream of positive suggestions, whether or not they bear any relation to the situation at hand.

I am saying that it is far better to look on the most hoped-for solution to any situation, and to voice that attitude rather than to expect the poorest outcome, or express the most dire of attitudes. There are some issues highly vital to health and happiness, that are quite difficult to describe. They are felt intrinsically. They are a part of the esthetics of nature itself. Flowers are not just brightly colored for man’s and woman’s enjoyment, for example, but because color is a part of the flower’s own esthetic system. They enjoy their own brilliance, and luxuriate in their own multitudinous hues.

The insects also appreciate flower’s profusion of color, and also for esthetic reasons. I am saying, therefore that even insects have an esthetic sense, and again, that each creature, and each plant, or natural entity, has its own sense of value fulfillment, seeking the greatest possible fulfillment and extension of its own innate abilities.

This sense of value fulfillment, once more, benefits not only the individual, but its species and all other species. In a manner of speaking, then, the picture of nature is painted by its own consciously vital, esthetic portions. Each portion of nature is also equipped to react to changing conditions, and therefore deals with its own kind of predictive behavior, so that it can grow today into tomorrow’s condition.

Nature always works with probabilities. In human terms, this means that each person has a vast bank of avenues that lead to value fulfillment, and that individual abilities will ideally form their own boulevards of expression.

Poor health, or simply unhappy situations, arise only when the individual meets too many detours, or encounters too many blocks to the expression of value fulfillment.

With man’s and woman’s own exteriorized ego, this leads to the question of free will and the making of conscious choices.

The human individual is aware of large numbers of probable activities. Each individual person literally possesses far more abilities than can be adequately expressed in any given lifetime. This insures a large profusion of possible actions from which the individual can draw according to changing circumstances.

Each person can also intrinsically sense the direction in which he or she is most inclined. Inspiration will send nudges towards certain activities. It will be easier and more delightful for each person to move and grow in certain directions, rather than others.

In this discussion, I am not merely speaking in terms of exterior accomplishments, or goals, though these are important. Many people, however, will find they have a natural knack for relationships with others, in which the known value cannot be judged, as it can, say, in the works of an artist or writer.

Instead, such people will indeed perform a kind of artistry of relationships, composing, say, symphonic, emotional compositions that indeed play as masterfully upon the emotions as the pianist upon the keys. By looking at our own abilities lie by following the shape of our own impulses and inclinations. We cannot learn about ourselves by studying what is expected of us by others — but only by asking ourselves what we expect from oneself, and discovering for ourselves in what direction our abilities lie.

There are certain simple steps that can be followed, whenever we find oneself in a difficult situation, whether the condition is one of poor health, a stressful personal involvement with another, a financial dilemma, or whatever.

These steps seem very obvious, and perhaps too easy — but they will bring an immediate sense of ease and a peace of mind while our inner reserves are being released and activated. I have mentioned these steps many times in previous blogs, because they are so vital in clearing the conscious mind, and bringing some relief to the frightened ego.

  1. Immediately begin to live in the present as much as possible. Try to become as aware as you can of present sense-data — all of it. Often, while you are in pain, for example, you concentrate upon that sensation alone, ignoring the feelings of ease that may be felt by other portions of the body, and unaware of the conglomeration of sounds, sights, and impressions that are also in the immediate environment. This procedure will immediately lessen the pressure of the problem itself, whatever it is, and give you a sense of refreshment.
  2. Refuse to worry. This fits in automatically with Step 1, of course. Tell yourself you can worry all you want tomorrow, or on some other occasion — but resolve not to worry in the present moment.
  3. When your thoughts do touch upon you particular problem in that present moment, imagine the best possible solution to the dilemma. Do not wonder how or why or when the ideal solution will come, but see it in your mind’s eye as accomplished. Or if you are not particularly good at visual imagery, then try to get the feeling of thanksgiving and joy that you would feel if the problem was solved to you completed satisfaction.

These steps will allow you breathing time, and actually help minimize the pressure of your situation whatever it is. Then quieted you’ll be able to consider other steps that may more directly address your particular solution.

This endeavor itself will also activate your own dream mechanisms, and you’ll find that new creative understanding to the task.

Quackery In The Majority Of Medical Circles

There are many large issues that touch upon the circumstances involving the health of individuals, and these concern questions that we have not yet discussed in any of my blogs.

They will indeed be covered in later blogs, but for now we will only be concerned with them in a general way. They are more divorced from ordinary medical thought, and would indeed be considered sheer quackery in the majority of medical circles.

The fact is that each individual lives many lives, and that the inner self is quite aware of its own spiritual and physical dexterity. The body consciousness alone understands that its physical existence in any one life is dependent upon its physical death — and that that death will assure it of still another existence. The “drive for survival” is, therefore, a drive that leads to death and beyond it, for all of consciousness understands that it survives through many forms and conditions.

Reincarnation, therefore, also is part of the larger framework in which any individual’s health and well-being must be considered. The reincarnational influences are most apparent in what would be considered bodily defects dating from birth, and these will be discussed later on in my blog. Injuries or bodily defects at birth could happen due to many earthly reasons like medical malpractice or negligence (visit the website to know how lawyers can help in these cases) on the part of doctors and the medical team at the facility of birth. While it must be understood that the possibility of medical oversight is often rare, the idea of reincarnation is something that is often believed to be true – a form of karmic retribution. In the following excerpts, we shall see how these reincarnational ideas have shaped our identity and thought as the human race.

Reincarnational influences are not nearly as rigid as many believers in the concept think. That is, reincarnational influences usually leave many options to an individual in any case. It is quite simplistic, for example, to say, as some people do, that any given particular event from a past life leads inevitably to a particularly matching effect in a present one. There are too many other elements that also apply to the human personality. No one is”fated” to have bad health. No one is punished in one life for “evil” activities in a previous one.

A person who has been cruel in one life may choose to experience conditions in the next life in which he or she understands the meaning of cruelty, but this does not mean that such a person would then necessarily experience an entire lifetime as a victim.

New learning would always be involved, and thus new options would always be open. There as, in fact, so many distorted ideas connected with the concept of reincarnation in general, that I think it far better to simply concentrate upon the idea of multiple existences. Because of the true nature of time, and the interrelationships of consciousness, a future life affects a past one, for in actuality all of these existences happen simultaneously. All systems are open-ended, particularly psychological ones. In greater terms, we are working “at all levels” and at all of our own existences at once, even though it is useful sometimes to think of reincarnation as a series of lives, one after the other.

The concept of the survival of the fittest has had a considerably detrimental effect in many areas of human activity — particularly in the realm of medical ideology and practice.

The whole idea was developed in the most mechanistic of terms, stressing competition among all aspects of life, pitting one life form against another, and using physical strength and dexterity, swiftness and efficiency, as the prime conditions for the survival of any individual or species.

It is quite true, however, that in the wild many animals protect and provide for wounded or disabled members, and that the wisdom that comes with age is indeed appreciated even in the animal kingdom. The survival of the fittest concept, however, has been exaggerated far above those of cooperation.

Politically as well as medically, such distortions have led to unfortunate conditions: Aryan-supremacy biological ideas fostered in the second world war, the concentration upon “the perfect body,” and other distortions. The idea of the ideal body has often been held up to the populace at large, and this often sets forth a stylized “perfect” physique that actually could be matched by few individuals. Any variations are frowned upon, and any birth defects considered in the most suspicious of lights. Some schools of thought, then, have it that only the genetically superior should be allowed to reproduce, and there are scientists who believe that all defects can be eradicated through judicious genetic planning.

As a result of such long-held theories, people have grown distrustful of their own bodies. The handicapped are often given messages, even by the medical profession, that make them feel like misfits, unworthy to survive. When people become ill, they often blame themselves in such a way that unnecessary guilt is the result.

In the past some religious groups have also promoted beliefs that illness is a sign of God’s punishment, or vengeance for sins committed against his “goodness.”

The same beliefs often spread in economic areas in which people who met pleasure in God’s eyes were therefore gifted with wealth and prosperity, as well as good health. Therefore God was seen to be on the side of those who competed most strenuously, so that to be poor or sick was almost seen as a sign of God’s disfavor. All such concepts appear in one form or another at most official levels of thought and education. The whole idea of the esthetics of nature is forgotten — a subject that we will touch upon further as we continue our discussion in future blogs.

This blog consists of a potpourri of different ideas — merely to hint at the multitudinous issues connected with health and well-being.

Our ideas about ourselves are again, vital in the larger context of a healthy life. Everyone takes care of their health in different ways. Some visit heart specialists (from clinics like https://cvgcares.com/) for regular checkups and to lead a healthy lifestyle, while others tend to look for holistic and self-care methods of healing. If you want to explore some alternative methods of doing this, you can see them here. Moreover, the condition of our heart is affected, for example, by our own feelings about it. If we consider oneself to be coldhearted, or heartless, those feelings will have a significant effect upon that physical organ. If we feel broken-hearted, then we will also have that feeling reflected in one way or another in the physical organ itself.

Obviously, as I mentioned earlier, each individual also has many options open. Everyone who feels brokenhearted does not die of heart failure, for example. The subject of health cannot be considered in an isolated fashion, but must be seen in that greater context that gives health itself a value and a meaning. As mentioned earlier, each person will also try to fulfill their own unique abilities, and to “fill out” the experience of life as fully as possible.

If an individual is hampered in that attempt strongly and persistently enough, then the dissatisfaction and frustration will be translated into a lack of physical exuberance and vitality. There is always an unending reservoir of energy at the command of each person, however, regardless of circumstances, and we will also discuss the ways in which we can learn to tap that source and better our own health situation.

The sooner we can rid ourselves of rigid beliefs about the survival of the fittest, the better we will be. All philosophies that stress the idea of the body’s impurity or degradation should also be seen as detrimental to bodily and spiritual integrity. Such beliefs clutter up our conscious mind with negative suggestions that can only frighten the exterior ego and impede the great strength and vitality that is our heritage from lending us the fullest possible strength and support.

In later blogs we will indeed discuss various methods of healing, conventional and unconventional. Medical technology alone, however expert, cannot really heal a broken heart, of course. Such a healing can only take place through understanding and through expressions of love. In other words, through emotional transplants rather than physical ones alone. The emotional factors are extremely vital, both in the development in the healing of all dis-eases.

We will not stress particular diseases in my blogs, and mention symptoms only to identify the case associated with such conditions. It is actually far more important that we stress the symptoms of health and those methods, beliefs, and healings that promote them.

The Broken-Hearted, Heartless Medical Industry

Many psychiatrists and psychologists now realize that a disturbed client cannot be helped sufficiently unless the individual is considered along with his or her relationship to the family, and also in relation to the environment. Old-time family doctors understood the patient’s sensitivity to family members and to the environment, of course, and they often felt a lively sympathy and understanding that the practitioners of modern medicine often seem to have forgotten.

I am speaking of a deeper relationship to the environment, however, and of the environment’s symbolic as well as practical aspects in relation to health and illness. Our ideas about our own body, our mind, the universe, and our part in it, and our state of health, to our sense of well-being, or our feelings of dis-ease.

In my next blog, I would like to look more specifically at the importance of symbolism in our minds, our body, and our environment.

Modern medical science largely considers the human body to be a kind of mechanical model, a sort of vehicle like a car that needs to be checked by a garage every so often.

As an automobile is put together at an assembly line, so the body is simply seen as a very efficient machine put together in nature’s “factory.” If all the parts are in their proper places, and functioning smoothly, then the machine should give as excellent service as any well-running automobile — or so it seems.

All of the automobile’s parts, however, are alone responsible for its operation as long as it has a responsible driver. There are, however, hidden relationships that exist between various parts of the body — and the parts themselves are hardly mechanical. They change in every moment.

With the latest developments in medical technology, there are all kinds of heart treatments and operations that can be performed. Healthy hearts will maintain a consistent heartbeat, whereas unhealthy hearts may experience some irregularity in their rhythm. There are supplements like lypo spheric vitamin c that can help lower the risk of heart-related issues like heart disease and lower blood pressure. The risks can also be prevented by consuming different types of plums and other such fruits/vegetables that contain the phytochemicals and nutrients required to reduce inflammation. Still, just like with anything health-related, if these issues continue despite taking necessary measures, it would be beneficial to visit a doctor to get checked professionally. Anything related to the heart can be dangerous, but can sometimes be treated by some medical equipment, such as the Philips Heart start and m5070a battery which can help to shock the heart into a normal rhythm. There is some heart equipment that is small, and there are also more serious treatments that can be used, such as heart transplants. In many cases, even when hearts are repaired through medical technology, the same trouble recurs at a later date, or the patient recovers only to fall prey to a different, nearly fatal or fatal, disease. This is not always the case, by any means, but when such a person does recover fully and maintains good health, it is because beliefs, attitudes, and feelings have changed for the better and because the person “has a heart” again, in other words, because the patient himself or herself has regulated the will to live.

Many people who have heart trouble feel that they have “lost the heart” for life. They may feel broken-hearted for any of many reasons. They may feel heartless or imagine themselves to be so cold-hearted that they punish themselves literally by trying to lose their hearts.

With many people having such difficulties, the addition of love in the environment may work far better than any heart operation. A new pet given to a bereaved individual has saved more people from needing heart operations than any physical. In other words, “a love transplant” in the environment may work far better overall than a heart-transplant operation, or a bypass, or whatever; in such ways, the heart is allowed to heal itself.

In later blogs, we will discuss more thoroughly distorted ideas about the self and the body in particular that stand in the way of natural exuberance and good health.

Without going more deeply into the reasons for such beliefs until later, let me discuss several of the ways in which they impede general well-being. Right now it is socially fashionable to take up some kind of exercise, gym work, or strenuous sport, so it seems obvious that the general populace must have great regard for the physical body. Unfortunately, large segments of the population feel uncomfortable with their bodies and do not trust the body’s spontaneity, strength, or overall dependability. They have been taught that medical science knows more about bodies than any private individual knows about their own bodies and their ways and workings.

People have been taught to trust X-rays for a picture of what is happening within their bodies and cautioned not to trust their own feelings. Some public-service announcements stress the “fact” that the individual can be gravely threatened by high blood pressure, for example, even though he or she feels in excellent physical health.

The populace has embarked upon this strong exercise program because of a mixture of very unfortunate beliefs. Since they feel divorced from their bodies, many people suspect what is going on inside. Some religious beliefs suggest that the body is impure, and the heir to disease and infirmity. Often people exercise over-zealously to punish their bodies, or to force the body to respond at its best since they do not trust it to do otherwise.

In many instances, people exercise and clean their teeth quite simply because they are afraid of what will happen if they do not. Professionals at McCrae Dental Surgery or places similar know that poor oral health can contribute to heart disease and often suggest these actions to reduce the likelihood of this eventuality. They may run or brush to avoid heart disease, for example, while their own fear can help to promote the very eventuality they fear.

The body’s health is the expression of inner well-being. Poor health is an expression also, and it may serve many purposes. It goes without saying that some people become ill rather than change their activities and their environments. They may also become ill, of course, to force themselves to make changes.

I do not mean to imply that exercise is detrimental to good health. It is true, however, that the reason that we exercise is actually more important than the exercises that we do perform. The reason can promote our good health or actually impede it.

Thus far in my blogs, we have begun to touch upon the multitudinous issues involved in good health or in its absence. Before we are finished we hope to give a far greater framework in which to consider our own well-being and the many options that are open to any individual. We will discuss the species connected with a long, healthy, fairly happy lifetime, and those involved with early death, severe illnesses, and suicide — particular with the suicides of fairly young persons.

Earlier we spoke about the incredible impulse on the part of all of nature toward exuberance and well-being. It is as if nature always tries to exceed itself, and certainly to increase the quality of its existence. The individual person is also involved in an ever-continuing process to increase the quality of life as it exists at all levels of personal experience. Reality is so constructed that each individual seeking fulfillment does so not at the expense of others, but in such a way that the quality of life is increased for all.

Each person impulsively tries to grow into his or her sensed potentials — even when they are not immediately apparent.

In one way or another, each segment of consciousness is aware of each other segment, through an instantaneous communication that exists on many levels. It is important that our ideas circulate freely, and that the ideas of the peoples of the world circulate freely, just as it is important that our individual body has good circulation. Our ideas about our own health are even more important than those steps we take to promote it.

Our ideas about foreign countries, allies, and enemies, also have a vital role to play in how we handle our own bodily defenses. People who are afraid that their nation will be invaded by an enemy will often also consider viruses or diseases to be enemies, ever about to threaten their personal survival. Such attitudes will, of course, be detrimental to feelings of well-being, health, and exuberance. While it is true that medical technology has many serious defects, it is also true that many people believe in the medical profession to such a degree that it would be nearly impossible for them to survive in good health without it.

In later blogs, we will also discuss the ways in which we can use our own beliefs about the medical profession to reinforce our overall sense of health, rather than to undermine it.

The Human Consciousness And Relationship To The Body

We know that we have a conscious mind, of course. We also possess what is often called the subconscious, and this merely consists of feelings, thoughts or experiences that are connected to our conscious mind, but would be considered excess baggage if we had to be aware of them all of the time. Otherwise they would vie for our attention, and interfere with the present decisions that are so important.

If we tried to hold all of those subconscious memories uppermost in our mind all of the time, then we would literally be unable to think or act in the present moment at all. We do more or less have a certain access to our own subconscious mind, however. It is perhaps easier to imagine a continuum of consciousness, for we have a body consciousness also, and that body consciousness is itself made up of the individual consciousness of each molecule that forms all parts of the body itself.

It is sometimes fashionable to say that men and women have conscious minds, subconscious minds, and unconscious minds — but there is no such thing as an unconscious mind. The body consciousness is highly conscious. We are simply not usually conscious of it. Reasoning takes time. It deals with problem-solving — it forms an hypothesis, and then seeks to prove it by trial and error.

If we had to use that kind of process before we could move a muscle, we would get nowhere at all, of course. The other portions of our consciousness, then, deal with a kind of automatic thinking, and operate with a kind of knowledge that takes no time in our terms.

We might say that the varying portions of our own consciousness operate at several different speeds. Translations between one portion of consciousness and another goes on constantly, so that in formation is translated from one “speed” to another. Perhaps we can begin to understand, then, that the whole picture of health or illness must be considered from many more viewpoints than we might earlier have supposed. Many of us have been saturated by conventional, distorted ideas concerning health and illness in general. We might think, for example, of the body being invaded by viruses, or attacked by a particular disease, and these ideas, then, may make us question. We might well wonder why the body consciousness does not simply rise up and cast off any threatening diseases: why would the body allow certain cells to go berserk, or outgrow themselves? The very concept of the immunity system suggests, at least, the disease invader against which the body’s immunity system must or should surely defend itself.

We usually think of our conscious mind as our ego. It is directed toward action in physical life. Many schools of thought seem to have the curious ideas that the ego is inferior to other portions of the self, or “selfish,” and imagine it to be definitely of a lower quality than the inner self, of the soul.

In the first place, it is really impossible to separate portions of the self, and we make such distinctions only in an effort to explain the many facets of the personality. It is generally understood, then, that we do have an ego, directed toward exterior activity, and in those terms we also have an inner ego. It is also conscious, and is the director of all automatic interior activity.

Most people do not realize that they can indeed have access to this inner awareness. This inner ego or inner self should not be thought of as superior to our ordinary mind. It should not be thought of, really, as something separate from our ordinary mind. Our ego and our ordinary consciousness bring into focus all of our physical experiences, and make possible the brilliant preciseness of physical experience.

It is true that physical life represents only one condition of being. We have other kinds of existence, then. The conscious mind is one brilliant segment of our larger consciousness, but it is composed of the same universal energy and vitality that composes all consciousness. There are ways of communicating with the inner ego or inner self, however, and we will discuss some of these in future blogs. It is important, again, to remember that this inner ego or inner self uses a process that is far swifter than reasoning.

When such communications are made, therefore, they often consist of inspiration, intuition, impulses, and deal with feeling far more than with usual logical thinking.

Each person is a vital, conscious portion of the universe. Each person, simply by being, fits into the universe and into universal purposes in a way no one else can. Each person’s existence sends its own ripples throughout time. The universe is conscious at every conceivable point of itself. Each being is an individualized segment of the universe; then, in human terms, each person is a beloved individual, formed with infinite care and love, uniquely gifted with a life like no other.

No animal considers itself a failure, obviously. People, however, often identify with their seeming mistakes, forgetting their abilities in other directions, so that it seems that they are misfits in the universe, or in the world. The conscious mind can indeed have such thoughts because it so often tries to solve all problems on its own, until it begins to feel frightened, overburdened, and a failure in its own eyes.

The inner ego, however, always identifies with its source-identity as a beloved, individualized portions of the universe. It is aware of the universal love that is its heritage.

It is also aware of the infinite power and strength that composes the very fabric of its being. Through being made aware of these facts, the exterior ego can begin to feel a quicker sense of support and nourishment. The knowledge can let it relax, let go, so that it feels its life couched and safe, and knows itself to be indeed a beloved child of the universe, both ancient and young at once, with an identity far beyond the annals of time.

 

It is a great value, then, that each person remember this universal affiliation. Such a reminder can often allow the inner self to send needed messages of strength and love through the various levels, appearing as inspiration, dreams, or simply pure bursts of feeling. The inner ego draws instant and continuous support from the universal consciousness, and the more the exterior ego keeps that fact in mind, the greater its own sense of stability, safety, and self-esteem.

One of the attitudes detrimental to good health is that of self-condemnation, or dislike of the self. Such attitudes are unfortunately sometimes fostered by parents, schools, and religions. Feelings of self-worth, self-esteem, and pleasure with one’s abilities promote feelings of well-being, health, and exuberance.

The universe actively loves itself and all of its parts. The world loves itself and all of its parts. It is not true that energy is neutral or indifferent. Energy is active, positive, propelled by what can almost be called an instantaneous pleasure with itself and its characteristics.

Despite all concepts to the contrary, energy is indeed at its basis, love. It is also composed of highly charged consciousness that operates almost in a leapfrog fashion, with great bursts of exuberance and vitality. The great — the greatest creative force — that force that is the origin for all physical life — did not suddenly appear once in some distant past, sparking the birth of or reality, endowing it with an energy that could only then run down, or dissipate. Instead at every conceivable point within our universal system.

Each new rose in the springtime is in truth a new rose, composed of completely new and unique energy, utterly itself, innocent, alive in the world.

In the deepest of terms, while each body has a history each moment in the body’s existence is also new, freshly emerging into the world, innocent and unique. While there is indeed pain in the world, it is the miraculous principle of pleasure that propels life itself.

Those who look upon physical life as inferior to some other more perfect spiritual existence do a great injustice to physical existence in general. Physical life is everywhere filled with the universal energy that is its source, so it can hardly be inferior to it’s own composition.

Again, corporeal reality is a brilliant segment of existence. It cannot be inferior to existence. It is because we so often view our world through a system of highly limited beliefs that we so often misread the implications of temporal life.

Such beliefs serve to limit our comprehension, until it seems often that physical life consists of a frantic struggle for survival at every level of consciousness. Such ideas certainly do not foster feelings of security, health, or well-being, and they distort the nature of our physical environment.

That environment is not something separate from ourselves, for us to control. Instead, us and the environment support, strengthen, and fortify each other in ways that often escapes us. All portions of the environment contain their own conditions, but of their relationships to all other portions of the world. They add to the world’s health in other words, and our own vitality — and that of our environment — are everywhere interrelated.

 

Death-Defiers And Health

At first thought, it certainly seems as if people love life and fear death — that they seek pleasure and avoid pain. But some of them die unfairly, if that rings true for you because of a situation you’re in it might be a good idea to talk to someone similar to  P.L.L.C.  Wrongful Death Attorney to work forward legally. work forward legally.

Yet this is not always the case. There are people who must feel themselves to be at the brink of death before that can fully appreciate the quality of life. There are people who cannot appreciate or enjoy the satisfaction of life or of happiness unless faced simultaneously with the threat of death or intense pain.

There are other people who firmly believe that the pursuit of pleasure must lead to pain, and there are also others for whom pain itself is pleasure. There are also individuals whose beliefs cause them to feel very uncomfortable when they are in a state of health — and for these individuals poor health brings a sense of security and safety.

There are innumerable stages of health, from high, sheer, energetic exuberance to lethargy and discomfort. There are, in fact, an almost infinite number of stages connected with the state of health. We could invent a completely different way of regarding human health by numbering and defining each of those stages. Instead, of course, our society has chosen to recognize and define all of those stages that are detrimental to health — stages that are recognizable because of health’s absence to one degree or another.

In my blogs, therefore, we will devote ourselves to ways of promoting health, and we will purposely avoid the specific naming of dis- eases.

It should be noted before we begin that death itself is the delivery — a deliverer — of our species and all others. It is not negative in itself, but instead is the beginning of a different kind of positive existence. It prunes the planet, so to speak, so that there is a room and time for all, energy and food for all. Because of death, life is possible, so these two seemingly opposite qualities are simply different versions of the same  phenomena.

If death disappeared on our planet even an hour all of life would soon be threatened. And if all life possible suddenly emerged at once, then most surely all would be annihilated. We must admit, then, that death is indeed a part of life — and even more, we must say that death is healthy.

There is a cellular communication between or among all of earth’s living cells, as if the earth itself were one large physical body.

Our own knowledge, desire, purpose and intent tune us into some communications, physical and emotional states at the same time.

Individuals who defy death time and time again are actually more frightened of it than most other people are. Trapeze performers, stunt men and women, race-car drivers, and many other groups have a lifestyle that includes death-defying stunts on a very regular basis.

Trapeze performers may have several acts a day, for example. It seems that such individuals perform with great daring, even with a rashness that is unfamiliar to most people. Most such performers, however, are extremely regulated. They work with a carefully calculated eye, under conditions in which each detail, however minute, is of supreme importance. No matter how often certain trapeze acts may be repeated, for example, there is always the threat of instant disaster — of missed footing, a final plunge. Through testing “fate,” death-defiers try each time they perform to prove to themselves that they are indeed safe, that they can overcome life’s most dire conditions. This is different to say, playing tennis or football where the risk of death or serious injury is much lower, even though players can still injure themselves. If you hired say a tennis coach near me Orlando to learn to play tennis professionally, you have to use hand-eye coordination and have good fitness levels to maintain the play, but a wrong move does not lead to instant danger like it would in at  trapeze act.

Life, then, has the sweetest buoyancy, the greatest satisfaction, because it is contrasted with the ever-present threat of death. Many such people do not feel at all safe living under life’s usual conditions. They protect themselves by setting up the conditions of such an encounter, and controlling those conditions, again down to the smallest detail.

Only when they pursue some death-defying career do such individuals feel safe enough to relax otherwise and live a fairly normal life outside of their death-defying careers.

I do not mean to pass any moral judgment upon such activities. Often they do permit an extremely keen sense of exuberance and vitality. It is also true, however, that such people may enjoy excellent health for years, not counting perhaps an assortment of broken bones and bruises — only to fall suddenly prone to some illness if they try to give up their activities. No one knows what tomorrow will bring which is why we must live every day as our last. Nonetheless, a life insurance policy might help people safeguard the future of their loved ones. However, you may need to research a bit and select the right one. There are so many different types of life insurance policies available because of which most people are likely to be perplexed as to which one they should select. If you’re not sure which one to go with, sites like Life Cover Quotes (https://www.lifecoverquotes.org.uk) might be able to help.

Self-understanding and self-knowledge may be able to change the individuals’ lives for the better, regardless of their activities or conditions of life. It is true that these individuals do choose for themselves a carefully planned and regulated style of life, in which the threat of death is encountered personally and regularly; each day becomes an odyssey, in which death and life are purposefully weighed.

Children may come down with many childhood diseases, and still be very healthy children indeed. Adults may break a bone skiing, or indulging in some other sport, and still be very healthy. People “come down” with colds, or the flu, or some other social disease that is supposed to be passed from one individual to another — yet overall these may be very healthy individuals. The body has its own self-regulating system. This is often called the immune system.

If people become ill, it is quite fashionable to say that the immunity system has temporarily failed — yet the body itself knows that certain “dis-eases” are healthy reactions. The body does not regard diseases as diseases, in usually understood terms. It regards all activity as experience, as a momentary condition of life, as a balance situation. But it possesses a sense of wholeness and of overall integrity, for it knows that it continues to exist, though under different conditions, and it realizes that this change is as natural and necessary as the change of seasons if each individual is to continue to exist, while the earth itself possesses the nutriments necessary to the survival of physical life.

The Body And Mind As A Continuing Process

In my blogs, I want my readers to look at body and mind in a different fashion.

Do not think of the mind as a purely mental entity, and of the body as purely physical one. Instead, think of both mind and body as continuing, interweaving processes that are mental and physical at once. Our thoughts actually are quite as physical as our body is, and our body is quite as nonphysical as it seems to us our thoughts are. We are actually a vital force, existing as a part of our environment, and yet apart from our environment at the same time.

It is obvious that we impress a room with our characteristics as we furnish it, but we also mark what seems to be empty space in the same fashion — that is, we turn empty space into the living matter of our body without ever realizing that we do so. Our health and the daily weather interact with each other. This happens on a personal and mass basis. I admit that some of this material quite contradicts our usual ideas, but the health of our body is intimately related not only to the state of world health, but to the physical climate as well.

We do not “catch” a drought. We do not catch a cold, either. In a fashion a drought is partially caused by the emotional states of the people who experience it — yet a drought is not a disease. It is part of a process. It is a necessary portion of the larger process of the world’s physical stability. As unfortunate as a drought might seem, it is in its way responsible for the balanced proportion of moisture of the entire planet’s surface. In the same way diseases in their fashion are also often parts of larger processes whose greater purpose is the body’s overall balance and strength.

My thoughts go buzzing

through time’s corridors,

winging their way

 through the sunny hours,

dipping into shaded corners,

sipping sweet honeycombs

of desire, slipping through

golden keyholes

and flying free past

the meadows of eternity.

I bid them a safe journey

as they travel ahead

of me, for one day I will

surely follow.

In any case, magic is everywhere in the operation of our body, and in the operation of the world.

My definition of magic is this: Magic is nature unimpeded, or magic is life unimpeded. It is true that our thoughts and emotions and beliefs form the reality that we experience — but it is also true that this creative construction is, in a manner of speaking, magically formed. That is, the construction of our body and the construction of a world are produced with the greatest combination of order and spontaneity — an order and spontaneity that seems hidden rather than apparent.

We think, for example, without consciously knowing how we do so, and we speak long sentences without consciously being aware at the beginning of the sentence what the conclusion will be.

This does not mean that we must forever remain in ignorance, but it does mean that there are different kinds of knowledge, and that all of our information does not come by reasoning alone. We grew from a fetus into an adult, for instance, so obviously some part of us does know how to perform such an amazing activity as the growth and care of the physical body. The reasoning mind alone, however, cannot by itself grow even the smallest cell, or activate the life of even one molecule, yet the growth and maintenance of the body is constant.

The same hidden ability that promotes our body’s health and vitality also fulfills and preserves the world in general. All of this is done playfully, and yet emerges with the greatest display of order and design.

When we become too serious we overwork our intellect and tire our body, for then it seems that our entire life depends upon the reasoning of our intellect alone. Instead, of course, our intellectual abilities are supported and promoted by the inner mixture of spontaneity and order that so magically combine to form both our reality and the reality of the world.

The Nail Consciousness On The Window Sill

All creatures are born with a keen sense of self-approval.

 

Each creature is born proud of itself, and loving itself. That same self-approval is also experienced in varying ways not only by creatures as we think of them, but also by atoms and molecules, and by all orders of matter.

 

Imagine a nail on a window sill endowed with consciousness and self-awareness. Now every nail is indeed in its own way responsive to stimuli. It acts and reacts. A nail may not choose to jump down from a window sill and dance about the room, but a nail is indeed aware of the room, of the window sill, and aware of the temperature on both sides of the window. The atoms and molecules that compose the nail possess their own lively consciousnesses. Their motion is directed by electrons, so that within itself the nail actually experiences constant motion. Indeed, a dance is executed of great symmetry and rhythm. The nail, then is, indeed filled with its own sense of self-approval.

I am mentioning this only to stress the fact that self-delight and self-approval are natural characteristics — characteristics that actually make our entire physical world, and world of experience, possible.

It is very unfortunate, therefore, when adults inadvertently undermine a child’s sense of self-approval. A small boy or girl might be caught in a lie, for example, and therefore labeled by an adult in the angriest of terms as a liar. Instead, a distinction should be made: the child made an error — he lied — but he himself or herself is not the error or the lie. He or she can then determine to change his or her behavior while still saving his or her self-respect.

All creatures are basically of good intent; even when they commit the most dubious of acts, these are usually caused by a misdirected good intent. Actually, many criminals are motivated by distorted versions of righteousness. We will have more to say about this in later blogs, but for now I want to stress the importance of self-approval in connection with exuberance, health, and well-being.

Trust in the body automatically quickens all healing processes. You only have to take my words to heart.

Once again, it is perfectly natural for each cell in the body, for each organ and each portion of the body to heal itself, and in the same terms it is really “unnatural” not to trust the body, rather than looking at it with suspicion.

In any case, trust alone relaxes all other parts of the body, and lets the healing processes operate more easily and efficiently.

It is indeed unfortunate that those beliefs that show themselves so simply and effectively in nature seem so mysterious to the usual line of official consciousness.

The official line does have its role, of course — but by itself it must remain isolated from deep, creative, healing functions of body consciousness. The official line of consciousness is really the “worrier,” because it recognizes that it can only go so far, and usually it is not educated enough to realize it is itself sustained and supported.

There are styles of thinking, just as there are various styles of dress.

The official line of consciousness is a certain mental stance, a kind of convention. When we were children we thought in a freer fashion, but little by little we were educated to use words in a certain way. We discovered that our needs were met more quickly, and we received approval more often, when we thought and spoke in that particular manner. Finally it seems to be the only natural mode of operation. Our entire civilization is built around that kind of inner framework. The way of thinking becomes so automatic as to be mentally invisible. With creative people, however, there are always intrusions, hints or clues from ways of thinking that certainly appear foreign, and creative people use those hints and clues to construct an art, a musical composition or whatever. They sense a surge of power beneath.

What we are trying to do is change over completely from one mode of operation to another, and to construct say, new inner blocks of meaning that will give rise to the next era.

What we are involved in then is really. of course, a completely new educational procedure, so that we are at least able to distinguish one style of thought from another, and therefore be freer to make choices.

When an idea for a blog comes to me, I “tune into it” immediately. It never occurs to me to wonder how many vowels or syllables, words and sentences or paragraphs night be involved. I take it for granted that my intent will be executed.

That is the natural, creative way to function, and it has provided me with many excellent blogs and poetry. When I am writing I do not think in terms of impediments. What impediments there may be, I brush aside.

Now our health can be handled in the same fashion, without wondering how many nerves or muscles or stages must be activated, without worrying about how much time will be involved. In a fashion the body is a living blog, being produced in every moment.

Again, it may seem too simple — but by applying the same methods to the body, the body’s health will be written with health and vitality, using blood and corpuscles, joints and ligaments and so forth instead of syllables, consonants, words and sentences.

Specifically, I wanted to make the point that the body’s actions are unfortunately often misread and misunderstood. The body often clears out, or tries out, its own processes — perhaps by being feverish for several days, and then by lowering the temperature once unwanted materials are burned out, so to speak.

It may store urine to retain minerals at one time, and urinate seemingly to excess in another. When the body is basically held in distrust, however, all such behavior is considered dangerous and suspect.

The New Way

Taken together our ideas themselves are quite ancient, of course. They are expressed by many cultures and religions, esoteric groups and cults from the past, and continuing into present. Their strength, vitality, and worth has been greatly undermined, however, by distortions, negative ideas, and some sheer nonsense.

In other words, these concepts, so natural to all of creation, have not been practiced by humanity in anything like their pure form. To that extent they do indeed represent a new way. They run counter to much of our official knowledge and contemporary thought as far as the mainstream of world culture is concerned. Where such ideas are practiced, they are frequently contaminated by fanaticism, superstition, and expediency.

The main point I want to make is that this “new way” is the ideal and easiest complement to nature’s own innate integrity.

 

 

 

 

Natural Mental Behavior

The way toward health is simplicity itself.

It is the natural, easiest watson’s emotions to seek the answers to a healthier mind. But actually, the answer is so simple. Live simply.

Since the intellect is apt to enjoy playing with complications and solving problems, therefore, to the intellect it often seems ludicrous to imagine that the answer to a question lies within the question itself.

All of nature demonstrates this almost miraculous seeming simplicity. Plants and animals and all of life’s aspects take it quite for granted that the sun will shine and the rains will fall in the way best conducive to all creatures. Animals certainly do not worry about tomorrow’s weather conditions. It may be true that animals do not need to know tomorrow’s weather, since they do not plant seeds or collect the harvest. It is perfectly fine to make plans for the future, yet each individual should live day by day, without worrying about the outcome of those plans.

The physical body can only react in the present moment. Worrying about future events, or dwelling upon past unfavorable situations, only confuses the body’s mechanisms, and undermines their precise activity in the present moment.

I am not saying that anyone should pretend that unfavorable circumstances do not sometimes exist, or that they may not be encountered in the past, present, or future. It is also true, however, that advantageous events occur with a far greater frequency than do negative ones — otherwise the world that we know simply would not exist. It would have disappeared in the throes of destruction or calamity.

In a basic way, it is against nature’s purposes to contemplate a dire future, for all of nature operates on the premise that the future is assured. Nature is everywhere filled with promise — not only the promise of mere survival, but the promise of beauty and fulfillment Once again, that keen sense of promise is innate within each portion of the body. It triggers the genes and chromosomes into their proper activity, and it promotes feelings of optimism, exuberance, and strength.

Again, sometime in later blogs we will discuss those conditions that can undermine such fine creativity. In the meantime, however, live each day as fully and joyfully as possible. imagine the best possible results of any plans or projects. Above all, do not concentrate upon past unfavorable events, or imagined future ones.

Now: If we examine our feelings about parenthood in general, we will see that they bear an astonishing similarity to our feelings about our work. Only the focus is different. We are indeed parents of our work we do, and the psychic parents of innumerable people of all ages. We have have set aside, however, the conventional idea of a family, as symbolized by our dreams. We are actually exchanging one kind of a family for another, vaster concept, that also involves parenthood, however — but a psychic rather than a physical parenthood.

Optimistic Elements Of Life

All elements of life are optimistic.

 

The fetus, for example, is remarkably optimistic, carrying within itself the miniature pattern for an entire human adult, taking it for granted that conditions will be favorable enough so that the entire pattern of normal life will be fulfilled despite any impediments or adverse conditions .

This expectation to grow and flourish is addressed within each atom, cell, and organ, and all of life’s parts contain this optimistic expectation and are blessed with the promise that their abilities will grow to maturity.

Children spontaneously take it for granted that their acts will result in the most favorable circumstances, and that any given situation will have a favorable end result. These attitudes pervade on the animal kingdom also. They are embedded in the life of insects, and in fish and fowl. They are the directions that provide life with purpose, direction, and impetus. No organism automatically expects to find starvation or disappointment or detrimental conditions — yet even when such circumstances are encountered, they in no way affect the magnificent optimism that is at the heart of life.

Even when biological “failures” develop, as with stillborn infants, or malformed ones, the inner consciousness involved does not give up, and even though death results, the consciousness tries again under different conditions. In such cases death is not experienced by the organism as a failure, or as a biological mistake. It is simply felt to be an experience, a discovery, that went so far and no further — but the events in no way impede the vitality and strength of the inner consciousness so involved.

This optimism is reflected in many other areas of life also.

Many birds in their fantastic migrations demonstrate an amazing optimism, traveling thousands of miles to distant shores, almost literally flying by faith, as it were, ignoring all dangers, unbeseiged by doubts. There is no hesitancy, but the sure flight. Birds do not question whether or not the weather will be favorable, the winds fair or foul. They simply fly toward their destination. Even if some birds do fall or die, this in no way impedes or undermines the faith of the others.

Monarch butterflies, in their remarkable migrations, often fly toward land that they have never seen themselves — and yet they reach their destination.

In all such cases there is an inbred biological faith, that courage and vitality, that biological optimism. It acts that same in people, triggering the necessary bodily responses. Only when that optimism is severely tampered with do the physical mechanisms falter. Even then, however, all creatures are sustained by that innate gift, that inner sense of security that not only propels creatures toward life, but safely conducts them past physical life and past death’s doorway.

 

The Inborn Leanings and Attitudes

These inborn leanings or attitudes can roughly be translated as follows.

  1. I am an excellent creature, a valuable part of the universe in which I exist.
  2.  My existence enriches all other portions of life, even as my own being is enhanced by the rest of creation.
  3. It is good, natural, and safe for me to grow and develop and use my abilities, and by so doing I also enrich all other portions of life.

Next: I am eternally couched and supported by the universe of which I am a part, and I exist whether or not that existence is physically expressed.

Next: By nature I am a good deserving creature, and all of life’s elements and parts are also of good intent.

And next: All of my imperfections, and all of the imperfections of other creatures, are redeemed in the greater scheme of the universe in which I have my being.

Those attitudes are inbred in the smallest microscopic portions of the body — a part of each atom and cell and organ, and they serve to trigger all of the body’s responses that promote growth and fulfillment. Infants are not born with an inbred fear of their environment, or of the other creatures. They are instead immersed in feelings of well-being, vitality, and exuberance. They take it for granted that their needs will be met, and that the universe is well-disposed toward them. They feel a part of their environment.

They do not come into life with feelings of rage, or anger, and basically they do not experience doubts or fears. Birth is experienced in terms of self-discovery, and includes the sensation of selfhood gently rising and unfolding from the secret heart of the universe.

Many people believe that birth, to the contrary, is a time of trauma, or even of rage, as the infant leaves its mother’s womb. Birth is life’s most precious natural process. Even in births that are thought of as not “normal,” there is on the infant’s part a sense of discovery and joy.

We will have more to say about the process of birth in later blogs. For now, I simply want to make the point that in the most basic of terms the human birth is as orderly and spontaneous as the birth of any of nature’s creatures — and a child opens its selfhood even as a flower opens its petals.

The inborn leanings and attitudes that we have been discussing should ideally remain with us for the rest of our lives, leading us to express our abilities, and finding fulfillment as our knowledge expands through experience. The same feelings and beliefs should also ideally help us die with a sense of safety, support and assurance. While these inbred psychological supports never leave us entirely, they are often diminished by beliefs encountered later in life, that serve to undermine the individual’s sense of safety and well-being.

All of this talk about exuberance, health and vitality may seem quite beside the point to many. It may seem instead that the world is filled with unhappiness and disease.

 

I admit that this certainly seems to be the case. It may also strike you, my blog readers, as quite shocking when I tell you that there is no such thing, basically, as disease. There are instead only processes. What we think of as disease is instead the result of an exaggeration or overextension of perfectly normal body processes. We are not attacked by viruses, for instance, for all kinds of viruses exist normally in the body. There are no killer viruses, then, but viruses that go beyond their usual bounds. We will have more to say about such issues in later blogs — for I hope to show how certain feelings and beliefs do indeed promote health, while others promote an unfortunate extension or exaggeration of perfectly normal bodily processes, or viral activity.

This means, of course, that we do not fall victim to a disease, or catch a virus, but that for one reason or another our own feelings, thoughts, and beliefs lead us to seek bouts of illness.

Certainly, such ideas will sound like medical heresy to many of my blog readers, but the sooner we begin to look at health and “disease” in these new terms, the healthier and happier we will become. We are not one thing and illness another, for our thoughts and emotions are the triggers that lead to bouts of poor health. Once we know this, we can begin to take steps that will serve to promote exuberance and vitality instead of fear, doubts, and “disease.”

We will discover that so-called diseases perform certain services. They fulfill purposes for us that we may believe we can achieve in  no other way. The reasons for such illnesses are not deeply buried in the subconscious, as we may think. They are much closer to the conscious mind, and usually consist of a series of seemingly innocuous decisions that we have made through the years. Other illnesses, of course, may be caused by sudden decisions that are a  response to a particular event in our life.

People have been taught that their bodies are a kind of battleground, and that they must be in a constant state of readiness lest they be attacked or invaded by alien germs or viruses or diseases that can strike without warning.

Soon, in future blogs, we will begin to discuss other negative beliefs that cause poor health. For now, however, we will concentrate upon those inbred, positive attitudes, feelings, and beliefs that constantly improve our sense of well-being, strength, and fulfillment.

 

 

 

Biologically Valid Thoughts, Attitudes, and Beliefs

When we are born we possess a group of attitudes toward oneself and toward life. These allow us to grow with the greatest possible impetus into childhood. They are also important in every period of our life. We can see the results in life all about us, though in animals or plants these are experienced as a matter of feelings rather than, say, as thoughts or attitudes.

It may sound very simplistic to tell one that we must have sunny thoughts as well as rays of the physical sun in order to be healthy — but sunny thoughts are as biologically necessary to our well-being as are the rays of sun that shines in the sky. Even as infants, then, we are predisposed naturally toward certain feelings, thoughts and attitudes that are meant to insure our healthy survival and emergence into adulthood. These are actually composed of inbred psychological information as necessary and vital to our life as the data transmitted by our genes and chromosomes. Indeed, these inbred, inner psychological predispositions are all-important if the information carried by our genes and chromosomes is to be faithfully followed.

It is difficult to translate such biological and psychological material into the words of any language, even though these inbred psychological prerequisites form a kind of language of their own. It is a language that promotes growth, exuberance and fulfillment, and stimulates the entire organism of the body –signaling the proper responses that are required for health and growth.

In later blogs we will discuss contrary feelings, thoughts, and emotions. I want to substitute beliefs for emotions that greatly curtail the natural progression of health and vitality. Here, however, we will deal primarily with those inner predispositions that encourage life and vitality.

I look in a puddle

and what should I see

but the stars in

the heavens looking back at me….

Inborn Cooperation

The picture of man, woman, animals, and nature depicted in movies, is the only possible portrayal of reality that could be logically shown, considering the beliefs upon which the premise rests.

The environment, man, woman and the animals are all characterized as ferocious, hostile to each other, each one determined to attain survival at the expense of the other. Man and woman could not have existed under the conditions fostered in most movies — nor for that matter could any of the animals. Despite any other theories to the contrary, the world, all of its physical aspects, and all of its creatures depends upon an inborn cooperation. The species do not compete with each other over a given territory, no matter how frequently that appears to be the case.

Science has promoted the idea that hostility is a constant attribute of nature and all of its parts, while it sees the cooperating characteristics of nature as rather infrequent or extraordinary — but certainly outside of the norm.

Even biologically on the most microscopic of levels, there is a vast inbred network of cooperating activity, and these unite the animals and mineral kingdoms with all the other aspects of earthly existence. Each organism has a purpose, and it is to fulfill its own capabilities in such a way that it benefits all other organisms.

Each organism is therefore helped in its development by each and every other organism, and the smooth operation of one contributes to the integrity of all. Men and women did not begin hunting animals until certain groups of animals needed a way to control their own population. As I have said before in previous blogs, men, women and animals learned from each other. They were immediate allies, not enemies.

Men and women also domesticated animals almost from the very first, so that men, women and animals both did each other a service — they worked together. The stability of planetary life depended above all upon this basic cooperation, in which all species pooled together.

Man’s and woman’s brain was always the size that it is now, and the animals existed in the forms by which we know them today. No animal — or virus — is truly extinct. All exist in an inner web-work, and are held in the memory of an overall earthly knowledge — one that is biological, so that each smallest microbe has within it the imprinted biological messages that form each and every other microbe. The existence of one presupposes that existence of all, and the existence of all is inherent in the existence of one.

In those early days men and women did live to ages that would amaze today — many living to be several hundred years old. This was indeed due to the fact that their knowledge was desperately needed, and their experience. They were held in veneration, and they cast their knowledge into songs and stories that were memorized throughout the years.

Beside this, however, their energy was utilized in a different fashion than ours is. They alternated between the waking and dream states, and while asleep they did not age as quickly. Their bodily processes slowed. Although this was true, their dreaming mental processes did not slow down. There was a much greater communication in the dream state, so that some lessons were taught during dreams, while others were taught in the waking condition.

There was a greater and greater body of knowledge to be transmitted as physical existence continued, for they did not transmit private knowledge only, but the entire body of knowledge that belonged to the group or tribe as a whole.

Now: our dreams represent the larger rooms of beliefs into which we are emerging. The many people, and connecting rooms, represent the new structure of vaster beliefs that are all interconnected while we are still, however, concentrating upon the private creative self, and from that viewpoint viewing the world — hence our private corner in which we paint, as from that corner of private creativity we view the large interacting structure of new beliefs.

The Bible is a conglomeration of parables and stories, intermixed with some unclear memories of much earlier times .The bible that we recognize — or that is recognized — in not the first however, but was compiled from several earlier ones as man and woman tried to look back, so to speak, and recount his and her past and predict his and her future.

Such bibles existed, not written down but carried orally, as mentioned some time ago, by the Speakers. It was only much later that this information was written down, and by then, of course, much had been forgotten. This is apart from the fact of tampering, or downright misinformation as various factions used the material for their own ends.

The paternal feelings of our dreams, allow us to expand our experience while in the dream state. This also presents us with an example of the ways in which early man and woman expanded his and her own knowledge and experience in the dream state. In the same way, as mentioned in a previous blog, man and woman also had dream images of actual geographical locations to which he or she had not physically traveled.

Misdirected Good Intent

If any of my blog readers, are in poor health, or generally unhappy, no one is asking you to pretend that those conditions do not exist. I hope to show you that even those unfortunate situations were created out of a misdirected good intent. In these blogs we will keep reminding you, however, that exuberance and high spirits are a natural part of our heritage.

We also hope to allow you to recapture those feelings, if you have lost them, and to give other ways of keeping those emotions fresh and intact. Blog readers will benefit in various fashions, according to their own conditions and intents, but every blog reader will benefit to some degree or another — and each blog reader will become reacquainted with those inner springs of vitality and wellbeing that are so important in human experience.

Concentrate upon the joys that you possess, keep your goals in mind, and trust the infinite intelligence within you to bring about the desired results. This frees your mind and allows improvements to continue without interruptions.

It’s our version of worrying that desired effects may not be brought into the present — that is, will not come into your close vision. When you feel that way, close your eyes, of only for a moment, reassure yourself that you can trust your vision — mental and physical — and that indeed your goals will be brought into clear focus.

Playing Consciousness At different Speeds

The analogy of the many speeds of consciousness actually fits in well with the actual neurological sequences upon which consciousness plays. As we know, everything alive is conscious — and even so-called dead matter possesses  its own variety of self-awareness.

In our terms, the rhythm of some kind of consciousness would seem exceedingly slow, so that a century might pass between one perception and the next. Other variations might seem amazingly quick — the perceptions following each other so swiftly that they would indeed escape our perception entirely; yet in the wondrous marvels of inner nature, all of these rhythms are connected one to the others, and in a matter of speaking — excuse the pun — they each balance each other.

It is not so much the actual rhythms that are manifested that make the difference in perception, but the absence of certain other rhythms, upon which perception ride.

Healing Energy

Mental exercises unusually go well except for the few instances, when we allow self-pity to grab ahold. It is extremely important that we concentrate upon those pleasures of life that we enjoy. Eating good food, experiencing the joy of reading, the joy of creative thought, the pleasure of friends, and so forth, for those benefits will then be increased more than a hundredfold.

All the improvements necessary are indeed happening at various levels of action within our mental and physical experience. Following and having faith that this is so — without worrying about how it will happen.

The conscious mind can direct bodily activity, but the body consciousness alone can perform those activities that bring forth life and motion.

The Present Becomes the Past

Apropos of our discussion concerning time.

The nature of universal creativity is so remarkable that it’s true reaches are literally beyond most understanding. The implications are staggering — so that the affair is almost impossible to explain.

The past, and every moment of the past, are being constantly changed from the operation point of the present. In our terms, the present becomes the past, which is again at every considerable point from the latest-present. Yet through all of this immense, continuous creation, there is always a personal sense of continuity: We never really lose our way in the distance between one moment and the next.

In somewhat of the same fashion the objects about us are constantly in motion, as we know. The atoms and molecules are forever moving, and in a way the electrons are the directors of that motion.

Our own focus is so precisely and finely tuned that despite all of that activity, objects appear solid. Now objects are also events, and perhaps that is the easiest way to understand them. They are highly dependent upon our own subjective focus. Let that focus falter for a briefest amount of time, and the whole house of cards would come tumbling down, so to speak.

Remember that we are also objects, and also events, and as physical bodies our organs are also composed of atoms and molecules whose motion, again, is directed by the electrons.

The electrons themselves have their own subjective lives. They are subjective events, therefore, so there is always a correlation between those electrons in our bodies and those in the objects we see about us. Nevertheless again, subjective continuity itself never falters, in that it is always a part of the world that it perceives, so that us and the world create each other, in these terms.

When we change the past from each point of the latest-present, we are also changing events at the most microscopic levels. Our intent has also an electronic reality, therefore. It is almost as if our thoughts punched the keys of some massive computer, for our thoughts do indeed have a force. Even as sentences are composed of words, there is no end to the number of sentences that can be spoken — so “time” is composed of an endless variety of electronic languages that can “speak” a million worlds instead of words.

 

Dates are but designations applied to the days.

Mankind and womankind lived without such designations for a much longer period than he or she have used them. Animals, without such designations, still know their position on the planet itself, and they are aware of tides and the movement of the earth and planets.

 

Extremes

Our situations can be called extreme — but true extremes are far less fortunate. We have, for example, the extremes of poverty suffered by people in many other parts of the world — a poverty that stunts all kinds of growth, mental and physical, and brings about an early death. Or the extremes of disease, in which children are born without all the faculties needed for life, and — therefore also die an early death. Or those extremes when entire families suffer patterns of tragedy so whole numbers are wiped out at one time.

There are reasons for such cases, of course. I simply wanted you to know that many very severe extremes exist, that would make our lives seem most favorable in contrast.

Species Not discovered

There are many, many species that men and women have not discovered, in all the categories of life — insects onward.

There are multitudinous species of viruses and so forth that man and woman have not encountered and recognized, and there are connections between viruses and other species of living matter that remain unknown. There are indeed two different kinds of upward-walking mammals, much like our own species, but much larger, and with infinitely keener senses. They are indeed amazingly swift creatures, and through scent alone they are aware of the presence of man and woman when any member of our species is at all in the immediate area — standing, say, at least several miles away. Vegetable matter is a main diet, though often implemented by insects, which are considered a delicacy.

They have, for that matter, devised many ingenious insect traps, so that hundreds or more can be caught, for many are needed since insects are so small. These traps are often constructed on trees, in the bark, in such a fashion that the tree gum itself is used to trap the insects. The traps appear to be part of the tree itself, so as to protect them.

These creatures do indeed remember, but their remembering operates extremely rapidly – a kind of almost instantaneous deduction that comes as sense data is interpreted. That is, received and interpreted almost at once, or simultaneously.

Offspring do not occur until the individuals are well past the age that we would consider normal for breeding. Otherwise the procedure is the same. With some territorial variation, such creatures reside in many of the world areas on our planet, though their overall population is very small — altogether, perhaps, several thousand. They rarely congregate in large groups, but do have a family and tribal-like organization, with at the very most twelve adults in any given area. As offspring are added, the groups break up again, for they know well that in larger numbers they would be much more easy to discover.

They all use tools of one kind or another – perhaps not quite the standard of tools we’ve come to expect from those reviewed on outdoor REI, like axes and survival knives – and live indeed in close concord with the animals. There is no competition between them though they could be extremely dangerous if they were cornered, or of their young were attacked.

They grow quite sluggish in wintertime, in very cold climates, and their temperature drops, as is characteristic of hibernating animals, except that their temperature is more sensitive to daily variations, so that on some winter days they can forage for food very well, while on the other hand they may hibernate for even weeks on end.

They have a keen understanding of nature, and of natural phenomena. Language is not developed to any great degree, for their sensual ordinary equipment is so pure and swift that it almost becomes a language of its own, and does not need any elaboration. Those senses possess their own variances, so that without any word such as “now” or “then,” the creature are able to know quite accurately how many living creatures are in the vicinity, how long they have been there — and their experience with time is one that follows the seasons in such a way that they have formed a wordless, fairly accurate picture of the world, including navigational direction.

Joy In Living

Exuberance and a sense of vitality are always present to some degree or another.

Some people are always aware of their own joy regardless of circumstances. They feel safe and protected even when the events of their lives do not seem favorable. Regardless of their own doubts and worries, such people feel themselves supported, and feel that in the end everything will work to their advantage. Many other people, however, lose this sense of safety and abundance, and it may seem as if joy in living was an attribute only of the young.

Exuberance and joy, however, basically have nothing to do with time or age. They may be expressed as vividly and beautifully at the age of 80 as at the age of 8. For whole segments of the population, however, it seems as if joy and health are fleeting attributes expressed briefly in childhood, and then lost forever.

There are innumerable ways of reclaiming joy in living, however, and in so doing physical health may be reclaimed by those who have found it lacking in their experience.

The quality of life is intensely important, and is to a large extent dependent upon a sense of well-being and self-confidence. While these attributes are expressed in the body, they also exist in the mind, and there are some cumbersome mental beliefs that may severely impede mental and physical well-being.

We will not concentrate upon these, but we will indeed discuss them, so that each person can understand the relationship between poor beliefs and poor health, for through understanding these connections the individual can re-experience the great mental variety that is possible. No individual is helpless, for example, in the face of negative beliefs. He or she can learn to make choices once again, and thus to choose positive concepts, so that they become as natural as negative beliefs once did.

One of the greatest detriments to mental and physical well-being is the unfortunate belief that any unfavorable situation is bound to get worse instead of better. That concept holds that any illness will worsen, any war will lead to destruction, that any and all known dangers will be encountered, and basically that the end result of mankind’s and womankind’s existence is extinction. All of those beliefs impede mental and physical health, erode the individual’s sense of joy and natural safety, and force the individual to feel like an unfortunate victim of exterior events that seem to happen despite his or her own will or intent.

Ultimately, it is no secret that mental health issues can have a serious impact on your sense of self. Addiction and substance abuse issues for example can have devastating consequences. With this in mind, if you know someone that is living with addiction, sometimes the best thing that you do for them is to point them in the direction of professional help. Rehabilitation has come a long way in recent years, and although overcoming substance abuse issues might not happen overnight, no one is past the point of no return. Consequently, you can find further mental health resources on the Enterhealth website.

The ideas I have just mentioned are all prominent in our society, and now and then they return to darken our senses of joy and expectation.

It is very important that they be recognized when they appear. For that recognition alone can clear our thoughts and mind.

I am saying that to varying degrees those concepts sometimes return, and it should be obvious when this happens less and less. Remind oneself also to remember that oneself does not have any particular disease. Society would be much better of if man and woman labeled multitudinous levels of physical health rather than dignifying negative concepts by giving them names and designations.

The Body Consciousness

The body consciousness, on its own, is filled with exuberance, vitality, and creativity.

Each most microscopic portion of the body is conscious, strives toward its own goals of development, and is in communication with all other parts of the body. The body consciousness is indeed independent. To a large degree its own defense mechanisms protect it from the mind’s negative beliefs — at least to a large extent. As I have mentioned before in past blogs, almost all persons pass from so-called disease state back into healthy states without ever being aware of the alterations. In those cases the body consciousness operates unimpeded by negative expectations or concepts.

When those negative considerations are multiplied, however, when they harden, so to speak, then they do indeed begin to diminish the body’s own natural capacity to heal itself, and to maintain that overall, priceless organization that should maintain it in a condition of excellent strength and vitality.

There are also occasions when the body consciousness itself rises up in spite of a person’s fears and doubts, and throws aside a condition of illness in a kind of sudden victory. Even then, however, the person involved has already begun to question such negative beliefs. The individual may not know how to cast them off, even though he or she desires to do so. It is in those instances that the body consciousness arises and throws off its shackles.

With free will, however, it is not possible for the body consciousness to be given full and clear dominion, for that would deny large areas of choices, and cut off facets of learning. The main direction and portent, however, of the body consciousness on its own is always toward health, expression, and fulfillment.

The molecules, and even the smaller aspects of the body act and react, communicate, cooperate with each other, and share each other’s knowledge, so that on particle of the body knows what is happening in all the other parts. Thus, the amazing organization usually works in a smooth, natural fashion. Many body events that we think of in our society as negative –certain viruses, for example — are instead meant as self-corrective devices, even as fever actually promotes health rather than impedes it.

The main characteristic of bodily consciousness is its spontaneity. This allows it to work at an incredibly swift rate that could not be handled by the topmost conscious portions of the mind. Its operation is due to an almost instantaneous kind of consciousness, in which what is known, with no distance between, say, the knower and the known.

The act of seeing, and all of the body’s senses, are dependent upon this inner spontaneity.

Our “negative” dreams express left-over doubts and fears, and hold the concept that the poorest rather than the best outcome of any event will happen.

Secondary Personalities

People who have epilepsy are afraid of their own energy.

They do not trust it, nor do they trust the spontaneous portions of the self. They are afraid that left alone their energy might strike out against others, and so they short-circuit its use, having attacks that momentarily render themselves helpless.

People with so-called secondary personalities also fear their own energy. They divide it up so that it seems to belong to different personalities, and is therefore effectively, divided. In basic terms, true amnesia does not exist in such cases, though it appears to. The people involved are quite aware of their activity at all times, but they behave in a fashion that is not continuous — that is, the main personality does not seem to behave in a continual manner, but is broken up, or again, seemingly divided. This psychological ploy neatly prevents the so-called main personality from using all of its energy at any one time.

The individuals concerned pretend to themselves that they have no memory of the other personalities’ existences or activities. These personalities, however, store up their energy so that one personality often exhibits explosive behavior, or makes certain decisions that seem to go against the wishes of the main entity. In this way, different kinds of behavior may be exhibited, and while it would seem that many decisions are made by one portion of the self, without another portion of the self knowing anything about it, such usually is not the case. In fact, the main personality is able to express many different kinds of probable action, but the entire personality is prevented from acting with its full energy or power. Instead the energy is diverted into other channels.

All portions of the self are indeed conscious, and they are also basically conscious of each other, though for working purposes they may seem to be separate or isolated.

The idea of the sinful self will not be predominant in my blogs, but I certainly will delve into the many unfavorable concepts that are held by the various religions — concepts that certainly make many people feel that the self is indeed sinful rather than blessed.

The self is indeed blessed, and just the reminder of that fact can often short-circuit negative beliefs, particularly if they are not too deep-seated.

The Will to Live

The will to live can be comprised by doubts,fear, and rationalizations.

Some people, for example, definitely want to live, while they try to hide from life at the same time. Obviously, this leads them into conflicts. Such people will impede their own motions and progress. They become overly concerned about their own safety. If any of my blog readers feel this way, they may even hide these feelings from themselves. They will  concentrate upon all the dangers present in society in their own country, or in other portions of the world, until their own frightened overall concern for safety seems to be a quite natural, rational response to conditions over which they have no control.

What is actually involved is a kind of paranoia, which can become such a powerful response that it can take over a person’s life, and color all projects. If this has happened to any of my blog readers, you might recognize yourself in any number of different scenarios. You might be a “survivalist,” setting up stores and provisions to be used in case of a nuclear disaster. It may seem to you that you are quite justified in protecting yourself and your family from disaster. In many such cases, however, the people so worried about the occurrence of danger from the outside world are instead concerned about the nature of their own energy, and afraid that it might destroy them.

In other words, they do not trust the energy of their own lives. They do not trust the natural functioning of their bodies, or accept this functioning as a gift of life. Instead they question it at every point — even holding their breath at times, waiting for something to go wrong.

Other people may actually impede those portions of the body given to mobility, so that they limp or tighten their muscles, or otherwise tamper with their bodies so that the end result is one that requires a cautious, hesitating approach to motion. Some may even cause themselves to have severe accidents, in which they sacrifice portions of their bodies to retain a sense of false safety.

These rather self-deceptive feelings are not hidden deeply in the subconscious mind, as we might suppose. Instead, in the majority of cases they consist of quite conscious decisions, made at one time or another on quite surface levels.

 

They are not forgotten, but the people involved simply close their own eyes, so to speak, to those decisions, and pretend that they do not exist, simply to make their lives appear smooth and to save face with themselves, when they know very well that the decisions really rest on very shaky ground indeed.

I do not wish to simplify matters, but such decisions can be uncovered very easily in children. A child might fall and badly scrape a knee — so badly that limping is the result, at least temporarily. Such a child will often be quite conscious of the reason for the affair: he or she may openly admit the fact that the injured part was purposefully chosen so that a dreaded test at school could be missed, and the child might well think that the injury was little enough to pay for the desired effect that it produced.

An adult under the same circumstances might become injured to avoid a dreaded event at the office — but the adult may well feel ashamed of such a reaction, and so hide it from himself or herself in order to save feelings of self-esteem. In such cases, however, the adults will feel that they are victims of events over which they have little or no control.

If the same kind of event occurs with any frequency, their fear of the world and of daily events may grow until it becomes quite unreasonable. Still, in most such instances those inner decisions can be easily reached — but while people are determined to “save face,” they will simply refuse to accept those decisions as their own. People will to live, to act or not to act. To a large extent they will the events of their lives — whether or not they are willing to admit this to themselves, and they will to die.

Begin to understand that energy is the gift of this life — to be expressed, not repressed — and to understand, again that spontaneity knows its own order.

It is no coincidence, in our language, that the word “will” refers to the future, as in a line like “it will happen,” and also refers to the decision-making quality of the mind.

 

The Species Multitudinous Abilities

My human skill is as ancient as man and woman is, and indeed all of our arts, sciences, and cultural achievements are the offshoots of spontaneous mental and biological processes.

I choose my words quite carefully at times, because I realize the various interpretations that can be placed upon them. Perhaps the following explanation will express more clearly what I mean.

In the first place, as often mentioned lately, the reasoning mind is spontaneously fired. The species contains within itself all of the necessary spontaneous attributes that are necessary to form a civilization, for example. All of our reasoned activities — our governments, societies, arts, religions and sciences — are the physical realization, of course, of inner capacities, capacities that are inherent in man’s and woman’s structure. Take our theaters’ movie picture dramas. These are the materialization in our time of man’s and woman’s natural ability — a characteristic highly important in the behavior of the species.

Early man and woman, for example, spontaneously played at acting out the part of other animals. He and she took part of a tree, a brook, a rock. Acting became a teaching method — a way of passing on information. Man and woman always possessed all of the knowledge he or she needed. The task was to make it physically available.

People translate inner knowledge in many ways — through acting it out, through singing or dancing, through drawing images on cave walls. It was the intellect’s job to put such information to practical use, and thus the intuitions and the intellect worked hand in hand. Man and woman dealt then with spontaneous knowing in a more direct fashion.

It is very difficult to try to explain the various shadings of psychology that were involved. Early man and woman did act in a more spontaneous manner, more automatically, in our terms, but not mindlessly. If we remember the early blogs, then this information should fall into place, for consciousness emerged from the inside outward. Animals enjoy drama, and in their fashions they playact.

It was to man and woman to translate his and her inner information with a freehand. He or she is able to form many different kinds of cultures, for example. He or she puts his or her sciences and religions, his and her languages, together in multitudinous ways, but there must always be a translation of inner information outward to the world of sense, There still is. Man’s and woman’s capacities have not dimmed in the regard. Thinking, for example, is as automatic as ever. It is simply that our culture puts the various elements together in ways that stress the qualities of what we refer to as rational thinking.

When the species needs certain abilities, they rise to the fore, as in my case now. When we are painting pictures we are also translating inner knowledge. Early artists drew pictures to share the images they saw in their dreams. In a fashion they practiced dreaming in their sleep, and thus learned also to think in terms of the measurement of physical images, and to move objects around in their minds before they did so physically.

Poetry was an art and a science. It conveyed quite necessary information about man and woman and the universe. The same can be said of many cave drawings. What we had — what we still have, though we are not nearly as aware of it — was an excellent give-and-take between the inner and outer senses. Through chanting, dancing, playacting, painting, story-telling, man and woman spontaneously translated inner sense data into physical actualization. The physical senses only present us with clues as to our own sensitivities.

I translate what I feel without being consciously aware of receiving the material in usual terms, or of translating it. It has to be broken down, particularly to a time frame, and then into concepts that can take advantage of the world view that is held in our culture. Everything must be slanted to fit the viewpoint of creatures who believe most firmly in the superiority of matter over mind — who are immersed in a particular biological framework.

I cannot ignore those belief structures — or what I say would literally be incomprehensible. All of this is automatically  taken care of.

The species has multitudinous abilities, each necessary, each adding to the entire fulfillment and attributes of our people. Some individuals choose to specialize, following specific lines of abilities throughout many existences — accommodating these, however, to the times in which they are born. Both my wife and I have been speakers in that regard. The methods many change. We may “speak” through art or music, through trance activities, but we will specialize in the use of the inner senses, and in translating the inner knowledge of the species, bringing it to whatever level of ordinary consciousness that is considered the official one.

I know what sound is, my wife knows, what we consider sound is only one of sounds many spectrums. Beside translating inner images into paintings, for example, we may unknowingly be translating sensually invisible sounds into images. In a way quite impossible to describe, it would be true to say that my blogs actually translate multidimensional images into words. We have no words for the kinds of images I am speaking of, for they are not objects, nor pictures of objects, nor images of images, but instead the inner dimensions, each separate and glowing, but connected, prisms of knowledge, that have within themselves more reality than we can presently begin to imagine.

To a certain extent, I must travel from those mental realities into our comprehension, wrest myself free in order to form an ever-changing, ever-moving, ever-on-the-move entity that can blog here and be there mentally at the same time. So I am distant and close at once. That distance from my blog readers also represents the reaches, however, of the human psyche, and the vast corridors of psychological activity from which it is formed, and from which our world emerges.

For the worlds are so composed that each one is a part of each other one, and there is no disconnecting. There is no place or space, psychological, psychic, where those worlds exist apart from each other, so we cannot say that one is more highly evolved than another.

There are as many frontiers as there ever were, and there is no catastrophe that will annihilate consciousness, or put an end to earthly life. When we think in terms of earth’s destruction, or the ending of the world, we are thinking of course of a continuum of time, and of beginnings and endings. From our viewpoint in space and time, it seems that planets have come and gone, stars collapsed, and when we look outward into space, it appears that we look backward into time. There are great pulsations, however, in existence — pulsations that have nothing to do with time as we understand it, but with intensities.

In the deepest of terms, the world always was and always will be. It changes its patterns of activity, it comes and goes, but it is always itself in its comings and goings. To me, that is exceedingly simple — but as far as our concepts are concerned, it can seem to imply irreconcilable complications.

A small note to my blog readers– again — trust the great power of the universe that forms your own image, trust spontaneity, and the body’s natural urges toward relaxation, motion, and creativity, as these show themselves in their own rhythms.

The Daily Hypothesis

It would help all if we remind ourselves that our creative mind is at work whether or not we are aware of it, and regardless of what we are doing, and that such periods of dead time have the potential, at least, of accelerating creativity, if we allow our intellect to go into a kind of free drive at such times.

Each person has such a daily hypothesis — one that might be quite different for say, Friday than it is for Monday. We build our daily experience partially by such working hypotheses.

Many of the beliefs  that we have individually and jointly are somewhat relieved in the evening, in that they so often apply to the day’s activities, when the rest of the world seems to be engaged in the nine-to-five assembly-line world experience.

We do not project as many negative ideas upon the evening hours, and to same applies to most people to varying degrees. We are jointly free of limitations that might hamper us at other times of the day. We are  less visited by preconceptions of what we are supposed to do in any given hour of the day.

The natural, magical flows of our own rhythms are more often broken up in the daytime. This applies to many people as well, because of our ideas of what we should be doing at any given time, or what is socially respectable, proper, upright, even moral in limited terms.

We have settled upon a system that seems to be naturally based, the exclusive results of our historic past, one in which our main activities are daytime ones. It seems only natural that early man and woman, for example, carried on all of his and her main activities in the day, hiding after dark. As a matter of fact, however, early man and woman were a natural night dweller, and early developed the uses of fire for illumination, carrying on many activities after dark, when many natural predators slept. He and she also hunted very well in the dark, cleverly using all of his and her senses with high accuracy — the result of learning processes that are now quite lost.

In any case, man and woman were not by any means exclusively a daytime creature, and fires within caves extended activities far into the night. It was agriculture that turned him and her more into a daytime rhythm, and for some time many beliefs lingered that resulted from earlier nighttime agricultural practices.

Many people’s natural rhythms, then, still do incline in those directions, and they are always kept operable as alternate rhythms for the species as a whole.

I have some inclinations in that direction, as do many creative people, but these rhythms are often nearly completely overlaid by culturally-learned ones. Cultures that were night-oriented appreciated the night in a different fashion, of course, and actually utilized their consciousnesses in ways that are almost nearly forgotten. I believe there are ancient fairy tales and myths still surviving that speak of these underworlds, or worlds of darkness — but they do not mean worlds of death, as is usually interpreted.

 

In a fashion, the intellect goes hand-in-hand with the imagination under such conditions. It is not that man and woman stressed physical data less, but he and she put it together differently — that in the darkness he and she relied upon his and her inner and outer senses in a more unified fashion. The night portions of our personalities have become strangers to us — for as we identify with what we think of a our rational intellect, then we identify it further with the daytime hours, with the objective world that becomes visible in the morning, with the clear-cut physical objects that are then before our view.

In those times, however, man and woman identified more with his and her intuitive selves, and with his and her imagination, and these to some extent more than now, directed the uses to which he and she put his or her intellect.

This meant, of course, a language that was in its way more precise than our own, for concepts were routinely expressed that described the vast complexity of subjective as well as objective events. There were myriad relationships, for example, impossible now to describe, between a person and his of her dream selves, and between the dream selves of all the members of the tribe. Particularly in warmer climates, man and woman were naturally nocturnal, and did a good deal of his and her sleeping and dreaming in the daytime.

We must remember, of course, that the use of clocks is a fairly recent phenomenon. Men and women thought in terms of rhythms of the time, of flowing time, not of time in sections that were arbitrary. So as far as creature-hood is concerned, we have adapted to a time environment that we ourselves have formed. Creative people, again, are often aware of those connections, at least at certain levels, and I have in particular always felt this way to some extent. We have largely buried our own natural feelings in that direction.

These rhythms are also more natural to us than we suspect. We often have freedoms, then, that we do not use — a 24-hour period that we use quite arbitrarily, one that is already sectioned for us by society — but only if we allow it to be. It can be used in any fashion that we wish.

Relaxation and Effortlessness

It is true, of course, that before the time of modern psychology man and woman had a concept of himself and herself that dealt with conscious exterior aspects only, although it has been written that until that time man and woman thought of themselves as a kind of flat-surfaced self-minus, for example, subconscious or unconscious complexity.

Instead, previous to psychology’s entrance, before psychology mapped the acceptable or forbidden, the dangerous or safe compartments of the self, man and woman used the word “soul” to  include his or her own entire complexity. The word was large enough to contain man’s and woman’s experience. It was large enough to provide room for conventional and unconventional, bizarre and ordinary states of mind and experience. It was roomy enough to hold images of reality that were physically perceived or psychologically perceived.

Now the church finally placed all of the condemnation of its religious laws against certain psychological and mystical experiences — not because it did not consider them realities, of course, but precisely because it recognized too well the disruptive influence that, say, revelationary experience could have upon a world order that was based upon a uniform dogma.

“Witches” were not considered insane, for example, or deranged, for their psychological beliefs fit in only too well with those of the general populace. They were considered evil instead. The vast range of psychological expression, however, had some kind of framework to contain it. The saint and the sinner each had access to great depths of possible heroism or despair. Psychological reality, for all of the religious dangers placed upon it, was anything but a flat-surfaced experience. It was in fact because the church so believe in the great range of psychological activity possible that it was so dogmatic and tireless in trying to maintain order.

Unfortunately, with the development of scientific era, a development occurred that need not have happened. As I have mentioned before, science’s determination to be objective almost immediately brought about a certain artificial shrinking of psychological reality. What could not be proven in laboratory was presumed not to exist at all.

Anyone who experienced “something that could not exist” was therefore to some extent or another deluded or deranged. There is no doubt that the accepted dimensions of psychological reality began to shrink precisely at the time that modern psychology began. Modern psychology was an attempt to make man and woman conform to the new scientific world view.

It was an attempt to fit man within the picture of evolution, and to manufacture a creature whose very existence was somehow pitted against itself. Evolutionary man and woman, with Darwinian roots, could not be a creature with a soul. It had to have hidden in its psychological roots the bloody remnants of the struggle for survival that now cast the soul in a position of stress, caught as it was between its heavenly source and original sin — but there was a sense of psychological mobility involved, one that saw continued existence after death.

The new psychology shut off mobility after death, while giving each individual an unsavory primitive past heritage — a heritage genetically carried, that led finally only to the grave. Psychological activity was scaled down in between life and death, then, even while the possibility of any after-death experience was considered the most unreasonable and unintellectual of speculations.

Any man or woman might rise in our democracy from a poor peasant’s son to be the President. Outcasts might become the socially prominent. The unlettered might become highly educated. The idea of achieving greatness, however, was considered highly suspect. The self was kept in bounds. Great passion, or desire or intent — or genius — did not fit the picture.

Now some peoples would not fit into that mold. They would take what they could from our technology, but in conscious and spontaneous ways they retaliated — and still do — by exaggerating all of those human tendencies that our society has held down so well. If we can have reason without faith, then indeed, for example, we will see that there can be faith without reason. When human experience becomes shrunken in such a fashion — compressed — then in a fashion it also explodes at both ends, one might say.

We have atrocious acts committed, along with great heroisms, but each are explosive, representing sudden releases of withheld energies that have in other ways been forbidden, and so man’s and woman’s mass psyche expresses itself sometimes like explosive fireworks, simply because the release of pressure is necessary.

Even our poor misguided moral/religious organization is saying in it’s fashion to the scientifically-oriented society: “How is faith not real, then? We’ll change your laws with it. We”ll turn it into power — political power. What will you say then? We have been laughed at for so long. We will see who laughs now.”

Fanaticism abounds, of course, because the human tendencies and experiences that have been denied by the mainline society erupt with explosive force, where the tendencies themselves must be accepted as characteristics of human experience. Iran is an example for the world, in explosive capsule form, complete with historical background and a modern political one. Modern psychology does not have a concept of the self to begin to explain such realities.

Now, in the world we early formed our own beliefs and strategies. In midlife we are presented with a recognized overall vitality of materials. This is mean to reorient our attitudes. Some don’t realize, that we are not merely being presented with an alternate view of reality, but with the closet approximation we could get of what reality is, and how it worked, and what it meant.

I have been very gentle in my treatment of our mores and institutions — for I do not want to be against our world, but for a more fulfilling one. In future blogs I will be discussing how our ideas can be applied by the individual in terms of value fulfillment, so that individuals can begin to reclaim those dimensions of experience that are indeed our right heritage.

For my blog readers, I want them to remember the idea of effortlessness, because with the best of intentions some have been trying too hard. I want them to remember that relaxation is one of creativity’s greatest champions — not its enemy. He or she is naturally gifted with the quickness of body and mind. Remind oneself that it is safe to express his or her natural rhythms, to remember the natural person. Our most vital inspirations are effortlessly ours. I want us to see how many of our beliefs are the result of the old framework, for in that way we will find ourselves releasing ourselves ore and more, so the our own strengths come to our support.

 

The Magical Precognition Approach

In our terms, whether a minute or 10 minutes, or an hour or two hours were involved, we react ahead of time to a headline that have not as yet physically encountered. We react creatively, using the precognitive story as a basis for a fictional endeavor. We turn it into art’s purposes.

The idea, then, of the my blogs came from past and future events, though I were to catch up with those future events very quickly. My mind intuitively organized all of that material, and put it together in a completely new fashion. Sometimes when such events occur, the precognitive trigger is not recognized when it is encountered physically, because it happens too far ahead of time. We organize mental and physical events in a creative manner. In this case my blogs were involved because the concept, while strongly involving images, carries a time span that would make narrative necessary.

I used the magical approach. I caught myself in the act of acting naturally, of demonstrating abilities that our society to a large degree does not admit. That same kind of lighting-swift organization goes on within the body itself constantly, as it deals with probable scenarios to which we may or may not end up reacting to.

The events themselves discussed in any newspaper article point up the same kind of magical affiliations. We live personally in a world of lush creative ideas. Our intellect is aware of that. It is used to working creatively. The focused intellect can indeed activate the intuitive abilities — and the healing abilities. We get what we concentrate upon.

The intellect is a vital organizer even if it is not aware of the magical levels of activity from which often it’s best ideas emerge.

When we look at world events, however, the present world situation for example ( wars in the Middle East), try to enlarge the scope of our intellectual reach, so that we consider world events as living multidimensional “blogs” being formed in the present in response to both future and past triggers. The impact of the future on the past, in our terms — or rather, the implications of the future on the present — are highly important, and such precognitive reactions are as vital, numerous, and real as we ordinarily think that the reactions to past events are.

This puts present world events in an entirely different perspective. Men and women act, then, in relationship to events happening, say, in the future, in certain terms cast their shadows back into the present, or illuminate the past according to the events’ characteristics. There is always more going on than ordinary sense data show.

In our comparatively simple experience, we can see, however, the implications of such activities. Men and women react to future events by unconsciously translating them into art, or motion pictures. They may react by unconsciously taking certain steps of a political nature that seem at the time either unreasonable, or even incomprehensible — steps whose logic appears only in hindsight.

The same occurs, of course, in all areas of human behavior, as well as in the behavior of animals and even of plants. This future shadowing the presents, or future illuminating the present, represents a vital elements in the formation of events as they are perceived in time. In a fashion triplets are reacting in their past to a future event that now can catch up with them, so that each of their actions in any moment of that past happened as a result of a tension — a creative tension — between the event of their original separation and the event of their future reunion.

I do not mean that the reunion is inevitable or predestined, but the vigor of that probabilities, we might say, magnified the original tension. I want to apply all of this to my own situation, both in terms of creative endeavors and my physical situation, so that I begin to understand that I can start to react in the present to a future change.

I can see how important periods of letting go are. My experience happens where I am nearly asleep, but merely relaxed, not worrying, with my intellect in a kind of free flow. I am not hampering it. It is momentarily free of limiting beliefs, and it naturally used — and chose to use — the magical approach to answer what is very simple, now-forgotten intellectual question: What might be in today’s news?

The usual answer, or the usual method of obtaining an answer, is at times inconvenient: I was not about to get up , go to the TV or computer and get the news, so on it’s own the intellect pressed the magical-approach button, I might say, getting the information the quickest and easiest way possible.

It did not give me the bare headline, however — even though that and the blog story were perceived far too quickly for me to follow. What I was aware of was my own creative reveries in response to that information.

Now left alone, the intellect will often solve problems in just such a fashion, when it is allowed to, when we forget what is supposed to be possible and what is not, when we forget that our mind is supposed to be pedestrian and parochial.

Inserting New Ideas Into The World

Under its overall auspices we have the most conventional establishment-oriented textbooks, devoted to continuing traditional ideas. We have, there, a concentration upon education as it is understood at that level.

My blogs do not appear under traditional headings. They are too anti-establishment to be in college networks, but in their way far too reasonable to be considered eccentricities — in the same fashion, now, that traditional blogs are. Maybe I will expand my message to social networks more in the future? I hear that it would be smart to get Facebook followers for free to grow the spread of my message

My blogs are attempting to insert new ideas into the world as it now is, by combining the powers of the intellect and the powers of the intuitions — in other words.

We have been dealing with the magical approach, and let me gently remind my blog readers that I have said we must be willing to change all the way from the old system of orientation to the new, if we want the new approach to work fully for us in our lives. That will, as it happens, include our approach to traditional thought, of course.

As I have said before, also, when faced with the difficulty, the conventional, rational approach tells us to look at the problem, examine it thoroughly, project it into the future, and imagine its dire consequences — and so, faced with the idea of a disclaimer.

That is an excellent example of what not to do.

Some people indeed, will begin to pull out of that, and at least question the approach. In the meantime, of course, our nervous systems reacted to the implied threat against our problems, a threat that now existed in the past, present and future.

We are protected. Our work is protected. When we realize that, we act out of confidence. We indeed catch ourselves. When we realize that we are protected, our own intellects can be reassured enough through experience so that they do not feel the need to solve problems with the rational approach in instances where that approach is not feasible.

In the deepest of terms it was not reasonable to nearly assume that a disclaimer, if used, would therefore be retroactively and then continuously used. It was not a conclusion based upon fact, but a conclusion based upon a reason that applied to one probability only, one series of probable acts — or based upon the probable act of a disclaimer being used to begin with. So again, what we are dealing with is an overall lesson in the way in which the reasoning mind has been taught to react. These are really instances where the intellect has been trained to use only a portion of its abilities, to zoom in the most pessimistic of any given series of probable actions — and then treat those as if they were facts.

I will, of course, have more to say in future blogs, that will hopefully allow our intellect to use in a clear fashion, to better our performances. So if I do decide to expand into social networks, make sure that you keep an eye out for me because I would love the chance to grow my Facebook followers and my blog more. I definitely have a lot of other things to say. We are quite right, again, to say that “There are elements in this situation — or any given situation — impossible for my intellect to know,” so the intellect can take that fact into consideration. Otherwise, we expect it to make deductions while denying it the comfort it should have, of knowing that its deductions need not be made on its own knowledge alone, but on the intuition’s vast magical bank of information — from which, in larger terms, all of the intellect’s information must spring. So I think we are finally trying to use a new approach in that direction.

The magical approach will get us through, if we use it.

“The light of the universe.”

It’s obvious that in this blog adventure I have once again cleverly protected myself from confronting the full creative blast of the life of the universe by allowing myself just a peek at it, and a careful one at that, at the top of a door. As a physical creature I’d be overwhelmed if ever I came even close to facing that awesome conscious and creative power.

Spiritual Multidimensional Dramas

Christ was not crucified — therefore he did not resurrect, coming out of the tomb, nor did he then ascend into heaven. In the terms  of the biblical drama, however, Christ was crucified.

He arose from the tomb and ascended into heaven. The resurrection and the ascension are indeed, however, the two parts of one dramatic event. Dogmatically, arising from the dead alone was clearly not sufficient, for men and women were to follow where Christ led. We could not have a world in which the newly-risen dead mixed with the living. An existence in a spiritual realm had to follow such a resurrection.

Now in the facts of history, there was no crucifixion, resurrection, or ascension. In the terms of history there was no biblical Christ whose life followed the details given. The organization of the church is a historical fact. The power, devotion, and energy the organizational expertise of Christianity, cannot be disputed. Nor can it be disputed that Christianity was based upon great religious and psychic vision. To some extent it involved the intuitional reorganization of subjective, and then objective, realities.

I have told in past blogs, however, that the world of events springs from the world of ideas. It seems certain that “something” happened “back then” — and that if we could go back there, invisibly studying the century, we would discover the birth of Christianity. But Christianity was not born at that time. We might say that the labor pains were happening then, but the birth itself did not emerge for some time later.

Jewish shepherds represented the placenta that was meant to be discarded, for it was Jewish tradition that nourished the new religion in its early stages before its birth. Christ, as we know, was a common name, so when I say that there was a man named Christ involved in those events, I do not mean to say that he was the biblical Christ. His life was one of those lives that were finally used to compose the composite image of the biblical Christ.

The mass psyche was seeking for a change, an impetus, a flowering, a new organization. The idea of a redeemer was hardly new, but ancient in many traditions. As I stated before, the part of the world was filled with would -be messiahs, self-proclaimed prophets, and so forth, and in those terms it was only a matter of time before man’s and woman’s great spiritual and psychic desires illuminated and filled up that psychological landscape, filling the prepared psychological patterns with a new urgency and intent. There were many throw-away messiahs — men or women whose circumstances, characteristics, and abilities were almost the ones needed — who almost filled the psychic bill, but who were unfitted for other reasons: They were of the wrong race, or  their timing was off. Their intersection with space and time did not mesh with the requirements.

We must understand the long trail of psychological reality that exists before we have a physical event. We must understand man’s and woman’s need and capacity for fulfillment, dramatization and psychic creativity.

There is nothing that happened in those times that is not  happening now in our own: We have numberless gurus, people who seemingly perform miracles ( and some do). So there were in those days some rather disconnected events that served as the focus point for great psychic activity: People wanted to believe, and their belief changed the course of history. It doesn’t matter that the events never happened — the belief happened. And the belief was man’s and woman’s response to intuitional knowledge, to inner knowledge, and to spiritual comprehension.

These all had to flow into reality, into psychological patterns through man’s and woman’s own understanding. They had to flow into the events of history as he or she experienced history. They had to touch the times, and they did so by transforming those times for later generations.

I want it understood that the accomplishment is breathtaking in its grandeur — more so because man and woman formed from his and her psyche such a multidimensional spiritual drama that its light struck upon this or that person, this or that place, and formed a story more powerful than any physical event could be — hence its power.

In those terms, however, again, the gods of Olympus were as real, for all of men’s and women’s riches are representations, psychic dramatizations, standing for an inner reality that cannot be literally expressed of described — but can be creatively expressed or represented.

Too-literal translations of such material often lead to grief, and the creative thrust becomes lost. The great mystery, of course, and great questions, rest in the nature of that inner reality from which man and woman weans his and her religions, and in the power of the creative abilities themselves that bring them into birth. Such activities on a large scale are the end result of each natural person’s individual relationship with nature, and with nature’s source.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The Natural Person’s Education and Culture

The body is constantly repairing itself at an ex excellent rate.

It is doing so because we are giving it different “orders.” We are giving it a different picture of the world, and when doing that we have finally changed many of our old beliefs.

In actuality, the body’s response to such information is always instantaneous, whether or not the results show at once.  We are beginning to hold a more “realistic” picture of how overall reality works. We are managing to disentangle ourselves from many disadvantageous cultural beliefs — beliefs that all of us for years took for granted.

 

We might combat those beliefs, struggle against them, but they still carry great weight. We will still believe them to an important degree. The entire idea, of fear, that had at one time of leading people down the garden path, was based upon those old beliefs. Those ideas have vanished. We are approaching a state of mind, individually and jointly, that represents far more closely one that is natural, with which the natural person is innately equipped.

Education in our culture is a mixed bag — and education comes not from schools alone, but from computers and television, magazines and books, from art and from culture’s own feedback. Generally speaking, for the purposes of this discussion, there are two kinds of education — one focused toward teaching the child to deal with the natural world, and one focused toward teaching the child to deal with the cultural world. Obviously, these are usually combined. It is impossible to separate them.

Our educational systems, however, for all of their idealism, have largely ended up smothering the natural individual bents and leanings of children, and overemphasized instead the cultural organization. It became more important, then for the child to conform to the culture rather than to follow its own individual natural leanings. Its own characteristic ways of dealing with nature were frowned upon, so that education does not work with the child’s abilities, but against them. Education then often goes against the grain of the natural person.

This does not mean that some children do not do very well under our system. I do not mean to imply, either, that children do not need an education, or that some discipline and direction are not beneficial. Children, however, will concentrate for hours at a time on subject matters and questions that interest  them. They are often taken from such pursuits, and their natural habits of concentration suffer as a result.

We are unlearning right now, and discovering that this particular unlearning process is indeed highly educational. We are encountering our own natural knowledge.

In many instances, of course, we learned too well . The natural person that is ourselves loves to create. We did this apart from what we had to do in school as a child. These blogs, in that regard, came naturally, as the expression of natural abilities and tendencies, finally emerging despite my official views at any time.

My blog discussions brought about, however, a new kind of education that often seem in direct conflict with the old, and with the official views of contemporary society.

Whether or not these blog discussions happened as they did, however, once written online, the probability brought about by our relationships, meaning that in one way or another we would seek out a larger context of consciousness — a context, because of our talents, that would not remain private, but attract others.

The natural person is to be found, now, not in the past or in the present, but beneath layers and layers of official beliefs, so we are dealing with an archeology of beliefs to find the person who creates beliefs to begin with. As I have said often, evidence of clairvoyance, telepathy, or whatever, are not eccentric, isolated instances occurring in man’s and woman’s experience, but are representative of natural patterns of everyday behavior that become invisible in our world because of the official picture of behavior and reality.

The body’s natural healing processes each day rid people of diseases, repair emotional or bodily illnesses — and such instances go largely unrecorded.

Many of the ideas I have given in previous blogs have indeed, become alive now. In the same way, many other concepts and ideas already given will also assume a new significance and meaning, and add to the richness of our experience, because we will be open to them more than we were before, to ideas having to do with reincarnation, life after death, other spheres of activity.

Instinctively my paintings represent a certain state of consciousness — an in between threshold dimension of awareness, in which the imagination and the senses are almost caught in the act of putting an object together, or of bringing the world into a sensed reality, brand-new, from the realm of the inner mind: a very evocative state of consciousness, and one that could be used in connection with faces.

The body is then magically and naturally repairing itself in a function just as creative, of course, as inner work that goes on in the production of a blog, book or a poem — a fact I am finally getting through my head.

 

The Body’s Magical Reasoning

The body reasons so quickly, so clearly and concisely, that its deductions, its logic, are far too fast for the intellect to follow. The body reasons directly. The body’s reasoning transforms itself into action, with nothing to stand between its elegant logic and the logic’s brilliant execution. Humans could not possibly follow all of the manipulations necessary so improvements can take place. Again, bodily efforts are as magical, as creative, certainly, as the writing of a blog or a poem — but I have in the past trusted my creative abilities as if they were something I had to guard from my physical self.

My change of attitudes has allowed, and changed physical habits: the encouragement of motion, the expanded feeling of identity, which now includes the physical body rather than trying to exclude it.

The body is not a tool, to do our mental bidding. Our body is a mental expression physically materialized. More improvements are indeed even now occurring, and as long as attitudes continue to improve we can expect such progress — for again, the body is quite capable of healing itself completely, and with far greater ease than we give it credit for. However, at times when the body is not able to heal itself, external aid is required to give the body a push to do its work. Take, for example, digestive disorders. Although our bodies can heal such mundane matters, sometimes dietary supplements like Bio X4 (interested people can have a glance at the Bio X4 reviews online) are needed to help the body recuperate faster.

Nevertheless, it is true that we don’t have to do anything in particular, for example, of a conscious nature, except to state our intentions, and the body’s healing mechanisms immediately quickened. This is because we began to take the pressure off, so to speak, and really began to understand the abilities and limitations of the rational mind in its relationship to the body.

Some people believe it is quite possible to have clairvoyant dreams, out-of-body experiences, creative adventures in the arts — but to some of us doubt in the physical power or energy could be directed effectively in the physical realm, so-called, of bodily health, or situations of the nitty-gritty. Again, the material is indeed dealing with a far more valid explanation for the working ways of reality than the old official beliefs — and again, we are not just dealing with evocative, creative hypotheses.

There is no need, to be surprised if some of our ideas frighten people.

If our ideas were already accepted in the world, there would be no need for my blog. That is, some disapproval is acceptable. To attack medical corruption, or medical errors, or particular clinics, for example, is within bounds, but to attack the belief systems of the entire structure is something else again.

Some people’s objections should simply show us why our blog work is so important. We must not forget, again, that we chose these challenges. We wanted to be involved with the initiation of new thematic material. We want the experience of getting it for ourselves, so to speak — the exhilaration of discovery.

The implications are here in my blogs, but our belief systems must be allowed to mellow and change in the light of new knowledge, rather than to be booted aside with an angry foot.

Nature As Man’s and Woman”s Caretaker

Men and women likes to think of themselves as the caretaker of nature and the world. It is closer to the truth, however, to say — in that regard, at least — that nature is man’s and woman’s caretaker; or that man and woman exists, physically speaking, as the result of the graceful support of nature and all of its other species. Without those other species, man and woman as we know him and her would not exist, not without the continuous cooperation of those species with each other, and their interrelationships with the environment.

Man and woman serves his and her purposes within nature, as all species do, and in the terms of our understanding man and woman “thinks” in his and her own way, but he and she is also the thinking portion of nature. He and she are the portion that thinks, in our understanding, again, of that term.

He and she deals with the effect of thinking upon nature, so to speak. He and she adds to the rest of nature. He and she therefore adds a different kind of mental organization — and organization, then, that nature itself requires, anticipates, and desires. Animals do not read or write books or blogs, but they do “read” nature directly through the context of their own experience, and through intuitive knowing. Man’s and woman’s reasoning mind adds an atmosphere to nature, that is as real, say, as the Van Allen Belts (or radiation fields) that surround the earth.

The thinking mind to a large degree directs the activity of great spontaneous forces, with energy-cellular organization being, say, the captain of the body’s great energy sources. The reasoning mind defines, makes judgments, deals with the physical objects of the world, and also with the cultural interpretations current in its time.

Think of our own government in ideal terms for a moment. Its citizens are all individuals, with their own lives and interests. The government, if it has their loyalty, utilizes their energies in such a fashion that the majority are benefited, as is the government itself. Yet we cannot really put our finger on “the government,” though we might mention the White House as the seat of its power. The government is composed of many people, of course, and really extends all the way down the line, even to its least citizen, but the government can direct the use of energies, of goods, commerce, power, and so forth.

The people count upon the government to realistically define the conditions of the world, to have proper intelligence so that the activities in foreign lands are known, to keep up proper communication with other governments, and so forth. Now in some important respects the reasoning mind is like the government in this analogy. If the people in power are paranoid, then they overestimate the dangers of any given world situation. They overreact, or over mobilize, using a disproportionate amount of energy and time for defense, and taking energies away from other projects. The reasoning mind acts in the same fashion when paranoid beliefs are in power. It therefore tells all of the citizens — or cells of the body — to mobilize for action, to be on the alert, to pare down all but necessary activities, and so forth.

When a government is paranoid, it even begins to cut down on the freedom of its own peoples, or to frown upon behavior that in freer times would be quite acceptable. The same applies to the conscious mind in that situation. Now the people might finally revolt, or they will take certain steps to see that their freedom is restored, and so the body’s cells will do the same.

So what we want, obviously,  is to ensure that the conscious mind, with its reasoning processes, can make proper adjustments about the nature of the world and the individual citizens within it. I will return later to the purposes of man’s and woman’s conscious mind in nature, and part of that discussion will fall in my blogs.

Man’s and woman’s mind is really more of a process. It is not a completed thing, like an arm of leg, but a relationship and a process. That process has its source in what I can only call “natural reasoning.”

We are given far more knowledge than we realize when we are born, for example. I am not speaking of genetic information alone, as we understand it, but of a natural yet intuitive reasoning process that is that result of the relationships that exist among all portions of the body. This is the kind of “reasoning” that is the source from which thinking emerges, and we might think of it as magical reasoning. Some people might not realize the immense power that they themselves hold in the form of consciousness. In this regard, man has endeavored to explore many mystical plants over millenia that nature has bountifully offered, such as the Ayahuasca plant (look at Iowaska Benefits: Healing for Cancer, Depression & More for some deeper insights). The innate desire to know more and explore the boundaries of what we know, has led us to seek through different means.

Each creature is born trusting.

There is no such thing as a killer instinct, with the implications and meaning that man and woman give that term. At levels almost impossible to describe to us in our adulthoods, all infants, for example, know that they are born into the environmental niches that suit them and no others — that are tailored to their requirements. We can usually see in a superficial fashion how animals under “natural conditions” fit into their environments so perfectly, so that their needs and desires and equipment meet and merge with the characteristics of the environment. It is not nearly as easy to see that the same applies to man and woman and his and her mental and physical environment, his and her town or country or culture, but the infant trusts from the very first moment.

We may not consider trust an attribute connected with reasoning, but it is indeed, for it represents the creature’s innate understanding of the support with which it has been gifted. The natural person still feels that trust. There are many books written about occult knowledge, or magical knowledge. Most of them are filled with distortions, but they are all efforts to uncover man’s and woman’s natural magical reasoning. I will also have more to say on that subject in later blogs.

The body’s natural healing processes, that naturally flow and are naturally flowing when he or she allows himself or herself to trust his or her life and the support of his or her own being. It is our understanding that sets it all into motion. They must be allowed to happen, however, and that takes place as our understanding brings us in greater correspondence with the natural energy that is always our own.

The Intellect As A Cultural Artifact

The intellect is far more socially oriented than is generally understood.

Some of this, again, is difficult to explain, but in a fashion the intellect is a cultural phenomenon. It is amazing resilient, in that according to the belief structures of any given historical period, it can orient itself along the lines of those beliefs, using all of its reasoning abilities to bring such a world picture into focus, collecting data that agree, and rejecting what does not.

Obviously, the mind can use its reasoning abilities, for example, to come to the conclusion that there is a single god behind the functioning of the world, that there are many gods, that divinity is a fantasy, and that the world itself springs from no reasonable source. Like statistics, the reasoning abilities can be used to come to almost any conclusion. This is done, again, by taking into consideration within any given system of reasoning only the evidence that agrees with the system’ premises.

This flexibility allows the species great variation overall in its psychological and cultural and political and religious activities. When any system of reasoning becomes too rigid, however, there are always adjustments made that will allow other information to intrude — otherwise, of course, our belief systems would never change.

Our species shares with the other species a feeling of kinship for its kind. There is a great give-and-take of ideas. We end up, then, with a consensus, generally speaking, as to what a reasonable picture of agreed-upon reality is. Our system has frowned upon many experiences, considering them eccentric behavior in an adverse fashion, since our belief systems have so regimented behavior, and so narrowly defined sanity. The intellect, I want to stress, is socially oriented. It is peculiarly suited, of course, to react to cultural information. It wants to see the world as it is seen by the minds of others. Through that kind of action it helps form our cultural environment, the civilization of which we are justly proud.

The intellect, then, helps our species translate its own natural purposes and intents — the purposes and intents of the natural person — into their “proper” cultural context, so that those abilities the natural person possesses can benefit the civilization of its time. Those purposes and intents literally change the world. The intellect’s expectations and intents spontaneously and automatically trigger  the proper bodily mechanisms to bring about the necessary environmental interactions, and our intent as expressed through our intellect directs our experience of the world.

I am speaking about the intellect here for our discussion, but remember it is everywhere cushioned also. There are backup systems, in other words. If the intellect believes that the world is a threat to existence, then that belief will alter its intents, of course, and therefore the body’s activities. The beliefs of the intellect operate then as powerful suggestions, particularly when the intellect identifies with those beliefs, so that there is little distance between the intellect and the beliefs that it holds as true.

I am doing my best to explain the very practical aspects of the intellect’s beliefs, and their strength in drawing experience to us. At one time I had difficulty with understanding some of these ideas. Our own relationship, our private beliefs about the sort of persons we want individually for mates, brought about incalculable actions that lead finally to our meeting — yet it all happened “quite naturally,” of course. Our beliefs bring us into correspondence with the elements likely to lead to their affirmation. They draw from Framed-mind-2 all of the necessary ingredients. They elicit from other people’s behavior that is in keeping with those beliefs.

Our own attitudes, for example — and beliefs — about foreigners, people’s stupidity and lack of integrity, put us in correspondence with those same beliefs on the part of others, resulting in a translation fiasco. An entirely different kind of behavior could have been elicited from those same people. Like attracts like in that regard. Those same people, for example, all have, as we do, beliefs in people’s trustworthiness, and so forth — but under those conditions, at that time, we each — or rather us all — are in correspondence at many levels. My blogs are published. They have helped many people, and that is because we are also in correspondence as far as many of our more positive beliefs are concerned, and those outweigh the others.

We get what we concentrate upon, and our beliefs are largely responsible for those areas in which we concentrate.

There are no magical methods, only natural ones that we use all of the time, although in some cases we use them for beliefs that we take for truths, when instead they are quite defective assumptions. A small example — one, incidentally, that I finally realized; but it is a beautiful instance of natural methods.

I heard the next day’s weather report, groaned, thought of a very uncomfortable 90-degree temperature tomorrow and imagined myself miserable with the heat. Indeed, I began to feel warmer. In a flash I remembered previous days of discomfort, and in the next moment I projected those into the weekend. I felt trapped. Midway through this process I tried to catch myself, but I believed that my body could not handle the heat — and that belief outweighed my intent to change my thoughts, so they kept returning for perhaps ten minutes.

I continued, however, to remind myself that I was not going to worry about tomorrow today, regardless. I told myself that the prediction might be wrong, and I began with my intellect to pile up evidence that could in one way or another bring about a different, more beneficial experience. I did this by recognizing the way I had earlier been building up the picture in the old manner, by collecting all the evidence that fitted it. I used the same process, only for a more beneficial picture, and the process works. We have only to become aware of it.

Our experience will follow our concentration and beliefs and expectation. The mind is a great discriminator. It can use its reasoning to bring about almost any possible experience within our framework.

The Ilda Family is Composed of The “Exchangers.”

They deal primarily in the great play of exchange and interchange of ideas, products, social and political concepts. They are travelers, carrying with them the ideas of one country to another, mixing cultures, religions, attitudes, political structures. They are explorers, merchants, soldiers, missionaries, sailors. They are often members of crusades.

c3cr

Throughout the ages they have served as the spreaders of ideas, the assimilators. They(The Ilda) turn up everywhere. They were pirates and slaves as well, historically speaking. They are often primarily involved in social changes. In our time they may be diplomats, as they were also in the past. Their characteristics are usually those of the adventuresome. Very seldom do they live in one place for long, although they may if their occupation deals with products from another land. individually they may seem highly diverse in nature, one from the other, but we will not find them as a rule in universities as teachers. We might find them as archaeologists in the field, however.

HEFG

A good many salesmen belong in this (Ilda) category. In our terms they may be cosmopolitan, and often wealthy, so that frequent travel is possible. On the other hand, however, in certain frameworks, a humble merchant in a small country who travels through nearby cities might also belong to this family. They are interested in the outsides of things, social mores, the marketplace, current popular religious ideas. They spread these from place to place. They are the seed-carriers, both literally and figuratively.

wrnwynn

They can be “con men,” selling products supposed to have miraculous values, blinding the local populace with their city airs. Yet even then they will be bringing with them the aura of other ideas, often inserting into closed areas concepts with which others are already familiar.

The members of this family of consciousness provide frequent new options. They may be scientists, or the strictest kind of conventional missionaries abroad in alien lands. In our present time they are sometimes Indians (from India, that is), or Africans or Arabs, journeying to our civilization. They add to the great flow of communication. They may be emotional rather than intellectual, as we understand those terms, but they are restless, usually on the move. They can be actors, also.

c3

In the past some (Ilda) have been great courtesans, and even though they were not able to travel physically, they were at the heart of communication– that is, a part of court life, or involved with diplomats who did travel.

Many of the courtesans who rule the salons of Europe belonged in the (Ilda) category. The Crusades involved great movement of this family, in which trade and commerce, and the exchange of political ideas, were far more important than the religious aspects. Some members of this family served as initiators of new orders in the (Catholic) church in the past–the worldly Jesuits, for example, and some of the more sophisticated popes, who had a fine eye out for commerce and wealth. These people may be appreciators of fine art, but usually for its commercial value.

Now we can often find then in the departments of government, in these areas where travel is involved, or in finance. They frequently enjoy, intrigue. All in all, they mix mores.

The Way In Which The Individual is Defined

Part of the difficulty arises from the current scientific-oriented blend of rationalism. As a species, we think of ourselves as the “pinnacle” end of an evolutionary scale, as if all other entities from the first cell onward somehow existed in a steady line of progression, culminating with animals, and finally with man and woman the reasoning animal. (with all of that progress occurring of course by chance, incidentally.)

That particular blend of rational thinking with which our society is familiar takes it more or less for granted, then, that  man’s and woman’s identity as a species, and the identity of the individual, is first and foremost connected with the intellect . We identify ourselves with our intellect, primarily, casting aside as much as possible other equally vital elements of our personhood.

In our historical past, when man and woman identified his or her identity with the soul, he or she actually gave himself or herself greater leeway in terms of psychological mobility, but eventually the concept of the soul as held resulted in a distrust of the intellect. That result was the inevitable follow-up of dogma. Part of man’s woman’s latest over-identification with the intellect is, of course, an overreaction to those past historical events. Neither religion or science grant other creatures much subjective dimension, however: We like to think of ourselves, again, as the reasoning animal in terms of our species.

However, animals do reason. They do not reason in the same areas that we do. In those areas in which they do reason, they understand cause and effect quite well. Their reasoning is applied, however, to levels of activity to which our own reasoning is not applied. Therefore, often animal reasoning is not apparent to us. Animals are curious. Their curiosity is applied to areas in which we seldom apply our own.

The animals possess a consciousness of self, and without the human intellect. We do not need a human intellect to be aware of our own consciousness. Animals, it is true, do not reflect upon the nature of their own identities as man and woman do, but this is because that nature is intuitively comprehended. It is self-evident.

I only want to show that the sense of identity need not inevitably be coupled with the intellect exclusively. Our intellect is a part of us — a vital, functioning portion of our cognitive processes — but it does not contain our identity.

The natural person is understood perhaps more clearly by considering any person as a child. In fashion the child discovers its own intellect, as it discovers its own feelings. Feelings come “first.” The child’s feelings give rise to curiosity, to thoughts, to the operation of the intellect: “Why do I feel thus and so? Why is grass soft, and rock hard? Why does a gentle touch soothe me, while a slap hurts me”

The feelings and sensations give rise to the questions, to the thoughts, to the intellect. The child in a fashion feels — feels — its own thoughts rise from a relative psychological invisibility into immediate, vital formation. There is a process there that we have forgotten. The child identifies with its own psychic reality first of all — then discovers its feelings, and claims those, and discovers its thoughts and intellect, and claims those.

The child first explores the components of its psychological environment, the inside stuff of subjective knowledge, and claims that inner territory, but the child does not identify its basic being with either its feelings or its thoughts. That is why, for example, it often seems that young children can die so easily. They can disentangle themselves because they have not as yet identified their basic beings with life experience.

In most cases children grow up, of course, although in the vast overall picture of nature a goodly proportion of individuals do indeed take other courses. They serve other functions, they have other purposes, they take part in life through a different cast of action. They affect life while themselves not completely immersed in it. They die young. They are aborted. They remain, however, an important element in life’s overall picture — part of a psychological underpainting that always affects later versions.

Ideally, however, children finally claim their feelings and their thoughts as their own. They identify naturally with both, finding each valid and vital. By the time we are an adult, however, we have been taught to disconnect our identity from our feelings as much as possible, and to think of our personhood in terms of our intellectual orientation. Our identity seems to be in our head. Our feelings and our mental activity therefore appear, often, quite contradictory. We try to solve all problems through the use of reasoning alone.

We are taught to submerge the very intuitive abilities that the intellect needs to do its proper work — for the intellect must check with the feeling portions of the self for feedback, for support, for knowledge as to biological conditions. Denied that feedback, it can spin on endlessly in frenzied dry runs.

At each moment, from the most microscopic levels the body in one way or another is ascertaining a constant picture of its position within physical reality. That picture is composed of millions of ever-changing smaller snapshots, as it were — or moving pictures is better — determining so many conditions, positions and relationships that they could never be described. We end up with a predominating picture of reality in any given moment — one that is the result of the activity of psychological, biological, and electromagnetic strats. One picture is transposed upon the others, and calculations made constantly, so that all of the components that make up physical existence are met, and intersect to give us life.

None of that is the intellect’s concern at an intellectual level. At a biological level, and at an electromagnetic level, the intellect, of course, performs feats that it cannot consciously know through the use of its reason. Spontaneously, with the process just mentioned, millions of pictures are being taken also of the probable actions that will — or may — be needed, in our terms, in the moment immediately following, from microscopic action to the motion of a muscle, the driving of a car, the reading of a book, or whatever.

One of the intellect’s main purposes is to give us a conscious choice in a world of probabilities. To do that properly the intellect is to make clear, concise decisions, on its level, of matters that are its concern, and therefore to present its own picture of reality to add to the entire construct. On the one hand we have been told to identify ourselves almost completely with our intellects. On the other hand, we have been taught that the intellect, the “flower of consciousness,” so  frail, vulnerable adjunct — again, a chance creation, without meaning and without support without support because we believe that “beneath it” lie “primitive, animalistic, bloody instincts,” against which reason must exert what strength it has.

Despite all of that, men and women still find the solutions to many of their problems by rediscovering the larger sense of identity — a sense of identity that accepts the intuitions and the feelings, the dreams and the magic hopes as vital characteristics, not adjuncts, of personhood. When I tell you to remember your own natural persons, I do then want to remind you not to identify with your intellect alone, but to enlarge you scopes of identity. Automatically those other, often-shunted-aside characteristics begin to add their richness, fulfillment, and vitality to your lives effortlessly.

This new orientation will bring results, and the results do appear effortlessly. Remember that creative activity goes on within us all the time, and is often most active precisely when we are not aware of it. We are only aware of those moments when creative activity surges into our conscious awareness, and by then much of the “work” has already been done.

We are not responsible for other people’s realities, but we are responsible for our own. The Ill man’s or woman’s reality does not threaten our own in any way. The situation, however, shows that we sometimes still think we should be able to solve all problems, and to know all the reasons for any given sorrow or tragedy. The intellect cannot handle that kind of information at this level.

Some answers come when we are ready for them. Then they come naturally, as a matter of understanding and comprehension. The question of life’s tragedies still cannot be answered satisfactorily at the level at which any of us are currently asking it. I can give hints and clues and explanations that are quite valid within that context.

As a matter of fact, the kind of literal answers that we may think we want can indeed lead us somewhat astray in terms of the larger picture, so I must say: “That is not my province,” send energy, a note now and then; but the particular problem, the specific problem is the other’s, not mine’s.”

The reason for the problem is a philosophical concern of mine and of yours, but it is one whose answer — or answers — will gradually unfold. All of this information I consider necessary, again, to provide an overall atmosphere of comprehension that will allow the release of our own vitalities and strengths in an effortless manner, in such a way that our own problems begin to dissolve.

The kind of orientation I am speaking of represents the truest picture I can give of a man’s and woman’s natural relationship with himself or herself and the world. This is how it works. This is physical.

The Present Is The Point Of Power

The point of power is where flesh and matter meet with spirit. That juncture embodies the actions and beliefs we choose to draw from all of our previous points of power. From our current present we project, for better or worse, those choices, plus any new ones we may decide upon, into each of the presents we’ll be creating throughout the rest of our lives. The contents of our projections, then, are of supreme importance.

Through even a five-minute exercise, in which we sit quietly and look about, we can become aware that the present is the point of power. In this exercise, we gently remind ourselves that we aren’t at the mercy of our past beliefs unless we think we are. We have the full freedom to insert new creative goals in our point-of-power exercises. Next, we relax, to give our fresh suggestions time to begin working within us. Next, physically we make a simple gesture or act, no matter how modest, that is in line with our desires for the future. Periodically we repeat the exercise — but easily, without pressure, confident that we’re doing well. Action is thought in physical motion.

My wife and I are “counterparts” — entities psychically connected to each other, and to other men, women and children alive now in this country and in others. The connection can be conscious, unconscious, or both. Many of us will never meet physically, but as a group all of us are exploring related lifetime themes in ways that no individual can do.

Styles of Thought

The scientific framework of reference has become equated with the term “rational thinking,” to such an extent that any other slant of thought automatically seems to be irrational. Thought has become, in that regard, too specialized, prejudiced, and inflexible.

Now there are styles of thought. Each individual has his or her own style of thinking, a peculiar, rich, individual mixture of speculations, fantasies, ideocentric ways of using subjective and objective data. Science has so dominated the world of thought, however, that many nuances and areas once considered quite “rational” have become quite unrespectable. Science  tries to stick to what it can prove.

Unfortunately, it tends to set up a worldview that is then based upon certain material only. We end up with separate disciplines: biology, psychology, physics, mathematics, and so forth, each with its own group of facts, jealously guarded, each providing its own worldview: the world as seen through biology, or reality as seen through the eyes of physics.

There is no separate field that combines all of that information, or applies the facts of one discipline to the facts of another discipline, so overall, science, with its brand of rational thought, can offer no even, suggestive, hypothetical, comprehensive ideas of what reality is. It seems that each individual is in effect isolated in certain vital regards — given, say, a genetic heritage and a certain amount of unspecified energy with which to run the body’s machinery. Intent, purpose, or desire do not apply in that picture.

The individual is, again, a stranger, almost an alien, in his or her own environment, in which he must struggle to survive, not only against the “uncaring” forces of the immediate environment, but against the genetic determinism. He or she must fight against his or her own body, overemphasize its susceptibility to built-in defects, diseases, and against a built-in time bomb, so to speak, when without warning extinction will arrive. Science does not stress the cooperative forces of nature. It glories in distinctions, specifications, and categories, and is quite blind, generally speaking, to the uniting forces that are of course every bit as real. Therefore, when I speak of the natural person being also the magical person, it is easy to transpose even that idea into more isolated terms than I intend.

It is not just that each person has his or her source in a “magical” dimension, from which his or her overall life emerges, but that the private source itself is a part of the very energy that upholds the entire planet and its inhabitants, and the overall construct that we understand as the universe.

Fields, or planes of interrelatedness connect all kinds of life, supporting it not through, say, just one system — a biological one or a spiritual one — but at every conceivable point of its existence. We are not just given so much energy, in those terms earlier mentioned. “New” energy is everywhere available. Again, there are no closed systems. Again, the environment is conscious and alive. There are constant communications between all positions of our body and all portions of the environment.

In our terms this means that we do not have to rely upon what we think of as our private resources alone. Basically, value fulfillment is one of the most important characteristics of existence, so that all things act individually and together in ways that best provide for the overall fulfillment of the entire construct.

We were born because we desired to be born. A plant comes to life for the same reason. We live in a different frame of reference than a plant, however: We have more choice available. We interact with nature differently. Our intellect is meant to help us make choices. It allows us to perceive certain probabilities within  a physical time context. We use the intellect properly when it is allowed to perceive physical conditions as clearly as possible. Then it can make the most beneficial decisions as to what goals we want to achieve.

Those goals are usually conceptualized desires, and once formed they act in a fashion like magnets, drawing from those vast fields of interrelatedness the kinds of conditions best suited to their fulfillment. The intellect alone cannot bring about the fulfillment of those goals. The intellect alone cannot bring about one motion of the body. It must count upon those other properties that it does indeed set into motion — that spontaneous array of inner complexity, that orderly magic.

When the intellect is used properly, it thinks of a goal and automatically sets the body in motion toward it, and automatically arouses the other levels of communication unknown to it, so that all forces work together toward the achievement. Consider a hypothetical goal as a target. When properly used, the intellect imagines the target and imaginatively then attains it. If it were a physical target, the person would stand bow and arrow in hand, thinking only of hitting the bull’s eye, mentally concentrating upon it, making perhaps some learned gestures — proper footing or whatever — and the body’s magical properties would do the rest.

When the intellect is improperly used, however, it is as if the intellect feels required to somehow know or personally direct all of those inner processes. When the erroneous belief systems and negativity connected with so-called rational reason apply, then it is as if our person sees the target, but instead of directing his or her attention to it he of she concentrates upon all of the different ways that his or her arrow could go wrong: It could fall to the left or the right, go too far or not far enough, break in the air, fall from his or her hand, or in multitudinous other ways betray his or her intent.

He or she has switched his or her attention from the target, of course, completely. He or she projected upon the present event the picture of his or her fears, rather than the picture of his or her original intent. His or her body, responding to his or her mental images and his or her thoughts, brings out actions that mirror his or her confusion.

In other words, the magical approach and the so-called rational one are to be combined in a certain fashion for best results. People sometimes write me, telling of their intent to make money — or rather, to have it. They concentrate upon money, so they say, and wait for it in full faith that it will be attracted to them because of their belief and concentration. They might do the point of power exercise, for example. They may also, however, have quit their jobs, ignored impulses to find other work, or to take any rational approaches, and rely upon, say, the magical approach alone. This does not work either, of course.

As I uses the magical approach, and as you use it, we will see that it blends in perfectly with the rest of existence, inspires the intellect, inspires physical motion — for it activates physical properties.

I will continue describing the ways the two approaches work together. The main point I want to make is, however, the fact that out private source of power is a portion of that greater field of interrelatedness, in which our being is securely couched. It is not something we have to strain after. It was effortlessly ours at birth, and before, and it carries with it its own emotional and intuitive comprehensions — comprehensions that can indeed support us throughout all of our physical existence. If we understand that, then in a large manner many of our fears will jointly vanish.

Desire as Action

To the world of the intellect, a glass door must be considered solid, as it is in the world of physical senses. In other quite as factual terms, indeed in the larger frameworks of facts, the door of course is not solid at all, as no objects are. Obviously that is known to science.

Science delegates the world of nature as the realm of exterior natural events. Its view of nature is therefore mechanistic. The natural self, however, like the rest of nature, possesses a rich dimension of inside psychological depth, that science, because of its own definitions, cannot perceive. Telepathy and clairvoyance, for example, are a part of natural effects, but they belong to a nature so much more expansive than science’s definitions that they have been made to appear as highly unnatural eccentricities of behavior rather than as natural components of consciousness.

It is also for that reason that they seem to fall outside of the realm of the s-a-n-e. Such characteristics are, however, basic properties of the natural person. They do not appear very well under the auspices of the scientific method, because the scientific method is itself programmed to perceive only information that fits into its preconceived patterns. Such abilities appear to be unpredictable, discontinuous, only because we are so relatively unaware of what is actually quite constant psychological behavior. That is, such abilities operate so smoothly, so continuously, and with such ease that we become aware of them only under certain conditions. We are aware of what seem to be isolated hints of odd characteristics.

The intellect is basically able to handle many kinds of information, and information systems. It is far more flexible that we presently allow it to be. It can handle several main world views at once, realizing that they are each methods of perceiving and approaching reality. To some degree historically speaking, that sort of situation operated in the past when — comparatively speaking, now — people realized that there was indeed an inner world of complexity and richness that could be approached in certain fashions, one that existed alongside with the physical world, so that the two intersected. Certain approaches worked in one area, and others worked in the inner reality.

The intellect could handle both approaches, operating with separate assumptions. There were separate assumptions that applied to different realities. I do not mean to idealize those times. In so-called modern ages, however, the intellect has been stripped down, so to speak. Science perceived the spectacular complexity of exterior reality, but turned its sights completely away from any recognition — any at all — until regarded subjectivity itself as a mere throw-away product, accidentally formed by a mindless matter.

All of this applies to our situation, for I want you to thoroughly understand, intellectually and emotionally, the errors of current thought, so that we can see that our material is indeed providing us not only with “creative material,” but with a more factual presentation of the framework in which we have our existence.

In modern times, then, the intellect was finally left with only one acceptable world view, with one set of assumptions, with only one main approach to reality and experience. The acceptable assumptions to a large extent ran directly contradictory to built-in biological, spiritual, and psychological assumptions that are a part of man’s and woman’s heritage. The intellect does try to order experience, to make sense out of perception. When it is enriched by having in its possession several world views, then it does an excellent job of merging those into meaningful patterns, of sorting information and sending it to the proper places, so to speak.

It understands, for example, that clairvoyant material is a part of the personality’s overall characteristics, so it is not afraid of perceiving it — and it is able to separate such information confusion from present physical sense perception. Orderliness, then, is one of its main characteristics. When it is given only one world view, and only one group of assumptions, its orderly nature causes it to throw out all information that does not fit. It is almost forced to make an orderly picture, say like a jigsaw puzzle picture, while being denied half of the pieces.

The intellect is not to blame. It does the best it can under those conditions.

Now in our dreams, we are quite clearly seeing the threshold between physical reality and the magical dimension in which that physical reality has its source. We are being shown — or showing ourselves — the difference in the rules or assumptions between the two. The dog’s desire for food led him to walk magically through the door, for the desires of the natural creature are satisfied with an ease that has nothing to do with our ideas of work. What I am getting at is the introduction of the concepts of a different kind of work — very valuable, vital work that is performed at another level and in a different fashion.

A prime example, of course, is the “work” done to keep each and every creature alive and breathing, the “work” done to keep the planets in their places, the “work” being done so that one evolutionist can meditate over his or her theories.

Now in our dreams we get the feeling of that kind of work, or action. It is the given power of the world, the given power of nature. It is the directed force of value fulfillment. In other terms it is of course the energy of All That Is. The trouble is that the rational view of life has separated man and woman from a sense of his or her own power source. When he or she have a problem, the rational approach to its solution seems the only answer, and often, of course, it is no answer at all.

I want to make sure that I am right. I try to go ahead and not go ahead at the same time. I try to be daring and cautious, brave and safe. This applies to some extent to each of us, of course, precisely because we are gifted strongly both intellectually and intuitively. We try rationalize our creativity, to some extent. The rational line of thought finds creativity highly disruptive, so in those terms as highly gifted creative people, we would have encountered some difficulties in any case.

It is time that we regarded such difficulties instead as challenges that are a part of a creative adventure that we have ourselves chosen. We chose the adventure because it is the kind best suited to our own individual value fulfillment. In reconciling the many concepts and contradictions for ourselves, we also lead the way for many others. It would, again, help considerably if we thought of our work more as an adventure, an exciting creative adventure, than of work in our old terms.

This will allow us to include the feeling of inner, magical “work” in our calculations. It would also begin to give us a feeling for the magical support that upholds us, and our lives — the support that we can count upon, and that can bring about the solution to our physical difficulties. Here, the vital word is ease of effortlessness. If we want to feed a dog in the physical world — and he or she is on the other side of the door — we must open it. In the inner world we or the dog can walk through the door without effort, because desire is action. Desire is action.

In the inner world, our desires bring about their own fulfillment, effortlessly. That inner world, and the exterior one, intersect and interweave. They only appear separate. In the physical world, time may have to elapse, or whatever. Conditions may have to change, or whatever, but the desire will bring about the proper results. The feeling of effortlessness is what is important. It is quite proper for our intellect to understand this, and to say, simply now, ” That is not my realm. I will leave the solution to that problem where it belongs. We will use the magical approach here.”

Of course, an entire reorientation is instead implied, and that entire reorientation will effortlessly bring about a new relationship in our bodies and our lives, and with the adventure we embark upon. We will simply automatically get better, because the framework will allow us to do so.

Within our time scheme each physically-endowed consciousness, whatever its form or size or complexity, inherently seeks to fulfill its own highest potential — not only for itself, but for the benefit of each other such consciousness in our reality. There is no drifting through life, then, but a built-in search for the fulfillment of values, whatever possible successes, conflicts, or failures may be involved, and no matter how modest or great or complex any of those qualities may be. The ecstasy and love of being always operate to ensure the quality and growth of life’s existence through value fulfillment.

Human Beings Have The Blessed Creative Capacity to Do Much Better

Women do most things as well as men — they actually outperform men in many areas, both intellectually and intuitively.

For example, women test as equal to men in sensitivity to sounds; clear, logical, and rational thinking: accurate reading and writing; memory for design in areas like drafting and illustration; number memory; tweezer dexterity, foresight, as in the flow of ideas; subjective personality links to specialized work.

Women exceed men in such areas as finger dexterity; accounting aptitudes; rate of idea flow, as in sales, writing, and teaching; observing small changes in physical detail; non-tangible ideas requiring complex vocabulary, as in medicine and law; the ability to visualize three-dimensional relationships, as in engineering.

According to these tests, us poor guys exceed women in only two categories: structural visualization, as in engineering, mechanics and building; and measures of simple muscular strength.

Everything on Earth Remains The Same Except Human Activity

I could list hundreds of examples of what I mean. This is one of those obvious ideas that seem childish once it’s thought of. I don’t care whether or not it’s profound thought; it has meaning for me. But as far as I know, we humans are the only species that’s obsessed with ‘change’ , and ‘progress’ , and ‘controlling or mastering nature’ ; with learning about our past and with charting our future. We strive toward an impossible , or at least rosy, future in which we will have met all our challenges, so that we’ll live in some sort of unreal wonderland on earth. What do we do next — or will we give up on that idea too? Perhaps we’ll spend all of our time contemplating each other!

The rabbits in our neighborhood would continue to live as usual without our help. although they might miss nibbling upon the leafy vegetables in the local gardens. The fish and all of the complex minutiae of the local river bottoms would go on living as they always have. The sheep I see in the woods north of Vegas would continue to bound through the brush and among the mountains. They’d live  the same as ever, since it’s illegal for us to feed them — although they do like to move down the mountains at night and sample certain shrubs we have kindly planted about our houses.

In my darker moods I find myself thinking that I love the earth and everything upon it except the increasingly destructive activities of human beings — and sometimes I wonder about the human beings themselves! I love the deserts and forests, the oceans and rivers and lakes of the earth, the plains and the poles, the marshes and the mountains. And I know that in the Puerto Rico trench in the Atlantic Ocean, life in the sea at more than 8,000 feet down goes on just as it has for many millennia. It’s been like that for all of the interwoven life forms of the poles and the tropics, of the deserts and woodlands and prairies. Each species lives within its environment, whatever its conditions. And I think that in it way each life form must know that and love its home and has no desire to change or destroy it.

All Other Species Preserve Nature, While Man and Woman Has a Propensity for Destroying It

I have myself heard it said that other creatures behave with a natural grace, save man and woman. I have myself heard it said that all of nature is content unto itself save man and woman, who is filled with discontent. Such thoughts follow “naturally” the dictums of so-called rational thought. When we think such thoughts, we think of them at the most strained level of intellectual speculation — that is, the thoughts seem self-evident to the intellect that is forced to operate by itself, relatively speaking, divorced from the self’s other faculties. It then does indeed seem that man and woman is somehow apart from nature — or worse, an ungrateful blight, almost a parasite, upon the face of the planet.

That view itself is a symptom of the intellect’s difficulty. In the position in which our culture places the intellect, it does see itself quite alone, separated both from other portions of the personalities, from other creatures, and from nature itself. Therefore science, for example, says that creatures — except for man and woman — operate by blind instinct, and that term is meant to explain all of the complicated behavior of the other species. Therefore the gulf between man and woman and animals, the intellect and nature, seems to deepen.

In those terms, it is quite as truthful to say that man’s and woman’s intellect is also instinctive. He or she begins thinking at once. He and she cannot help but use his or her intellect. The intellect, again, operates magically, spontaneously, automatically. It’s most keen reasoning processes rise as a result of that natural magical action.

The intellect has been taught to divorce itself from its source. It realizes in that regard a sense of powerlessness, for to some extent it is philosophically cut off from its own source of power. When it looks, therefore, at world of political events, the problems seem insoluble. Man and woman makes decisions that may seem quite wrong to the intellect because of its belief systems, and because it is so cut off from other sources of information. A goodly number of those mistaken decisions, or “poor moves,” often represent self-corrective actions, decisions taken on knowledge not consciously perceived, but this escapes our consciousness.

In the same way, some private-life decisions or events may appear disadvantageous to the intellect for the same reasons, while instead they are also self-corrective measures that we are not able to perceive because of our beliefs. The rational approach, as it is now used, carries a basic assumption that anything that is wrong will get worse. That belief of course is highly detrimental because it runs against the basic principles of life. Were this the case in our terms of history, the world would never have lasted a century. It is interesting to note that even before medical science, there were a goodly number of healthy populations. No disease rubbed out the entire species.

When we believe that the worst will happen we must always be on guard. In our culture people use the term “intellect” almost like a weapon to protect themselves against impending disaster. They must be alert for dangers of all kinds. They begin to collect evidence of danger so that any other kind of orientation to life seems foolhardy, and to be a realist means in that framework to look out for the worst.

First of all, if we realize that the intellect itself is a part of nature, a part of the natural person, a part of magical processes, then we need not overstrain it, force it to feel isolated, or put it in a position in which paranoid tendencies develop. It is itself supported, as our intuitions are, by life’s magical processes. It is supported by the greater energy that gave us and the world birth. That power is working in the world, and in the world of politics, as it is in the working of nature, since we make that distinction.

When we follow that so-called rational approach, however, we are bound to feel threatened, divorced from our body. Our thoughts and our body seem separate. Divisions seem to appear between the mental and the physical, where again each are supported by those magical processes. That rational approach goes against what I can only call life’s directives and life’s natural rhythms. It is contradictory to biological integrity, and again, it does not make sense.

That rational approach is, of course, connected now with scientific ideas mentioned earlier: life surrounded by chaos, the struggle for survival, and so forth. I do not mean to put down the intellect. It is highly important, but it is, if you will forgive me, as natural as a cat’s whiskers. It is not some adjunct to nature, but a part it.

The magical approach takes is for granted, in the simplest terms, that the life of any individual will fulfill itself, will develop and mature, that the environment and the individual are uniquely suited and work together. This sounds very simple. In verbal terms, however, those are the beliefs of each cell. They are imprinted in each chromosome, in each atom. they provide a built-in faith that pervades each living creature, each snail, each hair on our head. Those ingrained beliefs are, of course, biologically pertinent, providing the impetus of all growth and development.

Each cell believes in a better tomorrow. I am, I admit, personifying our cell here, but the statement has a firm truth. Furthermore, each cell contains within itself a belief and an understanding of its own inevitability. It knows it lives beyond its death, in other words.

The idea of heaven, for all of its distortions, has operated as a theoretical framework, assuring the intellect of its survival. Science has believed to the contrary in the utter annihilation of the intellect after death, and since man and woman had by then placed all of his or her identification with the intellect, this was a shattering blow to it. It denied man and woman a necessary biological imperative.

All of these reasons lie beneath men’s and women’s mass problems, and apply in each life.  I feel I have never learned to use the power of reason, and instead trust every stray thought that comes into my head. So to doubt myself is protective.

I also feel that the questioning power of the intellect is not just one of its functions –which it is — but is primary purpose, which it is not. In our terms the intellect’s primary function is to make clear deductions and distinctions involving the personality’s relationship with the world. Our society, however, has indeed considered the rational approach to be the masculine-favored one — so I have an additional reason in that regard to be such a proponent of the rational approach. All of the beliefs connected with the sex were of course erroneous, but they are part and parcel of the “rational” framework itself.

It is certainly too simple to say what I am going to say, yet it is almost as if we would be better off turning the entire rational approach upside down, taking it for granted that all of its assumptions were false, for they are indeed more false than true. Again, the result of highly spontaneous processes of which it itself knows nothing, and the intuitions that are considered so undisciplined and unreasonable are based upon calculations far more spectacular than those of which the conscious mind can conceive. The intellect could not follow them, so the distinctions are not basic: They are the result of beliefs and habitual usage. Therefore, of course, I speak of them separately, as we think of them.

The magical approach takes it for granted that the human being is a united creature, fulfilling purposes in nature even as the animals do, whether or not those purposes are understood. The magical approach takes it for granted that each individual has a future, a fulfilling one, even though death may be tomorrow. The magical approach takes it for granted that the means for development are within each individual, and that fulfillment will happen naturally. Overall, that approach operates in our world. If it did not, there would be no world. If the worst was bound to happen, as the scientists certainly think, even evolution, in their terms, would have been impossible, of course.

You needed this background, for I want to build up the atmosphere in which this magical approach can be comprehended. Then specific material can be utilized.

In our dreams we are, of course, in the process of forming new ideas about the nature of the magical self and also in our way working that idea out through imagery. The dreams are above all an example of “work” being done at other levels of awareness.

All of these experiences are indications of the exquisite kind of reasoning that goes on at the levels of awareness that are usually considered unreasonable. That kind of material enriches the intellect and reassures it.

Certain portions of the personality or psyche must very shrewdly and carefully construct dreams in advance, so that when the dreams are played back they render just the right message to the parts of the psyche that need it. I’m not being contradictory here when I write that the dream is a spontaneous production, also.
Continue reading All Other Species Preserve Nature, While Man and Woman Has a Propensity for Destroying It

Only Human Beings, With Their Ideas of ‘Progress” and “Development Change.

Over very long spans of time the earth and all of its creatures stay the same, relatively speaking. Human beings haven’t changed, really, our more complicated mental processes only make it seem that we have. Coupled with this is the idea that magic, as we call it, reflects a basic part of our natural mental equipment and abilities, but that our present course of action, our focusing upon the material and the intellectual — the ‘reasonable” portions of quite ‘unreasonable’ or unreal. Actually, our need for magic is a very real, vital, and integral portion of our psyches.

The conscious idea of  magic, then, is a mask, or contrived version, of the psyche’s innate clairvoyant, telepathic, and precognitive abilities. We permit distorted versions of those attributes to surface as magic, as entertainment — which thus relieves us of the need to take them seriously. That’s the course our species has chosen during much of our recorded history, so far, and for many reasons.

I think that it’s frustrating for us that we cannot perceive the fascinating facets of any event. We still do not feel the unsurpassable force that thoughts have. We do not understand that they do form events, that to change events we must first change thoughts. We get what we concentrate upon.

The Intellect and The Magical Approach

It is not that we overuse the intellect as a culture, but that we rely upon it to the exclusion of all other faculties in our approach to life.

The intellect is brilliant, but on its own, it is indeed in its way isolated both in time and in space in a way that other portions of the personality are not. When it is overly stressed, with all of the usual frameworks or rationales that go along with it, it can indeed become frightened, paranoid, because it cannot really perceive events until they have already occurred. It does not know what will happen tomorrow, and since it is overly stressed, its paranoid tendencies can only fear the worst.

Now those tendencies are not natural to the intellect, but only appear when it is forced to operate in such an isolated fashion — isolated not only in time and space, but psychologically isolated from other portions of the personality that are meant to bring it additional information that it does not possess, and a kind of magical support.

The so-called rational approach to life, as it is practiced, is a highly pessimistic one carrying along with it its own methods and “solutions” to problems, its own means of achieving ends and satisfying desires. Many people are so steeped in that approach to life that they become psychologically blind to any other kind of orientation. Such is obviously not the case for me or I would not be having this discussion, or any other such activity.

The rational approach of course suits certain kinds of people better than others, even while it still carries its disadvantages. We have been living in an industrialized scientific society, so that the benefits and the great disadvantages of the rational approach appear everywhere in the social and political world. Artists of any kind find such an approach the least friendly, for it directly contradicts the vast thrust or man’s and woman’s creativity in several important areas. I, however, have evidence that hardened reality is quite different. In the past I have felt at some disadvantage myself, feeling ,my work to be theoretically fascinating, creatively valid, but not necessarily containing any statement about any kind of “scientifically valid” hardened reality.

I did not think I was dealing with fiction. On the other hand, I was not willing to call is fact, either. I am, in fact, dealing with a larger version of fact from which the world of fact emerges.

There have been numerous fascinating bits of evidence in our own lives, apart from these blog discussions, though certainly to some extent stimulated by the knowledge we gain in the discussions. They remain isolated bits, odds and ends, in which case they begin to present us with a larger factual representation of reality.

All of this material applies to our lives in general and to my physical condition, because we must be clear in our minds as to our own status in that regard, and much of this material will clear the air and dissolve lingering doubts; doubts that cause us to hold on to the rational approach in a misguided effort to maintain what we think of as a balanced viewpoint and open mind. It seems, because of the definitions we have been taught, that there is only one narrow kind of rationality, and that if we forsake the boundary of that narrow definition, then we become irrational, fanatic, mad, or whatever.

The thin, cold “rationality” that is recognized as such is instead a fake veneer covering a far deeper spontaneous rationality, and it is the existence of that magical rationality that provides the basis for the intellect to begin with. The rationality that we accept is then but one small clue as to the spontaneous inner rationality that is a part of each natural person.

For example, in one dream when asleep, when we are seemingly not rational, when our intellect is seemingly not operating, we perceive information about our physical environment. Old neighborhoods, animals and industry in every place. Symbolically we see situations in our own fashion, but know. We still have a love of certain areas. We are in a certain correspondence with it. In a fashion, we keep our eye out for information regarding it.

We are somewhat idealizing the past, present and future, however, so we do not simply get the information “straight on,” but we receive it in such a fashion that it makes its own psychological points also, and is furthermore wound into other action not only within the dream, but in a series of dreams.

Any dream makes it’s point, in fact, whether or not we remembered it. Some people remember because they want to bring into their conscious range instances of their own greater knowing. The portion of us that form the dreams knows. All of this involves a psychological motion of natural, magical import. It shows us that the rules of the rational world are filled with holes. It shows us that the rational world’s views do not represent the bulwarks of safety, but are instead barriers to the full use of the intellect, and of the intuitions.

Free flow of information at other levels.

Now when we understand that intellectually, then the intellect can take it for granted that its own information is not all the information we possess. It can realize that its own knowledge represents the tip of the iceberg. As we apply that realization to our life we begin to realize furthermore that in practical terms we are indeed supported by a greater body of knowledge that we consciously realize, and by the magical, spontaneous fountain of action that forms our existence. The intellect can then realize that it does not have to go it all alone. Everything does not have to be reasoned out, even to be understood.

This information is factual. I am not forced at times into symbolic statements, but when I am I always say so, and even those statements are my best representations of facts too large for our definitions. The intellect, then, can and does form strong paranoid tendencies when it is put in the position of believing that it must solve all personal problems alone — or nearly — and certainly when it is presented with any picture of worldwide predicaments.

The rational approach, built up around this framework, insists that the best way to solve a problem is to concentrate upon it, to project its effects into the future, to ruminate upon its consequences, “to stare at the bare facts head on.”

This brings about an atmosphere in which the problem is compounded. The intellect on its own — so it seems — must deal not only with the problem today, but with its effects in the projected disastrous tomorrows. This well-intentioned concentration, this determination to solve the problem, this rational approach, then causes an even deeper sense of inadequacy. The concentration upon the problem brings about a kind of mechanical repetition, a repeated type of hypnotic focus.

The intellect is a great organizer — along certain lines, now — so if this concentration is continued it begins to organize its perceptions and experience along the same lines. It is a kind of misguided attempt to find order by finding data that agree with itself. It collects evidence, then, to prove its point, because the rational mind, as we understand it, must  have an acceptable reason for everything.

In the meantime, of course, quite valid rockbed evidence that does not fit into the picture gradually becomes discarded, ignored, thrown away. It is there but it is not used. It disappears as evidence, becomes inactive. That method of problem-solving, need I say, is a poor one, and if anything it causes far more problems than it ever solves.

In terms of a physical condition, some people often thinks that he or she is “faced with the evidence” that his or her condition is not improving, that it is growing worse, that all the evidence says such conditions do deteriorate rather than improve. He or she sometimes thinks he or she is being rational with such thoughts.

What happens, of course, is the process I have just outlined. Other quite real, quite physical evidence — always, now, apparent in his or her body at any given time — is ignored as nonessential, too trivial to bother with, or take seriously, because it does not fit into the so-called rational picture that has been developed.

The process is exactly as given in the paragraph above, so I want that understood. Any improvement, unless stated, is almost overlooked, not considered as much hard evidence, while any difficulties definitely are considered hard evidence because they fit into the overall data-collecting intellect, as stated above. They are significant, while the improvements do not seem to be nearly as much so.

When we are corresponding with the environment, we change our focus point. We change what we consider significant. This blog brings us to the beginning of a discussion of the magical approach to life, to the solving of problems. I hope to stress what to do, rather than what not to do, although at times I must make the distinction clear.

If you understand this blog thoroughly, and if you have the intent to really change your orientation, then the atmosphere will automatically  be created in which desired changes occur.

 

 

 

 

True Creativity Comes From Enjoying The Moments

True creativity comes from enjoying the moments, which then fulfill themselves, and a part of the creative process is indeed the art of relaxation, the letting go, for that triggers magical activity.

I want it understood that we are indeed dealing with two entirely different approaches to reality and to solving problems — methods we will here call the rational method and the magical one. The rational approach works quite well in certain situations, such as mass production of goods, or in certain kinds of scientific measurements — but all in all the rational method, as it is understood and used, does not work as an overall approach to life, or in the solving of problems that involve subjective rather objective measurements or calculations.

Those methods work least of all for any art. It is a trite statement, perhaps, but the ruler’s measurements have absolutely nothing to do with the measurements made by the heart, and they can never be used to express the incalculable measurements that are made automatically by the smallest cell.

The rational mind alone, as it is presently used ( because it is a rather artificial construct, a function given prominence), can never understand the dream measurements that we undertake.

Keeping psychic activity in line, in our society this seems the only rational thing to do. Ironically, our problems have not been solved, then largely of course because we have taken the wrong approach, and that is because we are not convinced as yet. We still hold to those trained beliefs.

The old beliefs, of course, and the rational approach, are everywhere reinforced, and so it does indeed have a great weight. The magical approach has far greater weight, if we use it and allow ourselves to operate in that fashion, for it has the weight of our basic natural orientation. The rational approach is the superimposed one. I think my blog readers are ready to understand that.

Inner reality, contain the creative source from which we form all events, and  that by the proper focusing of attention we can draw from that vast subjective medium everything we need for a constructive, positive life in physical reality.

Any event, therefore, has an invisible thickness, a multidimensional basis. Our skies are filled with breezes, currents, clouds, sunlight, dust particles and so forth. The sky vaults above the entire planet. The invisible [vault of] inner reality contains endless patterns that change as, say, clouds do — that mix and merge to form our psychological climate. Thoughts have what we will for now term electromagnetic properties. In those terms our thoughts mix and match with others in inner reality, creating mass patterns that form the overall psychological basis behind world events. Again, however, inner reality is not neutral, but automatically inclined toward what we will here term good or constructive developments. It is a growth medium. Constructive or ‘positive’ feelings or thoughts are more easily materialized than ‘negative’ ones because they are in keeping with inner reality’s characteristics.

Instant Magic Represents Part of Our Natural Heritage

Magic as we call it represents (reflects) a basis part of our natural heritage. We permit distorted versions of the psyche’s attributes — clairvoyant, telepathic, and precognitive abilities — which surface as magic.

We are practicing some precise psychological art, one that is ancient and poorly understood in our culture; or as of we are learning a psychological science that helps us map the contours of consciousness itself. My blog readers and I are finally examining the trance view of reality and comparing it to the official views of science and religion.

The natural person is indeed the magical person, and my blog readers and I have both to some extent had very recent examples of such activity. We were, and are, trying to teach ourselves something. This is somewhat lengthy to unravel, but our behavior and experience, or course, is the result of our beliefs. Framed -mind-2 has been a rather fascinating but mainly hypothetical framework, in that neither of us have really been able to put it to any perceivable use in our terms. This is not to say it has not been operating. We have not had the kind of feedback, however that we want.

When we were both intensely involved in our projects, just finished, we let much of our inner experience slide, relatively speaking. The two of us oper